JP2022170932A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can execute a performance giving excellent amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine can execute a special performance in executing a variation performance; when an initial variation performance in a second mode is started when an information display is displayed, in the initial variation performance, makes the information display difficult or impossible to be seen and then does not make the information display easy to be seen; and when the special performance is executed when the information display is displayed, makes the information display difficult or impossible to be seen and then makes the information display, easy to be seen.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 188

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art In a game machine, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-200002 describes that an effect is performed using an effect image.

JP 2016-097096 A

However, in the gaming machine as described in the above patent document, there is room for further improvement in presentation in terms of enhancing interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

The present invention, which achieves the above object, is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes main control means (for example, main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (for example, production control board 130) for controlling production. , the main control means is capable of controlling a determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on determination information based on establishment of a starting condition, a first mode, and a second mode different from the first mode. Mode control means, storage means for storing determination information based on the determination as pending storage, and variation means for varying and then stopping the special symbol according to the result of the determination, and the effect control means , an information display suggesting the contents of the determination information can be displayed on the display means, and along with the variation and stop of the special symbol, a variation effect can be executed in which the effect symbol is varied and then stopped, and the variable effect is executed, and when the first variable performance in the second mode is started while the information display is being displayed, the information display is performed in the first variable performance. is made invisible or invisible and then easy to see, and if the special effect is executed while the information display is displayed, the information display is made invisible or invisible and then easy to see. characterized by

It should be noted that the above-mentioned reference numerals in this column are given for illustrative purposes when describing the present invention, and the present invention is not limited by these reference numerals.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

1 is a front view showing an example of a game machine; FIG. It is a perspective view showing an example of the back side of the gaming machine. It is a functional block diagram of the gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining details of a base indicator; 3 is a functional block diagram of an image control board; FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of a big-hit determination table and a hit determination table. It is the figure which showed an example of the design determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a table scenario. FIG. 11 is another diagram for explaining an example of a table scenario; It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table in each period. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining another specific example of a variation pattern determination table for each period; It is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for the time saving gaming state. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining specific examples of a stationary notification image and a remaining number of times image; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining display periods of a stationary notification image and a remaining number of times image; It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of each screen at the time of the start of a 2nd time saving game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of each screen in a time saving game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a display period of an image at the start; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the display period of the image at the start; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining details of update timing of the numbers in the remaining count image; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of each screen when a power failure occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining another specific example of each screen when power failure occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a configuration for notifying an activated period; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a display period of a left-handed image; It is a figure for demonstrating the structure which alert|reports that it can shift to a 2nd time saving game state. It is the figure which showed an example of the prior determination table. 4 is a flowchart of main processing by a main CPU; 7 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the main CPU; 4 is a flowchart of input control processing by a main CPU; 4 is a flow chart of a first starting port detection switch input process by a main CPU; 7 is a flowchart of pre-determination processing by the main CPU; It is a flowchart of special figure special electric control processing by main CPU. It is a flowchart of special symbol storage determination processing by the main CPU. It is a flowchart of special symbol stop time processing by the main CPU. 7 is a flowchart of migration determination processing by the main CPU; It is a flow chart of the general figure general electric processing by main CPU. 4 is a flowchart of main processing by a sub CPU; 4 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by a sub CPU; 4 is a flowchart of command analysis processing 1 by a sub CPU; 10 is a flowchart of command analysis processing 2 by a sub CPU; It is a flow chart of effect input control processing by the sub CPU. 4 is a flowchart of main processing by a host CPU; 4 is a flowchart of interrupt processing by a host CPU; It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of the end production|presentation in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure for explaining a specific example of the execution timing of the end effect in the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the big-hit determination table and hit determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the design determination table in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving gaming states in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the variation pattern determination table for time saving gaming states in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the advance determination table in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of pre-determination processing by a main CPU in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart of special symbol stop time processing by the main CPU in the third embodiment. 14 is a flowchart of migration determination processing and the like by the main CPU in the third embodiment; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of each screen in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a limited period in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation time of the normal symbol display device in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the variation time of the regular pattern display device in the third embodiment; It is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which the time-saving gaming state in the third embodiment performs an overlapping operation. It is a diagram for explaining a specific example when the time saving gaming state in the third embodiment ends. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of each image displayed in the time saving game state in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining specific examples of a right-handed start image and a left-handed start image in the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a result image in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of counting periods in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the 1st information and 2nd information in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a display period of an image at the start in a modified example; 1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine. It is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. 4 is a diagram showing an example of various storage areas of a main RAM; FIG. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the specific area|region detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a big-hit determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special design determination table. It is a diagram showing a special figure variation pattern determination process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for normal. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for normal working hours. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for normal working hours. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for normal working hours. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for normal working hours. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation|variation pattern determination table for special time saving. It is a figure which shows an example of a prior determination table. It is a diagram showing a special symbol variation process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special design stop processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a control data determination table. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing a small winning game process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game end process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state setting table. It is a diagram showing a game state to be referred to at the end of the big winning game not via the small winning game. It is a diagram showing a game state referred to at the end of the big winning game via the small winning game. It is a mode flow showing the transition of the game mode. It is a figure which shows the normal figure normal electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the various determination tables used by normal figure normal electric control processing. It is a figure which shows the external information data creation process in a main control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the various signals output as game information. It is a figure which shows the performance display data setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the display information of the information display device in each game area. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various driving sources after setting change; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after confirmation of settings; 4 is an operation comparison table at various operation timings of various drive sources; It is a figure which shows the initialization process in the main-control board of a 1st modification. It is a figure which shows the RWM clear process in the main control board of a 1st modification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear; 4 is an operation comparison table at various operation timings of various drive sources; It is a figure which shows the initialization process in the main-control board of a 2nd modification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear; It is a figure which shows the initialization process in the main-control board of a 3rd modification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear; It is a figure which shows the initialization process in the main-control board of a 4th modification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear; It is a timing chart in the case of normal time-saving gaming state occurs. It is a timing chart when the normal time-saving gaming state ends. It is a timing chart from before the start of the special time-saving gaming state to after the end. It is a figure which shows the main process of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation determination process of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change scenario determination table; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the light emission production|presentation determination process at the time of winning of a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the light emission effect pattern determination table at the time of winning. It is a flow chart which shows the look-ahead continuous production determination processing of the production control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table; It is a figure which shows an example of a look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation production|presentation pattern determination table for time-saving final fluctuation|variation. It is a flow chart which shows special time saving system production processing of a production control part. It is a diagram showing an effect example when the look-ahead effect is executed during the normal game state. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in case variable production|presentation is performed after transfering to rush battle mode. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case it becomes a big hit by the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the last time of rush battle mode. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in case a normal time saving game state is complete|finished. It is a diagram showing a production example 1 in the case of a small hit with the second special symbol remaining reserved at the time of transition to the normal game state. It is a diagram showing an example 2 of effect in the case of a small hit with the second special symbol remaining reserved at the time of transition to the normal game state. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in case a small hit game is performed by a super wild dance mode. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation when a time saving game state is interrupted as a result of the small hit game in boisterous dance mode. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in case special time reduction system production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in the case of becoming a customer waiting state when it transfers to a special time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in case a fluctuation|variation production|presentation is performed after transfer to a special time-saving game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the countdown mode is executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect when the countdown mode is executed; It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in case a fluctuation|variation production|presentation is performed after transfer to a special time-saving game state. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in case a special time saving game state is complete|finished. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state setting table in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process of the main control board in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows the staged display production|presentation by a pending|holding image. It is a figure which shows the staged display production|presentation by a pending|holding image. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows the staged display production|presentation by a pending|holding image. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows the staged display production|presentation by a pending|holding image. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows the staged display production|presentation by a pending|holding image. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows the staged display production|presentation by a pending|holding image. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows the staged display production|presentation by a pending|holding image. It is explanatory drawing of each production|presentation in example 9 of variation|variation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of each effect in example 10 of variable effect; It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows the staged display production|presentation by a pending|holding image. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram of each effect in variation effect example 14; It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the production|presentation which a production|presentation control part performs.

<First Embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION The present invention will now be described in detail with reference to embodiments shown in the drawings.
<Composition of gaming machines>
1 is a front view showing an example of a gaming machine according to the present embodiment, FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an example of the back side of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 3 is the present embodiment. It is a block diagram of a game machine.

As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 has an outer frame 2 and an inner frame 3. As shown in FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to the island structure of the game hall, and the inner frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A glass frame 4 is attached to the inner frame 3 . Further, the inner frame 3 is mounted with a game board 10 having a board surface on which game balls are launched.

As shown in FIG. 1, a window 4a is formed in the glass frame 4, and a transparent plate 4b is attached to the window 4a. A game area 10a in which game balls can move (flow down) is formed between the board surface of the game board 10 and the transparent plate 4b in front thereof. The transparent plate 4 b is, for example, a glass plate, and is detachably fixed to the glass frame 4 .

The glass frame 4 is connected to the outer frame 2 via the hinge mechanism 5 at one end in the left-right direction (for example, the left side facing the game machine), and the other end in the left-right direction (for example, right side facing the game machine) can be rotated in a direction to release from the outer frame 2. Specifically, the glass frame 4 covers the game board 10 together with the glass plate 4b, and rotates like a door with the hinge mechanism 5 as a fulcrum, thereby opening the inner portion of the outer frame 2 including the game board 10. can.

A lock mechanism for fixing the other end side of the glass frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is provided on the other end side of the glass frame 4 (for example, the right side when facing the game machine). Fixation by the locking mechanism can be released with a dedicated key. Further, the glass frame 4 is provided with a door open switch 136 (see FIG. 3) for detecting whether the glass frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 or not.

A plate unit 7 having a storage plate 6 (an upper plate 6a and a lower plate 6b) for storing game balls is provided in the lower portion of the glass frame 4 (the lower portion of the window 4a). In addition, the plate unit 7 includes a performance button 8 that can be pressed by the player, a cross key 40 that allows the player to perform various selection operations, and a game ball stored in the lower plate 6b to the outside of the game machine. A discharge button 9 for discharging is provided.

The effect button 8 is provided in the central portion of the plate unit 7 as shown in FIG. The effect button 8 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to advance and retreat over a normal operating position, a pressed position retracted downward from the normal operating position, and a projecting operating position projecting upward from the normal operating position. be. In the specific example of FIG. 1, the effect button 8 in the normal operation position is shown.

The effect button 8 is configured to be able to be pressed from any position including the normal operation position and the projecting operation position to the pressed position. In this specification, the detailed structure of the effect button 8 is disclosed, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-116168, so the description thereof is omitted.

Although the details will be described later, an operation effective period is provided during which the operation of the effect button 8 can be accepted (the operation of the effect button 8 is valid). The effect button 8 is provided with a effect button detection switch 8a (see FIG. 4), and when the effect button detection switch 8a detects a player's operation, a predetermined effect is executed.

The cross key 40 includes an up button, a down button, a left button and a right button. The cross key 40 is also provided with cross key detection switches (40a, 40b, 40c, 40d). The cross key detection switches (40a, 40b, 40c, 40d) include an upper button detection switch 40a for detecting operation of the upper button of the cross key 40, a lower button detection switch 40b for detecting operation of the lower button, and an operation of the left button. and a right button detection switch 40d (see FIG. 3) for detecting the operation of the right button.

As shown in FIG. 1 , an operating handle 11 is provided on the lower right side of the glass frame 4 . The operating handle 11 is provided with a touch sensor 11a (see FIG. 4). When the touch sensor 11 a detects that the player has touched the operating handle 11 , a touch signal is transmitted to the firing control board 160 .

The firing control board 160, upon receiving a touch signal from the touch sensor 11a, permits energization of the firing solenoid 12a. When the rotation angle of the operating handle 11 changes, the gear directly connected to the operating handle 11 rotates, and the knob of the firing volume 11b (see FIG. 3) connected to the gear rotates.

During the period in which the touch signal is received, a voltage corresponding to the detected angle of the shooting volume 11b is applied to the shooting solenoid 12a (see FIG. 3) provided in the game ball shooting mechanism. When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 12a, the firing solenoid 12a operates according to the applied voltage, and the game ball moves toward the game area 10a of the game board 10 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the operation handle 11. fired.

As shown in FIG. 1, an outer rail R1 and an inner rail R2 are provided around the game board 10 (game area 10a). The outer rail R1 and the inner rail R2 described above guide the game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the upper part of the game area 10a. The game ball guided to the upper part of the game area 10a falls within the game area 10a. A game area 10a is provided with a plurality of nails and windmills, and game balls fall unpredictably.

As shown in FIG. 1, a center member 12 is arranged substantially in the center of the game board 10 . The center member 12 is provided with an image display device 31 such as a liquid crystal display device and an effect movable body 32 . The effect movable body 32 can move to a retracted position and an appearing position, and normally stops at the retracted position. The specific example of FIG. 1 shows a case where the effect movable body 32 stops at the retracted position. The effect movable body 32 may overlap the image displayed by the image display device 31 when viewed from the front. Moreover, the effect|presentation movable body 32 is comprised including a light-emitting body. The effect movable body 32 emits light by the luminous body.

As shown in FIG. 1 , a first starting hole 13 into which a game ball can enter is provided in the center lower game area 10 a of the center member 12 . A second starting port 14 is provided below the first starting port 13 . When the game ball wins (enters) the above first starting port 13 or second starting port 14, the game is started.

The second starting port 14 is provided with an opening/closing door 14b. The opening/closing door 14b is movably controlled between a first mode in which the opening/closing door 14b is maintained in a closed state and a second mode in which the opening/closing door 14b is in an open state. According to the second starting port 14 described above, in the first mode, it is difficult for the game ball to win (including cases where it is substantially impossible), and in the second mode, it is easy for the game ball to win (the first starting port 13 is easier to win).

It should be noted that the second starting port 14 (opening/closing door 14b) of the present embodiment is configured such that a game ball cannot enter during the period when it is controlled in the first mode. However, if the game ball is easier to enter during the period during which the second starting port 14 is controlled in the first mode than in the period during which the second starting port 14 is controlled in the second mode, in the period during which the game ball is controlled in the first mode It is good also as a structure which can enter a game ball to the 2nd start opening 14. FIG.

A game ball that has won the first starting hole 13 is detected by the first starting hole detection switch 13a (see FIG. 3). Also, the game ball that has entered the second starting hole 14 is detected by the second starting hole detection switch 14a (see FIG. 3). When game balls are detected by the first start hole detection switch 13a, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls (prize balls) are paid out. Similarly, when game balls are detected by the second start hole detection switch 14a, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls (prize balls) are paid out.

In this embodiment, when game balls enter the first start port 13 and the second start port 14, three game balls are paid out in common, but the number of payouts is made different for each start port. may For example, the number of payouts for the first starting port 13 may be three, and the number of payouts for the second starting port 14 may be one.

When the first start hole detection switch 13a or the second start hole detection switch 14a detects a game ball, a lottery (hereinafter referred to as "big win lottery") for obtaining the right to execute a big win game, which will be described later, is executed. The jackpot game of this embodiment includes a long winning game and a short winning game. The long winning game consists of 10 rounds, and in each round, the big winning opening is opened for a time (for example, 30 seconds) during which the game ball can win. However, each round ends when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole. In addition, the short winning game is composed of two rounds, and in each round, the big winning opening is opened for the time during which the game ball can win. However, each round ends when a predetermined number of game balls enter the big winning opening. A predetermined time interval is provided between each round. In the small winning game, the big winning opening is opened over the time (for example, 1.8 seconds) during which the game ball can win.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game area 10a on the right side of the center member 12 is provided with a gate 15 through which game balls can pass. The gate 15 is provided with a gate detection switch 15a (see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of a game ball. When the gate detection switch 15a detects the passage of a game ball, a normal symbol lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

A game area 10a on the right side of the center member 12 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "right area") is provided with a first big winning hole 16 and a second big winning hole 17 into which game balls can enter. A game ball can enter the above right region when the operation handle 11 is rotated by a greater angle than a predetermined angle (so-called "right hitting"). On the other hand, when the operation handle 11 is rotated smaller than the angle (so-called "left hitting"), the game ball does not enter the right area. That is, in the first big winning hole 16 and the second big winning hole 17 provided in the right side area, the game ball can win when the game is played with the right hand, and the game ball can be won when the game is played with the left hand. Configured so as not to win prizes.

In this embodiment, when a game is played with a left hand, a game ball can enter the first starting hole 13, but it is difficult (including a case where it is substantially impossible) to enter a game ball into the second starting hole 14. configuration is adopted. In addition, when the game is played with the right hand, the game ball can enter the second starting hole 14, but the first starting hole 13 adopts a configuration in which it is difficult for the game ball to win (including cases where it is substantially impossible). be done.

The first big prize winning port 16 is normally kept closed by the opening/closing door 16b, and winning of game balls is impossible. On the other hand, in the jackpot game, the opening/closing door 16b is opened, and the opening/closing door 16b functions as a tray for guiding the game ball into the first big winning hole 16, so that the game ball can win the first big winning hole 16.例文帳に追加. A first big winning hole detection switch 16a is provided in the first big winning hole 16, and when the first big winning hole detection switch 16a detects a game ball, a preset number (for example, 15) of prize balls are paid out. be done.

The second big winning opening 17 is normally kept closed by the movable piece 17b, and the winning of game balls is impossible. On the other hand, in the jackpot game, the movable piece 17b operates to open the second big winning hole 17, and the movable piece 17b functions as a guide path for guiding the game ball into the second big winning hole 17, and the game ball is released. A ball can be entered into the second big winning hole 17.例文帳に追加A second big winning hole detection switch 17a is provided in the second big winning hole 17, and when the second big winning hole detection switch 17a detects the entry of a game ball, a preset number (for example, 15) of prizes A ball is paid out.

As shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of general prize winning openings 18 are provided in the game area 10a. When a game ball wins in each of the above general winning holes 18, predetermined prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out. Also, at the bottom of the game area 10a, the ball did not enter any of the general winning opening 18, the first starting opening 13, the second starting opening 14, the first big winning opening 16 and the second big winning opening 17. An out port 19 is provided for discharging game balls.

The image display device 31 displays various images under the control of an effect control board 120 (image control board 150), which will be described later. For example, a demonstration moving image is displayed on the image display device 31 during a non-game period in which no game is played. In addition, the image display device 31 variably displays three performance symbols GA (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) for notifying the lottery result of the big win during the game period during which the game is executed. The effect symbol GA is scroll-displayed (variable display) from the upper side to the lower side of the image display device 31, then displayed (temporarily stopped) so as to oscillate within the image display device 31, and is stopped by a symbol confirmation command. Is displayed.

In this embodiment, a combination of specific performance symbols GA (for example, 777, etc.) is stop-displayed to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. In addition, by stop-displaying a combination (for example, 289, etc.) other than the specific effect symbol 38, it is informed that the result of the big win lottery is a loss.

In addition, the image display device 31 displays the fourth pattern separately from the effect pattern GA. The fourth symbol is an image showing the fluctuation state of the performance symbol GA used for notification of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. However, a display lamp may be separately provided to indicate the changing state of the effect symbol GA, and the fourth symbol may not be displayed on the image display device 31 .

As shown in FIG. 1, a pair of left and right performance lamps 33 are provided above the glass frame 4 . Each of the performance lamps 33 has a plurality of lights, and the lighting direction and emission color of the lights are changed according to each performance.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an audio output device 34 (see FIG. 4) composed of a speaker (not shown). The audio output device 34 outputs various sounds including BGM (background music) and SE (sound effects). For example, the audio output device 34 outputs BGM according to the image displayed on the image display device 31 .

As shown in FIG. 1, a main display 28 is provided below the left side of the game area 10a. The main display 28 described above is controlled by a main control board 110 which will be described later. The main display device 28 includes a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol reservation display device 23, a second special symbol reservation display device 24, and a normal symbol display device. A pending indicator 25 and a round number indicator 26 are included.

The first special symbol display device 20 notifies the result of the jackpot lottery when the game ball enters the first starting port 13, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs. Specifically, a plurality of special symbols corresponding to the result of the big win lottery are provided, and by displaying the special symbols (lighting mode) corresponding to the result of the big win lottery on the first special symbol display device 20, the result of the lottery is the game. person is notified. The above special symbols are stop-displayed after being variably displayed (blinking) for a predetermined time.

The second special symbol display device 21 is for notifying the result of the jackpot lottery when the game ball enters the second starting port 14, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs (the first special symbol display device 21). Specifically, a plurality of special symbols corresponding to the result of the big win lottery are provided, and by displaying the special symbols (lighting mode) corresponding to the result of the big win lottery on the second special symbol display device 21, the result of the lottery is the game. person is notified. As with the special symbols of the first special symbol display device 20, the special symbols of the second special symbol display device 21 are stopped and displayed after being variably displayed (blinking) for a predetermined period of time.

The normal symbol display device 22 notifies the lottery result of the normal symbol executed when the game ball passes through the gate 15.例文帳に追加Although it will be described later in detail, when winning a normal symbol lottery (hereinafter "normal lottery"), the normal symbol display device 22 lights up, and then the second start port 14 is controlled in the second mode for a predetermined time. be. The above-described normal symbol display device 22 is displayed (blinks) for a predetermined period of time when the game ball passes through the gate 15, and then stopped and displayed.

When a game ball enters the first start port 13 or the second start port 14 during the variable display of special symbols or during the big win game, and the big win lottery cannot be performed immediately, the right of the big win lottery is reserved under certain conditions. be done. For example, the right of a jackpot lottery that is reserved when a game ball enters the first start port 13 is reserved as a first reserve, and the right of a jackpot lottery that is reserved when a game ball enters the second start port 14. is reserved as a second reservation.

The first special symbol reservation display 23 displays the current value of the number of first reservations. The first reservation in this embodiment is reserved with an upper limit of four. In addition, the second special symbol reservation display 24 displays the current value of the number of second reservations. The 2nd reservation of this embodiment is reserved with four as the upper limit, as in the case of the 1st reservation. Also, in this embodiment, when both the first hold and the second hold are stored, the second hold is preferentially consumed. That is, the second special symbol display device 21 is preferentially variably displayed over the first special symbol display device 20 .

If normal pattern lottery cannot be performed immediately during the variable display of the normal pattern or during the period when the second start port 14 (opening door 14b) is in the second mode (open), the right of the normal pattern lottery is reserved. The upper limit reserved number of the normal pattern lottery is set to 4, and the reserved number of the normal pattern lottery is displayed on the normal pattern reservation display 25.例文帳に追加In addition, the normal figure lottery is also executed in the big hit game (non-time-saving game state). The number-of-rounds indicator 26 is for notifying the number of rounds of a round game performed during a big hit (special game).

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board 110, an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power supply board 170 and a game information output terminal board 27 are provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. The power board 170 is provided with a power plug 171 and a power switch (not shown) for supplying power to the gaming machine.

<Configuration of game control device>
FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a game control device that controls the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine 1 includes a lamp control board 140, an image control board 150 and a launch control board 160 in addition to the above-described main control board 110, effect control board 120, payout control board 130 and power supply board 170. do.

The main control board 110 controls the basic operations of the game. As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 110 includes at least a one-chip microcomputer composed of a main CPU 111, a main ROM 112, and a main RAM 113, and an input port and an output port (not shown) for main control.

The main CPU 111 reads a program stored in the main ROM 112 based on an input signal from each detection switch (the first starting port detection switch 13a, etc.) and performs arithmetic processing. Various commands are transmitted from the output port to other boards according to the results of the above arithmetic processing. The main CPU 111 also controls each display including the main display 28 described above. The main RAM 113 functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 111 .

As shown in FIG. 3, on the input side of the main control board 110, there are a first start hole detection switch 13a, a second start hole detection switch 14a, a gate detection switch 15a, a first big prize hole detection switch 16a, and a second big prize. The mouth detection switch 17a, the general prize winning mouth detection switch 18a and the out ball detection switch 19a are connected, and game ball detection signals are input from the above detection switches.

For example, a game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 16 is detected by the first big winning hole detection switch 16a. Also, the game ball detected by the first big winning hole detection switch 16a is then detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. Similarly, the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 17 is detected by the second big winning hole detection switch 17a, and then detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. A game ball that has entered the general winning hole 18 is detected by a general winning hole detection switch 18a, and then detected by an out ball detection switch 19a. In the above configuration, the game ball hit into the game area 10a is finally detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. Hereinafter, the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 19a may be referred to as "out number".

As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 110 receives a signal from the clear switch 30a. Specifically, the gaming machine 1 is provided with a clear button 30 (not shown). The clear switch 30a outputs an ON signal to the main control board 110 while the clear button 30 is operated (pressed). Also, the clear switch 30a outputs an OFF signal to the main control board 110 while the clear button 30 is not operated.

The above clear button 30 cannot be operated when the inner frame 3 is closed. That is, the clear button 30 is provided at a position where the player cannot operate it. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 operates the clear button 30 . When the gaming machine 1 is powered on with the clear button 30 being operated, various information in the main RAM 113 is initialized.

The main control board 110 includes a starting opening opening/closing solenoid that opens and closes the opening/closing door 14b of the second starting opening 14, a first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid that opens and closes the opening/closing door 16b of the first big winning opening 16, and a second big winning opening/closing solenoid. A second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid for opening and closing the movable piece 17b of the winning opening 17 is connected.

The main control board 110 includes a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol reservation display 23, a second special symbol reservation display 24, and a normal symbol reservation. A display 25 and a round number display 26 are connected. The main control board 110 outputs to the game information output terminal board 27 an external information signal necessary for managing the game machine in a hall computer or the like of the game parlor.

As shown in FIG. 3, the right-handed lamp 28 is connected to the main control board 110 . The right-handed lamp 28 is turned on during a period when it is more advantageous to play with the right hand than with the left hand, and is turned off during the period when it is more advantageous to play with the left hand than with the right hand. For example, the right hitting lamp 28 lights up in the time saving game state, the big hit game and the small hit game. In the above configuration, when the right-handed lamp 28 lights up, the player plays right-handed. Therefore, it can be said that the right-handed lamp 28 is means for instructing the operation mode (left-handed, right-handed) of the operation handle 11 .

The main ROM 112 stores a program for game control, which will be described later, and data necessary for various games. Also, the main RAM 113 has a plurality of storage areas. For example, the main RAM 113 has a normal symbol reserved number (G) storage area, a normal symbol reserved storage area, a first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, a second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area, and a determination storage area. , 1st special symbol storage area, 2nd special symbol storage area, high probability game number (X) storage area, round game number (R) storage area, release number (K) storage area, game state storage area, game state buffer , a stop pattern data storage area, an effect transmission data storage area, and the like are provided. The game state storage area includes a time saving game flag storage area, a high probability game flag storage area, a special figure special electric processing data storage area, and a general figure normal electric processing data storage area. Note that the storage areas described above are merely examples, and many other storage areas are provided.

The game information output terminal board 27 is a board for outputting an external information signal generated by the main control board 110 to a hall computer or the like of the game parlor. The game information output terminal board 27 is wire-connected to the main control board 110, and is provided with a connector for connection to a hall computer or the like of the game parlor. A magnetic sensor for detecting illegal magnetism is also connected to the main control board 110 .

As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 110 is provided with a base display 114 . The base display 114 of this embodiment displays a base value, which will be described later. The base display 114 includes four segment displays (see FIG. 4 described later) and is directly mounted on the main control board 110 .

The power board 170 converts the power supply voltage supplied from the power plug 171 into a predetermined voltage and supplies it to each control board. Also, the power board 170 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine, and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. Specifically, when the power failure detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 111 becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 111 becomes inoperative.

In this embodiment, the power supply substrate 170 is provided with a backup power supply composed of a capacitor. With the backup power supply described above, the data stored in the main RAM 113 is maintained even when the operation is stopped. Note that the backup power supply is not limited to a capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery. Also, a capacitor and a battery may be used in combination.

The production control board 120 controls each production. As shown in FIG. 3 , the effect control board 120 has a sub CPU 121 , a sub ROM 122 , a sub RAM 123 and an RTC (real time clock) 124 . The effect control board 120 described above is connected to the main control board 110 so as to be able to communicate in one direction.

The sub CPU 121 reads out the program stored in the sub ROM 122 based on the command transmitted from the main control board 110 or the input signal from the effect button detection switch 8a input via the lamp control board 140 and performs calculation. Execute the process. Further, the sub CPU 121 transmits corresponding data to the lamp control board 140 or the image control board 150 based on the arithmetic processing described above. The sub-RAM 123 functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the sub-CPU 121 .

The sub ROM 122 stores a program for effect control and data necessary for various games. For example, a variable performance pattern determination table for determining the performance pattern based on the variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 110, and a performance symbol pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the combination of the performance symbols GA to be stopped and displayed. ) are stored in the sub ROM 122 . The sub-ROM 122 also stores many other tables and programs (not shown).

Sub RAM 123 has a plurality of storage areas. Specifically, the sub RAM 123 includes a command reception buffer, a game state storage area, an effect mode storage area, an effect pattern storage area, an effect pattern storage area, a determination storage area (0th storage area), a first reservation storage area, A second reserved storage area or the like is provided.

RTC 124 outputs the current time. The RTC 124 of the present embodiment operates by the power supply during the period when power is supplied to the gaming machine from the outside. On the other hand, during a period in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine from the outside, the game machine operates with a backup power supply mounted on the power supply board 170 . The RTC 124 described above can clock the current date and time even during a period when power is not supplied to the gaming machine from the outside.

A date signal indicating the current date and a time signal indicating the current time are received from the RTC 124 by the sub CPU 121, and various processes are executed according to the current date and time. In addition, a battery may be provided in the performance control board 120, and the RTC 124 may be configured to operate with the battery.

The payout control board 130 executes game ball launch control and prize ball payout control. As shown in FIG. 3, the payout control board 130 includes a payout CPU 131, a payout ROM 132 and a payout RAM 133, and is connected to the main control board 110 so as to be bidirectionally communicable. Signals from a payout ball counting switch 135, a door opening switch 136, a plate full detection switch 51, and a ball clogging detection switch 52 are input to the payout control board .

The payout ball counting switch 135 is a switch for detecting whether game balls have been paid out. The plate full detection switch 51 is a switch for detecting that the game ball storage plate (lower plate) is full. Further, the ball clogging detection switch 52 is a switch for detecting clogging of the game balls in the path along which the game balls to be paid out move, for example.

The payout CPU 131 reads out the program stored in the payout ROM 132 based on the input signals from the various switches described above, performs arithmetic processing, and transmits data according to the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110. .

As shown in FIG. 3, the output side of the payout control board 130 is connected with a payout motor 134 of a prize ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from the game ball storage section to the player. The payout CPU 131 controls the payout motor 134 of the prize ball payout device based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 to pay out predetermined prize balls to the player. The payout RAM 133 functions as a work area for data during the arithmetic processing of the payout CPU 131 .

In this embodiment, whether or not a game ball lending device (card unit) (not shown) is connected to the payout control board 130 is monitored. If the game ball lending device is connected to the payout control board 130, the shooting control board 160 is permitted to shoot the game ball. On the other hand, if the game ball lending device is not connected to the payout control board 130, the shooting control board 160 is prohibited from shooting game balls.

The firing control board 160 permits firing when receiving the firing control data from the payout control board 130 . Then, the touch signal from the touch sensor 11a and the input signal from the shooting volume 11b are read, and the firing solenoid 12a and the ball feeding solenoid 12b are energized and controlled to shoot the game ball.

The firing solenoid 12a is composed of a rotary solenoid. A hitting member (not shown) is directly connected to the firing solenoid 12a, and the firing member rotates as the firing solenoid 12a rotates. One game ball is shot for each rotation of the shooting solenoid.

The rotational speed of the firing solenoid 12a is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 160. FIG. With the above configuration, the number of game balls launched in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, game balls are shot approximately every 0.6 seconds. The ball feed solenoid 12b is composed of a linear solenoid, and feeds the game balls on the upper tray 6a (see FIG. 1) one by one toward the hitting member directly connected to the firing solenoid 12a.

The lamp control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120 so as to be capable of two-way communication. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the input side of the lamp control board 140 is connected to the production button detection switch 8a and the cross key detection switches (40a, 40b, 40c, 40d). A detection signal from each detection switch described above is input to the effect control board 120 via the lamp control board 140 .

Also, the lamp control board 140 is connected to the effect movable bodies 32 and the effect lamps 33 provided on the game board 10 . The lamp control board 140, based on the data transmitted from the production control board 120, performs lighting control of the production lamp 33 and driving control of the motor for changing the irradiation direction of light. In addition, the driving source such as a solenoid or a motor for operating the effect movable body 32 is energized and controlled. In this embodiment, the effect button 8 is configured to protrude, so the effect movable body 32 includes the effect button 8 .

The image control board 150 is connected to the effect control board 120 so as to be capable of two-way communication, and the output side of the image control board 150 is connected to the image display device 31 and the audio output device 34 .

<Base display>
FIGS. 4(a) to 4(c) are diagrams for explaining the control of the base indicator 114 in this embodiment. Although the details will be described later, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shifts to each gaming state including the low probability non-time-saving gaming state. The base display 114 displays the base value B in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. The base value B of a specific section is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls paid out in the section by the number of outs (total number of game balls hit).

FIG. 4A is a diagram for explaining various counters (a prize ball counter for base calculation, an out counter for base calculation, and a total out counter) used for display control of the base indicator 114. FIG. Each counter described above is provided in the main RAM 113, for example.

The prize ball counter for base calculation counts the prize balls in a specific section. Specifically, when the game ball wins the general winning hole 18, the numerical value "10" is added to the prize ball counter for base calculation. Also, when the game ball wins the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17, the numerical value "15" is added to the base calculation winning ball counter. Similarly, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 13 or the second starting hole 14, the numerical value "3" is added to the prize ball counter for base calculation. Also, the base calculation out counter counts the number of outs in a specific section. Specifically, each time a game ball is detected by the out-ball detection switch 19a, the numerical value "1" is added to the base calculation out counter.

The main CPU 111 calculates the base value B of the specific section by multiplying the result of dividing the value of the base calculation prize ball counter by the value of the base calculation out counter by the value “100”. However, the out counter for base calculation and the prize ball counter for base calculation are not added except in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. In the above configuration, the base value B in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is calculated in the specific section. In this embodiment, the period during which the base calculation out counter and the base calculation prize ball counter are added may be referred to as the "counting period", and the period other than the counting period may be referred to as the "non-counting period". .

The main CPU 111 memorizes (saves) the base value B of the predetermined interval each time the interval ends. In this embodiment, the base value B is saved each time 60000 outs are counted. Specifically, the total out counter counts the number of outs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "total number of outs") from when the power is first turned on until the present. The main CPU 111 calculates and stores a base value B from the current values of the base calculation winning ball counter and the base calculation out counter each time the number "60000" is added to the total out counter. Also, every time the numerical value "60000" is added to the total out counter, the base calculation winning ball counter and the base calculation out counter are initialized.

FIG. 4B is a diagram for explaining the base value B displayed on the base display 114. As shown in FIG. In the specific example of FIG. 4(b), 60000 outs are counted in section 3, then 60000 outs are counted in section 2, 60000 outs are counted in section 1, and section L is started. The number of outs in section L is less than 60000 (0 to 59999). Also, the base value B in section 3 is "B3", the base value B in section 2 is "B2", the base value B in section 1 is "B1", and the base value B in section L is "BL ” is assumed.

In the above specific example, in the interval L, the base value BL of the interval L (real time), the base value B1 of the interval 1 (the previous interval), the base value B2 of the interval 2 (the interval two times before), and the interval A base value B3 of 3 (three times before) is displayed on the base display 114 . Specifically, the base display 114 switches and displays the four base values B in the order of base value BL, base value B1, base value B2, and base value B3. The base value B for each section is switched and displayed, for example, every five seconds. In this embodiment, the base value B is continuously displayed on the base display 114 including the period during which the game can be played.

When one interval ends (when 60000 outs are counted), the base value B of that interval is saved as the base value B of the previous interval, and the base value B of the oldest interval is discarded. . For example, in the specific example of FIG. 4B, when the number of outs in section L reaches 60000, the base value BL of section L is stored as the base value B1 of section 1, and the base value B1 of section 1 is stored as the base value B1 of section 2. , the base value B2 of interval 2 is stored as the base value B3 of interval 3, and the base value 3 of the oldest interval 3 is discarded.

FIG. 4C is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the base display 114. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4(c), the base display 114 includes a first display section 114x and a second display section 114y. The second display section 114y is composed of two seven-segment displays and displays the base value B. FIG. The second display unit 114y described above can display the numbers "00" to "99". If the base value is greater than the numerical value "100", "99." is displayed on the second display portion 114y (the dot display portion lights up).

As described above, the base display 114 switches the base value B of each section in the order of section L, section 1, section 2, and section 3 every about five seconds and displays it on the second display unit 114y. The first display section 114x displays identification information (bL, b1, b2, b3) that enables identification of which interval of the base value B is displayed on the second display section 114y.

For example, in the specific example of FIG. 4B described above, the identification information "bL" is displayed on the first display section 114x during the period in which the base value BL of the section L is displayed. Further, the identification information "b1" is displayed on the first display unit 114x during the period when the base value B1 of the section 1 is displayed, and the identification information "b2" is displayed on the first display unit 114x during the period when the base value B2 of the section 2 is displayed. The identification information “b3” is displayed on the first display portion 114x during the period in which the base value B3 of the section 3 is displayed on the first display portion 114x.

However, if the total number of outs is less than 60000, the base value to be displayed on the second display section 114y cannot be calculated during the period in which the identification information "b1" is displayed on the first display section 114x. Similarly, when the total number of outs is less than 60000, the base value indicated by the identification information "b2" and the base value indicated by the identification information "b3" cannot be calculated. Considering the above circumstances, when the total number of outs is less than 60000, each piece of identification information is displayed blinking during the period in which the identification information "b1" to the identification information "b3" are displayed on the first display unit 114x. , the special symbol “--” is illuminated on the second display section 114y.

When the total number of outs is 60000 or more but less than 120000, the base value B1 indicated by the identification information "b1" is calculated, but the base value B2 indicated by the identification information "b2" and the identification information "b3" are indicated. The base value B3 to be used cannot be calculated. Considering the above circumstances, when the total number of outs is 60000 or more and less than 120000, during the period when the identification information "b1" is displayed on the first display unit 114x, the identification information is lit and displayed and the base value During the period in which B1 is lit and the identification information "b2" or the identification information "b3" is displayed, each piece of identification information is displayed blinking, and the special symbol "--" is lit and displayed on the second display portion 114y.

Similarly, when the total number of outs is 120000 or more and less than 180000, the base value B1 indicated by the identification information "b1" and the base value B2 indicated by the identification information "b2" are calculated. cannot be calculated. Considering the above circumstances, when the total number of outs is 120000 or more and less than 180000, the identification information "b1" or the identification information "b2" is displayed on the first display unit 114x. During the period in which the base values (B1, B2) are lit and displayed, and the identification information "b3" is displayed, the identification information is blinked and the special symbol "--" is displayed on the second display portion 114y. Lights up.

As described above, in this embodiment, the real-time base value BL is displayed during the period in which the identification information "bL" is displayed. However, in the specific example of FIG. 4B, for example, when the number of normal outs in section L is not sufficiently large, it is difficult to calculate an accurate (original) base value B. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to have a configuration in which whether or not the number of normal outs in section L is sufficiently large is notified. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can evaluate the base value BL after considering whether or not the number of normal outs is sufficient.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when the number of normal outs in section L is less than 6000, the identification information "bL" is displayed blinking, and when the number of normal outs in section L is 6000 or more, the identification information "bL ” has been adopted. With the above configuration, whether or not the number of normal outs in section L is sufficiently large is substantially notified, and the above-described advantages can be obtained.

By the way, the operation of the gaming machine 1 is usually checked before the player actually plays the game. The above operation confirmation includes confirmation of whether the detection switches (13a, 14a, 16a, 17a, 18a, 19a) normally detect the game ball. Therefore, in a configuration in which the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation out counter are incremented immediately after the gaming machine 1 is first powered on, calculation is performed immediately after the gaming machine 1 is first powered on. The calculated base value is assumed to be different from the base value B calculated when the game is actually played.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in this embodiment, the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation out counter are not added until the total out counter reaches a predetermined numerical value (for example, the numerical value "300"). adopted. According to the above configuration, the above inconvenience is suppressed.

<Setting change switch>
As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 110 is provided with a setting change switch 115a. The setting change switch 115a is turned ON when the setting key device 115 (not shown) is rotated to a specific position, and turned OFF when the setting key device 115 is rotated to a position other than the specific position. Any one of a plurality of types (for example, six types) of set values with different payout rates can be set in the gaming machine 1 . Specifically, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on with the setting key device 115 rotated to a specific position and the clear button 30 pressed, setting change processing, which will be described later, is executed. Shifts to a mode in which values can be changed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "setting change mode"). When the setting change mode is entered, the current setting values stored (set) in the main RAM 113 are displayed on the base display 114 . In the setting change mode, the setting values displayed on the base display 114 are switched in the order of "...1→2→3→4→5→6→1..." each time the clear button 30 is pressed. . When the setting change switch 115a is turned off in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the base display 114 is stored (set) in the main RAM 113, and the setting change mode ends.

In the setting change process, various information stored in the main RAM 113 is initialized. For example, the remaining number of times N indicating the remaining number of games until the second time-saving gaming state, which will be described later, is initialized to the initial value (in the case of the present embodiment, the numerical value "800"). It should be noted that the remaining number of times N is also initialized in the processing at the time of clear operation, which will be described later. The clear operation process is executed when the power is turned on while the clear button 30 is pressed.

<Configuration of image control board>
FIG. 5 is a functional block diagram of the image control board 150. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the image control board 150 includes a host CPU 151, a host RAM 152, a host ROM 153, a CGROM 154, a crystal oscillator 155, a VRAM 156 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 200 for controlling image display of the image display device 31. Configured.

The host CPU 151 instructs the VDP 200 to display various images on the image display device 31 based on a later-described effect pattern designation command received from the effect control board 120 . The above instructions are executed by setting data in the control register 201 of the VDP 200 and outputting a display list composed of drawing control commands.

The VDP 200 transmits a V blank interrupt signal and a drawing end signal to the host CPU 151 . Upon receipt of each of the above signals, the host CPU 151 appropriately executes interrupt processing. The image data of the image displayed on the image display device 31 is stored in the CGROM 154 .

The host CPU 151 instructs the VDP 200 to output a predetermined sound to the audio output device 34 based on the effect pattern designation command received from the effect control board 120 . The host RAM 152 is built in the host CPU 151 and functions as a work area for data generated by arithmetic processing of the host CPU 151 . The host RAM 152 also temporarily stores data read from the host ROM 153 .

The host ROM 153 is composed of a mask ROM and stores programs for control processing of the host CPU 151 . The host ROM 153 also contains pattern arrangement information that associates the pattern numbers of the performance symbols with the types of the performance symbols GA, a display list generation program for generating a display list, animation patterns for displaying animation of the performance patterns, Stores animation scene information.

The animation pattern is referred to when the animation of the production pattern is displayed, and the combination of animation scene information included in the production pattern, the display order of each animation scene information, and the like are specified. The animation scene information includes information such as wait frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, etc. be

The CGROM 154 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and stores compressed image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32×32 pixels). . A combination of color number information specifying the color number of each pixel and an α value indicating transparency is specified from the pixel information.

The CGROM 154 also stores palette data in which display color information and color number information used when actually displaying colors are associated with each other without being compressed. Note that the CGROM 154 may be configured to compress and store only part of the image data. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used. Also, the CGROM 154 stores various audio data.

Crystal oscillator 155 outputs a pulse signal to VDP 200 . A clock generation circuit 205 of the VDP 200 divides the pulse signal from the crystal oscillator 155 to generate a system clock for control by the VDP 200 and a synchronization signal for synchronizing with the image display device 31 .

The VRAM 156 is a storage device in which image data can be written and read, and is composed of an SRAM, for example. Palette data, for example, is stored in the VRAM 156 described above.

The VRAM 156 also includes a display list storage area 156a for temporarily storing a display list output from the host CPU 151, a development storage area 156b for storing image data decompressed by the decompression circuit 206, and an image drawing or display area. A first frame buffer 156c and a second frame buffer 156d are provided for this purpose. The two frame buffers 156c and 156d are alternately switched between a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing is started.

The VDP 200 is a so-called image processor, and reads image data from a frame buffer (frame buffer for display) according to instructions from the host CPU 151 . The VDP 200 also generates a video signal (such as an RGB signal) based on the read image data, and outputs the video signal to the image display device 31 .

As shown in FIG. 5, the VDP 200 of this embodiment includes a control register 201, a CG bus I/F 202, a CPU I/F 203, a clock generation circuit 205, an expansion circuit 206, a drawing circuit 207, and a display circuit 208. , a memory controller 209 and an audio control circuit 300 .

The control register 201 is a register for the VDP 200 to control drawing and display, and writing and reading data to and from the control register 201 controls drawing and display. The host CPU 151 writes data to and reads data from the control register 201 via the CPU I/F 203 .

Specifically, the control register 201 includes a system control register for performing basic settings required for the operation of the VDP 200, a data transfer register for performing settings required for transferring data, and a register for controlling drawing. A drawing register for setting, a bus interface register for setting necessary for accessing the bus, a decompression register for setting necessary for decompressing a compressed image, and a display register for setting for controlling the display. including.

A CG bus I/F 202 is an interface circuit for communication with the CGROM 154 . Image data from the CGROM 154 is input to the VDP 200 via the CG bus I/F 202 described above.

A CPU I/F 203 is an interface circuit for communication with the host CPU 151 . For example, a display list output by the host CPU 151 is input to the VDP 200 via the CPU I/F 203 . Various interrupt signals output from the VDP 200 are input to the host CPU 151 via the CPU I/F 203 . The host CPU 151 can access control registers via the CPU I/F 203 .

A data transfer circuit 204 transfers data between various devices. Specifically, the data transfer circuit 204 performs data transfer between the host CPU 151 and the VRAM 156, data transfer between the CGROM 154 and the VRAM 156, and data transfer between various storage areas (including frame buffers) of the VRAM 156.

A clock generation circuit 205 receives a pulse signal from the crystal oscillator 155 and generates a system clock for the VDP 200 . It also generates a clock for generating a synchronous signal and outputs the synchronous signal to the image display device 31 via the display circuit 208 .

The decompression circuit 206 is a circuit for decompressing the image data compressed in the CGROM 154, and stores the decompressed image data in the decompression storage area 153b. The drawing circuit 207 is a circuit that performs sequence control using a display list composed of a group of drawing control commands.

The display circuit 208 generates RGB signals (analog signals) indicating image color data as video signals from the image data (digital signals) stored in the “frame buffer for display” in the VRAM 156 . A video signal (RGB signal) generated by the display circuit 208 is output to the image display device 31 .

The display circuit 208 also outputs a synchronization signal (a vertical synchronization signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, etc.) to the image display device 31 for synchronizing with the image display device 31 . Note that in the present embodiment, as video signals, RGB signals obtained by converting digital signals into analog signals are output to the image display device 31, but the video signals may be output as digital signals.

When the host CPU 151 instructs the memory controller 209 to switch frame buffers, the memory controller 209 switches between the “drawing frame buffer” and the “display frame buffer”.

The VDP 200 of this embodiment has an audio data reproduction function in addition to the image data reproduction function. Specifically, the audio output in the gaming machine is controlled by the audio control circuit 300 of the VDP 200 . The voice control circuit 300 reads out a predetermined program based on a command transmitted from the performance control board 120 and controls voice output in the voice output device 34 .

The voice control circuit 300 outputs voice using voice data stored in the CGROM 154 . It should be noted that instead of storing the audio data in the CGROM 154, a configuration in which a sound source ROM storing the audio data is provided separately from the CGROM 154 may be employed. Also, the audio control circuit 300 may be provided independently within the image control board 150 instead of being included in the VDP 200 . In the above case, the tone generator ROM may be included in the audio control circuit 300 .

<Description of game state>
Next, game states to which the gaming machine 1 transitions will be described. In this embodiment, the game progresses in one of the "low-probability game state", "high-probability game state", "time-saving game state", and "non-time-saving game state". Specifically, a game state that is a "low probability game state" and a "time saving game state", a game state that is a "low probability game state" and a "non-time saving game state", and a "high probability game state” and shifts to a game state which is a “time-saving game state”.

In the above-described low-probability gaming state, the winning probability of the big win is 1/299.5 in the big-hit lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start hole 13 or the second start hole 14 . Winning a jackpot means obtaining the right to play a jackpot game. The jackpot game includes a "long-hit game" and a "short-hit game" which will be described later.

In the high-probability game state described above, the probability of winning a big win in the big-win lottery is higher than in the low-probability game state. Specifically, in the high-probability gaming state of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the big hit is 1/29.95. However, the winning probability of the big win in each game state may be changed as appropriate.

In the non-time-saving game state, the winning probability of winning becomes 1/20 in the normal drawing lottery executed when the game ball passes through the gate 15.例文帳に追加In addition, in the non-time-saving game state, the length of time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols (normal symbol display device 22) to the stop display is set to about 10 seconds. Furthermore, when winning in the normal drawing lottery, the total opening time of the second start port 14 when the long open pattern described later is determined is about 4.2 seconds, and the second start port when the short open pattern is determined. 14 total open time is set to about 0.2 seconds.

In the time-saving game state, in the normal drawing lottery executed when the game ball passes through the gate 15, the probability of winning is improved compared to the non-time-saving game state. In addition, in the time-saving game state, compared with the non-time-saving game state, the length of time from the start of the variable display of normal symbols to the stop display is short, and the total open time of the second start port 14 tends to be long. .

Specifically, in the time-saving gaming state, the winning probability in the normal drawing lottery is 19/20. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed about one second after they are variably displayed. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state, the total opening time of the second start port 14 is set to 5 seconds when the long open pattern is determined, and the total open time of the second start port 14 when the short open pattern is determined. is set to 3 seconds. When the normal symbols are stopped, the normal symbols are maintained in a stopped state for at least about 0.5 seconds.

In the above configuration, in the time-saving gaming state, as long as the game ball passes through the gate 15 than in the non-time-saving gaming state, the second starting port 14 is more likely to be controlled in the second mode. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state, the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the consumption of game balls. In this embodiment, the game ball can enter the second starting port 14 and the gate 15 by playing the game with the right hand. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, it is more advantageous to play with the right hand than with the left hand.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of time-saving gaming states are provided. Specifically, the time-saving gaming state of the present embodiment includes a first time-saving gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state. The game shifts to the first time-saving game state when the jackpot game (ending period) ends. It is possible to shift to the second time-saving game state when the big win is not won over a predetermined number of times in the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination processing) in the low-probability game state.

In this embodiment, the variation time of normal symbols is common in each time-saving game state. Specifically, the variation time of normal symbols in each time-saving game state is about 1 second. In addition, the winning probability of the normal drawing lottery is common in each time saving game state, and the probability that the long open pattern is determined and the probability that the short open pattern is decided are common in each time saving game state.

In each time-saving game state, the operation mode (total opening time, number of times of opening) of the open/close door 14b when the long open symbol is stopped and displayed is common. Further, in each time-saving game state, the operation mode of the open/close door 14b when the short open symbol is stopped and displayed is common. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the "variation time of the normal symbol, the time of opening (expansion) of the second start port 14 and the number of times of opening" in the time saving game state will be the second start port 14 (opening and closing door 14b) in the time saving game state. may be described as "open mode". As described above, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 is common in each time-saving gaming state. However, in each time-saving game state, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 may be different.

Each of the time-saving game states described above ends when the game is executed a predetermined number of times, or when the game shifts to a big hit game. Hereinafter, the number of times the time-saving game state ends may be referred to as the "time-saving number of times" of the time-saving game state. In this embodiment, each time-saving game state has a different time-saving number of times. Specifically, the number of times of time saving in the first time saving game state is 100 times or 799 times. The number of times of time saving in the second time saving game state is 1000 times. However, the number of times of time saving in the time saving game state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of times of time saving in the second time saving game state may be 100 times (common with the first time saving game state).

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 112 will be described.

<Jackpot Judgment Table>
FIG. 6(a-1) and FIG. 6(a-2) show an example of a big hit determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the result of stopping the special symbol variation is a big hit (at the time of a big win lottery). It is a conceptual diagram.

FIG. 6(a-1) is a big hit determination table that is referred to when determining whether the stop result of the special symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 20 is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (big hit lottery). It is A. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 7(a-1) to 7(a-3), but when a big win is won in a big win lottery, a big win symbol (special symbol A, etc.), which will be described later, is displayed. Also, when winning a small prize, a small prize pattern (special pattern K) is displayed.

FIG. 6(b-2) is a big hit determination table B referred to when determining the stop result of the special symbol variation in the second special symbol display device 21. FIG. It should be noted that the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 have different winning probabilities of small hits, and the same big win probabilities. In addition, in this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 20 may be simply referred to as "first special figure", and the second special symbol display device 21 may simply be referred to as "second special figure". Also, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 may be collectively simply referred to as "special symbols".

In this embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 13 or the second starting port 14 (hereinafter sometimes collectively referred to as "starting port"), a special symbol determination random number value is obtained. The random number range of the special symbol determination random number in this embodiment is a numerical value "0 to 598".

The big hit determination table defines a special symbol determination random number value for a "big hit" and a special symbol determination random number value for a "small hit". In the jackpot lottery, the random number for special symbol determination obtained when the game ball wins the start hole is compared with the random number for special symbol determination defined in the jackpot determination table. Win a prize.

The jackpot determination tables (A, B) shown in FIGS. 6(a-1) and 6(a-2) are composed of a low-probability random number determination table and a high-probability random number determination table. The main CPU 111 refers to the game state, selects the low-probability random number determination table in the low-probability game state, and selects the high-probability random number determination table in the high-probability game state. Also, the main CPU 111 determines any one of "big win", "minor win", and "losing" based on the selected table and the extracted special symbol determination random number value.

For example, according to the low-probability random number determination table shown in FIG. 6(a-1), two special symbol determination random numbers are determined to be "big hit". On the other hand, according to the high-probability random number determination table, 20 special symbol determination random numbers are determined to be "big hits". In addition, in the big hit determination table of FIG. 6 (a-1), whether the random number determination table at low probability or the random number determination table at high probability is used, the four special symbol determination random numbers are "small hit". is determined. If a random number that is not determined as either a "big win" or a "minor win" is determined to be "losing".

As described above, the random number range of the special symbol determination random number is "0 to 598". Therefore, in the jackpot determination table A (at the time of winning the first start opening), the probability of jackpot determination is 1/299.5 in the low-probability gaming state. Similarly, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the high probability game state is 1/29.95, which is 10 times. On the other hand, the probability of being determined as a small hit is 1/149.75 in both the low-probability game state and the high-probability game state.

In the big hit determination table B shown in FIG. 6(a-2), the special symbol determination random number determined to be a big hit in the low probability game state and the high probability game state is the same as the big hit determination table A. On the other hand, the big-hit determination table A and the big-hit determination table B differ in the special symbol determination random number value determined as a small hit. For example, in the big hit determination table B, it is determined as a "small hit" only when the special symbol determination random number is "50".

In the above configuration, the probability that a game ball wins in the first start port 13 and the case that a game ball wins in the second start port 14 is 1/299. 5, and the probability of being determined as a big hit in the high probability game state is 1/29.95. On the other hand, when the game ball entered the first start port 13, the probability of being judged as a small hit was 1/149.75 in both the low-probability game state and the high-probability game state. The probability of judging a small hit when a game ball wins is 1/599 in both the low-probability game state and the high-probability game state.

<Hit Judgment Table>
FIG. 6(b) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a hit determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not to win the stop result of normal symbol variation in the normal pattern lottery. The hit determination table shown in FIG. 6(b) is composed of a non-time-saving game state random number determination table and a time-saving game state random number determination table. The above time-saving gaming state random number determination table is commonly referred to in the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state.

The main CPU 111 acquires a normal symbol determination random number when the game ball passes through the gate 15 . The random number range of the hit determination random number is a numerical value "0 to 19". The main CPU 111 refers to the game state, selects the non-time-saving game state random number determination table in the non-time-saving game state, and selects the time-saving game state random number determination table in the time-saving game state. In addition, the main CPU 111 determines whether it is a “hit” or a “lose” based on the selected table and the obtained random number value for winning determination.

Specifically, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the acquired random number value for winning judgment matches the random number value for winning judgment defined in the winning judgment table. In the hit determination table shown in FIG. 6(b), the probability of being determined to be a win during the non-time-saving game state is about 1/20, and the probability of being determined to be a win during the time-saving game state is about 19/20.

<Design decision table>
FIGS. 7(a-1) to 7(a-3) are conceptual diagrams of a special symbol determination table for determining special symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed in each game.

The special symbol determination table includes a big win symbol determination table, a small win symbol determination table, and a losing symbol determination table. The big-hit pattern determination table is referred to when determining a stop pattern (big-hit pattern) when a big-hit is won in a big-hit lottery. The small winning design determination table is referred to when determining a stop design (small winning design) when a small winning is won in a big winning lottery. The losing symbol determination table is referred to when determining a stop symbol (losing symbol) in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery.

As shown in FIGS. 7(a-1) to 7(a-3), each special symbol determination table is provided for each special symbol display device, and the special symbol determination table for the first special symbol display device 20 and the second It is composed of a special symbol determination table for the special symbol display device 21 .

FIG. 7(a-1) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a big hit symbol determination table. When winning a jackpot, the main CPU 111 refers to the jackpot symbol random number. The random number range of the jackpot symbol random number is a numerical value "0 to 99". For example, when a big win is won by winning a prize in the first start port 13, the main CPU 111 sets the stop symbol data to "01" ( A special symbol A1) is determined. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7(a-1), the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20. FIG.

In addition, the main CPU 111 generates a performance symbol designation command capable of specifying stop symbol data (type of special symbol) at the start of fluctuation of special symbols. For example, when the stop symbol data "01" is determined, the effect symbol specifying commands "E0H" and "01H" are generated as shown in FIG. 7(a-1).

As shown in FIG. 7(a-1), if the winning to the first starting port 13 results in winning a jackpot, and if the obtained random number for the jackpot symbol is "60" to "69", the game is stopped. "02" (special symbol A2) is determined as symbol data, and effect symbol designation commands "E0H" and "02H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol A2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 .

Similarly, if the winning to the first starting port 13 wins the jackpot and the random number for the jackpot symbol is "70" to "99", the stop symbol data is "03" (special symbol A3). is determined, and effect symbol designation commands "E0H" and "03H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 .

If the jackpot is won by winning the second starting port 14 and the random number for the jackpot pattern is ``0'' to ``69'', ``04'' (special pattern B1) is determined as the stop pattern data. , effect symbol designation commands "E1H" and "01H" are generated. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7(a-1), the second special symbol display device 21 stops displaying the special symbol B1.

In addition, if the winning to the second starting port 14 wins the jackpot, and if the random number for the jackpot symbol is "70" to "89", "05" (special symbol B2) is set as the stop symbol data. It is determined, and production symbol designation commands "E1H" and "02H" are generated. In the above case, the second special symbol display device 21 stops displaying the special symbol B2. If the jackpot is won by winning the second starting port 14 and the random number for the jackpot pattern is ``90'' to ``94'', ``06'' (special pattern B3) is determined as the stop pattern data. , effect symbol designation commands "E1H" and "03H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21 .

Similarly, if the winning to the second starting port 14 is a trigger to win the jackpot and the random number for the jackpot design is "95" to "99", the stop design data is "07" (special design B4). is determined, and effect symbol designation commands "E1H" and "04H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21 . Although it will be described later in detail, the number of time saving times M in the first time saving game state after the big win game changes according to the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed when the big win game is started.

When the special symbol A1, special symbol A2, special symbol A3, special symbol B1 to special symbol B4 (hereinafter sometimes collectively referred to as "jackpot symbol") are stopped and displayed, then the big win game is started. . As described above, the jackpot game includes a long-hit game and a short-hit game. In the jackpot game, the first big winning hole 16 and the second big winning hole 17 (hereinafter sometimes collectively referred to as "big winning hole") are opened. In the long winning game, the opening time of the big winning opening is set longer than in the short winning game.

The kind of the big win game corresponds to the big win special symbol stopped and displayed when the big win game is started. Specifically, when any one of special symbols A1, A3, and special symbols B1 to B4 among the big hit special symbols is stopped and displayed, a long winning game is started. On the other hand, when the special symbol A2 is stopped and displayed, a short winning game is started.

In addition, the game state after the end of the big win game is determined according to the special symbol stopped and displayed when shifting to the big win game. For example, when the special symbol A1, the special symbol A2 or the special symbol B1 is stopped and displayed, the game moves to a time-saving game state of a high-probability game state (hereinafter simply referred to as "high-probability time-saving game state"). The time-saving game state of the high-probability game state is continued until a jackpot is won in principle. On the other hand, when any one of the special symbols A3, B2 to B4 is stopped and displayed, the game moves to a low-probability time-saving game state (hereinafter simply referred to as "low-probability time-saving game state"). Specifically, the special symbols A3, B2 to B4 are stopped and displayed, and when the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to the first time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, the number of times of time saving in the first time saving game state is different depending on the type of big hit symbols (A3, B2 to B4). Specifically, when the special symbol A3 or the special symbol B2 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, the number of times of time saving in the first time saving game state is 100 times. On the other hand, when the special symbol B3 or the special symbol B4 among the jackpot symbols is stop-displayed, the number of games in the first time-saving game state becomes 799 times.

Although the details will be described later, a new table scenario S is set when the jackpot game ends. By setting the table scenario S, the variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern (described later) of the special figure is switched according to the number of games played. The table scenario S described above is variably set according to the type of the jackpot symbol.

In this embodiment, a jackpot game in which the game state after completion is a high-probability game state is sometimes referred to as "probability variable jackpot", and a jackpot game in which the game state after completion is a low-probability game state is sometimes described as "normal jackpot". . Further, in the present embodiment, the non-time-saving gaming state of the low-probability gaming state may be described as "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state".

FIG. 7(a-2) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a small winning symbol determination table. When winning a small win, the main CPU 111 refers to the small win symbol random number. The random number range of the small hit symbol random number is a numerical value "0 to 99". However, if a small win is won by winning the first starting port 13, the main CPU 111 determines "11" (special symbol K) as the stop symbol data regardless of the obtained random number for the small winning symbol. do. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7(a-2), the special symbol K is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20. FIG. In addition, production symbol designation commands "E0H" and "0AH" are generated.

Similarly, when a small win is won by winning the second starting port 14, the main CPU 111 sets "12" (special symbol K) as the stop symbol data regardless of the obtained random number for the small winning symbol. decide. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7(a-2), the special symbol K is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. FIG. In addition, production symbol designation commands "E1H" and "0AH" are generated.

FIG. 7(a-3) is a conceptual diagram of the losing symbol determination table. In the jackpot lottery at the time of winning a prize to the first starting port 13, when it is determined that the game is lost, "00" (special symbol H) is determined as the stop symbol data. In the above case, production symbol designation commands "E0H" and "00H" are generated. Similarly, in the jackpot lottery at the time of winning a prize to the second starting port 14, when it is determined that the game is lost, "00" (special symbol H) is determined as the stop symbol data. In the above case, production symbol designation commands "E1H" and "00H" are generated.

FIG. 7(b-1) and FIG. 7(b-2) are conceptual diagrams of an example of a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination table is used when determining the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22 . The normal symbol determination table described above is commonly used in each game state (non-time-saving game state, first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state).

The normal symbol determination table of the present embodiment includes a normal symbol determination table X and a normal symbol determination table Y. The normal symbol determination table X is used when winning the normal symbol lottery (when the second starting port 14 is opened). On the other hand, the normal symbol determination table Y is used when the normal symbol lottery is lost (when the second starting port 14 is not opened).

FIG. 7(b-1) is a conceptual diagram of the normal symbol determination table X. As shown in FIG. The main CPU 111 acquires a normal symbol random number when determining a normal symbol. The random number range of the normal symbol random number is a numerical value "0 to 10". For example, when winning the general pattern lottery and the normal symbol random number value is "0" or "1", the long open symbol is determined as the normal symbol. On the other hand, when the normal symbol random number is any of the numerical values "2 to 10", the short open symbol is determined as the normal symbol.

When the long open symbol is determined as the normal symbol, the main CPU 111 determines stop symbol data "01", and generates normal symbol designation commands "E8H" and "01H" at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol. Further, when the short open symbol is determined, the stop symbol data "02" is determined, and normal symbol specifying commands "E8H" and "02H" are generated at the start of variation of the normal symbol.

FIG. 7(b-2) is a conceptual diagram of the normal symbol determination table Y. FIG. As described above, the normal symbol determination table Y is used in the case of loss in the normal symbol lottery. In the case of a loss in the general pattern lottery, as shown in FIG. 7(b-2), the normal symbol random number value is any value from "0" to "10" to determine the lost pattern. The main CPU 111 determines "00" as the stop symbol data when a losing symbol is determined as the normal symbol, and generates normal symbol designation commands "E8H" and "00H" when the normal symbol starts to fluctuate.

FIGS. 8(a), 8(b-1) and 8(b-2) are diagrams for explaining the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game. The variation pattern determination table is referred to when determining the variation pattern in each game. The main CPU 111 determines a variation pattern in each game, and variably displays the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) according to the variation pattern.

The variation pattern determination table referred to in each game after the end of the big win game is variable according to the type of the big win symbols stopped and displayed at the start of the big win game. Specifically, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of table scenarios S corresponding to a plurality of types of jackpot symbols are provided. The main CPU 111 sets a table scenario S corresponding to the jackpot symbols stopped and displayed at the start of the jackpot game. Further, the main CPU 111 uses the set table scenario S to determine the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game after the big win game. In the above configuration, the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game becomes variable according to the set table scenario S. Although details will be described later, when the number of games after the end of the jackpot game reaches the number of games defined in the table scenario S, the variation pattern determination table is switched (see FIG. 8(b-1) described later).

FIG. 8A is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the table scenario S. FIG. Table scenario S includes table scenario Sa1, table scenario Sa2, table scenario Sa3, table scenario Sb1, table scenario Sb2, table scenario Sb3 and table scenario Sb4. The table scenario Sa1 is set when the special symbol A1 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. Similarly, the table scenario Sa2 is set when the special symbol A2 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, the table scenario Sa3 is set when the special symbol A3 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, and the table scenario SB1 is: It is set when the special symbol B1 among the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed.

The table scenario Sb2 is set when the special symbol B2 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. As described above, when the special symbol B2 is stopped and displayed, the game moves to the first time-saving game state of 100 times after the big hit game. That is, the table scenario Sb2 is set when shifting to the first time-saving game state 100 times after the jackpot game. The table scenario Sb3 is set when the special symbol B3 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. As described above, when the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed, the game moves to the first time-saving game state of 799 times after the big hit game. Further, the table scenario Sb4 is set when the special symbol B4 among the big winning symbols is stopped and displayed. As described above, when the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed, the game moves to the first time-saving game state of 799 times after the big hit game.

As can be understood from the above description, when the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed, and when the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed, the number of time reductions in the first time reduction game state after the big hit game is common (799 times). On the other hand, the set table scenarios (Sb3, Sb4) are different. That is, in each of the above cases, the variation pattern determination table referred to in the first time-saving gaming state is different. Although the details will be described later, the effect mode in the first time-saving game state differs between when the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed and when the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed. In games with different effect modes, the effects that can be executed by the image display device 31 are different.

In the present embodiment, referencing a specific variation pattern determination table T in the variation pattern determination process may be simply described as "referring to the variation pattern determination table T". In addition, there are cases where referring to a specific variation pattern determination table T among a plurality of types of variation pattern determination tables T is simply described as "the variation pattern determination table T is set". For example, as an example of "becoming able to refer to a specific variation pattern determination table T", it is assumed that the variation pattern determination table T is read from the main ROM 112 and stored (developed) in the main RAM 113.

8(b-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table set by the table scenario S. FIG. The table scenario S defines a plurality of triggers for setting (switching over) the variation pattern determination table, and the variation pattern determination table set at the triggers. The main CPU 111 sets (switches) a variation pattern determination table when a trigger specified in the table scenario S is established.

FIG. 8(b-1) shows the order in which the triggers for setting the variation pattern determination table are established. Also, a variation pattern determination table set at the trigger is shown corresponding to the trigger. In the specific example of FIG. 8(b-1), it is assumed that the table scenario Sb2 of the table scenario S is set. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 8(b-1), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won during the period from when the table scenario Sb2 is set until the second time-saving game state ends.

As shown in FIG. 8(b-1), in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is set upon the end of the jackpot game. Further, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, when the 91st game after the end of the jackpot game is started, the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is set. After that, when the 100th game after the end of the jackpot game is started, the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is set. In the above configuration, of the first time-saving game state (100 times), the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to in the game up to the 90th time (the game of the 90th time after the jackpot game ends), and the 91st time to the 99th time The variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to in the previous games, and the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to in the 100th (last) game.

As shown in FIG. 8(b-1), when the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set upon completion of the first time-saving gaming state. Further, when the 791st game starts after the jackpot game ends, the variation pattern determination table Tn2 is set. In the above configuration, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to until the game 11 times before shifting to the second time-saving gaming state among the games in the non-time-saving gaming state, and 10 times before shifting to the second time-saving gaming state game, the variation pattern determination table Tn2 is referred to.

When the second time-saving gaming state starts, a variation pattern determination table Ts is set. As shown in FIG. 8(b-1), when the table scenario Sb2 is set, when the 802nd game (the second game in the second time-saving game state) starts after the jackpot game ends, the variation pattern is determined. A table Tax is set. In addition, when the second time-saving gaming state ends, a variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set. In the above configuration, the variation pattern determination table Ts is referenced in the first game in the second time-saving gaming state, and the variation pattern determination table Tax is referenced in the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving gaming state. After that, when the second time-saving gaming state ends, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to. As can be understood from the above description, during the period in which the table scenario S is set, the variation pattern determination table is changed according to the number of times the game has been played since the jackpot game, in addition to the opportunity for changing the game state.

In this embodiment, the table scenario S is changed at the opportunity of winning the jackpot game, and is not changed at another opportunity. However, when the clear operation process or the setting change process described above is executed, the table scenario S is left unset. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, an operation in which a setting change process or a clear operation process is executed may be referred to as a "clear operation". Also, a period during which the table scenario S is not set may be referred to as a "scenario unset period". The scenario unset period is a period from when the clear operation is executed until the first big win game ends. Also, a period in which any one of the table scenarios S is set after the jackpot game is finished may be referred to as a "scenario setting period".

It is assumed that the variation pattern determination table is changed in accordance with the number of games played during the scenario unset period. Further, in the comparison, a variation pattern determination table advantageous to the player is referred to from the start of the scenario unset period to the predetermined number of games. In the above comparison, the manager of the gaming machine 1 can shift to a state advantageous to the player at any timing by performing a clear operation. Therefore, an inconvenience that the fairness of the game is impaired may occur. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which the variation pattern determination table is not changed according to the number of games during the scenario unset period.

FIG. 8(b-2) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table referred to during the scenario unset period. In the specific example of FIG. 8(b-2), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won during the period from the start of the scenario unset period to the end of the second time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 8(b-2), the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to immediately after the clearing operation is executed and the scenario unset period is started. When the clear operation is executed, it becomes a low-probability short-time gaming state. Moreover, when the game is executed 800 times after the clear operation is executed, the state is shifted to the second time-saving game state. As described above, in the scenario setting period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table T referred to in the low-probability short-time gaming state changes from the variation pattern determination table Tn1 to the variation pattern determination table Tn2 according to the number of games played. Change. On the other hand, in the low-probability short-time gaming state in the scenario unset period, the referenced variation pattern determination table T does not change from the variation pattern determination table Tn1.

As shown in FIG. 8(b-2), in the scenario unset period, when the second time-saving gaming state is started, the variation pattern determination table Tbx is set. After that, when the second time-saving gaming state ends and shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set. In the above configuration, the variation pattern determination table is not changed (according only to the number of games played) during the period when the scenario is not set, other than when the game state changes.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T referred to in each game state. In this embodiment, when each game is started, a variation pattern designation command indicating the variation pattern of the game is transmitted from the main control board 110 (main CPU 111) to the effect control board 120 (sub CPU 121). The sub CPU 121 is controlled to an effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command. FIG. 9 shows each effect mode corresponding to each variation pattern determination table.

As described above, the variation pattern determination table T is referred to, and the variation pattern is determined by lottery. In addition, the time when the special figure fluctuates may be different for each fluctuation pattern. In the above configuration, the time during which the special figure is variably displayed in each game is variable. In this embodiment, for the sake of explanation, in the period in which the variation pattern determination table T is referred to, the average of the time when the special figure is variably displayed in each game when playing in a normal procedure is may be described as "average fluctuation time of FIG. 9 shows the average variation time (short, long, fixed) of the special figure in the period in which the variation pattern determination table T is referred to, corresponding to the variation pattern determination table T. It should be noted that the above-mentioned "playing the game according to the normal procedure" means hitting left when the right hitting lamp 28 is turned off, hitting right when the right hitting lamp 28 is lit, and so-called "stopping" (single-shot hitting). including).

As shown in FIG. 9, in the first time-saving gaming state, variation pattern determination table Ta1, variation pattern determination table Ta2, variation pattern determination table Tj1, variation pattern determination table Tj2, and variation pattern determination table Tax can be referred to. However, the variation pattern determination table T referred to in the first time-saving gaming state changes according to the table scenario S (that is, changes according to the jackpot pattern).

Specifically, when the jackpot symbol is the special symbol B2, the table scenario Sb2 is set, and the first time-saving game state is started 100 times. In the first time-saving game state (100 times) in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, as described with reference to FIG. ), the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to, the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to from the 91st to 99th games, and the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to in the 100th (last) game.

In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to, the production mode is the time saving mode A. Further, in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to, the production mode is the time saving mode A, similarly to the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to. That is, in the first time-saving game state in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the production mode in the game from the 1st time to the 99th time does not change, but when the remaining number of times reaches 10 times, the variation pattern determination table T switches (Ta1 → Ta2). However, the effect mode may differ between the period in which the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to and the period in which the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to. In the above configuration, when the remaining number of times of the first time-saving game state in which the table scenario Sb2 is set reaches 10 times, the effect mode is switched.

The variation pattern determination table Ta2 is more likely to determine a long-time variation pattern than the variation pattern determination table Ta1. In the above configuration, in the game after the remaining number of times of the first time-saving game state reaches 10 times, for example, an effect (for example, countdown effect) that informs (suggests) that the first time-saving game state ends is executed. It becomes easier to secure time for In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to, the end effect is executed after the judgment effect is executed.

In the judgment effect, for example, the shielding image GF (see FIG. 16(c) described above) is displayed first. That is, when the judgment effect is started, the closed sliding doors are displayed. Further, in the judge effect, it is displayed that the fusuma can be opened by hitting the effect button 8 repeatedly, and that the first time-saving game state continues when the fusuma is opened. Temporarily, in the judgment production|presentation in case a 1st time saving game state continues, the moving image which a fusuma opens is finally displayed (shielding image GF is not displayed). On the other hand, in the judgment effect when the first time-saving game state does not continue, the sliding door remains closed. In the end effect, it is informed that the first time-saving game state is ended. A specific example of the ending effect will be described in a second embodiment (see FIG. 45).

In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the non-time saving game state immediately after the first time saving game state ends (see FIG. 8 (b-1) described above). In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to, the effect mode is the normal mode. Further, when the 791st game starts after the jackpot game ends, the variation pattern determination table Tn2 is set. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tn2 is referred to, the effect mode is the previous mode. In the immediately preceding mode, effects that are not performed in the normal mode can be performed. For example, in the immediately preceding mode, an effect is executed that suggests that the second time-saving gaming state will start soon.

In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, when the second time-saving gaming state starts, the variation pattern determination table Ts is set. The variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to in the first game in the second time-saving game state. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, rush effects are executed. The rush effect is a effect for notifying that the second time-saving game state has started. The average fluctuation time of the special figure in the game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to is longer than the average fluctuation time of the special figure in the second and subsequent games (the game in which Tax is referred to) in the second time-saving gaming state. Specifically, in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, a predetermined variation pattern is determined for each result of the big win lottery. For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the variation pattern of the time required for stop-displaying the performance symbol GA corresponding to the loss after executing the judgment performance and the end performance is determined. On the other hand, when the big win is won, the fact that the big win has been won is notified after the judgment performance and the end performance are executed.

In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the game from the second time to the 1000th time (last time) in the second time saving game state. In the variation pattern determination table Tax, a variation pattern shorter than the non-time-saving gaming state (the game in which Tn1 or Tn2 is referred to) is likely to be determined. Also, in the variation pattern determination table Tax, a shorter variation pattern is more likely to be determined than the variation pattern determination table Ta1 and the variation pattern determination table Ta2 referred to in the first time-saving gaming state, and the average variation time of the special figure is shortened. Similarly, in the variation pattern determination table Tbx, it is easier to determine a shorter variation pattern than the variation pattern determination table Ta1 and the variation pattern determination table Ta2 referred to in the first time-saving gaming state, and the average variation time of the special figure is shortened. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, the production mode is the time saving mode B.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the table scenario Sb3 is set, the variation pattern determination table Ta1, the variation pattern determination table Ta2, the variation pattern determination table Tj2, the variation pattern determination table Tax, the variation pattern determination table Tnc, the variation pattern determination table Tax The variation pattern determination table T referred to in the order of is changed. A specific example of the motion pattern determination table T referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 11(a) described later.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the table scenario Sb4 is set, the variation pattern determination table T, which is referred to in the order of the variation pattern determination table Tax, the variation pattern determination table Tnc, and the variation pattern determination table Tax, is changed. A specific example of the motion pattern determination table T referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 11(b) described later. Further, as shown in FIG. 9, in the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table T is changed, which is referred to in the order of the variation pattern determination table Tn1 and the variation pattern determination table Tbx. A specific example of the motion pattern determination table T referred to in each game during the scenario unset period will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 10(b) described later.

FIG. 10(a-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 of the table scenario S is set. In addition to the variation pattern determination table T at each point in FIG. 10 (a-1), the production mode at each point, the remaining number of times of the time saving game state (hereinafter "remaining number M"), and the second time saving game state The remaining number of times until the start (hereinafter “remaining number of times N”) is indicated. The remaining number M and remaining number N are stored in the main RAM 113, for example.

In each game in the time-saving game state, the remaining number of times M is decremented by "1", and when the remaining number of times M is decremented to "0", the time-saving game state ends. In each game in the low-probability game state, the remaining number of times N is decremented by "1", and when the remaining number of times N is decremented to "0", the second time-saving game state is started. The remaining number of times N is initialized to the initial value "800" at the opportunity of winning the jackpot game and the above clear operation. That is, when 800 games (low probability game state) are executed from the jackpot game, and when 800 games (low probability game state) are executed from the clear operation, the second time-saving game state starts be done.

FIG. 10(a-1) shows the game start time ts and the game end time te. As can be seen from FIG. 10(a-1), the remaining number of times M of the time-saving game state is subtracted at the end of the game. Specifically, the remaining number of times M is subtracted at the end of the later-described fixed period. Similarly, the remaining number N is decremented at the end of the settlement period.

As described above, in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to until the 90th game in the first time-saving game state. That is, the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to until the game in which the remaining number of times M in the first time-saving game state is the numerical value "11" and the remaining number of times N is the numerical value "711". Further, the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to from the 91st time to the 99th game in the first time saving game state. Both the variation pattern determination table Ta1 and the variation pattern determination table Ta2 correspond to the time saving mode A (see FIG. 9 described above). In the above configuration, from the first to the 99th game in the first time-saving game state, it becomes the time-saving mode A. As shown in FIG. 10 (a-1), in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to in the last game of the first time-saving game state, and the above-mentioned judge effect is executed and then terminated. A performance is performed.

In the specific example of FIG. 10(a-1), it is assumed that the remaining number of times M is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at the time ta, and the first time-saving game state ends. In the above specific example, the remaining number of times N is decremented to the numerical value "700" at time ta. As described above, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set when the first time-saving game state ends, and the production mode becomes the normal mode.

FIG. 10(a-2) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game during another period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. In the specific example of FIG. 10(a-2), as in the specific example of FIG. 10(a-1) described above, it is assumed that the first time-saving gaming state ends at time ta. As described above, in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set when the first time-saving gaming state ends, and after that, when the game is executed 690 times, the variation pattern determination table Tn2 is set. That is, after the jackpot game, the variation pattern determination table Tn2 is referred to from the 791st game. The variation pattern determination table Tn2 corresponds to the previous mode (see FIG. 9 above). In the above configuration, after the jackpot game, the immediately before mode is entered from the 791st game.

In the specific example of FIG. 10(a-2), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at time tb, and the second time-saving game state is started. In the above case, the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state is set to the numerical value "1000" at time tb. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 10(a-2), it is assumed that the number of reservations is 1 or more at time tb, and the first game starts immediately after the start of the second time-saving game state. As described above, in the first game in the second time-saving game state during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, and the rush effect is executed. Also, in the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, and the effect mode becomes the time-saving mode B.

FIG. 10(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game during the scenario unset period. As described above, the scenario unset period is triggered by the clear operation. When the clear operation is executed, the remaining number of times M is initialized to the initial value "0", and a low probability non-time-saving game state is entered. In addition, when the clear operation is executed, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is initialized to the numerical value "800". As shown in FIG. 10(b), in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state of the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to, and the other variation pattern determination table T is not referred to.

In the specific example of FIG. 10(b), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at time tb, and the second time-saving game state is started. In addition, in the specific example of FIG. 10 (b), as in FIG. 10 (a-1) described above, the number of reservations is one or more at the start time tb of the second time saving gaming state, and immediately after the time tb It is assumed that the 2 o'clock short game state is started. In the scenario unset period, when the second time-saving gaming state is started, the variation pattern determination table Tbx is set. The variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to until the second time-saving gaming state ends. The variation pattern determination table Tbx corresponds to the time saving mode B (see FIG. 9 above). In the above configuration, the effect mode of the second time-saving game state is the time-saving mode B in any of the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period.

As can be understood from the above description, the first game in the second time-saving gaming state in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the first game in the second time-saving gaming state in the period in which the scenario is not set, the variation referred to The pattern determination table T is different. Specifically, in the first game of the second time-saving gaming state in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the dedicated variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, whereas the second time-saving gaming state in the scenario unset period In the first game of , reference is made to the variation pattern determination table Tbx, which is also referred to in subsequent games.

In a game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, a longer variation pattern is likely to be determined than in a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to and a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to. Specifically, in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, various effects (rush effect, mode selection effect, etc.) when the second time-saving game state is started are executed. In a game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, a variation pattern having a length that allows execution of the above effects is determined.

On the other hand, the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to in the first game of the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period. In a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to, a shorter variation pattern is likely to be selected than in a game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to. Specifically, the variation pattern of the first game in the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period is shorter in principle than the time during which the rush effect or the like is executed in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to.

From the above circumstances, in the first game of the second time-saving game state in the period when the scenario is not set, in principle, all the rush effects etc. executed in the first game of the second time-saving game state in the period when the table scenario Sb2 is set Cannot run. However, as will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b), in the first game in the second time-saving gaming state in the scenario unset period, the first game in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set An effect omitting a part of various effects (mode selection effect) executed in the first game in the 2 o'clock short game state is executed.

In this way, there is a first time-saving game state that passes through the jackpot and a second time-saving game state that does not go through the jackpot, and the fluctuation display of the predetermined number of times from the establishment of the first condition (RAM clear) is a losing result. In the case, and when the fluctuation display of the predetermined number of times becomes a losing result from the establishment of the second condition (end of the jackpot), it is controlled to the second time-saving game state over a predetermined period. Therefore, since there are a plurality of conditions for entering the second time-saving game state, it is possible to improve the game performance and to improve the amusement of the game.
Also, after the RAM is cleared, the fluctuation performance is executed with a non-dedicated fluctuation pattern, and the rush performance is executed. On the other hand, after the big hit, the rush performance is executed by executing the variable performance with a dedicated variation pattern.

FIG. 11(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table T referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set. In the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, similar to the first time-saving game state (100 times) in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is changed in the game up to the 90th time. The variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to in the 91st to 99th games.

However, in the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tj2 is referred to in the 100th game. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tj2 is referred to, the continuation effect is executed after the judgment effect is executed. In the continuous effect, it is informed that the first time-saving game state continues. As described above, in the first time-saving game state (100 times) in which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the production mode in the game up to the 100th time is Common. Therefore, in the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, it is difficult to grasp whether the first time-saving game state continues to the game after the 101st game until the continuous effect is executed ( (including cases where it is practically impossible).

In the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the 101st to 799th (last) games. As described above, the production mode is the time saving mode B in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to.

When the game is executed 800 times in the low-probability game state (non-time-saving, time-saving), it shifts to the second time-saving game state. Therefore, when the first time-saving game state of 799 times ends, the second time-saving game state is started through one game of the non-time-saving low probability game state. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, one game executed between the first time-saving game state (799 times) and the second time-saving game state may be referred to as "gap game". As shown in FIG. 11(a), the variation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to in the gap game. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to, the production mode is the time saving mode B, similarly to the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to.
In addition, in this embodiment, although the example in which the gap game is provided is described, the gap game may not be provided. That is, when the game is executed 800 times in the first time-saving gaming state, it may shift to the second time-saving gaming state.

In the specific example of FIG. 11(a), it is assumed that the second time-saving gaming state is started at time tb. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 11(a), it is assumed that the number of reservations is equal to or greater than the numerical value "1" at time tb. As shown in FIG. 11(a), in the second time-saving game state during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, including the first game and the game after the second time, and the effect mode is the time-saving game. Mode B. In addition, in the second time-saving game state during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, various effects (rush effect, etc.) when the second time-saving game state is started in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set are omitted. .

As can be understood from the above description, when the table scenario Sb3 is set, after shifting to the time saving mode B in the first time saving game state (799 times), the second time saving game state starts via the gap game. Over a series of games after that, the performance mode becomes the time-saving mode B. In the above configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state are a series of time-saving game states. However, in the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, it may be configured to notify that the first time-saving game state has ended (that the gap game has started) and that the second time-saving game state has started.

FIG. 11(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set. The table scenario Sb4 is set when the first time-saving game state of 799 times is started in the same manner as when the table scenario Sb3 is set (see FIG. 11(a) described above).

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the table scenario Sb4 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referenced from the first game to the last game in the first time-saving game state (799 times), and the effect mode is the time-saving game. Go to mode B. That is, in the period in which the table scenario Sb3 described above is set, after the continuous effect is executed in the game (100th game) in the middle of the first time saving game state (799 times), the transition to the time saving mode B is performed. During the period in which the scenario Sb4 is set, the first game in the first time-saving game state is shifted to the time-saving mode B. In the above configuration, in the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, the player is substantially notified that the first time-saving gaming state will continue 799 times immediately after the first time-saving gaming state starts.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), in the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, the variation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to in the gap game in the same manner as in the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, and the subsequent second time-saving gaming state Then, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to. In addition, during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, the production mode is the time reduction mode over a series of games of the first time reduction game state, the gap game and the second time reduction game state, as in the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set. become B.

During the period in which the above table scenario Sb4 is set, the player is made to recognize that the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state are a series of time-saving game states, similar to the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set. be able to. During the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, the rush effect is not executed at the start of the second time-saving gaming state, similarly to the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set.

As can be understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, a specific game (for example, the first game) in the second time-saving gaming state (the first game refers to Tax or Ts) started in the scenario setting period The variation pattern determination table T to be referred to is variable with the specific variation display in the second time-saving game state (Tbx is referred to in the first game) started in the scenario unset period.

FIGS. 12 and 13(a) to 13(c) are conceptual diagrams of specific examples of the variation pattern determination table.
In this embodiment, for each special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21), a random number for special symbol determination (won or lose a big hit), a random number for big hit symbol (big hit symbol), the number of reserved special symbols, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special symbol variation, the variation pattern is determined. 12 and 13(a) to 13(c), the numbers in the column of "reserved number" mean the number of reserved special figures corresponding to the column.

The main CPU 111 determines a variation pattern when the special symbols start to vary. In addition, the main CPU 111 generates a variation pattern specification command that can specify the determined variation pattern. The above variation pattern specification command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 in the output control process.

FIG. 12 and FIGS. 13(a) to 13(c) show effects (such as reach) executed by the effect executing means (eg, the image display device 31) when each variation pattern is determined. "Reach" in the present embodiment means that after a part of the combinations of the performance symbols GA for informing the shift to the special game (big hit game) is stopped and displayed, the rest of the performance symbols GA are displayed in a variable manner. means a continued state. For example, it is assumed that a combination of three performance symbols GA of "777" is set as the combination of performance symbols GA for notifying that the game will shift to a big hit game. In the above case, the state in which the two performance symbols GA are stopped at "7" and the remaining performance symbols GA are variably displayed is "reach".

Although detailed description is omitted, the variation pattern designation command of the present embodiment includes a first telegram indicating MODE and a second telegram indicating DATA. The first telegram (MODE) of the variation pattern specifying command indicating the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation display of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 20 is "E6H". On the other hand, the first electronic message (MODE) of the variation pattern specifying command indicating the variation pattern determined when the second special symbol display device 21 starts the variation display of the special symbols becomes "E7H". The second telegram (DATA) of the variation pattern specification command indicates a specific variation pattern number.

As a feature shown in FIG. 13, the immediate hit variation pattern (non-reach etc.) is more likely to be determined in the case of a big hit during the second time saving game state than in the case of a big win during the first time saving game state.

<Variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving gaming state>
FIG. 12 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a variation pattern determination table used in a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. As described above, any one of the variation pattern determination table Tn1, the variation pattern determination table Tn2 and the variation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state. FIG. 12 is a conceptual diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 among the above fluctuation pattern determination tables. It should be noted that the "fluctuation time" shown in FIG. 12 and FIGS. 13 (a) to (c) described later means the time from the start of the fluctuation of the special figure to the end of the fixed period.

In the variation pattern determination table Tn1, as the variation patterns of the special symbols of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21, variation pattern a (1x to 3x), variation pattern b (1x to 6x), variation pattern Any one of c (1x to 6x), variation pattern dx, variation pattern ex, variation pattern fx, and variation pattern g is determined.

The main CPU 111 determines the type of special symbol display device, the type of special symbol (a combination of the random number for special symbol determination and the random number for symbol), the number of reserved special symbols, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special symbol variation. to determine any of the variation patterns. The random number for reach determination has a random number range of "0 to 99" and is obtained before determining the variation pattern. Also, the random number for special symbol variation has a random number range of "0 to 99" and is obtained before determining the variation pattern.

However, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ready-to-win effect is always executed in the variation pattern in which the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol among the special symbols is stop-displayed. However, in the variation pattern in which the small winning symbols among the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the ready-to-win effect may not be executed. Therefore, when the special symbol corresponding to the big win or the small win is stopped and displayed, the reach determination random number value is not used in determining the variation pattern.

FIG. 12 shows an effect executed by the effect executing means such as the image display device 31 when the special symbol display device is variably displayed in each variation pattern. For example, in the variation pattern a (1x to 3x), a "normal ready-to-win effect" is executed. The "normal ready-to-win performance" described above is a ready-to-win performance in which the left and right symbols of the performance symbols GA displayed on the image display device 31 are temporarily stopped and the middle symbols fluctuate, and the expectation of winning the jackpot is relatively low.

In the variation pattern b (x1 to x6), "SP ready-to-win effect" is executed. The "SP ready-to-win effect" described above is a ready-to-win effect in which the left and right symbols of the effect symbols GA displayed on the image display device 31 are temporarily stopped in the same manner as the above-described normal ready-to-win effect. However, in the SP ready-to-win effect, a specific moving image (reach movie) that is not displayed in the normal ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 31 . When the above SP ready-to-win effect is executed, the possibility of being notified of the winning of the big win (the same three effect symbols GA are displayed) is higher than that of the normal ready-to-win effect.

In the variation pattern c (x1 to x6), "SPSP ready-to-win effect" is executed. The above "SPSP ready-to-win effect" is a ready-to-win effect in which the left and right symbols of the effect symbols GA displayed on the image display device 31 are temporarily stopped, like other ready-to-win effects. However, in the SPSP ready-to-win effect, a specific moving image that is not displayed in other ready-to-win effects is displayed on the image display device 31 . When the above SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed, there is a higher possibility that a big win will be reported after that than the SP ready-to-win effect.

In this embodiment, in the game in which the SP ready-to-win effect is executed, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed before the SP ready-to-win effect. That is, it develops from normal reach production to SP reach production. Further, in the game in which the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed, the normal ready-to-win effect develops to the SP ready-to-win effect, and the SP ready-to-win effect develops to the SPSP ready-to-win effect. However, there may be a case where the normal reach effect develops directly into the SPSP reach effect.

For example, it is assumed that the first special symbol display device 20 stops displaying a special symbol A1 (big hit). In the above case, as shown in FIG. 12, if the special symbol variation random number is any of the numerical values "0 to 3", the variation pattern a1x is determined. In the above fluctuation pattern a1x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over approximately 40000 ms. In addition, in the variation pattern a1x, the image display device 31 executes a normal ready-to-win effect, and executes an effect of notifying the variable probability big hit.

When the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern b1x is determined if the special symbol variation random number value is any of the numerical values "4 to 15". Also, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "16 to 34", the variation pattern b2x is determined. Furthermore, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "35 to 65", the variation pattern c1x is determined, and if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "66 to 98", variation If the pattern c2x is determined and the special symbol variation random number value is "99", the variation pattern g is determined.

In the fluctuation pattern b1x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over approximately 60000 ms. In addition, in the variation pattern b1x, the SP reach 1 effect is executed in the image display device 31, and the probability variation big hit is reported. Similarly, in the variation pattern b2x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 60000 ms, the SP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and the probability variation big hit is notified.

In the fluctuation pattern c1x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over approximately 70000 ms. In addition, in the variation pattern c1x, the SPSP reach 1 effect is executed in the image display device 31, and a variable probability big hit is announced. Similarly, in the variation pattern c2x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 70000 ms, the SPSP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and the probability variation big hit is notified. In the variation pattern g, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 80000 ms, the image display device 31 executes the all-rotation ready-to-win effect, and the probability variation big hit is notified.

When the special symbol A2 (short hit probability variation) is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern dx is determined regardless of the special symbol variation random number value. In the above fluctuation pattern dx, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over approximately 20000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern dx, the image display device 31 executes a short hit effect. The above short hit production is a production for notifying that a small hit or a short hit (probability variable big hit) has been won.

As shown in FIG. 12, when the special symbol A3 (normal jackpot) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 3", the variation pattern a2x is determined. In the above fluctuation pattern a2x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over approximately 40000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern a2x, the image display device 31 executes a normal ready-to-win effect, and a normal jackpot notification effect is executed.

When the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern b3x is determined if the special symbol variation random number value is any of the numerical values "4 to 15". Also, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "16 to 34", the variation pattern b4x is determined, and if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "35 to 65", variation If the pattern c3x is determined and the special symbol variation random number is any of the numerical values "66 to 99", the variation pattern c4x is determined.

In the fluctuation pattern b3x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over approximately 60000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern b3x, the SP reach 1 effect is executed in the image display device 31, and a normal big hit is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern b4x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 60000 ms, the SP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a normal jackpot is notified.

In the fluctuation pattern c3x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 70000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern c3x, the SPSP reach 1 effect is executed in the image display device 31, and a normal jackpot is announced. Similarly, in the variation pattern c4x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 70000 ms, the SPSP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a normal jackpot is announced.

When the special symbol K (small hit) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, as in the case where the special symbol A2 (probability variable short hit) is stopped and displayed, regardless of the special symbol variation random value, A variation pattern dx is determined.

As shown in FIG. 12, when the special symbol H is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern according to the combination of the first special symbol reservation number, the random number for reach determination and the random number for special symbol variation. is determined.

For example, it is assumed that the number of reserved first special symbols is "0 to 2". In the above case, if the random value for reach determination is "0 to 69", the change pattern ex is determined without executing the reach effect. In the above fluctuation pattern ex, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over approximately 3000 ms. In addition, in the variation pattern ex, an effect of notifying a failure is executed after the normal effect (normal variation) is executed.

On the other hand, when the first special symbol reserved number is "0 to 2", if the random number value for reach determination is "70 to 99", the reach performance corresponding to the random number value for special symbol variation is executed. Specifically, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 27", the variation pattern a3x is determined. Also, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "28 to 48", the variation pattern b5x is determined, and if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "49 to 77", variation A pattern b6x is determined. Furthermore, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "78 to 88", the variation pattern c5x is determined, and if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "89 to 99", variation A pattern c6x is determined.

In the fluctuation pattern a3x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over approximately 35000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern a3x, the image display device 31 executes a normal ready-to-win effect, and a loss is notified.

In the fluctuation pattern b5x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 55000ms. Also, in the variation pattern b5x, the SP reach 1 effect is executed in the image display device 31, and a loss is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern b6x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 55000 ms, the SP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a loss is notified.

In the fluctuation pattern c5x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over approximately 65000 ms. In addition, in the variation pattern c5x, the SPSP reach 1 effect is executed in the image display device 31, and a loss is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern c6x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 65000 ms, the SPSP ready-to-win 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a loss is notified.

Also, it is assumed that the number of reserved first special symbols is "3" when the special symbol H is stopped and displayed. In the above case, if the random number for ready-to-win determination is "0 to 89", the ready-to-win effect is not executed, and the variation pattern fx is determined regardless of the random number for special symbol variation. In the above fluctuation pattern fx, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 2000 ms. In addition, in the variation pattern fx, an effect of notifying a failure is executed after the normal effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the first special symbol reserved number is "3", if the reach determination random number value is "90 to 99", the reach performance corresponding to the special symbol variation random number value is executed. Specifically, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 27", the variation pattern a3x is determined. Also, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "28 to 48", the variation pattern b5x is determined, and if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "49 to 77", variation A pattern b6x is determined. Furthermore, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "78 to 88", the variation pattern c5x is determined, and if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "89 to 99", variation A pattern c6x is determined. Although detailed description is omitted, the variation pattern in the non-time-saving gaming state of the second special symbol display device 21 is determined by the same method as the variation pattern of the first special symbol display device 20 described above.

<Variation pattern determination table for time saving gaming state>
FIG. 13(a) to FIG. 13(c) are conceptual diagrams of an example of a variation pattern determination table used in a low-probability time-saving gaming state. As described above, in the time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state, second time-saving gaming state), variation pattern determination table Ta1, variation pattern determination table Ta2, variation pattern determination table Tj1, variation pattern determination table Tj2, variation pattern determination table Any one of Tax, variation pattern determination table Ts and variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to.

FIG. 13(a) is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the variation pattern determination table Tax. The variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, for example, in the second time-saving game state started (via the jackpot game) during the scenario setting period in which the table scenario S is set.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), in a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, one of the variation patterns J1a to J1n is determined by lottery. In the above game, as the variation pattern of the second special figure, "immediate hit effect (probable variable big hit, normal big hit)", "straight line effect (probable variable big hit, normal big hit)", "7 pattern reach (probable variable big hit)", " Variation patterns (J1a to J1k) in which short variation (losing),” “straight line false effect (losing)”, and “reach swing (losing)” are executed can be determined. In addition, in the above game, as the variation pattern of the first special figure, the variation patterns (J1l to J1n) in which "special 1 hit (probability variable jackpot, normal jackpot)" and "special 1 loss (loss)" are executed are determined. obtain. However, in the time-saving gaming state, since the game is played rightward and the second special figure fluctuates, the fluctuation pattern J1k is usually determined from the fluctuation pattern J1a.

The immediate hit performance is a performance in which the time from the start of the variation of the special figure to the announcement of the winning of the big hit is relatively short. For example, in the immediate hit production, after about 0.5 seconds from the start of the variation of the special figure, the production pattern GA (for example, "777") corresponding to the big hit pattern is displayed (temporarily stopped). In addition, after the production design GA stops (after about 0.5 seconds), for example, the production design GA corresponding to the special design B2 (normal design) corresponds to the special design B1 (variable design). An effect to be promoted to the effect symbol GA is executed. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the performance symbol GA corresponding to the big-hit symbol may be referred to as "big-hit performance symbol GA". In the immediate hit effect described above, the ready-to-win effect is not executed, and the variable display of the three symbol images stops substantially simultaneously. It should be noted that the length of the immediate hit effect can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the immediate hit effect, the big win effect pattern GA is stopped and displayed about 0.5 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation, and after that, the big win game starts after about 0.5 seconds of confirmation period. It may be configured to be

The direct alignment effect is an effect in which the big win effect pattern GA is stopped and displayed without executing the ready-to-win effect, as in the immediate hit effect. However, the time from the start of the variable display of the special figure to the announcement of the winning of the big hit game is longer in the straight line effect than the immediate hit effect. For example, in the direct matching effect, the big hit effect symbol GA is displayed (temporarily stopped) after about 15 seconds from the start of the variable display of the special figure. The straight-aligned fake effect is an effect in which the same effect as the straight-aligned effect is executed halfway, and finally, the effect pattern GA corresponding to the failure is stopped and displayed.

The 7-symbol ready-to-win is an effect in which a jackpot effect pattern GA (a combination of 777 symbols) corresponding to the probability variable jackpot is displayed. Specifically, in the 7-symbol ready-to-win, two performance symbols GA representing the number "7" are temporarily stopped, the ready-to-win performance is executed, and then the big-hit performance symbol GA representing the symbol combination "777" is displayed. be. For example, in the 7-pattern reach, after about 20 seconds from the start of the variation of the special figure, the ready-to-win production is executed (probably variable big hit is substantially notified), and then after about 20 seconds, the big hit production pattern GA is displayed. be. As can be seen from FIG. 13(a), the 7-symbol reach is the longest (about 50 seconds) among the variation patterns that can be determined in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to. In the ready-to-win game, the same effect as the seven-symbol ready-to-win game is executed halfway through, and finally the ready-to-win effect is not executed, and the effect pattern GA corresponding to the failure is stopped and displayed. According to the above ready-to-win provocation, it is possible to improve the expectation that the 7-symbol ready-to-win game may be executed.

Short variation (loss) is an effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed and the effect symbol GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the short fluctuation, the production pattern GA is stopped and displayed after about 0.5 seconds from the start of the special figure fluctuation, and then the production pattern GA is stopped and displayed for a fixed period of 0.5 seconds. state is maintained. The long variation (loss) is an effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed and the effect symbol GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the long variation, the effect symbol GA is stopped and displayed after about 3.5 seconds from the start of the special figure variation, and then the effect symbol GA is stopped and displayed for a fixed period of 0.5 seconds. state is maintained.

As can be understood from FIG. 13(a), the instant hit effect is executed with a probability of about 8/10 in the game in which the probability variable jackpot or the normal jackpot is won. That is, in the second time-saving gaming state (the game in which Tax is referred to), the instant hit effect is executed in most (about 80%) of the games in which the big hit is won. However, the probability that the instant hit effect is executed can be appropriately changed. For example, it may be executed with a probability of about 1/10 when the variable probability jackpot is won, and executed with a probability of about 1/2 when the normal jackpot is won. In the above configuration, the expectation for the probability variable big win can be improved when the straight line effect and the 7-symbol ready-to-win are executed than when the immediate hit effect is executed. That is, it can be said that the longer the time until the big-hit performance symbol GA is displayed, the more the expectation for the variable-probability big-hit can be improved.

The instant hit effect and the direct matching effect described above can be executed both when the normal jackpot is won and when the probability variable jackpot is won. On the other hand, the 7-symbol ready-to-win can be executed only when winning the probability variable jackpot. In the above configuration, in the time saving mode B in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to (see FIG. 9 described above), when the ready-to-win effect is executed with 7 symbols, the probability variable big hit is substantially notified. Therefore, in the time-saving mode B, it is possible to improve the interest of the performance (7-symbol reach, reach-flavor) in which the presence or absence of execution of the reach performance is notified. However, in the game of the time-saving mode B in which the big hit lottery is lost, the ready-to-win effect can be executed with 7 symbols.

FIG. 13(b) is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the variation pattern determination table Tbx. The variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to in the second time-saving game state started in the scenario unset period (without going through the jackpot game). In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T to be referred to in the second time-saving game state is different depending on whether the jackpot game is passed or not, but in each of the above cases, the variation pattern determination table T may be common.

As shown in FIG. 13(b), in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to, the variation pattern J2g can be determined from the variation pattern J2a. In the game in which the variation pattern J2a is determined, the above-described immediate hit effect (probability variable big win) is executed. Further, in the game in which the variation pattern J2b is determined, the above-described immediate hit effect (normal jackpot) is executed, in the game in which the variation pattern J2c is determined, the above-described short variation (losing) is performed, and the variation pattern J2d is performed. In the determined game, the above-described long variation (losing) is performed, in the game in which the variation pattern J2e is determined, the above-described immediate hit effect (variable big hit) is performed, In the game in which the variation pattern J2f is determined, In the game in which the above-described immediate hit effect (normal jackpot) is executed and the variation pattern J2g is determined, the above-mentioned special 1 loss (loss) is executed.

As understood from the above description, the 7-symbol ready-to-win which is performed in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to is not performed in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to. Further, the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to in the second time-saving game state, and the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the first time-saving game state (see FIG. 9 described above). The above configuration can also be rephrased that the variation pattern that can be determined is variable between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state.

FIG. 13(c) is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the variation pattern determination table Ta1. The variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to from the 1st to the 90th game in the first time-saving game state in which the table scenario Sb2 or the table scenario Sb3 is set.

As described above, the period in which the variation pattern determination table Ta1 (Ta2) is referred to is the time saving mode A, and the period in which the variation pattern determination table Tax (Tbx) is referred to is the time saving mode B. Therefore, as can be seen from FIGS. 13(a) to 13(c), the game (time saving mode A) in which the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to, and the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax (Tbx) is referred to ( The effects that can be executed are different in the time saving mode B). Specifically, the production executed in one production mode of the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B is not executed in the other production mode. However, you may provide the production|presentation performed in both the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B in common. In other words, although the effects executed in each effect mode are different in principle, a specific effect may be executed in common in each effect mode. Moreover, it is good also as a structure with all the production|presentations performed in the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B being common. Furthermore, although the production|presentation performed by each production|presentation mode is common in principle, it is good also as a structure performed only by one production|presentation mode about specific production|presentation.

In the present embodiment, in each game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, the average time of the period during which the effect symbol GA is variably displayed (the period during which the symbol image is scrolled) (hereinafter simply referred to as the “average variation of the effect symbol GA time") is shorter than the average variation time of the effect symbols GA in each game with reference to the variation pattern determination table Ta1 and the average variation time of the effect symbols GA in each game with reference to the variation pattern determination table Ta2. That is, the average variation time of the effect symbol GA is shorter in the second time-saving game state than in the first time-saving game state in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. Also, the average variation time of the performance symbols GA in the period in which the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to is shorter than the average variation time of the performance symbols GA in each game in which the other variation pattern determination table T is referred to. However, depending on the table scenario S, the average variation time of the production symbol GA may be shorter in the first time-saving game state than in the second time-saving game state.
That is, the average variation time during the second time-saving gaming state tends to be shorter than the average variation time during the first time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the average variation time of the effect symbol GA is the number of games in which the jackpot is won in the second time-saving gaming state more than the game in which the jackpot is won in the first time-saving gaming state, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. shorter. However, depending on the table scenario S, the average fluctuation time of the performance symbols GA may be shorter in the game in which the jackpot is won in the first time-saving game state than in the game in which the jackpot is won in the second time-saving game state. .

As described above, the remaining number N stored in the main RAM 113 is decremented by "1" in each game, and when the remaining number N is decremented to "0", the second time-saving game state is started. The above remaining number of times N is retained by the backup power supply even when the power is turned off. Therefore, at the opening of the game arcade where the game machine 1 is installed, it is possible to leave the previous day's remaining number of times N unchanged. However, if a clear operation is performed when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the remaining count N is initialized.

In the present embodiment, whether or not the remaining number of times N before power-off is left untouched immediately after the start of the game is concealed, and thereafter, a configuration is adopted in which notification is possible. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the player can be given the pleasure of predicting whether or not the remaining number of times N will remain unchanged in the period immediately after the start of the game. The above configuration will be described in detail below.

FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 14(a) is a schematic diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state. The image display device 31 provides, in each game, a production symbol GA (x, y, w), a pending image GB (x, y), a fourth symbol GC (1, 2), a pending number image GD (1, 2) and Various images including the small pattern Ga are displayed.

The effect symbol GA is variably displayed during the period when the special symbol display devices (20, 21) are variably displayed, and is statically displayed during the period when the special symbol display device is statically displayed. In addition, the effect symbol GA stops and displays a combination of symbols corresponding to the special symbols that are stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. A specific example of FIG. 14(a) assumes a case where a lost symbol (special symbol H) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. In the above case, for example, the performance symbol GA stops displaying the symbol combination "782".

In addition, the performance symbol GA stops displaying the symbol combination (for example, "777") corresponding to the big winning symbol when the special symbol display device stops displaying the big winning symbol. Similarly, the performance symbol GA stops displaying the symbol combination (for example, "757") corresponding to the small winning symbol when the special symbol display device stops displaying the small winning symbol. The production design GA includes production design GAx (see FIG. 14(a)), production design GAy (see FIG. 17(b)) and production design GAw. The production pattern GAx is displayed in the normal mode and the previous mode. Also, the production pattern GAy is displayed in the time saving mode A, and the production pattern GAw is displayed in the time saving mode B.

The fourth symbol GC indicates the fluctuation state of the special symbol display devices (20, 21). Specifically, the fourth symbol GC is stopped and displayed during the period when the special symbol display device is stopped and displayed. For example, during the period in which the special symbol display device is statically displayed, the fourth symbol GC is statically displayed in the first color (for example, white). On the other hand, the fourth symbol GC is variably displayed during the period when the special symbol display device is variably displayed. For example, the fourth pattern GC is alternately displayed in the first color and the second color (for example, red) during the period when the special pattern display device is variably displayed.

The fourth pattern GC includes a fourth pattern GC1 and a fourth pattern GC2. A fourth symbol GC1 indicates a variation mode of the first special symbol display device 20, and a fourth symbol GC2 indicates a variation mode of the second special symbol display device 21. FIG. Specifically, the fourth symbol GC1 is variably displayed during the period when the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed, and is statically displayed during the period when the first special symbol display device 20 is statically displayed. Similarly, the fourth symbol GC2 is variably displayed during the period when the second special symbol display device 21 is variably displayed, and is statically displayed during the period when the second special symbol display device 21 is statically displayed.

In the present embodiment, a common fourth symbol GC is displayed in the low probability non-work-time-saving gaming state, the low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the high-probability time-saving gaming state. That is, the common fourth symbol GC is displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state. Specifically, a common fourth symbol GC is displayed in each game state except for the big hit game. However, the configuration may be such that different fourth symbols GC are displayed according to the game state. Also, in the jackpot game, the configuration may be such that the fourth symbol GC is displayed.

The pending number image GD(1, 2) displays the pending number (first pending number, second pending number). Specifically, the pending number image GD includes a pending number image GD1 and a pending number image GD2. The pending number image GD1 displays the first pending number. Also, the number of reservations image GD2 displays the second number of reservations. In the specific example of FIG. 14(a), it is assumed that the number of first reservations is four and the number of second reservations is zero.

The holding number image GD of the present embodiment is common in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, the low probability time-saving gaming state, and the high probability time-saving gaming state, similarly to the above-described fourth symbol GC. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state, the common pending number image GD is displayed. Specifically, a common pending number image GD is displayed in each game state except for the jackpot game. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which different pending number images GD are displayed according to the game state. Further, in the jackpot game, the configuration may be such that the number-of-holds image GD is displayed.

The small pattern Ga is composed of three patterns (upper pattern, middle pattern, and lower pattern) in the same manner as the effect pattern GA. In addition, the small symbol Ga is variably displayed during the period when the special symbol display devices (20, 21) are variably displayed, and is statically displayed during the period when the special symbol display device is statically displayed. In this embodiment, depending on the effect to be executed, the effect symbol GA may be temporarily hidden. Even in the above cases, the small pattern Ga is continuously displayed in principle.

The small symbols Ga stop-display the symbol combinations corresponding to the big-hit symbols when the big-hit symbols are statically displayed on the special symbol display device. Further, the small symbol Ga stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning symbol when the special symbol display device stops displaying the small winning symbol. Similarly, for the small symbols Ga, when the special symbol display device stops displaying the missing symbols, the symbol combination corresponding to the missing symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, the small symbols Ga are, in principle, stopped and displayed in the same manner as the performance symbols GA when the performance symbols GA are stopped and displayed. For example, when a big win is won and the production pattern GA is stopped and displayed at ``7.7.7'', the small pattern GA is also stopped at ``7.7.7'' and a small prize is won and the production pattern is displayed. When the GA is stop-displayed at "7.5.7", the small pattern Ga is also stop-displayed at "7.5.7".

In this embodiment, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low probability non-work-time-saving gaming state, the low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the high-probability time-saving gaming state. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state, the common small symbol Ga is displayed. Specifically, common small symbols Ga are displayed in each game state except for the big hit game. However, in the jackpot game, the small symbol Ga may be displayed. In this embodiment, the common small symbol Ga is displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20 and the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21, but the first special symbol display A small pattern Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may be provided separately from the small pattern Ga corresponding to the variable display of the device 20 . In that case, the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may be in a common display mode with the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20. A display mode different from the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the 1 special symbol display device 20 may be used.

In this embodiment, a different background image GH is displayed for each effect mode. For example, in the normal mode and the previous mode, a background image GHx (an example of the first background image) is displayed (see FIG. 14(a)). However, the background image GH may be shared in all or part of each effect mode. The reserved images GB include a reserved image GBx (see FIG. 14(a)), a reserved image GBy (see FIG. 17(b)), and a reserved image GBw (see FIG. 17(a)). In the reserved image GBx, in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode, the above-described random value (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "determination information") is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area (first storage unit to fourth storage unit). displayed when Specifically, a plurality of reserved images GBx corresponding to each determination information stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area are displayed. The reserved image GBy is displayed in the time saving mode A when the determination information is stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area. The reserved image GBw is displayed in the time saving mode B when the determination information is stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), the number-of-games image GE is displayed in the normal mode and the previous mode. The number-of-games image GE displays the number of games in the low-probability gaming state. Therefore, when the number displayed by the number-of-games image GE ("550" in the specific example of FIG. 14(a)) is added to "800", then the transition from the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state be possible. In the above configuration, there is an advantage that the player can easily grasp the number of games played until the transition to the second time-saving gaming state.

However, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then turned on (turned off/on), regardless of the value of the remaining number N stored in the main RAM 113, the number-of-games image GE is displayed as a number. Display "0". That is, when the power is turned off/on while the remaining number N is subtracted from the initial value "800", the game number image GE displays the number "0" although the remaining number N is not the initial value. In the above case, before the game number image GE displays the number "800", the remaining number N is subtracted to the number "0", and the second time saving game state is started. On the other hand, if the clear operation is performed when the power is turned on, the remaining count N is initialized. In the above case, in the game in which the game number image GE is added to the number "800", the remaining number N is subtracted to the number "0", and the second time saving game state is started.

As can be understood from the above description, it is not possible to grasp whether or not the remaining count N is left unchanged (whether or not there is a clear operation) in the period immediately after the power is turned off and on. Specifically, in the period immediately after the power is turned off/on, the number of games up to the second time-saving gaming state cannot be specified from the number-of-games image GE. With the above configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the remaining number of times N will remain unchanged in the period immediately after the start of the game.

FIG. 14B is a diagram showing a specific example of the stationary notification image GI. The deferment notification image GI is displayed on condition that the remaining number of times N is deferred before and after the power is turned off/on. Also, the stationary notification image GI is displayed in the area RI of the screen shown in FIG. Specifically, the stationary notification image GI is the 51st game since the power was turned on (the game in which the number of the number of games image GE is added to "50"), or the 101st game after the power is turned on (the number of games image GE). number is added to "100").

According to the above configuration, it is notified that the remaining number of times N has been deferred by the deferment notification image GI. The number in the number-of-games image GE is added at the end of the game (at the time of receiving the confirmation command). Therefore, it can also be said that the upper position notification image GI is started to be displayed in a game in which the number of game times image GE is "50" at the start or in a game in which the number of game times image GE is "100" at the time of start. be. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, "a game in which the number of game times image GE is "X" at the start" (a game in which the number of game number image GE is added to "X+1" at the end) is simply referred to as "game number image GE". The number may be described as "X" game".

In addition, the stationary notification image GI is displayed on the condition that the remaining number of times N is equal to or less than the numerical value "200" in the specific number of games. For example, in the 51st game since the power was turned on, if the remaining number of times N is equal to or less than "200", the stationary notification image GI is displayed in the game. On the other hand, in the 51st game since the power was turned on, if the remaining number of times N is greater than the numerical value "200", the stationary notification image GI is not displayed in the game. However, even if the stationary notification image GI is not displayed in the 51st game after the power is turned on, if the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "200" or less in the 101st game after the power is turned on, 101 will be displayed after the power is turned on. A stationary notification image GI is displayed in the first game. It should be noted that the stationary notification image GI is displayed in a common manner regardless of whether it is displayed in the 51st game after the power is turned on or in the 101st game after the power is turned on.

Even in the 101st game after the power is turned on, if the remaining number of times N is greater than the numerical value "200", the stationary notification image GI is not displayed even if the remaining number of times N is left unchanged. Also, the stationary notification image GI is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then disappears (see FIG. 14(d), which will be described later). Furthermore, if the stationary notification image GI is displayed in the 51st game after the power is turned on, it is not displayed in the 101st game after the power is turned on. A configuration in which a predetermined sound is output when the stationary notification image GI is displayed is preferable.

FIG. 14C is a diagram showing a specific example of the remaining count image GN. The remaining number image GN displays the actual remaining number of games until the second time-saving game state is started. That is, the remaining number image GN displays the current value of the remaining number N. FIG. The remaining number of times image GN is displayed, for example, in the area RN of the screen shown in FIG. 14(a). In this embodiment, both the number-of-games image GE and the number-of-games-to-remain image GN are displayed simultaneously (in parallel). However, the remaining number of times image GN is not displayed in the period immediately after the power is turned on. With the above configuration, the current value of the remaining number of times N can be kept secret in the period immediately after the power is turned on.

The remaining number image GN starts to be displayed from the game in which the stationary notification image GI is displayed, and is displayed in the subsequent normal mode and previous mode games. However, as described above, the stationary notification image GI may not be displayed even once. In the above case, the display of the remaining number of times image GN starts in the 101st game after the power is turned on. Note that the remaining number of times image GN may be temporarily hidden during a period in which a predetermined effect (for example, SP ready-to-win or SPSP ready-to-play) is executed.

FIG. 14D is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a period during which the stationary notification image GI is displayed and a period during which the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in a game in which the stationary notification image GI is displayed. . In FIG. 14(d), it is assumed that the game in which the stationary notification image GI is displayed starts at time ts and ends at time te.

As shown in FIG. 14(d), the stationary notification image GI starts to be displayed immediately after the game is started, and disappears after a predetermined time. At substantially the same time that the stationary notification image GI is hidden, the display of the remaining number of times image GN is started. The remaining number of times image GN is continuously displayed in subsequent games, and is hidden after the second time-saving game state is started. In the above configuration, the stationary notification image GI is displayed prior to the remaining number of times image GN. Therefore, after notifying that the remaining number of times N has been deferred by the deferment notification image GI, the actual remaining number of times N is notified by the remaining number of times image GN.

Suppose a contrast in which the remaining number of times image GN is displayed prior to the stationary notification image GI. Whether or not the number-of-games image N is left in place can be determined from the actual number of games played since the power was turned on (the number displayed by the number-of-games image GE) and the number displayed by the number-of-games image GN. For example, when the remaining number image GN displays a number other than "700" in the 101st game after the power is turned on, it is understood that the remaining number N is left unchanged. Therefore, in the above-described comparison, whether or not the remaining number of times N has been deferred is substantially notified before the stationary notification image GI is displayed. occurs. According to this embodiment, the above inconvenience is suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14(d), the stationary notification image GI starts to be displayed in the opening period Pf of the game, and disappears before the opening period Pf ends. The opening period Pf described above is a predetermined period of time after the start of the game. Specifically, when the ready-to-win effect is executed in a game in which the stationary notification image GI can be displayed, the opening period Pf is a time shorter than the period from the start of the game until the ready-to-win effect is executed. According to the above configuration, the display period of the stationary notification image GI ends before the ready-to-win effect is started. Therefore, the inconvenience that the stationary notification image GI makes it difficult for the image displayed in the ready-to-win effect to attract attention is suppressed. The opening period Pf is shorter than the shortest variation pattern determined by the game in which the stationary notification image GI can be displayed.

It should be noted that the display effects of the stationary notification image GI and the number-of-remaining-numbers image GN are executed even when a big win is won in the current game. Assume that in a game in which the remaining number of games image GN is scheduled to be displayed, the remaining number of games image GN is not displayed when a big win is won. In the above configuration, there is an inconvenience that the winning of the jackpot is perceived at the time when the display of the remaining number of times image GN is not started in the opening period Pf. Also, in a game in which the stationary notification image GI is scheduled to be displayed, the same inconvenience may occur in a configuration in which the stationary notification image GI is not displayed when a jackpot is won. According to the configuration of this embodiment, there is an advantage that the above inconvenience is suppressed.

FIGS. 15(a) to 15(d) are diagrams for explaining specific examples of when the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed. FIGS. 15(a) to 15(d) show the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state at each point in time, in addition to the period during which each of the above images is displayed.

FIG. 15(a) shows the period when the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed in the period from immediately after the jackpot game ends until the second time-saving game state starts. As shown in FIG. 15(a), the remaining number image GN is displayed immediately after the jackpot game ends. Also, the remaining number of times image GN is hidden when the second time-saving game state is started. However, when the second time-saving game state is started, if the number of reservations is a numerical value "0", the display of the remaining number of times image GN is continued (see FIG. 19 described later).

As shown in FIG. 15(a), the stationary notification image GI includes a game in which the number-of-games image GE displays the number "50" and a number-of-games image GE displays the number "100" in the period after the end of the jackpot game. is not displayed in any game, including games that display In the above configuration, even if the remaining number of times N is set, there is a case where the above image does not notify the fact even once. For example, when a jackpot game is won by the 50th game after the power is turned on, the stationary notification image GI is not displayed, and the remaining number of times N at power-on is not notified by the remaining number of times image GN. Therefore, it is not notified whether or not the remaining number of times N has been deferred.

FIG. 15(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the display period of each image in the period from immediately after power-on to the start of the second time-saving gaming state. In the specific example of FIG. 15(b), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is deferred. Specifically, it is assumed that the remaining number of times N at power-on is a numerical value "X". Further, in the specific example of FIG. 15(b), the remaining number of times N (numerical value "X-50") in the game in which the number of games image GE displays the number "50" (the 51st game since the power was turned on) is the numerical value "200". ” Assume the following cases.

In the above specific example of FIG. 15(b), the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed in the game in which the number of games image GE displays the numerical value "50". Specifically, the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed in the initial period Pf described above. If the stationary notification image GI is displayed in a game in which the number-of-games image GE displays the number "50", the stationary notification image GI is not displayed in the game in which the number-of-games image GE displays the number "100". As shown in FIG. 15B, the stationary notification image GI is hidden before the beginning period Pf ends. On the other hand, the remaining number of times image GN is continuously displayed until the second time saving game state is started.

FIG. 15(c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the display period of each image in the period from immediately after power-on until the second time-saving game state starts. In the specific example of FIG. 15(c), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is deferred, as in FIG. 15(b) described above. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the remaining number of times N is the numerical value "X", and the number of games image GE displays the number "100" (the 101st game after the power is turned on). −100”) is less than or equal to “200”. Further, in the above specific example, it is assumed that the remaining number of times N (numerical value "X-50") in the game in which the number-of-games image GE displays the number "50" is greater than the numerical value "200". In the above specific example of FIG. 15(c), in a game in which the number-of-games image GE displays the number "50", the stationary notification image GI and the number-of-games image GN remaining are not displayed, and the number-of-games image GE displays the number "100". is displayed, a stationary notification image GI and a remaining count image GN are displayed.

FIG. 15D is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the display period of each image in the period from immediately after power-on until the second time-saving gaming state starts. In the specific example of FIG. 15(d), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is deferred, as in FIGS. 15(b) and 15(c). Specifically, when the power is turned on, the remaining number of times N is the numerical value "X", and the number of games image GE displays the number "100" (the 101st game after the power is turned on). −100”) is greater than the numerical value “200”. In the specific example of FIG. 15(d), in any game including the game in which the number of games image GE displays the number "50" and the game in which the number of games image GE displays the number "100", The notification image GI is not displayed. On the other hand, the remaining number image GN starts to be displayed in a game in which the game number image GE displays the number "100".

FIGS. 16(a) to 16(f) are diagrams for explaining each screen M (1 to 7) displayed at the start of the second time-saving gaming state. Although details will be described later, each screen M displayed at the start of the second time-saving gaming state changes depending on whether or not the table scenario S is set. In addition, each screen M displayed at the start of the second time-saving gaming state also changes according to the type of the table scenario S that has been set. FIGS. 16A to 16F are schematic diagrams of screens M displayed during a period in which table scenario Sb2 among table scenarios S is set.

FIG. 16(a) is a schematic diagram of the screen M1 displayed immediately after the first game in the second time-saving game state is started. The screen M1 is displayed for a predetermined time after the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state. During the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the effect mode immediately before the second time-saving game state is started becomes the previous mode. As described above, in the previous mode, the background image GHx, the effect symbol GAx, the pending image GBx, and the number-of-games image GE are displayed. As shown in FIG. 16(a), in the present embodiment, the above images displayed in the previous mode are continuously displayed even immediately after the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state.

Also, in the previous mode, the remaining number of times image GN is displayed. As shown in FIG. 16(a), the remaining number image GN is continuously displayed even immediately after the start of the first game in the second time saving game state. Specifically, the remaining number of times image GN displays the number "0" as the number of remaining games until the second time-saving gaming state is started. The number of the remaining number image GN changes color when the number of remaining games until the second time-saving gaming state is started is subtracted to a predetermined number (for example, 5 times) or less. For example, in a game in which the number of remaining games until the start of the second time-saving gaming state is greater than a predetermined number of times, the number of the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in white, and the number of remaining games until the second time-saving gaming state is started. is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the numbers of the remaining number of times image GN are displayed in red.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), when the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, a right-handed image GS1 is displayed. In addition, although it will be described in detail later, when the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", regardless of whether the next game (the first game in the second time-saving game state) is immediately started, the It shifts to the 2 o'clock short game state. Specifically, it is assumed that the number of pending games is "0" at the time when the game in which the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0" is finished. In the above case, immediately after the transition to the second time-saving game state, it shifts to the customer waiting state. In the customer waiting state described above, the right-handed image GS1 is displayed.

FIG. 16(b) is a schematic diagram of the screen M2 displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. The screen M2 is displayed by switching from the screen M1 described above, and is displayed for a predetermined period of time. As shown in FIG. 16(b), the screen M2 displays a number-of-games image GE, a background image GHx, a small symbol Ga, and a pending image GBx, like the screen M1. However, when the screen M1 is switched to the screen M2, the remaining number of times image GN is hidden and the start notification image Gn is displayed. The start notification image Gn is an image for notifying that the second time-saving gaming state has started. For example, a message indicating that the second time-saving gaming state has started is displayed in the start notification image Gn. When the screen M1 is switched to the screen M2, the effect image GAx is hidden, and the start notification image Gn is displayed in the area where the effect image GAx was displayed (substantially the center of the screen).

FIG. 16(c) is a schematic diagram of the screen M3 displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. The screen M3 is displayed by switching from the screen M2 described above, and is displayed for a predetermined period of time. As shown in FIG. 16(c), on the screen M3, each image including the small pattern Ga is displayed in the same manner as on the screen M2. Also, the effect image GAx is not displayed on the screen M3 (similar to the screen M2). However, the effect image GA may be displayed on the screen M2 and the screen M3.

As shown in FIG. 16(c), the start notification image Gn, the right shot image GS1, the hold image GBx, the number of games image GE, and the background image GHx displayed on the screen M2 are hidden on the screen M3. Specifically, shielding images GF (GF1, GF2) are displayed on the screen M3. The shielding image GF is an image that shields the background image GHx to make it difficult to see (including cases where it is substantially impossible). The shielding image GF of this embodiment shields substantially the entire area of the background image GHx. However, it is sufficient if the background image GHx is difficult to see when the shielding image GF is displayed, and the shielding image GF may shield part of the background image GHx.

The shielding image GF is an image representing a sliding door, and includes a left shielding image GF1 and a right shielding image GF2. The shielding image GF is displayed prior to the start notification image Gn, the right shot image GS1, the pending image GBx, the number of games image GE and the background image GHx (in front of each image). The left shielding image GF1 is displayed moving from the left side of the image display device 31 to the center side while the screen M2 is being displayed. Further, the right shielding image GF2 is displayed by moving from the right side of the image display device 31 to the center side while the screen M2 is being displayed. That is, when the screen M3 is displayed, the image display device 31 displays the operation of closing the fusuma. In the screen M3, the position of the right side of the left shielding image GF1 substantially matches the position of the left side of the right shielding image GF2. However, an image representing something other than the fusuma may be employed as the shielding image GF.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the right shot image GS1 is hidden on the screen M2. On the other hand, the right shot image GS2 is displayed on the screen M3. Like the right-handed image GS1, the right-handed image GS2 is an image for instructing the right-handed player to play the game. In the above configuration, the image display device 31 instructs to hit to the right on both the screen M2 and the screen M3. Note that the right-handed shot image GS1 may be displayed on both the screen M2 and the screen M3. Specifically, the right hitting image GS1 may be displayed in front of the shielding image GF, and the right hitting image GS1 may be displayed so as to be visible even in the period after the shielding image GF is displayed.

FIG. 16(d) is a schematic diagram of the screen M4 displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. The screen M4 is displayed after being switched from the screen M3 described above, and is displayed for a predetermined period of time. Specifically, the screen M4 is displayed by hiding the shielding image GF of the screen M3. For example, the left shielding image GF1 is moved to the right side of the image display device 31 and displayed, the right shielding image GF2 is moved to the left side of the image display device 31, and the shielding image GF is not displayed. That is, when the screen M4 is displayed, the image display device 31 displays the operation of opening the fusuma.

As shown in FIG. 16(d), the number-of-games image GE displayed before the shielding image GF is displayed (before the sliding door is closed) (see FIG. 16(b) described above), the shielding image GF is hidden. It is not displayed even if it becomes (even if the fusuma is opened). That is, in the present embodiment, the number-of-games image GE is hidden by being shielded by the shielding image GF. If the number-of-games image GE is suddenly hidden, some players may feel unnatural. According to the configuration of this embodiment, there is an advantage that the above inconvenience can be suppressed. Further, as shown in FIG. 16(d), the effect symbol GA and the pending image GB are not displayed on the screen M4.

As shown in FIG. 16(d), the screen M4 displays various images including the right-handed image GS2 and the small symbol Ga (similar to the screen M3 and the like). Further, on the screen M4, a rush effect for notifying that the game will shift to the time saving mode B is executed. Specifically, the rush image GT is displayed on the screen M4. Rush image GT is an image for notifying that production mode shifts to time saving mode B, and the name of time saving mode B (“chance time” in the example of FIG. 16(b)) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 16(d), the background image GHz is displayed in the rush effect.

FIG. 16(e) is a schematic diagram of the screen M5 displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. The screen M5 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. Specifically, the screen M5 is displayed (instead of the screen M4) after the rush effect is executed, and the mode selection effect is executed on the screen M5. The time saving mode B of the present embodiment includes multiple types of production modes from the time saving mode B1 to the time saving mode B3. In the mode selection effect, by appropriately operating the effect button 8 and the cross key 40, the player can select the effect mode (B1 to B3). However, even if any of the time saving mode B1 to the time saving mode B3 is selected, the variation pattern determination table T in the time saving mode B is common. Specifically, the effect determined by the sub CPU 121 changes according to the effect mode selected in the mode selection effect, but the variation pattern determination table T referred to by the main CPU 111 does not change.

As shown in FIG. 16(e), a small pattern Ga is displayed in the mode selection effect. Also, in the mode selection effect, a right hitting image GS2 is displayed. That is, the right shot image GS2 is displayed over the entry effect and the mode selection effect. Also, a background image GHz (an example of a second background image) is displayed in the mode selection effect. However, the configuration may be such that a background image GH dedicated to the mode selection effect is provided. It should be noted that, as described above, the second time-saving gaming state, the case of starting via the jackpot game (after the table scenario is set), and the case of starting via the jackpot game (in the scenario unset period) be. Details will be described later, but when the second time-saving game state is started via the jackpot game, while the mode selection effect is executed (see FIG. 18 (a) described later), the second When the time saving game state is started, the mode selection effect is not executed (see FIG. 18(b) described later). As shown in FIG. 16(e), in the mode selection effect, the effect symbol GA and the pending image GB are not displayed.

FIG. 16(f) is a schematic diagram of the screen M6 displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. The screen M6 is displayed by switching from the screen M5 described above, and is displayed for a predetermined period of time. In the screen M6, an image including the small symbol Ga and the background image GHz is displayed, and the image including the effect symbol GA and the pending image GB is not displayed, as in the above-described screen M5 (mode selection effect). Note that the background image GH on the screen M6 can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 16(f), a right-handed shot image GS3 is displayed on the screen M6 instead of the right-handed shot image GS2. Like the right-handed image GS1 and the right-handed image GS2, the right-handed image GS3 is an image for notifying that the game should be played right-handed. In the present embodiment, among the right-handed images GS (GS1 to GS3 and GS4, which will be described later), when the right-handed image GS3 is displayed, the sound "right-handed" is reproduced, and the other right-handed images GS are displayed. The audio is not played back. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a voice saying "Right shot" is reproduced when the right shot image GS other than the right shot image GS3 is displayed.

FIG. 17(a) is a schematic diagram of the screen M7 during the time saving displayed in the second time saving game state. Although it will be described in detail later, the screen M7 during time saving is, for example, switched from the above screen M6 (see FIG. 16(f)) and displayed (see FIG. 18(a) described later), and is displayed at the beginning of the second time saving game state. is displayed at the end of the game.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), in the time-saving medium screen M7 (time-saving mode B), a small pattern Ga, a production pattern GAw, a right-handed image GS4, a background image GHw, a pending image GBw, a remaining time-saving image GJ, and an active image GM Display each image containing . The production design GAw is the production design GA displayed in each game of the time saving mode B. As described above, immediately after the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the effect symbol GAx (the effect symbol GA of the previous mode) is displayed. After that, the effect symbol GAw is displayed at the end of the game. That is, the performance symbol GAw starts to be displayed in the middle of the game. Therefore, the effect symbol GAw is variably displayed immediately after the display is started. The background image GHw (an example of the second background image) is the background image GH displayed in each game in the time saving mode B. The reserved design GBw is displayed in the time saving mode B, and the number of reserved designs GBw corresponding to the number of second reservations is displayed. Also, in each game in the time saving mode B, a right-handed image GS4 is displayed.

The time saving remaining image GJ displays the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state. However, the number of remaining times M stored in the main RAM 113 is subtracted by "1" when each game in the time-saving game state ends. On the other hand, the number of the time saving remaining image GJ is subtracted by "1" every time each game in the time saving game state is started. For example, assume that a game is started with the number of remaining times M being "X". In the above case, immediately after the start of the game, the number of the time saving remaining image GJ is subtracted from the number "X" to the number "X-1". After that, at the end of the game, the remaining count M stored in the main RAM 113 is subtracted from the numerical value "X-1". However, the update timing of the remaining number of times M stored in the main RAM 113 and the update timing of the time saving remaining image GJ may substantially coincide with each other.

As shown in FIG. 17( a ), the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed in the area RJ of the screen M7 during time saving. In addition, the specific example of FIG. 17(a) assumes a period immediately after the time saving remaining image GJ starts to be displayed in the first game in the second time saving game state. In the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state, the time at which the number of the remaining time-saving image GJ is subtracted is immediately after the start of the game. However, the display start timing of the time saving remaining image GJ in the first game in the second time saving game state is the final stage of the game after the rush effect or the like ends. That is, in the first game in the second time saving game state, the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed for the first time after the original time (immediately after the start of the game) at which the number of the remaining time saving image GJ is subtracted. From the above circumstances, the time saving remaining image GJ is the first game in the second time saving game state, and the number “999” obtained by subtracting the number “1” from the number of time saving times in the second time saving game state (1000 times) is displayed first. do.

The active image GM is an image for notifying that the current game state is the second time-saving game state. As described above, the production mode of the second time-saving game state is the time-saving mode B. However, even in the first time-saving game state, there is a case where the game moves to the time-saving mode B (see FIG. 11(a)). Therefore, if it is assumed that whether or not the second time-saving game state is not notified in the time-saving mode B, it becomes difficult to grasp whether the current game state is the second time-saving game state or the first time-saving game state. inconvenience can occur.

In this embodiment, the image GM during activation is displayed in the time saving mode B of the second time saving game state, and the image GM during activation is not displayed in the time saving mode B of the first time saving game state and the above-described gap game. Specifically, regardless of whether it is the scenario unset period or not, the in-activation image GM is displayed in the second time-saving game state. Further, regardless of the type of the table scenario S (Sb2 to Sb4), the active image GM is displayed in the second time-saving game state. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

FIG. 17(b) is a schematic diagram of the time saving middle screen M8 displayed in each game in the first time saving game state. Specifically, the time saving medium screen M8 is displayed in each game of the time saving mode A. FIG. As shown in FIG. 17(b), in the time saving mode A, images including a small pattern Ga, a production pattern GAy, a pending image GBy, a background image GHy, a right shot image GS4 and a time saving remaining image GJ are displayed.

In the present embodiment described above, the remaining time saving image GJ is commonly displayed in the time saving mode A (first time saving game state) and the time saving mode B (second time saving game state). Specifically, in the time saving mode A, the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed in the region RJ of the image display device 31 as shown in FIG. 17(b). As described above, in the time saving mode B, the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed in the region RJ of the image display device 31 as shown in FIG. 17(a). Therefore, the time saving remaining image GJ is displayed in a common area (area RJ) in time saving mode A (first time saving game state) and time saving mode B (second time saving game state).
That is, the display position of the remaining number display is the same in the advantageous state (second time-saving game state) before the end of the big win game and the advantageous state (first time-saving game state) after the end of the big win game. However, the display position of the remaining number of times display may be different between the advantageous state (second time-saving game state) before the end of the big win game and the advantageous state (first time-saving game state) after the end of the big win game.

In this embodiment, the time saving mode A may directly shift to the time saving mode B. Temporarily, the structure which the area|region where the time saving remaining image GJ is displayed changes by the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B is assumed. In the above configuration, some players may lose sight of the remaining time saving image GJ immediately after the time saving mode B is started. According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the effect of suppressing the above inconvenience is exhibited.

However, in the configuration in which the time-saving mode A is directly shifted to the time-saving mode B, there may be a problem that some players do not notice that the time-saving mode B has started. In consideration of the above circumstances, the area where the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed may be intentionally made different between the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B. An example of the screen M7 during time saving in the second time saving game state of the modification adopting the above configuration is shown in FIG. 17(c). In the above modification, the time saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the region RJ in the first time saving game state, and the time saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the region RJ' in the second time saving game state. According to the above modification, it becomes easy to recognize that the time saving mode A ended and the time saving mode B started by changing the area where the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed. Therefore, the effect that the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed is produced.

Thus, in the advantageous state (second time-saving game state) before the end of the big hit game and the advantageous state (first time-saving game state) after the end of the big hit game, the production mode (production mode, symbol display mode, display mode of icons, etc.) are different.

By the way, in the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is subtracted in the same manner as in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, the remaining number image GN (see FIG. 14(c)) displaying the current value of the remaining number N may be displayed in the first time-saving game state. Similarly, the number-of-games image GE (see FIG. 14(a)) that allows the player to grasp the number of games up to the second time-saving game state may be displayed in the first time-saving game state. That is, a specific effect (subtraction display of the remaining number of times image GN, etc.) according to the remaining number of times N may be executed in the second time saving game state.

However, the second time-saving game state is started after the first time-saving game state ends. If the above-mentioned specific effect is executed in the first time-saving game state, some players will be conscious in the first time-saving game state that the jackpot will not be won until the second time-saving game state starts. Sometimes. In the above cases, there may be a problem that the player's motivation for playing the game is lowered. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, the specific effect corresponding to the remaining number of times N is executed in the non-time-saving game state, while the specific effect is not executed in the first time-saving game state. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the above inconvenience is suppressed.

FIGS. 18(a) to 18(c) are diagrams for explaining a specific example of a period during which each image (GF, GT, GH, GS) is displayed when the time saving mode B is started. In addition, in the specific examples of FIGS. 18(a) to 18(c), it is assumed that the jackpot is not won when the time saving mode B is started.

Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the shielding image GF (see FIG. 16(c)), the rushing image GT (see FIG. 16(d)), and the right-handed image GS3 (see FIG. 16(f)) displayed at the start of the time-saving mode B ) are collectively referred to as the “starting image”. The start image described above is displayed in a period from when the second time saving game state starts until it switches to the time saving middle screen M7 (see FIG. 17A described above). In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the second time-saving gaming state to the switching to the time-saving middle screen M7 (the period in which the image at the start is displayed) is described as "start notification period Pz (1 to 3)". Sometimes. Although the details will be described later, depending on whether or not the table scenario S is set and the type of the table scenario S, the effect mode in the start notification period Pz changes.

FIG. 18(a) is a specific example when the time saving mode B starts during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. In the above case, it shifts from the immediately preceding mode (low-probability non-time-saving game state) to the time-saving mode B (second time-saving game state). In the previous mode, the background image GHx is displayed. FIG. 18(a) shows the start time ts of the first game in the second time-saving game state and the end time te of the game.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), when shifting from the previous mode to the time-saving mode B, the screen M1 (see FIG. 16(a)) and the screen M2 (see FIG. 16(b)) are respectively displayed for a predetermined time. After that, the screen M3 is displayed and the shielding image GF is displayed. During the period in which the shielding image GF is displayed, the background image GH is shielded (not displayed). Also, after the shielding image GF is displayed for a predetermined time, a rush effect is executed in which the screen M4 (see FIG. 16(d)) is displayed. As described above, in the rush effect, the rush image GT is displayed, and the background image GH becomes the background image Gz.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), when the time saving mode B starts during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, after the rush effect is executed, the mode selection effect is displayed on the screen M5 (see FIG. 16(e) described above). is executed. Also, the mode selection effect is executed for a predetermined time, and then the screen M6 is displayed (see FIG. 16(f)). A right shot image GS3 is displayed on the screen M6. As shown in FIG. 18A, the start notification period Pz1 when the time saving mode B starts in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set is the period until switching to the time saving middle screen M7. During the start notification period Pz1 described above, the screens M1 to M6 are displayed, and the time during which each screen is displayed is predetermined. Therefore, the start notification period Pz1 ends at a predetermined time.

As described above, the game variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern determination table Ts. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, only one variation pattern is determined when the result of the big win lottery is a loss. That is, the length of the period (hereinafter referred to as "variation period Px") during which the special figure is variably displayed in the variation pattern (loss) determined by the variation pattern determination table Ts is unchanged (fixed).

As shown in FIG. 18(a), the fluctuation period Px is longer than the start notification period Pz1. That is, the variable period Px is designed to have a length that allows execution of various effects including rush effects and mode selection effects. Similarly, in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, the length of the variation pattern determined when the result of the big win lottery is a small win, and the variation pattern determined when the result of the big win lottery is a big win. is longer than the start notification period Pz1.

According to the above configuration, the start image displayed in the start notification period Pz1 is displayed in the first game in the time saving mode B (second time saving game state), and is not displayed in the second and subsequent games. Assume a configuration in which the start image displayed in the start notification period Pz1 is also displayed in the second and subsequent games in the time saving mode B. FIG. With the above configuration, a problem may occur in which the image displayed in the second and subsequent games in the time saving mode B becomes difficult to see (or cannot be displayed) as the starting image. According to the configuration of this embodiment, the above problems are suppressed.

However, as described above, in the period when the table scenario Sb is not set, the variation pattern determination table (Tbx) is common between the first game in the second time-saving game state and each game after the second time (Fig. 10 (b )reference). Therefore, in the first game in the second time-saving game state, a random variation pattern is determined in the same manner as in subsequent games. That is, in the scenario unset period, the length of the period (hereinafter referred to as "fluctuation period Py") during which the first game in the second time-saving gaming state is executed is variable.

In the above configuration, if the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the period in which the scenario is not set have the same length of the start notification period Pz, the first game in the second time-saving gaming state in the period in which the scenario is not set There is a possibility that the start notification period Pz will not end before the end of . In the above case, in the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state, there is an inconvenience that the image at the start is displayed. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, the start notification period Pz3 in the scenario unset period is set to be shorter than the start notification period Pz2 of the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set.

FIG. 18(b) is a specific example when the time saving mode B starts during the scenario unset period. In the above case, it shifts from the normal mode (low-probability non-time-saving game state) to the time-saving mode B (second time-saving game state). As described above, the background image GHx is displayed in the normal mode. FIG. 18(b) shows the start time ts of the first game in the second time-saving game state and the end time te of the game.

As shown in FIG. 18(b), when transitioning to the time saving mode B during the scenario unset period, the screen M1 and the screen M2 are displayed in the same manner as when transitioning to the time saving mode B during the period in which the above-described table scenario Sb2 is set. Each is displayed for a predetermined time, after which the screen M3 is displayed and the shielding image GF is displayed. Also, after the shielding image GF is displayed for a predetermined time, a rush effect is executed in which the screen M4 is displayed.

However, when transitioning to the time saving mode B during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, after the mode selection effect is executed (after the screen M5 is displayed), the right shot image GS4 (screen M6) is displayed, but the scenario When shifting to the time-saving mode B in the unset period, the mode selection effect is omitted, and the right-handed image GS4 (screen M6) is displayed. That is, the start notification period Pz2 in the scenario unset period is compared with the start notification period Pz1 in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, and the period in which the mode selection effect is executed is omitted.

In this way, after the RAM is cleared and after the jackpot, the effect mode of the rush effect is different.
Also, the effects that are omitted in the scenario unset period are not limited to the above examples. For example, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, in the game after the remaining number of fluctuations before being controlled to the second time-saving game state is less than a predetermined number (for example, less than 10 times), for each fluctuation effect , You may execute a countdown effect that informs (suggests) the number of remaining fluctuations until it is controlled to the second time-saving game state. Then, during the scenario unset period, this countdown effect may be omitted. That is, after clearing the RAM, the specific mode (countdown mode) is not controlled before the occurrence of the second time-saving game state, but after the big hit, the specific mode may be controlled before the occurrence of the second time-saving game state.

In the above configuration, the start notification period Pz2 is shorter than the start notification period Pz1. Specifically, the start notification period Pz2 is designed to be shorter than the shortest variation pattern determined in the first game in the second time-saving gaming state. In this embodiment, when the game is played in the normal procedure, the number of second reservations is 0 at the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state. Therefore, when the second special figure is variably displayed in the first game in the second time-saving gaming state, the "long variation (loss)" (about 4 seconds) among the variation patterns is the shortest variation pattern. Also, when the first special figure is variably displayed in the first game in the second time-saving gaming state, the "special 1 loss (loss)" (about 7 seconds) among the variation patterns becomes the shortest variation pattern. Therefore, the start notification period Pz is designed, for example, to have a length shorter than about 4 seconds of "long variation (loss)".

As understood from the above description, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the start notification period Pz2 ends before the first game in the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period ends. In addition, the start notification period Pz2 is a time shorter than the shortest variation pattern (special figure 1 loss: about 7 seconds) among each variation pattern of the first special figure in the second time saving game state (for example, about 6 seconds) good.

Further, as understood from the above description, according to the present embodiment, when the background image GHz is displayed instead of the background image GHx at the start of the time saving mode B (second time saving game state), the shielding image GF can be displayed. According to the above configuration, by shielding the background image GHx at once, the player can grasp in a short period of time that the time saving mode A will end, and then by displaying the background image GHz at once, the time saving mode B It is possible to make the player grasp in a short period of time that the will start. That is, there is an advantage that it becomes easy to grasp that it shifted from time-saving mode A to time-saving mode B in a short period of time.

FIG. 18(c) is a specific example when the time saving mode B starts during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set. In the above case, it shifts to the time saving mode B immediately after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, when the ending period of the jackpot game ends, the first time-saving game state (799 times) is started, and the production mode shifts to the time-saving mode B. FIG. 18(c) shows the starting time ta and ending time tb of the ending period.

As shown in FIG. 18(c), when the ending period starts, a rush effect is executed in which the screen M4 (see FIG. 16(d)) is displayed. As described above, in the rush effect, the rush image GT is displayed, and the background image GH becomes the background image GHz. After the rush effect is executed, the mode selection effect is executed and the screen M5 (see FIG. 16(e) described above) is displayed. Also, the mode selection effect is executed for a predetermined time, and then the screen M6 is displayed (see FIG. 16(f)). A right shot image GS3 is displayed on the screen M6. In the specific example of FIG. 18(c), when the ending period (start notification period Pz3) ends, the time saving mode B (first time saving game state) is started, and the time saving middle screen M7 is displayed.

The length of the ending period when the table scenario Sb4 is set is predetermined. Specifically, the start notification period Pz3 when the time saving mode B starts during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set substantially coincides with the ending period. That is, the starting image displayed when the time saving mode B starts can be displayed during the ending period.

As can be understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, when shifting to the time saving mode B at the start of the first time saving game state (see FIG. 18 (c)) and the time saving mode B at the start of the second time saving game state The mode of the production (start production) is different from the case of shifting to (FIG. 18(b)). For example, when shifting to the time saving mode B at the start of the second time saving game state, the shielding image GF is displayed, but when shifting to the time saving mode B at the start of the first time saving game state, the shielding image GF is not displayed. In addition, the start notification period Pz2 and the start notification period Pz3 are different in length. In the above configuration, it becomes easier to optimally set the effect when shifting to the time saving mode B compared to the structure in which the effect when shifting to the time saving mode B is uniform.

However, the start notification period Pz2 and the start notification period Pz3 may have the same length, or the shielding image GF may be displayed during the start notification period Pz3. In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the mode of production when shifting to the time saving mode A (first time saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game is different from the mode of production when shifting to the time saving mode B. do. Specifically, an effect for notifying that the time saving mode A starts is executed in the ending period. The ending period differs between when the time saving mode A starts and when the time saving mode B starts. Also, when the time saving mode A starts, the mode selection effect is not executed. In addition, the name of the time saving mode A is displayed in the rush effect when shifting to the time saving mode A.

By the way, in the configuration in which the remaining number of times N is subtracted at the end of the game, if the number of reservations is 0 at the end of the game, the customer waiting state starts immediately after the start of the second time-saving game state. Since the customer waiting state described above is the second time-saving game state, it is more advantageous for the player to play the game with the right hand than with the left hand. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, in the customer waiting state before the first game of the second time-saving game state is started, a configuration is adopted in which a right-handed stroke is instructed. The above configuration will be described in detail below.

FIG. 19(a) is a schematic diagram of the customer waiting screen Mx displayed when the customer waiting state is started at the time of shifting to the second time-saving gaming state. The specific example of FIG. 19(a) assumes that the table scenario Sb2 among the table scenarios S is set, as in FIG. 16(a) described above. In the above case, the non-time-saving game state (immediately before mode) in which the background image GHx is displayed is shifted to the second time-saving game state (time-saving mode B). In the scenario unset period, if the customer is in a waiting state at the start of the second time-saving gaming state, the customer waiting screen Mx is displayed in the customer waiting state in the same manner as in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set.

The customer waiting screen Mx shown in FIG. 19(a) is displayed when the number of reservations at the start of the second time-saving gaming state is zero. Therefore, in the customer waiting screen Mx, the effect symbol GAx and the small symbol Ga are stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 19A, the customer waiting screen Mx displays a number-of-games image GE and a remaining-number-of-games image GN, similarly to the screen M1. Further, a right-handed image GS1 is displayed on the customer waiting screen Mx, similarly to the screen M1. According to the above configuration, in the customer waiting state before the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state, the instruction to hit to the right is given.

FIG. 19B is a diagram for explaining the period in which each image (GF, GT, GH, GS) is displayed when the customer waiting state is started at the time of shifting to the second time-saving gaming state. be. FIG. 19(b) shows the end time te of the game when the remaining number of times N until the second time saving game state is subtracted to the numerical value "0", and the start time ts of the first game in the second time saving game state. be In the above specific example, the period Pw shown in FIG. 19B is the customer waiting state, and the customer waiting screen Mx (see FIG. 19A) is displayed during the period Pw.

As shown in FIG. 19B, during the period Pw in which the customer waiting screen Mx is displayed, the right-handed image GS1 is displayed and the background image GHx is displayed. After that, when the first game in the second time-saving gaming state is started, the number of reservations in the second time-saving gaming state is 1 or more (see above-described FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b)) as in the case , screen M1, screen M2, . . . are displayed. Specifically, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the screens are displayed in order from the screen M1 to the screen M7 (see FIG. 18A). Further, during the scenario unset period, each screen (M1, M2, M3, M4, M6, M7) except the screen M5 is displayed in sequence (see FIG. 18(b)).

FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b) are diagrams for explaining the details of when the numbers in the remaining number image GN are updated. As described above, the remaining number of times image GN displays the remaining number of times N stored in the main RAM 113 . However, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the numbers in the remaining number of times image GN are decremented differs from the timing at which the remaining number of times N is decremented. The above configuration will be described in detail below. In addition, hereinafter, the timing for updating the number of the remaining number of times image GN may be simply referred to as "the timing of updating the remaining number of times image GN".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the remaining number N of the main RAM 113 is subtracted at the end of the game (when the special figure is stopped). Specifically, one game is provided with a variable period during which special symbols are variably displayed, and a fixed period during which special symbols are stopped and displayed after the variable period is over. The length of the fluctuation period in the game is variable according to the fluctuation pattern of the game. On the other hand, the fixed period in the game is a predetermined time (approximately 0.5 seconds). The main control board 110 (main CPU 111) transmits a pattern confirmation command to the sub CPU 121 at the start of the confirmation period. When the design confirmation command is received, the effect control board 120 (sub CPU 121) causes the image control board 150 to stop and display the effect symbol GA and the small pattern Ga until the finalization period ends. That is, the fixed period substantially coincides with the period during which the special symbols and the performance symbols GA are stopped and displayed.

FIG. 20A is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the update timing of the remaining count image GN. FIG. 20(a) shows the numbers of the remaining number of times image GN at each time displayed by the effect control board 120 (image control board 150), and the remaining number stored at each time by the main control board 110 (main RAM 113). A number N is indicated. In addition, FIG. 20(a) shows the game start time ts and the game end time te. Further, FIG. 20(a) shows time ta when the variation period in the game ends. The time ta described above can also be rephrased as the time when the fixed period starts.

As shown in FIG. 20( a ), at the start time ts of the game, the remaining number command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 . The remaining count command is a command that specifies the current value of the remaining count N. FIG. The effect control board 120 of the present embodiment restores the number of the remaining number of times image GN according to the remaining number of times command transmitted after the power is restored, when the power is turned off. In the specific example of FIG. 20(a), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N at the start of the game is a numerical value "X" (X≧2). The remaining number command transmitted at the start of the current game indicates the remaining number N updated (decremented) at the end of the previous game.

As shown in FIG. 20( a ), at time ta when the confirmation period starts, a symbol confirmation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 . When the design determination command is received, the performance control board 120 stops displaying the performance design GA and subtracts the number of the remaining number of times image GN. That is, it can be said that the number of the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted at approximately the same time as the time ta at which the fixed period starts. In the specific example of FIG. 20(a), the number of the remaining number of times image GN is displayed by subtracting from "X" to "X-1". However, the main control board 110 subtracts the remaining number N of the main RAM 113 at the time te when the fixed period ends. Therefore, immediately after the number of the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted to "X-1", the remaining number of times N in the main RAM 113 is the numerical value "X" as shown in FIG. 20(a).

Let us assume a comparison in which the numbers in the remaining number of times image GN are subtracted at the end of the fixed period. In the above comparison, it can also be said that the number in the remaining number image GN is subtracted after the game ends. However, for example, when the state shifts to the customer waiting state after the game ends, some players stop paying attention to the screen of the image display device 31 (including the remaining number of times image GN) at the end time ta of the game and end the game. It may happen. In the above case, the player may not be able to visually recognize the subtraction display of the numbers in the number-of-remaining image GB. According to this embodiment, since the number of remaining times image GB is subtracted and displayed before the end of the game, there is an advantage that the above inconvenience is suppressed.

FIG. 20(b) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the update timing of the remaining count image GN. FIG. 20(b) shows, in the same manner as in FIG. 20(a), the number of the remaining number of times image GN at each time point, the remaining number of times N stored in the main RAM 113 at each time point, the game start time ts, the game start time ts, A time ta at which the fluctuation period ends in and a time te at which the game ends are shown. Also, FIG. 20(b) shows the game state at each time point. In the specific example of FIG. 20(b), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is subtracted to a numerical value "0" at the end time te of the game. Therefore, the second time-saving game state is started from the end time te of the game.

As shown in FIG. 20(b), even in a game in which the number of remaining times N is subtracted from the numerical value "0", the number of the remaining number of times image GN is displayed at the timing of receiving the symbol determination command, as in other games. is subtracted. That is, at time ta when the fixed period is started, the remaining number of times image GN displays the number "0". Further, when the determination period ends after the number "0" is displayed in the remaining number image GN, the remaining number N is subtracted from the number "0" and the second time saving game state is started.

In the above configuration, before the second time-saving game state is started, the number of remaining times image GN displays the number "0". However, some players may misunderstand that the second time-saving gaming state has started at time ta when the remaining number of times image GN displays the number "0". Considering the above circumstances, in the game in which the second time-saving game state is started, the time when the remaining number of times N is subtracted without subtracting the number of the remaining image GN at the start of the fixed period (the second time-saving game state is At the start point), the number of the remaining number of times image GN may be subtracted. Specifically, after the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", the timing of receiving the customer waiting command, or the command that specifies that the first game in the second time saving game state has started (for example , variation pattern specification command) may be used to display the number "0" in the remaining number image GN. It should be noted that in each game, the number in the number of remaining times image GN may be subtracted at the end of the fixed period.

FIGS. 21(a), 21(b-1), and 21(b-2) are for explaining the display of the effect executing means (for example, the image display device 31) in the period before and after the power failure occurs. is a diagram. As described above, the production mode (display mode of the image display device 31) in a specific period corresponds to the variation pattern determination table referred to in that period. In the present embodiment, the image display device 31 may be controlled to an effect mode that does not correspond to the variation pattern determination table during the period immediately after the power is turned off. The above configuration will be described in detail below.

FIG. 21(a) is a schematic diagram of a restoration screen displayed when power is restored. As shown in FIG. 21(a), the recovery screen displays a message indicating that recovery is in progress after the power failure. A background image GHf is also displayed on the recovery screen. The background image GHf is a dedicated background image GH displayed when power is restored, and is, for example, a white (single color) image. In the specific example of FIG. 21(a), it is assumed that the power is restored during the period when the right-handed lamp 28 is lit. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 21(a), the right shot image GS is displayed on the recovery screen. Note that an image other than the background image GHf and the right-handed image GS may be displayed. For example, the number-of-holds image GD (see FIG. 14A described above) may be displayed on the recovery screen.

FIG. 21(b-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode at each point in time before and after the power failure and the variation pattern determination table T to be referred to. FIG. 21(b-1) assumes a case where the power supply is interrupted in the jackpot game. FIG. 21(b-1) shows time ta when the power supply is cut off and time tb when the power supply is restarted. In addition, in the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-1), the jackpot game ends at time tc, shifts to the customer waiting state (holding number at the time of jackpot game end = 0), and the first game starts at time td Assume the case.

In this embodiment, when the power is restored from the power interruption, a power interruption recovery command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 . For example, the main CPU 111 transmits a power failure recovery command after completing the initialization process when the power is turned on. From the power failure recovery command, whether or not the special figure is fluctuating, the number of pending and the game state are specified. Specifically, from the power failure recovery command, it is specified which one of the jackpot game, the small game, the low probability non-time saving game state, the high probability time saving game state, the first time saving game state and the second time saving game state be done. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), at the power failure recovery time tb, a power failure recovery command specifying that the current gaming state is the jackpot game is transmitted.

As described above, in the jackpot game, the right hitting lamp 28 lights up. Therefore, when the gaming state specified by the power failure recovery command is the jackpot game, the right-handed image GS is displayed on the recovery screen. Note that the type of the right hitting image GS displayed on the recovery screen can be changed as appropriate. For example, even if the game state specified by the power failure recovery command is either the jackpot game or the time-saving game state, the common right-handed image GS may be displayed on the recovery screen. Further, the right hitting image GS that is originally displayed in the game state specified by the power failure recovery command may be displayed on the recovery screen.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the big win game, various images including the current number of rounds and stop-displayed big win effect symbols are displayed. However, the current number of rounds and the jackpot effect pattern cannot be specified from the power failure restoration command. Therefore, when the power is cut off in the big win game and then recovered from the power cut, the image that should be originally displayed in the big win game cannot be completely recovered. In consideration of the above circumstances, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21 (b-1), when the power supply is shut off and restored in the jackpot game, the recovery screen is displayed until the jackpot game ends. . However, when the power is cut off in the jackpot game and then recovered from the power cut, the screen displayed in the jackpot game may be restored. In the above case, the screen of the jackpot game after the power is restored is displayed by omitting the image that cannot be restored (for example, the image indicating the number of rounds).

Further, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), it is assumed that the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to after the jackpot game ends. That is, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), it is assumed that the special symbol B4 is stop-displayed as the jackpot symbol and the table scenario Sb4 is set. As described above, the production mode corresponding to the variation pattern determination table Tax is the time saving mode B. Therefore, normally, the period during which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to is the time saving mode B.

However, the type of variation pattern determination table T (table scenario S) referred to after the end of the jackpot game is not specified from the power failure recovery command. In addition, the first time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game can shift to both the time-saving mode A and the time-saving mode B (for example, see FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b)). Therefore, in the period immediately after the power is turned off, the performance control board 120 side cannot specify whether the performance mode in the first time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game should be the time-saving mode A or the time-saving mode B.例文帳に追加

When a variation pattern specification command is received, the variation pattern determination table referred to on the main control board 110 side is specified from the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. That is, the original production mode is specified from the variation pattern specification command. In this embodiment, the original production mode may not be specified on the production control board 120 side until the fluctuation pattern specification command is first received after recovery from power failure.

In the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), after the jackpot state ends, the state shifts to the customer waiting state. Also, the first time the variation pattern designation command is received after the end of the big win state is time td when the first game is started after the end of the big win game. In the above specific example, in the customer waiting state from the time tc when the jackpot game ends to the time td when the game is started, it is impossible to specify whether the time saving mode A or the time saving mode B should be set on the performance control board 120 side.

Temporarily, when it is not possible to specify on the side of the performance control board 120 whether the time saving mode A or the time saving mode B should be used, a contrast in which each performance executing means is controlled in the time saving mode B is assumed. As described above, in the time saving mode A, there is a possibility that the first time saving game state ends in 100 times. On the other hand, in the time saving mode B, the first time saving game state continues up to 799 times. Therefore, in the above-described comparison, the first time-saving gaming state may end after 100 times even though the game has transitioned to the time-saving mode B. In the above cases, some players may lose their desire to play games.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the present embodiment, if it is not possible to specify whether the production control board 120 side should be the time saving mode A or the time saving mode B in the first time saving game state, each production execution means in the time saving mode A (image display device 31, etc.). According to the configuration of the present embodiment described above, the first time-saving game state does not end after 100 times even though the game has shifted to the time-saving mode B. Therefore, compared with the above-mentioned comparison, there is an advantage that the inconvenience of losing the player's motivation to play is suppressed.

As described above, the original production mode is specified from the variation pattern specification command. In this embodiment, when the original production mode can be specified on the production control board 120 side, the production mode is changed to the original production mode. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), the variation pattern designation command is received at time td. From the above variation pattern specification command, it is specified that the original production mode is the time saving mode B. Therefore, the presentation mode is switched from the time saving mode A to the time saving mode B at time td. In the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-1), when it is assumed that the original production mode is the time saving mode A (when the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to), before and after receiving the variation pattern designation command, The production mode does not change in the time saving mode A.

FIG. 21(b-2) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the presentation mode at each point in the period before and after the power failure and the variation pattern determination table to be referred to. FIG. 21(b-2) assumes a case where a power failure occurs during a game in the time saving mode B (a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax or the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to). Specifically, in FIG. 21 (b-2), the game is started at time ts in the time saving mode B, the power supply is interrupted at time ta during the game, and the power supply is restarted at time tb. Assume the case. In the specific example of FIG. 21(b-2), it is assumed that the game ends at time tc, then shifts to the customer waiting state, and a new game starts at time td.

In the above specific example of FIG. 21(b-2), the original production mode cannot be specified on the production control board 120 side during the period from the time tb when the power is recovered from the power failure until the new time td is displayed. Specifically, from the time tb when the power failure is restored to the time tc when the game interrupted by the power failure is completed, in addition to the original performance mode, the variation pattern in the game and the performance symbol GA to be stopped and displayed cannot be specified. . In consideration of the above circumstances, the above recovery screen is displayed during the period from when the power failure is restored to when the game interrupted by the power failure ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-2), in the customer waiting state from time tc to time td when a new game is started, since the original production mode cannot be specified on the production control board 120 side, the time saving mode A Each effect executing means is controlled. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-2), when the variation pattern designation command is received at time td, the effect mode is switched from the time saving mode A to the time saving mode B.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the power is turned off in the time-saving gaming state, when the variation pattern designation command is received after that, the mode is switched to the original production mode. By the way, as described above, the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state stored by the main control board 110 side is displayed by the time saving remaining image GJ. However, the command specifying the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state stored by the main control board 110 side is not transmitted during the time saving game state after the power failure is restored. Therefore, when power failure occurs in the time saving game state, the remaining number of times M cannot be displayed in the time saving remaining image GJ during the time saving game state after the power failure is restored. In the present embodiment, the remaining time saving image GJ in which the numerical portion is omitted is displayed during the time saving game state (first time saving game state, second time saving game state) after power failure is restored.

FIGS. 22(a) to 22(d) are diagrams for explaining another specific example of the production mode at each point in time before and after the power failure occurs. From FIG. 22(a) to FIG. 22(d), in addition to the effect mode at each time point, the game state at that time point is shown.

FIG. 22(a) is a specific example in the case where the power is cut off at the start of the second time-saving gaming state. FIG. 22(a) assumes a case where the second time-saving gaming state is started during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. In the above case, the effect mode immediately before the second time-saving game state is started becomes the previous mode. In addition, FIG. 22(a) assumes that the number of reservations is 0 at the time ta when the last game in the non-time-saving game state (the 800th game from the jackpot game) ends, and the state shifts to the customer waiting state do. The customer waiting state described above is the second time-saving game state, and the right-handed image GS1 is displayed as described above with reference to FIG. 19(a).

FIG. 22(a) assumes a case where a power cut occurs at time tb during the customer waiting state immediately after the second time-saving gaming state is started. It is also assumed that the power is restored from the power failure at time tc thereafter. In the above case, the recovery screen is displayed for a predetermined time from time tc. Moreover, if a recovery screen is displayed, each production|presentation execution means containing the image display apparatus 31 will be controlled by time saving mode B after that. In addition, it is good also as a structure controlled by the time saving mode B with the opportunity which received the power failure recovery command.

Specifically, in the customer waiting state immediately after the power is restored from the power interruption, the screen M7 during time saving described above (see FIG. 17A) is displayed. The time-saving middle screen M7 originally displays the start notification image Gn (see FIG. 16(b)), displays the shielding image GF (see FIG. 16(c)), and executes a rush effect (see FIG. 16 ( d)), the mode selection effect is executed (see FIG. 16E), and the right-handed image GS3 is displayed (see FIG. ”) is completed.

In the specific example of FIG. 22(a), it is assumed that the first game in the second time-saving gaming state is started at time d. In the above case, the period during which rush effects and the like are executed starts at time td, and then the screen M7 during time saving is displayed. If the power supply is not interrupted, the background image GHx (background image GH of the previous mode) is displayed when the start notification image Gn is displayed (see FIG. 16B described above). On the other hand, in the specific example of FIG. 22(a) in which the power is cut off, the background image GHz (background image GH of the previous mode) is displayed when the start notification image Gn is displayed.

FIG. 22(b) is another specific example in the case where a power cut occurs at the start of the second time-saving gaming state. FIG. 22(b) is similar to FIG. 22(a) described above. It is assumed that the state has shifted to the customer waiting state. Moreover, FIG.22(b) assumes the case where power supply interruption occurs at the time tb in the customer waiting state immediately after the 2nd time saving game state was started, and it is restored from the power supply interruption at the time tc after that.

While FIG. 22(a) above shows a specific example in which the second time-saving gaming state is started during the period in which the table scenario S is set, FIG. A specific example of starting a game state is shown. In the specific example of FIG. 22(b) above, the effect mode immediately before the second time-saving gaming state is started is the normal mode. Moreover, in the specific example of FIG.22(b), in the period after the time tc when a power interruption is restored, screen M7 during time saving of time saving mode B is displayed (similar to the specific example of FIG.22(a)).

In the specific example of FIG. 22(b), it is assumed that the first game in the second time-saving gaming state is started at time td. As described above, when the power is not turned off, when the second time-saving game state is started in the scenario unset period, a rush effect or the like in which the mode selection effect is omitted is executed (see FIG. 18(b)). . However, in the scenario unset period, if the power is cut off in the customer waiting state from the start of the second time-saving game state to the start of the first game, the rush when the second time-saving game state starts All of the production is omitted (cancelled).

FIG. 22(c) is another specific example in the case where a power cut occurs at the start of the second time-saving gaming state. In the specific example of FIG. 22(c), it is assumed that the power is cut off in the first game in the second time-saving game state. Both the case in which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the case in which the scenario is not set will be described below with reference to FIG. 22(c).

The specific example of FIG. 22(c) assumes that the first game in the second time-saving game state is started at time ta, and then the power is cut off at time tb before the game ends. As described above, in the first game in the second time-saving game state, when the table scenario Sb2 is set, rush effects and the like are executed. In addition, in the first game in the second time-saving game state, part of the rush effect and the like is executed in the case of the scenario unset period.

As shown in FIG. 22(c), the restoration screen is displayed in a period after time tc when the power failure is restored. In other words, the rush effect or the like that has been executed at the time point tb when the power is turned off is canceled. FIG. 22(c) assumes a case where the first game in the second time-saving gaming state ends at time td after the power is restored. In the above case, the recovery screen is hidden at time td, and each effect executing means (image display device 31, etc.) is controlled to the time saving mode B. Specifically, the restoration screen is switched to the screen M7 during time saving.

In the present embodiment, when the power is turned off in the second time-saving game state (including the first game), the subsequent second time-saving game state is controlled to the time-saving mode B1 from the time-saving mode B1 to the time-saving mode B3. . That is, regardless of the time saving mode B selected on the screen M5, the time saving mode B1 is set after the power is restored. Even if the power is cut off before the time saving mode B is selected in the mode selection performance after the first game in the second time saving game state is started, the time saving mode B1 is set after the power is restored. However, if the power cut occurs in the customer waiting state before the start of the first game in the second time-saving gaming state (for example, in the case of FIG. 22 (a) described above), the time-saving mode selected in the subsequent mode selection effect Move to B. It should be noted that, during the period after time td, a configuration may be adopted in which the interrupted rush effect or the like can be executed.

FIG. 22(d) is another specific example in the case where the power is cut off at the start of the second time-saving gaming state. In the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the power is cut off in the game immediately before the gap game. That is, it is assumed that the power is cut off in the final game of the first time-saving game state of 799 times. Specifically, in the specific example of FIG. 22(d), when the 799th game in the first time-saving game state is started at time ta, and then the power is cut off at time tb before the game ends assume. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the power failure is restored at time tc, and the game that was being executed at the time of power failure is terminated at time td. In the above case, the recovery screen is displayed during the period from time tc to time td.

As shown in FIG. 22(d), at the end time td of the final game of the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state ends and shifts to the non-time-saving game state. As described above, when power interruption does not occur, the production mode of the gap game becomes the time saving mode B. That is, the effect mode in a series of periods of the last game in the first time-saving game state, the gap game, and the first game in the second time-saving game state becomes the time-saving mode B. On the other hand, when a power cut occurs in the final game of the first time-saving game state, the effect mode becomes the normal mode until the second special figure is variably displayed after the end of the game.

In the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the pending number is 0 at the end time td of the final game in the first time-saving game state in which the power supply has been cut off. In the above case, the customer waiting state starts from time td. In the customer waiting state described above, the production mode becomes the normal mode. In addition, the customer waiting state is a non-time-saving gaming state, and the second special figure cannot be variably displayed in principle. In the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the variable display of the first special figure is started at time te. That is, it is assumed that the gap game in which the first special figure is variably displayed is started from time te. Also, in the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the gap game ends at time tf. In the above case, the second time-saving game state is started from time tf.

In this embodiment, when a power cut occurs in the final game of the first time-saving game state, the effect mode becomes the normal mode until the second special figure is variably displayed after the end of the game. Therefore, at time tf when the second time-saving gaming state is started, in principle, the production mode is the normal mode. In the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the variable display of the second special figure is started at time tg. In the above cases, the mode shifts to time mode B from time tg. In addition, when the first special figure is variably displayed in the game next to the gap game, the production mode of the game is the normal mode. Also, if the power is cut off during a gap game, the right-handed image GS is not displayed on the recovery screen. After that, when the gap game ends, the time saving mode B is controlled even in the case of shifting to the customer waiting state or in the case of the variable display of the special figure.

FIG. 23(a) is a diagram for explaining the mode of the image (number-of-games image GE) and the lamp (effect lamp 33) when the power is turned off. FIG. 23(a) shows numbers displayed by the number-of-games image GE before and after the power is turned off. In addition, FIG. 23(a) shows the mode of the effect lamp 33 at each time point. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, among the modes (light emission modes) of the effect lamp 33, the mode in a normal game may be referred to as a "normal mode". The normal mode is variable according to the game state and the effect executed in each game.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that the power is cut off at time ta when the number of games image GE displays the number "X", and the power is restored at time tb after that. In the above case, the recovery screen is displayed from time tb, and the recovery screen is hidden at time tc thereafter. As shown in FIG. 23(a), in the present embodiment, the effect lamp 33 is displayed in the recovery mode during the period in which the recovery screen is displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that the number "X" is less than 799 and the game state at time ta is a low probability non-time-saving game state. In addition, as the time tc in FIG. 23(a), when the time ta is in the customer waiting state, it is assumed that a predetermined time has passed from the time tb, and when the time ta is a special figure fluctuation period , is assumed to be the end of the variable period.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is greater than the numerical value "0" at the time tc when the recovery screen display period ends. Specifically, it is assumed that the gaming state after time tc is a non-time-saving gaming state. As a case where the remaining number of times N is greater than the numerical value "0" at time tc, it is assumed that the clearing operation is executed after the power failure occurs until the power is restored, and the remaining number of times N is initialized to the initial value "800". be done. As another case where the remaining number of times N is greater than the numerical value "0" at time tc, it is assumed that the remaining number of times N greater than the numerical value "1" is left unchanged before and after the power is turned off. As described above, the number-of-games image GE displays the number "0" when the power is restored, regardless of whether or not the remaining number of times N is set before and after the power interruption.

In this embodiment, the second time-saving game state is started when the remaining number of times N is subtracted from the numerical value "1" to the numerical value "0". In addition, in the period after the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", the remaining number of times N does not change from the numerical value "0" until the clear operation is executed or the jackpot game is won. In the above configuration, during the period after the remaining number of times N is decremented to the numerical value "0", the second time-saving game state is not restarted until the clearing operation is executed or the jackpot game is won. Specifically, it is assumed that the game is executed 1000 times in the second time-saving game state, and the game is shifted to the non-time-saving game state. In the non-time saving game state after the above second time saving game state, even if the game is executed 800 times, the second time saving game state is not started again.

Temporarily, during the period when the remaining number of times N is "0", the period of the low-probability non-time-saving game state after the second time-saving game state ends (hereinafter, "activated period"), the number of the game number image GE is Assume a contrast ratio that starts at "0" and is incremented for each game. Further, in the above comparison, when the power is turned off/on during the activated period, the number of games image GE displays the number "0" after the power is restored, and then the number of the number of games image GE is added for each game. shall be displayed. In the above comparison, the number-of-games image GE may be added to the number "800" in the activated period even though the second time-saving gaming state is not started. Therefore, depending on the player, there may be a problem that the motivation for the game is lowered. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment employs a configuration capable of informing whether or not it is the activated period. The above configuration will be described in detail below.

FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram of the screen Mh displayed when the power is turned off/on during the activated period. On the screen Mh, each image (effect symbol GA, etc.) similar to the screen (see FIG. 14(a) described above) in the normal mode before the second time-saving game state is started (unactivated) is displayed. However, in the period in which the second time-saving gaming state is not activated, the number-of-games image GE displays a number indicating the number of games played since the power was turned on or the number of games played since the jackpot game, but the number-of-games image GE on the screen Mh displays the numbers. do not display Specifically, when the power is turned off/on during the activated period, as shown in FIG. 23(b), the number-of-games image GE displays symbols "???" instead of numbers.

FIG. 23(c) is a schematic diagram of the number-of-games image GE in the activated period after the second time-saving gaming state ends. The number-of-games image GE shown in FIG. 23(c) is obtained by omitting numbers from the number-of-games image GE displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state other than the activated period. According to the above configuration, the player is substantially notified of whether or not it is the activated period.

FIG. 23(d) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the aspect of the number-of-games image GE and the effect lamp 33 when power is cut off. FIG. 23(d) shows the numbers displayed by the number-of-games image GE at each time point and the mode of the effect lamp 33, as in FIG. 23(a) described above. In the specific example of FIG. 23(d), it is assumed that the second time-saving gaming state is started at time ta, and the last (1000th) game of the second time-saving gaming state ends at time tb thereafter. In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state after time tb becomes the activated period. In the above case, the number-of-games image GE (see FIG. 23(c) described above) that does not display numbers is displayed in the activated period after time tb.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(d), as shown in FIG. , when the power is turned on, the recovery screen is displayed for a predetermined period of time. Moreover, during the period in which the recovery screen is displayed, the effect lamp 33 is displayed in the recovery mode. In the specific example of FIG. 23(d), the recovery screen is displayed until time te, and then the screen Mh described above is displayed. As shown in FIG. 23(d), in the activated period after time te when the screen Mh is displayed, the number-of-games image GE displays symbols "???" instead of numbers. In addition, during the period when the symbol “???” is displayed in the number-of-games image GE, the effect lamp 33 is displayed in a warning mode. A normal game can be executed in the activated period in which the symbol "???" is displayed in the number-of-games image GE. However, even during a period in which various effects are performed in the game, the effect lamp 33 continues to be displayed in a warning mode, not in a mode (normal mode) corresponding to the effect.

In the present embodiment, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving gaming state is initialized to the numerical value "800", the display of the symbol "???" in the number of games image GE ends, Addition display of numbers is performed. In addition, when the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is initialized to the numerical value "800", the effect lamp 33 switches from the warning mode to the normal mode. For example, when the performance lamp 33 is in the warning mode, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can switch the performance lamp 33 to the normal mode by executing the clear operation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, an example of the configuration of the present invention "when the power is turned on, the notification means can be controlled in a special mode when the number of determinations specified from the information reaches the specific number of times". , the remaining number of times N reaches the numerical value "0" (the number of jackpot lotteries reaches 800 times), and the game state notified by the power failure restoration command from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 at the time of power restoration. When it is a low probability non-time-saving game state, the notification means (ramp 33 for production, the image display device 31) has adopted a controllable configuration in a special mode (warning mode, display of symbols "???").

FIG. 24(a) is a diagram for explaining each image displayed in the non-time-saving gaming state immediately after the time-saving gaming state ends. As described above, the production mode immediately after the non-time-saving gaming state is started becomes the normal mode. As shown in FIG. 24(a), in the non-time-saving game state immediately after the time-saving game state ends, each image (production pattern GAx, etc.) displayed in the normal mode is displayed. Further, in the non-time-saving game state immediately after the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) ends, in addition to the above images, the left-handed image GL is displayed.

The left-handed image GL is an image for notifying that the game should be played left-handed. As described above, in the time-saving gaming state, it is more advantageous to play the game with the right hand than with the left hand, and the right-handed image GS (right-handed lamp 28) instructs that the player should play with the right hand. On the other hand, in the non-time-saving gaming state, playing the game with the left hand is more advantageous than playing with the right hand. Therefore, when shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, it is preferable to have a configuration in which it is notified that the game should be played with the left hand (that the game should be switched from the right hand to the left hand). In consideration of the above circumstances, the left-hand shot image GL is displayed immediately after the time-saving game state ends.

FIG. 24(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the period during which the left-handed shot image GL is displayed. The left-handed image GL is normally displayed for a predetermined time after transitioning to the non-time-saving gaming state. Hereinafter, the period from the transition to the non-time-saving gaming state to the elapse of the time is referred to as "period Th". FIG. 24(b) shows the above period Th.

FIG. 24(b) shows the screen (effect mode) displayed at each time point and whether or not the left-hand shot image GL is displayed. The specific example of FIG. 24(b) assumes a case where the second time-saving gaming state ends during the scenario setting period. FIG. 24(b) shows the period of the final game in the second time-saving game state. In the final game of the second time-saving game state, the same effect as in other games (effect for notifying the success or failure of a big hit) is executed, and then the above-described end effect (see FIG. 45(b)) is executed. Sometimes. In the specific example of FIG. 24(b), the left shot image GL is displayed for the period Th.

FIG. 24(c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the period during which the left-handed shot image GL is displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 24(c), it is assumed that the power is cut off in the final game of the second time-saving game state. Specifically, it is assumed that the final game in the second time-saving game state is started at time ts, and then the power is cut off at time ta (before the end effect), and the power is restored at time tb. . Further, it is assumed that the final game in the second time-saving game state is resumed from time tb and ends at time te.

In the above specific example of FIG. 24(c), the recovery screen (see FIG. 21(a)) is displayed from time tb to time te. Also, the left-hand shot image GL is displayed for a period Th starting from the time tb when the final game ends. However, as can be seen from FIG. 24(c), when the power is cut off in the final game in the second time-saving game state, the ending effect that should be executed after that is omitted. It should be noted that, similarly, when the power is cut off in the final game in the first time-saving game state, the ending effect that should be executed in the final game is omitted.

FIG. 24D is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the period during which the left-handed shot image GL is displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 24(d), it is assumed that the power supply is interrupted during the period Th. Specifically, it is assumed that power is interrupted at time ta in period Th, and the power is restored at time tb thereafter. In the above case, the display of the left shot image GL is stopped. Specifically, even if the power failure is restored before the period Th elapses, the left-handed image GL is not displayed on the restoration screen and the normal mode screen displayed thereafter.

FIGS. 25(a-1) and 25(a-2) are diagrams for explaining another specific example of the customer waiting screen Mx. Above-mentioned FIG. 19(a) demonstrated the customer waiting screen Mx displayed in the customer waiting state at the time of the start of the 2nd time saving game state. FIG. 25(a-1) and FIG. 25(a-2) are specific examples of the customer waiting screen Mx (1, 2) displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state.

FIG. 25(a-1) is a schematic diagram of the customer waiting screen Mx1. In the customer waiting screen Mx1, various images (including effect symbols GA) displayed in the normal mode and the previous mode are displayed in the same way as the customer waiting screen Mx described with reference to FIG. 19(a). Further, in the customer waiting image Mx1, in addition to the above images, a loading notification image GK is displayed. The installed notification image GK is an image for notifying that the second time-saving gaming state is provided. For example, the installation notification image GK displays a message "second time-saving installation".

FIG. 25(a-1) is a schematic diagram of the customer waiting screen Mx2. In the customer waiting screen Mx2, various images displayed in the normal mode and the previous mode are displayed in the same way as the customer waiting screen Mx and the customer waiting screen Mx1 described with reference to FIG. 19(a). However, in the customer waiting screen Mx2, the effect image GA is hidden and a demo movie is displayed instead of the background image GHx. The demo movie includes, for example, a movie that is displayed in reach rendering. Further, on the customer waiting screen Mx2, in addition to the above images, an installation notification image GK is displayed (similar to the customer waiting screen Mx1).

In this embodiment, in the customer waiting state, the customer waiting screen Mx1 and the customer waiting screen Mx2 are alternately displayed. Specifically, when the customer waiting screen Mx1 is displayed for a predetermined time, the customer waiting screen Mx1 switches to the customer waiting screen Mx2. After that, when the customer waiting screen Mx2 is displayed for a predetermined time, the customer waiting screen Mx2 switches to the customer waiting screen Mx1. In the above configuration, in the customer waiting state (non-gaming period), it is notified that the gaming machine 1 can shift to the second time-saving gaming state. Therefore, there is an advantage that the player can confirm whether or not it is possible to shift to the second time-saving gaming state before playing the game. Note that the installation notification image GK may be displayed on one of the customer waiting screen Mx1 and the customer waiting screen Mx2, and may be hidden on the other.

However, for example, in order to ascertain whether or not the clear operation is necessary, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 determines whether the power to the gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the second time-saving gaming state. You may want to check the status. However, the customer waiting screen Mx1 and the customer waiting screen Mx2 are not displayed when the gaming machine 1 is powered off. Therefore, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off, it cannot be confirmed whether or not it is possible to shift to the second time-saving gaming state depending on the installed notification image GK.

In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to have a configuration including a display member for displaying (written) a message that indicates that the second time-saving gaming state is provided. According to the configuration including the display member described above, it is possible to grasp whether or not the gaming machine 1 can shift to the second time-saving gaming state even when the power is shut off. A modified example in which a display member is employed will be described below with reference to FIGS. 25(b-1) and 25(b-2).

FIG. 25(b-1) is a diagram for explaining a modification when a display member is employed. FIG. 25(b-1) shows an excerpt of an area corresponding to the area Rx in the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. The game machine 1 includes members including an outer frame 2, an inner frame 3, a glass frame 4, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "frame members"), a game board 10 detachable from the frame members, a main control board 110, an effect control board 120, and the like. (hereinafter referred to as "board member"). In the modified example of FIG. 25(b-1), it is assumed that a frame member is adopted as the display member. Concretely, a message of “second time-saving installation” is displayed (described) near the right-side production lamp 33 among the two production lamps 33 .

FIG. 25(b-2) is a diagram for explaining another modification when a display member is employed. FIG. 25(b-2) shows an excerpt of the area corresponding to the area Ry shown in FIG. 1 in the gaming machine 1 in the modified example. In the modified example of FIG. 25(b-2), it is assumed that a board member is adopted as the display member. Specifically, a message "second time saving installation" is displayed below the big winning opening 16 in the game area. According to each of the modifications described above, it is possible to grasp from the display member whether or not it is possible to shift to the second time-saving gaming state during the period in which the gaming machine 1 is not powered on. However, the area where the message indicating that the game can be shifted to the second time-saving gaming state can be changed as appropriate.

By the way, there is a situation that the message indicating that the second time-saving gaming state is installed is more likely to be visually recognized from a distant place as the game machine 1 is located on the upper end side. In the modified example of FIG. 25(b-1) described above, the message is displayed above the center of the frame member (gaming machine 1). Therefore, there is an advantage that the message can be easily recognized even from a remote location.

In addition, there is a circumstance that a player during a game tends to pay attention to the starting ports (13, 14) of the board members. The starting ports (13, 14) are located below the center of the board member. That is, there is a situation in which the player tends to pay attention to the lower part of the board member from the center. In the modification of FIG. 25(b-2) described above, the message indicating that the second time-saving gaming state is installed is displayed below the center of the board member. Therefore, for example, compared to the configuration in which the message is displayed above the center of the board member, the modified example of FIG. 25(b-2) has the advantage of making it easier for the player to pay attention to the message.

<Preliminary judgment table for special symbols>
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a pre-determination table for pre-determining the result of the jackpot lottery. When the game ball enters the first starting winning port 13 or the second starting winning port 14 (at the time of starting winning), winning information is generated by the preliminary determination table.

The winning information described above is generated in order to determine in advance the result of the jackpot lottery. Specifically, the winning information includes the type of special symbol display device (the type of starter detection switch that detects that the game ball has entered the starter), the type of special symbol, the game state, the reach determination random number, and the It is generated based on the random number for special symbol variation. Also, a start winning designation command specifying the generated winning information is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 120 . By the start winning designation command indicating the above winning information, the result of preliminary judgment (losing, big win, small win), the type of special design, and the variation pattern (whether or not reach occurs) can be discriminated before the start of variation of special symbols. Winning information (starting winning designation command) of the present embodiment is referred to, for example, when determining a so-called look-ahead effect (suspended change effect).

In the advance determination table shown in FIG. 26, as winning information for the first special symbol display device 20, winning information a (1, 2), winning information b (1 to 4), winning information c (1 to 4), winning Winning information including information d1 and winning information e1 is set. Also, as winning information for the second special symbol display device 21, winning information a (3, 4), winning information b (5-8), winning information c (5-8), winning information d (1, 2) , prize information e(1,2), prize information f and prize information g are set.

For example, if the winning information a1 or the winning information a3 is selected at the start winning, the effect control board 120 executes the effect for about 40000 ms in the game started by the starting winning. In the above production, after the normal reach production is executed, it becomes a long hit.

When the prize winning information b1 or the prize winning information b5 is selected at the time of starting winning, the effect of about 60000 ms is executed by the effect control board 120 in the game started by the starting winning. In the above production, the SP reach 1 is executed after the normal reach production is executed, resulting in a long win.

When the winning information b2 or the winning information b6 is selected at the start winning, the effect control board 120 executes the effect for about 60000 ms in the game started by the starting winning. In the above production, the SP reach 2 is executed after the normal reach production is executed, resulting in a long win.

When the winning information c1 or the winning information c5 is selected at the start winning, the effect control board 120 executes the effect for about 70000ms in the game started by the starting winning. In the above effects, after the normal reach effect is executed, the SPSP reach effect 1 is executed directly or via the SP reach effect, resulting in a long win.

When the winning information c2 or the winning information c6 is selected at the start winning, the effect control board 120 executes the effect for about 70000 ms in the game started by the starting winning. In the above effects, after the normal ready-to-win effect is executed, the SP ready-to-win effect 2 is executed via the SP ready-to-win effect or directly to correspond to the long win effect.

When the prize winning information d1 or the prize winning information d2 is selected at the start winning prize, the effect control board 120 executes a small win or short win effect for about 20000 ms in the game started by the starting win.

Winning information e1, Winning information a2, Winning information b3, Winning information b4, Winning information c3, Winning information c4, Winning information e2, Winning information a4, Winning information b7, Winning information b8, Winning information c7, The winning information c8 and the winning information f are determined when the big hit lottery based on the starting winning that determined the winning information is lost.

As shown in FIG. 26, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state), winning information is not set when the game ball wins the first start port 13 . Specifically, in the time-saving gaming state, the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 20 (a combination of a random number for special symbol determination and a random number for symbols), a random number for reach determination, and a random number for special symbol variation However, winning information is not set when a game ball wins in the first start port 13.例文帳に追加Further, in the time-saving game state, when the game ball has won the first start port 13, the start winning designation command is not generated.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described.
<Main processing of the main control board>
FIG. 27 is a flowchart for explaining the main processing by the main control board 110. FIG. When power is supplied from the power supply board 170, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 111, and the main CPU 111 performs the following main processing.

When the main processing is started, the main CPU 111 executes initialization processing (S10). In the initialization process, main CPU 111 executes a startup program and initializes a predetermined storage area of main RAM 113 . For example, the initialization process sets the stack pointer appropriately. Note that in the initialization process, each piece of information (such as the number of normal outs) for displaying the base value described above is not initialized. Further, in the initialization process, the game state (high accuracy flag, time saving flag) and the remaining number M of the time saving game state are not initialized. In addition, the remaining number of times N until the time-saving gaming state is not initialized in the initialization process.

After executing the initialization process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the clear button 30 is operated (S20). When determining that the clear button 30 has not been operated (S20: No), the main CPU 111 advances the process to the game random number update process (S60). On the other hand, when determining that the clear button 30 has been operated (S20: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the setting key device 115 has been rotated to a specific position (S30). That is, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the setting change switch 115a is in the ON state. When determining that the setting key device 115 has been rotated (S30: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes setting change processing (S40).

In the above configuration, if both the setting key device 115 and the clear button 30 are operated when the power is turned on, the setting change process is executed. That is, the setting change mode described above is started. In the setting change process, an operation for changing the setting value (operation of the clear button 30) is accepted. When the setting change switch 115a is turned off, the setting value displayed by the base display 114 is stored in the main RAM 113, and the setting change process ends.

In the setting change process of this embodiment, various information in the main RAM 113 is initialized. For example, in the setting change process, the game state is initialized to a low-probability non-time-saving game state. Specifically, the game state storage area of the main RAM 113 stores a high probability flag and a time saving flag. The high probability flag is set to the ON state in the high probability game state, and is set to the OFF state in the low probability game state. In addition, the time saving flag is set to the ON state in the time saving game state, and is set to the OFF state in the non-time saving game state. In the setting change process, the high accuracy flag and the time saving flag are initialized to the OFF state.

Further, in the setting change process, the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state is initialized to a numerical value "0", and the initial value "800" is set to the remaining number of times N until the second time saving game state. In the above configuration, in other words, the number of remaining games until the second time-saving game state is activated is initialized in the setting change process. After completing the setting change process, the main CPU 111 advances the process to the game random number update process.

In step S30 described above, when determining that the setting key device 115 has not been rotated (S30: No), the main CPU 111 executes the clear operation processing. In the clear operation time process, similarly to the above-described setting change process, the high accuracy flag and the time saving flag are initialized to the OFF state. Further, in the clear operation process, the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state is initialized to a numerical value "0", and the remaining number of times N is initialized to a numerical value "800". Note that in the setting change process and the clear operation process, each information for displaying the base value described above is not initialized. Each piece of information for displaying the base value is not initialized except when an error requiring a cold start (for example, a backup error) occurs.

In the above configuration, the area of the main RAM 113 to be initialized may be common or different between the setting change process and the clear operation process. Also, a setting confirmation mode may be provided in which the current setting values are displayed on the base display 114 although the setting values cannot be changed. For example, when the setting key device 115 is rotated to a specific position after the process proceeds to step S60, the process may be changed to the setting confirmation mode.

After executing the clear operation process, the main CPU 111 executes game random number update process (S60). In the game random number update process described above, the special symbol variation random number and reach determination random number are updated. The game random number updating process described above is repeatedly executed until a predetermined interruption occurs.

<Timer interrupt processing of the main control board>
FIG. 28 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing by the main control board 110. FIG. A reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 ms), thereby executing the timer interrupt processing described below.

When the above timer interrupt processing is executed, in step S101, the main CPU 111 saves the information stored in the register to the stack area. After executing step S101, the main CPU 111 executes time control processing (S102). In the above time control process, the main CPU 111 updates the special symbol time counter, updates the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, and updates the normal symbol time counter that defines the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 22. Various timer counters are updated, such as renewal, renewal of a general electric open time counter that defines the open time of the second start port 14 . Specifically, the main CPU 111 subtracts 1 from the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, and the normal electric opening time counter.

After executing the time control process, the main CPU 111 executes random number update process (S103). In the random number update process, the main CPU 111 updates the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for big win symbol, the random number for small win symbol, and the random number for hit determination. Specifically, the numerical value "1" is added to each random number counter indicating each random number value.

After executing the random number update process, the main CPU 111 executes an initial random number counter update process (step S104). In this embodiment, when the random number is added to the maximum value, the random number is set to the value of the initial random number counter. In the initial random number counter update processing, the main CPU 111 controls an initial random number counter for special symbol determination indicating an initial random number for special symbol determination, an initial random number counter for big winning symbols indicating an initial random number for big winning symbols, and an initial random number counter for small winning symbols. A numerical value "1" is added to each of the small winning symbol initial random number counters indicating the initial random number.

After executing the initial random number counter update process, the main CPU 111 executes an input control process (S105). In the input control process, the main CPU 111 controls the first starting opening detection switch 13a, the second starting opening detection switch 14a, the gate detection switch 15a, the big winning opening detection switches (16a, 17a), the general winning opening detection switch 18a, and the out ball. It is determined whether or not there is an input to each switch of the detection switch 19a.

After executing the input control process, the main CPU 111 executes a special symbol special electric control process (S106) for controlling the special symbol display devices (20, 21) and the special electric accessories (opening/closing door 16b, movable piece 17b). Run. In addition, the main CPU 111 executes the general-purpose general electric control processing (S107) after executing the special-design special electric control processing. In the normal pattern normal electric control process, the normal symbol display device 22 and the normal electric accessories (opening/closing door 14b) are controlled.

After executing the general/universal electric power control process, the main CPU 111 executes a payout control process (S108). In the payout control process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening 16, the first starting opening 13, the second starting opening 14, or the general winning opening 18. Also, in the payout control process, when determining that a game ball has won a winning hole, the main CPU 111 transmits to the payout control board 130 a payout number designation command corresponding to the winning hole.

Specifically, the general winning opening prize ball counter, the big winning opening prize ball counter, and the starting opening prize ball counter are checked, and a payout number designation command corresponding to each winning opening is transmitted to the payout control board 130 . After that, predetermined data is subtracted from the prize ball counter corresponding to the transmitted number-of-payout designation command to update the prize ball counter.

After executing the payout control process, the main CPU 111 executes a data creation process (S109). In the data creation process, external information data (such as information indicating that the jackpot is in progress) to be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine 1, starting opening opening/closing solenoid data that defines the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 14b (second starting opening 14), opening/closing door 16b and movable piece 17b (large winning opening) opening and closing solenoid data that defines the opening and closing pattern, special symbol display device data that defines the display pattern of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21, Ordinary design display device data that defines the display pattern of the ordinary design display device 22 is created.

After executing the data creation process, the main CPU 111 executes an output control process (S110). In the output control process, the main CPU 111 outputs various data (starting port opening/closing solenoid data, etc.) created in step S109 via the port. The main CPU 111 also executes a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 113 . For example, the above-described start winning designation command is stored in the above performance transmission data storage area.

After executing the output control process, the main CPU 111 executes a counting process (S111). In the counting process described above, the number of prize balls and the number of outs are counted in order to calculate the base value B of the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 111, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, when a game ball enters the general winning hole 18 (when the game ball is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 18a), the base calculation prize ball counter A numerical value "10" (the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening 18) is added to the (normal number of winning balls) in the counting process.

Similarly, in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, when the game ball wins the first start port 13, the number "3", when the game ball wins the second start port 14, the number "3", the first big winning port 16 When the game ball wins, the numerical value "15" is added to the winning ball counter for base calculation. On the other hand, except for the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the base calculation prize ball counter is not added.

When a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 19a, the main CPU 111 adds a numerical value "1" to the out counter for base calculation (the number of normal outs) in the counting process of the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, the out-counter for base calculation is not added except for the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. Further, when a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 19a, the numerical value "1" is added to the total out counter in the counting process regardless of the game state.

After executing the counting process, the main CPU 111 executes a base display process (S112). In the base display process, a base value is calculated from the number of normal winning balls and the number of normal outs counted in the counting process described above, and displayed on the base display 114 . After executing the base display process, the main CPU 111 restores the information saved in step S101 to the register of the main CPU 111 (S113).

<Input control processing>
FIG. 29 is a flowchart for explaining the input control processing (S105 in FIG. 12 described above) by the main control board 110. FIG. After starting the input control process, the main CPU 111 executes a general winning hole detection switch input process (S121). In the general winning hole detection switch input process described above, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 18a. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning hole 18 . When the detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 18a, the main CPU 111 adds predetermined data to the general winning hole prize ball counter to update it.

After executing the general winning opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the big winning opening detection switch input process (S122). In the big winning hole detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether a detection signal from the big winning hole detection switches (16a, 17a) is input. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening (16, 17). The main CPU 111 adds predetermined data to the big winning hole prize ball counter when a detection signal is input from the big winning hole detection switch.

After executing the big winning opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the first start opening detection switch input process (S123). In the first starting port detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 13a. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 13 . When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 13 in the first starting hole detection switch input process, predetermined data for judging a big hit is set.

After executing the first starting hole detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the second starting hole detection switch input process. In the second starting port detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether a detection signal has been input from the second starting port detection switch 14a. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 14 . When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start hole 14 in the above-described second start hole detection switch input process, a big hit is determined in the same manner as when the game ball enters the first start hole 13. Predetermined data is set to do so.

After executing the second starting port detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes gate detection switch input process. In the gate detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 15a. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 15 . When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 15 in the above gate detection switch input processing, predetermined data for performing the normal pattern lottery is set.

<First start port detection switch input processing>
FIG. 30 is a flow chart for explaining the first starting port detection switch input process (S123 in FIG. 29 described above) by the main control board 110. FIG. When the first starting port detection switch input process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a detection signal is input from the first starting port detection switch 13a (S131). When determining that the detection signal is not input from the first starting port detection switch 13a (S131: No), the main CPU 111 terminates the first starting port detection switch input process.

When determining that a detection signal has been input from the first starting opening detection switch 13a (S131: Yes), the main CPU 111 updates the starting opening prize ball counter (S132). Specifically, the main CPU 111 adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the first starting hole 13 (for example, the numerical value "3") to the starting hole prize ball counter.

After updating the starting prize ball counter, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the number of reservations set in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is less than four (S133). When the number of reservations set in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is not less than 4 (S133: No), that is, when the number of reservations is 4 (U1=4), the main CPU 111 performs the first start End the mouth detection switch input process.

When the number of reservations set in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is less than 4 (S133: Yes), the main CPU 111 acquires various random numbers. Specifically, the main CPU 111 acquires a special symbol determination random number value (S134), acquires a big win symbol random number value (S135), acquires a small win symbol random number value (S136), and acquires a game random number value. Numerical values (random number for special symbol variation and random number for reach determination) are acquired (S137).

Each random number value obtained in steps S134 to S137 is stored in the first special symbol storage area (first to fourth storage sections). Specifically, the above-described first special symbol storage area includes the first storage section to the fourth storage section. The main CPU 111 searches for empty storage units in order from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, and stores each acquired random number value in the empty storage units. Also, after acquiring each random number value, the main CPU 111 adds the number "1" to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area (S138).

After adding the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area, the main CPU 111 executes a preliminary determination process (S139). In the pre-determination process, the main CPU 111 determines each random number obtained in steps S134 to S137 based on the pre-determination table (see FIG. 26 described above) corresponding to the current gaming state.

When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 14 in the above-described second starting hole detection switch input process, the same process as the first starting hole detection switch input process is performed. However, in the above-described first starting port detection switch input process, the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area is added, while in the second starting port detection switch input process, the second special symbol reserved number (U2) Storage space is added. Also, in the second starting opening detection switch input process, each acquired random number value is stored in the second special symbol storage area. That is, the first starting opening detection switch input process and the second starting opening detection switch input process differ only in the updated storage area (special symbol reservation number storage area, special symbol storage area), and the other processes are in principle common. . However, in the first starting opening detection switch input process, the starting winning designation command is not transmitted in the time saving game state, and in the second starting opening detection switch input process, the starting winning designation command is transmitted even in the time saving game state. are also different.

<Pre-judgment processing>
FIG. 31 is a flow chart for explaining the pre-determination process by the main control board 110. FIG. The advance determination process of FIG. 31 is executed in both the above-described first starting opening detection switch input process and second starting opening detection switch input process. That is, the above preliminary determination processing is executed both when the game ball enters the first start hole 13 and when the game ball enters the second start hole 14 .

In the preliminary determination process, the above-described winning information (see FIG. 26) is generated, and a starting winning designation command specifying the winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 120 . According to the start winning designation command, a look-ahead effect (for example, pending change effect) can be executed on the effect control board 120 side. However, as described above, winning information is not determined when the game ball enters the first start port 13 in the time-saving gaming state. In the above configuration, the look-ahead effect when the game ball has won the first start hole 13 is substantially prohibited in the time-saving game state.

Specifically, when the pre-determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current pre-determination process has been executed with the opportunity of winning a game ball into the first start hole 13. (S151). When it is determined that the preliminary determination process has been executed when the game ball has entered the first start port 13 (S151: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (S152). ). When determining that the game is in the time-saving gaming state (S152: Yes), the main CPU 111 terminates the preliminary determination process without generating winning information (omitting S161, which will be described later). As described above, the look-ahead effect is executed based on the winning information. Therefore, according to the present embodiment described above, the look-ahead effect when the game ball has won the first start hole 13 is substantially prohibited in the time-saving game state.

When determining that it is not in the time-saving gaming state (S152: No), the main CPU 111 executes a jackpot provisional determination process (S153). In the big hit provisional determination process, the main CPU 111 uses the special symbol determination random number value written in the special symbol reservation storage area in accordance with the start win this time to perform the big hit determination process (described later) of the game started by the start win. In S207 of FIG. 33), it is provisionally determined whether a big win, a small win, or a loss is won.

When "No" is determined in the above-described step S151, that is, when the pre-determination process is executed with the opportunity that the game ball has entered the second starting port 14, the main CPU 111 omits the above-described step S152. Then, the process after the big hit temporary determination process (S153) is executed. In the above configuration, when the game ball wins to the second start port 14, winning information is generated regardless of whether it is a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state (S161 described later is executed) . That is, when the game ball enters the second start port 14, the look-ahead effect can be executed regardless of whether it is in the time-saving game state or in the non-time-saving game state.

After executing the big-hit temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the big-hit temporary determination process has temporarily determined a big hit (S154). When the main CPU 111 temporarily determines that it is a big hit (step S154: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a big win symbol temporary determination process (S155). In the jackpot pattern provisional determination processing, the jackpot pattern (stop pattern data) to be stopped in the game started by the start prize is provisionally determined by using the jackpot pattern random number acquired according to the start prize of this time. After executing the big hit symbol temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 proceeds to the variation pattern temporary determination process (S158).

On the other hand, when it is not provisionally determined to win a big hit in the big win provisional determination process (step S154: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it is provisionally determined to win a small win (S156). When it is provisionally determined that a small hit will be won (S156: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a small winning symbol provisional determination process (S157). In the small-hit symbol provisional determination process, a small-hit symbol (stop symbol data) to be stopped in the game started by the start winning is provisionally determined by using the small-hit symbol random number obtained in response to the current start winning. be judged. After executing the small winning symbol temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 proceeds to the variation pattern temporary determination process (S159). If it is determined to be "No" in the above-described step S156, that is, if it is temporarily determined to be a loss in the big hit temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 does not execute the symbol temporary determination process (above-mentioned S155, S157). The process proceeds to temporary determination processing S158.

In the variation pattern provisional determination process (S158), the main CPU 111 acquires the game state, the result of the temporary jackpot determination process, the result of the jackpot pattern provisional decision process, the result of the small win pattern provisional decision process, and the current start winning. Using the random number for special symbol variation and the random number for reach determination, the variation pattern of the special symbol is provisionally determined. After that, the main CPU 111 generates winning information corresponding to the variation pattern provisionally determined in the variation pattern provisional determination process (S159). In addition, a start winning designation command corresponding to the winning information is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S160), and the preliminary determination process is terminated.

By the above preliminary determination processing, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 13 or the second starting hole 14, the winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 120 as a starting winning designation command. Therefore, the sub CPU 121 of the effect control board 120 that has received the starting winning designation command analyzes the starting winning designation command, and predetermines the special symbol variation triggered by this starting winning prize. Effect (read-ahead effect) can be executed.

However, this pre-determining process is only determined according to the game state at the time when the game ball enters the starting holes 13 and 14 . Therefore, if the game state changes before processing the first or second suspension reserved by the ball entry, the result of the jackpot determination process described later may differ from the result of the prior determination process. There is

<Special special train control processing>
FIG. 32 is a flowchart for explaining the special figure special electric control process (S106 in FIG. 12 described above) by the main control board 110. FIG. When the special figure special electric control processing is started, the main CPU 111 loads the current value of the special figure special electric processing data (0 to 5) (S181), and refers to the branch address from the loaded special figure special electric processing data (S182).

For example, when the special symbol special electric processing data is "0", the main CPU 111 executes a special symbol storage determination process (step S183). Although it will be described in detail later, in the special symbol storage determination process, the number of reservations (U1, U2) is subtracted, the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device and the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device are set, and the special symbol display device Variable display is started. When the variable display of the special symbol display device is started, "1" is set to the special symbol special electric processing data.

When the special symbol special electric processing data is "1", the main CPU 111 executes special symbol variation processing (S184). In the special symbol variation process, when the variation time of the special symbol set in the last special symbol storage determination process has elapsed, the special symbol set in the special symbol storage determination process is displayed on the special symbol display device (20, 21). stop display. Also, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol special electric processing data is set to "2".

When the special symbol special electric processing data is "2", the main CPU 111 executes the special symbol stop processing (S185). In the special symbol stop time processing, the main CPU 111 stops and displays the special symbols displayed in the above-described special symbol variation processing for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Thereafter, the main CPU 111 sets "3" to the special symbol special electric processing data, and sets the opening command and the opening time for the big win if the stopped and displayed special symbol is a big win symbol. Similarly, if the stop-displayed special symbol is a small winning symbol, the main CPU 111 sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "4" and sets the opening command and the opening time for the small winning. Further, if the stopped and displayed special symbol is a lost symbol, the main CPU 111 sets "0" to the special symbol special electric processing data.

When the special symbol special electric processing data is "3", that is, when the big-hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the main CPU 111 executes the big-hit game process (step S186). In the jackpot game processing, after the opening of the jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "opening period") ends, the jackpot 16 is opened according to the jackpot opening/closing solenoid data (opening pattern of the jackpot 16). That is, the above-mentioned round is started after the opening period. The big winning opening opening/closing solenoid data used in the big winning game is selected according to the big winning pattern.

After all rounds are finished, ending control (wait control) is performed for a predetermined period of time. In addition, in this embodiment, the period during which the ending control is executed may be referred to as "ending period". Also, the period from the end of the opening period to the start of the ending period may be referred to as a "round period" (a period including multiple rounds and intervals). When the ending period ends, "5" is set to the special figure special electric processing data.

When the special symbol special electric processing data is "4", that is, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the previous special symbol stopping processing, the main CPU 111 executes the small winning game processing (step S187). In the small-hit game process, small-hit opening control is executed, and after that, the big-hit opening 16 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, "1.8 seconds") according to the big-hit opening/closing solenoid data for the small winning. After that, the ending control is executed for a predetermined period, and "0" is set to the special figure special electric processing data. After executing the small winning game process, the main CPU 111 advances the process to the transition determination process (S225). In the transition determination process, it is determined whether or not the conditions for starting the second time-saving gaming state are met, and whether or not the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state are met.

When the special figure special electric processing data is "5", the main CPU 111 executes special game end processing (S188). In the special game end process, the main CPU 111 changes the game state after the big hit game to a high probability short working time game state or a low probability short working time game state (second 1 o'clock short game state). Specifically, when shifting to the first time-saving game state after the end of the big hit, the first time-saving flag is changed to the ON state. Further, when shifting to the first time-saving game state after the end of the big win, the initial value "100" or "799" is set to the remaining number M of the first time-saving game state according to the big win pattern. After setting the game state after the jackpot game, the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "0". In addition, when it shifts to high probability game state (high probability time saving game state), high probability flag changes to ON state.

<Special symbol memory determination process>
FIG. 33 is a flow chart for explaining the special symbol storage determination process (S183 in FIG. 32 described above) by the main control board 110. FIG. When the special symbol storage determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed (S201). If the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (special symbol time counter ≠ 0) (S201: Yes), the special symbol storage determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the special symbols are not being variably displayed (S201: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area is 1 or more (S202).

When the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area is not 1 or more (S202: No), the main CPU 111 shifts the process to step S204, and the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area is "1" or more. If there is (S202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S203. In the above configuration, the second special symbol storage area is preferentially processed over the first special symbol storage area. In step S203, the main CPU 111 subtracts "1" from the value stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area.

In step S204, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area is "1" or more. When the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area is not "1" or more (S204: No), the process is moved to step S215, and when the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area is "1" or more (S204: Yes), the process proceeds to step S205.

In step S205, the main CPU 111 subtracts "1" from the value of the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area. After that, in step S206, the main CPU 111 stores the random number (random number for special symbol determination, A combination of a random number for big-hit design, a random number for small-hit design, a random number for reach determination, and a random number for special design variation.) and shift processing of the start winning designation command. Specifically, the predetermined random number value and the start winning designation command stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit in the first special symbol storage area or the second special symbol storage area are stored in the storage unit one before shift to

For example, the random number value and the start winning designation command stored in the first storage section are shifted to the determination storage area (0th storage section). In addition, the predetermined random number value and the starting winning designation command stored in the first storage section are written in the determination storage area (0th storage section) and written in the determination storage area (0th storage section). The data is erased from the special symbol reserve storage area. That is, the random number value and the start winning designation command used in the previous game are erased. Also, the MODE of the start winning designation command is processed so as to correspond to the storage area after the shift.

After subtracting the pending number, the main CPU 111 executes a big hit determination process (S207). In the big-hit determination process, the main CPU 111 uses the data (random number for special symbol determination, random number for big-hit symbol, small-hit A big hit determination process is executed based on the symbol random number).

When a big win is won in the above-mentioned big win determination processing, the big win symbols to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 are determined. Also, when winning a small win, a special special pattern for a small win is determined, and in the case of a loss, a special pattern for losing is determined.

After executing the big hit determination process, the main CPU 111 executes a variation pattern determination process (S208). In the variation pattern determination process, a variation pattern determination table based on the current gaming state is used to determine the variation pattern. Specifically, the variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern determination table according to the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for big win symbol, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special symbol variation.

After executing the variation pattern determination process, the main CPU 111 sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process in the effect transmission data storage area (S209). Further, the main CPU 111 confirms the game state at the start of the variation, and sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area (S210).

After setting the game state designation command, the main CPU 111 starts variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 (S211). Specifically, when the first reservation (U1) is subtracted in the special symbol memory determination processing of this time, the variable display is started in the first special symbol display device 20, and the second reservation is made in the special symbol memory determination processing of this time. When (U2) is subtracted, the second special symbol display device 21 starts the variable display. After starting the variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol display device, the main CPU 111 sets the special symbol time counter to a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step S208 (S212).

After setting the variable time, the main CPU 111 sets the customer waiting determination flag to "00H" (S213). That is, the customer waiting determination flag is cleared. The above customer waiting determination flag becomes "00H" during the variable display of the special symbols and during the special game. On the other hand, in other cases (non-gaming period), the customer waiting determination flag becomes "01H". When the customer waiting determination flag is "01H", the effect control board 120 is notified that it is a non-game period by a customer waiting command. After clearing the customer waiting determination flag, the main CPU 111 sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "1" (S214), and terminates the special symbol storage determination process.

In step S204 described above, if it is determined that the first suspension (U1) is "0", that is, if neither the first suspension (U1) nor the second suspension (U2) is stored, the main CPU 111 , determines whether or not the customer waiting determination flag is set to "01H" (S215).

When the customer waiting determination flag is set to 01H (S215: Yes), the main CPU 111 terminates the special symbol storage determination process. On the other hand, if the customer waiting determination flag is not set to "01H" (S215: No), the main CPU 111 shifts the process to step S216. In step S216, the main CPU 111 sets the customer waiting determination flag to 01H so as not to set the customer waiting command repeatedly in step S217, which will be described later. In step S217, the main CPU 111 sets a customer waiting command in the effect transmission data storage area, and terminates the special symbol storage determination process.

<Special symbol memory determination process>
FIG. 34(a) is a flowchart for explaining the special symbol stop processing (S185 in FIG. 32 described above) by the main control board 110. FIG. The special symbol stop time process described above is executed immediately after the variable display of the special symbols is stopped.

When the special symbol stop processing is started, the main CPU 111 sets a symbol confirmation command in the effect transmission data storage area (S220). After setting the symbol confirmation command, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the confirmation period has passed (S221). The determination period described above is provided so that the player can recognize that the special symbols have been stopped and displayed in the current game. The determination period is, for example, approximately 0.5 seconds. The variable display of the special figure in the next game is prohibited until the above fixed period ends. Specifically, step S221 is repeatedly executed until the fixed period ends (S221: No), and when the fixed period ends (S221: Yes), it becomes possible to shift to the subsequent steps.

When the determination period ends, the main CPU 111 sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area (S222). After setting the game state designation command, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol stopped in the current game is a big-hit symbol or a small-hit symbol (hereinafter collectively referred to as "hit symbol"). S223). When the main CPU 111 determines that the symbol is a winning symbol (S223: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a winning preparation process (S224) and ends the special symbol stopping process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning symbol is not a winning symbol (S223: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the shift determination process (S225) and ends the special symbol stopping process.

FIG. 34(b) is a flowchart of the winning preparation process. When the winning preparation process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol stopped in the current game is a big winning symbol (S230). When determining that the symbol is a big hit (S230: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "3" (big hit game processing) (S231). In addition, the main CPU 111 executes a jackpot initialization process (S233). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S230 that the symbol is not a big hit (S230: No), the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "4" (small winning game processing) (S232).

In the jackpot time initialization process, various information is initialized. For example, in the jackpot time initialization process, the high probability flag which is turned ON in the high probability game state is changed to the OFF state, and shifts to the low probability game state. In addition, the time-saving flag, which is ON in the time-saving game state, is changed to the OFF state, and the remaining number of times M indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving game state is initialized to a numerical value "0", and the state is shifted to a non-time-saving game state. do.

In the jackpot time initialization process, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is initialized. In addition, in the present embodiment, the remaining number of times N is not initialized in principle except when the above-described clear operation processing by the operation of the clear button or the trigger of the start of the jackpot game is started. For example, when the remaining number of times N reaches the operation number of times n (numerical value "0"), the game moves to the second time-saving gaming state, but the remaining number of times N is not initialized. In the above configuration, the number of times that can be shifted to the second time-saving game state is one in the period from this big win game to the next big win game.

After executing the jackpot initializing process, the main CPU 111 executes a winning start preparation process (S234). In the winning start preparation process, for example, the opening pattern of the big winning openings (16, 17) in the big winning game is determined according to the special symbol (type of big winning). In addition, an opening pattern of the big winning openings (16, 17) in the small winning game is set. After that, the main CPU 111 issues an opening designation command according to the type of win (first probability variable length win, first probability variable short win, first normal long win, second probability variable length win, small win). (S235), the opening time corresponding to the type of winning is set (S236), and the winning preparation process is terminated.

FIG. 35(a) is a flow chart of the migration determination process. When the transition determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining number of times N is a numerical value "0" (S240). When it is determined that the remaining number of times N is the numerical value "0" (S240: Yes), that is, when the second time-saving game state is in progress or during the activated period, the main CPU 111 executes the time-saving end determination process (S245). After that, the transition determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when determining that the number of remaining times N is not "0" (S240: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it is in the low probability gaming state (S241). In addition, in the above-described step S240, in the game in the high probability time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state or the low probability non-time-saving game state other than the activated period, "No" is determined in the above-described step S240.

When determining that the game is not in the low-probability gaming state (S241: No), the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "0" (S246), and terminates the transition determination process. On the other hand, when determining that the game is in the low-probability gaming state (S241: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number of times N (S242). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining number of times N subtracted in step S242 is a numerical value "0" (S243). When determining that the remaining number of times N after the subtraction is not "0" (S243: No), the main CPU 111 executes the time saving end determination process, then sets the special figure special electric processing data to "0", and determines the transition. End the process. On the other hand, when determining that the remaining number of times N after the subtraction is "0" (S243: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the second time reduction transition process (S244), and then sets the special figure special electric processing data to "0". ”, and ends the transition determination process. In the second time-saving transition processing, the numerical value "1000" is set to the remaining number of times M of the time-saving game state, the second time-saving flag is set to the ON state, and the second time-saving game state is started. In the process at the time of 2nd time reduction transition, the variation pattern determination table T is set according to the kind of table scenario Sb set. However, in the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tbx is set.

In this embodiment, in the period after the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", it is determined as "Yes" in the above-described step S240, and the step S242 of subtracting the remaining number of times N is not executed. . In the above configuration, the subtraction of the remaining number of times N stops at the numerical value "0". However, instead of the above configuration, the remaining number of times N may continue to be decremented in a period after the remaining number of times N is decremented to the numerical value "0". FIG. 35(c) shows the transition determination process of the modification adopting the above configuration. The transition determination process of the modification is obtained by omitting step S240 from the transition determination process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 35(a)). In the above modified example, step S242 is executed even after the remaining number of times N is decremented to the numerical value "0", and the remaining number of times N can be decremented to a negative number. It should be noted that, in the modification, if the remaining number of times N is a numerical value "1" or more, and if the remaining number of times N is a numerical value of "-1" or less, it is determined as "No" in step S243, and the second time reduction transition time process is Not executed.

FIG.35(b) is a flowchart for demonstrating a time saving completion|finish determination process. When starting the time saving end determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state is a numerical value “0” (S250). The remaining number M is stored in the main RAM 113 and indicates the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state. That is, in the present embodiment, the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state and the remaining number of times in the second time-saving game state are stored as common data. In the above configuration, there is an advantage that the amount of data is reduced compared to the configuration in which the number of remaining times of each time-saving game state is stored as separate data.

When determining that the number of remaining times M is "0" (S250: Yes), the main CPU 111 terminates the time saving end determination process. On the other hand, when determining that the remaining number M is not "0" (S250: No), the main CPU 111 subtracts "1" from the remaining number M (S251). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining number of times M after the subtraction is "0" (S252). If the remaining count M after the subtraction is not "0" (S252: No), the main CPU 111 terminates the time saving end determination process. On the other hand, if the remaining number of times M after the subtraction is "0" (S252: Yes), the main CPU 111 terminates the time saving end determination process after delegating the time saving end process (S253). In the time-saving end processing, for example, the time-saving flag is changed to the OFF state, and the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state or second time-saving game state) ends. In the process at the time of 2nd time reduction transition, the variation pattern determination table T is set according to the kind of table scenario Sb set. However, in the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set.

FIG. 36(a) is a flow chart of the general/universal electric power control process. When starting the general electric power control process, the main CPU 111 loads the current value of the general electric power processing data (0 to 3) (S401), and refers to the branch address from the loaded general electric power processing data ( S402).

For example, when the general pattern general electric processing data is "0", the main CPU 111 executes the general pattern storage determination process (step S403). In the normal symbol memory determination process, a normal pattern lottery (hit determination process) is executed with a probability corresponding to whether it is a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state. In addition, the normal pattern to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the result of the normal drawing lottery. Furthermore, depending on the current game state (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state), the normal pattern fluctuation time and the operation mode of the open/close door 14b (second start port 14) are determined by lottery. When the normal pattern lottery is executed, the main CPU 111 changes the normal pattern general electric processing data to "1" when ending the normal symbol storage determination process.

When the normal pattern normal electric processing data is "1", the main CPU 111 executes normal symbol variation processing (S404). In the normal design variation process, the normal design is variably displayed in the variation time determined in the normal design memory determination process. The main CPU 111 changes the normal pattern/general electric processing data to "2" when ending the normal symbol variation processing.

When the normal pattern normal electric processing data is "2", the main CPU 111 executes normal symbol stop processing (S405). In the normal design stop process, the normal design determined in the normal design memory determination process is stopped and displayed for at least a predetermined wait period (for example, about 0.5 seconds). When ending the normal symbol stop processing, the main CPU 111 changes the normal pattern normal electric processing data to "3".

When the general/universal electric power processing data is "3", the main CPU 111 executes the opening/closing control process (S405). In the open/close control process, when the open symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol stop process, the open/close door 14b is opened and closed in the operation mode determined in the normal symbol storage determination process. When ending the opening/closing control process, the main CPU 111 changes the general/universal/universal electrical process data to "0".

FIG. 36(b) is a flow chart of normal symbol memory determination processing. The normal symbol storage determination process described above is executed in the above-described normal pattern normal electric control process.

When the main CPU 111 starts the normal symbol storage determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the normal symbol reserved number G (the number of reserved normal symbol lotteries) is greater than or equal to "1" (S410). When determining that the normal symbol reserved number G is not equal to or greater than the numerical value "1" (G=0) (S410: No), the main CPU 111 terminates the normal symbol storage determination process. On the other hand, when determining that the number G of reserved normal symbols is greater than or equal to "1" (S410: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the number "1" from the reserved number G of normal symbols (S411), and shifts the storage area. (S412).

Specifically, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 15, a hit determination random number value is acquired and stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area. The normal symbol reservation storage area includes storage sections from a first storage section to a fourth storage section. When the main CPU 111 acquires the random number value for winning judgment, it preferentially stores the random number value for winning judgment in order from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit among the free storage units. In the above-described step S412, the hit determination random number value stored in the first storage section is stored (shifted) to the determination storage area (0th storage section) of the normal symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the hit determination random number value stored in the second storage unit to the fourth storage unit is stored in the first storage unit to the third storage unit.

When the hit determination random number value is stored in the determination storage area, the main CPU 111 determines the hit determination random number value according to the game state (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state) (S413). Specifically, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the numerical value defined in the above-described hit determination table (see FIG. 6B) matches the hit determination random number value. After that, the main CPU 111 determines the normal symbols to be stop-displayed according to the game state using the normal symbol determination table (see FIGS. 7(b-1) and 7(b-2)) (S414). .

Further, the main CPU 111 randomly determines the variation time according to the game state (S415), and randomly determines the operation mode of the opening/closing door 14b according to the normal symbols and game state determined in step S414 (S416). The opening/closing door 14b operates (opens/closes) in the operation mode determined in S416 in the operating state. After determining the operation mode of the open/close door 14b, the main CPU 111 changes the normal pattern/general electric processing data to "1" (S417), and terminates the normal pattern storage determination process.

Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 121 of the effect control board 120 will be described. As described above, when the effect control board 120 receives the variation pattern designation command from the main control board 110, the effect corresponding to the variation pattern designation command is determined by lottery and executed.

<Main processing of production control board>
FIG. 37(a) is a flow chart for explaining the main processing by the effect control board. In step S510, the sub CPU 121 performs initialization processing. In the initialization process, the sub CPU 121 reads a program for executing the main process from the sub ROM 122 and initializes the sub RAM 123 .

After executing the initialization process, the sub CPU 121 executes a recovery notification process (S520). In the restoration notification process, a process for notifying whether or not the second time-saving gaming state has already been activated is executed. After executing the restoration notification process, the sub CPU 121 executes the effect random number update process (S530). In the effect random number update process, the sub CPU 121 updates various random numbers stored in the sub RAM 123 . The effect random value update process is repeatedly executed until the interrupt process is executed.

FIG. 37(b) is a flowchart of the notification process at the time of restoration. When the restoration notification process is started, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not the game state at the end of display of the power restoration screen is the high-probability game state or the jackpot game (S521). When determining that the game is in a high-probability game state or a jackpot game (S521: Yes), the sub CPU 121 determines to control the effect lamp 33 in a normal mode (a mode corresponding to the game state) (S524). End the notification process. On the other hand, when determining that the game is not in the high-probability game state or the jackpot game (S521: No), the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not the remaining number of times M at the end of displaying the power restoration screen is the numerical value "0" (S522). ). When determining that the number of remaining times M is not "0" (S522: No), the sub CPU 121 determines to control the effect lamp 33 in the normal mode (S525), and terminates the restoration notification process. On the other hand, when determining that the number of remaining times M is "0" (S522: Yes), the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not the number of remaining times N is "0" at the end of displaying the recovery screen (S523). ).

If the sub CPU 121 determines that the remaining number of times N at the end of displaying the recovery screen is not the number "0" (S523: No), the sub CPU 121 determines to display the number "0" in the number of games image GE (S524), It decides to control the effect lamp 33 in the normal mode, and terminates the notification process at the time of restoration. On the other hand, in step S523 described above, if it is determined that the number of remaining times N at the end of display of the recovery screen is the numerical value "0" (S523: Yes), the sub CPU 121 puts the symbols "???" It decides to display (S526), decides to control the effect lamp 33 in a warning mode (S527), and ends the restoration time notification process.

<Timer interrupt processing of production control board>
FIG. 38 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing. The sub CPU 121 executes timer interrupt processing approximately every 2 milliseconds. When the timer interrupt process is started, the sub CPU 121 saves the information stored in the register to the stack area (S601).

After saving various information to the stack area, the sub CPU 121 updates various timer counters used in the effect control board 120 (S602). After updating the timer counter, the sub CPU 121 executes command analysis processing (S603). In the command analysis process, the sub CPU 121 analyzes commands in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 123 .

After executing the command analysis process, the sub CPU 121 executes the effect input control process (S604). Although the details will be described later, in the effect input control process, control according to the operation of the effect button 8 is executed. After executing the effect input control processing, the sub CPU 121 executes data output processing (S605) for transmitting various data set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123 to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. In step S<b>606 , the sub CPU 121 restores the information saved in step S<b>601 to the register of the sub CPU 121 .

<Command analysis processing>
39 and 40 are flowcharts for explaining the command analysis process (S603 in FIG. 38). As shown in FIG. 39, when the command analysis process is started, the sub CPU 121 determines whether a command has been received (S611). If there is no command in the reception buffer (No in step S611), the sub CPU 121 ends the command analysis process, and if there is a command in the reception buffer (Yes in step S611), the process proceeds to step S621.

In step S621, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting command (Yes in step S621), the sub CPU 121 proceeds to step S622, and if not (No in step S621), proceeds to step S631. to move.

In step S622, the sub CPU 121 performs a customer waiting effect pattern determination process for determining a customer waiting effect pattern. Specifically, a customer waiting performance pattern is determined, the determined customer waiting performance pattern is set in a performance pattern storage area, and information on the determined customer waiting performance pattern is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. Therefore, data based on the determined customer waiting effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123 .

In step S631, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the starting winning designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is the start winning designation command (Yes in step S631), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S632, and if not the starting winning designation command (No in step S631), step S641. to process.

In step S632, the sub CPU 121 analyzes the received starting winning designation command and executes pending storage processing corresponding to the starting winning designation command. Information related to the big hit, the small hit, the loss, and the variation pattern provisionally determined by the preliminary determination process is associated with the starting winning designation command. In the reservation storage process, information (winning information) about the newly reserved first reservation (U1) or second reservation (U2) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 123 .

In step S633, the sub CPU 121 executes pending change effect determination processing. In the pending change effect determination process, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not to execute a pending change effect, which will be described later, in accordance with a start winning designation command (winning information). The pending change effect is a so-called look-ahead effect, in which a pending image GB (see FIG. 29(a)), which will be described later, is displayed in one of a plurality of special modes (blue, red, gold, rainbow). Specifically, in the pending change effect, the mode of the pending image GB may change step by step to the final special mode (for example, changing from blue to red). The sub CPU 121 determines in advance the timing (scenario) at which the final special mode and the mode of the pending image GB will change when determining the execution of the pending change effect.

In step S641, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern designation command (Yes in step S641), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S642, and if it is not a variation pattern designation command (No in step S641), step S651. to process.

In step S642, the sub CPU 121 performs a variation performance pattern determination process for determining one variation performance pattern from among a plurality of variation performance patterns based on the received variation pattern designation command.

In step S643, the sub CPU 121 shifts the reserved display data stored in the first reserved storage area and the second reserved storage area and the data corresponding to the start winning designation command, and information of the reserved display data after shifting. to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

In step S651, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the effect symbol designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a production design designation command (Yes in step S651), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S652, and if it is not a production design designation command (No in step S651), step S661. to process.

In step S652, the sub CPU 121 performs a performance symbol determination process for determining a performance symbol GA to be stopped and displayed on the image display device 31 based on the content of the received performance symbol designation command. Specifically, the performance design designation command is analyzed, the performance design data constituting the combination of the performance design GA is determined according to the presence or absence of the big win and the type of the big win, and the design command based on the determined performance design data is issued. Set in the production pattern storage area.

In step S661, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the pattern confirmation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a pattern confirmation command (Yes at step S661), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S662, and if not a pattern confirmation command (No at step S661), the process proceeds to step S671. to move. In step S662, the sub CPU 121 performs effect symbol stop processing of setting a symbol stop command for stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped effect symbol GA in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123. FIG.

In step S671, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the general pattern fluctuation pattern specification command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a general pattern fluctuation pattern designation command (Yes in step S671), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S672, and if it is not a general pattern fluctuation pattern designation command (No in step S671 ), and the process proceeds to step S681 in FIG. In step S672, the sub CPU 121 performs a normal pattern fluctuation production pattern determination process for determining one normal pattern fluctuation production pattern from among a plurality of general pattern fluctuation production patterns based on the received general pattern fluctuation pattern specification command.

As shown in FIG. 40, in step S681, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the long release start command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is the long open start command (Yes in step S681), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S682, and if not the long open start command (No in step S681), step S700. to process. In step S682, the sub CPU 121 performs a long open effect process. Here, a notification effect is executed to notify the player that the second starting port 14 is opened for a long time (4.2 seconds) in the non-time-saving game state.

In step S691, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the normal symbol determination command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal design determination command (Yes at step S691), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S692, and if it is not a normal design determination command (No at step S691), step S700. to process. In step S692, the sub CPU 121 stores the performance symbol data corresponding to the received normal symbol confirmation command and the symbol stop command for stopping and displaying the normal symbol performance symbols in the sub RAM 123 in order to stop and display the normal symbol performance symbols. Normal design fluctuation stop processing to be set in the transmission buffer is performed.

At step S700, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is the game state designation command (Yes in step S700), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S701, and if not the game state designation command (No in step S700), step S711. to process.

In step S<b>701 , the sub CPU 121 executes game state setting processing for setting the game state based on the received game state designation command in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 123 . In step S711, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the opening command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening command (Yes at step S711), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S712, and if not an opening command (No at step S711), shifts the process to step S721. .

In step S712, the sub CPU 121 performs a winning start effect pattern determination process for determining a winning start effect pattern. Specifically, the winning start effect pattern is determined based on the opening command, the determined winning start effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the information of the determined winning start effect pattern is transferred to the image control board 150 and the lamp control. In order to transmit to the substrate 140 , data based on the determined winning start effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123 .

In step S721, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a big winning opening designation command indicating the start of a big winning round game. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a command for opening a large winning opening (Yes in step S721), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S722, and if it is not a command for opening a large winning opening (No in step S721). ), and the process proceeds to step S731.

In step S722, the sub CPU 121 performs in-round effect pattern determination processing for determining a jackpot effect pattern. Specifically, based on the big winning opening opening designation command having information about how many times the round game is to be started, the during-round production pattern is determined for each round to be started. Then, the determined in-round effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123 in order to transmit the information of the effect pattern to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.例文帳に追加.

In step S731, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round end designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a round end designation command (Yes in step S731), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S732. to process. In step S732, the sub CPU 121 performs a pause effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern between rounds.

In step S741, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the ending command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending command (Yes at step S741), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S742, and if not an ending command (No at step S741), shifts the process to step S751. .

In step S742, the sub CPU 121 performs a winning end effect pattern determination process for determining a winning end effect pattern. Specifically, a winning end performance pattern is determined based on the ending command, the determined winning end performance pattern is set in the performance pattern storage area, and information on the determined winning end performance pattern is transmitted to the image control board 150 and lamp control. In order to transmit to the board 140 , data based on the determined winning end effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123 .

In step S751, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the command to enter the big winning hole. The above big winning hole entry ball command is transmitted from the main control board 110 when the game ball wins the big winning hole. If the command stored in the reception buffer is the command for entering a large winning slot (Yes in step S751), the sub CPU 121 shifts the process to step S752, and if not the command for entering a large winning slot (No in step S751). ) to terminate the command analysis process. In step S<b>752 , the sub CPU 121 executes a large winning a prize entering ball command transmission process for transmitting a large winning a prize entering ball command to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 . In the above big winning game entry command transmission process, the big game game entry command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123 .

<Production input control processing>
FIG. 41 is a flow chart for explaining effect input control processing by the effect control board. First, in step S831, the sub CPU 121 determines, based on the effect button detection command from the lamp control board 140, whether or not there is a valid effect button detection signal from the effect button detection switch 8a. Here, if the sub CPU 121 determines that there is no effect button detection signal (No in step S831), it ends the process, and if it determines that there is a effect button detection signal (Yes in step S831), Go to processing.

In step S<b>832 , the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not the button operation effect executable flag=01 is set in the storage area of the sub RAM 123 . Here, if the button operation effect executable flag=01 is not set (No in step S832), the sub CPU 121 ends the processing, and if the button operation effect executable flag=01 is set (step Yes at S832), the process proceeds to step S833.

It should be noted that the button operation effect executable flag is for determining whether or not the state is such that the effect corresponding to the button operation can be executed based on the fact that the button operation has been performed. , the effect corresponding to the operation can be executed, and if the flag is "00", it indicates that the effect corresponding to the operation cannot be executed. A flag "01" is set in accordance with the start of , and a flag "00" is set when the performance button 8 is operated or the effective operation period ends without the performance button 8 being operated.

In step S833, the sub CPU 121 sets a button operation effect execution command in the transmission buffer. This command is a command for causing the image control board 150 to execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 8 . Here, the sub CPU 121 transmits the command set in the transmission buffer to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in step S605 (see FIG. 22) after the effect input control process. The image control board 150 operates the image display device 31 and the audio output device 34 based on the received command, and the lamp control board 140 operates the effect movable body 32 and the effect lamp 33 based on the received command.

Next, the image control board 150 will be described. In the image control board 150, when a command for effect is received from the effect control board 120, the host CPU 151 reads out an audio output device control program from the host ROM 153 based on the received command for effect, and outputs sound in the audio output device 34. , the host CPU 151 reads the animation control program from the host ROM 153 and controls image display on the image display device 31 .

Here, processing executed by the host CPU 151 in the image control board 150 will be described.

<Host CPU main processing>
FIG. 42 is a flowchart for explaining main processing by the image control board. When power is supplied from the power board 170, a system reset occurs in the host CPU 151, and the host CPU 151 performs the following main processing. First, in step S901, the host CPU 151 performs initialization processing. In this process, the host CPU 151 reads the main processing program from the host ROM 153 and instructs the initialization of various modules of the host CPU 151 and the VDP 200 in response to power-on.

In step S902, the host CPU 151 performs effect pattern designation command analysis processing for analyzing the effect pattern designation command transmitted from the effect control board 120 (the command stored in the reception buffer of the host RAM 152). In addition, when the image control board 150 receives a command transmitted from the effect control board 120, a command reception interruption process of the image control board 150 (not shown) occurs, and the received command is stored in the reception buffer.

The effect pattern specification command analysis process confirms whether or not the effect pattern specification command (+effect control command) is stored in the reception buffer. If the effect pattern designation command is not stored in the reception buffer, the process proceeds directly to step S903. If an effect pattern designation command (+ effect control command) is stored in the reception buffer, a new effect pattern designation command is read, and one or more animation groups to be executed are determined based on the read effect pattern designation command. At the same time, an animation pattern is determined from each animation group. Then, when the animation pattern is determined, the read effect pattern designation command is erased from the transmission buffer.

In step S903, the host CPU 151 performs animation control processing. In this process, the addresses of various animation scenes are updated based on the "scene switching counter", "wait frame", and "frame counter" updated in step S921, which will be described later, and the animation pattern determined in step S902. do.

In step S904, the host CPU 151 extracts the display list from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. will be generated. Then, when the generation of the display list is completed, the host CPU 151 outputs the display list to the VDP 200 . The display list output here is stored in the display list storage area 156 a of the VRAM 156 via the CPU I/F 203 in the VDP 200 .

In step S905, the host CPU 151 determines whether or not the FB switching flag=01. Here, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 43(b), the FB switching flag is set to FB switching flag=01. That is, in step S905, it is determined whether or not the previous rendering has been completed. If the FB switching flag=01 (Yes in step S905), the host CPU 151 shifts the process to step S906, and if the FB switching flag=00 (No in step S905), waits until the FB switching flag=01. do.

In step S906, the host CPU 151 sets the FB switching flag=00 (turns off the FB switching flag), and shifts the process to step S906. In step S907, the host CPU 151 performs drawing execution start processing. In this process, the drawing execution start data is set in the drawing register in order to instruct the VDP 200 to execute drawing for the already output display list. That is, execution of drawing for the display list output in step S904 is instructed. After that, the processing of steps S902 to S907 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt occurs.

<Interrupt processing of the image control board>
Interrupt processing of the image control board 150 will be described with reference to FIG. The interrupt processing of the image control board 150 includes at least a drawing end interrupt processing that is performed when a drawing end interrupt signal is input and a V blank interrupt processing that is performed when a V blank interrupt signal is input. there is

<Host CPU rendering end interrupt processing>
FIG. 43(a) is a flowchart for explaining drawing end interrupt processing by the image control board. The VDP 200 outputs a drawing end interrupt signal to the host CPU 151 via the CPU I/F 203 when drawing of a predetermined unit of frames (one frame) is completed. When the drawing end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 200, the host CPU 151 executes drawing end interrupt processing. In the drawing end interrupt process, in step S911, the host CPU 151 sets the drawing end flag=01 (turns on the drawing end flag), and terminates the current drawing end interrupt process. That is, the drawing end flag is turned on each time drawing ends.

<Host CPU V blank interrupt processing>
FIG. 43(b) is a flow chart for explaining V-blank interrupt processing by the image control board. The VDP 200 outputs a V blank interrupt signal (vertical synchronization signal) to the host CPU 151 via the CPU I/F 203 every 1/60 second (about 16.6 ms). When the host CPU 151 receives the V blank interrupt signal from the VDP 200, the host CPU 151 executes V blank interrupt processing.

In step S921, the host CPU 151 performs processing for updating various counters such as a "scene switching counter", a "wait frame", and a "frame counter". In step S922, the host CPU 151 determines whether or not the rendering end flag=01. That is, it is determined whether or not the rendering of the predetermined unit of frames has been completed. If the drawing end flag = 01 (Yes in step S922), the host CPU 151 shifts the process to step S923, and if the drawing end flag = 01 (No in step S922), ends the current V blank interrupt processing do. That is, even if the V-blank interrupt signal is input, if the drawing is not completed, the processing after step S923 is not performed.

In step S923, the host CPU 151 sets the drawing end flag=00 (turns off the drawing end flag). In step S924, the host CPU 151 instructs the memory controller 209 of the VDP 200 to switch between the "display frame buffer" and the "drawing frame buffer". In step S925, the host CPU 151 sets the FB switching flag to 01 (turns on the FB switching flag), cancels the standby state in step S905 (see FIG. 42), and terminates the current V blank interrupt processing. do.

Next, the outline of the lamp control board 140 will be briefly described. When the command for effect is received from the effect control board 120, the lamp control board 140 reads out the effect movable body operation program based on the received command for effect, controls the operation of the effect movable body 32, and receives the command. A performance lighting device control program is read based on a performance command, and the performance lamp 33 and the light guide 60 are controlled. Further, when the lamp control board 140 receives a command for the effect button from the image control board 150 via the effect control board 120, it reads out the operation program for the effect button based on the received command for the effect button, and executes the effect button. 8 is controlled.

FIG. 44 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a variable effect pattern determination table. The sub CPU 412 refers to the variable effect pattern determination table and determines the variable effect pattern in the above-described variable effect pattern determination process.

In the present embodiment, a variable effect pattern determination table is provided for each game state (low probability non-time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state). The specific example of FIG. 44 shows a variable effect pattern determination table referred to in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state. 44 is referred to by the sub CPU 121 when a variation pattern is determined by the main CPU 111 using the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG.

Specifically, in the fluctuation production pattern determination process, the fluctuation production pattern is determined by lottery according to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command) determined by the main CPU 111 and the random number for production. be. The effect random number has a random number range of "0 to 99" and is acquired by the sub CPU 121 when the variable effect pattern determination process is started. For example, when the main CPU 111 determines the variation pattern a1x and one of the numerical values "0 to 50" is obtained as the random number for effect, the variation pattern 1 is determined.

FIG. 44 shows an overview of the effect configuration of each variable effect pattern. For example, in variable production pattern 1, normal production is executed when a game is started, and then normal reach is executed. On the other hand, in the variable effect pattern 2, when the game is started, the normal effect is executed, and after that, the normal reach is executed after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In the pseudo continuous effect described above, the image display device 31 temporarily stops (temporarily stops) the effect symbol GA that has been variably displayed, and variably displays it again. The above pseudo-continuous effect may be executed multiple times in one game (fluctuation). For example, in the variation performance pattern 5, the pseudo-continuous performance is performed twice, and in the variation performance pattern 14, the pseudo-continuous performance is performed three times.

<Second embodiment>
Other embodiments of the invention are described below. In addition, in each embodiment illustrated below, the reference numerals referred to in the description of the first embodiment are used for the elements having the same action and function as those of the first embodiment, and the detailed description of each element is appropriately omitted.

FIG. 45(a) and FIG. 45(b) are diagrams for explaining the end effect executed when the time saving game state (first time saving game state, second time saving game state) ends. In the end production, it is informed that the time saving game state is ended. Also, the end effect includes a first end effect (see FIG. 45(a)) and a second end effect (see FIG. 45(b)). Although the details will be described later, when the time-saving gaming state ends, either the first end effect or the second end effect may be executed.

FIG. 45(a) is a schematic diagram of a specific example of the screen displayed in the first end effect. As shown in FIG. 45(a), in the first end effect, various images including a small symbol Ga, a right-handed image GS4, a fourth symbol GC, a pending number image GD, and an end image GP1 are displayed. Also, in the first end effect, the effect symbol GA is hidden. The first end effect described above is executed in the last game in the time-saving game state. In addition, as described above, in the last game of the first time-saving game state (100 times), the judge effect is executed. When the judgment performance is executed in the last game in the time-saving game state, the first end performance is executed after the judgment performance is executed.

The end time image GP1 in the second embodiment displays the number of winning times of the jackpot game and the number of winning game balls in a specific period. For example, after the jackpot game is completed, the state is shifted to the first time-saving game state, the jackpot game is won again in the first time-saving game state, and then the game is executed 100 times after the second jackpot game, and the first time-saving game state is performed. is terminated. In the above case, the image GP1 at the end shows the number of winnings of the jackpot game (twice) and the number of wins in the period (specific period) from the first jackpot win to the end of the second first time-saving game state. Display the number of game balls played. Moreover, image GP1 at the time of completion|finish displays the message to the effect that the name of time saving mode and this time saving mode are complete|finished.

FIG. 45(b) is a schematic diagram of a specific example of the screen displayed in the second end effect. As shown in FIG. 45(b), in the second end effect, various images including a small symbol Ga, a right-handed image GS4, a fourth symbol GC, a number-of-holds image GD, and an end image GP2 are displayed. Also, in the second end effect, the effect symbol GA is hidden. The second end effect described above is executed in the final game of the second time-saving game state among the time-saving game states.

Image GP2 at the time of termination in 2nd Embodiment displays the message to the effect that the name of time saving mode and this time saving mode are complete|finished. In addition, although the end image GP1 described above displays the number of times the jackpot game was won and the number of game balls obtained during a specific period, the end image GP2 does not display the above information. Although the details will be described later, the end image GP2 is displayed when the second time-saving game state is started from the normal mode and the second time-saving game state ends without winning the jackpot game.

FIGS. 46(a) to 46(e) are diagrams for explaining a specific example of when the ending effect is executed. FIGS. 46(a) to 46(e) show the game state and variation pattern determination table T at each point in time, in addition to the timing at which the end effect is executed.

FIG. 46(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of when the first ending effect is executed among the ending effects. In the specific example of FIG. 46(a), it is assumed that the first time-saving game state is started 100 times after the end of the jackpot game, and the first time-saving game state ends. As described above, in the first time-saving game state (100 times), the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to in each game at the beginning, the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to in each game at the end, and the variation pattern is determined in the last game. Table Tj1 is referenced. In the second embodiment, in the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to, the first end effect is executed after the judge effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 46(a), the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the game after the first time-saving game state ends.

FIG. 46(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of when the second ending effect is executed among the ending effects. In the specific example of FIG. 46(b), it is assumed that the first time-saving game state is started 100 times after the end of the jackpot game, then the game is executed 700 times, and the second time-saving game state is started. That is, it is assumed that the second time-saving gaming state is started during the scenario setting period. In the above case, in the first game in the second time-saving game state, the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, and various effects including rush effects and mode selection effects are executed.

In the specific example of FIG. 46(b), it is assumed that the second time-saving game state ends without winning the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 46(b), the variation pattern determination table Te1 is referred to in the final game of the second time-saving game state during the scenario setting period. In the game in which the variation pattern determination table Te1 is referred to, the second end effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 46(b), the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the game after the second time-saving game state in the scenario setting period ends.

It is assumed that the first end effect is executed when the second time-saving gaming state ends. In the above configuration, it is notified that the jackpot game won in the second time-saving game state is 0 times. Also, the base value of the time-saving game state is smaller than one. Therefore, in the first end effect when the second time-saving gaming state ends, an excessively small number of acquired game balls is notified. Therefore, some players may find the first end effect annoying. In the second end effect of the second embodiment, the number of winning times of the big hit game and the number of winning game balls are not notified. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the above inconvenience is suppressed.

FIG. 46(c) is a specific example in which the end effect is not executed when the time saving game state ends. FIG. 46(c) is a specific example when the second time-saving gaming state is started during the scenario unset period. In the second embodiment, the end effect is not executed when the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period ends. In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to in the second time-saving gaming state of the scenario unset period. In the second embodiment, the variation pattern determination table Tax referred to in the second time-saving gaming state of the scenario setting period is also referred to in the second time-saving gaming state of the scenario setting period.

As shown in FIG. 46(c), in the second time-saving game state of the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in all games (including the final game). Also, the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to ends in a relatively short time. Therefore, if the end performance is executed in the final game of the second time-shortened game state in the period in which the scenario is not set, the time of the end performance is too short, and the player cannot grasp the contents of the end performance. According to the configuration of the second embodiment, the above problems are easily suppressed. As shown in FIG. 46(c), the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the game after the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period ends.

Further, according to the configuration of the second embodiment, in the scenario setting period, the variation pattern determination table Te1 is referred to in the last game of the second time-saving gaming state, and the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the next game of the game. (See FIG. 46(b)). On the other hand, in the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the last game of the second time saving game state, and the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the next game of the game (see FIG. 46 (c) ). That is, between the scenario setting period and the scenario unset period, the variation pattern that can be determined at the end of the second time-saving gaming state (the last game of the second time-saving gaming state, the next game of the game) may be different. be. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the variation pattern at the end of the second time-saving game state is rich in variety, and the amusement of the game is improved.

FIG.46(d) is a specific example when the 2nd time saving game state is started in the scenario unset period similarly to above-mentioned FIG.46(c). However, in the specific example of FIG. 46(c), it is assumed that the jackpot is not won in the second time-saving game state, whereas in the specific example of FIG. 46(d), the jackpot is won in the second time-saving game state Assume the case. Specifically, in the specific example of FIG. 46(d), it is assumed that a jackpot is won in the second time-saving game state, the table scenario Sb2 is set, and the state shifts to the first time-saving game state (100). In the above case, when the first time-saving gaming state ends, the first end effect is executed.

As can be understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, if the jackpot is not won in the second time-saving gaming state, the first end effect is not executed (see FIG. 46(c)), and in the second time-saving gaming state When the jackpot is won, the first end effect is executed (see FIG. 46(d)). According to the above configuration, for example, compared to a configuration in which the first end effect is not executed uniformly when the time-saving game state ends after shifting to the second time-saving game state, the interest of the effect is improved. There are advantages.

Further, when the advantageous state ends without executing the jackpot game during the continuation of the advantageous state started from establishment of the second time-saving gaming state, the result display (the display of the result image GP) is not executed, and the second A big win game is executed during the continuation of an advantageous state started from the establishment of the two-hour short game state, and when the advantageous state ends after the big win game ends, a result display is executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction when the big win game is not executed during the advantageous state, and improve the player's satisfaction when the big win game is executed during the advantageous state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 46(e) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of when the ending effect is executed. FIG. 46(e) assumes that table scenario Sb4 is set. In the above case, the first time-saving game state continues over 799 games, and the second time-saving game state is started via the gap game. In addition, a series of periods of the first time-saving game state, the gap game, and the second time-saving game state become the time-saving mode B. In addition, in the first embodiment, the variation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, and the variation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to in the gap game. In the second embodiment, the variation pattern determination table Tax is commonly referred to during a series of periods of the first time-saving gaming state, the gap game, and the second time-saving gaming state. However, even in the gap game of the second embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T different from the variation pattern determination table Tax may be referred to.

In the specific example of FIG. 46(e), the end effect is not executed at the end of the first time-saving game state (799 times). According to the above configuration, for example, compared with the configuration in which the end effect is executed in the final game or the gap game of the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state are set as a series of time-saving game states. This makes it easier for the player to recognize. However, in the specific example of FIG. 46(e), the end effect may be executed in the final game or the gap game in the first time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 46(e), in the last game in the second time-saving game state, the variation pattern determination table Te2 is referred to, and the second end effect is executed. That is, during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, the first end effect is not executed when the second time-saving gaming state ends (the final game of the second time-saving gaming state or the next game of the game). Also during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the second end effect is executed when the second time-saving game state ends, and the first end effect is not executed. However, during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 or the table scenario Sb4 is set, the first end effect may be executed when the second time-saving gaming state ends. Moreover, in the above period, it may be configured such that the end effect (including the second end effect) is not executed when the second time-saving gaming state ends.

In addition, the scenario setting period and the scenario unset period, at the end of the second time-reduced gaming state (the final game of the second time-reduced gaming state or the next game of the game) may have a common variation pattern. may be According to the above configuration, in the scenario setting period and the scenario unset period, compared with the configuration in which the variation pattern that can be determined at the end of the second time-saving gaming state is not common, the variation pattern determination table T There is an advantage that the number of types can be reduced.

FIG. 46(f) is a diagram for explaining a modification adopting a configuration in which the variation pattern that can be determined at the end of the second time-saving gaming state may be common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. is. The specific example of FIG. 46(f) assumes the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, as in FIG. 46(b) of the second embodiment. In this modification, the variation pattern determination table referred to during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set is different from the second embodiment, and the variation pattern determination table referred to in the period in which the other table scenario S is set ( type, order) are the same as in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 46(f), in the modification, the period during which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the period during which the scenario is not set (see FIG. 46(c)), the variation pattern of the final game in the second time-saving gaming state The determination table (Tax) is common, and the variation pattern determination table (Tn1) of the game next to the final game in the second time-saving game state is common. According to the above modified example, there is an advantage that the number of types of variation pattern determination tables can be reduced as compared with, for example, the second embodiment.

<Third Embodiment>
In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a plurality of types of time-saving gaming states are provided. Specifically, the time-saving gaming state of the third embodiment includes a third time-saving gaming state in addition to the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state described above. In the third time-saving game state, a predetermined special pattern (time-saving pattern to be described later) shifts to the opportunity when it is stop-displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. In the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 is common in each time-saving gaming state. However, in each time-saving game state, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 may be different.

In the third embodiment, each time-saving gaming state has a different time-saving number of times. Specifically, the number of times of time saving in the first time saving game state is 100 times. As in the first embodiment, according to the special symbol (jackpot symbol) stopped and displayed when the jackpot game is started, the number of times of time saving in the first time saving game state after that may be different. Further, the number of times of time saving in the first time saving game state is not limited to 100 times, and may be 101 times or more, or may be 99 times or less. The number of times of time saving in the second time saving game state is 1000 times. Also, the number of times of time reduction in the third game state is 100 times or 1000 times.

In addition, when entering the third time-saving game state, a normal losing effect pattern or a different effect pattern than when entering the second time-saving game state may be stopped and displayed. That is, there are a first time-saving gaming state that passes through a big win and a third time-saving gaming state that does not go through a big win, and when a second losing special symbol different from the first losing special symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display, It is controlled to the 3rd time reduction game state over a predetermined period different from the 1 time reduction game state. Therefore, it is possible to have novel game property of shifting to the time-saving state without going through the big win, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

<Jackpot Judgment Table>
FIGS. 47(a-1) and 47(a-2) are conceptual diagrams of an example of the big hit determination table in the third embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 47 (a-1) determines whether the stop result of the special symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 20 is a big hit, a small hit, a third time reduction, or a loss (big hit lottery). It is a big hit determination table A that is referred to when playing. FIG. 47(b-2) is a big hit determination table B referred to when determining the stop result of the special symbol variation in the second special symbol display device 21. FIG. It should be noted that the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 have different winning probabilities of small hits, and the same big win probabilities. Also, the winning probability of the third time saving is different between the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 . Specifically, the first special symbol display device 20 wins the third time saving, but the second special symbol display device 21 does not win the third time saving.

The big hit determination table in the third embodiment includes a special symbol determination random number value that is a "big hit", a special symbol determination random number value that is a "small hit", and a special symbol determination random value that is a "third time reduction". A numerical value is specified. In the jackpot lottery, the random number value for special symbol determination obtained when the game ball enters the start hole is compared with the random number value for special symbol determination defined in the jackpot determination table. Win a small hit or the third short time. The jackpot determination tables (A, B) shown in FIGS. 47(a-1) and 47(a-2) are, similarly to the first embodiment, based on the low-probability random number determination table and the high-probability random number determination table. Configured. The main CPU 111 determines one of "big win", "minor win", "third short time", and "losing" based on the selected table and the extracted random number for special symbol determination.

For example, according to the low-probability random number determination table shown in FIG. 47(a-1), two special symbol determination random numbers are determined to be "big hit". On the other hand, according to the high-probability random number determination table, 20 special symbol determination random numbers are determined to be "big hits". In addition, in the big hit determination table of FIG. 6 (a-1), whether the random number determination table at low probability or the random number determination table at high probability is used, the four special symbol determination random numbers are "small hit". , and one special symbol determination random number is determined to be "third time saving". If a random number that is not determined as a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "third time reduction", it is determined as "losing".

The big hit determination table A and the big hit determination table B have different special symbol determination random numbers determined as the third time saving. Specifically, in the big hit determination table A, one special symbol determination random number value is determined to be the third time reduction, but the big hit determination table B does not include the special symbol determination random value determined to be the third time reduction. . In the above configuration, when the game ball wins the first starting port 13, it can be won in the third time saving, but when the game ball wins the second starting port 14, it does not win the third time saving. However, when the game ball wins the second starting port 14, it may be configured to be able to win in the third time saving. In the above configuration, when the game ball wins in the second start port 14 than when the game ball wins in the first start port 13, the winning probability of the third time saving is preferably low.

<Hit Judgment Table>
FIG. 47(b) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a hit determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the stop result of the normal symbol variation is a hit in the normal pattern lottery. The hit determination table shown in FIG. 47(b) is composed of a non-time-saving game state random number determination table and a time-saving game state random number determination table. The random number determination table during the time saving game state described above is commonly referred to in the first time saving game state, the second time saving game state and the third time saving game state.

<Design decision table>
FIGS. 48(a-1) to 48(a-4) are conceptual diagrams of a special symbol determination table for determining special symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed in each game. The special symbol determination table in the third embodiment includes a time-saving symbol determination table in addition to a big-hit symbol determination table, a small-hit symbol determination table, and a losing symbol determination table. The time-saving design determination table is referred to when determining a stop design (time-saving design) when the third time-saving design is won in the jackpot lottery. The big-hit symbol determination table, the small-hit symbol determination table, and the losing symbol determination table are configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 48(a-4) is a conceptual diagram of an example of the time saving pattern determination table. The main CPU 111 refers to the time saving symbol random number when winning the third time saving game. The random number range of the time saving symbol random number is a numerical value "0 to 99". For example, when winning the third time reduction triggered by winning the first start port 13, the main CPU 111, if the obtained random number for time reduction symbol is "0" to "70", "21" as the stop symbol data ” (special symbol J1) is determined. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 48(a-4), the special symbol J1 is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 20. FIG. Further, when the stop symbol data "21" is determined, as shown in FIG. 48(a-4), the effect symbol designation commands "E0H" and "11H" are generated.

As shown in FIG. 48 (a-4), winning in the third time-saving triggered by winning the first start port 13, and if the random number for the time-saving symbol obtained is "71" to "99" , "22" (special symbol J2) is determined as the stop symbol data. In the above case, the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 . Further, when the stop symbol data "22" is determined, as shown in FIG. 48(a-4), effect symbol designation commands "E0H" and "12H" are generated.

When the special symbol J1 or the special symbol J2 is stop-displayed, the game moves to the third time-saving game state. Specifically, when the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed, the game moves to the third time-saving game state of 100 times. Further, when the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed, the game moves to the third time-saving game state of 1000 times.

FIGS. 48(b-1) and 48(b-2) are conceptual diagrams of an example of a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination table is used when determining the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22 . The normal symbol determination table described above is commonly used in each game state (non-time-saving game state, first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, and third time-saving game state).

<Variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving gaming state>
FIG. 49 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a variation pattern determination table used in a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state in the third embodiment. In the above variation pattern determination table, as the variation patterns of the special symbols of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21, variation pattern a (1x to 3x), variation pattern b (1x to 6x), variation Any one of pattern c (1x to 6x), variation pattern dx, variation pattern ex, variation pattern fx, variation pattern g and variation pattern h (1x, 2x) is determined.

However, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ready-to-win effect is always executed in the variation pattern in which the big-hit symbol, the small-hit symbol, or the time-saving symbol among the special symbols is stop-displayed. However, it may be configured such that the ready-to-win effect may not be executed in the variation pattern in which the small winning symbol or the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed among the special symbols. Therefore, when the special symbol corresponding to the big win, the small win or the third short time is stopped and displayed, the reach determination random number value is not used in determining the variation pattern.

When the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern h1x is determined if the special symbol variation random number is any of the numerical values "0 to 49". Also, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "50 to 99", the variation pattern h2x is determined.

In the fluctuation pattern h1x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over about 40000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern h1x, the image display device 31 executes a normal reach effect, and notifies the shift to the third time saving. Similarly, in the fluctuation pattern h2x, the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed over approximately 60000 ms. Moreover, in the fluctuation pattern h2x, the normal reach effect and the SP reach 1 are executed in the image display device 31, and the transition to the third time reduction is notified.

When the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 49", the variation pattern h1x is determined. Also, if the random number for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "50 to 99", the above variation pattern h2x is determined. In addition, in the present embodiment, the special symbol J1 and the special symbol J2 have a common variation pattern that can be determined, but they may be different. In addition, the variation pattern h2x may be determined more easily when the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed than when the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed.
Thus, the variation pattern at the time of winning the jackpot and the variation pattern at the time of winning the third time-saving game state are different.

<Variation pattern determination table for time saving gaming state>
FIG. 50 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a variation pattern determination table used in a low-probability time-saving gaming state in the third embodiment. The above variation pattern determination table is used in the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state. As shown in FIG. 50, in the above variation pattern determination table, as the variation pattern of the special symbols of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21, the variation pattern a (1y to 3y), the variation pattern b ( 1y to 6y), variation pattern c (1y to 6y), variation pattern dy, variation pattern ey, variation pattern f (1y, 2y), variation pattern g and variation pattern h (1y, 2y) is determined. .

By the way, as described above, in the third embodiment, when the time saving pattern is stop-displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state, the game state is shifted to the third time saving game state. On the other hand, in the high-probability game state or the time-saving game state, when the time-saving design is stop-displayed, it does not shift to the third time-saving game state. That is, in the game state other than the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the time-saving design is invalid.

Temporarily, when an invalid time-saving design is stopped and displayed, a variation pattern longer than normal variation (normal reach, variation in which SP reach 1 is not executed) is likely to be selected in the same way as when an effective time-saving design is stopped and displayed. Assume configuration. In the above configuration, some players may feel annoyed by the fluctuation of the special symbols until the invalid time-saving symbols are stop-displayed.

In consideration of the above circumstances, the third embodiment adopts a configuration that suppresses the above-described inconvenience. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 8, when the time saving pattern (special pattern J1, special pattern J2) is stop-displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern h1x or the variation pattern h2x is determined. be. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9, in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed, the variation pattern h1y or the variation pattern h2y is determined instead of the variation pattern h1x or the variation pattern h2x.

In the low-probability non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving design is effective, the variation time of the variation pattern h1x is about 40000 ms, and the variation time of the variation pattern h2x is about 60000 ms. On the other hand, the variation time of the variation pattern h1y is about 2000 ms, and the variation time of the variation pattern h2y is about 2000 ms in the low-probability time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving design is invalid.

In the above configuration, the variation time of the special symbol display device when the invalid time-saving designs are stop-displayed is shorter than the variation time of the special symbol display device when the valid time-saving designs are stop-displayed. Therefore, regardless of whether the time-saving design is effective or ineffective, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the fluctuation time of the special design display device is common.

In the third embodiment, in addition to the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is configured to be shorter than the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. be. In addition, when an invalid time-saving design is stop-displayed, a longer (or equivalent length) variation pattern may be determined than when an effective time-saving design is stop-displayed.

<Preliminary judgment table for special symbols>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a pre-determination table for pre-determining the result of the jackpot lottery in the third embodiment. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (at the time of starting winning), winning information is generated by the preliminary determination table (similar to the first embodiment). By the start winning designation command indicating the above winning information, the result of preliminary judgment (loss, big hit, small hit, third time reduction), type of special design, fluctuation pattern (whether or not reach occurs) before the start of fluctuation of special design can be discriminated. Winning information (starting winning designation command) of the third embodiment is referred to, for example, when determining a so-called look-ahead effect (a pending change effect to be described later).

In the advance determination table shown in FIG. 51, as winning information for the first special symbol display device 20, winning information a (1, 2), winning information b (1 to 4), winning information c (1 to 4), winning Winning information including information d1 and winning information e1 is set. Also, as winning information for the second special symbol display device 21, winning information a (3, 4), winning information b (5-8), winning information c (5-8), winning information d (1, 2) , winning information e(1,2), winning information f, winning information g, and winning information h(1,2) are set.

When the prize information h1 is selected at the time of starting winning, in the game started by the starting winning, the effect control board 120 executes time saving transition effect 1 of about 40000 ms. When the winning information h2 is selected at the time of starting winning, the effect control board 120 executes time saving transition effect 2 of about 60000 ms in the game started by the starting winning. When winning information h (1, 2) is selected at the start winning, a special symbol J (time saving symbol) is determined in the game started by the starting winning.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, in the time saving game state (first time saving game state, second time saving game state, third time saving game state), at the first start port 13 Winning information is not set when a game ball wins. Specifically, in the time-saving gaming state, the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 20 (a combination of a random number for special symbol determination and a random number for symbols), a random number for reach determination, and a random number for special symbol variation However, winning information is not set when a game ball wins in the first start port 13.例文帳に追加Further, in the time-saving game state, when the game ball has won the first start port 13, the start winning designation command is not generated.

<Pre-judgment processing>
FIG. 52 is a flowchart for explaining pre-determination processing by the main control board 110 in the third embodiment. The advance determination process of FIG. 52 is executed in both the above-described first starting opening detection switch input process and second starting opening detection switch input process. That is, the above preliminary determination processing is executed both when the game ball enters the first start hole 13 and when the game ball enters the second start hole 14 .

When the pre-determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current pre-determination process was executed when a game ball entered the first start hole 13 (S1151). When it is determined that the preliminary determination process has been executed when the game ball has entered the first start port 13 (S1151: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (S1152). ). When determining that the game is in the time-saving gaming state (S1152: Yes), the main CPU 111 terminates the preliminary determination process without generating winning information (omitting S1161, which will be described later).

When determining that it is not in the time-saving gaming state (S1152: No), the main CPU 111 executes a big hit provisional determination process (S1153). In the big hit provisional determination process, the main CPU 111 uses the special symbol determination random number value written in the special symbol reservation storage area in response to the start win, in the big hit determination process of the game started by the start win. It is tentatively determined whether the player wins a big win, wins a small win, wins in the third short time, or loses.

When "No" is determined in the above-described step S1151, that is, when the pre-determination process is executed with the opportunity that the game ball has entered the second start hole 14, the main CPU 111 omits the above-described step S1152. Then, the process after the big hit temporary determination process (S1153) is executed. In the above configuration, when the game ball wins to the second start port 14, winning information is generated regardless of whether it is a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state (S1161 described later is executed) . That is, when the game ball enters the second start port 14, the look-ahead effect can be executed regardless of whether it is in the time-saving game state or in the non-time-saving game state.

After executing the big-hit temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the big-hit temporary determination process temporarily determines whether or not the big-hit has been determined (S1154). When the main CPU 111 temporarily determines a big hit (step S1154: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a big win symbol temporary determination process (S1155). In the jackpot pattern provisional determination processing, the jackpot pattern (stop pattern data) to be stopped in the game started by the start prize is provisionally determined by using the jackpot pattern random number acquired according to the start prize of this time. After executing the big hit symbol temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 proceeds to the variation pattern temporary determination process (S1160).

On the other hand, when it is not provisionally determined that the jackpot will be won in the jackpot provisional determination process (step S1154: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it is provisionally determined that the winning is the third short time (S1156). When it is provisionally determined that the third time saving win is made (S1156: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes time saving symbol provisional determination processing (S1157). In the time-saving design temporary determination process, the time-saving design (stop design data) to be stopped in the game started by the start-up winning is temporarily determined using the time-saving design random number value acquired in response to this start-up winning. . After executing the time saving pattern provisional determination process, the main CPU 111 proceeds to the variation pattern provisional determination process (S1160).

If it is not provisionally determined that the game will be won in the third short time in the big hit provisional determination process (step S1156: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it is provisionally determined that a small win will be won (S1158). When it is provisionally determined that a small hit will be won (S1158: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a small winning symbol provisional determination process (S1159). In the small-hit symbol provisional determination process, a small-hit symbol (stop symbol data) to be stopped in the game started by the start winning is provisionally determined by using the small-hit symbol random number obtained in response to the current start winning. be judged. After executing the small hit symbol temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 proceeds to the variation pattern temporary determination process (S1160). When it is determined as "No" in the above-described step S1158, that is, when it is temporarily determined as a loss in the big hit temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 does not execute the symbol temporary determination process (above-mentioned S1155, S1157, S1159). The flow shifts to variation pattern provisional determination processing S1160.

In the variation pattern provisional determination process (S1160), the main CPU 111 determines the game state, the result of the temporary jackpot determination process, the result of the jackpot pattern provisional determination process, the result of the time reduction pattern provisional determination process, the result of the small winning pattern provisional determination process, the current Using the random number for special symbol variation and the random number for reach determination obtained in accordance with the start winning, the variation pattern of the special symbol is provisionally determined. After that, the main CPU 111 generates winning information corresponding to the variation pattern provisionally determined in the variation pattern provisional determination process (S1161). In addition, a start winning designation command corresponding to the winning information is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S1162), and the preliminary determination process is terminated.

By the above preliminary determination processing, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 13 or the second starting hole 14, the winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 120 as a starting winning designation command. Therefore, the sub CPU 121 of the effect control board 120 that has received the starting winning designation command analyzes the starting winning designation command, and predetermines the special symbol variation triggered by this starting winning prize. Effect (read-ahead effect) can be executed.

<Processing when special symbols are stopped>
FIG. 53 is a flowchart for explaining special symbol stop processing by the main control board 110 in the third embodiment. When the special symbol stop time process is started, the main CPU 111 executes the second time reduction transition determination process (S1231). In the second time reduction transition determination process, it is determined whether or not the opportunity for transition to the second time reduction gaming state has been established. As described above, it is possible to shift to the second time-saving game state when the jackpot is not won over a predetermined number of times in the jackpot lottery in the low-probability game state.

In the third embodiment, for the sake of explanation, the number of times a big hit has not been won in the big-hit determination process from the transition to the low-probability gaming state to the present time may be described as "cumulative number of times m". The accumulated count m is counted by a counter provided in the main RAM 113, for example. When the above accumulated number of times m reaches a predetermined number of times (hereinafter "operating number of times n"), the game moves to the second time-saving game state. The number of operations n in the third embodiment is "800". It should be noted that the number of operations n can be appropriately changed.

In the third embodiment, the cumulative number of times m is added even when a small hit or a third time-saving win is made in addition to the case where a loss is determined in the big hit determination process. In addition, the cumulative number of times m is added in both the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state and the low-probability time-saving gaming state. That is, the cumulative number of times m is added in all the games other than the high-probability game state among the games in which the jackpot is not won. In the second time-saving transition determination process, when determining that the opportunity to shift to the second time-saving gaming state has been established, the main CPU 111 shifts the gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state.

After executing the second time reduction transition determination process, the main CPU 111 executes a third time reduction transition determination process (S1232). In the third time reduction transition determination process, it is determined whether or not the opportunity for transition to the third time reduction gaming state has been established. As described above, it becomes possible to shift to the third time-saving game state when the time-saving design is stop-displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. In the third time-saving transition determination process, when determining that the opportunity to shift to the third time-saving gaming state has been established, the main CPU 111 shifts the gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state.

After executing the third time reduction transition determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the fixed period has elapsed (S1233). The determination period described above is provided so that the player can recognize that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed in the current game. The determination period is, for example, approximately 0.5 seconds. The variable display of the special symbols in the next game is prohibited until the above fixed period ends. Specifically, step S1233 is repeatedly executed until the fixed period ends (S1233: No), and when the fixed period ends (S1233: Yes), it becomes possible to shift to the subsequent steps.

When the fixed period ends, the main CPU 111 executes a time saving end determination process (S1234). In the time-saving end determination process, it is determined whether or not the time-saving gaming state end opportunity has been established. Specifically, in the time saving end determination process, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the time saving game state has reached the time saving number of times. When it is determined that the number of games in the time saving game state has reached the number of time saving games, the time saving game state ends. After completing the time saving end determination process, the main CPU 111 sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area (S1235).

After setting the game state designation command, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol stopped in the current game is a jackpot symbol (S1236). When the main CPU 111 determines that the symbol is a big hit (S1236: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "3" (big hit game processing) (S1237). In addition, the main CPU 111 executes a jackpot initialization process (S1238).

In the jackpot time initialization process, various information is initialized. For example, in the jackpot time initialization process, the high probability flag which is turned ON in the high probability game state is changed to the OFF state, and shifts to the low probability game state. In addition, the time-saving flag, which is ON in the time-saving game state, is changed to the OFF state, and the remaining number of times M indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving game state is initialized to a numerical value "0", and the state is shifted to a non-time-saving game state. do.

Although it will be described later in detail, the time saving flag is the first time saving flag that turns ON in the first time saving game state, the second time saving flag that turns ON in the second time saving game state, and the third time saving game state. Including the third time-saving flag to be in the state. In the jackpot time initialization process, all the time saving flags are changed to the OFF state. Further, the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state is stored in a separate counter for each time saving game state. Specifically, the remaining number of times M1 of the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times M2 of the second time-saving game state, and the remaining number of times M3 of the third time-saving game state are stored separately. In the jackpot initializing process, all the remaining numbers M are initialized to a numerical value "0".

In the jackpot initializing process, the cumulative number m (the number of hits) is initialized. In addition, in the third embodiment, in principle, the cumulative number of times m is not initialized except when the clear operation processing by the operation of the above-described clear button or when the jackpot game is started. For example, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of times of actuation n, it shifts to the second time-saving gaming state, but the cumulative number of times m is not initialized. In addition, the cumulative number of times m is not initialized even when the third short time winning or the small winning is won. Although it will be described in detail later, in the above configuration, the number of times that can be shifted to the second time-saving game state is one time in the period from this big win game to the next big win game.

After executing the jackpot initializing process, the main CPU 111 executes a jackpot start preparation process (S1239). In the big-hit start preparation process, for example, the opening pattern of the big-win openings (16, 17) in the big-hit game is determined according to the special symbol (type of big-hit). After that, the main CPU 111 sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot in the performance transmission data storage area (S1240), sets an opening time corresponding to the type of jackpot (S1241), and performs special symbol stop processing. finish.

In the above-described step S1236, when it is determined that the special symbol stopped in the current game is not the big winning symbol (S1236: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the stopped special symbol is the small winning symbol (S1242). ). When the small winning symbol stops (S1242: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "4" (S1243), and terminates the special symbol stopping process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol stopped in this game is not a small winning symbol (S1242: No), that is, if the losing symbol or the time saving symbol stops, the special symbol special electric processing data is set to "0" ( S1244), the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

Fig.54 (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd time reduction transition determination process (S1231 of above-mentioned FIG.53). As described above, the second time reduction transition determination process is executed when the special symbol stops.

When the second time reduction transition determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a big hit has been won in the current game (S1261). When determining that the jackpot has been won (S1261: Yes), the main CPU 111 terminates the second time reduction transition determination process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit has not been won (won any of the loss, small win, and third time reduction) (S1261: No), the main CPU 111 enters a low probability game state (low probability time reduction game state or low probability (S1262). When determining that it is not in the low-probability gaming state (it is in the high-probability gaming state) (S1261: Yes), the main CPU 111 terminates the second time reduction transition determination process.

When determining that the game is in the low-probability gaming state (S1262: Yes), the main CPU 111 adds a numerical value "1" to the total number m (S1263). Specifically, the second time-saving transition determination process shown in FIG. is executed in both cases. Therefore, in a game in a low-probability game state in which a big hit is not won, the cumulative number of times m is added regardless of the special symbol display device (20, 21) in which the special symbols are stopped.

After adding the cumulative number m, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the cumulative number m matches the numerical value "800" (S1264). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of operations n (n=800) at which the second time-saving gaming state operates coincides with the cumulative number of times m. When determining that the total number of times m does not match the number of times of operation n (S1264: No), the main CPU 111 terminates the second time reduction transition determination process.

When determining that the cumulative number of times m matches the number of times of operation n (S1264: Yes), the main CPU 111 stores the initial value "1000" as the remaining number of times M2 of the second time-saving gaming state (S1265). After storing the initial value of the remaining number of times M2, the main CPU 111 updates the second time saving flag to the ON state (S1266), and ends the second time saving transition determination process.

In the third embodiment, in the game after the second time-saving game state is activated, the cumulative number m is continuously updated from the number of operations n. Specifically, the accumulated count m is not initialized in principle except when the above-mentioned clear button is operated to clear operation processing or when the jackpot game is won. In the above configuration, during the period from the end of the current big win game to the start of the next big win game, it is only once that the cumulative number m is determined to match the actuation number n. That is, during the period from the end of the current jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game, the number of times the game can be shifted to the second time-saving game state is one.

FIG.54(b) is a flowchart of the 3rd time reduction transition determination process (S1232 of above-mentioned FIG.53) which main CPU111 performs. A 3rd time saving transition determination process is performed immediately after the above-mentioned 2nd time saving determination process. When the third time reduction transition determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current game is in the low probability non-time reduction game state (S1281). When determining that it is not the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (S1281: No), the main CPU 111 terminates the third time-saving transition determination process.

When determining that it is in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (S1281: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol stopped in the current game is the special symbol J1 (time-saving design) (S1282). . When determining that the special symbol J1 has been stopped (S1282: Yes), the main CPU 111 stores the initial value "100" as the remaining number M3 of the third time-saving game state (1S283).

When determining that the special symbol J1 has not been stopped (S1282: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol J2 (another time-saving symbol) has been stopped (S1284). When it is determined that the special symbol J2 has not been stopped (S1284: No), that is, when it is determined that none of the time saving symbols (J1, J2) has been stopped, the main CPU 111 terminates the third time saving transition determination process. .

On the other hand, when determining that the special symbol J2 has been stopped (S1284: Yes), the main CPU 111 stores the initial value "1000" as the remaining number M3 of the third time-saving game state (S1285). In step S1283 or step S1285 described above, after storing the initial value of the remaining number of times M3 of the third time saving game state, the main CPU 111 changes the third time saving flag to the ON state (S1286). After that, the main CPU 111 terminates the third time reduction transition determination process.

FIG.54(c) is a flowchart of the time reduction completion|finish determination process (S1234 of above-mentioned FIG.53) which main CPU111 performs. In the time saving end determination process, when the end opportunity of the time saving game state (first time saving game state, second time saving game state, third time saving game state) is established, a time saving flag corresponding to the time saving game state (first time saving flag , second time-saving flag, and third time-saving flag) are changed to the OFF state. In addition, as described above, when the jackpot game is started, all the time-saving flags are uniformly changed to the OFF state (see S1238 in FIG. 53 described above).

When the time saving end determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the first time saving flag is ON, that is, whether or not the game is in the first time saving game state (S1301). When determining that the first time saving flag is not ON (S1301: No), the main CPU 111 proceeds to step S1305. On the other hand, when determining that the first time saving flag is ON (S1301: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number M1 of the first time saving game state (S1302). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining count M1 has been decremented to the numerical value "0" (S1303).

When determining that the remaining number of times M1 is "0" (S1303: Yes), the main CPU 111 turns off the first time saving flag and advances the process to step S1305 (S1304). That is, the first time-saving gaming state is ended and the process proceeds to step S1305. On the other hand, when determining that the number of remaining times M1 is not "0" (S1303: No), the main CPU 111 omits step S1304 and proceeds to step S1305.

In step S305, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the second time saving flag is ON, that is, whether or not the game is in the second time saving gaming state. When determining that the second time saving flag is not ON (S1305: No), the main CPU 111 proceeds to step S309. On the other hand, when determining that the second time saving flag is ON (S1305: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the number "1" from the remaining number M2 of the second time saving game state (S1306). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining count M2 has been decremented to the numerical value "0" (S1307).

When determining that the remaining number of times M2 is "0" (S1307: Yes), the main CPU 111 turns off the second time saving flag (S1308), and advances the process to step S1309. That is, the second time-saving gaming state is ended and the process proceeds to step S1309. On the other hand, when determining that the remaining number of times M2 is not "0" (S1307: No), the main CPU 111 omits step S1308 and proceeds to step S1309.

In step S1309, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the third time saving flag is ON, that is, whether or not the game is in the third time saving gaming state. When determining that the third time saving flag is not ON (S1309: No), the main CPU 111 terminates the time saving end determination process. On the other hand, when determining that the third time saving flag is ON (S1309: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number M3 of the third time saving game state (S1310). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the remaining count M3 has been decremented to the numerical value "0" (S1311).

When determining that the number of remaining times M3 is "0" (S1311: Yes), the main CPU 111 turns off the third time saving flag (S1312), and ends the time saving end determination process. That is, the third time-saving game state is ended and the time-saving end determination process is ended. On the other hand, when determining that the remaining number of times M3 is not "0" (S1311: No), the main CPU 111 omits step S1312 and terminates the time saving end determination process.

In addition, the remaining number of times M (1, 2, 3) is subtracted both when the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20 is stopped and when the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped. be. That is, regardless of the type of the special symbol display device that is variably displayed in the current game, the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state is subtracted.

55(a), 55(b) and 55(c) are schematic diagrams of screens displayed on the image display device 31 in each game of the third embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 55(a) is a schematic diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. Moreover, FIG.55(b) is a schematic diagram of the screen displayed on the image display apparatus 31 in a low probability time saving game state. FIG. 55(c) is a schematic diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. The image display device 31 of the third embodiment provides, in each game, production symbols GA (1 to 3), pending images GB (1, 2), fourth symbols GC (1, 2), pending number images GD (1, 2) and various images including the small pattern Ga are displayed (similar to the first embodiment).

The production design GA of the third embodiment includes production design GA1 (see FIG. 55(a)), production design GA2 (see FIG. 55(b)) and production design GAw3 (see FIG. 55(c)). The effect pattern GA1 is displayed in the low probability non-time-saving game state. In addition, the production pattern GA2 is displayed in the low-probability time-saving game state. In this embodiment, the common production pattern GA2 is displayed in the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state. The effect pattern GA3 is displayed in the high probability time saving game state. In addition, in the present embodiment, the production pattern GA is made different between the low-probability time-saving gaming state and the high-probability time-saving gaming state, but the production design GA may be common in each of the above game states.

In the third embodiment, a common fourth symbol GC is displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the high-probability time-saving gaming state. That is, the common fourth symbol GC is displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state. Specifically, a common fourth symbol GC is displayed in each game state except for the big hit game. However, the configuration may be such that different fourth symbols GC are displayed according to the game state. Also, in the jackpot game, the configuration may be such that the fourth symbol GC is displayed.

The holding number image GD of the third embodiment is common in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the high-probability time-saving gaming state, similarly to the above-described fourth symbol GC. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state, the common pending number image GD is displayed. Specifically, a common pending number image GD is displayed in each game state except for the jackpot game. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which different pending number images GD are displayed according to the game state. Further, in the jackpot game, the configuration may be such that the number-of-holds image GD is displayed.

The small symbols Ga stop-display the symbol combinations corresponding to the big-hit symbols when the big-hit symbols are statically displayed on the special symbol display device. Further, the small symbol Ga stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning symbol when the special symbol display device stops displaying the small winning symbol. Similarly, when the time-saving design is stop-displayed on the special design display device, the small design Ga stops-displaying the design combination corresponding to the time-saving design, and when the losing design is stop-displayed on the special design display device, the losing design. The symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed. Further, the small symbols Ga are, in principle, stopped and displayed in the same manner as the performance symbols GA when the performance symbols GA are stopped and displayed. For example, when a big win is won and the production pattern GA is stopped at ``7.7.7'', the small pattern GA is also stopped at ``7.7.7'' and a small prize is won and the production pattern is stopped. When the GA is stopped and displayed at ``7, 5, 7'', the small pattern Ga is also stopped and displayed at ``7, 5, 7'', winning in the third short time, and the effect pattern GA is ``7, 9, 7''. ' or '7.time saving (an example of a special pattern to be described later).7', the small pattern Ga is also stopped at '7.9.7' or '7.time saving.7'.

In the third embodiment, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low probability non-time-saving game state, the low probability time-saving game state, and the high probability time-saving game state. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state, the common small symbol Ga is displayed. Specifically, common small symbols Ga are displayed in each game state except for the big hit game. However, in the jackpot game, the small symbol Ga may be displayed. In this embodiment, the common small symbol Ga is displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20 and the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21, but the first special symbol display A small pattern Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may be provided separately from the small pattern Ga corresponding to the variable display of the device 20 . In that case, the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may be in a common display mode with the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20. A display mode different from the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the 1 special symbol display device 20 may be used.

As described above, the production pattern GA (1, 2) is different between the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state and the low-probability time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state and the low-probability time-saving gaming state. The above configuration, when transitioning from the low probability non-time-saving game state to the low probability time-saving game state (including the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state), while the mode of the production pattern GA changes, the small pattern In other words, the mode of Ga does not change. Similarly, when shifting from the low-probability time-saving gaming state to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, while the aspect of the production pattern GA changes, the aspect of the small pattern Ga does not change.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the number-of-games image GE is displayed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. The numbers in the number-of-games image GE of the third embodiment are added immediately after the game is started. However, the number of games played may be added at the end of the game (substantially at the same time as the accumulated number m is added).

The above number-of-times-of-games image GE is displayed until the low-probability non-working-time-saving gaming state ends after transitioning to the low-probability non-working-time-saving gaming state. However, the number-of-games image GE may be displayed after the number of games played in the low-probability gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 790 times). Further, although the number-of-games image GE of the present embodiment displays the number of games in the low-probability gaming state, it may display the number of games until transition to the second time-saving gaming state. With the above configuration, the displayed number of games is subtracted for each game. Also, the number-of-games image GE may be configured to be displayed in the low-probability time-saving gaming state. In addition, although the number-of-games image GE of the present embodiment simply indicates the number of times, for example, "750 more times until the start of the second time-saving game state" makes the player expect the transition to the second time-saving game state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which words are displayed together.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the remaining time-saving image GJ is displayed. The remaining time saving image GJ displays the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state. For example, immediately after the first time saving game state is started, the remaining time saving image GJ displays the number "100". Immediately after the second time saving game state is started, the remaining time saving image GJ displays the number "1000". Immediately after the third time saving game state is started, the remaining time saving image GJ displays the number "100" or the number "1000". The number of the remaining time saving image GJ is subtracted by "1" at the start of the game.

In addition, a game machine (so-called "ST machine") is known in which the high probability time saving game state ends in a predetermined number of times (for example, "100 times"). When adopting the above ST machine, it may be configured to display a remaining time saving image GJ that displays the remaining number of high probability time saving game state. In addition, a remaining time saving image GJ that displays the remaining number of times in the low probability time saving game state (hereinafter referred to as “remaining time saving image GJx”), and a remaining time saving image GJ that displays the remaining number of times in the high probability time saving game state (hereinafter “remaining time saving image GJy") WHEREIN: You may change the aspect of the remaining time saving image GJx and the remaining time saving image GJy. For example, the remaining time reduction image GJx displays characters and numbers as shown in FIG. 29(b). Moreover, the structure which the remaining time saving image GJy displays a character and a number similarly to the remaining time saving image GJx is assumed. In the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the remaining time saving image GJx displays black characters and white numbers, and the remaining time saving image GJy displays white characters and black numbers.

In this embodiment, the background image GHx is displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 55(a)). In addition, the background image GHy is displayed in the low-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 55(b)), and the background image GHv is displayed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 55(c)). That is, the background image GH is different in each of the game states described above. However, the background image GH may be shared in all or some of the game states described above. For example, the background image GH may be made common to the low probability non-work-time-saving gaming state and the high-probability time-saving gaming state.

In the time-saving game state (first to third time-saving game states), when the remaining number of times M becomes equal to or less than a predetermined number of times (eg, five times), the remaining number of times M is emphasized and displayed. For example, it is preferable to have a configuration in which a message “Five times left!”

As shown in FIG. 55(b), in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, a right-handed image Gsy is displayed. As described above, in the time saving game state (first to third time saving game state), the right hitting lamp 28 instructs to hit to the right. The right hitting image Gsy is displayed during the period when the right hitting lamp 28 instructs to hit to the right. Also, the right-handed shot image Gsy is not displayed during a period when the right-handed shot is not instructed by the right-handed lamp 28 .

Specifically, the right-handed image Gsy is continuously displayed from the start of the opening period of the jackpot game to the period after the first time-saving game state is started. In addition, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of times of actuation n (the n-th lost symbol is stopped and displayed) and the game shifts to the second time-saving game state, the right-handed image Gsy starts to be displayed. Similarly, the display of the right shot image Gsy starts when the time saving pattern is stop-displayed and the game state shifts to the third time saving game state. It should be noted that the right hitting image Gsy may be temporarily hidden when a predetermined effect (for example, SP reach) is executed during the period when the right hitting lamp 28 instructs to hit to the right. However, during the period in which the right-handed hitting image Gsy is temporarily hidden, a lamp controlled by the sub CPU 121 or an image different from the right-handed hitting image Gsy instructs to play right-handed. is preferred.

The reserved images GB include a reserved image GB1 (see FIG. 55(a)) and a reserved image GB2 (see FIGS. 55(b) and 55(c)). The reserved image GB1 is the first special symbol reserved storage area (from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit) or the second special symbol reserved storage area (from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit) in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. is displayed when the above-mentioned random number value (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “determination information”) is stored in the . The reserved image GB2 is displayed when the determination information is stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area in the low-probability time-saving gaming state and the high-probability time-saving gaming state.

The reserved image GB1 is displayed on the image display device 31 in areas R11 to R14 and in areas R21 to R24. For example, when the determination information is stored in the first storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area (when the first reservation number is added to the numerical value "1"), the reservation image GB1 is displayed in the area R11. Similarly, when the determination information is stored in the second storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the reservation image GB1 is displayed in the area R12, and when the determination information is stored in the third storage section, the area R13 When the pending image GB1 is displayed and the determination information is stored in the fourth storage unit, the pending image GB1 is displayed in the region R14. In addition, when the determination information is stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol reserve storage area, the reserve image GB1 is displayed in the region R21, and when the determination information is stored in the second storage unit, the reserve image is stored in the region R22. When the image GB1 is displayed and the determination information is stored in the third storage unit, the pending image GB1 is displayed in the region R23, and when the determination information is stored in the fourth storage unit, the pending image GB1 is displayed in the region R24. be done.

In the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, when the determination information is stored in the determination storage area (0th storage unit), the pending image GB1 is displayed in the area R0. Further, when the first special symbol display device 20 starts to fluctuate and the shift process described above is executed, each reserved image GB1 from the area R11 to the area R14 is moved to the area R adjacent to the left and displayed. Similarly, when the second special symbol display device 21 starts to fluctuate and the shift process described above is executed, the reserved image GB1 from the area R21 to the area R24 is moved to the area R adjacent to the left and displayed.

The reserved image GB2 is displayed in the areas R11 to R14 of the image display device 31 . For example, when the determination information is stored in the first storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the reservation image GB2 is displayed in the area R11, and when the determination information is stored in the second storage section, the reservation is made in the area R12. When the image GB2 is displayed and the determination information is stored in the third storage unit, the pending image GB2 is displayed in the region R13, and when the determination information is stored in the fourth storage unit, the pending image GB2 is displayed in the region R14. be done.

In the low-probability time-saving gaming state or high-probability time-saving gaming state, when the determination information is stored in the determination storage area (0th storage unit), a pending image GB2 is displayed in the area R0. Further, when the second special symbol display device 21 starts to fluctuate and the shift process described above is executed, the pending image GB2 of the area R11 to the area R14 is moved to the area R adjacent to the left and displayed. In addition, in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, when the determination information is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area, the reservation image may be displayed.

In the above configuration, the pending image GB (1, 2) displayed in the area R moves to the area R adjacent to the left of the area R each time the game is executed, and is finally displayed in the area R0. . Further, when the game in which the pending image GB is displayed in the region R0 (the game in which the determination information acquired when the display of the pending image GB is started is determined by the big hit determination process) ends, the pending image GB is hidden. . Note that the time when the pending image GB displayed in the region R0 is hidden can be changed as appropriate.

The sub CPU 121 of the third embodiment starts displaying the pending image GB when the start winning designation command is received. Also, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not to execute the pending change effect in the pending image GB by referring to the start winning designation command. Specifically, the variation pattern of the special symbol includes a variation pattern for executing the pending change effect. The sub CPU 121 determines execution of the pending change effect when the variation pattern (winning prize information) specified by the start winning designation command is a variation pattern for executing the pending change effect. When the result of the preliminary determination specified from the start winning designation command is a big hit, the pending change performance is more likely to be executed than when the result of the preliminary determination is a loss.

When execution of the pending change effect is determined, the mode (for example, color) of the pending image GB changes to a predetermined mode. For example, FIG. 29(a) described above assumes a specific example in which the reserved image GB in the region R12 is displayed in a special manner and the reserved image GB in the other region R is displayed in a normal manner.

Specifically, the pending image GB is displayed in a normal mode (for example, white) when the pending change effect is not executed. On the other hand, when execution of the pending change effect is determined, the pending image GB changes to a special mode (for example, blue) at some time during the display period of the pending image GB. The times when the reserved image GB changes to the special mode include the time when the reserved image GB is moved (shifted) and displayed, during the game before the reserved image GB moves to the region R0, and when the reserved image GB changes to the special mode. It is conceivable in the middle of the game after moving to the region R0.

In the hold change effect, the hold image GB changes to one of a plurality of special modes (red, gold, rainbow color in addition to blue). Also, during the display period of the reserved image GB, the appearance of the reserved image GB may change (stepwise) multiple times. The sub CPU 121, for example, determines in advance the timing (scenario) at which the final special mode and the mode of the pending image GB change, when determining the execution of the pending change effect. Specifically, depending on the result of the preliminary determination specified from the start winning designation command and the number of reservations, the final special mode and the time when the mode of the reservation image GB changes are determined. However, although the details will be described later, a limited period may be provided in the third embodiment. During the above restriction period, the pending change effect is not determined (restricted).

FIG. 56(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the limited period. As described above, during the limited period, the pending change effect is not determined even if the starting prize is won. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the accumulated number m is added to the numerical value "800" from the start of the game (at the start of the special symbol variation) in which the accumulated number m is added to the numerical value "797". Until the end of the game (when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped) is the restricted period. That is, from the start of the game four times before the game to shift to the second time-saving gaming state to the start of the second time-saving gaming state is the limit period. As described above, the upper limit of the number of first reservations is four. Therefore, the above restriction period can be rephrased as a period during which the determination information reserved in the first special symbol reservation storage area until the second time saving game state can be obtained in the low probability non-time saving game state.

Assuming a contrast in which a pending change performance can be determined when the determination information to be held in the first special symbol holding storage area until the second time-saving game state is acquired in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. In the above comparison, the player may be able to grasp that the determination information determined to be a big hit is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area at the time of shifting to the second time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in the above comparison, by maintaining the second reservation number at the numerical value "1" or more in the second time-saving gaming state, while grasping that the right to execute the jackpot game is held, the jackpot game You can play the game without intentionally generating it. In the above-mentioned comparison, there may be a problem that the gambling nature of the player is remarkably fueled.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, among the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, in the limit period in which the determination information to be withheld until the second time-saving gaming state can be acquired, a configuration in which the pending change effect is not determined adopted. It should be noted that even during the limited period, the main CPU 111 generates a start winning designation command through preliminary determination processing, and the sub CPU 121 side receives the starting winning designation command. Therefore, the restricted period is a period in which the sub CPU 121 can determine the pending change effect, but it can also be rephrased as a period in which determination of the pending change effect is intentionally restricted. In the above configuration, at the time of transition to the second time-saving game state, the player cannot grasp from the reserved image GB that the judgment information for judging the big hit is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

FIG. 56(b-1) is a diagram for explaining the probability that the pending change effect is determined. Specifically, FIG. 56 (b-1) is a period other than the limited period of the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "non-restricted period"). The probability that the production is determined is indicated. In addition, FIG. 56(b-1) shows the probability that the pending change effect is executed for each result of the preliminary determination at the time of starting winning.

In the non-restricted period of the third embodiment, the pending change effect is more likely to be determined when the result of the preliminary determination is the third time saving compared to when the result of the preliminary determination is a loss. Specifically, when the result of the prior determination is the third time reduction, the pending change effect is determined with a probability of about 20%. Further, when the result of the preliminary determination is a loss, the pending change effect is determined with a probability of about 5%. However, if the result of the preliminary determination is the third time reduction, the suspension change effect is always determined, and if the result of the preliminary determination is a loss, the suspension change effect may not be determined.

In the non-restricted period of the third embodiment, the pending change effect is more likely to be determined when the result of the prior determination is a big hit, compared to the case where the result of the prior determination is the third time reduction. Specifically, when the result of the prior determination is a big hit, the pending change effect is determined with a probability of about 50%. However, if the result of the prior determination is a big hit, the pending change effect is always determined, and if the result of the prior determination is the third time reduction, the pending change effect may not be determined. When the result of the preliminary determination is a small hit, the pending change effect is determined with a probability of about 10%.

By the way, as described above, the main control board 110 transmits to the effect control board 120 the cumulative number command that can specify the cumulative number m. From the above accumulated number command, the sub CPU 121 can specify the number of games until the second time saving gaming state is activated. For example, it is assumed that the number of games played until the second time-saving gaming state is activated is "X times". Also, assume that the number of reservations is X or more. In the above case, the sub CPU 121 can understand that the jackpot will not be won in X games by analyzing the start winning designation command. In the above configuration, the sub CPU 121 can grasp in advance that the second time-saving gaming state will be activated in the game after X rounds from the cumulative number command and the start winning designation command.

Therefore, the holding image GB displayed in the region R0 in the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state may be configured to change to a special mode different from the normal mode and the special mode. As the hold image GB of the special mode, for example, a hold image GB displaying a message “Start of the second time saving?” can be considered. However, in the above configuration, when a pending change effect is determined to suggest a transition to the second time-saving gaming state, depending on the player, the result of the prior determination is a big hit. may cause the inconvenience of misunderstanding when suggesting.

Considering the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, the pending change effect for notifying the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is not executed. Specifically, the pending change effect does not include the effect of changing the pending image GB to the special mode described above. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the above inconvenience is suppressed. However, it may be configured such that the reserved image GB can be changed in a special manner.

FIG. 56(b-2) is a diagram for explaining the probability that the pending change effect is determined during the restricted period. As shown in FIG. 56(b-2), during the restricted period, the pending change effect is not determined regardless of the result of the prior determination. However, during the restricted period, the pending change effect may be determined at a lower probability than during the non-restricted period. Moreover, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the pending change effect can be determined only when the result of the prior determination is a big hit during the restriction period. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the pending change effect can be determined only when the result of the prior determination is other than a failure during the restricted period.

FIG. 56(c) is a schematic diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 during the restricted period. During the restricted period, various images described above with reference to FIG. 29(a) are displayed. Also, during the restricted period, as shown in FIG. 30(c), the emphasized image GZ is displayed. The emphasized image GZ is an image for emphasizing the number of remaining games until transition to the second time-saving game state.

The above emphasized image GZ is displayed, for example, near the approximate center of the screen of the image display device 31 . Also, the emphasized image GZ is displayed immediately after the game is started, and disappears after a predetermined time elapses. Specifically, the display time of the enhanced image GZ is shorter than the variation pattern with the shortest variation time among the variation patterns that can be determined in the limited period. With the above configuration, the inconvenience that the emphasized image GZ displayed in the current game is displayed when the next game starts is suppressed.

Specifically, in the game three times before the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state (the game in which the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value “797”), the emphasized image GZ that displays the message “3 more times” is displayed. Is displayed. Similarly, in the game two times before the game transitioning to the second time-saving game state (the game in which the cumulative number of times m is added to the numerical value "798"), the emphasized image GZ displaying the message "two more times" is displayed. , in the game (the game in which the cumulative number of times m is added to the numerical value "799") one time before the game transitioning to the second time-saving game state, the emphasized image GZ displaying the message "one more time" is displayed. In a game (a game in which the accumulated number of times m is added to the numerical value "800") to shift to the 2 o'clock short game state, an emphasized image GZ displaying a message "LAST" is displayed.

However, the game in which the emphasized image GZ is displayed is not limited to the above examples. Specifically, the emphasized image GZ may be displayed from the game before the start of the restricted period. For example, the configuration may be such that the emphasized image GZ is displayed from the game five times before the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state. Further, the configuration may be such that the emphasized image GZ is displayed from the game after the restricted period is started. For example, it may be configured such that the emphasized image GZ is displayed only in the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state. In addition, the emphasized image GZ of the third embodiment is configured to display a message that expects the transition to the second time-saving gaming state, such as "three more times until the start of the second time-saving gaming state," for example. may be

According to the above-described emphasized image GZ, there is an advantage that the player can easily grasp that the game state is to be shifted to the second time-saving game state. In addition, in a configuration in which the pending change effect is executed during the period in which the emphasized image GZ is displayed, it is assumed that the player will pay attention to the pending change effect and the emphasized image GZ will not be noticed. In the configuration of the third embodiment, a restriction period is provided immediately before shifting to the second time-saving gaming state, and the pending change effect is not executed during the period in which the emphasized image GZ is displayed. Therefore, the above-described inconvenience is suppressed, and the effect of making it easier for the player to grasp that the game state is shifted to the second time-saving game state is particularly remarkable. It should be noted that the effect of making it easier for the player to grasp that the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is at least ensured by simply preventing the pending change effect from being executed during the restricted period, so it is emphasized during the restricted period. The number-of-games image GE displayed before the limit period may be displayed continuously without displaying the image GZ.

FIG. 57 (a-1) to FIG. 57 (a-4), and FIG. 57 (b-1) to FIG. 57 (b-4) are the period during which the normal design display device 22 normally fluctuates the design, and It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship with the period when the opening-and-closing door 14b operates (the 2nd starting port 14 is opened). In addition to the period during which the normal symbols are varied and the period during which the open/close door 14b is operated, each of the above drawings shows the game state at each time point. Further, each of the above figures shows the number of reservations at each point in time.

As described above, in the non-time-saving game state, the normal pattern variation time is about 10 seconds. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the variation time of normal symbols is about 1 second. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the normal symbol variation time in the non-time-saving gaming state may be referred to as "variation time Ha". Further, the variation time of the normal symbol in the time-saving game state may be described as "variation time Hb". As described above, the fluctuation time Hb of normal symbols in each time saving game state (first to third time saving game states) is common.

Further, in the non-time-saving game state, the total opening time of the open/close door 14b when the open symbols (long open symbol, short open symbol) are stopped and displayed is about 4.2 seconds or about 0.2 seconds. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the operation mode (total opening time, number of times of opening) of the open/close door 14b when the open pattern is stopped and displayed in the non-time-saving gaming state may be collectively referred to as "operation mode Da". Similarly, in the time-saving game state, the total opening time of the open/close door 14b when the open symbol is stopped and displayed is about 5 seconds or about 3 seconds. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the operation mode of the opening/closing door 14b when the open symbol is stopped and displayed in the time-saving game state may be collectively referred to as "operation mode Db". As above-mentioned, the operation|movement aspect of the opening-and-closing door 14b in each time-saving game state is common.

FIG. 57(a-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which a losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 57(a-1) assumes the case where the variable display of normal symbols started in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state is stopped. In the above case, the normal pattern fluctuates over the fluctuation time Ha. Also, FIG. 57(a-1) assumes a case where the pending number of the normal drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the variable display stops.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-1), the normal symbols are stopped and displayed from time ta1 when the normal symbols are stopped to time ta2 when the wait period (about 0.5 seconds) elapses. In addition, the normal symbol storage determination process (see FIG. 36(b)) for starting the next variable display of normal symbols is executed immediately after time ta2. When the normal symbol memory determination process is executed, the number of reservations is subtracted, and a new variable display of normal symbols is started. In the specific example of FIG. 57 (a-1), the game state at time ta2 is a low probability non-time-saving game state. Therefore, the variation time Ha is determined in the normal symbol memory determination process executed immediately after time ta2.

FIG. 57(a-2) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which a losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 57 (a-2) is similar to FIG. 57 (a-1) described above, assuming the case where the variable display of normal symbols started in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is stopped . In the above case, the normal pattern fluctuates over the fluctuation time Ha. Further, the specific example of FIG. 57 (a-2) assumes that the pending number of the normal drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the variable display stops. Also, it is assumed that the wait period during which normal symbols are stopped and displayed ends at time ta2. In the above configuration, immediately after time ta2, normal symbol storage determination processing for starting a new game is executed.

The specific example of FIG. 57(a-2) is different from the specific example of FIG. Specifically, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of times of operation n, the game state is shifted to the second time-saving game state. Further, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, when the time-saving design is stop-displayed on the special design display device, the game state shifts to the third time-saving game state. The specific example of FIG. 57 (a-2) assumes that the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state transition opportunity is established at time tx.

As shown in FIG. 57(a-2), time tx is before time (immediately after time ta2) at which a new normal symbol memory determination process is executed. Specifically, the time point tx is a point in the middle of the variable display of the normal symbols that stops at the time point ta.

In the third embodiment, the variable display is continued until the variable time Ha even if the normal symbol variable display started in the non-time-saving game state is shifted to the time-saving game state. That is, the fluctuation time Ha determined at the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is not changed even if the state is shifted to the time-saving game state in the middle of the variable display. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 57(a-2), even if the shift to the time-saving game state occurs during the variable display of normal symbols that stop at time ta1, the variable display is continued until the variable time Ha. In the above configuration, since the already determined variable time Ha is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game is suppressed.

Further, in the third embodiment, the normal symbols (long open symbols, short open symbols, lost symbols) determined at the start of variation are not changed even if the game state changes during the variation display. With the above configuration, since the normal symbols that have already been determined are not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game is suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-2), in the normal symbol memory determination process immediately after time ta2, the random number value for hit determination acquired in the non-time-saving game state is determined. However, the game state at the time ta2 is a time-saving game state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the normal pattern lottery (hit determination process) is executed with the winning probability in the time saving game state. In addition, in the normal symbol memory determination process, the variation time Hb of the time saving game state is determined as the variation time of the normal symbol, and the operation mode Db of the time saving game state is determined as the operation mode of the open/close door 14b.

FIG. 57(a-3) is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which an open symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 57 (a-3), like the above-described FIG. 57 (a-1) and FIG. 57 (a-2), the normal symbol fluctuation display started in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state is stopped. In the above case, the normal pattern fluctuates over the fluctuation time Ha. Also, FIG. 57(a-3) assumes a case where the pending number of the normal drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the variable display stops.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-3), it is assumed that the opening symbol is stopped and displayed at time ta1, and the opening/closing door 14b is changed to the operating state. In FIG. 57(a-3), the time ta1 when the open pattern is stopped and the time when the opening/closing door 14b is activated are shown to be substantially coincident. However, in actuality, the open/close door 14b is activated after the wait period ends after the open pattern is stopped. That is, the opening/closing door 14b is activated after the time ta1. The same applies to FIGS. 57(a-4), 57(b-3) and 57(b-4) which will be described later. However, the time ta1 when the open pattern is stopped and the time when the opening/closing door 14b is activated may substantially coincide with each other.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-3), the operation mode Da is determined at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbols. It is also assumed that the operation of the open/close door 14b ends at time ta2. In the above case, the normal symbol storage determination process is executed immediately after time ta2, and a new variable display of normal symbols can be started. In the specific example of FIG. 57 (a-3), the game state at time ta2 is a non-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the normal symbol variation time Ha is determined as the variation time.

FIG. 57(a-4) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which an open symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 57(a-4) assumes the case where the variable display of the normal symbols started in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is stopped in the same manner as in FIG. 57(a-3) described above. In the above case, the normal pattern fluctuates over the fluctuation time Ha. Also, FIG. 57(a-4) assumes a case where the pending number of the normal drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the variable display stops.

However, in the specific example of FIG. 57 (a-4), at the time point tx before the normal symbol memory determination process is newly executed (immediately after time ta2), from the low probability non-time saving game state to the low probability time saving game It differs from the above-described specific example of FIG. 57(a-3) in that it shifts to the state. Specifically, FIG. 57 (a-4) assumes a case where the opening/closing door 14b moves from the low-probability non-time-saving game state to the low-probability time-saving game state during the period of operation.

In the third embodiment, even if the operation of the opening/closing door 14b started in the non-time-saving game state is shifted to the time-saving game state, the operation of the opening/closing door 14b is continued in the already determined operation mode. That is, the operation mode Da of the non-time-saving game state determined at the time of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbols is not changed even if the game state shifts to the time-saving game state in the middle of the operation of the open/close door 14b. In the above configuration, since the operation mode of the opening/closing door that has already been determined is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game can be suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 31(a-4), in the normal symbol memory determination process immediately after time ta2, the random number value for hit determination acquired in the non-time-saving game state is determined. However, the game state at the time ta2 is a time-saving game state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the normal pattern lottery (hit determination process) is executed with the winning probability in the time saving game state. In addition, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the variation time Hb is determined as the normal symbol variation time, and the operation mode Db is determined as the operation mode of the open/close door 14b.

FIG. 57(b-1) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which a losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 57 (b-1) is when the fluctuation display of the normal design started in the low-probability time-saving gaming state (including the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state) stops at time ta1 assume. As described above, the normal symbols fluctuate over the fluctuating time Hb in the time-saving gaming state. Also, FIG. 57(b-1) assumes a case where the pending number of the normal drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the variable display stops.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-1), the normal symbols are stopped and displayed from time ta1 when the normal symbols are stopped to time ta2 when the wait period (about 0.5 seconds) elapses. In the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-1), the game state at time ta2 is a low probability time-saving game state. Therefore, the variation time Hb is determined in the normal symbol storage determination process executed immediately after time ta2.

FIG. 57(b-2) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which a losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 57 (b-2) is similar to FIG. 57 (b-1) described above, and it is assumed that the variable display of normal symbols started in the low-probability time-saving gaming state stops at time ta1. do. In addition, FIG. 57(b-2) assumes a case where the pending number of the normal drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the variable display stops.

However, in the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-2), at time tx before the time when the normal symbol memory determination process is newly executed (immediately after time ta2 when the wait period ends), from the low probability time-saving gaming state It is different from the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-1) described above in that it shifts to the low probability non-time-saving gaming state. Specifically, the specific example of FIG. 57(b-2) assumes a case where the low-probability time-saving game state shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving game state at time tx during the variable display of normal symbols. As the above case, for example, the case where the remaining number of times M (2, 3) of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at time tx can be considered.

In the third embodiment, the variable display is continued until the variable time Hb is reached even if the normal symbol variable display started in the time-saving game state is shifted to the non-time-saving game state. That is, the fluctuation time Hb of the time-saving game state determined at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbols is not changed even if the game state shifts to the non-time-saving game state in the middle of the variable display. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-2), even if the transition to the non-time-saving game state is made in the middle of the variable display of the normal symbols stopped at time ta1, the variable display is continued until the variable time Hb. . In the above configuration, since the variation time of the normal symbols already determined is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game is suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-2), in the normal symbol memory determination process immediately after time ta2, the random number value for hit determination acquired in the time saving game state is determined. However, the gaming state at time ta2 is a non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the normal pattern lottery is executed with the winning probability of the non-time-saving game state. In addition, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the variation time Ha is determined as the normal symbol variation time, and the operation mode Da is determined as the operation mode of the open/close door 14b.

FIG. 57(b-3) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which an open symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 57 (b-3) is similar to the above-described FIG. 57 (b-1) and FIG. Assume that the motor stops at time ta1. Also, FIG. 57(b-3) assumes a case where the pending number of the normal drawing lottery is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the variable display stops.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-3), it is assumed that the open symbol is stopped and displayed at time ta1, and the opening/closing door 14b is changed to the operation. As described above, the operation mode Db is determined as the operation mode of the open/close door 14b in the time saving game state. In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-3), it is assumed that the operating state of the opening/closing door 14b ends at time ta2. In the above case, normal symbol memory determination processing for starting a new variable display is executed immediately after time ta2. In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-3), the game state at time ta2 is the time-saving game state. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the normal design determined in the normal design storage determination process immediately after the time ta2 is the fluctuation time Hb.

FIG. 57(b-4) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which an open symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. FIG. Figure 57 (b-4), similar to Figure 57 (b-3) described above, before the time ta1 when the fluctuation display stops, the pending number of the normal figure lottery is added to the numerical value "1", and the opening and closing door 14b is terminated at time ta2. However, in the specific example of FIG. 57 (b-4), at time tx before the normal symbol memory determination process is executed (immediately after time ta2), from the low probability time-saving gaming state to the low probability non-time-saving gaming state It is different from the specific example of FIG. 57(b-3) described above in that it shifts. Specifically, FIG. 57 (b-4) assumes a case where the opening/closing door 14b moves from the low-probability time-saving game state to the low-probability non-time-saving game state during the period of the operating state.

In the third embodiment, even if the operation of the opening/closing door 14b started in the time-saving game state is shifted to the non-time-saving game state, the operation of the opening/closing door 14b is continued in the already determined operation mode. That is, the operation mode Db of the time-saving game state determined at the time of starting the variation of the normal symbol is not changed even if the game state shifts to the non-time-saving game state in the middle of the operation of the open/close door 14b. In the above configuration, since the operation mode of the opening/closing door that has already been determined is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game can be suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-4), in the normal symbol storage determination process immediately after time ta2, the random number value for hit determination acquired in the time-saving game state is determined. However, the gaming state at time ta2 is a non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the normal pattern lottery is executed with the winning probability of the non-time-saving game state. In addition, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the variation time Ha is determined as the normal symbol variation time, and the operation mode Da is determined as the operation mode of the open/close door 14b.

FIG. 58(a) and FIG. 58(b) are other diagrams for explaining the relationship between the period during which the normal symbol display device 22 fluctuates the normal symbol and the period during which the open/close door 14b operates. In each figure above, in addition to the period during which the normal symbols fluctuate and the period during which the open/close door 14b is operated, the game state at each time point is shown (similar to FIG. 31 described above).

FIG. 58(a) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which an open symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. FIG. In the specific example of FIG. 58(a), it is assumed that the low-probability non-time-saving game state is shifted to the time-saving game state at time tx, and then the open symbol is stopped and displayed at time ta. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the opening/closing door 14b is controlled in the operation mode Db immediately after time ta. That is, even if the variable display of the normal symbol display device 22 is started in the non-time-saving game state, when the open symbol is stopped and displayed and has shifted to the time-saving game state, the opening/closing door 14b is controlled in the operation mode Db. be.

FIG. 58(b) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which an open symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. FIG. In the specific example of FIG. 58(b), it is assumed that the time-saving game state is shifted to the low-probability non-time-saving game state at time tx, and then the open symbol is stopped and displayed at time ta. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the opening/closing door 14b is controlled in the operation mode Da immediately after time ta. That is, even if the variable display of the normal symbol display device 22 is started in the time-saving game state, when the open symbol is stopped and displayed and has shifted to the non-time-saving game state, the opening/closing door 14b is controlled in the operation mode Da. be.

FIG. 59(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example when the second time-saving gaming state ends. As described above, when the game is executed 1000 times, the second time-saving game state ends. In addition, the second time-saving game state may end before the number of games reaches 1000 times when winning a jackpot game. FIG. 59(a) shows a specific example in which the second time-saving game state ends when the jackpot game is won.

FIG. 59(a) shows the period during which the second time-saving game state operates, and the remaining number of times M2 of the second time-saving game state at each time point. In addition, FIG. 59(a) shows the period during which the first time saving game state operates, and the remaining number of times M1 of the first time saving game state. Furthermore, FIG. 59(a) shows the period of the jackpot game (including the opening period and the ending period).

In the specific example of FIG. 59(a), it is assumed that the jackpot game starts at time tb1 in the second time-saving game state. Also, the remaining count M2 immediately before the time tb1 is a numerical value "800". In the above case, the above-described jackpot initializing process is executed at time tb1. Therefore, the remaining number of times M2 is cleared to the numerical value "0", and the second time-saving game state ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 59(a), it is assumed that the jackpot game ends at time tb2. In the above case, at time tb2, the initial value "100" is set to the remaining number M1 of the first time-saving game state, and the first time-saving game state is started. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, the second time-saving game state is not restarted.

FIG.59(b) is a figure for demonstrating the specific example in case the 3rd time saving game state is complete|finished. As described above, when 100 times or 1000 times of games are executed, the third time-saving game state ends. In addition, the third time-saving game state may end when a jackpot game is won. FIG. 59(b) shows a specific example in which the third time-saving game state ends when the jackpot game is won.

FIG. 59(b) shows the period during which the third time-saving game state operates, and the remaining number of times M3 of the third time-saving game state at each time point. Moreover, in FIG.59(b), the period when the 1st time saving game state operates, and the remaining number of times M1 of the 1st time saving game state are shown. Furthermore, FIG. 59(b) shows the period of the jackpot game (including the opening period and the ending period).

In the specific example of FIG. 59(b), it is assumed that the jackpot game starts at time tc1 in the third time-saving game state. Further, the remaining number of times M3 immediately before the time tc1 is a numerical value "10". In the above case, the above-described jackpot initializing process is executed at time tc1. Therefore, the remaining number of times M3 is cleared to the numerical value "0", and the third time-saving game state ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 59(b), it is assumed that the jackpot game ends at time tc2. In the above case, at time tc2, the initial value "100" is set to the remaining number M1 of the first time saving game state, and the first time saving game state is started. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, the third time-saving game state is not restarted.

By the way, the first time-saving game state ends after 100 games have been played. In addition, when the low probability game state continues over 800 games, the second time saving game state is started. In the above configuration, since the first time-saving game state ends before the second time-saving game state starts, there is no period in which the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state overlap and operate. However, it is good also as a structure which can produce the period when the 1st time saving game state and the 2nd time saving game state overlap and operate. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which a numerical value greater than "800 times" can be set as the initial value of the remaining number M1 of the first time-saving gaming state. In the above configuration, in the low-probability game state after the first time-saving game state reaches 800 times, the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state are operated redundantly.

Further, in the time saving game state including the first time saving game state, even if the time saving pattern is stop-displayed, it does not shift to the third time saving game state. In the above configuration, a period in which the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state overlap and operate is not provided. However, it is good also as a structure which can produce the period when the 1st time saving game state and the 3rd time saving game state overlap and operate. For example, when the time-saving design is stop-displayed in the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state may be operated in a subsequent period. Although described in detail below, in the third embodiment, the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state may operate redundantly.

FIG.59(c) is a figure for demonstrating the specific example in case the 2nd time saving game state and the 3rd time saving game state overlap and operate|move. FIG. 59(c) shows the period during which the second time-saving game state operates and the period during which the third time-saving game state operates. In addition, FIG. 59(c) shows the remaining number of times M2 of the second time-saving game state, the remaining number of times M3 of the third time-saving game state, and the cumulative number of times m. In the specific example of FIG. 59(c), it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of times of actuation "800" at time td1 of the third time-saving game state. In the above case, the second time-saving game state is activated from time td1. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 59(c), immediately after the second time-saving gaming state starts, the remaining number of times M3 of the third time-saving gaming state is a numerical value "X" (however, 0<X<1000). do.

As shown in FIG.59(c), in the period after time td1, both 2nd time saving game state and 3rd time saving game state operate|move. Further, in the period in which both the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state are activated, the numerical value "1" is subtracted from each of the remaining number of times M2 and the remaining number of times M3 in each game. In the specific example of FIG. 59(c), it is assumed that the remaining number of times M3 is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at time td2. In the above cases, the third time-saving game state ends at time td2.

In the specific example of FIG. 59(c), the remaining count M2 (1000-X) at time td2 is greater than or equal to the numerical value "1". In the above specific example, at time td2, while the third time-saving gaming state ends, the second time-saving gaming state continues. In the specific example of FIG. 59(c), at time td3 after time td2, the remaining number of times M2 is subtracted to the numerical value "0", and the second time saving game state ends.

In the above-described third embodiment, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the operation number of times n, the second time-saving game state is activated even in the third time-saving game state. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which the second time-saving game state does not operate depending on the game state in which the cumulative number m reaches the operation number n, the player is prevented from being excessively disadvantaged. In addition, in the third embodiment, during the period in which the two time-saving game states (the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state) overlap, the remaining times of both time-saving game states are subtracted. Therefore, for example, during a period in which two time-saving gaming states overlap, the subtraction of the remaining number of games in one of the time-saving gaming states is stopped, and after the other time-saving gaming state ends, the one time-saving gaming state is Compared with the restarting configuration, there is an advantage that the inconvenience that the time-saving gaming state is excessively prolonged is suppressed.

Also, as described above, in the third embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation time, the time during which the normal pattern is stopped and displayed (wait period time) and the operation mode of the opening and closing door 14b when winning the normal pattern lottery It is common in each time saving game state. That is, the opening mode of the opening and closing door 14b is common in each time-saving game state.

Temporarily, the opening mode of the opening-and-closing door 14b assumes the contrast which differs in each time-saving game state. In the above comparison, when the time saving game state overlaps, it becomes a problem whether the open mode of any time saving game state should be prioritized. According to the third embodiment, the above problems are suppressed.

Also, in the above comparison, after the time-saving game state overlaps, when one time-saving game state ends and the other time-saving game state continues, the opening mode of the opening and closing door 14b is changed When the configuration is adopted. assume. For example, in the above comparison, it is assumed that the time-saving gaming state A (the open mode is the open mode KA) and the time-saving gaming state B (the open mode is the open mode KB) overlap. Further, in the above case, the open/close door 14b is controlled in the opening mode KA of the time saving game state A in the period in which the time saving game state A and the time saving game state B overlap. Furthermore, after the time saving game state A and the time saving game state B overlap, the case where the time saving game state A ends and the time saving game state B continues is assumed. In the above case, the open mode of the opening/closing door 14b changes from the open mode KA to the open mode KB.

In the above comparison, since the opening mode changes even though the time-saving gaming state continues, some players may feel uncomfortable. According to 3rd Embodiment, the above inconvenience is suppressed. In the above-mentioned comparison, after the time saving game state A and the time saving game state B overlap, when the time saving game state A ends and the time saving game state B continues, in the time saving game state B after that, the opening and closing door 14b It may be configured to be controlled in the open state KA. In the above configuration, since the opening mode does not change when the time-saving gaming state A ends, the above-described inconvenience is suppressed.

Figures 60(a) to 60(c) are diagrams for explaining the mode (lighting, extinguishing) of the right-handed lamp 28 before and after the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state. As described above, the right-handed lamp 28 is lit in the time-saving game state, and is turned off when the time-saving game state ends and shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving game state. Various external information signals are output from the gaming machine 1 to an external device (for example, a hall computer). The above various external information signals include advantageous period signals.

The advantageous period signal changes to the ON state at the start of the jackpot game (at the start of the opening period), at the start of the second time-saving game state and at the start of the third time-saving game state, and then to the low probability non-time-saving game state. It is maintained in the ON state until transition. In other words, the above advantageous period signal turns ON in a game state (jackpot game, low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state) in which it is more advantageous to play right-handed than left-handed.

60(a) to 60(c) show the states (ON, OFF) of the advantageous period signal at each point in time. Also, FIGS. 60(a) to 60(c) show the accumulated count m at each time point. In addition, when the small winning game is executed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the advantageous period signal may be maintained in the OFF state, or may be temporarily set in the ON state.

FIG. 60(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the mode of the right-handed ramp 28 before and after the second time-saving gaming state. In the specific example of FIG. 60(a), it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of times of actuation "800" at time te1, and the state shifts to the second time-saving gaming state. As shown in FIG. 60(a), in the low-probability non-time-saving game state before shifting to the second time-saving game state, the advantageous period signal is in the OFF state, and the right-handed lamp 28 is extinguished.

In the above specific example of FIG. 60(a), the right-handed lamp 28 starts lighting at time te1. That is, the right-handed lamp 28 starts lighting substantially simultaneously with the start of the second time-saving gaming state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, when the special symbols are stopped (special symbol stop processing), the cumulative number of times m is determined, and immediately after that, the second time saving flag is changed to the ON state. The main CPU 111 keeps the right strike lamp 28 off until the second time saving flag is turned on (until the special symbol stops), and immediately after turning the second time saving flag on (substantially simultaneously) The strike lamp 28 is turned on. The main CPU 111 keeps the advantageous period signal OFF until the second time saving flag is turned ON, and changes the advantageous period signal to ON immediately after turning the second time saving flag ON. The main CPU 111 of the third embodiment lights the right-handed lamp 28 and turns on the advantageous period signal even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0 at the time of transition to the second time-saving gaming state. .

In the specific example of FIG. 60(a), it is assumed that 1000 games are executed and the second time-saving gaming state ends at time te2. In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is started from time te2. The above time te2 is the time when the special symbol is stopped in the 1000th game in the second time saving game state. As shown in FIG. 60(a), the right-handed lamp 28 lights until the special symbol stops in the 1000th game in the second time-saving game state, and then goes out. Further, the advantageous period signal is maintained in the ON state until the special symbol stops in the 1000th game in the second time-saving game state, and then changes to the OFF state.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the third time saving transition determination process is executed before the time saving end determination process (see FIG. 53 described above). In the above configuration, it is assumed that the time saving pattern is stop-displayed in the last game in the second time saving game state. In the above case, when the third time reduction transition determination process is executed, it is in the second time reduction game state (the second time reduction flag is ON). Moreover, in the 3rd time reduction transition determination process, it does not shift to the 3rd time reduction game state except for the low probability non-time reduction state. Therefore, even if the time saving pattern is stop-displayed in the last game of the second time saving game state, it does not shift to the third time saving game state (the time saving pattern becomes invalid).

As can be understood from the above description, in the third embodiment, even if the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the last game of the second time saving game state, do not shift to the third time saving game state (low probability non time saving game state), the right-handed lamp 28 is extinguished, and the advantageous period signal is turned OFF. However, when the special symbol is stop-displayed, the third time-saving transition determination process may be executed after the time-saving end determination process. In the above configuration, when the time saving pattern is stop-displayed in the last game of the second time saving game state, the game state is then shifted to the third time saving game state. The main CPU 111 of the third embodiment turns off the right-handed lamp 28 and turns off the advantageous period signal even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0 at the end of the second time-saving gaming state. .

FIG.60(b) is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of the aspect of the right hitting lamp 28 before and after the 3rd time-saving game state. In the specific example of FIG. 60(b), it is assumed that the time saving design stops at time tf1 and the game moves to the third time saving game state. As shown in FIG. 60(c), in the low-probability non-time-saving game state before shifting to the third time-saving game state, the advantageous period signal is in the OFF state, and the right-handed lamp 28 is extinguished.

In the above specific example of FIG. 60(b), the right-handed lamp 28 lights up at time tf1. That is, the right-handed lamp 28 lights substantially simultaneously with the start of the third time-saving gaming state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not the time saving design is stopped at the time of stopping the special design (special design stopping processing), and immediately after that, the third time saving flag is changed to the ON state. . The main CPU 111 keeps the right strike lamp 28 off until the third time saving flag is turned on (until the special symbol stops), and immediately after turning the third time saving flag on (substantially at the same time) The strike lamp 28 is turned on. The main CPU 111 keeps the advantageous period signal OFF until the third time saving flag is turned ON, and changes the advantageous period signal to ON immediately after turning the third time saving flag ON. It should be noted that the main CPU 111 lights the right-handed lamp 28 and turns on the advantageous period signal even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0 at the time of transition to the third time-saving gaming state.

In the specific example of FIG. 60(b), it is assumed that the special symbol J1 among the time saving symbols is stopped and displayed at time tf1. In the above case, the initial value of the remaining number M3 of the third time-saving game state is "100". Further, in the specific example of FIG. 60(b), it is assumed that 100 games are executed and the third time-saving gaming state ends at time tf2. Furthermore, in the specific example of FIG. 60 (b), at the time tf2 when the 100th game of the third time-saving game state is completed, if the cumulative number m is not a numerical value "1000" (the second time-saving game state transition opportunity is is not established). In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is started from time tf2. The time tf2 described above is the time when the special symbols (excluding the big hit symbols) stop in the 100th game in the third time-saving game state.

In the specific example of FIG. 60(b) above, the right-handed lamp 28 lights up until the special symbol stops in the 100th game in the third time-saving game state, and then goes out. Also, the advantageous period signal is maintained in the ON state until the special symbol stops in the 100th game in the third time-saving game state, and then changes to the OFF state.

In the third embodiment, in the same way as when the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the last game of the second time saving game state, when the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the last game of the third time saving game state, the third time saving Without transitioning to the game state (shifting to the low probability non-time-saving game state), the right-handed lamp 28 is extinguished, and the advantageous period signal is turned OFF. Note that the main CPU 111 turns off the right-handed lamp 28 and turns off the advantageous period signal even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0 at the time when the third time-saving gaming state ends.

FIG.60(c) is a figure for demonstrating the other specific example of the aspect of the right hitting lamp 28 before and after the 3rd time saving game state. In the specific example of FIG. 60(c), as in FIG. 60(b) described above, it is assumed that the special symbol J1 (time-saving design) stops at time tg1, and the game moves to the third time-saving gaming state. However, in the specific example of FIG. 60 (b) described above, at the time tf2 when the third time-saving gaming state ends, it is assumed that the second time-saving gaming state transition opportunity is not established, but in FIG. 60 (c) In a specific example, it is assumed that the opportunity for transition to the second time-saving gaming state is established.

Specifically, in the specific example of FIG. 60(c), the accumulated count m is added to the numerical value "1000" at time tg2, which is the end of the final game in the third time-saving game state. In the above specific example, the second time saving flag changes to the ON state in the second time saving transition determination process immediately before the third time saving flag changes to the OFF state in the time saving end determination process. Moreover, in the time saving end determination process immediately after the second time saving transition determination process, the third time saving flag changes to the OFF state. In the above case, before and after time tg, both the second time saving flag and the third time saving flag do not have a period of OFF state. Therefore, before and after the time point tg2, the right-handed lamp 28 is maintained in the ON state, and the external information signal is maintained in the ON state.

It should be noted that the advantageous period signal may temporarily change to the OFF state immediately after time tg2. In the above configuration, even if the second time-saving game state is started when the third time-saving game state ends, it can be grasped from the advantageous period signal that the third time-saving game state has ended. Further, when the third time-saving game state ends and the second time-saving game state is started, it may be configured to notify that the player should continue hitting to the right. In the above configuration, it is substantially notified that the third time-saving gaming state has ended and that the second time-saving gaming state will start. In addition, when the third time-saving game state ends in the middle of the second time-saving game state, it may be configured to notify that the player should continue hitting to the right.

FIG. 61(a-1) to FIG. 61(a-3) are diagrams for explaining each image displayed when the time saving game state is started. FIGS. 61(a-1) to 61(a-3) show the effect executed at each time point, the period during which the effect symbol GA is displayed, and the background image displayed on the image display device 31 at each time point. GH is indicated.

In the third embodiment, when the time-saving gaming state is started, a rush image GT, a prevention image GQ2, and a warning image GQ2, which will be described later, are displayed. The entry image GT is an image for notifying that the time-saving game state is started (see FIGS. 61(b-1) to 61(b-3) described later). The prevention image GQ2 is an image displayed to prevent the player from forgetting to remove the card (member card, visitor card) inserted into the gaming device (see FIG. 61(b-1) described later). Also, the warning image GQ2 is an image for warning of game dependency (see FIG. 61(b-2) described later). FIGS. 61(a-1) to 61(a-3) show periods during which the rush image GT, the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are displayed.

FIG. 61(a-1) is a diagram for explaining each image displayed when the first time-saving game state among the time-saving game states is started. In FIG. 61 (a-1), in addition to each image displayed after shifting to the first time-saving gaming state, each image displayed in the big hit game before shifting to the first time-saving gaming state is also shown. As described above, the jackpot game includes an "opening period", a "round period" and an "ending period". In the specific example of FIG. 61(a-1), it is assumed that the ending period of the jackpot game starts at time th1 (the round period ends) and the ending period ends at time th2.

As shown in FIG. 61(a-1), in the round period of the big win game, the effect during the big win is executed. During the big hit, for example, a predetermined moving image is displayed. In addition, in the effect during the big win, the background image during the big win is displayed among the background images GH. The jackpot middle background image is, for example, an image corresponding to the moving image described above.

As shown in FIG. 61(a-1), the effect symbol GA is not displayed in the jackpot game. Also, in the jackpot game, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC and the reserved number image GD are not displayed. However, in the big hit game, while the effect symbol GA is hidden, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC and the number of pending images GD may be displayed. During the round period after the jackpot game, the rush image GT, the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 61(a-1), during the ending period of the jackpot game (period from time point th1 to time point th2), a time saving rush effect is executed. In the time-saving effect, a rush image GT is displayed to notify that the game will shift to the time-saving game state (the first time-saving game state in the specific example of FIG. 61(a-1)). In the time-saving rush production described above, the rush-time background image GHz is displayed among the background images GH.

In addition, the above-described prevention image GQ2 and warning image GQ2 are displayed during the period in which the time-saving rush effect is executed. Specifically, the prevention image GQ2 is displayed immediately after the time-saving rush effect is started. Further, when a predetermined time elapses after the time-saving rush performance is started, a warning image GQ2 is displayed instead of the prevention image GQ2. The above warning image GQ2 disappears after a predetermined time has passed.

Note that the period during which the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are displayed is not limited to the above example. For example, the warning image GQ2 may be displayed during (all or part of) the display period of the prevention image GQ2. Also, the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 may be displayed immediately after the start of the first time-saving game state, or the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 may be displayed immediately before the end of the first time-saving game state.

When the ending period of the jackpot game ends, the first time-saving game state is started, and the performance during time-saving is executed. As shown in FIG. 61 (a-1), when the first time-saving game state is started, the effect symbol GA is displayed. Further, when the first time-saving game state is started, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC and the number-of-holds image GD are displayed, and the time-saving background image GHy is displayed instead of the background image GHz at the time of entry.

FIG. 61(a-2) is a diagram for explaining each image displayed when the second time-saving gaming state is started. In FIG. 61 (a-2), in addition to each image displayed after transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state, each image displayed in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state before transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state shown. In the specific example of FIG. 61 (a-2), it is assumed that the game moves to the second time-saving gaming state at time ti1.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a-2), in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the normal production is executed. Specifically, in the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state, a loss variation effect in which a loss symbol is stopped and displayed is executed. It should be noted that, in the game to shift to the second time-saving gaming state, it may be configured to execute a loss variation effect that is different from other low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. In the low-probability non-working-time-saving gaming state, the above-described production pattern GAx is displayed. Further, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the above-described normal background image GHx is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 61(a-2), when the second time-saving gaming state is started, the above-described time-saving rush effect is executed. When the above time-saving rush performance is started, the rush background image GHz is displayed in place of the normal background image GHx, and the rush image GT is displayed. In addition, in the time-saving rush production described above, the production pattern GAy is displayed. Furthermore, in the time-saving rush performance, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the number-of-holds image GD are displayed.

In the third embodiment, regardless of whether or not the first game in the second time-saving game state is executed (whether or not there is a pending number at the time of transition to the second time-saving game state), the time-saving rush effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 61(a-2), the time-saving rush effect is executed for a predetermined time, and then the time-saving middle effect is executed. The effect during time saving is a effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbols, and the time saving background image GHy corresponding to the variation mode of the effect symbol GA is displayed. When the second time-saving game state is activated, the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are not displayed in the time-saving rush performance and the time-saving medium performance.

It should be noted that, in the third embodiment, there are cases where the special symbol is variably displayed and the effect symbol GA is variably displayed in the time-saving rush effect when shifting to the second time-saving gaming state. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the time-saving rush effect, the time-saving background image GHy of the time-saving medium effect may be displayed. As understood from the above description, the "background image" displayed when shifting to the "second game state" of the present invention is a concept that includes both the rush background image GHz and the time saving background image GHy.

FIG. 61(a-3) is a diagram for explaining each image displayed when the third time-saving gaming state is started. In FIG. 61 (a-3), in addition to each image displayed after transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state, each image displayed in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state before transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state shown. In the specific example of FIG. 61(a-3), it is assumed that the game moves to the third time-saving gaming state at time tj1.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a-3), in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the normal medium production is executed. Specifically, in the game that transitions to the third time-saving game state, a time-saving transition effect in which time-saving symbols are stop-displayed is executed. As shown in FIG. 61(a-3), when the third time-saving gaming state is started, the above-described time-saving rush effect is executed. The above time-saving rush production is performed, for example, over a predetermined period of time. When the above time-saving rush performance is started, the rush background image GHz is displayed in place of the normal background image GHx, and the rush image GT is displayed.

In the time-saving rush performance when the third time-saving game state is started, the performance symbol GAy is displayed. In the time-saving rush production described above, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC and the number-of-holds image GD are displayed, and the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are not displayed. In the third embodiment, regardless of whether or not the first game in the third time-saving game state is executed (presence or absence of the number of pending games at the time of transition to the third time-saving game state), the time-saving rush effect is executed.

By the way, the time saving rush effect when the first time saving game state is started is executed in the ending period of the big hit game. Therefore, it is less necessary to display the effect symbol GA, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC and the number-of-holds image GD. On the other hand, the period during which the time saving rush effect is executed when the second time saving game state or the third time saving game state is started is not the ending period of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is highly necessary to display the effect symbol GA, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC and the pending number image GD.

Temporarily, in the time-saving rush effect when the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is started, a configuration is assumed in which the prevention image GQ2 is displayed in addition to each of the above-described images (effect image GA, etc.). In the above configuration, the number of images displayed on the image display device 31 tends to be excessive. In addition, the above inconvenience may also occur when adopting a configuration in which the warning image GQ2 is displayed in the time-saving rush effect when the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is started.

Considering the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, in the time-saving rush effect when the second time-saving game state is started, and the time-saving rush effect when the third time-saving game state is started, the prevention image GQ2 adopted a configuration in which is not displayed. In addition, in the time-saving rush performance when the second time-saving game state is started and the time-saving rush performance when the third time-saving game state is started, the warning image GQ2 is not displayed. According to the above configuration, the above inconvenience is suppressed.

In addition, in the time-saving rush effect when the second time-saving game state is started, or in the time-saving rush effect when the third time-saving game state is started, the small pattern Ga is displayed, and the display of the effect pattern GA is omitted. It may be configured to be According to the above configuration, the effect of suppressing the above-described inconvenience is particularly remarkable.

FIG. 61(b-1) and FIG. 61(b-2) are schematic diagrams of screens displayed in the time-saving rush effect when the first time-saving game state is started. Specifically, FIG. 61(b-1) is a schematic diagram of the screen on which the prevention image GQ2 is displayed. FIG. 61(b-2) is a schematic diagram of the screen on which the warning image GQ2 is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 61(b-1) and 61(b-2), each of the above screens displays a rush image GT. Also, a right hitting image Gsy is displayed on each of the above screens. It should be noted that the right-handed image Gsy is displayed on the image display device 31 during a period from the start of the big win game to the start of the first time-saving game state.

FIG. 61(b-3) is a schematic diagram of the screen displayed in the time-saving rush effect when the second time-saving game state is started. As shown in FIG. 61(b-3), a rush image GT is displayed in the time-saving rush effect when the second time-saving game state is started. In addition, in the time-saving rush effect described above, the right-handed image Gsy, the effect symbol GAy, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the number-of-holds image GD are displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 61(b-3), it is assumed that the number of reservations is zero. Temporarily, when the number of reservations is 1 or more, the above-mentioned reservation image GB is displayed in the time saving rush effect when the second time saving game state is started.

A rush image GT is displayed in the time-saving rush effect when the third time-saving game state is started as well as the time-saving rush effect when the second time-saving game state is started. In addition, in the time-saving rush effect described above, the right-handed image Gsy, the effect symbol GAy, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, the pending number image GD, and the pending image GB are displayed.

In the third embodiment, various images are displayed on the image display device 31 in addition to the above-described images (the rush image GT and the like) as the time-saving game state is activated. Other images displayed on the image display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63 below.

FIG. 62(a) is a schematic diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 after the second time-saving gaming state is started. As described above, in the second time-saving gaming state, various images including the right-handed image Gsy are displayed. Further, when the second time-saving game state is started, a right-handed start image GR shown in FIG. 62(a) is displayed. The above-described right-handed start image GR is displayed after the above-described entry image GT (see FIG. 61(b-3)) is displayed. However, the display period of the right hitting start image GR and the display period of the entry image GT may all or part overlap.

The right-handed start image GR, like the right-handed image Gsy, is an image for notifying that the game should be played right-handed. However, the right hitting start image GR is displayed larger than the right hitting image Gsy. Further, the right hitting image Gsy is displayed near the upper right end of the screen, while the right hitting start image GR is displayed substantially in the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), the right-handed start image GR is displayed (on the near side) with priority over the effect symbol GAy. According to the above-described right-handed start image GR, it becomes easier for the player to surely recognize that the right-handed game should be started. Also, the right hitting start image GR is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and then disappears. Furthermore, a predetermined sound is output along with the display of the right hitting start image GR. For example, a voice saying "Right shot" is output.

In the third embodiment, regardless of whether or not the game is started immediately after shifting to the second time-saving game state, the right-handed start image GR is displayed and the sound "right-handed" is output. That is, even if the number of pending games is 0 at the time of transition to the second time-saving gaming state, the right-handed image GR is displayed and the sound "right-handed" is output. In addition, even if the number of reservations is 0 at the time of transition to the second time-saving game state, the time-saving background image GHy of the time-saving game state is displayed.

In the second time-saving gaming state, predetermined BGM is output. Output of the above BGM is started with the start of the second time-saving game state regardless of whether or not the game is started immediately after shifting to the second time-saving game state. However, when the non-game period continues for a predetermined period of time, the volume of the gaming machine 1 is changed to "0" and the BGM becomes inaudible.

In the specific example of FIG. 62(a), it is assumed that the number of reservations is 0 when the second time-saving gaming state is started. In the above case, immediately after the second time-saving game state is started, the effect symbol GA and the small symbol Ga are stopped and displayed. It should be noted that during the period in which the right hitting start image GR is displayed, the performance symbol GA may be hidden (the small symbol Ga may be continuously displayed).

When the third time-saving gaming state is started, similarly to when the second time-saving gaming state is started, regardless of whether or not the number of reservations is present, the right hitting image Gsy is displayed, and the right hitting start image GR is displayed, A sound instructing that the game should be played with the right hand is output, the BGM of the third time-saving game state is started to be output, and the time-saving background image GHy is displayed. In addition, during the period in which the right hitting start image GR in the third time-saving game state is displayed, the effect symbol GA and the small symbol Ga are displayed. However, immediately after the start of the second time-saving gaming state, the production pattern GA corresponding to the losing pattern and the small pattern Ga are displayed, while immediately after the start of the third time-saving gaming state, the production pattern GA corresponding to the time-saving design. and a small pattern Ga are displayed.

FIG. 62(b) is a schematic diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 immediately after the second time-saving game state is terminated and the state is shifted to the low-probability non-time-saving game state. As shown in FIG. 62(b), the left-handed image Gsx is displayed immediately after the second time-saving game state ends. The left-handed image Gsx described above is an image instructing the player to play left-handed, and is displayed in place of the right-handed image Gsy. Also, the left-handed image Gsx is displayed at the same position as the right-handed image Gsy.

As shown in FIG. 62(b), immediately after the second time-saving game state ends, a left-handed start image GL is displayed. The left-handed start image GL, like the left-handed image Gsx, is an image for notifying that the game should be played left-handed. However, the left-handed start image GL is displayed larger than the left-handed image Gsx. The left-handed image Gsx is displayed near the upper right corner of the screen, while the left-handed start image GL is displayed substantially in the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 62(b), the left-handed start image GL is displayed (on the near side) with priority over the effect symbol GAy. According to the left-handed start image GL described above, it becomes easier for the player to surely recognize that the left-handed game should be started. Also, the left-handed start image GL is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the second time-saving game state ends, and then disappears. Furthermore, a predetermined sound is output along with the display of the left-handed start image GL. For example, a voice saying "Please switch back to left-handed" is output.

In the third embodiment, regardless of whether or not the game is started immediately after the second time-saving gaming state ends, the left-handed start image GL is displayed, and the voice "Please return to left-handed" is heard. output. That is, even if the number of pending games is 0 when the second time-saving game state ends, the left-handed image GL is displayed and the voice saying "please return to left-handed" is output. Also, even if the number of pending games is 0 when the second time-saving game state ends, the normal background image GHx in the non-time-saving game state is displayed.

In the specific example of FIG. 62(a), it is assumed that the number of reservations is 0 when the second time-saving gaming state is started. In the above case, immediately after the second time-saving game state is started, the effect symbol GA and the small symbol Ga are stopped and displayed.

At the end of the third time-saving game state, similarly to the end of the second time-saving game state, the left-handed start image GL is displayed irrespective of the presence or absence of the number of reservations, and instructs to play left-handed. Sound is output and the normal background image GHx is displayed.

FIG. 63(a) is a diagram for explaining the result image GP. The above-described result image GP is an image that displays information about profits obtained during a period when a period advantageous to the player ends. For example, the number of jackpot games in the period from winning the jackpot game to the transition to the low-probability non-time-saving game state (advantageous period described above), and the total number of prize balls paid out during the period It is displayed on the result image GP.

In the specific example of FIG. 63(a), it is assumed that the jackpot game is won three times during the advantageous period and 4515 prize balls are paid out. It should be noted that the number of prize balls displayed by the result image GP of the third embodiment does not include the prize balls paid out as the game balls enter the starting openings (13, 14) and the general winning opening 18. However, the number of prize balls displayed in the result image GP may include the prize balls that are paid out as the game balls enter the general prize winning opening 18 .

In addition, even if the jackpot game is won in the first time-saving game state controlled via the jackpot game from the second time-saving game state and the prize balls are paid out, the number of prize balls displayed by the result image GP is increased. The number does not include the number of prize balls paid out in the second time-saving gaming state. That is, the result display does not include the game information (the number of prize balls, the number of payouts, etc.) in the advantageous state (second time-saving game state) before the start of the jackpot game.

FIG. 63(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the period during which the result image GP is displayed. In the third embodiment, a result image GP is displayed when the first time-saving gaming state ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 63(b), it is assumed that the final game of the first time-saving gaming state is started at time tk1, and the game ends at time tk3. In the above cases, the first time-saving game state ends at time tk3, and shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving game state. In the specific example of FIG. 63(b), it is assumed that the jackpot lottery for the final game in the first time-saving gaming state is a loss. FIG. 63(b) shows time point tk2 at which the effect symbol GAy corresponding to the losing symbol is temporarily stopped in the final game of the first time-saving game state.

In the above specific example of FIG. 63(b), the result image GP is displayed immediately after time tk2. As understood from FIG. 63(a) described above, during the period in which the result image GP is displayed, the small symbol Ga is displayed and the performance symbol GA is not displayed. Further, the above result image GP is displayed until the final game in the first time-saving game state is completed.

It is assumed that the result image GP is displayed when the second time-saving gaming state ends. As described above, the second time-saving game state operates without a big hit game. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the game ball does not enter the winning openings (the first big winning opening 16, the second big winning opening 17) other than the starting openings (13, 14) and the general winning opening 18 in principle. Therefore, in the above-described comparison, when the jackpot game is not won in the second time-saving game state, the number of jackpot games displayed in the result image GP is "0", and the number of paid-out prize balls is "0". ”. When the above result image GP is displayed, there may be a problem that some players lose their motivation to play.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the result image GP is not displayed when the second time-saving gaming state ends. FIG.63(c) is a figure for demonstrating the image displayed before and after the 2nd time saving game state is complete|finished. In FIG. 63(c), it is assumed that the second time-saving gaming state ends at time tl and shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. As shown in FIG. 63(c), before and after the second time-saving gaming state ends, the result image GP is not displayed.

Further, the above-described inconvenience also occurs in the contrast in which the result image GP is displayed when the third time-saving gaming state ends. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the result image GP is not displayed when the third time-saving gaming state ends. FIG.63(d) is a figure for demonstrating the image displayed before and after the 3rd time saving game state is complete|finished. In FIG. 63(c), it is assumed that the third time-saving gaming state ends at time tm and shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. As shown in FIG. 63(d), the result image GP is not displayed before and after the third time-saving gaming state ends. In addition, when the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state are terminated, for example, an image displaying a message "end of time-saving" may be displayed.

FIGS. 64(a) to 64(c) are diagrams for explaining the counting period of the base value in the third embodiment. As described above, during the counting period, the out counter for calculating the base value and the prize ball counter for calculating the base value are added. That is, the base value is updated during the counting period.

FIG. 64(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the counting period before and after the second time-saving gaming state is started. In the specific example of FIG. 64(a), it is assumed that the 800th game (variation display of special symbols) in the low-probability non-time-saving game state is started at time tn1. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(a), it is assumed that the losing pattern is stop-displayed in the 800th game in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. Specifically, it is assumed that the lost symbols are stopped and displayed at time tn2, and the cumulative number m reaches the numerical value "800". In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state before time tn2 becomes the counting period. In addition, the second time-saving gaming state after time tn2 becomes a non-counting period.

In the specific example of FIG. 64(a), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won in the second time-saving game state. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(a), it is assumed that the final game of the second time-saving game state is started at time tn3, and the losing symbols are stopped and displayed in the game. Specifically, at time tn4, it is assumed that the lost symbols are stopped and displayed, and the remaining number of times M2 is subtracted to the numerical value "0". In the above case, after the time tn4 will be in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state. Also, the counting period is restarted from time tn4.

FIG.64(b) is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of the counting period before and after the 3rd time saving game state is started. In the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that the game in which the time-saving design is stop-displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state is started at time to1. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed at time to2. In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state before time to2 becomes the counting period. In addition, the third time-saving gaming state after time to2 becomes a non-counting period.

In the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won in the third time-saving game state. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that the final game of the third time-saving game state is started at time to3, and the losing pattern is stopped and displayed in the game. Specifically, it is assumed that, at time to4, the lost symbols are stopped and displayed, and the remaining number of times M3 is subtracted to the numerical value "0".

In the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that the cumulative number m is not the numerical value "800" in the final game in the third time-saving game state. In the above case, after the time point to4 will be in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state. Also, the counting period restarts from time to4. In the third embodiment, if the time saving pattern is stop-displayed in the final game in the third time-saving game state, the measurement period is restarted in the same way as when the losing pattern is stop-displayed. In addition, when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the final game of the third time-saving game state, the measurement period is restarted after the small winning game is finished.

FIG.64(c) is a figure for demonstrating the other specific example of the counting period before and after the 3rd time saving game state is started. In the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that the game in which the time saving pattern is stop-displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state is started at time tp1. Moreover, in the specific example of FIG.64(c), it is assumed that the time saving design is stop-displayed at time tp2. In the above case, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state before time tp2 becomes the counting period. In addition, the third time-saving gaming state after time tp2 becomes a non-counting period (similar to FIG. 64(b) described above).

In the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won in the third time-saving game state. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that the final game in the third time-saving game state is started at time tp3, and the losing symbols are stopped and displayed in the game. Specifically, it is assumed that at time tp4, the lost symbols are stopped and displayed, and the remaining number of times M3 is subtracted to the numerical value "0". Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m is the numerical value "800" in the final game in the third time-saving game state. In the above case, after the time tp4 is the second time-saving gaming state. That is, the non-counting period continues even after time tp4. In addition, when the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "800" in the final game of the third time-saving game state, the non-counting period continues even if the time-saving symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the game. Also, as described above, the first time-saving gaming state is a non-counting period. Similar to the case where the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "800" in the final game in the third time-saving gaming state, if the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "800" in the final game in the first time-saving gaming state, then , the non-counting period continues.

Each configuration of the above-described first and second embodiments can also be appropriately adopted in the third embodiment. For example, the timing of updating the number-of-games image GE (at the start of the game) in the third embodiment may be at the end of the game as in the first embodiment. Further, in the third embodiment, the configuration may be such that the number-of-games image GN is displayed together with the number-of-games image GE.

In the third embodiment, the timing for displaying the remaining number of times image GN can be set as appropriate. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which the remaining number of times image GN is displayed at the same timing as in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 15(a) to 15(d)). It should be noted that, in the third embodiment, there is a possibility of shifting to the third time-saving gaming state before the second time-saving gaming state is started. In the third time-saving game state, the remaining number of times image GN may be displayed or may not be displayed.

In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which it is suggested that the remaining number of times N is deferred. Specifically, under the same conditions as in the first embodiment, the remaining number of times image GN and the stationary notification image GI may be displayed in the third embodiment. Further, in the third embodiment, a table scenario S may be set as in the first embodiment. Also, in the third embodiment, a normal mode and an immediately preceding mode may be provided. In the third embodiment, when the second time-saving gaming state is started, each screen (M1 to M7) may be displayed in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

In the third embodiment, the game variation pattern determination table T in which the remaining number of times N is reduced to "0" may be different or common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. Further, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T for the first game in the second time-saving gaming state may be different or common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. In a configuration where the variation pattern determination table T for the first game in the second time-saving game state differs between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period, each image (shielding image GF, etc.) displayed in the game is displayed during the scenario setting period. A different configuration may be used for the scenario unset period. Similarly, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T for the last game in the second time-saving gaming state may be different or common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. In a configuration in which the variation pattern determination table T for the last game in the second time-saving game state differs between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period, each image displayed in the game is displayed during the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. Different configurations are possible. In the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T for the first game after the end of the second time-saving gaming state may be different or common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period.

In the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T may be different or common between the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state. Also, in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, in the configuration where the variation pattern determination table T is different, the average change time of the special figure is preferably shorter in the second time-saving gaming state than in the first time-saving gaming state. be. In addition, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the immediate hit effect is more likely to be executed in the second time-saving game state than in the first time-saving game state.

In the third embodiment, the area where the remaining number of times M is displayed may be different or common between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. Further, when the power is turned off/on during the activated period of the third embodiment, it may be configured to notify that it is the activated period, as in the first embodiment. Further, in the third embodiment, in the same configuration as the first embodiment, the modification of FIG. 25 (b-1), the modification shown in FIG. 25 (b-2), the second time-saving gaming state is installed It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a message to the effect that there is

Further, in the present embodiment, as the number of times of variation that can be executed in the first time-saving gaming state, it has been described that the number of times less than the number of times of variation required to reach the second time-saving gaming state is set. In other words, it is explained that the first time-saving game state is not switched to the second time-saving game state, and that the second time-saving game state is not controlled in the first time-saving game state.
However, as the number of times of variation that can be executed in the first time-saving gaming state, the number of times of variation required to reach the second time-saving gaming state may be set. Then, in the first time-saving game state, when the necessary number of fluctuations are executed until the second time-saving game state is reached, the game state of the gaming machine 1 is switched from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state. may be
Also, in the first time-saving gaming state, when the necessary number of fluctuations are executed until the second time-saving gaming state is reached, when the first time-saving gaming state, control to the second time-saving gaming state (overlapping control) may be
Further, in the first time-saving game state, even if the necessary number of fluctuations are executed until the second time-saving game state is reached, the second time-saving game state may not be controlled.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the special symbol lottery in the first time-saving game state does not win the third time-saving game state. In other words, it has been explained that when it is in the first time-saving game state, it is not controlled to the third time-saving game state.
However, even if it is a special symbol lottery in the first time saving game state, it may be possible to win in the third time saving game state. That is, the time saving pattern determination table and the variation pattern determination table may be provided so that the time saving symbols are included in the stop symbols in the variation in the first time saving gaming state. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the first time-saving gaming state is the winning of the third time-saving gaming state, even if the game state of the gaming machine 1 is switched from the first time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state. good.
Also, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the first time saving game state is the winning of the third time saving game state, even if it is controlled to the third time saving game state (overlapping control) when it is in the first time saving game state good.
Further, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the first time-saving game state is the winning of the third time-saving game state, it may not be controlled to the third time-saving game state.

Also, even if it is a lottery of special symbols in the second time-saving game state, it may be possible to win the third time-saving game state. That is, the time saving pattern determination table and the variation pattern determination table may be provided so that the time saving pattern is included in the stop symbols in the variation in the second time saving gaming state. And when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the second time-saving gaming state is the winning of the third time-saving gaming state, even if the game state of the gaming machine 1 is switched from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state. good.
Also, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the second time saving game state is the winning of the third time saving game state, even if it is controlled to the third time saving game state (overlapping control) when it is in the second time saving game state good.
Further, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the second time-saving game state is the winning of the third time-saving game state, it may not be controlled to the third time-saving game state.

Further, as the number of times of variation that can be executed in the third time-saving gaming state, the number of times that is equal to or more than the number of times of variation required to reach the second time-saving gaming state may be set. Then, in the third time-saving game state, when the necessary number of fluctuations are executed until the second time-saving game state is reached, the game state of the gaming machine 1 is switched from the third time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state. may be
Also, in the third time-saving gaming state, when the necessary number of fluctuations are executed until the second time-saving gaming state is reached, when the third time-saving gaming state is reached, the second time-saving gaming state is controlled (overlapping control). may be
Further, in the third time-saving game state, even if the necessary number of fluctuations are executed until the second time-saving game state is reached, the second time-saving game state may not be controlled.
Also, when switched from the third time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state, or when being controlled to the second time-saving game state when in the third time-saving game state, in order to maintain the time-saving state, the second Performance of the 2 o'clock short game state (probability of winning in the normal drawing lottery, fluctuation time of the normal pattern, time to control the second start port 14 in the second mode when winning in the normal drawing drawing, etc.), and the third You may make it the same as the performance of a time saving game state. Also, when switched from the third time-saving gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state, or when being controlled to the second time-saving gaming state when in the third time-saving gaming state, the performance of the second time-saving gaming state and the second The performance in the 3 o'clock short game state may be different.

Also, even if it is a lottery of special symbols in the third time-saving game state, it may be possible to win the third time-saving game state. That is, the time saving pattern determination table and the variation pattern determination table may be provided so that the time saving pattern is included in the stop symbols in the variation in the third time saving gaming state. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-saving game state is the winning of the third time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state is newly set in which the number of fluctuations according to the winning time-saving pattern can be executed. may
In addition, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-saving gaming state is the winning of the third time-saving gaming state, the third time-saving gaming state in which the number of times according to the winning time-saving design can be executed. may not be set.

Also, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-saving game state is the winning of the third time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state in which the number of times can be changed according to the number of times corresponding to the winning time-saving pattern. may be determined whether or not to be newly set to .
For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-saving game state in which 100 times of variation is possible is the winning of the third time-saving game state in which 100 times of variation is possible, the number of winning times is changed. may be newly set to the executable third time-saving game state. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-saving game state in which the variation of 100 times is possible is the winning of the third time-saving game state in which the variation of 1000 times is possible, the number of winning times is changed. may not be newly set in the executable third time-saving game state, so as to prevent addition of the executable variable number in the third time-saving game state.
Also, for example, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-saving game state in which 1000 times of variation is possible is the winning of the third time-saving game state in which 1000 times of variation is possible, the number of winning times may be newly set to the third time-saving game state in which the variation of is executable. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-saving game state in which the variation of 1000 times is possible is the winning of the third time-saving game state in which the variation of 100 times is possible, the number of winning times is changed. is not newly set in the executable third time-saving game state, so that the number of fluctuations executable in the third time-saving game state is prevented from going down.
Also, for example, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-saving game state is winning of the third time-saving game state in which the number of fluctuations can be greater than the remaining number of fluctuations, the number of times of winning is changed may not be newly set in the executable third time-saving game state, so as to prevent addition of the executable variable number in the third time-saving game state.
Also, for example, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-saving game state is winning of the third time-saving game state in which the number of fluctuations can be greater than the remaining number of fluctuations, the number of times of winning is changed may be newly set to the executable third time-saving game state. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-saving game state is the winning of the third time-saving game state in which the number of fluctuations can be less than the remaining number of fluctuations, the number of winning times is changed. It may be configured to prevent the number of fluctuations that can be executed in the third time-saving gaming state from being set to a new possible third time-saving gaming state.

Also, when it is controlled to the high probability game state, it may be controlled to neither the second time reduction game state nor the third time reduction game state.

(Regarding the fluctuation pattern of special patterns during time saving)
In the first to third embodiments, it has been explained that the variation pattern determination table is used according to the state of the gaming machine 1 . Here, the game state when the big winning game is played (when the big winning opening is activated), the special symbols among the big winning symbols that are stopped and displayed, and the state after the big winning game (after the big winning opening is activated). Depending on the game state, the special symbol variation pattern determination table used after the big hit game may be determined.
For example, when the jackpot game is performed (when the jackpot is activated), the game state is a low-probability non-time-saving game state, the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game is finished (after the jackpot is activated) ) is a high-probability time-saving gaming state, the first variation pattern determination table may be used. In addition, when the jackpot game is performed (when the jackpot is activated), the game state is a low-probability non-time-saving game state, the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game is completed (after the jackpot is activated) ) is a low-probability time-saving gaming state, the second variation pattern determination table may be used.
Also, for example, the game state when the big hit game is performed (when the big winning opening is activated) is the low probability time saving game state, the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed, and after the big winning game is finished (the big winning opening is activated) After) when the gaming state is a high probability time saving gaming state, the third variation pattern determination table may be used. In addition, when the big win game is performed (when the big prize opening is activated), the game state is the low-probability time-saving game state, the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed, and after the big win game is finished (after the big prize opening is activated). When the game state is a low probability time saving game state, the fourth variation pattern determination table may be used.
In addition, for example, when the jackpot game is performed (when the jackpot is activated), the game state is a high-probability non-time-saving game state, the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game is completed (the jackpot is activated) When the gaming state of (after completion) is a high probability time saving gaming state, the fifth variation pattern determination table may be used. In addition, when the jackpot game is performed (when the jackpot is activated), the game state is a high probability non-time-saving game state, the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game is completed (after the jackpot is activated) ) is a low-probability time-saving gaming state, the sixth variation pattern determination table may be used.
Also, for example, the game state when the big hit game is performed (when the big winning opening is activated) is a high probability time saving game state, the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed, and after the big winning game is finished (the big winning opening is activated) After) when the gaming state is a high probability time saving gaming state, the seventh variation pattern determination table may be used. In addition, when the big win game is performed (when the big prize opening is activated), the game state is the high-probability time-saving game state, the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed, and after the big win game is finished (after the big prize opening is activated). When the gaming state of is a low-probability time-saving gaming state, the eighth variation pattern determination table may be used.
The first variation pattern determination table to the eighth variation pattern determination table are respectively different variation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the above-described variation pattern determination tables, or a variation pattern different from the above-described variation pattern determination table It may be a decision table.

In addition, the game state when the big win game is performed (when the big win opening is activated), the special symbols among the big win symbols that are stopped and displayed, and the game after the end of the big win game (after the operation of the big win opening). A variation pattern determination table for special symbols to be used after the big win game may be determined based on not only the state but also the number of variations of the special symbols executed after the big win game is finished (after the big win opening is operated).
For example, when the jackpot game is performed (when the jackpot is activated), the game state is a low-probability non-time-saving game state, the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game is finished (after the jackpot is activated) ) is a high-probability time-saving game state, when the number of variations of the special symbols executed after the end of the big win game (after the end of the big winning opening operation) has not reached the first number, When the first variation pattern determination table is used and the first number of times has been reached, the second variation pattern determination table may be used. In addition, when the jackpot game is performed (when the jackpot is activated), the game state is a low-probability non-time-saving game state, the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game is completed (after the jackpot is activated) ) is a low-probability time-saving game state, when the number of variations of the special symbols executed after the end of the big hit game (after the end of the big winning opening operation) has not reached the second number, When the third variation pattern determination table is used and the second number of times is reached and the third number of times greater than the second number is not reached, the fourth variation pattern determination table is used to reach the third number of times If so, the fifth variation pattern determination table may be used.
Also, for example, the game state when the big hit game is performed (when the big winning opening is activated) is the low probability time saving game state, the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed, and after the big winning game is finished (the big winning opening is activated) After), if the game state is a high probability time-saving game state, regardless of the number of times of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the big win game (after the end of the big winning opening operation), the sixth change pattern determination table may be used. In addition, when the big win game is performed (when the big prize opening is activated), the game state is the low-probability time-saving game state, the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed, and after the big win game is finished (after the big prize opening is activated). When the game state is a low-probability time-saving game state, if the number of variations of the special symbols executed after the end of the big hit game (after the end of the big winning opening operation) has not reached the fourth time, the second When the 7 variation pattern determination table is used and the 4th number is reached, the 8th variation pattern determination table may be used.
In addition, for example, when the jackpot game is performed (when the jackpot is activated), the game state is a high-probability non-time-saving game state, the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game is completed (the jackpot is activated) After the end) is a high-probability time-saving game state, regardless of the number of special symbol variations executed after the end of the big win game (after the end of the big winning opening operation), the ninth variation pattern determination table may be used. In addition, when the jackpot game is performed (when the jackpot is activated), the game state is a high probability non-time-saving game state, the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game is completed (after the jackpot is activated) ) is a low-probability time-saving gaming state, regardless of the number of special symbol variations executed after the end of the big win game (after the end of the big winning opening operation), the 10th variation pattern determination table is used. may be
Also, for example, the game state when the big hit game is performed (when the big winning opening is activated) is a high probability time saving game state, the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed, and after the big winning game is finished (the big winning opening is activated) After) when the game state is a high-probability time-saving game state, when the number of variations of the special symbols executed after the end of the big win game (after the end of the big winning opening operation) has not reached the fifth number , The 11th variation pattern determination table is used, and if the 5th number is reached and the 6th number, which is greater than the 5th number, is not reached, the 12th variation pattern determination table is used, and the 6th number If reached, the thirteenth variation pattern determination table may be used. In addition, when the big win game is performed (when the big prize opening is activated), the game state is the high-probability time-saving game state, the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed, and after the big win game is finished (after the big prize opening is activated). When the game state is a low-probability time-saving game state, if the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game (after the end of the big winning opening operation) has not reached the seventh time, the second 14 variation pattern determination table is used, and when the 7th number is reached and the 8th number, which is larger than the 7th number, is not reached, the 15th variation pattern determination table is used, and the 8th number is reached If so, the 16th variation pattern determination table may be used.
The first to sixteenth variation pattern determination tables are different variation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the above-described variation pattern determination tables, or a variation pattern different from the above-described variation pattern determination table It may be a decision table.

Further, a plurality of types of special symbols may be provided which are stop-displayed as small winning symbols. Then, the game state when the small winning game is performed (when the specific area opening and closing member operates), the special symbols to be stopped and displayed among the small winning symbols, and the special symbols executed after the small winning game is completed. A special symbol variation pattern determination table to be used after a small winning game may be determined based on the number of variations.
For example, when the small winning game is performed (when the specific area opening and closing member operates), the game state is a low probability non-time-saving game state, and the first small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the small winning game ends. When the number of variations of the special symbols executed later has not reached the first number, the first variation pattern determination table is used, and when the number has reached the first number, the second variation pattern determination table is used. may be used. In addition, when the small winning game is performed (when the specific area opening and closing member operates), the game state is a low probability non-time-saving game state, and the second small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the small winning game ends. When the number of variations of the special symbols executed later has not reached the second number, the third variation pattern determination table is used to reach the second number and to reach the third number which is larger than the second number. If not, the fourth variation pattern determination table may be used, and if the third number of times has been reached, the fifth variation pattern determination table may be used.
Also, for example, when the small winning game is performed (when the specific area opening and closing member operates), the game state is a low probability short-time gaming state, and when the first small winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the small winning game The sixth variation pattern determination table may be used regardless of the number of variations of the special symbols executed after the end of . Further, when the game state when the small winning game is performed (when the specific area opening and closing member operates) is the low probability time saving game state and the second small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, after the small winning game is finished When the number of variations of the executed special symbols has not reached the fourth number, the seventh variation pattern determination table is used, and when the fourth number has been reached, the eighth variation pattern determination table is used. may be used.
Also, for example, when the small winning game is performed (when the specific area opening and closing member operates), the game state is a high probability non-time-saving game state, and when the first small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the small winning The ninth variation pattern determination table may be used regardless of the number of variations of the special symbols executed after the end of the game. Further, when the small winning game is performed (when the specific area opening and closing member operates), the game state is a high probability non-time-saving game state, and when the second small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the small winning game is performed. The tenth variation pattern determination table may be used regardless of the number of variations of the special symbols executed after the end.
Further, for example, when the game state when the small winning game is performed (when the specific area opening and closing member operates) is a high probability time saving game state and the first small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the small winning game When the number of variations of the special symbols executed after the end has not reached the fifth number, the eleventh variation pattern determination table is used to reach the fifth number and to the sixth number which is larger than the fifth number. If not reached, the 12th variation pattern determination table may be used, and if the 6th number of times has been reached, the 13th variation pattern determination table may be used. In addition, when the game state when the small winning game is performed (when the specific area opening and closing member operates) is the high probability time saving game state and the second small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, after the small winning game is finished When the number of variations of the executed special symbols has not reached the 7th number, the 14th variation pattern determination table is used to reach the 7th number and to reach the 8th number, which is greater than the 7th number. If not, the 15th variation pattern determination table may be used, and if the 8th number has been reached, the 16th variation pattern determination table may be used.
The first to sixteenth variation pattern determination tables are different variation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the above-described variation pattern determination tables, or a variation pattern different from the above-described variation pattern determination table It may be a decision table.

In addition, when it is controlled to the first time-saving gaming state, when it is controlled to the second time-saving gaming state, and when it is controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, even if different variation pattern determination tables are used good.
In addition, based on the game state of the gaming machine 1 when controlled to the second time-saving gaming state, the special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the second time-saving gaming state may be determined. For example, when the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 when controlled to the second time-saving gaming state is a low probability non-time-saving gaming state, even if the first variation pattern determination table is used in the second time-saving gaming state good. Further, when the game state of the gaming machine 1 when controlled to the second time-saving gaming state is the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the second variation pattern determination table may be used in the second time-saving gaming state. .
The first variation pattern determination table and the second variation pattern determination table are respectively different variation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the above-described variation pattern determination tables, and a variation pattern different from the above-described variation pattern determination table It may be a decision table.

Further, when controlled to the second time-saving gaming state, a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the second time-saving gaming state is determined based on the number of variations of the special symbols executed in the second time-saving gaming state. may
For example, when it is controlled to the second time-saving gaming state, regardless of which game state the gaming machine 1 was in when it is controlled to the second time-saving gaming state, the special executed in the second time-saving gaming state When the number of variations in the pattern has not reached the first number, the first variation pattern determination table is used, and when the number of variations has reached the first number, the second variation pattern determination table is used. good.
The first variation pattern determination table and the second variation pattern determination table are respectively different variation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the above-described variation pattern determination tables, and a variation pattern different from the above-described variation pattern determination table It may be a decision table.

Also, when it is controlled to the second time-saving gaming state, based on the game state of the gaming machine 1 when it is controlled to the second time-saving gaming state, and the number of variations of the special symbols executed in the second time-saving gaming state Then, a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the second time-saving gaming state may be determined.
For example, when the second time-saving gaming state is controlled to a low probability non-time-saving gaming state, if the number of variations of the special symbols executed in the second time-saving gaming state has not reached the first number , the first variation pattern determination table is used, and when the first number of times has been reached, the second variation pattern determination table may be used.
Also, for example, when it is in the low probability time-saving gaming state when it is controlled to the second time-saving gaming state, when the number of variations of the special symbols executed in the second time-saving gaming state has not reached the second number , the third variation pattern determination table is used, and when the second number of times has been reached, the fourth variation pattern determination table may be used.
The first variation pattern determination table to the fourth variation pattern determination table are respectively different variation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the above-described variation pattern determination tables, or a variation pattern different from the above-described variation pattern determination table It may be a decision table.

Further, when controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, a variation pattern determination table for the special symbols used in the third time-saving gaming state may be determined based on the special symbols to be stopped and displayed out of the time-saving symbols. .
For example, when the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed, regardless of which gaming state the gaming machine 1 was in when controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, even if the first variation pattern determination table is used good. Further, when the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed, regardless of which game state the gaming machine 1 is in when it is controlled to the third time-saving game state, even if the second variation pattern determination table is used. good.
The first variation pattern determination table and the second variation pattern determination table are respectively different variation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the above-described variation pattern determination tables, and a variation pattern different from the above-described variation pattern determination table It may be a decision table.

In addition, based on the special symbols that are stopped and displayed among the time-saving symbols and the game state of the gaming machine 1 when controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern of the special symbols used in the third time-saving gaming state A decision table may be defined.
For example, when the special symbol J1 is stop-displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state when controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, the first variation pattern determination table may be used. Further, when the special symbol J2 is stop-displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state when controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, the second variation pattern determination table may be used.
Further, for example, when the special symbol J1 is stop-displayed in the low-probability time-saving gaming state when controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, the third variation pattern determination table may be used. Further, when the special symbol J2 is stop-displayed in the low-probability time-saving gaming state when controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, the fourth variation pattern determination table may be used.
The first variation pattern determination table to the fourth variation pattern determination table are respectively different variation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the above-described variation pattern determination tables, or a variation pattern different from the above-described variation pattern determination table It may be a decision table.

Further, the variation pattern determination table used in the third time-saving gaming state may be determined based on the number of variations of the special symbols executed in the third time-saving gaming state.
For example, regardless of the special symbols that are stopped and displayed among the time-saving symbols and the game state when controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols executed in the third time-saving gaming state is the first number. When it has not reached, the first variation pattern determination table may be used, and when it has reached the first number of times, the second variation pattern determination table may be used.
The first variation pattern determination table and the second variation pattern determination table are respectively different variation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the above-described variation pattern determination tables, and a variation pattern different from the above-described variation pattern determination table It may be a decision table.

In addition, based on the special symbols that are stopped and displayed among the time saving symbols, the game state of the gaming machine 1 when it is controlled to the third time saving game state, and the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbols executed in the third time saving game state Then, the variation pattern determination table used in the third time-saving gaming state may be determined.
For example, when the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state when controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, the number of variations of the special symbols executed in the third time-saving gaming state is the first When the number of times has not been reached, the first variation pattern determination table may be used, and when the number of times has been reached, the second variation pattern determination table may be used. In addition, when the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state when controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, the number of times the special symbols change in the third time-saving gaming state is If the second number has not been reached, the third variation pattern determination table is used, and if the second number has been reached and the third number, which is greater than the second number, has not been reached, the fourth variation When the pattern determination table is used and the third number of times has been reached, the fifth variation pattern determination table may be used.
Also, for example, when the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed in a low probability time saving game state when controlled to the third time saving game state, the number of times the special symbol changes in the third time saving game state Regardless, the sixth variation pattern determination table may be used. Further, when the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed in the low-probability time-saving gaming state when being controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, the number of times the special symbols are changed in the third time-saving gaming state is the fourth number. If it has not reached, the seventh variation pattern determination table is used, and if it has reached the fourth number of times, the eighth variation pattern determination table may be used.
The first variation pattern determination table to the eighth variation pattern determination table are respectively different variation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the above-described variation pattern determination tables, or a variation pattern different from the above-described variation pattern determination table It may be a decision table.

(Regarding medium probability game state)
Next, the middle probability game state will be described.
In this embodiment, gaming machine 1 explained that it was controlled by the 1st time saving game state, the 2nd time saving game state, and the 3rd time saving game state. Here, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the first time-saving game state, when it is controlled to the second time-saving game state, or when it is controlled to the third time-saving game state, the low probability game state and the high It may be controlled to a game state that is a jackpot winning probability different from any of the probability game states. More specifically, the game state may be controlled to a game state in which the probability of winning a big win is higher than in the low-probability game state and the probability of winning a big win is lower than in the high-probability game state. A gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than that in the low-probability gaming state and in which the probability of winning a jackpot is lower than that in the high-probability gaming state is hereinafter sometimes referred to as a medium-probability gaming state. The winning probability of the jackpot in the middle probability gaming state may be any value, but is, for example, 1/100.

In the middle probability game state, the winning probability of winning in the normal drawing lottery may be different from both the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state. As an example, in the medium probability game state, the winning probability of winning in the normal drawing lottery may be set to 2/20, which is higher than the non-time saving game state and lower than the time saving game state. On the other hand, in the medium-probability game state, the fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to be the same as in the non-time-saving game state or the time-saving game state. In the medium probability game state, the time for controlling the second starting port 14 in the second mode when winning the normal drawing lottery is set to be the same as in the non-time-saving game state or the time-saving game state.

In addition, the number of times of time saving when a specific jackpot pattern is won may be varied depending on whether the game machine 1 is controlled to the low probability non-time saving game state or to the middle probability game state. For example, as described above, when the special symbol A3 among the jackpot symbols is stop-displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the number of times of time-saving in the first time-saving game state is 100 times. On the other hand, when the special symbol A3 among the jackpot symbols is stop-displayed in the middle-probability gaming state, the number of time-savings in the first time-saving gaming state may be 150 times.

Further, when the time-saving game state ends, the game machine 1 may be controlled to the intermediate probability game state. In this case, a unique background image GH may be displayed in the medium-probability gaming state. Also, when the unique background image GH is displayed, a special effect may be executed to suggest or notify that the game is in the middle probability gaming state. An example of the special effect is the effect of displaying the text “CHANCE stage”.

Also, when the gaming machine 1 is in the time-saving gaming state and in the medium probability gaming state, when winning in the normal drawing lottery, the time to control the second start port 14 in the second mode is as described above. , It is the same time as the time saving game state. In this case, an instruction effect may be executed to instruct the shooting of the game ball to the right side of the game area 10a. The instruction effects include the display of the above-described right-handed shot image, notification of right-handed shot by voice, and the like.

In addition, when a jackpot is won in the medium-probability game state, the game may be controlled to the high-probability game state even if any of the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed. In this case, the number of variations in the medium probability gaming state may be set in a plurality of types. To give an example, when it is controlled to the third time-saving game state from the low probability non-time-saving game state, when it is controlled to the first medium probability game state, and when it is controlled to the second medium probability game state , the number of fluctuations in the first medium-probability gaming state may be 20, while the number of fluctuations in the second medium-probability gaming state may be 1000 times. In this case, the second medium-probability game state has a longer period of being controlled to the high-probability game state when the jackpot is won than the first medium-probability game state.
Also, when a specific variation is executed, it may be controlled to a medium probability game state. For example, when a variable performance that does not win a big hit and a SPSP ready-to-win performance is performed, the game may be controlled to a middle probability game state.
In addition, in the middle probability game state, the effect symbol GA having a unique display mode may be used. In addition, in the medium probability gaming state, a hold image GB having a unique display mode may be used.

<Fourth Embodiment>
FIGS. 65(a) and 65(b) are diagrams for explaining the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, instead of the above-described starting winning designation command, the first information J1 related to the execution of the big hit game specified by the prior determination of the determination information, the second game state specified by the prior determination of the determination information An information command indicating the second information J2 relating to the transition is transmitted from the main control board 110 (main CPU 111) to the effect control board 120 (sub CPU 121). The above information command is generated and transmitted by the main CPU 111 when the starting prize is won during the period when the number of reservations is less than the upper limit.

FIG. 65(a) is a diagram for explaining specific examples of the first information J1 and the second information J2. For example, when a special symbol determination random number determined as a "big hit" is obtained at the time of starting winning, an information command indicating the first information J1 is transmitted to the sub CPU 121 . When the sub CPU 121 receives the first information J1 described above, the sub CPU 121 can grasp that the jackpot game will be executed thereafter.

Further, when a special symbol determination random number determined as “losing” is obtained at the time of starting winning, an information command indicating the second information J2 is transmitted to the sub CPU 121 . The second information J2 described above indicates the cumulative number m of games executed by the start winning. When the sub CPU 121 receives the above second information J2, the result of the game executed by the start winning that triggered the generation of the second information J2 is "losing", and Accumulated count m can be grasped. The sub CPU 121 of the fourth embodiment determines the look-ahead effect according to the information (first information J1, second information J2) indicated by the information command. The above look-ahead effects include a specific effect X1 and a specific effect X2, which will be described later.

FIG. 65(b) is a diagram for explaining the specific effect X1 and the specific effect X2. The specific effect X1 is determined by lottery when the sub CPU 121 receives an information command indicating the first information J1. When the specific effect X1 is determined, the mode (color) of the reserved image GB corresponding to the game (game to win the jackpot) executed by the start winning, which is the trigger for generating the information command indicating the first information J1, is changed to the It changes before the game starts (similar to the above-described pending change effect). According to the above configuration, the fact that the player will win the big win is informed in advance by the specific effect X1 before the game in which the player wins the big win.

The specific effect X2 is determined by lottery when the sub CPU 121 receives an information command indicating the second information J2. Specifically, when the sub CPU 121 receives an information command indicating the second information J2, the accumulated count m specified from the second information J2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value (for example, numerical value “790”). Determine whether or not If the cumulative number m specified from the second information J2 is equal to or greater than the threshold, the sub CPU 121 determines the specified effect X2 by lottery. On the other hand, when the cumulative number m specified from the second information J2 is less than the threshold, the sub CPU 121 does not determine the specified effect X2.

When the specific effect X2 is determined, the mode of the pending image GB corresponding to the game executed by the start winning, which is the trigger for generating the information command indicating the second information J2, changes before the start of the game (the above-mentioned similar to pending change rendition). According to the specific effect X2 described above, the player is notified that the number of games played until the second time-saving game state is relatively small. It should be noted that the mode of the pending image GB in which the specific effect X1 is executed and the mode of the pending image GB in which the specific effect X2 is executed may be different or common.

In the fourth embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, when shifting to the second time-saving gaming state, a time-saving rush effect to notify that effect is executed. In the time-saving rush effect of the fourth embodiment, an image common to each image displayed in the time-saving rush effect of the first embodiment is displayed. Specifically, in the time-saving rush effect, in addition to the rush image GT, the effect symbol GA, the small symbol Ga, and the fourth symbol GC are displayed. In addition, in the time-saving rush performance in the fourth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a part of the performance symbol GA, the small symbol Ga, and the fourth symbol GC is displayed. In the fourth embodiment described above, the same effects as in the first embodiment can be obtained.

<Modification>
Each of the above forms may be variously modified. Specific modification modes are exemplified below. Two or more aspects arbitrarily selected from the following examples can be combined as appropriate.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the timing of updating the figures of the number-of-games image GE and the number-of-games image GN remaining can be changed as appropriate. For example, the numbers in the number-of-games image GE and the number-of-games-to-remain image GN may be updated at the start of the game. Further, the number of the game number image GE may be updated at the start of the game, and the number of the remaining number image GN may be updated at the end of the game. Similarly, the numbers in the number-of-games image GE may be updated at the end of the game, and the numbers in the remaining-number-of-times image GN may be updated at the start of the game.

(2) In each of the above-described forms, in the customer waiting state (see FIG. 19 (a)) before the first game of the second time-saving gaming state is started, in response to the establishment of a specific instruction condition, the right A configuration in which a hit is instructed may be adopted. For example, on condition that the touch sensor 11a detects that the player has touched the operating handle 11, the right-handed shot image GS1 may be displayed. The right-handed image GS1 may be displayed on condition that the touch sensor 11a does not detect that the player has touched the operating handle 11. FIG.

(3) In each form described above, the configuration for notifying that it is the activated period of the second time-saving gaming state can be appropriately changed. For example, instead of displaying the number-of-games image GE shown in FIG. 23(c) in the activated period, the actual number of games from the big win game may be displayed in the activated period. That is, in the activated period, the number of times played image GE may be displayed by increasing from "1800". In the above configuration, when the number of times played image GE is equal to or greater than "1800", it is substantially notified that the activated period has expired. Even if the above configuration is adopted, it is preferable that the number-of-games image GE is hidden in the second time-saving gaming state.

(4) In each of the above-described modes, the timing for displaying the stationary notification image GI is not limited to the beginning of the game. Specifically, the stationary notification image GI may be displayed in the middle stage of the game or in the final stage of the game. For example, the stationary notification image GI may be displayed when the ready-to-win effect is started, or the stationary notification image GI may be displayed during the determination period. Also, it may be configured such that at which point in the game the stationary notification image GI is displayed is determined by a lottery. Further, the stationary notification image GI may be continuously displayed over a plurality of (for example, 10) games.

(5) In each of the above-described modes, the stationary notification image GI is always displayed when the predetermined display condition (N≦200) is satisfied in the games (51st and 101st games) in which the stationary notification image GI can be displayed. The image GI was displayed. In the above configuration, in a game in which the stationary notification image GI can be displayed, the stationary notification image GI is displayed on condition that a predetermined display condition is established and a predetermined lottery is won. may be

Further, in the period in which the remaining number of times N is deferred, the stationary notification image GI may be displayed regardless of the current value of the remaining number of times N, provided that the lottery is won. In the above configuration, when the stationary notification image GI is displayed (when stationary is notified), the remaining number of times N may be displayed to directly notify the number of games up to the second time-saving gaming state. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of games up to the second time-saving gaming state is suggested without directly displaying the number of times N. Further, the configuration may be such that the presence or absence of the remaining number N of deferments is suggested.

For example, assume a configuration including a predetermined lamp (hereinafter “specific lamp”). The specific lamps described above are normally lit in a mode corresponding to the current presentation. On the other hand, in a predetermined game (for example, the first game after the power is turned on), the first special mode is determined according to whether or not the remaining number of times N is set and the current value of the remaining number of times N. Alternatively, it may be lit in the second special mode. Specifically, the specific lamp is more likely to light in the first special mode or the second special mode when the remaining number of times N is deferred than when the remaining number of times N is not deferred. Further, when the remaining number of times N is deferred and is equal to or less than a predetermined numerical value (for example, the numerical value "200"), compared to the case where the remaining number of times N is deferred and is greater than the predetermined numerical value, the first 2 A specific lamp is likely to light in a special mode. According to the above configuration, it is more interesting to notify whether or not the remaining number of times N is deferred.

(6) In each of the above-described modes, a plurality of types (for example, 6 types) of setting values with different payout rates may be provided. Specifically, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can change the setting values of the gaming machine 1 by performing a predetermined setting change operation. A big win determination table is provided for each set value, and when the set value is changed, the winning probability of the big win changes.

In the above modified example, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect suggesting a set value (hereinafter referred to as a "suggestive effect") can be executed. However, in a configuration that can execute an effect in which one type of set value is specified, there is a possibility that the gambling spirit of the player will be remarkably aroused. Considering the above circumstances, in the suggestive effect, it is reported that there is a high possibility that the setting value is one of a plurality of types of setting values among all the setting values.

For example, assume a configuration in which six types of set values from set value "1" to set value "6" are provided. In the above configuration, there is a suggestive effect suggesting that the set values of odd numbers (1, 3, 5) are more likely than the set values of even numbers (2, 4, 6), and the set values of even numbers are more likely than the set values of even numbers (2, 4, 6). It is conceivable to provide a suggestive effect suggesting that the set value of is likely to be set. In addition, a suggestion effect may be provided to suggest that the set values "4 to 6" (high setting) are more likely than the set values "1 to 3" (low setting). Also, a suggestive effect may be provided in which the set value "6" is strong (but not fixed). When the above modified example is adopted, the number of games up to the second time-saving game state is definitely notified by the remaining number of times image GN, but the set value is not definitely notified by the suggestive effect. However, in this modified example, a suggestive effect in which one set value is determined may be executed.

(7) In each form described above, the time-saving game state to be shifted after the big win game may be changed according to the game state in which the big win is won in addition to the big win pattern. For example, assume a configuration in which a time-saving game state A and a time-saving game state B that is more advantageous than the time-saving game state A (the number of games played is large) are provided. In addition, in the above configuration, when winning a jackpot game in the non-time-saving game state, the probability is about 99% to shift to the time-saving game state A, and the probability is about 1% to shift to the time-saving game state B. In addition, when winning a jackpot game in the time-saving game state A, it shifts to the time-saving game state B with a probability of about 50%, and shifts to the time-saving game state B with a probability of about 50%. Furthermore, when winning the jackpot game in the time-saving game state B, it shifts to the time-saving game state B with a probability of about 100%.

Moreover, in the above modifications, the most advantageous time-saving gaming state may be adopted as the second time-saving gaming state. For example, in the above-described specific example, a configuration in which the time saving game state B is adopted as the second time saving game state is conceivable. However, in the above configuration, if the jackpot is won just before the second time-saving gaming state starts, some players may feel dissatisfied. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to adopt a configuration that suppresses the above inconveniences. A specific example of the configuration will be described below.

In each form described above, a normal mode and an immediately preceding mode are provided as production modes for the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. In the immediately preceding mode of the modified example, an effect for congratulating the winning of the jackpot game shifting to the time-saving game state B is executed, while the effect for blessing the winning of the jackpot game shifting to the time-saving game state A is not executed. . In addition, in the modified example, the effect symbol GA is different between the normal mode and the previous mode, and the background image GH is also different.

For example, the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in the normal mode, and the special remaining number of times image GNx is displayed instead of the remaining number of times image GN in the previous mode. Special remaining number of times image GNx, for example, displays a message "If you endure only the remaining X, the time saving B rush!" Also, in the previous mode, an image in which a friend character and an enemy character face each other is displayed, and an effect in which each character fights is executed in each game. In the immediately preceding mode of the modification, in a game in which a jackpot that shifts to the time-saving game state B is won, an effect in which the ally character wins is executed, and a message "Congratulations!" is displayed. On the other hand, in a game in which a jackpot that shifts to the time-saving game state A is won, an effect is executed in which the teammate character loses, and a message "sorry" is displayed.

The above modified examples also provide the same effects as the above-described embodiments. However, even in this modified example, the variation pattern determination table is not switched according to the number of games during the scenario unset period, as in the above-described embodiments. If each performance in the immediately preceding mode (such as a performance in which characters fight, etc.) is executed without switching the variation pattern determination table from the normal mode, there may be a problem that an appropriate time for executing the performance cannot be secured. Therefore, even in the modified example, it is preferable that the previous mode is not provided during the scenario unset period.

(8) In the above-described first embodiment, the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the non-time-saving game state game that transitions to the second time-saving game state (hereinafter simply “transition game”) is set during the scenario setting period (Tn2 or Tnc) and the scenario unset period (Tn1) were made different. Also, the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the first game in the second time-saving gaming state is made different between the scenario setting period (Ts or Tax) and the scenario non-setting period (Tbx). That is, in the first embodiment, at the start of the second time-saving gaming state (including the transition game, the first game of the second time-saving gaming state), the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to is the scenario setting period and the scenario unset. A different configuration was adopted depending on the period.

However, at the start of the second time-saving gaming state, a common variation pattern determination table may be referred to during the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. For example, in a configuration in which the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referenced in the transition game during the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 may be referenced in the transition game during the scenario set period. In the above configuration, it is sufficient that the variation pattern determination table T that can be referred to in the transition game during the scenario setting period includes the variation pattern determination table Tn1, and a configuration other than the variation pattern determination table Tn1 can be referred to. According to the above configuration, at the start of the second time-saving gaming state, compared to the configuration in which the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to differs between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period, the number of variation pattern determination tables is easy to reduce.

In addition, the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period may have a configuration in which the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to at the start of the second time-saving gaming state is completely common. According to the above configuration, the effect of reducing the number of variation pattern determination tables is particularly remarkable.

(9) In the first embodiment described above, the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the predetermined number of games in the second time-saving gaming state is variably configured between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. For example, between the scenario setting period (Ts, Tax) and the scenario non-setting period (Tbx), the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the first game in the second time-saving gaming state is variable.

However, the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period may have a common configuration of the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the game of the predetermined number of times in the second time-saving gaming state. For example, the variation pattern determination table Tbx that can be referred to in the first game in the second time-saving gaming state may be configured to be common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. In addition, in the scenario setting period and the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the 900th (remaining 100 times) game of the second time saving game state may be common, or the end of the second time saving game state A variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the game may be common.

(10) In each of the above-described forms, the remaining number of times M of the time-saving gaming state may be emphasized. For example, the number of the remaining time reduction image GJ is displayed in white in a game in which the remaining number M is the numerical value "5" or more, and the number of the remaining time reduction image GJ is displayed in red in the game in which the remaining number M is smaller than the numerical value "5". can be considered. In addition, the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state may share the remaining number of times M at which the emphasis of the remaining number of times M is started, or may be made different. For example, in the first time-saving game state (100 times), the number of the remaining time-saving image GJ is displayed in white in games where the remaining number of times M is "5" or more, and the remaining number of times M is less than the number "5". The number of the time saving image GJ is displayed in red. On the other hand, in the second time saving game state (1000 times), the number of the remaining time reduction image GJ is displayed in white in the game where the remaining number M is the numerical value "10" or more, and the remaining time M is displayed in white in the game where the remaining number M is smaller than the numerical value "10". It is good also as a structure which displays the number of the time saving image GJ in red.

(11) In each of the above-described forms, in addition to the opportunity of winning a big win in the big-hit lottery, it may be configured such that a big-hit game can be executed with the opportunity of a game ball passing through a specific area. In addition, in the above configuration, it may be a configuration in which a game ball can win a prize in a specific area in a small winning game (so-called 1 type 2 type game machine may be used). That is, when a small winning game is won and a game ball enters a specific area in a small winning game, a big winning game may be executed. In the above modification, the remaining number of times N is not initialized when the small hit is won, but the remaining number of times N is initialized when the game ball enters the specific area. In this case, it is possible to move game balls to the specific area in the small winning game and disable the game balls to enter the specific area after the small winning game is over. A specific area opening/closing member (not shown) may be provided.

In addition, in the modification, the high probability game state is not provided, and the probability of winning a big hit when the game ball wins in the first start port 13 and when the game ball wins in the second start port 14 are common. Also, the probability of winning a small win when a game ball enters the second start port 14 is higher than the probability of winning a big win, and when the game ball enters the first start port 13, the small win is not won. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 14.例文帳に追加In the above configuration, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state.

In the gaming machine of the modification, when the number of reservations of the second special figure (hereinafter referred to as "remaining reservation") is 1 or more when the time saving game state ends, in the game after the time saving game state ends There is also a high probability that a small hit will be won. Specifically, in the non-time-saving game state immediately after the time-saving game state ends, it is possible to execute a big hit game with a high probability over four games at maximum.

In the above configuration, the configuration may be such that the above-described first end effect (see FIG. 45(a)) is performed during the period in which the game is performed with the remaining pending. In addition, the first end effect is executed in the period in which the game is executed with the remaining hold immediately after the first time saving game state ends, and the game is executed in the remaining hold immediately after the second time saving game state ends. A configuration in which the ending effect is not executed may be adopted. That is, the term "at the end of the second game state (at the end)" of the present invention includes a period during which the game is executed with the remaining hold. In addition, depending on the number of games played in the second time-saving game state, there is a case where the probability that the jackpot game is not won in the second time-saving game state is about 0% (the probability of winning is about 100%). In the above case, even if the end effect is not executed in the second time-saving game state, it is rare that the final game in the second time-saving game state is executed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel dissatisfied due to the end effect not being executed in the final game in the second time-saving game state.

In addition, in one type and two types of gaming machines, the transition determination processing (S224 in FIG. 32, S242 in FIG. 35(a)) for updating the remaining number of times N is similar to the above-described first embodiment. A configuration executed after (S187 in FIG. 32) is preferable. According to the above configuration, when the game ball does not enter the specific area in the small hit game process, while updating the remaining number of times N in the transition determination process, when the game ball enters the specific area, the big hit game is executed, the migration determination process can be omitted. Moreover, in one type and two types of gaming machines, it may be configured to shift from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state via a gap game. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the number of times the gap game is played is four. Also, in the gap game described above, it is preferable to have a configuration in which an effect different from that in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode is executed.

(12) In each of the above-described forms, when shifting from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state via a gap game, the above-described left-handed image GL may not be displayed. Specifically, when the game is played in a normal procedure, the production mode is the time saving mode B when shifting from the first time saving game state to the second time saving game state via the gap game. In the above case, it is preferable that the left-handed image GL is not displayed when shifting to the gap game (non-time-saving game state).

(13) In each form described above, the right-handed lamp 28 is extinguished in the gap game. Therefore, even if the performance mode before and after the gap game does not change to the time saving mode B, it is preferable that the right-handed image GS is not displayed in the gap game.

(14) In each of the above-described forms, a process for determining whether the condition for starting the second time-saving gaming state is satisfied (hereinafter “first determination processing”), and other conditions for the transition of the gaming state (for example, high The process of determining whether or not the probability game state start condition) has been established (hereinafter referred to as "second determination process") may be included in a common module or may be included in separate modules.

By the way, conventionally, in the jackpot game, a predetermined number of times (for example, A game machine (so-called "V-ST machine") that can shift to a high probability (time saving) game state of "120 times") is known. The present invention may be applied to the game machines described above. In the above gaming machine, in each game, the update process of the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state and the process of determining the remaining number of times N after the update (hereinafter "first determination process"), and the high probability game state is A process of updating the remaining number of times until the end and a process of determining the remaining number of times after updating (hereinafter referred to as "second determination process") are executed. In the above configuration, the configuration in which the second determination process is executed after the first determination process is preferable. Assume a configuration in which the first determination process is performed after the second determination process. In the above configuration, in the high-probability game state, there is a problem that the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is updated.

(15) When adopting the present invention in the above-mentioned V-ST machine, even if V winning, which is the condition for shifting to the high probability game state, could not be made in the big hit game, then V winning It is preferable to shift to the time-saving game state with the same number of games as in the case. For example, if V wins in a big hit game, in a configuration that shifts to a high probability time saving game state 120 times, even if V does not win in the big hit game, a configuration that shifts to a low probability time saving game state 120 times is conceivable. .

In addition, in the modification, it is preferable that the effect mode after the big hit game is common regardless of the presence or absence of V winning in the big win game. In the above configuration, the effect mode after the big hit game is common in the case of shifting to the high-probability time-saving gaming state and the case of shifting to the low-probability time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that, in the above modifications, each screen displayed is common in the case of power failure occurring in the high probability time saving game state and recovery and the case of power failure occurring in the low probability time saving game state and recovering A configuration in which the production mode after returning is common is preferable. That is, before and after the power is turned off, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the presence or absence of the V winning in the immediately preceding jackpot game cannot be detected from the screen. In addition, also in the said modification, a player may select the production|presentation mode in a time-saving game state like 1st Embodiment. Further, when the power is cut off in the jackpot game, and when the power is cut off in the time saving game state, the time saving game state after restoration may be controlled to the common production mode.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, the demo screen is displayed when the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined period of time.

(17) In each of the above-described forms, at the start of the second time-saving game state, the shield image GF, the rush image GT, and the right-handed image GS3 (image at start) are displayed. The timing at which the start image is displayed may be changed as appropriate.

FIG. 66(a) is a diagram for explaining the display timing of the start image in the modification. FIG. 66(a) shows the period during which each starting image is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 66 (a), the transition game to shift to the second time reduction game state, the confirmation period in the transition game, and the period in which the start image is displayed in the first game of the second time reduction game state are shown. be FIG. 66(a) shows the start time tx of the second time-saving gaming state. In the modification, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, the second time-saving game state is started when the fixed period of the transition game has ended.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), the display of the shielding image GF is started immediately after the transition game is started. In addition, the shielding image GF is continuously displayed until the fixed period starts, and is hidden at the start of the fixed period. As shown in FIG. 66(a), a rushing image GT is displayed during the determination period of the transition game. After that, when the determination period ends and the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the rush image GT is hidden and a right-handed shot image GS3 (large right-handed shot image GS) is displayed. The above right shot image GS3 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then disappears.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, the fixed period in each game is about 0.5 seconds. Temporarily, in the configuration in which the determination period of the transition game is about 0.5 seconds in the modified example, there is an inconvenience that the time during which the rush image GT is displayed is too short. Considering the above circumstances, in the modification, a configuration is adopted in which the fixed period is extended in the transition game from the game immediately before the transition game. Specifically, the fixed period of the transition game is extended to about 5 seconds. According to the above configuration, the above inconvenience is suppressed.

However, in the above-described first embodiment, in order to suppress the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game, the time of one game (fluctuation period + fixed period) does not change according to the number of games during the scenario unset period. It was adopted. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable that the fixed period is extended in the transition game during the scenario set period, while the fixed period does not change in the transition game during the scenario unset period.

FIGS. 66(b-1) and 66(b-2) are diagrams for explaining the display period of the image at the start in another modification. In the specific examples of FIGS. 66(b-1) and 66(b-2), it is assumed that the transition game ends at time tx and shifts to the second time-saving game state. Specifically, FIG. 66(b-1) assumes a case where the number of reservations is 1 or more at time tx. On the other hand, FIG. 66(b-2) assumes that the pending number is 0 at time tx. Details will be described below, but in the modification, the period during which the start image is displayed changes depending on whether or not there is a pending number at the start time tx of the second time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 66 (b-1), when the number of pending at time tx is 1 or more, the first game in the second time-saving gaming state is started immediately after time tx. In the above case, the right-handed shot image GS3 is displayed for a predetermined time immediately after the second time-saving game state is started. After that, a shielding image GF is displayed for a predetermined time, and then a rushing image GT is displayed. The rush image GT described above is displayed for a predetermined period of time.

As shown in FIG. 66(b-2), when the number of reservations is 0 at time tx, the customer waiting state is started immediately after the second time-saving game state is started. In the above case, when the customer waiting state is started, the right shot image GS3 is displayed. In the modification, the hitting right image GS3 is displayed until the customer waiting state ends, and when the first game in the second time-saving game state starts, the hitting right image GS3 disappears. After that, the shielding image GF is displayed for a predetermined time, and the rushing image GT is displayed. The rush image GT is displayed for a predetermined period of time. As can be understood from the above description, in the modified example, the timing at which the right hitting image GS3 is displayed changes depending on the presence or absence of the number of holds at time tx.

In addition, in the above modified example, the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed from the start of the customer waiting state until the second special figure changes. That is, when the first special figure changes, the display of the right-handed image GS3 may be continued.

FIG. 66(c) is a diagram for explaining the display period of the image at the start in another modified example. In the specific example of FIG. 66(c), it is assumed that the transition game ends at the time point tx and shifts to the second time-saving game state. Also, in the above specific example, it is assumed that the number of reservations at time tx is zero. As shown in FIG. 66(c), in the modification, a shielding image GF is displayed in the transition game, and then a rushing image GT is displayed. Further, when the transition game ends and the customer waiting state starts, a right-handed image GS3 is displayed.

In addition, at the start time tx of the second time-saving gaming state, if the number of reservations is 1 or more, a customer waiting state is provided from the end of the transition game to the start of the first game of the second time-saving gaming state. do not have. In the above case, there is an inconvenience that the right shot image GS3 cannot be displayed. Considering the above circumstances, in the modification, if the number of reservations is 1 or more at the start time tx of the second time-saving gaming state, the reservation is invalidated (set the number of reservations to 0). may be adopted. In the above configuration, the customer waiting state is always started when the second time-saving game state is started. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed. In addition, the configuration in which the number of reservations is set to 0 at the start of the second time-saving gaming state is not limited to the modification, and may be adopted in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and other modifications.

As shown in FIG. 66(c), when the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the right shot image GS3 is hidden. In addition, in the above modified example, the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed from the start of the customer waiting state until the second special figure changes. That is, when the first special figure changes, the display of the right-handed image GS3 may be continued.

Furthermore, the timing at which the start image is displayed is not limited to the above modifications. For example, the shielding image GF and the rushing image GT may be displayed in the transition game, and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. Similarly, the shielding image GF is displayed in the transition game, after that, the right-handed image GS3 is displayed in the fixed period of the game or in the customer waiting state, and the entry image GT is displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. may be configured. The entry image GT may be displayed in the transition game, and then the blocking image GF and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed during the determination period of the game or in the customer waiting state. The entry image GT may be displayed in the transition game, then the shield image GF may be displayed during the determination period of the game or in the customer waiting state, and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. good.

The shielding image GF, the rushing image GT, and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed during the finalization period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state. The blocking image GF and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed during the finalization period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the entry image GT may be displayed during the first game in the second time-saving game state. The shield image GF and the rush image GT may be displayed during the fixed period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed during the first game in the second time-saving game state. A configuration may be adopted in which the shielding image GF is displayed during the fixed period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the entry image GT and the hitting right image GS3 are displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. The entry image GT and the hitting right image GS3 may be displayed during the fixed period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the shielding image GF may be displayed during the first game in the second time-saving game state.

The right-handed image GS3 may be displayed during the fixed period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the entry image GT and the shielding image GF may be displayed during the first game in the second time-saving game state. The entry image GT may be displayed during the fixed period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and the right-handed image GS3 and the blocking image GF may be displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. Furthermore, in each of the above modifications, the display order of the image at the start displayed in the transition game, the display order of the image at the start displayed in the confirmation period of the transition game or in the customer waiting state, and in the game in the second time saving game state The display order of the start-time images to be displayed may be changed as appropriate.

In the above modified example, two or more starting images may be displayed side by side. In addition, in the configuration in which the shielding image GF is displayed in the customer waiting state, it is preferable that the shielding image GF is displayed during the customer waiting state, and the shielding image GF is hidden when the second special figure starts to change. be.

(18) In each of the above-described forms, a configuration is adopted in which the display of all the start images (GF, GT, GS3) is completed by the time the first game in the second time-saving game state ends. However, the image at the start may be displayed until the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the time for which the start image is displayed is predetermined, and the game can be played a plurality of times before the time elapses.

(19) In each of the above-described forms, in the game at the start of the second time-saving game state (transition game, the first game of the second time-saving game state), the start image (shielding image GF, rush image GT and right-handed image GS3 (part or all of GS3) was displayed, and then the performance symbol GA was stop-displayed. Specifically, in the game at the start of the second time-saving game state (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "game at start"), if the result of the big hit lottery is a loss, the image at the start is displayed and then lost. The production pattern GA corresponding to is stopped and displayed.

Assuming that the jackpot game is won in the starting game, the starting image (part or all) that is originally displayed in the starting game is not displayed. With the above configuration, there may be a problem that whether or not the big winning lottery in the start game is successful can be detected by the presence or absence of the display of the start image. In consideration of the above circumstances, the modified example employs a configuration in which the image at the start can be displayed regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery in the game at the start.

For example, a case is assumed in which the modified example is adopted in the above-described first embodiment. In the first embodiment, in the start game (the first game in the second time-saving game state), the screen M1 is displayed, then the shielding image GF is displayed, and the rush effect is executed (the rush image GT is displayed). , a mode selection effect is executed, and a right-handed shot image GS3 is displayed (see FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b)). Further, after the right shot image GS3 is displayed, the screen is switched to the second time saving game state screen M7 (see FIG. 17(a)), and the effect image GA is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the result of the big win lottery is a loss, the performance symbol GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed.

In this modification, in the first embodiment described above, the screen M1 is displayed regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery at the start of the game. Execution is executed, and a right hitting image GS3 is displayed. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, then the performance symbol GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed (similar to the first embodiment). In addition, in the modification, when the big win game is won in the starting game, the effect symbol GA corresponding to the big win is stopped and displayed after the right hitting image GS3 is displayed. For example, when switching to the screen M7 during time saving after the right shot image GS3 is displayed, the effect movable body 32 moves to the appearance position. Thereafter, when the performance movable body 32 moves to the retracted position, the performance symbol GA corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed. That is, when a big win is won in the game at the start, the performance symbols GA corresponding to the big win are stop-displayed at once without intervention of the ready-to-win performance. However, in the start game, after a series of start images are displayed, after executing an effect (reach effect, etc.) that can be executed in other time-saving mode B games, similar to other time-saving mode B games , a configuration in which a big hit is reported.

In the modified example described above, the predetermined start image is displayed regardless of the result of the big win lottery. Therefore, the result of the big win lottery is difficult to detect depending on whether or not the start image is displayed. In the game at the start, it is preferable that the ready-to-win effect is not executed regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery. Supposing that the ready-to-win effect is executed in the start game, the ready-to-win effect is started through the above-described entry effect and mode selection effect. Therefore, the inconvenience that the game at the start is excessively prolonged is assumed. The configuration in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed at the start of the game has the advantage of suppressing the above inconvenience. Alternatively, in the starting game, regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery, the ready-to-win effect may be executed at a lower probability than other games in the time saving mode B. However, in the modification, there may be a case where the starting image is not displayed in the game at the start of winning the jackpot lottery (for example, when the premium effect is won).

Further, in the game at the start of winning the big hit, a part of the image at the start displayed in the game at the start of the loss may be displayed and the other part may not be displayed. For example, in the game at the start of losing, assume a configuration in which the shield image GF, the rush image GT, and the right-handed image GS3 are displayed in this order. In the above configuration, it is conceivable that the shield image GF is displayed in the same manner as in the losing start game, and the entry image GT and the right shot image GS3 are not displayed in the game at the start of winning the big win.

That is, without going through the jackpot, it is possible to control the time saving (second time saving game state, third time saving game state) for a predetermined period, and it is possible to execute a rush production, and when the first time fluctuation of the time saving is lost executes the rush performance in the variation, and does not execute the rush performance in the variation in the case of the time-saving first-time variation jackpot.
In addition, without going through the jackpot, it is possible to control the time reduction (second time reduction game state, third time reduction game state) for a predetermined period, and it is possible to execute a rush effect, and when the first time change of the time reduction is lost may execute the rush performance in the first mode in the variation, and execute the rush performance in the second mode with lower appeal than the first mode in the variation when the first variation of the time saving is a big hit. . As the second mode, for example, compared to the first mode, the execution time of the rush effect is shorter, and the effect displayed in the rush effect is less.
In this case, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of loss that the game ends immediately after entering the second time-saving game state (third time-saving game state), and to improve the amusement of the game. becomes possible.

(20) In each of the above-described forms, the numbers in the number-of-remaining-numbers image GN are subtracted and displayed in each game. In the above configuration, in a game in which a big win is won, the subtraction display of the numbers of the remaining number of times image GN may be omitted as the remaining number of times N is not decremented. Similarly, in a game in which a big hit is won, the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state is not subtracted, so that the subtraction display of the number of the time saving remaining image GJ may be omitted.

However, in the case where the above configuration is adopted, in the configuration in which the number of the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted and displayed immediately after the game is started, the result of the jackpot lottery can be detected by the presence or absence of the subtraction display immediately after the game is started. Inconvenience may occur. Specifically, immediately after the start of the game, the number of the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted for the game in which the big win is won, and the number of the remaining number of times image GN is not displayed by subtraction for the losing game. At that point, you will know that you have won the jackpot. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to display the numbers of the remaining number of times image GN in a subtracted manner regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery (regardless of whether the remaining number of times N is subtracted or not). Similarly, regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery (regardless of whether the remaining number of times M is subtracted or not), the configuration in which the number of the time saving remaining image GJ is subtracted and displayed is preferable.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, one type of music corresponding to time saving mode A may be provided, or a plurality of types may be provided. Also, one type of music corresponding to the time saving mode B may be provided, or a plurality of types may be provided. For example, in the first embodiment, in the time saving mode B in the first time saving game state and the time saving mode B in the second time saving game state, a common song may be played, or different songs may be played. may In addition, the time saving mode A in the first time saving game state and the time saving mode B in the second time saving game state may have a common configuration or a different configuration.

(22) In each of the above-described forms, in the time saving mode A of the first time saving game state, the variation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to in the early game, and the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to in the final game. In the above configuration, when the power is turned off in the time saving mode A, it is preferable to have a common configuration for images that can be displayed at the time of restoration regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table (Ta1, Ta2). In the second time-saving game state, even if a configuration is adopted in which the variation pattern determination table T is switched between the beginning and the end of the game, the power is turned off at the beginning of the second time-saving game state, and the power is turned off at the end of the second time-saving game state. A configuration in which the image that can be displayed at the time of recovery is common is preferable.

(23) In each form described above, the table scenario S may be changed when a small prize is won.

(24) In each of the above-described forms, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving gaming state may be configured so that the manager of the gaming machine 1 can check it at any time. For example, in the first embodiment described above, the remaining number of times N is kept secret during the period in which the gaming machine 1 can execute a game immediately after the power is turned on. In the above configuration, information for specifying the current value of the remaining number of times N (hereinafter referred to as "remaining number of times information") is displayed by operating an operation unit provided at a position where the player cannot operate. may be adopted. For example, the main control board 110 can be considered as a position for providing the above-described operation unit. In the above configuration, for example, a configuration in which the remaining number of times information is displayed on the base display 114 and/or the image display device 21 can be adopted. Further, as a position for providing the operation unit, for example, the effect control board 120 can be considered. In the above configuration, for example, a configuration in which the remaining number of times information is displayed on the image display device 21 may be adopted.

Further, as the operation unit described above, a new dedicated operation unit may be employed, or an existing operation unit may be employed. For example, the clear button 30 may be adopted as the operation unit. In the above configuration, when the clear button 30 is operated during a period other than the period in which the clear operation can be accepted, the remaining number of times information is displayed. Further, it may be configured such that the remaining number of times information is displayed according to the operation of the cross key 40 and the effect button 8 . In the above configuration, when the cross key 40 or the effect button 8 is operated in a predetermined manner during a period in which the operation of the cross key 40 and the effect button 8 by the player is invalid (for example, the period immediately after the power is turned on), the remaining A configuration in which the number of times information is displayed is conceivable. As with the remaining count information, it may be configured such that the administrator of the gaming machine can confirm at any time whether or not the activated period has expired. In addition, both the remaining number of times information and whether or not the activated period has expired may be configured so that the administrator of the gaming machine can confirm at any time.

(25) In each form described above, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in each time-saving gaming state can be appropriately changed. For example, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the second time-saving gaming state may be made more disadvantageous than the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the first time-saving gaming state. Specifically, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the first time-saving gaming state is more advantageous than the non-time-saving gaming state, while the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the second time-saving gaming state is the non-time-saving game The configuration may be substantially the same (slightly advantageous) as the state.

As a specific example of the above modification, for example, a jackpot pattern A and a jackpot pattern B are provided, and after the jackpot game started with the jackpot pattern A stopped and displayed, the game state is low probability, and the jackpot pattern B is stopped. After the end of the big hit started, it shifts to a high probability game state of 30 times (so-called "ST machine"). The probability of winning a big hit is about 1/300 in the low-probability game state and about 1/100 in the high-probability game state.

Further, when the jackpot pattern A is stop-displayed in the time saving game state (the first time saving game state or the second time saving game state), it shifts to the time saving game state 30 times after the big win game ends. The above 30 time-saving game states are low-probability game states. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol B is stop-displayed in the time-saving game state, the game shifts to the time-saving game state for 60 times after the jackpot game ends. Among the above 60 time-saving game states, 30 times in the first half are in the high-probability game state, and 30 times in the latter half are in the low-probability game state. That is, when a jackpot is won in the time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state ends after the low-probability non-time-saving game state is executed up to 30 times regardless of the type of the big-win pattern.

However, when the jackpot pattern A is stop-displayed in the non-time-saving game state, the state shifts to the time-saving game state of 1000 times after the jackpot ends. Further, even when the big hit symbol B is stopped and displayed in the non-time-saving game state, the state is shifted to the time-saving game state of 1000 times after the big win is finished. Further, when the jackpot pattern is stop-displayed in the time-saving game state of 1000 times, regardless of the type of the jackpot pattern, the state of the time-saving game of 1000 times is resumed after the jackpot game ends. The opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the first time-saving game state is more advantageous than the non-time-saving game state.

In addition, the initial value of the remaining number N of the second time-saving game state is a numerical value "30", and when 30 times of games (losing) are executed in the low-probability game state, the state then shifts to the second time-saving game state. . The opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the second time-saving gaming state is substantially common to the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the non-time-saving gaming state. In addition, the second time-saving game state continues until a maximum of 500 games are executed, and then shifts to a non-time-saving game state.

In the above modification, 500 times of the second time-saving game state is started immediately after the 30 times of the above-described low probability non-time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) ends. However, if a jackpot is won in the above time-saving game state, it is not possible to shift to the time-saving game state for 1000 times. Therefore, the player does not win the jackpot until the second time-saving game state is completed and the state is shifted to the low-probability non-time-saving game state (until the game is completed 530 times after the state is shifted to the low-probability game state). play for the purpose of

However, in the modification, in the jackpot lottery of the non-time-saving game state, there is a case where the "third time-saving" is elected. The winning probability of the third short time is, for example, about 1/300. When the third time saving is won, the time saving pattern is stop-displayed in the special figure, and the game state shifts to the third time saving game state. However, when the time saving pattern is stop-displayed in the time saving game state, the third time saving is not started. Like the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state continues over a maximum of 500 games, and the opening mode of the second starting port 14 is substantially common to the non-time-saving game state. Also, when a big win is won in the third time-saving game state, the state is shifted to the first time-saving game state of 30 times or 60 times in the same manner as when a big win is won in other time-saving game states. In the above configuration, in the non-time-saving game state, the player plays the game for the purpose of winning the jackpot before the third time-saving game.

According to the above modified example, it is possible to provide the player with new playability. It should be noted that a plurality of types of time-saving symbols may be provided, and the number of games in the third time-saving game state may be changed according to the types of time-saving symbols.

(26) In each of the above-described forms, the screen that can be displayed during the game period (for example, the screen shown in FIG. 23(b)) is displayed immediately after the restoration screen is displayed when power is restored. However, in the case of the customer waiting state immediately after the restoration screen is displayed, a screen (such as a demo screen) that is displayed only in the customer waiting state may be displayed.

(27) In each of the above-described modes, the configuration may be such that the customer waiting screen can be displayed even in the time-saving gaming state. However, it is preferable that the installation notification image GK is not displayed on the customer waiting screen in the time-saving game state.

(28) In each of the above-described modes, the average fluctuation time of the special figure may be shorter in the immediately preceding mode than in the normal mode. Specifically, in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery, the average time of the variation pattern of the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tn2 (immediate mode) is referred to is shorter than the game in which the variation pattern determination table Tn1 (normal mode) is referred to. Configuration is preferred. In the above configuration, when the normal mode is shifted to the previous mode, the average time of each game is shortened. That is, the average time of each game is shortened in the period immediately before the start of the second time-saving gaming state.

For example, assume a contrast in which the average fluctuation time of the special figure does not change between the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode. In the above comparison, the immediately preceding mode may be prolonged depending on the determined variation pattern. In the above case, the player who wants to start the second time-saving gaming state early may feel stress. In the above-mentioned modification, since the average fluctuation time of the special figure in the immediately preceding mode is shorter than in the normal mode, there is an advantage that the above disadvantages can be suppressed, for example, compared to the comparison.

(29) In each form described above, the execution frequency of each effect in the normal mode and the previous mode can be changed as appropriate. By the way, some players may wish to shift to the second time-saving gaming state rather than winning the jackpot in the immediately preceding mode. The players described above may feel annoyed by the performance with a high degree of expectation for a big win (hereinafter referred to as "high expectation level performance") in the immediately preceding mode. That is, there arises a problem that the high-expectation effect, which is originally expected by the player, feels troublesome.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in a game in which a big hit lottery is lost, a configuration may be adopted in which the high expectation level performance is less likely to be executed in the immediately preceding mode than in the normal mode. For example, a configuration is assumed in which a mini-game effect in which the effect button 8 is instructed to be operated in a predetermined manner is provided as a high-expectation effect. In the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the mini-game effect is less likely to be selected in the immediately preceding mode than in the normal mode in a game in which the winning lottery is lost. According to the modification, the above-described inconvenience is suppressed. However, a configuration may be adopted in which high-expectation-level effects other than the mini-game effects are less likely to be selected in the immediately preceding mode.

(30) In each of the above-described forms, a first jackpot game with a first number of rounds (for example, 10 rounds) and a second jackpot game with a second number of rounds (for example, 4 rounds) smaller than the first number of rounds It is also possible to provide a configuration in which the degree of expectation for winning the first big hit game is suggested by the variation pattern. For example, in the second time-saving game state, in the game in which the first jackpot game is won, the immediate hit effect is less likely to be executed than in the game in which the second jackpot game is won.

(31) In each of the above-described forms, a configuration may be adopted in which the type of time-saving gaming state is appropriately notified. For example, the background image GH may be changed in each time-saving game state. Also, in each time-saving game state, the BGM may be different, or the effect symbol GA may be different. The timing at which the type of the time-saving gaming state is notified can be appropriately set. For example, when each time-saving gaming state is started, a configuration in which the type of time-saving gaming state is notified can be considered.

As a specific example of the modification, the small symbol Ga may be displayed in the time saving rush effect even when any time saving game state is started. In the above configuration, the small pattern Ga corresponding to the big hit pattern is displayed in the time saving rush effect when the first time saving game state is started. In addition, in the time saving rush effect when the second time saving game state is started, a small pattern Ga corresponding to the lost pattern is displayed, and in the time saving rush effect when the third time saving game state is started, it corresponds to the time saving pattern. A small symbol Ga is displayed. Therefore, there is an advantage that the player can grasp the type of the time-saving game state to be started by the small symbol Ga displayed in the time-saving rush effect.

(32) In each of the above-described forms, in the time-saving rush effect in the second time-saving game state, the performance symbol GA is hidden, the small symbol Ga, the pending image GB, and the fourth symbol GC are displayed, and the rush image GT is displayed. may be displayed. In the above configuration, there is an advantage that the visibility of the entry image GT is improved and the time reduction rush effect in the first time reduction game state and the time reduction rush effect in the second time reduction game state are easily distinguished. In addition, it is sufficient if it is possible to distinguish between the time saving rush effect of the first time saving game state and the time saving rush effect of the second time saving game state, and the image displayed in the time saving rush effect of the second time saving game state is the effect image GA, small Any of the symbol Ga, the reserved image GB, and the fourth symbol GC may be used, and at least one of the symbols may be displayed. Similarly, in the time-saving rush production in the third time-saving game state, the performance symbol GA may be hidden, the small symbol Ga, the reserved image GB, and the fourth symbol GC may be displayed, and then the rush image GT may be displayed.

(33) In each form described above, the result image GP may be displayed when the second time-saving gaming state ends. The above configuration has the advantage that it is easier for the player to recognize that the second time-saving gaming state has ended, compared to the configuration in which the result image GP is not displayed when the second time-saving gaming state ends. Similarly, the result image GP may be displayed when the third time-saving gaming state ends. The above configuration has the advantage that it is easier for the player to recognize that the third time-saving game state has ended, compared to the configuration in which the result image GP is not displayed when the third time-saving game state ends.

(34) In each of the above-described forms, in the gaming state in which the time-saving design is effective (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state), when the time-saving design is stopped, a special production design GA (hereinafter "time-saving production design") is stopped and displayed. is preferable. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the time saving pattern is invalid, it is preferable to stop and display the performance pattern GA corresponding to the loss when the time saving pattern is stopped.

However, in a gaming state in which the time saving design is invalid, when the time saving design is stop-displayed, the time-saving performance design may be stop-displayed. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the time-saving performance symbols that are stop-displayed in the game state in which the time-saving patterns are invalid and the time-saving performance symbols that are stop-displayed in the game state in which the time-saving patterns are valid are different.

(35) The symbol combination corresponding to the time-saving symbol is not limited to the above examples. For example, assume a configuration in which a "special symbol" different from the numbers "1 to 9" is included in the production symbol GA. In the above configuration, for example, "7, special symbol, 7" may be adopted as the symbol combination corresponding to the time-saving symbol.

In the above modified example, it is preferable to stop and display the special symbol last among the three symbols. Also, as the special symbol, a symbol that displays a character (for example, a character string "time saving") indicating that the game is to be shifted to the time saving game state is preferably adopted. Furthermore, it is preferable that the special symbol is not included in any symbol combination other than the symbol combination corresponding to the time-saving symbol.

In the above modified example, during the period in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed, the special symbols are not included in the performance symbols GA to be variably displayed, and in the period after the ready-to-win performance is executed, the special symbols may be displayed. In the above configuration, in a game in which the time-saving symbols are not stopped and displayed, the special symbols may be changed and displayed. With the above configuration, even in a game in which the time-saving patterns are not stop-displayed, it is possible to improve the degree of expectation that the time-saving patterns are stop-displayed. All of the above configurations may be adopted, or a part thereof may be adopted.

(36) In each form described above, in the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state (the final game of the low-probability non-time-saving game state), the normal effect symbol GA corresponding to the loss is displayed. Instead of the above configuration, in the game to shift to the second time-saving game state, it may be configured to display a special effect symbol GA. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which the performance symbol GA displaying the characters "Time saving game start!" However, the special production pattern GA displayed in the game that transitions to the second time-saving gaming state is the production pattern GA corresponding to the time-saving design, the production design GA corresponding to the big hit design, and the production design GA corresponding to the small winning design. Distinct (different) configurations are preferred. That is, when entering the second time-saving game state, a different effect pattern from the normal losing effect pattern may be stopped and displayed.

(37) In each of the above modes, the period during which the result image GP is displayed can be changed as appropriate. For example, when the final game of the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) ends, the result image GP starts to be displayed, and then the second pending number becomes 0. After the subtraction is performed and the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped, the result image GP may be hidden. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the result image GP may be continuously displayed until the first special symbol display device 20 can start the first variable display.

(38) In each of the above-described modes, a configuration may be adopted in which no restriction period is provided before transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state. In the above configuration, the determination information acquired when the game ball wins to the first start port 13 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "first determination information") is withheld in the second time-saving gaming state (second Even if it can be determined in the two-hour-saving game state), the suspension change effect based on the first determination information is executed in the non-time-saving game state.

However, in the configuration in which the fact that the right to win the jackpot is held continues to be reported in the second time-saving gaming state, the player's gambling spirit may be excessively aroused. Therefore, in a configuration in which no restriction period is provided before shifting to the second time-saving game state, a configuration in which the pending change effect in the pending image GB is canceled when shifting to the second time-saving game state is preferable. In the above configuration, the hold image GB displayed in the special mode in the non-time-saving game state is displayed in the normal mode in the second time-saving game state. In addition, you may employ|adopt the structure which displays the holding|maintenance image GB currently displayed in the special mode in the 3rd time-saving game state in the normal mode in the 3rd time-saving game state just before shifting to the 3rd time-saving game state.

(39) In each of the above-described forms, a configuration may be provided in which a restricted period is provided before transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state. Specifically, it is conceivable that the period from when it is determined in the preliminary determination that the game is won in the third time saving to when the game state moves to the third time saving gaming state is set as a limit period.

(40) In the above-described embodiment, when shifting to the second time-saving gaming state, regardless of whether the first game of the second time-saving gaming state is executed (regardless of the number of reservations) right-handed A starting image GR was displayed. In addition, regardless of whether or not the first game in the second time-saving game state is executed, a sound instructing to start the right-handed game is output, and the BGM of the second time-saving game state is output.

Instead of the above configuration, on the condition that the first game in the second time-saving game state is executed, the right-handed start image GR is displayed, and a sound instructing to start the right-handed game is output. A configuration in which BGM in the second time-saving gaming state is output may be employed. Further, on the condition that the first game in the third time-saving gaming state is executed, a right-handing start image GR is displayed, a voice instructing to start the right-handing game is output, and the third time-saving gaming state is executed. BGM may be output.

(41) In the above-described embodiment, when transitioning from the second time-saving gaming state to the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, regardless of whether the first game in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is executed (holding number The left-handed start image GL was displayed regardless of the presence or absence of . In addition, regardless of whether or not the first game in the low-probability non-time-saving game state is executed, a sound instructing to start the left-handed game is output.

Instead of the above configuration, on the condition that the first game in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is executed, a left-handed start image GL is displayed, and a voice instructing to start a left-handed game is output. It may be configured to be Further, when shifting from the third time-saving gaming state to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, on the condition that the first game in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is executed, the left-handed start image GL is displayed, and the left-handed game is played. A configuration may be adopted in which a voice instructing to start is outputted.

(42) In each of the above-described forms, in addition to the opportunity of winning a big hit in the big win lottery, it may be configured such that a big win game can be executed (so-called, one type and two types of games) when a game ball passes through a specific area. machine). In the above specific areas, game balls can be won in small winning games. That is, when a small winning game is won and a game ball enters a specific area in a small winning game, a big winning game is executed. In the above modified example, the accumulation number m is not initialized when the small hit is won, but the accumulation number m is initialized when the game ball enters the specific area.

In the above modified example, the winning probability of the big hit is when the high probability game state is not provided and when the game ball wins in the first start port 13 and when the game ball wins in the second start port 14 Common. Also, the probability of winning a small win when a game ball enters the second starting port 14 is higher than the probability of winning a big win. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 14.例文帳に追加In the above configuration, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state.

In the modification, a second time-saving gaming state may be provided. In the above configuration, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of times of actuation n, the state is substantially shifted to a high probability state of the big hit game. Moreover, in the said modification, you may provide a 3rd time saving game state. In the above configuration, when the time-saving design stops, it shifts to a high-probability state of the jackpot game substantially.

(43) In each of the above-described forms, the number of times N3 of time saving in the third time saving game state may be changed according to the game state in which the time saving design is stop-displayed. For example, when the time saving pattern is stop-displayed in the time-saving game state, the time-saving number N3 may be longer than when the time-saving pattern is stop-displayed in the non-time-saving game state. Further, when the time saving pattern is stop-displayed in the time-saving game state, the number of times of time-saving N3 may be smaller than when the time-saving pattern is stop-displayed in the non-time-saving game state.

(44) In each form described above, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbols in the time-saving gaming state can be appropriately changed. For example, the variation patterns between the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state may be different. In addition, the variation patterns between the first time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state may be different, and the variation patterns between the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state may be different.

(45) In each of the above-described forms, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations n in the third time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is activated, it may be configured to notify that effect. Temporarily, when the second time-saving game state is activated in the third time-saving game state, in the configuration in which the opening state of the second start port 14 does not change, there is an inconvenience that the player does not know that the second time-saving game state has been activated. is assumed. According to the modification, the above inconvenience is suppressed. For example, in the third time-saving game state, by displaying the cumulative number of times m, the presence or absence of transition to the second time-saving game state is substantially notified. It should be noted that the fact that the second time-saving gaming state has been activated is notified at an appropriate timing. For example, when the third time-saving gaming state ends, it may be configured to notify that the second time-saving gaming state was operating.

(46) In each of the above-described forms, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the third time-saving gaming state may be different for each time-saving design. In the above configuration, compared to the configuration in which the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the third time-saving game state does not change according to the time-saving pattern, the game is more interesting.

(47) In each of the above-described forms, the pending change effect is shown as an example of the specific effect, but the specific effect is not limited to the pending change effect. For example, a specific effect may be adopted in which a predetermined lamp in the gaming machine 1 emits light in a specific manner. Also, a specific effect in which a special image is displayed on the image display device 31 may be employed. For example, as the specific effect, a effect of displaying a character image of "extreme heat zone" can be considered. With the above configuration, the character image "Super Heat Zone" is more likely to be displayed when a big hit is determined in advance than when a loss is determined in advance.

(48) In each of the above-described forms, the pending change effect (specific effect) that can be determined may be different between when the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit and when the result of the preliminary determination is the third time reduction. For example, the final special mode of the pending image GB that can be determined may be different between when the result of the prior determination is a big hit and when the result of the prior determination is the third time saving. As the above configuration, if the result of the prior determination is a big hit, the pending image GB may change to a rainbow color, but if the result of the prior determination is the third time reduction, the pending image GB is configured not to change to a rainbow color. Conceivable.

(49) In each of the above-described forms, the time during which the right hitting start image GR is displayed can be changed as appropriate. Moreover, the time during which the right-handed start image GR is displayed may be changed for each time-saving game state. For example, in the above-described first embodiment, it is preferable that the right-handed start image GR is displayed for a long period of time in the second time-saving game state from the first time-saving game state. Further, it is preferable that the right-handed start image GR is displayed for a long period of time in the third time-saving game state from the first time-saving game state. In the above configuration, the right hitting start image GR may be different between the first time-saving game state and the other time-saving game state. In addition, when the first time-saving game state starts, the right-hand hitting start image GR may not be displayed.

(50) The time saving game state of each form described above ends when the total number of times that the first special symbol display device 20 variably displays and the number of times that the second special symbol display device 21 variably displays reaches the number of times N of time saving. . However, the timing for ending the time-saving gaming state is not limited to the example of the first embodiment. For example, when the total number of times the first special symbol display device 20 variably displays and the number of times the second special symbol display device 21 variably displays reaches 50 times, the number of times the second special symbol display device 21 variably displays The time-saving game state may be terminated at the first opportunity of the opportunity of reaching five times and the opportunity of winning one small win.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure which an end opportunity differs for every time-saving game state. For example, the first time-saving gaming state is the moment when the total number of times the first special symbol display device 20 variably displays and the second special symbol display 21 variably displays reaches 50 times, and the second special symbol display. The game ends at the first opportunity of the opportunity that the number of times the device 21 performs variable display reaches 5 and the opportunity that a small win is won once. In addition, the second time-saving game state is triggered when the total number of times the first special symbol display device 20 variably displays and the second special symbol display device 21 variably displays reaches 500 times, and the second special symbol display. The game ends at the first opportunity of the opportunity that the number of times the device 21 performs the variable display reaches 20 and the opportunity that the small win is won four times. Furthermore, the third time-saving gaming state is the second special symbol display when the total number of times the first special symbol display device 20 variably displays and the second special symbol display 21 variably displays reaches 30 times. A configuration is conceivable in which the game ends at the first opportunity of the opportunity when the number of times the device 21 performs the variable display reaches six times and the opportunity when the small win is won three times.

(51) In each form described above, the effect mode (background image GH, BGM, and effect that can be determined) in each time-saving game state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the production mode of the third time-saving game state may be varied according to the time-saving number of times N3 (100 times, 1000 times). In addition, in the third time-saving game state where the number of times of time reduction N3 is 1000 times, the production mode of the first 100 times is made common to the production mode of the third time-saving game state where the number of times of time reduction N3 is 100 times, and in the game after the 101st time A configuration in which the production mode changes is also possible. Furthermore, in the above configuration, it is preferable that the production mode of the first time-saving game state and the production mode of the third time-saving game state (production modes before and after changing) are different.

(52) In each of the above embodiments, the remaining number of times image GF displaying the remaining number of times M of the time-saving gaming state may be omitted. In addition, the remaining number of times image GF is displayed in a part of the time saving game state (for example, the first time saving game state), and the remaining number of times image GF is not displayed in another part of the time saving game state (for example, the second time saving game state). may be Further, the remaining number of times image GF may not be displayed in the beginning of the time saving game state, and the remaining number of times image GF may be displayed in the second half of the time saving game state.

As a specific example of the above modification, the remaining number of times image GF is displayed in the first time saving game state and the third time saving game state, and the remaining number of times image GF is not displayed at the beginning of the second time saving game state, and the second time saving A configuration is conceivable in which the display of the remaining number of times image GF is started after the remaining number of times M2 in the gaming state is subtracted to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 100). In the above configuration, the configuration may be such that the remaining number of times image GF is not displayed even after the beginning of the second time-saving game state.

(53) In each form described above, the type of time-saving design can be changed as appropriate. For example, one or both of the time-saving pattern that shifts to the third time-saving game state of 1000 times and the time-saving design that shifts to the third time-saving game state of 100 times may be provided in a plurality of types. For example, when the first time-saving design is stop-displayed and when the second time-saving design is stop-displayed, a configuration is conceivable in which the game moves to the third time-saving game state 100 times.

(54) In each form described above, the production pattern GA corresponding to the time saving pattern may be different depending on the time saving pattern, or may be common in the time saving pattern. For example, when the time saving pattern to shift to the 3rd time saving game state 1000 times is stopped and displayed, and when the time saving pattern to move to the 3rd time saving game state 100 times is stopped and displayed The pattern GA may be common or may be different.

(55) In each form described above, the period during which the time-saving rush effect is executed is appropriately changed. For example, the fixed period when the time saving pattern is stop-displayed is extended from the normal fixed period. Specifically, the time of the fixed period when the time saving pattern is stop-displayed is extended to the same extent as the time of the ending period of the jackpot game.

In the above configuration, the time-saving rush effect may be executed in the case of shifting to the third time-saving game state during the determination period when the time-saving design is stop-displayed. Also, after the fixed period is over, it may be configured to shift to the third time-saving game state. Furthermore, in the configuration for executing the time-saving rush performance in the fixed period, when adopting the configuration to move to the third time-saving game state after the fixed period ends, the production pattern GA and the small pattern Ga are displayed during the fixed period. may or may not be displayed.

(56) In each of the above-described modes, the configuration may be such that the player can arbitrarily change (customize) the execution frequency of the specific effect. However, regardless of which execution frequency is changed, it is preferable that the execution frequency of the specific effect is less during the above-described limited period than during periods other than the limited period.

(57) In each of the above-described embodiments, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 may be configured so that the special symbols can be variably displayed at the same time (in parallel). In the above configuration, the first reserved number is digested regardless of the presence or absence of the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21, and the second reserved number is digested regardless of the presence or absence of the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20. be.

In the above configuration, as in the first embodiment described above, a configuration is assumed in which the cumulative number of times m is added when the special symbols are stopped. Also, it is assumed that the first special symbol display device 20 variably displays in the n-th game, and the second special symbol display device 21 variably displays in the n+1-th game. Furthermore, it is assumed that the n+1th game ends before the nth game (the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 stops before the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20). In the above case, the accumulated number m is updated to the numerical value "n" at the end of the n+1th game. Therefore, it is preferable that the game state is shifted to the second time-saving game state at the end of the n+1-th game.

A configuration is assumed in which the cumulative number m is added at the start of the variable display of the special symbols. Also, it is assumed that the first special symbol display device 20 variably displays in the n-th game, and the second special symbol display device 21 variably displays in the n+1-th game. Furthermore, it is assumed that the n+1th game ends before the nth game (the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 stops before the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20). In the above case, the cumulative number of times m is updated to the numerical value "n" at the start of the n-th game. Therefore, it is preferable that the game state is shifted to the second time-saving game state at the start of the n-th game.

(58) In each of the above-described modes, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol in the n-th game may be different from the variation pattern in the other games. For example, when the variation pattern of the special symbol in the game of the n-th operation is determined, in the image display device 31, it is preferable to notify that the game is shifted to the second time-saving game state. In addition, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the fixed period of the special symbol is extended at the game of the n-th number of times of actuation from the game before the n-th number of times of actuation. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the time saving rush effect in the case of shifting to the second time saving game state is executed in the fixed period in the game of the n-th number of times of operation. Furthermore, after the extended fixed period ends, it may be configured to shift to the second time-saving gaming state.

However, the accumulated number m is initialized at the start of the jackpot game, and after that, when the n-th game is executed, the variation pattern of the special symbols in the game is changed, and a trigger other than the start of the jackpot game ( For example, the operation of the clear button 30) initializes the cumulative number m, and after that, when the n-th game is executed, the variation pattern in the game is not changed (not changed from the previous game). is. In addition, the cumulative number m is initialized at the start of the jackpot game, and thereafter, when the game of the n-th operation count is executed, the fixed period in the game is extended, and a trigger other than the start of the jackpot game (for example, clear Operation of the button 30) initializes the cumulative number of times m, and after that, when the game of the n-th number of times of operation is executed, it is preferable that the fixed period in the game is not extended. In the above configuration, since the administrator of the gaming machine cannot arbitrarily change the variable time and fixed period of the special symbols, the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game is suppressed.

(59) In each of the above embodiments, as a specific example of ending the time-saving gaming state when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the configuration in which the time-saving gaming state ends before the fixed period ends has been described. However, in the configuration in which the time-saving game state ends when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the time-saving game state may end before the fixed period ends.

For example, in the above-described special symbol stop time process (FIG. 18), the time saving end determination process (S234 in the same figure) may be provided before step S233 for providing a fixed period. Specifically, a time saving end determination process may be provided between step S233 and the third time saving transition determination process (S232). In addition, the time saving end determination process may be provided between the third time saving transition determination process and the second time saving transition determination process (S231), or the time saving end determination process may be provided immediately before the second time saving transition determination process. good.

In addition, in the modification, the fixed period of the game in which the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) ends is the longest when the opening and closing door 14b is controlled to the operation mode Db is preferred. In the above configuration, there is no case where the open/close door 14b is in the operating state Db at the time when the non-time-saving game state is started after the time-saving game state is finished. Therefore, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the situation in which the game ball wins the second starting port 14 is suppressed.

(60) In each of the above embodiments, the timing at which the cumulative count command is transmitted may be at the start of the game or at the end of the game. Further, the cumulative number command may be transmitted in all games, or the cumulative number command may be transmitted in some games (for example, every 100 games).

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, instead of the accumulated number command indicating the accumulated number m, a command indicating the remaining number of times “nm” up to the operation number n may be transmitted to the effect control board 120. Further, it may be configured such that neither the command indicating the remaining number of times up to the number of times of actuation n nor the cumulative number command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 . In the above configuration, the sub CPU 121 counts the number of times a command (for example, a symbol determination command) transmitted when the special symbol is stopped (when the cumulative number m is added) is received. Alternatively, the remaining number of times up to the number of times of operation n can be notified.

(61) In the above-described form, immediately after the end of the second time-saving gaming state, it may be configured to be able to shift to a dedicated effect mode (a mode in which a dedicated effect can be executed). In addition, in the above dedicated effect mode, a configuration in which dedicated BGM is output is preferable. Similarly, immediately after the third time-saving gaming state ends, it may be configured to be able to shift to a dedicated production mode (a mode in which a dedicated production can be executed). In addition, in the above dedicated effect mode, a configuration in which dedicated BGM is output is preferable. In addition, it is good also as a structure which transfers to a common special production mode after each time-saving game state is complete|finished.

(62) In each of the above-described forms, when the second time-saving gaming state ends and shifts to the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, even if the number of games in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state reaches the number of times n Do not shift to the time-saving game state. In the above configuration, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state after the second time-saving gaming state is completed, it is preferable to notify that the second time-saving gaming state has already ended. Specifically, a configuration is conceivable in which the cumulative number of times m is displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state after the second time-saving gaming state ends. When the displayed cumulative count m is greater than the numerical value "800", it is understood that the second time-saving gaming state has already ended.

(63) In each of the above-described forms, according to the result of the preliminary determination, a specific effect (such as a pending change effect) that notifies (suggests) in advance that the game state will shift to the second time-saving game state is not executed. However, it may be configured such that a specific effect is executed to notify (suggest) in advance that the game will be shifted to the second time-saving gaming state.

(64) In each of the above-described forms, the time-saving design may be effective in the time-saving gaming state. For example, it is assumed that the time-saving design is stop-displayed in the second time-saving game state. In the above case, both the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state may operate in parallel. However, in the time-saving game state after the time-saving design is stop-displayed in the second time-saving game state, it is preferable to maintain the open mode of the open/close door 14b in the second time-saving game state.

(65) In each of the above-described forms, the second time-saving at the time when the special symbol stops during the period after the number of times that the number of times the jackpot lottery in the low-probability game state has been determined to have not won the jackpot reaches the number of times n of operations Moved to game state. However, the timing of shifting to the second time-saving game state can be appropriately changed within a period after the number of times of non-winning of the big win in the jackpot lottery in the low-probability game state reaches the number of operations n.

For example, the number of times (cumulative number of times m) that the big win is determined not to be won may be updated (added or subtracted) immediately after the big win lottery (immediately after the start of the game). In the above configuration, it is possible to shift to the second time-saving game state immediately after the start of the game. When adopting a configuration that shifts to the second time-saving game state immediately after the start of the game, it is preferable that the right-handed lamp 28 is lit immediately after the start of the game, and the above-described advantageous period signal (external information signal) is turned on. is. In the above configuration, the above-described non-counting period is started when the game is shifted to the second time-saving game state immediately after the start of the game.

In the above modified example, it is preferable that the above-described time-saving rush effect is executed when the second time-saving game state is entered immediately after the start of the game. In addition, when the game shifts to the second time-saving game state immediately after the start of the game, an image (for example, the above-mentioned right-handed image Gsy) notifying that the game should be played with the right hand is started to be displayed, and the background image of the time-saving game state. A configuration for switching to GH is preferable. In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, the transition to the second time-saving game state before the end of the fixed period of the special symbol, but may be configured to shift to the second time-saving game state after the end of the fixed period.

(66) In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration in which the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state is subtracted at the end of the game is adopted, but the configuration may be such that the remaining number of times M is subtracted at the start of the game. In the above configuration, the time-saving game state ends at the start of the game. For example, the second time-saving game state ends immediately after the 1000th game is started. In the above case, when the 1000th game is started in the second time-saving game state, the right-handed lamp 28 is extinguished, and the counting period described above is started.

(67) In each form described above, a game state of a high probability game state and a non-time-saving game state (high-probability non-time-saving game state) may be provided. However, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the time-saving design is invalid. That is, the time-saving design is effective only in the low-probability gaming state. Also, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the cumulative number m is not added (maintained at the initial value "0").

(68) In each form described above, a plurality of types of setting values (eg, 1 to 6) are provided, and the probability of being determined to be a big hit in a jackpot lottery (eg, the probability of winning a jackpot in a low-probability gaming state) is the set value. You may employ|adopt the structure which changes according to. However, with each set value, the probability of winning the third short time is common. Moreover, the probability of winning a small hit is common for each set value. The above set values are changed by setting change processing executed in response to setting change operations by the manager of the gaming machine 1 .

In the above modified examples, the number of times n of operation in which the second time-saving game state operates is common to each set value. Specifically, when the probability of winning a big hit in the low probability gaming state is set to "ML" (0<M<1), the number of times n of operation is in the range "2.5/ML ≤ n ≤ 3.0/ML" is preferred.

In the above modification, the number of games in the time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as the number of times of time-saving N) preferably has a common configuration for all set values. Specifically, the number of time reductions N1 in the first time reduction game state is common for all set values, the number of time reductions N2 in the second time reduction game state is common for all set values, and the time reduction in the third time reduction game state A configuration in which the number of times N3 is common to all set values is preferable. Furthermore, when the minimum jackpot probability among the jackpot probabilities “ML” in the low-probability gaming state of each setting value is “MLmim” (jackpot probability of set value “1”), the number of times of saving time N2 is numerical value “3. 8/MLmin" or less, and the number of times of reduction in working hours N3 is preferably configured to have a numerical value of "3.8/MLmin" or less.

(69) In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration is such that the cumulative number m is not initialized in the setting value change processing by setting value change and the clear operation processing by operating the clear button 30, and a dedicated operation unit (hereinafter referred to as “accumulation clear The cumulative number m may be initialized when the button for use") is operated.

(70) In each of the above embodiments, the cumulative number m may not be initialized in the clearing operation process, but the cumulative number m may be initialized in the setting value change process. Alternatively, the cumulative number m may not be initialized when the clear button 30 is operated in the normal mode, and the cumulative number m may be initialized when the clear button 30 is operated in the special mode. For example, when the clear button 30 is operated once, the predetermined information is initialized, but the accumulated count m is not initialized. are initialized.

(71) In each of the above modes, an effect suggesting a set value may be executed. For example, when the time-saving gaming state ends, a configuration is conceivable in which an effect suggesting a set value is executed. However, in the case of shifting to the second time-saving game state among the time-saving game states and the big win is not won in the second time-saving game state, there is a high possibility that the winning probability of the big win is a set value with a low value. Therefore, when the first time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends, an effect suggesting a set value is executed, and when the second time-saving game state ends, an effect suggesting a set value is not executed. is preferred.

(72) In the low-probability non-time-saving game state of each form described above, a plurality of types of production patterns GAx may be displayed according to the production mode in which the game is progressed and the background image GH. Similarly, in the low-probability time-saving gaming state or high-probability time-saving gaming state, a plurality of types of performance symbols GAy may be displayed according to the production mode in which the game is progressed or the background image GH.

Moreover, it is good also as displaying different production|presentation design GAy in each of 1st time saving game state, 2nd time saving game state, and 3rd time saving game state. Specifically, the production pattern GAy common to the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is displayed, and in the third time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state are different production patterns GAy. may be displayed. In addition, the production pattern GAy common to the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state is displayed, and the production pattern GAy different from the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state is displayed in the first time-saving game state. You can do it. Further, a performance symbol GAy common to the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state is displayed, and a performance symbol GAy different from the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state is displayed in the second time-saving game state. You can do it.

(73) In each of the above-described forms, the configuration when shifting to the second time-saving gaming state can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is assumed that the number of reservations when shifting to the second time-saving gaming state is a numerical value "0". That is, it is assumed that the customer waiting state (non-gaming state) is shifted to immediately after shifting to the second time-saving gaming state. In the modification, in the customer waiting state described above, the right-handed lamp 28 is lit and the right-handed image Gsy is displayed. Further, in the modified example, the emphasized image GZ showing the character string "0 more times" is displayed in the customer waiting state described above.

In the modification, when the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the right-handed lamp 28 is continuously lit in the game, and the right-handed image Gsy is displayed. displayed continuously. However, in the modification, the emphasized image GZ is hidden in the first game in the second time-saving game state. Furthermore, in the modification, the time-reduction rush performance is not executed in the customer waiting state immediately after shifting to the second time-reduction game state, and then the time-reduction rush performance is executed in the first game of the second time-reduction game state.

On the other hand, if the number of reservations at the time of transition to the second time-saving gaming state is equal to or greater than the numerical value "1", in the modification, immediately after moving to the second time-saving gaming state (in the first game of the second time-saving gaming state ), the right hitting lamp 28 is lit, the right hitting image Gsy is displayed, the emphasized image GZ is hidden, and the time saving rush performance is executed. In addition, in the above modification, it is good also as a structure by which time saving rush production|presentation is performed in a customer waiting state. Further, the number-of-games image GE may be displayed throughout the customer-waiting state, and the number-of-games image GE may be hidden in the first game in the second time-saving gaming state.

(74) In each of the above-described embodiments, the magnitude relationship between the remaining number of times M1 in the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times M2 in the second time-saving game state, and the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-saving game state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the remaining number of times M1 may be longer than the remaining number of times M2, or the remaining number of times M1 and the remaining number of times M2 may be equal. Alternatively, the remaining number of times M3 may be longer than the remaining number of times M2, or the remaining number of times M3 may be equal to the remaining number of times M2. Similarly, the remaining number of times M1 may be longer than the remaining number of times M3, the remaining number of times M1 may be equal to the remaining number of times M3, or the remaining number of times M3 may be longer than the remaining number of times M1.

(75) In the second embodiment described above, the "first information J1" was exemplified as the "first information relating to execution of the special game specified by prior determination" of the present invention. However, the "first information" of the present invention is not limited to the above examples. For example, the "winning information (start winning designation command) generated when the random number value for judging the special symbol for the jackpot" in the first embodiment is included in the "first information" of the present invention. Further, in the second embodiment described above, the "second information J2" is exemplified as the "second information relating to the transition to the second game state specified by prior determination" of the present invention. However, the "second information" of the present invention is not limited to the above examples. For example, when the random number value for determining the special symbol for losing is acquired by the cumulative number of times m, it becomes possible to shift to the second time-saving game state (second game state). Therefore, the "winning information (start winning designation command) generated when the random number value for determining the special symbol for losing" is included in the "second information" of the present invention.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a specific example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine is shown, but the present invention may be applied to a pachislot machine.

The gaming machine of the present invention is, for example, the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes acquisition means (S139 in FIG. 30) that acquires determination information when the acquisition condition is established, and determination means ( S207 in FIG. 33), and when the number of times that the special game is determined to be non-winning reaches a predetermined specific number of times, the second game state can be started, after which the acquisition condition is more likely to be established than in the first game state. means (S244 in FIG. 35); and image display means (image display device 31) capable of displaying various images including a background image and a shielding image that shields the background image to make it difficult to see according to the progress of the game. , wherein the background image includes a first background image (GHx) displayed in the first game state and a second background image (GHw, GHz) displayed in the second game state, and image display means makes the first background image difficult to see with a shielding image, and then hides the shielding image in response to the number of times that the special game is determined to be non-winning reaches a predetermined specific number of times. A second background image is visibly displayed (see FIG. 16).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to start the second game state after the number of determinations, which is the number of times that the special game is determined to have not been won, reaches a predetermined specific number of times. Therefore, compared with the configuration in which the second game state is not started at this opportunity, the interest of the opportunity to start the second game state is improved. Further, according to the shielding image of the present invention, there is an advantage that it is possible to emphasize that the first game state has ended (that the second time-saving game state has started).

(Fifth embodiment)
Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In the following, for the convenience of explanation, each constituent member will be given a new reference numeral. That is, in the first to fourth embodiments, the fifth embodiment, and the sixth and seventh embodiments described later, the same reference numerals may be assigned to different configurations.

Also, the configurations described above may correspond to configurations described later. More specifically, the gaming machine 1 described above corresponds to the gaming machine 1 described later. Further, the main control board 110 described above corresponds to the main control board 110 described later. The main RAM 113 described above corresponds to a main RAM 110c described later. Also, the effect control board 120 described above corresponds to the effect control board 130 described later. The outer frame 2, the inner frame 3, and the glass frame 4 described above correspond to the outer frame 2, the game board mounting frame 3, and the glass frame 4, respectively, which will be described later. Also, the game board 10 described above corresponds to the game board 5 described later. Also, the game area 10a described above corresponds to the game area 5a described later. Also, the above-described pending image GB corresponds to a pending icon HI, which will be described later. Further, the pending image GB described above corresponds to the icon TI, which will be described later. Further, the above-described pending number image GD corresponds to a first pending number display area 70E and a second pending number display area 70F, which will be described later. Further, the above-described region R11, region R12, region R13, region R14, region R21, region R22, region R23, and region R24 are respectively the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and the third display section 70B3, which will be described later. , fourth display portion 70B4, first display portion 70D1, second display portion 70D2, third display portion 70D3, and fourth display portion 70D4. Also, the region R0 described above corresponds to the icon display region 70C, which will be described later. Also, the small symbols Ga described above correspond to special symbols TZ, which will be described later. Moreover, the low-probability non-time-saving game state described above corresponds to the normal game state described later. In addition, the first time-saving game state described above corresponds to the normal time-saving game state described later. In addition, the second time-saving game state described above corresponds to a special time-saving game state, which will be described later. Also, the start notification image Gn and the entry image GT described above correspond to the notification logo LG and the character image of "START", which will be described later. Further, the customer waiting screen Mx, the customer waiting screen Mx1, and the customer waiting screen Mx2 described above correspond to the customer waiting demo background, which will be described later. Further, the first starting port 13 described above corresponds to the first starting port 45 described later. Further, the second starting port 14 described above corresponds to a second starting port 47 described later. Further, the opening/closing door 14b described above corresponds to a second starting port opening/closing member 48 described later. Further, the gate 15 described above corresponds to the normal map gate 44 described later. Also, the above-described first big winning hole 16 corresponds to the first big winning hole 50 to be described later. In addition, the above-described second big winning hole 17 corresponds to a second big winning hole 56 which will be described later. Also, the above-described general prize winning port 18 corresponds to the general prize winning port 43 described later. Also, the out port 19 described above corresponds to the out port 39 described later. Also, the special symbols described above correspond to the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be described later. Moreover, the production pattern GA mentioned above corresponds to the production pattern 70a which will be described later. Also, the audio output device 34 described above corresponds to the audio output device 9 described later. Also, the effect lamp 33 described above corresponds to the frame lighting device 10 described later. Also, the effect button 8 described above corresponds to the effect button 17 described later. Further, the cross key 40 described above corresponds to the cross key 19 described later. Also, the effect movable body 32 described above corresponds to a movable effect device 73 which will be described later. Also, the light emitters described above correspond to a board effect device 74, which will be described later. Also, the background image GH described above corresponds to a background image described later. Also, the above-described right hitting image GS1, right hitting image GS2, right hitting image GS3, right hitting image GS4, right hitting image Gsy, and right hitting start image GR are the first right hitting image MG1 and second right hitting image MG1, which will be described later. It corresponds to MG2, the third shot-to-right image MG3, and the fourth shot-to-right image MG4. Also, the background image GHf described above corresponds to the power-on notification described later. Also, the above-described prevention image GQ1 corresponds to a forget-to-take caution image TG, which will be described later. Also, the above-described warning image GQ2 corresponds to a immersion warning image NG, which will be described later. In addition, the end image GP2 described above corresponds to a shutter image SY described later. Also, the shielding image GF described above corresponds to a dark image described later. Also, the end image GP1 and the result image GP described above correspond to result display, which will be described later. Also, the above-described enhanced image GZ corresponds to a numeric image. Further, the image display device 31 described above corresponds to the first image display device 70 described later. Also, the clear switch 30a described above corresponds to the RWM clear switch 111a described later. Also, the clear operation described above corresponds to the RWM clear operation described later. Further, the variation pattern determination table described above corresponds to a special figure variation pattern determination table described later. Also, the number-of-games image GE described above corresponds to the number-of-games GK described later. Further, the stationary notification image GI described above corresponds to a stationary notification character SC and a notification logo LG, which will be described later. Further, the remaining number of times image GN described above corresponds to a character image of an activation counter display, which will be described later. Moreover, the remaining working hours image GJ mentioned above corresponds to the remaining working hours image KG which will be described later. In addition, the left-handed image GL and the left-handed start image GL described above correspond to the left-handed image HG, which will be described later. Also, the mounting notification image GK described above corresponds to a guide image AN described later.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69. FIG. 67 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 68 is a perspective view of a part of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and FIG. 69 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1. FIG.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 having a game area 5a in which game balls (game media) flow down is provided.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front-rear direction, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. It is Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. maintenance can be performed.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via a second hinge mechanism 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. there is Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) opening in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is formed so as to cover the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, an audio output device 9 made up of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and a payout device 95 (to be described later) are dispensed based on the fulfillment of the granting conditions. an upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as game balls, a lower plate 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have not entered the upper plate 11 and flowed into an overflow ball flow path described later; A shooting operation device 13 is provided which can be operated to shoot the ball.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations above the glass frame 4 with a space therebetween, and produce sound (music, voice) effects by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like. It's like A plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 is also provided with a notification LED 10a which is controlled to light/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality occurs such that game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

The upper plate 11 has a bottom surface of a game ball storage portion 11a which is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the shooting operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, a performance button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (FIG. 67 or FIG. 68) functioning as an input device for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later are provided. ) are arranged side by side.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 capable of performing a decision operation (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the production button 17, and a normal state and a normal state of the production button 17. Effect button driving device 17b equipped with a button driving motor for changing to a projecting state located above and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 between a normal state and a vibration state in which it vibrates in a predetermined manner, A button lamp 17c is provided for changing the effect button 17 between an off state and a lighting state in which light is emitted in a predetermined manner, so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. FIG.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (up button 191A, left button 192A, down button 193A, right button 194A) that can perform operations such as selection, and a cross key for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 71) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. FIG.

In addition, a lending operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11 for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money. When the lending button 20a of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the ball lending machine (not shown) installed side by side with the game machine 1 subtracts the remaining money stored in the storage medium and lends the game balls. When the return button 20b of the rental operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. - 特許庁A full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 71) for detecting that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflowing ball flow path, and the fullness of the lower tray 12 is detected by the full detection switch 32a. During this time, the payout of game balls by the payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped.

The shooting operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a shooting handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand touches the shooting handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 71) and a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 71) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 are provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15, the ball sending solenoid 11b is activated to send game balls one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion for mounting the game board 5, a shooting device 26 (see FIG. 71) for shooting game balls toward the game area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3 and A lock mechanism (not shown) for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a (see FIG. 71) for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an open front at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and is capable of accommodating the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting portion 25 , and various devices provided on the back side of the game board 5 are connected to the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Come on.

The shooting device 26 includes a shooting member for shooting a game ball, a shooting solenoid 28b (see FIG. 71) for driving the shooting member, and a shooting device that tilts upward from the shooting member toward the lower left end of the game board. A rail and a stopper for stopping a game ball are provided at a launch position that is the inclined lower end of the launch rail. When the game ball sent by the ball sending solenoid 11b (see FIG. 71) is received at the shooting position, the game ball is shot toward the game area 5a by the operation of the hitting member.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4 . When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is rotated. 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a in which a game ball can flow down is surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. is formed. A shot ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a for guiding the game balls that have flowed down to outside the game area (recovery part of the game board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decoration frame 40, which is called a center case, is provided to restrict entry of the game ball into the inside. The left game area is divided into a left game area where the shot game balls flow down and a right game area where the game balls shot with a second projectile force stronger than the first projectile flow. communicate with each other below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce the game balls flowing down the left side game area into the decorative frame 40 , and the warp device 41 moves the interior of the decorative frame 40 below the decorative frame 40 . A stage portion 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the frame 40 and causing them to flow downward.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, three general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always win a prize (enter a ball) are provided at intervals, and below the right side of the decorative frame 40, a game One general winning hole 43 in which a ball can always win a prize (enter a ball) is provided. When the game balls that have entered the general winning hole 43 are detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 71) (granting conditions are established), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are released. A payout device 95 (see FIG. 69) pays out to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (given prize value).

Below the stage portion 42, there is provided a first starting port 45 (first special symbol starting winning region) in which the game ball can always win (entering the ball). When the played game ball is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 71) (granting condition is established), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are released from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 69). It is designed to be paid out to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball (given prize value). In addition, a right for performing a jackpot determination whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information, which will be described later, is stored).

Directly below the first starting port 45, there is provided a starting port lamp 75 that emits light in a predetermined manner when a lamp lighting effect, which will be described later, is executed. (double exclamation mark), which is an object of the model motif, is provided.

Note that the model motif object may be provided directly on the front side of the first starting port 45 or may be provided independently near the first starting port 45 and the starting port lamp 75 . In this way, by providing the model motif object at the position corresponding to the first start port 45 where the player's line of sight tends to gather, it is possible to easily impress the player with the model of the gaming machine 1. .

Below the decorative frame 40 and obliquely below the first starting port 45, it is impossible or impossible to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that a win is won in the hit determination described later). A variable starter 46 is provided which can be converted from a difficult closed state to an easy open state or a game ball winning state.

The variable starting part 46 has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 67) to serve as a flow path for game balls, and a second starting opening opening/closing member 48 that is movable in the front-rear direction. A second starting opening 47 (starting winning area of the second special symbol) that opens upward directly below the starting opening opening/closing member 48, and a second opening that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting opening 47 By moving the start opening detection switch 47a (see FIG. 71) and the second start opening opening/closing member 48 forward (the prize winning regulation position), the second start opening 47 is closed and the second start opening is closed. A second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 71) is provided for converting the second starting port 47 to the open state by moving the opening/closing member 48 toward the rear (winning position).

Then, a game ball enters the second starting port 47 that is in an open state during an auxiliary game, which will be described later, and this game ball is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 71) (granting conditions are met). ), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 69) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (given prize value). In addition, a right for performing a jackpot determination whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information, which will be described later, is stored).

The right game area on the right side of the decorative frame 40 has an upstream flow path 91a into which all the game balls shot toward the right game area flow, and almost all of the game balls flowed out from the upstream flow path 91a. A central flow path 91b, a left flow path 91c into which game balls bounced to the left without flowing into the central flow path 91b, and a right side into which game balls bounced to the right without flowing into the central flow path 91b Flow path 91d, the first downstream flow path 91e into which almost all of the game balls flowing out from the central flow path 91b and the game balls flowing out from the right flow path 91d flow in, and the left side without flowing into the first downstream flow path 91e A second downstream channel 91f is provided into which the game ball that has bounced and the game ball that has flowed out from the left channel 91c flows.

At the upstream end of the central flow path 91b, a normal pattern gate 44 (normal pattern starting area) through which game balls can always pass is provided. Then, the prize ball is not granted, but the right to perform the auxiliary game determination (hit determination) of whether or not to execute the winning game is granted (normal pattern determination information described later is stored).

In the middle of the central flow path 91b, there is a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win a prize (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (determined as a big hit in the jackpot determination). A first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) that can be converted to a state is provided.

The first variable winning portion 49 (first variable winning device) has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to serve as a flow path for game balls (a part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b is ), a first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 that can move in the front-rear direction, and a first big winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, By moving the first big winning hole detection switch 50a for detecting the game ball that has won (entered) the first big winning hole 50 and the first big winning hole opening/closing member 51 toward the front (winning regulation position) For converting the first big winning opening 50 to the closed state and moving the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 toward the rear (winning position) to convert the first big winning opening 50 to the open state. A first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 71) is provided.

When the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 moves backward during a small winning game described later and the first large winning opening opening/closing member 50 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 is opened. The game ball flowing down on the upper surface or the game ball reaching the first big winning hole 50 enters the first big winning hole 50, and the game ball is detected by the first big winning hole detection switch 50a. Then, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 69) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

In addition, downstream of the first big winning hole detection switch 50a, the upper surface slopes down in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls, and a specific area opening and closing that can move in the front-back direction. A member 52, a specific region 53 that opens upward directly below the specific region opening/closing member 52, a specific region detection switch 53a (see FIG. 71) that detects a game ball that has flowed (entered) into the specific region 53, By moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 forward (winning control position), the specific area 53 is converted to the closed state, and by moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 backward (winning position), the A channel switching solenoid 52b for converting the region 53 to an open state and a discharge port 54 into which game balls that have not flowed into the specific region 53 flow are provided.

Then, when a game ball passes through (enters) a specific area 53 that is in an open state during a small winning game to be described later, and this game ball is detected by a specific area detection switch 53a, prize balls are not awarded. After the end of the small winning game, a big winning game, which will be described later, is executed.

In addition, without providing the specific area opening/closing member 52, the specific area 53, and the specific area detection switch 53a, the first large winning opening detection switch 50a is used as the specific area, and the first large winning opening detection switch 50a that is in the open state during the small winning game described later is used. A game ball that has flowed into the winning hole may be detected by the first big winning hole detection switch 50a, so that a big winning game, which will be described later, may be executed after the small winning game ends.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the big winning game and the small winning game that converts the big winning opening to the open state are treated as special games advantageous to the player, but when the big winning game is treated as a special game and the small winning game is treated as a specific game There is

In the middle of the first downstream flow path 91e, it is possible or easy to win a prize (enter a prize) from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on establishment of a predetermined condition (determined as a big hit in the judgment of a big hit). A second variable winning section 55 (second variable winning device) that can be converted to an open state is provided.

The second variable winning portion 55 (first variable winning device) has an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (left side in the drawing), thereby forming a flow path for game balls (one part of the bottom surface of the first downstream flow path 91e). ), a second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 that can move in the front-rear direction, and a second large winning opening opening/closing member 56 that opens upward directly below the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 (winning area). Then, the second big winning hole detection switch 56a for detecting a game ball that has won (entered) the second big winning hole 56 and the second big winning hole opening/closing member 57 are moved forward (winning regulation position). As a result, the second large winning opening 56 is converted to the closed state, and the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57 is moved toward the rear (winning position) to convert the second large winning opening 56 to the open state. A second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b (see FIG. 71) is provided for this purpose.

Then, when the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 moves backward during the jackpot game and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 56 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the upper surface of the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 flows down. A game ball that has been playing or a game ball that has reached the second big winning hole 56 enters the second big winning hole 56, and when this game ball is detected by the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of games are played. Game balls (for example, 10) are paid out to the upper tray 11 as prize balls from a payout device 95 (see FIG. 69).

In addition, the front of the right game area is covered with a decorative member 91 that allows the rear to be seen through. A plurality of front protrusions 91b2 protruding rearward are provided at intervals at a position directly above the member 51 . Furthermore, a plurality of rear projections 91b1 are provided on the back wall of the central flow path 91b (immediately above the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51) so as to alternate with the front projections 91b2. and the front protrusion 91b2 form a meandering flow path, thereby attenuating the flow-down velocity (flow-down force) of the game ball in the central flow path 91b (especially the upper surface of the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51). there is Therefore, it takes one second to flow down from the upstream end to the downstream end on the upper surface of the first big prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 .

Furthermore, a plurality of rear projections 91c2 projecting rearward are spaced apart from the rear surface of the decorative member 91 and at a position in front of the first downstream flow path 91e (directly above the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57). are provided with a space between them. Furthermore, a plurality of rear projections 91c1 are provided on the back wall of the first downstream flow path 91e (immediately above the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57) so as to alternate with the front projections 91c2. A meandering flow path is formed by the portion 91c1 and the front projecting portion 91c2, thereby attenuating the flow speed (flowing force) of the game ball in the first downstream flow path 91e (especially the upper surface of the second prize winning opening opening/closing member 57). It's like Therefore, it takes one second to flow down from the upstream end to the downstream end on the upper surface of the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 .

The game ball shot into the left game area either flows down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flows into the warp device 41 and then flows down through the stage section 42, and is provided below the decorative frame 40. Winning any of the three general prize winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45, or flowing into the out opening 39. Therefore, the normal figure gate 44 provided in the right game area, the general winning opening 43, the first variable winning part 49 (first big winning part 50) and the second variable winning part 55 (second big winning part 56) winning ( pass).

In addition, the game ball shot to the right game area passes through the upstream flow path 91a, the central flow path 91b (general map gate 44), the left flow path 91c, the right flow path 91d, the first downstream flow path 91e, the 2 downstream flow path 91f etc., one general winning opening 43 provided in the right game area, variable starting part 46 (second starting opening 47), first variable winning part 49 (first big winning opening 50), Either the second variable winning portion 55 (the second big winning port 56 ) is won, or the player enters the out port 39 . Therefore, there is no chance of winning the general prize winning opening 43 and the first start opening 45 provided in the left game area.

On the back side of the game board 5, the game balls that have won the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening 56, and the out opening 39 An out-ball flow path is provided for receiving and gathering out-balls made up of inflowing game balls to flow down, and an out-ball detection switch 39a (see FIG. 71) is provided at the most downstream portion of the out-ball flow path. The game ball detected by the out ball detection switch 39a is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island facility) from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1. FIG.

Outside the game area 5a, there are a symbol display device consisting of a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61 and a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reservation display device 63 and a second special symbol reservation device. A holding display device consisting of a display 64 and a normal symbol holding display 65, a main information display 69 consisting of a round number display 66, a right hitting display 67 and a state confirmation display 68 are provided.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot determination performed based on the winning (entrance) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. , The second special symbol display device 61 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the second special symbol jackpot determination performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 47 (entering the ball). The normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the normal symbol hit determination performed based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44 .

The jackpot determination is the special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination It corresponds to determining whether or not to execute a big hit game or a small hit game based on the obtained special figure determination information.

Then, when a big hit determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, the first special symbol display device 60 performs a variable display of the first special symbol, and the determination result is reported after the lapse of a predetermined time. Stop display of the first special symbol is performed. In addition, when a big hit determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47, the second special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of the second special symbol, and the determination result is notified after the lapse of a predetermined time. Stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display devices blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (big win mode, small win mode, losing mode) for notifying the result of the big hit determination.
An example of display on the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 will be described. The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 display a lost special symbol in which the LED at the left end lights up as the first display mode after the power is turned on. After that, when the variable display of the special symbols is started, the display mode is such that the second LED from the left end is lit, and the lighting position of the LED is changed in order to the right every 32 ms. After the rightmost LED lights up, the leftmost LED lights up again, and thereafter, the display mode in which the lighting positions of the LEDs change in order is repeated.

In addition, in this embodiment, "jackpot" means a state in which execution of a jackpot game (special game) is determined in the jackpot determination. The "jackpot game" is a round game in which the big winning holes (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) are changed from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined manner, and a predetermined number of times ( For example, 4 times, 10 times, etc.), it means a game state that is advantageous for a player who can easily win prize balls.

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning mouth (first big winning mouth 50, second big winning mouth 56) in each round game are predetermined, Even so, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) enter the big winning hole, one round game ends. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) having different degrees of advantage for the player.

Also, "small hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute a small hit game (special game) in the big hit determination. The "small winning game" means that a player who plays a game in which the big winning hole (second big winning hole 56) is changed from the closed state to the open state in a more disadvantageous manner than the big winning game can easily win prize balls. A game state that is advantageous to the player.

The maximum opening time (1.8 seconds) of the large winning opening in the small winning game is a predetermined time, but even before the maximum opening time is reached, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the big winning opening. When (for example, 10) wins (enters a ball), the small hit game ends. In addition, unlike the big winning game, the game state does not change only by executing the small winning game.

Auxiliary game determination is based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44 (entrance ball), normal pattern determination information (random number for hit determination, random value for normal pattern determination, random value for normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) It corresponds to determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the obtained general pattern determination information. It should be noted that when the auxiliary game determination is performed, the normal symbol display device 62 performs normal symbol fluctuation display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the normal symbol stop display for notifying the determination result is performed.

The normal symbol display device 62 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of normal symbols. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (hitting mode or losing mode) for notifying the result of the auxiliary game determination.

It should be noted that the term "hit" in the present embodiment refers to a state in which it is determined that an auxiliary game (hitting game) is to be executed in the auxiliary game determination. "Auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (winning game) are predetermined, even before reaching the maximum opening number and maximum opening time, the second starting port 47 When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) win a prize (entering a ball), the auxiliary game (hitting game) ends. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game state in which the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special symbols are likely to be established. In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (hitting games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided.

The first special symbol reservation display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of special symbol determination information (first reservation) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45. It is for displaying the number of first reservations (U1), and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of first reservations. It should be noted that although up to four first reservations are stored, the number may be less or more than four.
An example of the display mode in the 1st special design reservation indicator 63 is demonstrated. In the first special symbol reservation display device 63, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs are extinguished, and when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED is lit and the right LED is extinguished, When the number of holds is "2", the left and right LEDs light up; when the number of holds is "3", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up; LED blinks.

The second special symbol reservation display device 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of special symbol determination information (second reservation) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47. It is for displaying the number of second reservations (U2), and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of second reservations. It should be noted that although up to four second reservations are stored, the number may be less or more than four, and the second reservations may not be stored.
An example of the display mode in the second special symbol reservation display 64 will be described. In the second special symbol reservation display 64, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs are extinguished, and when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED is lit and the right LED is extinguished, When the number of holds is "2", the left and right LEDs light up; when the number of holds is "3", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up; LED blinks.

The normal pattern reservation display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of normal pattern determination information (normal pattern reservation) stored when the game ball wins (passes) in the normal pattern gate 44. It lights up or blinks in a manner that indicates the number of normal map reservations. It should be noted that, although the maximum number of normal pattern reservations is stored up to 4, it may be less than or greater than 4, and the normal pattern reservations may not be stored.

Note that the first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, if the big hit is determined to be a big hit, numbers such as "3" and "7" are displayed stopped, and if it is determined to be a small hit, alphabets such as "A" and "C" are displayed. It is preferable to stop display, and when it is determined that the result is a failure, to stop display "-", and to repeat extinguishing and "-" during variable display.

The round number indicator 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a big win state (special game) occurs, and the LEDs are turned on in a predetermined manner to indicate the number of rounds at the start of the big win game. Lighting is started, the lighting of the LED is continued during the jackpot game, and the LED is turned off when the jackpot game ends. For example, if the jackpot game has four rounds, only the leftmost LED lights up, and if the jackpot game has ten rounds, all the LEDs light up.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and displays a right-handed display that prompts the user to shoot a game ball toward the right game area (so-called righthanded) during a big win state (special game) or a time-saving game state. The LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game) and during the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described later is set. is turned on, and when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. Thus, since the state confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (surface) of the game machine, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. It is possible to easily check whether there is The installation position of the status confirmation display 68 may be the front (surface) of the game machine 1, and may be installed in other places.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the mode is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. may be recognizably displayed. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be flashed. and vice versa.

Also, in this embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, the first special symbol reservation display device 63, the second special symbol reservation display device 64, the round number display device 66, right-handed indicators 67, etc. are off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be illuminated.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the effect space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided in the lower part of the effect space 40a. In front of the device 70, a second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) made of a liquid crystal display formed smaller in size and display area than the first image display device 70 is provided. , a movable effect device 73 for executing an action effect is provided, and a variation notification LED 59 for notifying the variable display state of the special symbol is provided in the right part of the effect space 40a.

In the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, various effects are displayed according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting demo effect performed while the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, a variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbols 70a performed during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols, and the execution of the jackpot game. There are jackpot performances that are held inside. In addition, the first image display device 70 is provided with a plurality of layers (layers), and a plurality of images may be displayed on different layers.

In addition, the second image display device 71 can perform a moving effect by being moved by a liquid crystal moving device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, a motor, etc., while the first image display device 70 is executing a variable effect. It has become.

Specifically, between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and a rendering position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70, the vertical direction is changed. It is designed to perform a movement effect by moving (rising, descending) to. The moving direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-rear direction, or may be configured such that the movement effect is performed by operating the effect button 17 .

In the display unit (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a variable display area for displaying three production patterns 70a (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern) and execution of variable production A mode display area or the like indicating the production mode related to is formed.

In addition, the effect pattern 70a is composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", and the variable display of special patterns executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61 is performed. The variable display is started in response to the start of the special symbols, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbols. As the effect pattern 70a, patterns representing alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be used.

The effect pattern 70a is stop-displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a mode (losing mode, big win mode, small win mode) for notifying the result of the big hit determination. The big winning mode and the small winning mode are combinations of the same effect symbols 70a such as "777" and "555", and the losing mode is other modes.

The variable display mode of the effect pattern 70a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolled in the horizontal direction, or may be switched on the spot or rotated (rotated). good.

In addition, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device according to the result of the big hit determination. By being displayed in 71, the player's expectation for the execution of the jackpot game (special game) is heightened.

The first image display device 70 includes a first reserved icon display area 70B for displaying the number of first reserved icons (first reserved information) corresponding to the first reserved number (U1) in the normal game state, which will be described later, and , Second pending icon display area 70D for displaying the number of second pending icons (second pending information) corresponding to the second pending number (U2) in the time saving game state described later, and the variable effect is being executed The icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) indicating that, the first pending number display area 70E for numerically displaying the first pending number (U1), and the second pending number (U2) A second pending number display area 70F and the like for numerically displaying are formed.

The first pending icon display area 70B includes a first display section 70B1 (first area), a second display section 70B2 (second area), and a third display section 70B3 (third area) from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. , and the fourth display portion 70B4 (fourth area), and the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number (U1) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 to the fourth display portion 70B4. Is displayed.

Specifically, the first display portion 70B1 displays a first pending icon indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70B2 displays the second In the third display portion 70B3, a first reserved icon indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and in the third display portion 70B3, the first special symbol in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. A first pending icon indicating a pending memory is displayed, and a first pending icon indicating a first pending memory in which variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display portion 70B4.

The second pending icon display area 70D includes, from the left, a first display portion 70D1 (first area), a second display portion 70D2 (second area), a third display portion 70D3 (third area), a fourth display portion 70D4 ( 4th area), and the number of second pending icons corresponding to the second pending number (U2) is displayed in the first display portion 70D1 to the fourth display portion 70D4.

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays the second pending icon indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70D2 displays the second In the third display portion 70D3, a second holding icon indicating the second holding memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and in the third display portion 70D3, the second special symbol in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. A second pending icon indicating a pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display portion 70D4 displays a second pending icon indicating a second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above the pedestal image for clearly distinguishing it from the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D. The icon is displayed as follows.

Specifically, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a), the first suspended icons displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B move toward the icon display area 70C one by one. By moving (shifting), the first pending icon displayed in the first display portion 70B1 is moved (shifted) to the icon display area 70C to become the icon, and the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon disappears (deletes) at the end of

Also, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a), the second suspended icon displayed in the second suspended icon display area 70D moves one by one (shift ), and the second pending icon displayed in the first display unit 70D1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C to become the icon, and at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a) The icon disappears (deletes). In addition, the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a).

In addition, in the embodiment of the present invention, the first image display device 70 performs the variable display of the production pattern 70a. You may perform the variable display of the production|presentation design 70a.

The movable effect device 73 has an operable first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b. By causing the second movable member 73b to perform a predetermined action, it is possible to execute an action effect. In addition, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, so that it is possible to emit light in a predetermined manner during execution of the action effect. . The board illumination device 74 is provided with a board lamp 74b for causing the game board 5 to emit light and a movable member lamp 73c for causing the movable effect device 73 to emit light.

Specifically, the first movable member 73a is positioned at a standby position (first position) near the end (upper side) of the first image display device 70 and at a center side (lower side) of the first image display device 70. It moves (rises and descends) between the presenting position (second position). The second movable member 73b moves between a waiting position (first position) covering a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and an effect position retreating from the front of the first movable member 73a. .

The variation notification LED 59 is composed of full-color LEDs, and is provided with a first variation notification LED 59a corresponding to the first special symbol and a second variation notification LED 59b corresponding to the second special symbol. The first variation notification LED 59a starts a change in color (variation display of the first special symbol) corresponding to the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the color corresponding to the stop of the variation display of the first special symbol. By stopping the change (variation display of the first special symbol), it is notified whether or not the first special symbol is variably displayed. The second variation notification LED 59b starts changing the color (variation display of the second special symbol) in response to the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, and changes the color in response to the stop of the variation display of the second special symbol. By stopping the change (variation display of the second special symbol), it is notified whether or not the second special symbol is variably displayed.

In addition, the combination of the stop-displayed production design 70a and the first special design notifies the result of the fluctuation display (jackpot judgment) of the first special design, and the combination of the stop-displayed production design 70a and the second special design. You may make it alert|report the result of the variable display (special game range) of a 2nd special design. In addition, the result of the variable display of the first special symbol (jackpot determination) is notified only by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the variable display of the second special symbol (jackpot determination) is notified only by the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed. You may make it alert|report a result.

In addition, instead of performing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the first variation notification LED 59a and the second variation notification LED 59b, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed on the first image display device 70 or the second special symbol. The two-image display device 71 may be used for variable display.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), a game supplied from an island facility, etc. A main control device 110A containing a game ball storage part 96 for storing balls and supplying them to a payout device 95, a main control board 110, a payout control device 120A containing a payout control board 120, and a performance control board 130 are built in. A performance control device 130A, a power supply device 160A containing a power supply board 160, and a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collecting device such as a hall computer) are provided.

In addition, an opening and closing door type cover member 23 is provided that opens and closes the left and right sides in the left and right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire production control device from the rear. The production control device 130A includes the volume of the production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, an image display device, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74). A selector switch 22 is provided for switching between adjustment modes related to the adjustment of the amount of light.

On the surface side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a stage of clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or the degree of advantage of the game (jackpot judgment RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value (probability of judging a jackpot), and inputting a signal for shifting to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, by operating the setting key. A setting key switch 112a, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped, and other electronic components are mounted.

The information display 113 is composed of four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) arranged in the horizontal direction. The two 7-segment displays 113a and 113b from the left constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information, and the two 7-segment displays 113c and 113d from the right constitute setting. A numerical value segment is configured to display numerical information indicating numerical values of values and performance information (see FIG. 115).

(Structure of game board)
Next, referring to FIG. 70, the configuration of the game board 5 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5. FIG.

The game board 5 is composed of a board unit 500 forming the front side of the game board 5 and a rear unit 501 forming the rear side of the game board 5 .

The board unit 500 has a game board 500a made of transparent resin on which the game area 5a is formed on the surface by the inner rails 35 and the outer rails 36 described above, and a window is formed so that the rear can be viewed. .

And inside the game area 5a of the game board 500a, the above-described decorative frame 40, the general winning opening 43, the normal figure gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), the first start opening 45 (first start opening detection switch 45a), the variable Starting portion 46 (second starting port 47, second starting port detection switch 47a, second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b), first variable winning portion 49 (first big winning port 50, first big winning port detection switch 50a, First big winning opening opening/closing member 51, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, specific area 53, specific area detection switch 53a, channel switching solenoid 52b, discharge port 54), and second variable winning part 55 (second A large winning opening 56, a second large winning opening detection switch 56a, a second large winning opening opening/closing member 57, and a second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are provided, and the main information display 69 described above is provided outside the game area 5a. is provided.

A certificate stamp plate 502 to which a certificate stamp with identification information unique to the game machine 1 is attached is provided at the lower right portion of the game board 500a so as to be rotatable in the left-right direction about the left side. At the four corners of 500a, fixtures 503a for detachably attaching board unit 500 and back unit 501 are provided.

The fixture 503a located at the lower right of the game board 500a is normally covered with the certificate stamp plate 502, and is exposed by pinching the right side of the certificate stamp plate with the fingertips and rotating it leftward.

The fixture 503a includes an operation portion located on the front side of the game board 500a, a shaft portion extending from the operation portion to the back side of the game board 500a, and a shaft portion provided at the tip of the shaft portion and on the back side of the game board 500a. and an engaging piece positioned on the side thereof, and the engaging piece changes between a first state (non-engagement posture) and a second state (engagement posture) by operating the operating portion. there is

The back unit 501 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with an open front surface, and has a unit base 501a formed with a window portion for allowing the rear side to be visually recognized. , a movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b), etc. are provided, and a first image display device 70 is provided behind the window. 130 A of production control devices are provided in the rear side of the 1st image display device 70, and 110 A of main control devices are provided under 130A of production control devices.

At the four corners of the unit base 501a, fixing receiving portions 503b are provided for detachably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 by engaging with the engaging pieces of the fixtures 503a.

When the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 are attached, the certificate stamp plate 502 is opened and the engaging pieces of the four fixtures 503a are set to the first state (non-engaging posture). A male connector CN provided at the tip of a harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided in the panel unit 500 is passed through a through hole HA provided in the right side of the back unit 501 . After that, when the rear surface of the board unit 500 and the front surface of the rear surface unit 501 are brought into contact with each other, the engaging piece of the fixture 503a enters the fixing receiving portion 503b.

In this state, when the operation portions of the four fixtures 503a are rotated to set the engagement pieces to the second state (engagement posture), the engagement pieces are engaged with the fixed receiving portions 503b, and the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are connected. is fixed. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A, and the certificate stamp plate 502 is closed, the panel unit 500 Then, the installation work of the rear unit 501 is completed.

On the other hand, when removing the board unit 500 and the back unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A is pulled out, and the certificate stamp plate 502 is opened. Thereafter, when the operation portions of the four fixtures 503a are rotated to bring the engaging pieces into the first state, the engagement between the engaging pieces and the fixing receiving portion 503b is released.

In this state, when the board surface unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are separated from each other, the engagement pieces of the four fixtures 503a are withdrawn from the fixing receiving portions 503b. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, the work of removing the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 is completed.

In this embodiment, in addition to replacing only the game board 5 (a set of the board unit 500 and the back unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the viewpoint of the game machine 1 like new. Therefore, here, the attachment and detachment of the board surface unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 in a state in which the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3 has been described. It is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the above.

Specifically, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3, only the back unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via the lock mechanism, and is locked. By preventing the board unit 500 from being fixed by the mechanism, only the board unit 500 can be replaced (like new). Therefore, when only the board unit 500 is to be replaced, it is preferable to perform the above-described removal work after opening the glass frame 4 .

(Overall block diagram of game machine)
Next, the control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described with reference to the block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 in FIG. FIG. 71 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control board 110 that controls overall progress of the game (basic action), and a payout control that controls the payout of game balls based on receipt of a payout control command from the main control board 110. A board 120, an effect control board 130 for controlling a game-related effect based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and a power supply board for supplying power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130. 160 is provided.

In addition, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to transmit and receive commands in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is controlled by the main control board 110. It is configured to be able to transmit commands only in one direction to the board 130 .

The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs and the like, a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a main control unit as a one-chip microcomputer equipped with input/output ports. It has 110m.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 110m include an out ball detection switch 39a, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first start opening detection switch 45a, a second start opening detection switch 47a, and opening and closing of the second start opening. Solenoid 48b, first big winning opening detection switch 50a, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, specific area detection switch 53a, second big winning opening detection switch 56a, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b , magnetic detection sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a, first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol suspension display 63, second special symbol suspension display 64 , normal symbol holding display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, state confirmation display 68, game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control A substrate 120 and an effect control substrate 130 are connected.

The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and uses the main RAM 110c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to games. As a result, control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, indicators, etc.), and transmission and reception of various control commands. It performs control processing and the like for transmitting game information to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer) via the game information output terminal board 90 .

In the "game information", the starting opening winning signal output each time a game ball wins in the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are stopped. A pattern confirmation signal output every time, a jackpot signal output during a jackpot game, an opening signal output during a round game (opening of the big winning opening), output over a time-saving game state described later and a security signal output when a situation (RWM clear, error, etc.) that poses a problem (threat) in terms of security of the game machine 1 occurs.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory area of the main ROM 110b includes a game ROM area in which programs and data relating to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area in which programs and data relating to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored. An unused area of 16 bytes or more in which "0" is stored together with the above, a ROM comment area in which data such as the program title and version are stored, and a vector table in which the start address of the timer interrupt process described later is set. An area and an HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and end address of the access prohibited area are set are arranged in this order.

The game ROM area includes a game program area in which a program relating to the progress of the game is stored, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data relating to the progress of the game. A game data area to be stored and a second unused area to which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The information ROM area includes an information program area in which a program related to the performance display of the game machine is stored, an unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the performance display of the game machine. are arranged in order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a game RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing the game program and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when the information program is executed are arranged in order. there is

The game RWM area consists of a game work area used as a work by the game program, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data being processed by the game program is temporarily stored. A game stack area to be temporarily saved and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The game work area includes a set value area for storing set values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (a checksum to be described later) for judging an abnormality in the RWM area, and a judgment information area that changes according to the progress of the game. Game data areas for storing game data (variation count, various time saving state flags, various time saving counts, etc., which will be described later) are arranged in order.

The information RWM area consists of an information work area used by the information program as a work area, an unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data being processed by the information program is temporarily saved. Information stack areas are arranged in order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information relating to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information relating to various error determinations are arranged in this order.

Hereinafter, a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for performing processing based on a game program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for performing processing based on an information program will be described. Describe relationships.

When the main CPU 110a performs a process based on a game program, it basically refers to the game data area and, while using the game RWM area as a work, refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area. ing. Also, when performing processing based on an information program, basically the data area for information is referenced, and the contents of the RWM area for information are referenced and updated while using the RWM area for information as a work. ing.

However, in the process based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to. Further, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

When performing processing based on the information program, after the flag register is saved in the game RWM area in the processing based on the game program, the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program. The flag register is returned from the game RWM area immediately after the process based on the program is completed and the game program is returned to.

Immediately after the information program is started, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set. immediately before the information program ends, all registers used in the game program are returned from the information RWM area, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is returned.

By doing so, the data used by the game program can be protected when processing based on the information program is performed, and inconvenience will occur when returning from the information program to the game program. will disappear.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launcher 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The input/output ports of the payout control unit 121 include an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 95, and a switch 95a for paying out game balls from the payout device 95. A ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that a game ball is stored is connected to the payout motor 95b and the game ball storage portion 96 of the above.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and uses the payout RAM 121c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing regarding the payout of game balls. Thereby, control processing for paying out game balls from the payout device 95 according to the payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for transmitting the command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, etc. conduct.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input/output port, and the like (not shown).
The input/output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the ball feeding solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the firing volume 15b, the firing solenoid 28b, and the like.

When the shooting control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15 by means of a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the energization of the ball feed solenoid 11b and the shooting solenoid 28b, and launches the ball. When the detection signal from the volume 15b detects that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is driven and the firing solenoid is adjusted so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. 28b is driven to shoot game balls (99.9 balls/minute).

The production control board 130 is based on the reception of the production control command from the production control unit 130m and the production control unit 130m. A display control unit 140 that performs control processing for audio output, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing for various light emitting members (such as LEDs) and various drive sources (such as motors) based on the reception of the effect control command from the effect control unit 130m. It has

The performance control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

The effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output ports of the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding the effect while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area. Thereby, control processing for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, control processing for transmitting the effect control command based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, various input devices (detection switch etc.) according to the detection signal from control processing, and control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.).

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m, controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 to display a predetermined image, or outputs a predetermined sound to the audio output device 9. and control the output of sound.

The display control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 that comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on the reception of an effect control command from the effect control unit 130m, and a display control command (display list) from the overall control unit 141. The image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on the reception, the CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and the reception of the voice control command from the general control unit 141 It has an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) for controlling the audio output device 9 based on the data, and an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored.

The integrated control unit 141 includes an integrated CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 141b that stores an integrated control program, an integrated RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 (VDP), and an audio control unit 148 (audio It has an input/output port to which a LSI) is connected.

The supervising CPU 141a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the supervising control program stored in the supervising ROM 141b, and uses the supervising RAM 141c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the effects. As a result, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing effect images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting the display control command (display list) to the display control unit 140, and an audio output device 9, and performs control processing and the like for generating an audio control command for instructing the effect sound to be output from 9 and transmitting it to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit 150 include the frame illumination device 10, the effect button driving device 17b (the effect button driving motor, the effect button vibration motor), the button lamp 17c, the start lamp 75, the movable effect device 73, the board A lighting device 74 is connected.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and uses the lamp RAM 150c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to effects. As a result, the control processing of the frame illumination device 10, the effect button drive device 17b, the button lamp 17c, the starting port lamp 75, the movable effect device 73 and the board illumination device 74 is performed.

The power board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, Effect control board 130 and various electronic components) (corresponding to power supply means). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (occurrence of a power failure), and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the drop in the power supply voltage (occurrence of a power failure). It has a power failure detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 in the event of a power failure (power failure).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state for supplying main power to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping. A power switch is provided so as to be operable by a game store clerk, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value. Output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped when the power supply voltage exceeds a predetermined value during output.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when power is supplied to the game machine. supply. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c are retained even at the time of power failure (power failure), and after recovery from the power failure (power failure), the control state of the game can be restored to the state before the power failure (power failure). can be done.

In addition, although the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control unit 130m, the payout control board 120 and A backup power supply may be supplied to the effect control unit 130m. Also, the backup power may be supplied to only one of the payout control board 120 and the effect control section 130m.

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, there are a "normal game state (non-time-saving game state)" and a "time-saving game state" as states relating to the ease of winning a game ball into the second starting port 47.

The initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to "normal game state". Also, during the jackpot game, the "normal game state" is set, but since the jackpot game is being executed, the game state is different from the normal game state.

Here, "normal game state (non-time-saving game state)" means that in the auxiliary game determination performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal figure gate 44, the probability of being determined as a hit is 1/256. It refers to a game state in which the average time of variable display of normal symbols is set to about 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set to 0.180 seconds when winning is won.

On the other hand, in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of being determined to be a hit is set as high as 255/256, the average time of variable display of normal symbols is set to about 3 seconds, and it is determined to be a hit. The opening time of the second starting port 47 is set to 6 seconds in this case, so that the consumption of game balls is suppressed compared to the normal game state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, the transition from the normal game state to the time-saving game state is performed after the jackpot game is finished.

In addition, the "time-saving game state" includes a normal time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game described later (via the jackpot game), and establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear is executed, based on the end of the jackpot game A special time-saving game state that is controlled (without going through a jackpot game) by reaching a specified number of times (500 times in this embodiment) of the special symbol fluctuation display executed from 0 clear of the number of fluctuations) is set.

It should be noted that the "time-saving game state" is set to be more advantageous than the "normal game state" in terms of the average fluctuation time of normal symbols, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the probability of being determined as winning. , the average variation time of normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of being determined as winning may be set to be advantageous.

Although the probability of winning is determined to be 1/256 in the normal game state, the probability of being determined to be winning may be set to 0/256 so as not to be determined to be winning. In this case, the auxiliary game is not executed in the normal game state, and the game ball does not enter (win) the second starting port 47 .

(Various storage areas of main RAM)
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 72(a) is a special figure in which the special figure determination information acquired when the game ball wins (enters) in the first start port 45 and/or the second start port 47 is stored. FIG. 72(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special figure determination information storage area, and FIG. 72(c) is a diagram showing the determination information storage area, and FIG. It is a general pattern determination information storage area in which the general pattern determination information acquired when passing is stored, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), the special figure determination information storage area stores special figure determination information obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45. First special figure determination information holding storage A second special figure determination information holding storage area for storing special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47, and a special figure determination information during execution of the variable display. It is divided into a special figure determination information storage area, and the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and the second special figure determination information reservation storage area are each divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit.

The first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area are the first display unit 70B1 and the second display of the first reservation icon display area 70B. They correspond to the portion 70B2, the third display portion 70B3, and the fourth display portion 70B4, respectively. Also, the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit and the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage area are the first display unit 70D1, the second display unit 70D2 of the second holding icon display area 70D, They correspond to the third display section 70D3 and the fourth display section 70D4, respectively.

Then, the number of special figure determination information (reservation information) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information storage area is the first number of reservations (U1), and these special figure determination information A corresponding number of first pending icons are displayed in the first display portion 70B1 to the fourth display portion 70B4 of the first pending icon display area 70B. In addition, the number of special figure determination information (reservation information) stored in the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information is the second number of reservations (U2), and the number corresponding to these determination information Suspended icons are displayed in the first display portion 70D1 to the fourth display portion 70D4 of the second suspended icon display area 70D.

Moreover, the 0th memory|storage part which is a special figure determination information execution memory|storage area corresponds to the said icon display area 70C. Then, the icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 72(b), each storage unit includes a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random number value and a special symbol determination random number storage area for storing a special symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area, a reach determination random number storage area for storing a reach determination random number value, and a special figure variation pattern determination random number storage area for storing a special figure variation pattern determination random number value.

Then, when the game ball wins (entrance) to the first start port 45 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is not stored in the first special figure determination information holding storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in a storage unit with a small number. Also, when the game ball enters the second start port 47 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the smallest number in which the special figure determination information is not stored in the second special figure determination information holding storage area The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit.

The 0th storage unit, which is a special figure determination information execution storage area, is a special figure stored in the first storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area when the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied. The determination information is shifted and referred to for executing the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage part of the second special symbol determination information holding storage area is shifted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. will be referenced to execute the

As shown in FIG. 72(c), the normal pattern determination information storage area stores the normal pattern determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44, and the normal pattern determination information storage area in which the normal pattern determination information is stored. It is divided into a general pattern determination information storage area in which the general pattern determination information being displayed is stored, and the general pattern determination information holding storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively. In addition, the number of general pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the general pattern determination information reservation storage area is the number of general pattern determination information.

As shown in FIG. 72(d), each storage unit includes a hit determination random number storage area for storing a hit determination random number value, and a normal symbol determination random number storage area for storing a normal symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area and a random number storage area for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern for storing the random number value for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44 and the normal pattern determination information is acquired, the normal pattern determination information is not stored in the normal pattern determination information holding storage area. Normal figure determination information is stored.

The 0th storage unit, which is the normal pattern determination information execution storage area, shifts the normal pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area when the start condition for the variable display of the normal pattern is satisfied. It will be referred to for executing the variable display of normal symbols.

(flowchart)
Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be described using a flowchart.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing main processing in the main control board 110 . This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting processing in step S10. Specifically, preparation processing for starting game control, setting change processing for changing set values based on a setting change operation, and initialization of a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c based on an RWM clear operation. RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming setting values based on setting confirmation operation, various drive sources provided in the board unit 500 (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching Drive source initial operation processing and the like for initializing the solenoid 52b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are performed. Details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the random number value for special symbol determination and the random number value for reach determination. Update the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop in the power supply from the power interruption detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 (for example, the power supply that has been supplied at 24 volts drops below 18 volts). Determines whether or not a signal is input. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input continues for a predetermined period of time, it is determined that a complete power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S54. Assuming that there is a possibility, the process proceeds to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interrupt, and in step S55, issues a power cut-off designation command for notifying the payout control board 120 that power cut-off processing has started. Send. As a result, the payout control board 120 that has received the power cut-off designation command transmits the remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls to be paid out stored in the payout RAM 121c.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has been received. If the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has not been received, the process proceeds to step S57, and if the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has been received, the process proceeds to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the standby time for waiting for the reception of the remaining payout designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58 assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 cannot be performed.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in a payout counter set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, when the remaining payout designation command is received, the remaining payout specified by the remaining payout designation command is saved, and when the remaining payout designation command is not received, the remaining Save "0" as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here is referred to in a payout control process of timer interruption, which will be described later, and a command specifying the number of payouts corresponding to the remaining number of payouts is transmitted to the payout control board 120 after the power is restored. become.

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operation of various displays and various drive sources (motor, solenoid) is stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a predetermined area of the game RWM area. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine data abnormality in the game RWM area by the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data of the main RAM 110c is backed up (restored power supply) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S62 prohibits RWM access, After that, wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed. When the supply of the operating power is restarted after the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if the setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, and RWM clear operation are performed for some reason at the time of the momentary power failure, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clear process are not executed. The machine does not operate unintendedly, and the reliability of the game machine can be ensured.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. FIG.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S12, and waits for activation of other control boards in step S13. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, it is determined that the power is restored, and the process proceeds to step S17. If the backup flag is not saved, the first power-on or irregular power restoration The process proceeds to step S18 assuming that the power is restored from the power interruption during execution of S35.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the backup flag saved in the game RWM area.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S19 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, the set value (probability of judging the jackpot), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is changed (updated), and the setting key switch 112a is operated. Performs processing to determine the set value by . After completing this process, the process moves to step S24.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step S21. If the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S22. to move.

If the backup flag is not saved, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal because it is the first power-on or the above-described irregular power recovery, and the process proceeds to step S22. will be transferred.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S23, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S22. Transfer.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing (game program) in step S22. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130 , set interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and after clearing the output port, output an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. and wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing non-recoverable error notification indicating that a non-recoverable error has occurred.

"Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without changing the settings, the error will not be canceled and the setting will not be canceled. The power switch has to be turned on with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Notify of unrecoverable error" is to display an unrecoverable error screen ("This is an unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the image display device recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. , the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or the audio output device 9 indicates that an unrecoverable error has occurred. An error sound (“This is an unrecoverable error” + buzzer sound) is output until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an RWM clear operation in step S23. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clearing operation, the process proceeds to step S24 assuming that the RWM clearing operation is performed, and if there is no RWM clearing operation, the process proceeds to step S27.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing (game program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for initializing the game control state (initializing areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing (game program). Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, current A process for initially operating the path switching solenoid 52b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for a predetermined period is performed. Details of initial operations of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S33. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

"Power-on notification" refers to displaying an initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135") at the time of power-on to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, or displaying a frame Illumination device 10 for disk and illumination device 74 for disk are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the voice output device 9 indicates that the RWM area has been initialized It is to output a power-on notification sound (“RWM cleared” + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, the RWM area is cleared on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. You may make it display the display which alert|reports that.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S28 assuming that the setting confirmation mode is entered, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S30.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S28. Specifically, a process for displaying the set values saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113 and ending the confirmation of the set values by operating the setting key switch 112a. I do.

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S29. Specifically, the above-described various driving sources (the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the flow path switching solenoid 52b, the second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are initialized over a predetermined period. Perform processing to make it work. Details of initial operations of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (0 clearing) the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing power supply recovery notification indicating that the setting confirmation notification or the like is terminated and the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption.

"Power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or The lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (eg, white) for a predetermined period (eg, 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 indicates that the power has been restored (from a power failure). It is to output a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

The main CPU 110a transmits other commands (a special symbol storage designation command, a normal symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130 in step S32. As a result, the production control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols, and the processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the image display device is performed.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S33. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. In addition, this set value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted. Also, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time the variable display of the special symbol is started, or may be transmitted each time the big winning game is started.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S34, and permits all interrupts in step S35 to control the progress of the game (main control). A timer interrupt of the board 110 is started, and the current initialization process is finished.

In other words, from the time when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the game progress control is in a pre-start state before the start of the game progress control. It will be in a state where it is possible to play.

In this way, the state confirmation display 68, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 70, and the second By checking the image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 74, it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed. It is possible to recognize that it is inside. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the gaming machine 1 .

The power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted including information indicating the current game state. You may make it transmit the game state designation|designated command which shows.

In addition, by not determining whether or not there is a setting change flag, even if the previous power failure occurred during setting change, the unrecoverable error process may not be performed.

In addition, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either checksum is abnormal, the process may be shifted to unrecoverable error processing. .

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
The timer interrupt processing (game program and information program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110. FIG.

In this timer interrupt process, after the initial setting process of the main process is completed, a clock pulse is input from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds). , and controls the progress of the game.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, performs time control processing (game program). Specifically, it performs a process of updating various timer counters such as the stop time of the special symbol and the opening time of the special electric accessory.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a performs specific random number update processing (game program). Specifically, the random number for judging the big hit, the random number for judging the special pattern, the random number for judging the special pattern variation pattern, the random number for judging the hit, the random number for judging the normal pattern, and the random number for judging the regular pattern fluctuation pattern are updated. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are incremented by +1 and updated. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the countermeasure The initial random value to be used is set as a new cycle initial value, and the random value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs initial random number update processing (game program). Specifically, similar to step S30, the process of updating the initial random number value for judging a big hit, the initial random number value for judging a special symbol, the initial random number value for judging a hit, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an input control process (game program) in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 56a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a. , determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the specific area detection switch 53a, and sets predetermined data if there is an input. Details of the input control process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a special figure special electric control process (game program) in step S300. Specifically, determination of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47, the fluctuation display of the first special design or the second special design, the big winning opening Processing such as opening/closing (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) and setting of the game state is performed. In addition, the detail of special figure special electric control processing is mentioned later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a general/universal electric power control process (game program). Specifically, processing such as determination of acquired general pattern determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the general pattern gate 44, normal symbol fluctuation display, opening and closing of the second start port 47 (auxiliary game), and the like are performed. In addition, the details of the general map general electric control processing are mentioned later.

It should be noted that the type of normal pattern per determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, the type of the normal pattern loss is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various normal patterns determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, and the selection ratio of various losing normal patterns are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The main CPU 110a performs payout control processing (game program) in step S500. Specifically, various winning ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c are referred to, and various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second A process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to the big winning opening 56) to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes a process for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95 .

The main CPU 110a performs abnormality determination processing (game program) in step S600. Specifically, various errors (illegal winning errors such as game balls winning in the second start port 47 when not in the auxiliary game, game balls winning in the big winning port when not in the special game, various winning Abnormal prize-winning error where the number of game balls that have won a prize does not match the number of game balls discharged from the prize-winning ball flow path, a magnetic error that detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period by the magnetic detection sensor 57a, A radio wave error in which an abnormal radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor 58a for a predetermined period of time, a door open error in which the open detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and an RWM clear switch 111a during game progress control. or an operation error in which the setting key switch 112a is operated) is generated, and a process for transmitting an error designation command corresponding to the generated error to the effect control board 130 is performed. As a result, the effect control board 130 executes processing for performing error notification.

The main CPU 110a performs data creation processing (game program) in step S700. Specifically, the starting opening opening/closing data output to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the large winning opening opening/closing data output to the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b, and the first special symbol Display device 60, special design display data output to second special design display device 61, normal design display data output to normal design display device 62, first special design reservation display device 63, second special design reservation display device 64 A process for creating data such as special symbol reserved display data to be output and normal symbol reserved display data to be output to the normal symbol reserved display device 65 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs external information data creation processing in step S720. Specifically, processing for creating game information data to be output from the game information output terminal board 90 is performed. Details of the external information data creation process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (game program) in step S750. Specifically, a port output for outputting signals such as the starting opening opening/closing data created in step S700 and the big winning opening opening/closing data, or outputting a signal such as game information data created in step S720 Processing, display output processing for outputting signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol reservation display data, normal symbol reservation display data, payout state confirmation for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120 Sending a specified command to the payout control board 120 or referring to a prize ball counter (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) to be described later, a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning ports to the payout control board 120. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100 .

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs an information program calling process. Specifically, after the interrupt is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and the processing for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the normal medium payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into various winning openings (general winning opening, large winning opening starting opening) during normal gaming state, out during normal gaming state For counting game performance information such as the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the ball detection switch 39a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a regardless of the game state. process.

Note that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game performance information that is not affected by changes in the set values (unrelated to the set values). By counting , it becomes possible to calculate performance information (a normal base value, which will be described later) that excludes the influence of the setting value, and it is possible to make use of this in grasping the performance of the game machine 1 .

The main CPU 110a performs normal base value calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number/normal medium out number) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the RWM area for information is calculated. Save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area of .

The game interval is updated each time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game interval, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game interval two times before, and a normal base value in the game interval three times before A fourth area is provided for doing so, and the normal base values for four game intervals including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area are displayed on the information display device 113 while being switched every five seconds. Performs processing for setting performance display data. Details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to a test facility used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various displays, and processing for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return processing. Specifically, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area, the interrupt is permitted, and the process for returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, in the pre-start state (during the setting change mode, during the RWM clear mode, and during the setting confirmation mode) before the progress control of the game is started, the timer interruption is not executed. Since the counting of the number and the number of outs, the calculation of the normal base value, and the display of the normal base value are not performed, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control board.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
The input control processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing input control processing in the main control board 110. FIG.

First, in step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and pays out the prize balls from the payout device 95. process.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, whether the detection signal is input from the first big winning hole detection switch 50a or the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, that is, the game ball wins the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole 56 It is determined whether or not the game has been played, and processing for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95 is performed.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal is input from the first start opening detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start opening 45, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. Along with performing the processing for, the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information is performed. The details of the first starting opening detection switch input process will be described later.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the second starting port detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 47, and a prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. Along with performing the processing for, the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information is performed. The details of the second start opening detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. Specifically, whether the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, the processing for determining whether or not the game ball has passed through the general pattern gate 44, and acquiring and storing the general pattern determination information I do.

In step S260, the main CPU 110a performs specific area detection switch input processing, and ends the current input control processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 53, and sets predetermined data. Details of the specific area detection switch input process will be described later.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first start opening detection switch input processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-ball counter used for the 3-ball prize by adding the data indicating the 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, determines the special figure. Acquire information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, random number for special figure variation pattern determination).

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first pending number (U1) is less than four in step S230-4. If the first reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-5, and if the first reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, this first start port detection switch input process exit.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first pending number (U1) and updates it (U1←U1+1). The corresponding first special symbol storage specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol memory specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number (U1) is displayed on the image display device.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a sequentially searches for a free storage unit from the first storage unit in the first special figure determination information storage area, and stores the special feature acquired in step S230-3 in the free storage unit. The figure determination information is stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in a normal game state (normal game state). When it is in the normal game state, the processing is moved to step S230-9 as prefetching processing of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, and the process is not in the normal game state. In this case, the current first start opening detection switch input process is terminated as not performing the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 45 .

The main CPU 110a performs a first look-ahead process (pre-determination process) in step S230-9. In this first pre-reading process, select the pre-determination table (see FIG. 89 (a) or FIG. 89 (b)) for pre-reading the special figure determination information (preliminary determination), the special figure determination information acquired this time Prior determination is made before the variation display of 1 special symbol is performed, and a process of generating a first look-ahead designation command for notifying the effect control board 130 of the result of the prior determination (special figure scheduled variation pattern) is performed. Details of the advance determination table will be described later.

Since this "first look-ahead specified command" is information that can specify the special figure scheduled variation pattern, the effect control board 130 uses the first look-ahead specified command to determine the type of special symbol, the judgment result of the jackpot determination, and the special symbol. It is also possible to specify the type, the type of jackpot game or small hit game (number of rounds), and the number of times of time saving (J1, J2, J3) in the time saving game state after the end of the jackpot game.

At step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first prefetch designation command generated at step S230-9 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first look-ahead winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and before the start of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first look-ahead designation command, one or a plurality of variable displays are performed over the jackpot. A pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect, icon change effect) for expecting the execution of the game is executed.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the first pending number (U1) is "4", but it may be larger or smaller than this. Further, the upper limit value of the second reserved number may be smaller than the upper limit value of the second reserved number. Furthermore, the first reservation storage itself may be eliminated by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage section of the first special figure determination information storage area.

(Processing for inputting the second start opening detection switch on the main control board)
The second start opening detection switch input processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing the second starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. FIG.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a has been input. When the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is input, the process proceeds to step S240-2, and when the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is not input, the current first 2 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding data indicating two prize balls to the two prize ball counter used for two prize balls to update the counter, and in step S240-3, determines a special figure. Acquire information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, random number for special figure variation pattern determination).

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second pending number (U2) is less than four in step S240-4. If the second reservation number (U2) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S240-5, and if the second reservation number (U2) is not less than 4, this second start port detection switch input process exit.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second pending number (U2) and updates it (U2←U2+1). A corresponding second special symbol storage specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the second special symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the second reserved icons corresponding to the second reserved number (U2) are displayed on the image display device.

In step S240-7, the main CPU 110a sequentially searches for a free storage unit from the first storage unit in the second special figure determination information storage area, and stores the special feature acquired in step S240-3 in the free storage unit. The figure determination information is stored.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in the time-saving game state. If it is in the time-saving gaming state, the processing is moved to step S240-9 as prefetching processing of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47, and during the non-time-saving gaming state If not, the second start opening detection switch input process is terminated as not performing the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 47.

In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a determines that the remaining number of times of time saving (here, the second number of times of saving time (J2), not the first number of times of saving time (J1) or the third number of times of saving time (J3)) is a predetermined number ( For example, 5 times) or more. If the remaining number of time saving times is a predetermined number or more, the process is moved to step S240-10, and if the remaining number of time saving times is not a predetermined number or more, it is acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47. The second start opening detection switch input process of this time is terminated as not performing the prefetching process of the special figure determination information.

In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a performs a second look-ahead process (pre-determination process). In this second look-ahead process, the pre-determination table (see FIG. 92 (c)) for pre-reading the special figure determination information (preliminary determination) is selected, and the special figure determination information acquired this time is displayed in the second special symbol. Prior determination is performed, and the result of the prior determination (special figure scheduled variation pattern, prefetch information) is performed to generate a second prefetch designation command for notifying the effect control board 130.

Since this "second look-ahead designation command" is information that can specify the determination result of the special figure determination information, the effect control board 130 uses the second look-ahead designation command to determine the type of special symbol, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the special It is also possible to specify the type of symbol, the type of jackpot game or small hit game (number of rounds), and the number of times of saving time (J1, J2, J3) in the normal time saving game state after the end of the jackpot game.

At step S230-11, the main CPU 110a sets the second prefetch designation command generated at step S230-9 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the second look-ahead designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and from before the start of the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second look-ahead designation command, the jackpot game is played over one or a plurality of variation displays. is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the second pending number (U2) is "4", but it may be larger or smaller than this. Also, the upper limit value of the second reserved number may be smaller than the upper limit value of the first reserved number. Furthermore, the second reservation storage itself may be eliminated by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage section of the second special figure determination information storage area.

(Specific area detection switch input processing of the main control board)
The specific area detection switch input processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing specific area detection switch input processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S260-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the specific area detection switch 53a. If the detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a is input, the process proceeds to step S260-2, and if the detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a is not input, the current specific area detection switch input End the process.

In step S260-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current specific area validity period during which passage of game balls to the specific area 53 is valid. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small winning game (conversion game) is in progress. If it is during the small winning game, the process is moved to step S260-3, and if it is not during the specified area effective period, the process is moved to step S260-5.

In step S260-3, the main CPU 110a generates a specific area passage flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, and a specific flag indicating the game state when the game ball passes through the specific area 53. Area passage time game state information (information indicating that it is in the normal game state if the current is in the normal game state, information indicating that it is in the reduced time game state if the current is in the time saving game state) area, and in step S260-4, a specific area passage designation command indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the specific area valid period is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, Terminates the specific area detection switch input process.

As a result, a specific area passage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and a passage notification effect for notifying that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 (execution of a jackpot game) is executed. Therefore, the player can grasp that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In step S260-5, the main CPU 110a sets a specific area passage error designation command indicating that the game ball has passed the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and sets the current specific area. Terminate the detection switch input process.

As a result, a specified area passage error designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and a passage error notification performance for notifying the occurrence of a passage error in which the game ball passes the specified area 53 at an abnormal timing is executed. Therefore, the employee of the game parlor can grasp the occurrence of the passage error and take appropriate measures.

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the special figure special electric control processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special special electric processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special special electric processing data loaded in step S302, executes processing corresponding to the branch destination address, This special figure special electric control processing ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the processing for starting the variable display of the special symbol based on the pending memory (special figure determination information) and the special figure special electric processing data are changed to "1" A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) is executed for performing a process for performing a process for performing the process.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 1, the special figure is stopped and displayed according to the passage of the fluctuation time, and the special figure special electric processing data is changed to "2". A special symbol variation process (step S320) for performing processes and the like is executed.
If the special symbol special electric processing data is 2, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0" if the special symbol is a losing special symbol, and the opening time of the jackpot game is set if the special symbol is a special symbol. Then, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "3", and if it is a small winning special symbol, the special symbol stop processing ( Step S330) is executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the jackpot game processing ( Step S340) is executed.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the special figure special electric processing data is changed to "0" or "3" based on the processing for executing the small winning game and the ending of the small winning game. A small winning game process (step S350) for the purpose is executed.
If the special figure special electric processing data = 5, the jackpot game end processing for performing the processing for ending the jackpot game, the processing for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "0" based on the end of the ending of the jackpot game, etc. (Step S360) is executed.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110. FIG.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. If the special symbols are being variably displayed, the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the special symbols are not being variably displayed, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more in step S310-2. If the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-3, and if the second pending number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-4.

The main CPU 110a updates the second reservation number (U2) by subtracting "1" in step S310-3, and designates special symbol storage corresponding to the second reservation number (U2) after subtraction in step S310-6. The command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores the command in the second special figure determination information storage area. Shift processing of the stored data is performed, and the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special figure determination information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and stored in the 0th storage unit The special figure determination information used in the previous game that was held is erased.

On the other hand, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first pending number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. If the first reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-5, and if the first reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first reservation number (U1) after subtraction. is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8 stores it in the first special symbol reservation storage area. Perform shift processing of the data that has been, to shift the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit ~ fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game is erased.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first reservation number (U1) and the second reservation number (U2) after subtraction are stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. set to As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information holding storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information holding storage area (the second hold number is shifted to the first hold However, the first special figure judgment information holding storage area or the second special figure judgment information holding storage area is shifted (first The number of reservations and the second number of reservations may be subtracted in order of winning), or the first special figure determination information reservation storage area may be prioritized over the second special figure determination information reservation storage area (the first number of reservations may be It may be subtracted with priority over the second reservation number.

In step S311, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a big hit and the stop special figure data of the special symbols based on the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area. Execute the jackpot determination process. The details of the big hit determination process will be described later.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable effect is performed.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure variation pattern determination process for determining a special symbol variation pattern (variation time) based on the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area. I do. The details of the special figure variation pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern type determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special figure variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for determining a variation performance pattern, which is a performance mode of the variation performance performed during the variable display of the special symbols, is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 , to start the variable display of special symbols. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creating process of the step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of the step S800. In the special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, the variable display of the special symbols is performed.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets "1" to the special symbol special electric processing data, and ends the current special symbol storage determination processing. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. When the customer waiting state flag is set, the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is ended, and when the customer waiting state flag is not set, the processing is moved to step S319-2. It should be noted that the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the variable display of special symbols and the special game (jackpot game) are not being executed, but the requirements include that the variable display of normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed. may

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the customer waiting demonstration effect for prompting the player to play is performed.

(Jackpot judgment processing of the main control board)
The jackpot determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing the big win determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting value stored in the setting value area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-2, determines whether or not the jackpot is a big win (whether or not it is a small win). Select the judgment table (see FIG. 83). Details of the big hit determination table will be described later.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a collates the current set value and the random value for judging a big win with the big-hit judging table to judge whether or not it is a big win (whether or not it is a small win). If it is a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-4, and if it is not a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-6.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a sets the game state information at the time of winning the big win in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. A table (see FIG. 84(a)) is selected, and the process proceeds to step S311-9. The details of the special symbol determination table for big hits will be described later.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a collates the current set value and the random number value for big win determination with the big win determination table to determine whether or not it is a small win. If it is a small win, the process moves to step S311-7, and if it is not a small win, it is assumed that the win is lost and the process moves to step S311-8.

In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects the small winning special symbol determination table (see FIG. 84(b)) for determining the type of the small winning special symbol, and shifts the process to step S311-9. In addition, the details of the special symbol determination table for small hits will be described later.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for losing (see FIG. 84(c)) for determining the losing special symbol, and shifts the process to step S311-9. The details of the special symbol determination table for losing will be described later.

In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a collates the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the random number value for special symbol determination with the special symbol determination table for which the jackpot determination is to be performed, A special symbol to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display executed by the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 is determined.

In step S311-10, the main CPU 110a sets the stop special symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S311-9 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the big hit determination process.

(Special pattern judgment table)
FIG. 7(a) is a special symbol determination table for a big hit, which is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined as a big hit, and FIG. 7(b) is determined as a small hit. 84(c) is a special symbol determination table for a small hit that is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when determined to be a loss, and FIG. It is a special symbol determination table for.

As shown in FIGS. 84(a) to (c), the special symbol determination table includes the special symbol type for determining the stop symbol, the random number for special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol determination, and the determination. The stop special figure data indicating the result and the special symbol designation command indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination are associated, and the lighting mode of the LED in the special symbol display is described in the rightmost column for reference.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols in which the jackpot game is not executed. The special pattern "01" is a special jackpot pattern for executing a first jackpot game consisting of three round games, and the special pattern "02" is for executing a second jackpot game consisting of three round games. The special symbol "03" is a big winning special symbol for executing the first big winning game consisting of three round games, and the special symbol "11" consists of ten round games. It is a jackpot pattern for executing the fourth jackpot game. In addition, the special symbol "12" is a special jackpot pattern for executing the fifth jackpot game consisting of 10 round games, and the special pattern "13" is a small hit special pattern for executing the first small prize game. The special symbol "14" is a small winning special symbol for executing the second small winning game, and the special symbol "15" is a small winning special symbol for executing the third small winning game. ing.

Although the details will be described later, the degree of advantage of various jackpot games is the third jackpot game<first jackpot game<second jackpot game<fourth jackpot game=fifth jackpot game.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84 is that the types of big winning special symbols, small winning special symbols, and losing special symbols are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, at least one of the special jackpot pattern and the special jackpot pattern may be one type.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84 is that the selection ratio of various losing symbols, the selection ratio of various big hit special symbols, and the selection ratio of various small hit symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. are mentioned. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

As a third feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84, the number of LEDs (light emitting members) of the special symbol display device that lights up when displaying the big hit special symbol is smaller than the number of small winning special symbols and losing special symbols. The point is that the number of LEDs (light-emitting members) of the special symbol display device that lights up when displaying is smaller. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp the type of the displayed special symbol, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the number of LEDs (light-emitting members) of the lighting special symbol indicator is smaller. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp the type of the displayed special symbol, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fifth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84, the LED (light emitting member) of the special symbol indicator that lights up when displaying the small winning special symbol lights up when displaying the losing special symbol. The point is that the same LED (light emitting member) as the special symbol display is included. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp that it is not a big winning special symbol but a small winning special symbol or a losing special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the sixth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84, the special symbol determination information (first special symbol) acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is a jackpot (first result). When it is determined, it is possible to execute any one of the first to third jackpot games, and the special symbol determination information (second special symbol) acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47 is a jackpot (First result), any one of the fourth to fifth jackpot games can be executed. By doing so, the type of jackpot game that can be executed changes according to the type of the special symbol, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Although each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with one unsuccessful special symbol, at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with a plurality of unsuccessful special symbols. good too.

Also, the number of LEDs of the special symbol display device that is lit when displaying the big hit special symbol may be more than three or may be less than three. Also, the number of LEDs of the special symbol display device that lights when displaying the small winning special symbol may be more than two or may be less than two, but even in this case, the big winning special symbol It may be made different from the number of LEDs of the special symbol display device that lights up when displaying .

In addition, the LED of the special symbol indicator that lights up when displaying the small hit special symbol and the LED of the special symbol indicator that lights up when displaying the losing special symbol are not included (if they are completely different can be used).

Also, although the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol does not win a small win, it may be possible to win a small win. In this case, it is preferable to make the winning probability lower than that of the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.

(Special figure variation pattern determination processing of the main control board)
The special figure variation pattern determination processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing special figure variation pattern determination processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in the normal game state. If it is in the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S313-2, and if it is not in the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S313-3 assuming that it is in the time-saving game state.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects a corresponding (matching game situation) table from the normal special figure variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 86) for determining the special figure variation pattern in the normal game state. Then, the process moves to step S313-4. In addition, the details of the special figure variation pattern determination table for normal will be described later.

The main CPU 110a, in step S313-3, from the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving (see FIGS. 87 to 25) for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in the time saving gaming state (matches the game situation) table is selected, and the process moves to step S313-4. In addition, the details of the special figure variation pattern determination table for time saving will be described later.

In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol type, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the reach determination random number value, the pending number (U1 or U2), and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number value. A special figure variation pattern is determined by collating with a special figure variation pattern determination table.

The main CPU 110a sets the variation time corresponding to the determined special figure variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c in step S313-5, and the special figure variation corresponding to the determined variation pattern in step S313-6. A pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special figure variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect, is performed.

In step S313-7, the main CPU 110a determines the number of variations stored in the main RAM 110c. The number of fluctuation display of the pattern is updated by +1. The number of fluctuations is updated by +1 regardless of whether it is a normal game state, a time-saving game state, a first special symbol variable display, or a second special symbol variable display. It should be noted that the number of fluctuations will be referred to in special symbol fluctuation processing, which will be described later.

In step S313-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in the time-saving gaming state. If it is not in the time-saving gaming state, this time's special figure variation pattern determination table is terminated, and if it is in the time-saving gaming state, in step S313-9, a time-saving number of times designation command corresponding to the remaining number of time-savings is transmitted for production. Set in the data storage area. As a result, the time saving number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the remaining time saving number is notified. When this process is finished, the special figure variation pattern determination process of this time is finished.

(Normal special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 86 is a normal special symbol variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special symbol variation pattern in the normal game state.

Specifically, in FIG. 86(a), there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c, or there is jackpot history information and the number of fluctuations to the special time-saving gaming state is 51 times or more. If (production modes A to C) is a normal special figure variation pattern determination table 1 that is referred to, FIG. is a special figure variation pattern determination table 2 for normal that is referred to when performing variation display when is 50 times or less (during a countdown mode to be described later), and FIG. It is a special figure variation pattern determination table 3 for normal use, which is referred to when performing variation display corresponding to the remaining reservation of the second special symbol after shifting to the state.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for normal time reduction)
Figures 87 to 90 are special symbol variation pattern determination tables for normal time reduction which are referred to when determining the variation pattern of special symbols in the normal time reduction gaming state.

Specifically, FIG. 87(a) shows when 7 times is selected as the number of times of time saving (J2) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal time saving game state and the remaining number of small hits is 1 time. Special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for normal time reduction to be referred to when executing the variable display before the final time reduction (during rush battle mode described later), FIG. 87 (b) is normal time reduction gaming state When executing the variable display of the final time-saving when the second special pattern of time-saving 7 times is selected and the remaining number of small hits is 1 at the time of transition to (during the rush battle mode described later) Refer to It is a special figure variation pattern determination table 2 for normal time saving.

FIG. 88(a) shows that 55 times or 95 times or 496 times is selected as the number of times of time saving (J2) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal time saving game state and the remaining number of small hits is 1 time. The special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 3 for normal time reduction that is referred to when executing the variable display before the time reduction final round (during the boisterous dance mode described later), and FIG. When 55 times, 95 times, or 496 times are selected as the number of times of time saving (J2) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to , and the remaining number of small hits is 1 time, when executing the variable display of the last time of time saving It is a special figure variation pattern determination table 4 for normal time reduction to be referred to (during a wild dance mode described later).

FIG. 89(a) shows that 95 times is selected as the number of times of time saving (J2) of the second special symbol when shifting to the normal time saving game state, and the remaining number of small hits is 2 times than the last time of time saving. When executing the previous fluctuation display (during the super wild dance mode described later) is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 5 for normal time reduction, and FIG. 2 When 95 times is selected as the number of times of time saving (J2) of special symbols and the remaining number of small hits is 2 times, when executing the variable display of the last time of time saving (during the super wild dance mode described later) It is a special figure variation pattern determination table 6 for normal working hours reduction.

FIG. 90(a) shows that 496 times is selected as the number of times of time saving (J2) of the second special symbol when shifting to the normal time saving game state, and the remaining number of small hits is 2 times than the last time of time saving. It is a special figure variation pattern determination table 7 for normal time reduction that is referred to when performing the previous variation display (during infinite mode described later), and FIG. When 496 times is selected as the number of times of time saving (J2) of special symbols and the remaining number of small hits is 2 times, when the variable display of the last time of time saving is executed (during infinite mode described later) Normal referred to It is a special figure variation pattern determination table 8 for time saving.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for special time saving)
FIG. 91 is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for normal time reduction which is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the special time reduction gaming state.

Specifically, FIG. 91(a) is a special time-saving gaming state when there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c, or when there is jackpot history information and the remaining number of small hits is two. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for special time reduction which is referred to when executing the second or subsequent variation display from the start of the special time reduction gaming state (during infinite mode described later), FIG. (b) is a special time-saving game state, and when the main RAM 110c has jackpot history information and the remaining number of small wins is 2 times, the time-saving first time variable display is executed (during infinite mode). It is a special figure variation pattern determination table 2 for normal time saving, and FIG. 91 (c) is a special time saving game state and when the remaining number of small hits is 1 When executing the variation display ( It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 3 for special time saving to be referred to during a boisterous dance mode described later.

As shown in FIGS. 86 to 91, the special symbol variation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting port) that performs variable display, the determination result of the big hit determination, and the determination result of the special symbol (stop special symbol data ), the random number for reach determination, the first reservation number (U1) or the second reservation number (U2), the random number for special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, the special figure fluctuation pattern as a judgment result, and the special design It is associated with variable time, and the content of the variable performance is described as a reference.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol variation pattern" can specify at least the type of special symbol, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, although the details will be described later, since the big winning game and the small winning game are executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the type (number of rounds) of the big winning game and the small winning game can be specified. In addition, since the number of times of the time-saving game state (number of times of time-saving) is set at the end of the jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the number of times of time-saving can be specified.

As the effect contents shown in the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. , means to stop without reaching.

In addition, "ready-to-win" means that the player expects that a jackpot game will be executed in which some of the combinations of the performance symbols 70a that inform the big win are temporarily stopped and the other performance symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode that causes For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a (jackpot result mode) for reporting a big win, the same performance symbols 70a are set to "7" in the left and right areas. is temporarily stopped, and the remaining production pattern 70a is changing in the central area.

It should be noted that "temporary stop" means that the production pattern 70a swings slightly or is slightly deformed to make it appear to the player that the production pattern 70a is stopped (completely stopped). not).

"Normal reach" means a reach performance in which the same performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right regions and the remaining one performance pattern 70a fluctuates in the central region, and the expectation of a big hit is the lowest. reach. In the present embodiment, the "normal reach" does not give a big hit, but the "normal reach" may give a big win.

In addition, "SP reach" is performed after normal reach, and is a super reach effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than normal reach.

Also, "SPSP reach" is a special reach performance that is performed after normal reach or after super reach and has a higher expectation of a big win than super reach. For example, the three production patterns 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the image display device, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to produce a more special production than "SP reach".

In addition, the "full rotation reach" is a reach that is performed after normal reach or after super reach and at which a big hit is determined. For example, from the blackout effect, the three effect patterns 70a are all the same and are changed at a low speed, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to perform a more special effect than "SPSP reach". ing.

In addition, the “resurrection long variation” is an effect that makes it look like it will shift to the normal game state and makes a big hit. For example, almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to perform a special effect.

In addition, the “revival variation” is an effect that gives a small hit while pretending to shift to the normal game state. For example, a special effect is performed using almost the entire display area of the image display device over a period of time shorter than the recovery long variation.

In addition, "rush battle reach" means whether or not a ally character and an enemy character battle and enter a wild dance mode, a super wild dance mode, or an infinite mode described later (either a loss, a big hit, or a small hit). ) has become a reach production that agitates. The modes are advantageous to the player in the order of wild dance mode<super wild dance mode<infinite mode.

In addition, the "final battle reach" means whether or not the ally character and the enemy character perform the final battle and enter a wild dance mode, a super wild dance mode, or an infinite mode described later (either a loss, a big win, or a small win). It is a reach production that inspires.

In addition, "promotion battle reach" means whether a ally character and an enemy character battle and are promoted from a wild dance mode, which will be described later, to a super wild dance mode or an infinite mode (losing, big hit, or small hit). ) has become a reach production that agitates.

Further, the “promotion battle inciting change” is an effect in which a battle is not carried out after inciting whether or not the ally character and the enemy character will battle.

“Result fluctuation” is the result of the game in a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving game state continues with the jackpot game from the normal game state, which is called the so-called first hit, in the final variable display of the normal time-saving game state. It is an effect that the result display to be displayed is performed. It should be noted that the results may be displayed during a series of advantageous periods during which the player continues to be in an advantageous state, rather than from the first win.

"Result resurrection fluctuation" means that in the final fluctuation display of the normal time-saving game state, after the above-mentioned result display is performed, the resurrection display that suggests that the result is advantageous to the player (jackpot or small win) It is a production that will be performed.

"Continuous battle reach" is a reach that fuels whether or not the super wild dance mode or infinite mode described later will continue (either a loss, a big hit, or a small hit) by having a battle between an ally character and an enemy character. It is a performance.

"Undefeated Battle Reach" is a reach effect that suggests that a friendly character and an enemy character battle, but the friendly character always wins and the result is advantageous to the player (big win or small win). .

“Undefeated battle instigation change” is an effect in which a battle is not carried out after the ally character and the enemy character instigate whether or not they will battle.

"(Rush production) long fluctuation" is, if it is the first fluctuation of the special time-saving gaming state, it is a production that will be lost after the rush production that suggests entering the special time-saving gaming state is performed, and the special time-saving If the game state is not changed for the first time (it is changed for the second time or later), the rush effect is not performed and the effect is lost.

"(Rush production) Immediate hit fluctuation" means that if it is the first fluctuation of the special time-saving gaming state, the player does not go through the reach after the rush production that suggests entering the special time-saving gaming state is performed. It is an effect that is notified that it is an advantageous result (jackpot or small win), and if it is not the first change in the special time-saving game state (the second and subsequent change display), the rush effect is not performed. It is an effect that notifies the player that the result (big win or small win) will be advantageous to the player without going through the reach.

"(Rush effect) undefeated battle reach" means that if it is the first change in the special time-saving game state, the above-mentioned undefeated battle reach is performed after a rush effect that suggests entering the special time-saving game state is performed. It is a reach performance.

The “plunge effect long variation” is an effect that becomes a loss after a rush effect that suggests entering a special time-saving gaming state is performed.

“Rush effect immediate hit fluctuation” means that the result (jackpot or small hit) that is advantageous to the player without going through the reach after the rush effect that suggests entering a special time-saving gaming state is reported. It is a production that will be done.

As the first feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 86 to 91, during the fluctuation display that is the final round of the normal time-saving gaming state (series of advantageous periods), there is a fluctuation effect in which the result display is performed. There are points to be executed. By doing so, the player can confirm the result of the game during the series of advantageous periods, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 86 to 91 is that during the variation display that is the final round of the special time saving game state, a special effect is performed without result display. is mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction of the player from increasing due to the display of the game results in the series of advantageous periods even though the big winning game is not being executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be improved.

As the third feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 86 to 91, there is a point of using different special figure variation pattern determination tables in the normal time saving game state and the special time saving game state. By doing so, even in the same time-saving game state, the performance contents of the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state can be made different, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As the fourth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 86 to 91, in the initial variation in the special time-saving gaming state, the special figure variation pattern determination table that differs depending on the presence or absence of the jackpot history (RWM clear) The point is that it is being used. By doing so, it is possible to change the content of the effect during the first variable display in the special time-saving game state depending on whether or not there is a history of big wins, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the fifth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 86 to 91, in the second to final variation in the special time-saving gaming state, regardless of the presence or absence of the jackpot history (RWM clear), common The point is that the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure variation pattern determination table 1 for special time saving) is used. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data volume, realize efficient control, and shorten the development period.

As the sixth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 86 to 91, when it becomes a jackpot during a special time-saving gaming state than when it becomes a jackpot during a normal game state, a short fluctuation The point is that the time variation pattern (instant hit variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed) is easily determined. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player in a situation in which a big win game that causes a special time-saving game state is not executed for a long period of time, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the seventh feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 86 to 91, the case where the jackpot occurs during the special time-saving gaming state is shorter than the case where the jackpot occurs during the normal time-saving gaming state. The point is that the variation pattern of the variation time (immediate hit variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed) is easily determined. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player in a situation in which a big win game that causes a special time-saving game state is not executed for a long period of time, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the eighth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 86 to 91, the variation display is performed during the special time-saving gaming state than when the variation display is performed during the normal time-saving gaming state. The point is that the average fluctuation time is shorter in the case. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player in a situation in which a big win game that causes a special time-saving game state is not executed for a long period of time, and to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the normal time-saving gaming state and during the special time-saving gaming state different special figure variation pattern determination tables are used, but for example, when performing variation display other than the initial variation and final variation in the special time-saving gaming state Is a special figure variation pattern determination table for normal time reduction (for example, special figure variation pattern determination table 3 for normal time reduction, or special figure variation pattern determination table 5 for normal time reduction, or special figure variation for normal time reduction pattern determination table 7, etc.) may be used. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data volume, realize efficient control, and shorten the development period.

In addition, in the first variation during the special time-saving gaming state, different special figure variation pattern determination tables are used depending on the presence or absence of the jackpot history (RWM clear), but the same special figure variation pattern determination table (for example, special time-saving Special figure variation pattern determination table 1 for or special figure variation pattern determination table 2) for special time saving may be used. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data volume, realize efficient control, and shorten the development period.

In addition, in the final variation in the special time-saving gaming state, the same special figure variation pattern determination table is used regardless of the presence or absence of the jackpot history (RWM clear), but different special figure variation pattern determination tables are used. can be By doing so, it is possible to change the effect contents during the final variable display in the special time-saving game state depending on whether or not there is a history of big wins, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the normal time-saving gaming state and during the special time-saving gaming state, it is possible to determine the special figure variation pattern using different special figure variation pattern tables, and for a predetermined period after the end of the normal time-saving gaming state (the second special symbol A special figure variation pattern can be determined using the same special figure variation pattern table in the remaining reserved portion) and a predetermined period after the end of the special time-saving gaming state (remaining reserved portion of the second special symbol). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect by changing the performance depending on the type of time saving, and to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity related to the variation pattern and to improve the efficiency of the control at the end of the time saving.

In addition, the variation based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol after the end of the normal time-saving gaming state and the variation based on the remaining holding of the second special symbol after the end of the special time-saving gaming state use the same special figure variation pattern table. Although explained that the special figure variation pattern is determined, it is not limited to this. Variation based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol after the normal time-saving game state and variation based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol after the end of the special time-saving game state are special symbols using different special figure variation pattern tables. A variation pattern may be determined. That is, during the normal time-saving gaming state and during the special time-saving gaming state, it is possible to determine the special figure variation pattern using a different special figure variation pattern table, and for a predetermined period after the end of the normal time-saving gaming state (of the second special symbol A special figure variation pattern can be determined using a different special figure variation pattern table for the remaining reserved portion) and a predetermined period after the end of the special time-saving gaming state (remaining reserved portion of the second special symbol). In this case, it is possible to improve the performance effect by giving a change during and after the time saving depending on the type of time saving, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 7 (b-1) and FIG. 7 (b-2), the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state) are the same A normal symbol variation pattern table is used. That is, in the normal time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) and the special time-saving gaming state (second time-saving gaming state), it is possible to determine the special figure variation pattern using a different special figure variation pattern table, and the normal time-saving game In the state (first time saving game state) and the special time saving game state (second time saving game state), it is possible to determine the normal figure fluctuation pattern using the same normal figure fluctuation pattern table. Therefore, by giving a change during and after the time saving depending on the type of time saving, it is possible to improve the production effect and improve the interest of the game. Moreover, while being able to reduce the storage capacity which concerns on a normal figure fluctuation pattern, it becomes possible to streamline the control during time saving.

Although it was explained that the same normal symbol variation pattern table is used in the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), the present invention is not limited to this. Different normal symbol variation pattern tables may be used in the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state). That is, in the normal time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) and the special time-saving gaming state (second time-saving gaming state), it is possible to determine the special figure variation pattern using a different special figure variation pattern table, and the normal time-saving game In the state (first time saving game state) and the special time saving game state (second time saving game state), it is possible to determine the normal figure fluctuation pattern using different normal figure fluctuation pattern tables. In this case, it is possible to improve the performance effect by giving a change during and after the time saving depending on the type of time saving, and to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, the average fluctuation time of the normal figure during the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state) tends to be shorter than the average fluctuation time of the special figure during the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) good too.

Moreover, in 5th Embodiment, it demonstrated that the opening mode of the 2nd starting port 14 was common in each time saving game state. That is, in the normal time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) and the special time-saving gaming state (second time-saving gaming state), it is possible to determine the special figure variation pattern using a different special figure variation pattern table, and the normal time-saving game In the state (1st time-saving game state) and special time-saving game state (2nd time-saving game state), even if the same winning normal pattern is stopped and displayed, different opening patterns (time, number of times) are used. ) can be released. Therefore, by giving a change during and after the time saving depending on the type of time saving, it is possible to improve the production effect and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player depending on the type of time saving, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Moreover, in 5th Embodiment, in each time saving game state, it demonstrated that the opening mode of the 2nd starting port 14 was different and it was good also as a structure. That is, in the normal time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) and the special time-saving gaming state (second time-saving gaming state), it is possible to determine the special figure variation pattern using a different special figure variation pattern table, and the normal time-saving game In the state (1st time-saving game state) and special time-saving game state (2nd time-saving game state), even if the same winning normal pattern is stopped and displayed, the same opening pattern (time, number of times) is used. ) may be openable. In this case, it is possible to improve the presentation effect and improve the interest of the game by giving a change during and after the time saving depending on the type of the time saving. In addition, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity related to the opening pattern of the electric chew, and to make the control during the auxiliary game more efficient.

(Advance judgment table)
FIG. 92 is a pre-determination table referred to when pre-determining (prefetching) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port.

As shown in FIG. 92, the preliminary determination table contains the game state, the type of special symbol (starting port), the determination result of the jackpot determination (random number for jackpot determination), and the determination result of the special symbol (special symbol determination). Random number for use), random number for reach determination, random number for special figure variation pattern determination, and special figure scheduled variation pattern as a determination result are associated.

Therefore, "special figure scheduled variation pattern" and "prefetch information" can be said to be capable of specifying at least the type of special symbol, the judgment result of jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special figure variation pattern to be executed. . In addition, although the details will be described later, since the big winning game and the small winning game are executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the type (number of rounds) of the big winning game and the small winning game can be specified. In addition, since the number of times of the time-saving game state (number of times of time-saving) is set at the end of the jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the number of times of time-saving can be specified.

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
The special symbol variation processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation time set in the above-described special figure variation pattern determination process has elapsed. When the variation time has passed, the process is moved to step S320-2, and when the variation time has not passed, the special symbol variation process of this time is terminated.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stop-displays the special symbol that has been determined in the above-described big win determination process, and in step S320-3 sets a stop time corresponding to the game situation in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, 8.0 seconds is set if it is the variable display of the final round of the time saving game state, and 0.5 seconds is set if it is other variable display.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving flag is set in the main RAM 110c in step S320-4. If the time saving flag is set, the remaining time saving times are updated, and the process moves to step S320-5, and if the time saving flag is not set, the remaining time saving times are not updated. The process moves to S320-13.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current special symbol variable display is the first special symbol. In the case of the first special symbol, in step S320-6, the first time saving number of times (J1), which is the number of times of saving time of the first special symbol saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the first special The third time saving number (J3), which is the number of times of saving time for the sum of the symbol and the second special symbol, is subtracted by 1, and if it is not the first special symbol (it is the second special symbol), in step S320-7, the main The second time saving frequency (J2), which is the time saving frequency of the second special symbols saved in the game RWM area of the RAM 110c, and the above-described third time saving frequency (J3) are subtracted by one.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S320-8 whether or not any one of the first number of times of time saving (J1), the number of times of second time saving (J2), and the number of times of saving time (J3) has become "0". When it becomes "0", the process moves to step S320-12 assuming that the time saving game state is terminated, and when it does not become "0", the process moves to step S320-9.

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the small winning special symbol is stopped. If it is not a small hit special symbol, the process is moved to step S320-13, and if it is a small hit special symbol, in step S320-10, until the time saving game state saved in the game RWM area is terminated. Subtract 1 from the remaining number of small hits (Z).

In step S320-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of remaining small wins has reached "0". When the remaining number of small hits is "0", the processing is shifted to step S320-12 assuming that the time saving game state is terminated, and when the remaining number of small hits is not "0", step S320. -13 is processed.

In step S320-12, the main CPU 110a clears the time saving flag and various times of time saving (J1, J2, J3) saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and terminates the time saving game state.

In step S320-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special jackpot symbol is stopped. If it is not a jackpot special symbol, the process moves to step S320-15, and if it is a jackpot special symbol, in step S320-14, the time saving flag and various times of time saving saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c (J1, J2, J3) are cleared to terminate the time saving game state (start the normal game state). After completing this process, the process moves to step S320-19.

In step S320-15, the main CPU 110a sets the number of fluctuations saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c to the prescribed number of times (496 times, which is the maximum number of times of time saving in the normal time saving game state + 4 remaining pending numbers). 500 times) is determined. When the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times, the process is moved to step S320-16 assuming that the special time-saving gaming state is started, and when the number of fluctuations has not reached the specified number of times, the special time-saving gaming state is started. The process proceeds to step S320-18 assuming that it is not allowed.

In step S320-16, the main CPU 110a saves the special time saving number of times (J1=60, J2=750, J3=750) and the remaining number of small hits (Z=2) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. , In step S320-17, a special time-saving flag is set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c to shift to a special time-saving gaming state.

In step S320-18, the main CPU 110a stores time-saving count designation commands corresponding to the various time-saving counts (J1, J2, J3) saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c into the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. set. As a result, the time saving number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the remaining time saving number is notified.

In step S320-19, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to "2", and sends a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state (the game state specified by the presence or absence of the time saving flag) to the main RAM 110c. Set in the performance transmission data storage area. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for updating the game state is performed in the effect control board 130. - 特許庁When this process is finished, the special symbol variation process of this time is finished.

In this way, when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed (a small winning game is executed) during the time saving game state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start port 47, the number of times of time saving (J1, J2, Even if J3) remains, the time-saving game state is terminated when the remaining number of small hits (Z) becomes "0". Therefore, it is possible for the player to proceed with the game advantageously by referring to the look-ahead effect or the combination of the stop-displayed effect symbols 70a (whether or not to aim for an advantageous big hit by passing the game ball through the specific area 53 in the small winning game). ), it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage due to the game method during the time-saving game state, and to improve the amusement of the game.
In addition, when the number of small hits reaches the specified number of times, the normal game state is shifted to before the small hit game is executed (stop timing of the small hit special symbol).

In addition, even if the small hit remaining number of times (Z) remains, the time saving number of times (any of J1, J2, J3) becomes "0" so that the time saving game state ends. there is Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous due to the continuation of the time-saving game state until the small winning symbols are stop-displayed, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the advantageous gaming state (normal time-saving gaming state) controlled after the big hit ends when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times, or when the number of small hits reaches the specified number of times (including once) (usually It is possible to shift to a game state). Therefore, it is possible to change the number of fluctuations in which the advantageous game state continues according to the progress of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of times of fluctuation display of special symbols executed from the establishment of a predetermined condition (executing RWM clear, 0 clearing of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game) reaches the specified number of times, a special time-saving game state is generated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the unexpectedness that the time-saving state occurs without going through the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the number of fluctuations in which the special time-saving game state occurs (500 times) is a value larger than the maximum number of time-saving times (496 times) set in the normal time-saving game state, so during the normal time-saving game state Since the special time-saving game state does not occur, the inconvenience that the player cannot understand the progress of the game does not occur, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the number of fluctuations (500 times) in which the special time-saving gaming state occurs is greater than the maximum number of times of time-saving (496 times) set in the normal time-saving gaming state by the upper limit number (4) of the second pending number. By doing so, if the maximum number of times of time saving (496 times) is set in the normal time saving game state, it can be made to feel as if the normal time saving game state has shifted to the special time saving game state as it is. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the special time-saving gaming state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is not cleared to 0. Therefore, during the jackpot game (after the special time-saving game state has started or ended), the special time-saving game state will not occur again, and the profit balance between the game parlor side and the player side can be secured. It is also possible to improve the interest of the game.
That is, when reaching the specified number of times (when entering the special time-saving gaming state), the first predetermined image (such as the shutter image SY described later) appears and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 appears again. perform a performance. In addition, in the case of a big win, a second effect of displaying a decorative pattern 700 indicating a big win is performed. In addition, the number of times of operation n (the number of fluctuations) is set, and update processing is performed to update the number of times of operation n for each variation of the special symbol, and when the first effect is performed, the first effect is performed without clearing n. Update processing is performed for each variation of the special figure even after it is done, and n is cleared when the second effect is performed. In this case, by not clearing n even when the first effect is performed, processing of "always" adding can be performed. In addition, when the subtraction process is performed, it is not necessary to switch the process before and after the special time-saving gaming state, so the processing load and capacity can be reduced.

In addition, instead of setting the maximum number of times of time saving in the normal time saving game state (496 times) to be less than the number of fluctuations (500 times) in which the special time saving game state occurs, the maximum number of times of time saving in the normal time saving game state And it is good also as the same number of times as the number of fluctuations in which the special time-saving gaming state occurs. In this way, the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state are seamlessly connected, and it is possible to make the player feel as if the normal time-saving game state has been extended, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game. .

In addition, when the special time-saving gaming state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared to 0, and a special time-saving occurrence flag indicating that the special time-saving gaming state has occurred is set in the main RAM 110c (for gaming RWM). In this case, if there is no special time saving flag when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number (500 times), the number of times of fluctuation is cleared to 0 to generate a special time saving gaming state, and if there is a special time saving flag, It is preferable not to generate a special time-saving game state by clearing the number of fluctuations to 0.

(Special symbol stop processing of the main control board)
The special symbol stop processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing special symbol stop processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop time set in the above-described special symbol variation process has elapsed. When the stop time has passed, the process is moved to step S330-2, and when the stop time has not passed, the special symbol stop process of this time is terminated.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special jackpot symbol is stopped. If it is a big hit special symbol, the process is moved to step S330-3, and if it is not a big hit special symbol (it is a small hit special symbol or a losing special symbol), the process is moved to step S330-5.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a generates a jackpot corresponding to the stop special pattern data (jackpot special pattern) from the jackpot game jackpot control data determination table (see FIG. 95(a)) for executing the jackpot game. A jackpot opening transition process such as selecting game control data (maximum number of round games played, maximum winning number, opening time, etc.) "3" is set, and the process moves to step S330-8. The details of the big winning opening control data determination table for the big winning game will be described later.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the small winning special symbol is stopped. If it is a small winning special symbol, the process is moved to step S330-6, and if it is not a small winning special symbol (it is a losing special symbol), the process is moved to step S330-10.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a changes the stop special symbol data (small winning special symbol) from the large winning opening control data determination table for the small winning game for executing the small winning game (see FIG. 95(b)). Small winning opening transition processing such as selecting control data (maximum number of prizes, opening time, etc.) of small winning game is performed according to "4" is set, and the process moves to step S330-8.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the selected control data in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S330-9 stores the opening designation command in the main RAM 110c as transmission data for effect. Set to area. As a result, the opening specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the opening effect of the big winning game or the small winning game is performed. When this process is finished, the special symbol stop process of this time is ended.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0" in order to shift the process to the special symbol storage determination process, and terminates the current special symbol stop processing.

(control data table)
FIG. 95(a) is a diagram showing a big winning opening control data determination table for a big winning game for controlling a big winning opening during a big winning game (special game), and FIG. 95(b) shows a small winning game. It is a diagram showing a large winning opening control data determination table for a small winning game for controlling a large winning opening inside, and FIG. 95 (c) is a small winning game for controlling a specific area during a small winning game FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific area control data determination table for the .

As shown in FIG. 95(a), the big winning opening control data determination table for the big winning game includes the stop special figure data of special symbols, the maximum number of round games in the big winning game, and the big winning opening in one round game. The maximum number of prizes to be won, the opening time from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the first round game, the type of the big prize opening to be opened in each round game, and the maximum opening of the big prize opening to be opened in each round game The number of times, the opening time of the large winning opening for one opening of each round game, and the interval time during which the large winning opening is closed after the end of the round game (to discharge the game balls from the large winning opening required time) is associated with the ending time from the end of the final round game to the end of the jackpot game.

When the stop special figure data is "01", the first jackpot game in which the round game is performed three times is executed, and when the stop special figure data is "02", the round game is performed three times. At the same time, the second jackpot game is executed in which the state after the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot game, and when the stop special figure data is "03", three round games are performed. , a third jackpot game is executed in which the state after the jackpot game is more disadvantageous to the player than the first jackpot game.

Further, when the stop special figure data is "11", 10 round games are performed, and the fourth jackpot game is executed in which the state after the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game. , When the stop special figure data is "12", 10 round games are played, and the state after the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game (same advantage as the fourth jackpot game) degree) to execute the fifth jackpot game.

In addition, when the stop special figure data is "13", the 1st V jackpot game in which the remaining two round games are performed via the first small hit game which is the first round game is executed, and the stop special When the figure data is "14", the remaining nine round games are performed via the second small winning game which is the first round game, and the second round game is more advantageous to the player than the first V big winning game. When the 2V jackpot game is executed and the stop special figure data is "15", the remaining two round games are performed via the third small hit game which is the first round game, and the 1st V jackpot. To execute a 3rd V jackpot game in which the state of the jackpot game can be more disadvantageous to a player than the game.

As a feature of the big winning opening control data determination table for the big winning game shown in FIG. , While the jackpot game of the maximum round (10 rounds) is not executed, when the jackpot game (4th to 5th jackpot games) based on the winning to the second start port 47 is executed, the maximum round (10 rounds) One of the points is that a jackpot game can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate the game characteristics when the game ball wins in the first start port 45 and when the game ball wins in the second start port 47, thereby improving the amusement of the game. becomes possible.

As shown in FIG. 95(b), the large winning opening control data determination table for the small winning game includes the stop special figure data of the special symbol (kind of the small winning game) and the large winning opening to be opened in the small winning game. The maximum number of times of opening, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning mouth in the small winning game, the opening time until the big winning mouth is converted to the open state, the type of the big winning mouth to be opened, and for one opening The opening time of all the big winning mouths, the interval time when the big winning mouth is closed (the time required to discharge the game ball from the big winning mouth), and the small winning game from the last closing of the big winning mouth Ending time until completion is associated.

When the stop special figure data is "13", the first small winning game is executed, and when the stop special figure data is "14", the second small winning game is executed, and the stop special figure data is " 15", the third small winning game is executed.

As a feature of the large winning opening control data determination table for the small winning game shown in FIG. 95(b), the interval time when the first large winning opening 50 is closed is at least one It is set to the time during which the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the first big prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 (0.82 second interval time for the firing interval of 0.67 second). By doing so, it is possible to shorten the opening time of the first large winning opening 50, and the first large winning opening is opened within the predetermined maximum opening time (1.8 seconds) of the large winning opening in the small winning game. It is possible to increase the number of openings of the winning openings and improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 95 (c), the specific area control data determination table for the small winning game includes the stop special figure data of the special symbol (kind of the small winning game) and the specific area 53 to be opened in the small winning game. The maximum number of times of opening, the opening timing of the specific area 53, and the closing timing of the specific area 53 are associated with each other.

In the small winning game, regardless of the kind of the small winning game, the specific area 53 is changed to the open state when the big winning opening is opened in the small winning game, and the specific area 53 is changed to the closed state when the big winning opening is closed.

As a feature of the specific area control data determination table for the small winning game shown in FIG. 95 (c), the probability of the game ball winning the first big winning hole 50 during the small winning game is almost 100% (1/1) The point is that the opening/closing timing of the specific region 53 is set so that the specific region 53 is passed through at . By doing so, the player can complete the small winning game with peace of mind, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, instead of opening and closing the specific area 53 so that the game ball that wins the first big prize hole 50 during the small winning game passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of almost 100% (1/1), it is 50% The specific area 53 may be opened and closed with a probability of (1/2) or 25% (1/4).

In addition, depending on the type of small winning game, when the specific area 53 is opened and closed so that the game ball that has won the first big winning hole 50 passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of almost 100% (1/1) (for example, the 2 small winning game), and when the specific area 53 is opened and closed so that the game ball that has won the first big winning hole 50 passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of 25% (1/4) (for example, the third small winning game) may be provided.

(Jackpot game processing on the main control board)
The jackpot game processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing a jackpot game process in the main control board 110. FIG.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently being opened. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the set opening time set in the above-described special symbol stop processing is "0" or more. If it is during the opening, the process moves to step S340-2, and if it is not during the opening, the process moves to step S340-5.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the above special symbol stop processing has passed. When the opening time has passed, the process is moved to step S340-3, and when the opening time has not passed, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs round game transition processing in step S340-3. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the in-round flag indicating that the round game is in progress is set to the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. set to

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games played (R) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game process. As a result, the round specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for executing the round effect corresponding to the current round game is performed.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a round game is currently being played. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-round flag is set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the round game is being played, the process moves to step S340-6, and if the round game is not being played, the process moves to step S340-12.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for opening the big winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the time elapsed from the start of the current round game has reached the opening timing of the big winning opening specified by the control data of the big winning game. If the conditions for opening the big winning opening are satisfied, the process moves to step S340-7, and if the opening conditions for the big winning opening are not satisfied, the process moves to step S340-8.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, the type of the big winning opening to be opened from the control data of the jackpot game (first big winning opening 50 or second big winning opening 56), and the big winning opening this time (first big winning opening 50 or The opening time of the second big winning opening 56) is specified, and the opening time of the big winning opening and the driving data of the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid (first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b or second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are set as the main It is set in the game RWM area of the RAM 110c. As a result, the big winning opening is converted to the open state.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening of the current big winning opening is before the final opening in the current round game and the opening time has passed. If the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied, the process is moved to step S340-9, and if the closing condition for the big winning opening is not satisfied, the process is moved to step S340-10.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening closing process. Specifically, the interval time (closing time) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 50 or second big winning opening 56) is specified from the control data of the big winning game, and the interval time (closing time) of the big winning opening is specified. time) is set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the drive data for the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c is cleared. As a result, the big winning opening is converted to the closed state.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the conditions for shifting to the interval are met. Specifically, the number of game balls that have won the big winning mouth (first big winning mouth 50 or second big winning mouth 56) in this round game has reached the maximum winning number, or the number of big winning mouths in this round game It is determined whether or not the opening time of the final opening has passed. When the condition for shifting to the interval is established, the process is moved to step S340-11, and when the condition for shifting to the interval is not established, the current jackpot game processing is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs interval transition processing in step S340-11. Specifically, the current interval time (closing time of the big winning opening) is specified from the control data of the jackpot game, the interval time is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the big winning set in the main RAM 110c is set. Clear the driving data of the solenoid. As a result, the big winning opening is converted to the closed state. Also, instead of the in-round flag stored in the main RAM 110c, an in-interval flag indicating that the interval is in progress is set. When the interval shift processing ends, the current jackpot game processing ends.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the interval is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an interval flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If it is during the interval, the process moves to step S340-13, and if it is not during the interval, the process moves to step S340-19.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the interval time has elapsed in step S340-13. When the interval time has passed, the process is moved to step S340-14, and when the interval time has not passed, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final round game in the current jackpot game has ended. If the final round game has ended, the process moves to step S340-17, and if the final round game has not ended, the process moves to step S340-15.

The main CPU 110a performs round game transition processing in step S340-15. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Also, instead of the interval flag stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c, the round game flag is set.

In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games played (R) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game process. As a result, the round specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for executing the round effect corresponding to the current round game is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S340-17. Specifically, the current ending time is specified from the control data of the jackpot game, and the ending time is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Also, instead of the interval flag stored in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, an ending flag indicating that the game is ending is set.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating the ending of the jackpot game in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and terminates the jackpot game processing of this time. As a result, the ending specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the processing for executing the ending effect corresponding to the big hit game of this time is performed.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an ending flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If it is during the ending, the process is moved to step S340-20, and if it is not during the ending, this jackpot game process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S340-20 whether or not the ending time has passed. If the ending time has not passed, this jackpot game process is terminated, and if the ending time has passed, in step S340-21, special figure special electric processing data for moving the process to the jackpot game end process is set to "5", and the current jackpot game processing is terminated.

(Small winning game processing of the main control board)
The small winning game processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing small winning game end processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently being opened. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time set in the special symbol stop process described above is "0" or more. If it is during the opening, the process moves to step S350-2, and if it is not during the opening, the process moves to step S350-4.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the above special symbol stop processing has passed. When the opening time has passed, in step S350-3, an opening/closing game flag indicating that the opening/closing game for opening/closing the big winning opening is in progress is set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the opening time has passed. If not, the small winning game processing of this time is terminated.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening/closing game of the big winning opening is in progress. If the opening/closing game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S350-5, and if the opening/closing game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S350-21.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for opening the big winning slot is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening of the small winning game or the interval has ended. If the condition for opening the big winning opening is met, the process moves to step S350-6, and if the opening condition for the big winning opening is not met, the process moves to step S350-7.

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, the type of large winning opening to be opened from the control data of the small winning game shown in FIG. 76 (c) (first large winning opening 50 or second large winning opening 56) The opening time of the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole 56) is specified, and the opening time of the big winning hole and the big winning hole opening/closing solenoid (first big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 51b or second big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 57b) is set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the big winning opening is converted to the open state.

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for opening the specific area 53 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is time to open the specific area 53 specified by the control data for the specific area shown in FIG. If the condition for opening the specific area 53 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S350-8, and if the condition for opening the specific area 53 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S350-9.

The main CPU 110a performs specific area release processing in step S350-8. Specifically, the driving data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the specific area 53 is converted to the open state.

In step S350-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for closing the specific area 53 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is time to close the specific area 53 specified by the control data for the specific area shown in FIG. If the condition for closing the specific area 53 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S350-10, and if the condition for closing the specific area 53 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S350-11.

The main CPU 110a performs specific area closing processing in step S350-10. Specifically, the drive data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is cleared. As a result, the specific area 53 is converted to the closed state.

In step S350-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the large winning opening has passed, and whether or not the number of winnings to the large winning opening has reached the maximum number of winnings. If the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied, the process is moved to step S350-12, and if the closing condition for the big winning opening is not satisfied, the process is moved to step S350-13.

In step S350-12, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening closing process. Specifically, the interval time (closing time) is specified from the control data of the small winning game shown in FIG. The drive data for the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid set in the game RWM area of the RAM 110c is cleared. As a result, the big winning opening is converted to the closed state.

In step S350-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final interval time in the small winning game has elapsed. When the final interval time has passed, in step S350-14, the open/close playing flag set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c is cleared, and when the final interval time has not passed, The small winning game processing of this time is ended.

In step S350-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the specific area passage flag is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. When the specific area passage flag is saved, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the open/close game, and the process is shifted to step S350-16 assuming that the jackpot game is executed, and the specific area passage flag is saved. If not, the process proceeds to step S350-19 assuming that the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 during the open/close game to execute the ending.

The main CPU 110a clears the specific area passage flag saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S350-16, and performs jackpot game transition processing in step S350-17. Specifically, control data (maximum number of round games, maximum winning number, Opening time etc.) is selected, and processing such as clearing the time saving flag and various times of time saving (J1, J2, J3) saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c is performed.

In step S350-18, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to "3" in order to shift the processing to the big winning game processing, and ends the current small winning game processing.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S350-19. Specifically, the current ending time is specified from the control data of the small winning game, and the ending time is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-20, the main CPU 110a sets an ending specifying command indicating the ending of the small winning game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current small winning game processing. As a result, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the game ball is placed in the specific area 53 in the ending effect (during the small winning game, more specifically during the opening and closing game) according to the small winning game this time. A disappointing notification effect, etc., for notifying that the road did not pass through) is executed.

In step S350-21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time set in step S350-19 is "0" or more. If it is during the ending, the process is moved to step S350-22, and if it is not during the ending, this small winning game process is terminated.

In step S350-22, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time set in step S350-19 has elapsed. When the ending time has not passed, the small hit game process of this time is terminated, and when the ending time has passed, in step S350-23, a special figure special electric call is sent to move the process to the special symbol storage determination process. After setting "0" to the processing data, the current small winning game processing is terminated.

In this way, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, the small winning game (conversion game) ends (10 times opening of the first big winning opening or winning of 10 game balls) The jackpot game is not executed until the game is played. Therefore, the timing at which the game ball passes through the specific area 53 does not put the player at a disadvantage, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, the big winning game is executed without ending the small winning game. Therefore, the period from the small win game to the big win game is not prolonged, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, you may make it perform a big-hit game after performing the ending of a small-hit game.

(Jackpot game end processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game end processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing a jackpot game ending process in the main control board 110. FIG.

First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 110a acquires the stop special figure data saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-2, whether or not the stop special figure data is a jackpot special symbol. determine whether If it is a big hit special symbol, the process is moved to step S360-3, and if it is not a big hit special symbol (it is a small hit special symbol), the process is moved to step S360-5.

In step S360-3, the main CPU 110a acquires the game state information when winning the jackpot saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. The first game state setting table (see FIG. 99(a)) for setting the game state of is selected, and the process proceeds to step S360-7. The details of the first game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-5, the main CPU 110a acquires the specific area passing game state information saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. The second game state setting table (see FIG. 99(b)) for setting the game state after the game is selected, and the process proceeds to step S360-7. The details of the second game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-7, the main CPU 110a collates the acquired game state information and the like with the selected game state setting table, and sets the game state flag, the number of time reductions (J1 to J3), and the small game state as the game state after the jackpot game. The number of hits remaining (Z) is determined and set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-8, a game state designation command corresponding to the game state flag is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for updating the game state is performed in the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

In step S360-9, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0" in order to shift the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing, and terminates the current jackpot game ending processing.

Thus, at the end of the big winning game executed by the game ball passing through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, based on the game state when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game, A predetermined process (specifically, a process of determining the game conditions after the jackpot game (game state, the number of time reductions, the number of remaining small wins), or setting the determined game conditions in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c ) can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform game control (setting of game conditions) by making use of events that actually occur in the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, at the end of the jackpot game that does not go through the jackpot game, based on the game state when it is determined to be a jackpot, a predetermined process (specifically, the game conditions after the jackpot game (game state, time saving number, small It is possible to perform a process of determining the remaining number of hits) and setting the determined game conditions in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Therefore, the game performance can be differentiated depending on whether it is a big winning game via a small winning game or a big winning game not via a small winning game, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

At the end of the jackpot game that does not go through the small hit game, a predetermined process is not performed based on the game state when it is determined to be a jackpot, but based on the game state when the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed. Predetermined processing may be performed.

(Game state setting table)
FIG. 99(a) is a diagram showing a first game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot game that does not go through the small hit, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a second game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), the first game state setting table includes stop special symbol data of the jackpot special symbol, game state information at the time of jackpot winning indicating the game state at the time of jackpot winning, and game state to be set. A flag (time saving flag indicating that it is a time saving game state), a first time saving number (J1) that is the number of times of fluctuation display of the first special symbol that ends the time saving game state, and a second special that ends the time saving game state The second time-saving number of times (J2), which is the number of times of variable display of the symbol, and the third time-saving number of times (J3), which is the number of times of variable display of the sum of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that terminate the time-saving gaming state, It is associated with the remaining number of small hits (Z), which is the number of times of the small hit variation display that ends the time saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 99(b), in the second game state setting table, there are stop special symbol data of a small winning special symbol, and a game state at the time of passage of a specific area 53 indicating the game state when the game ball passes through the specific area 53. Information, the set game state flag (time saving flag indicating that it is a time saving game state), the first time saving number (J1) which is the number of times of fluctuation display of the first special symbol that ends the time saving game state, and time saving The second time-saving number of times (J2), which is the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol that ends the gaming state, and the number of times of variable display of the sum of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that ends the time-saving gaming state. The number of times of 3 o'clock reduction (J3) and the remaining number of small hits (Z), which is the number of times of the small hit variation display for ending the time saving game state, are associated with each other.

As the first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 99, it is set when executed in the time saving game state than the second time saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the normal game state The point is that there is a jackpot game (first jackpot game, third jackpot game) in which the second time saving frequency (J2) increases. By doing so, it is possible to vary the second time reduction frequency (J2) set according to the type of the jackpot game, thereby improving the game performance and enhancing the interest of the game.

As the second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 99, the second time saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the normal game state, and the second set when executed in the time saving game state There is a jackpot game (2nd jackpot game, 4th jackpot game, 5th jackpot game) that is the same as the 2nd time reduction number of times (J2), and the second time reduction number of times (J2) of the jackpot game is another jackpot game (No. 1 jackpot game, 3rd jackpot game) is higher than the second time reduction frequency (J2). By doing so, the value of the jackpot game can be changed by the number of time reductions instead of the difference due to the prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the game and improve the interest of the game. becomes.

As the third feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 99, it is set when executed in the time saving game state than the small hit remaining number (Z) set when executed in the normal game state. The point is that there are jackpot games (first jackpot game, second jackpot game, third jackpot game) in which the number of remaining small hits (Z) increases. By doing so, it is possible to vary the number of remaining small wins (Z) set according to the type of the big win game, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by improving the game performance.

As the fourth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 99, the small hit remaining number (Z) set when executed in the normal game state There are jackpot games (4th jackpot game, 5th jackpot game) that are the same as the number of hits remaining (Z), and in the normal game state, the remaining number of hits (Z) of the jackpot game is the same as the other jackpot game (4th jackpot game). 1 jackpot game, 2nd jackpot game, 3rd jackpot game) is larger than the number of remaining small hits (Z). By doing this, the value of the big win game can be changed not by the difference due to the prize balls that can be obtained during the big win game, but by the number of remaining small wins, and the amusement of the game is improved by improving the playability. becomes possible.

As a fifth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 99, the second time saving number of times (J2) that is set when the game is executed in the normal game state in the jackpot game that is executed via the small game There is a jackpot game (1st V jackpot game, 3rd V jackpot game) in which the second time saving number of times (J2) set when executed in the time saving game state is larger than that. By doing so, it is possible to vary the second time reduction frequency (J2) set according to the type of the big winning game via the small winning game, improve the game performance and improve the interest of the game. becomes.

As a sixth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 99, the jackpot game executed via the small win game is set to the small win remaining number of times (Z) set when executed in the normal game state. Also, there is a point that the number of remaining small hits (Z) set when executed in the time saving game state is larger. By doing so, it is possible to vary the value of the big winning game via the small winning game depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the game performance and the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the case of a specific direct hit jackpot (fourth jackpot, fifth jackpot), the number of fluctuations to end the advantageous game state (time-saving game state) controlled after the jackpot ends does not change regardless of the game state. In the case of a big win via winning, the number of fluctuations for ending the advantageous game state controlled after the end of the big win can be changed depending on the game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player as to whether it is a direct hit big win or a big win via a small win, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, it is possible to make the player happy and sad about the game state when the player wins a small prize, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of times of time saving set in the case of a specific direct hit jackpot (fourth jackpot, fifth jackpot) is greater than the number of times of time saving set in the case of a small hit. In addition, the number of time saving times set by the big win via the small win in the specific game state (time saving game state) is larger than the time saving number of times set by the big win via the small win in the normal game state. In addition, the number of times of time saving set in the special time saving game state is larger than the number of times of time saving set in the case of a direct hit jackpot (fourth jackpot, fifth jackpot).

Further, the number of small hits, which is the termination condition of the advantageous gaming state, is set to a smaller value than the number of fluctuations, which is the termination condition of the advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state). Also, the number of small wins at which the advantageous game state ends changes depending on the type of big win (special symbol).

(Game state referred to at the end of the jackpot game not via the jackpot game)
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a game state referred to at the end of a big win game that does not go through a small win game, and FIG. 100(a) is a timing chart when the big win variation display is executed in the normal game state. , FIG. 100(b) is a timing chart when the big hit variation display is executed in the time saving game state (before the final change), and FIG. 100(c) shows the big hit change display in the time saving game state (final change). It is a timing chart when it is executed.

Regarding the game state that is referenced to set the game conditions (game state, time saving number of times, remaining number of small hits) at the end of the jackpot game that does not go through the jackpot game, the timing when it is determined to be a big hit in the jackpot judgment (when the jackpot is won ).

As shown in FIG. 100(a), when the jackpot variation display is executed in the normal game state, at the end of the T4 jackpot game, at the start of the T1 jackpot variation display, that is, when the jackpot is won. The game conditions (game state, various time saving times, small hit remaining times) are set with reference to the game state in . In this case, the timing of T1 is the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 100 (b), when the big hit variation display is executed in the time saving game state (before the final variation), at the end of the T4 jackpot game, at the start of the T1 jackpot variation display, that is, The game conditions (game state, various time-saving times, small win remaining times) are set with reference to the game state at the timing of winning the jackpot. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 100 (c), when the jackpot variation display is executed in the time-saving gaming state (final variation), at the end of the T4 jackpot game, at the start of the T1 jackpot variation display, that is, the jackpot The game conditions (game state, various time-saving times, small hit remaining times) are set with reference to the game state at the timing of winning. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time-saving game state.

(Game state referred to at the end of the jackpot game via the small win game)
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a game state referred to at the end of a jackpot game via a small hit game, and FIG. 101(a) is a timing chart when a small hit variation display is executed in a normal game state. There is, FIG. 101 (b) is a timing chart when the small hit fluctuation display that does not satisfy the time saving end condition in the time saving game state is executed, and FIG. It is a timing chart when the small hit variation display is executed.

Regarding the game state referred to in order to set the game conditions (game state, time saving number of times, remaining number of small wins) at the end of the jackpot game via the small win game, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small win game. It is the timing (at the time of transition to the jackpot game) when it is done.

As shown in FIG. 101(a), when the small hit variation display is executed in the normal game state, at the end of the T6 big hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the T4 small hit game. The game conditions (game state, various time-saving times, small hit remaining times) are set with reference to the game state at the time of doing. In this case, since the normal game state is maintained from the start of the small winning variation display, the timing of T4 is the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 101 (b), when the small hit variation display that does not satisfy the time saving end condition in the time saving game state is executed, at the end of the T6 big win game, the game ball during the T4 small win game The game conditions (game state, various time-saving times, small hit remaining times) are set with reference to the game state when passes through the specific region 53 . In this case, since the time-saving game state is maintained without the various time-saving times and the remaining number of small wins becoming "0" when the small hit variation display is stopped and displayed at T2, the timing of T4 is called the time-saving game state. It will be. When the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at the timing of T4, the jackpot game is started and the normal game state is entered. It is supposed to be.

As shown in FIG. 101 (c), when the small hit variation display that satisfies the time saving end condition in the time saving game state is executed, at the end of the T6 big win game, the game ball during the T4 small win game The game conditions (game state, various time-saving times, small hit remaining times) are set with reference to the game state when passes through the specific region 53 . In this case, at the time of the stop display of the small winning variation display at T2, one of the time saving times becomes "0" and the time saving game state ends and shifts to the normal game state, so the timing of T4 is called the normal game state. It will be.

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, when the big winning variation display is executed and the big winning game is executed, and when the small winning variation display is executed and the big winning game is executed, at the end of the big winning game The sampling timing (acquisition timing) of the game state to be referred to for setting the game conditions (game state, various times of time saving, number of remaining small hits) is different. Therefore, it is possible to make the game different depending on whether it is a big win or a small win, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Mode flow showing transition of game modes)
Fig. 102(a) is a mode flow when a jackpot game is executed in a normal game state, and Fig. 102(b) is a rush game mode or a boisterous dance mode (normal time-saving game state) in which a jackpot game is executed. FIG. 102(c) is a mode flow when a jackpot game is executed in the super wild dance mode or the infinite mode (normal time-saving game state).

As shown in FIG. 102(a), in the normal game state, when it is determined as a big win (first result) in the big win determination related to the first special symbol and the special big win symbol 01 is stop-displayed, three rounds are performed. A first jackpot game consisting of a game is executed, after which the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 55 times, and the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to one time to shift to a boisterous dance mode.
In addition, when the jackpot determination relating to the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 02 is stopped and displayed, the second jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, and then the second jackpot game is executed. The number of times of shortening in two hours (J2) is set to 95 times, and the number of remaining small hits is set to 1 time.
In addition, when the jackpot determination relating to the first special pattern is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special pattern 03 is stop-displayed, the third jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, and then the third jackpot game is executed. The number of times of shortening in two hours (J2) is set to 7 times, and the number of remaining small hits is set to 1 time.

In addition, when it is determined as a big win (first result) in the big win determination related to the second special symbol and the big win special symbol 11 is stop-displayed, the fourth big win game consisting of 10 round games is executed, and then the second special symbol is displayed. The number of times of 2 o'clock reduction (J2) is set to 496 times, and the number of remaining small hits is set to 2 times to shift to an infinite mode.
In addition, when it is determined as a big win (first result) in the big win determination relating to the second special symbol and the big win special symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, the fifth big win game consisting of 10 round games is executed, and then the second special symbol. The number of times of 2 o'clock reduction (J2) is set to 496 times, and the number of remaining small hits is set to 2 times to shift to an infinite mode.

Furthermore, when a small winning (second result) is determined in the big winning determination related to the second special symbol and the small winning special symbol 13 is stopped and displayed, the first V big winning game consisting of three round games is executed, and then Then, the second time saving number of times (J2) is set to 55 times, and the remaining number of small hits is set to 1 time.
Further, when it is determined as a small winning (second result) in the big winning determination related to the second special symbol and the small winning special symbol 14 is stopped and displayed, the second V big winning game consisting of 10 round games is executed, and then Then, the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 95 times, and the remaining number of small hits is set to 1 time.
In addition, when it is determined as a small winning (second result) in the big winning determination related to the second special symbol and the small winning special symbol 15 is stop-displayed, the 3rd V big winning game consisting of three round games is executed, and then Then, the second time saving number of times (J2) is set to 55 times, and the remaining number of small hits is set to 1 time.

As shown in FIG. 102 (b), in the rush battle mode or boisterous mode (normal time-saving game state) in which the remaining number of small hits is 1, the big hit is determined according to the first special symbol (first result ) and the jackpot special symbol 01 is stop-displayed, the first jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed without subtracting the remaining number of small hits (remaining one round), and then the second jackpot game. The number of times of shortening two hours (J2) is set to 95 times and the number of remaining small hits (Z) is set to 2 times.
In addition, when the jackpot determination related to the first special pattern is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special pattern 02 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (remains 1 time) 3 times. After that, the second time saving number of times (J2) is set to 95 times, and the remaining number of small winnings (Z) is set to 2 times. do.
In addition, when it is determined to be a big hit (first result) in the big hit determination related to the first special pattern and the special big hit pattern 03 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (remains 1 time) 3 times. After that, the second time saving number of times (J2) is set to 95 times, and the remaining number of small winnings (Z) is set to 2 times. do.

In addition, when it is determined as a big hit (first result) in the big hit determination related to the second special pattern and the big hit special pattern 11 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (remains 1 time) 10 times. After that, the second time saving frequency (J2) is set to 496 times and the remaining number of small winnings is set to 2 times to shift to an infinite mode.
In addition, when it is determined as a big hit (first result) in the big hit determination related to the second special symbol and the big hit special symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (remains 1 time) 10 times. After that, the second time saving frequency (J2) is set to 496 times and the remaining number of small winnings is set to 2 times to shift to an infinite mode.

Furthermore, when the small winning (second result) is determined in the big winning determination relating to the second special symbol and the small winning special symbol 13 is stop-displayed, the remaining number of small winnings is subtracted to 0 to enter the normal game state. A first V jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, after which the second number of times of shortening time (J2) is set to 55 times and the remaining number of small wins is set to one time to shift to a wild dance mode.
In addition, when it is determined as a small hit (second result) in the big hit determination related to the second special symbol and the small hit special symbol 14 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is subtracted to 0 and the normal game state is entered. A second V jackpot game consisting of 10 round games is executed, after which the second number of times of shortening time (J2) is set to 95 and the remaining number of small wins is set to 1 to shift to a wild dance mode.
In addition, when it is determined as a small hit (second result) in the big hit determination related to the second special symbol and the small hit special symbol 15 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is subtracted to 0 and the normal game state is entered. A 3rd V jackpot game consisting of 3 round games is executed, after which the second time saving frequency (J2) is set to 55 times and the rest of the small winning frequency is set to 1 time to shift to a boisterous dance mode.

As shown in FIG. 102 (c), in the super wild dance mode or infinite mode (normal time-saving game state) in which the remaining number of small hits is 2 times, the big hit is determined according to the first special (first result) When it is determined that the jackpot special symbol 01 is stopped and displayed, the first jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed without subtracting the remaining number of small hits (remaining two times), and then the second jackpot game. The time-saving number of times (J2) is set to 95 times, and the remaining number of small hits (Z) is set to 2 times.
In addition, when the jackpot determination related to the first special pattern is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special pattern 02 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (remains 2 times) 3 times. After that, the second jackpot game consisting of the round game is executed, and then the second time saving number of times (J2) is set to 95 times, and the remaining number of small hits (Z) is set to 2 times. do.
In addition, when the jackpot determination related to the first special pattern is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special pattern 03 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (remains 2 times) 3 times. After that, the second time saving number of times (J2) is set to 95 times, and the remaining number of small winnings (Z) is set to 2 times. do.

In addition, when it is determined as a big hit (first result) in the big hit determination related to the second special pattern and the big hit special pattern 11 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (remains 2 times) 10 times. After that, the second time saving frequency (J2) is set to 496 times and the remaining number of small winnings is set to 2 times to shift to an infinite mode.
In addition, when it is determined as a big hit (first result) in the big hit determination related to the second special symbol and the big hit special symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is not subtracted (remains 2 times) 10 times. After that, the second time saving frequency (J2) is set to 496 times and the remaining number of small winnings is set to 2 times to shift to an infinite mode.

Furthermore, when it is determined as a small hit (second result) in the big hit determination related to the second special pattern and the small hit special pattern 13 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is reduced to 1, but the normal time-saving game state is maintained. A super wild dance mode in which a first V jackpot game consisting of three round games is maintained and then set to 95 times (J2) and the remaining number of small hits is set to 2 times. transition to
In addition, when it is determined as a small hit (second result) in the big hit determination related to the second special pattern and the small hit special pattern 14 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is subtracted to 1, but the normal time-saving game state is maintained. A super wild dance mode in which a second V jackpot game consisting of 10 round games is maintained and then set to 95 times (J2) and the remaining number of small hits is set to 2 times. transition to
In addition, when it is determined as a small hit (second result) in the big hit determination related to the second special pattern and the small hit special pattern 15 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small hits is subtracted to 1, but the normal time-saving game state is maintained. A super-random dance mode in which a third V jackpot game consisting of three round games is maintained and then set to 95 times (J2) and the remaining number of small hits is set to 2 times. transition to

Thus, as a result of the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol in the normal game state, when the third jackpot game (equivalent to the first special game) is executed, the second time-saving number of times (J2) is seven times The first jackpot game or second jackpot game (equivalent to the second special game) that is controlled to the normal time-saving game state (equivalent to the first specific game state) set to , and is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game When it is executed, the second time saving number of times (J2) is set to 55 times or 95 times, which is more than 7 times. there is Therefore, the degree of advantage to the player can be varied depending on the type of the executed jackpot game (the jackpot special symbol displayed stopped), and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, when the result of the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is a jackpot (first result), the third jackpot game (corresponding to the first special game) can be executed, and the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is a small win (second result), it is possible to execute a second V jackpot game (equivalent to a second special game) that is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game, and is related to the second special symbol. When the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot (first result), the fourth jackpot game or the fifth jackpot game (equivalent to the third special game), which is more advantageous to the player than the second V jackpot game, can be executed. there is Therefore, it is possible to vary the type of the jackpot game depending on the type of the special symbol and the type of the determination result, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, after the second V jackpot game (equivalent to the second special game) that is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game (equivalent to the first special game) is executed, the boisterous mode or super-random mode (specific game state: normal time-saving game state), when it is determined as a jackpot (first result) as a result of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol, the fourth jackpot game or the second 5 jackpot game (equivalent to the third special game) can be executed, and when it is determined as a small hit (second result) as a result of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol, the second V jackpot game (second special game) can be executed. Therefore, even if the big hit determination related to the same second special symbol is performed, the type of the big win game to be executed can be changed according to the type of the determination result, and the interest in the game can be improved. Become.

In addition, the fourth jackpot game or fifth jackpot game (equivalent to the second special game) that is more advantageous to the player than the second V jackpot game (equivalent to the second special game) that is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game (equivalent to the first special game) In the infinite mode (specific game state: normal time-saving game state) controlled after the execution of the third special game), it was determined as a jackpot (first result) as a result of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol. In the case, it is possible to execute the 4th jackpot game or the 5th jackpot game (equivalent to the 3rd special game), and when it is determined as a small hit (second result) as a result of the jackpot determination related to the 2nd special symbol , the second V jackpot game (corresponding to the second special game) can be executed. Therefore, even if the big hit determination related to the same second special symbol is performed, the type of the big win game to be executed can be changed according to the type of the determination result, and the interest in the game can be improved. Become.

In addition, in the state of rush battle mode or boisterous dance mode (normal time saving game state), when the jackpot special pattern is stopped and displayed as the first special pattern and the jackpot game is executed, the game condition (second time saving Number of times, remaining number of small hits, production mode, etc.) are ranked up (improved). Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of the jackpot game in the normal time-saving game state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the state of rush battle mode (normal time-saving game state), the small winning special symbol is stop-displayed as the second special symbol, and the passing of the game ball to the specific area 53 during the small winning game is a condition. When the jackpot game is executed, the game conditions (the second time reduction number of times, the number of remaining small wins, the production mode, etc.) are ranked up (improved). Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of the small winning game in the normal time-saving game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, in the state of the super wild dance mode (normal time-saving game state), when the jackpot special pattern is stopped and displayed as the first special pattern and the jackpot game is executed, and when the jackpot special pattern is executed as the second special pattern. is stopped and displayed, and when a jackpot game is executed with the condition that the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the game, the game conditions (the second time reduction number, the remaining number of small hits, the production mode, etc.) It is designed to be maintained without being ranked down. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is disappointed by the big win or the small win in the normal time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, in any game mode (normal game state, normal time saving game state), when the big hit special symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol and the big hit game is executed, the game condition (second time saving The number of times, the number of remaining small hits, the production mode, etc.) are set to be the highest rank in the normal time-saving game state. Therefore, the value of the big win in the second special symbol can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the jackpot special pattern is stopped and displayed as the second special pattern and the jackpot game is executed, the game conditions (the second time reduction number, the number of small hits remaining, the production mode, etc.) are set to the maximum regardless of the type of the jackpot game. For example, when the 4th jackpot special game is executed, the game condition is set to super wild dance mode, and when the 5th jackpot special game is executed, the game condition is set to infinite mode instead of being ranked higher. You may make it In this case, the ratio of execution of the fifth jackpot special game may be higher than the ratio of execution of the fourth jackpot special game, or vice versa.

(Public power control processing of the main control board)
Using FIG. 103, the normal/universal power control processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing the normal/universal power control process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the general electric power processing data, and in step S402, refers to the branch destination address from the loaded general electric power processing data, and executes the processing corresponding to the branch destination address. Execute and end the current general map general electric control processing.

Specifically, if the general pattern general electric processing data = 0, the processing for executing the variable display of the normal pattern based on the reservation memory (normal pattern determination information) and the general pattern general electric processing data "1" A normal symbol variation process (step S410) for performing the process of changing to , etc. is executed. The details of the normal symbol variation process will be described later.

If the general pattern general electric processing data = 1, the processing for executing the auxiliary game to open the second start port 47 in a predetermined manner and the processing for changing the general general electric processing data to "0", etc. The auxiliary game process (step S420) is executed.

(Normal pattern variation processing of the main control board)
The normal symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board 110 .

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display of normal symbols is being performed, the process is moved to step S410-12, and when the variable display of normal symbols is not being performed, the process is moved to step S410-2.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved normal symbols (G) is 1 or more in step S410-2. When the normal design reserved number (G) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S410-3, and when the normal design reserved number (G) is not 1 or more, the current normal design variation process is terminated.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a updates the normal symbol reserved number (G) by subtracting "1", and in step S410-4, shifts the data stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area. The normal pattern determination information stored in the 1 storage unit to the 4th storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area. In addition, the normal pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit which is the normal pattern determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage unit. The normal pattern determination information used in the previous game is erased.

The main CPU 110a performs hit determination processing in step S410-5. Specifically, using the hit determination table for normal symbols (see FIG. 105 (a)), whether or not hit based on the random number value for hit determination stored in the game state and normal pattern execution storage area decide. The details of the hit determination table for normal symbol determination will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol determination processing in step S410-6. Specifically, using the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 105(b)), based on the game state, the hit determination result, and the random number value for normal symbol determination, the normal that is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuation display Determine the stop normal pattern data of the design. Details of the normal symbol determination table will be described later.

In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol designation command corresponding to the normal symbol type determined in the normal symbol determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the stop normal pattern data can be grasped in the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

The main CPU 110a performs a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination process in step S410-8. Specifically, using the general pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 105 (c)), the game state, the hit determination result, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern random number value, based on the normal pattern for the fluctuation display Determine the variation pattern (variation time). In addition, the detail of a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table is mentioned later.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a sets a normal pattern variation pattern specification command corresponding to the normal pattern variation pattern determined in the normal pattern variation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the general pattern variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the general pattern variation pattern can be grasped in the production control board 130.

In step S410-10, the main CPU 110a sets the normal pattern variation time corresponding to the normal pattern variation pattern determined in the normal pattern variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. The symbol variation display is started, and the normal symbol variation processing of this time is terminated. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variable display of the normal symbols is created in the data creating process of the step S700, and is output in the output control process of the step S800, so that the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display device 62. will be displayed.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed. When the variation time has not elapsed, the current normal symbol variation processing is terminated, and when the variation time has elapsed, the variation display of the normal symbols is stopped in step S410-13, and in step S410-14. , set the normal symbol determination command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

In step S410-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stopped normal symbol is a winning normal symbol (hitting winning). If it is not a winning normal symbol, this normal symbol variation process is terminated, and if it is a winning normal symbol, in step S410-16, the auxiliary game is controlled from the auxiliary game control table (see FIG. 105 (d)). Acquire the auxiliary game control data for doing. The details of the auxiliary game control table will be described later.

In step S410-17, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of auxiliary game in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM. Thereby, the opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp that the opening of the auxiliary game is started in the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

The main CPU 110a, in step S410-18, sets the opening time corresponding to the auxiliary game control data acquired in 410-16 of the auxiliary game in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S410-19, the general pattern general electric processing "1" is set to the data, and the normal symbol variation processing of this time is terminated.

(Hit determination table for normal symbols)
FIG. 105(a) is a hit determination table for normal symbols that is referred to when determining hits based on the normal pattern determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 105(a), in the hit determination table for normal symbols, the game state at the time of performing hit determination, the random number for hit determination, and the determination result of hit determination (hit, lose) correspond to each other. As a reference, the approximate winning probability is described in the rightmost column.

"Hit" is the determination result that the auxiliary game is executed, and "losing" is the determination result that the auxiliary game is not executed. In addition, the hit judgment is only lost, and no special loss (time saving) is set.

As the first feature of the hit determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. The point is that the probability (percentage) of being determined to be hit is the same regardless of whether it is a time-saving game state.By doing this, it is expected that the auxiliary game will be executed regardless of the game state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the hit determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 105(a) is that the hit probability is constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the probability (percentage) that the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state is determined to be hit is higher than the non-time-saving state (normal game state) (generates a normal pattern probability change). In this case, the probability (percentage) of the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state are determined to be the same, and the special time-saving game state is better than the normal time-saving game state. The probability (percentage) to be determined may be increased, or the probability (percentage) to be determined as winning in the normal time-saving gaming state may be higher than in the special time-saving gaming state.

(Normal design judgment table)
FIG. 105(b) is a normal symbol determination table referred to when determining a normal symbol stop symbol based on the normal symbol determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 105(b), in the normal symbol determination table, the game state when the determination is performed, the determination result of the hit determination (hit, lose), the random number for the hit symbol determination, and the normal symbol determination. The determination result, the stop normal pattern data indicating the determination result, and the normal design specifying command indicating the result of the normal design determination are associated with each other.

The normal symbol "0" is a losing normal symbol in which the auxiliary game is not executed.
The normal symbol "1" is a winning normal symbol in which the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened once is executed.
The normal symbol "2" is a winning normal symbol in which the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened twice is executed.

The first feature of the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 105(b) is that two types of normal symbols are set for executing an auxiliary game in which the number of openings of the second starting port 47 is different. be done. By doing so, the playability of the auxiliary game can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

The second feature of the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 105(b) is that the selection ratio of normal symbols is constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 105(c) is a normal pattern variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the normal pattern variation pattern based on the normal pattern determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 105 (c), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table includes the game state when making a judgment, the determination result of the hit determination, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern random number, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination determination Fluctuation time to be the result, normal figure fluctuation pattern designation command indicating the determination result is associated.

As the first feature of the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Shorter working hours gaming state, special shorter working hours gaming state) relatively short fluctuation time is determined, that is, shorter working hours state is easier to determine than non-working time saving state. By doing so, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the second starting port 47 in various time-saving gaming states than in the non-time-saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 105(c) is that the selection ratio of each normal pattern fluctuation pattern is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to see through the set value from the normal pattern fluctuation pattern, and it is possible to provide a fair game.

(Auxiliary game control table)
FIG. 105(d) is an auxiliary game control table used for controlling the auxiliary game based on the type of winning normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 105 (d), the auxiliary game control table includes the game state when the auxiliary game occurs, the stop normal diagram data, the number of times the second start port 47 is opened, and the opening time of the auxiliary game. , the first opening time of the second starting port 47, the interval time between openings, the second opening time of the second starting port 47, and the ending time of the auxiliary game are associated.

As the first feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 105 (d), various time-saving game states (normal time-saving game state, special The opening time of the second starting port 47 is longer when the auxiliary game is executed in the time saving game state). By doing so, it becomes easier for the game balls to enter the second starting port 47 in various time-saving gaming states than in the non-time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The second feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 105 (d) is the performance of the auxiliary game in the normal time saving game state and the special time saving game state (opening time, the number of times the second start port 47 opens, the second start The point is that there is no difference in the time value for opening the mouth 47). By doing so, the player is advantageous in any time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when setting to generate a special time-saving game state during the normal time-saving game state, the performance of the time-saving state before and after is the same, so complicated control is not required, and the number of pure time-saving games is added. It becomes possible to

The third feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 105 (d) is the performance of the auxiliary game in the auxiliary game (opening time, the number of times the second start port 47 opens, the time value that the second start port 47 opens ) is constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to find out the set value from the progress of the auxiliary game, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

In addition, depending on whether it is a normal time-saving game state or a special time-saving game state, the performance of the auxiliary game (opening time, the number of times the second start port 47 opens, at least one of the time values that the second start port 47 opens ) may be different.

Also, depending on whether it is a normal time-saving game state or a special time-saving game state, the performance of the auxiliary game (opening time, the number of times the second start port 47 is opened, at least one of the time value when the second start port 47 is opened 1), when the special time-saving game state overlaps with the normal time-saving game state, the performance of the auxiliary game of the normal time-saving game state may be taken over in the special time-saving game state.

(External information data creation process for main control board)
The external information data creation process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing external information data creation processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S720-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. If there is no winning, the process proceeds to step S720-3, and if there is a winning, in step S720-2, the external information data of the starting opening winning signal indicating that the game ball has won the starting opening is sent. It is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variable display of the special symbols has stopped. If the variable display is not stopped (in any of the variable display, customer waiting state, or jackpot game), the process proceeds to step S720-5, and if the variable display is stopped, step S720. At -4, the external information data of the symbol determination signal indicating that the variable display of the special symbols has stopped is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not a jackpot game has started in step S720-5. When the jackpot game is not started, the process is moved to step S720-7, and when the jackpot game is started, in step S720-6, an external special game signal indicating that the jackpot game state is in progress is generated. Information data is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot game has ended. If the jackpot game has not ended, the process proceeds to step S720-9, and if the jackpot game has ended, in step S720-8, the special game set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c. Clear the external information data of the signal.

In step S720-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an advantageous state (including a jackpot game and a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state has started. If the advantageous state has not started, the process proceeds to step S720-11.If the advantageous state has started, in step S720-10 an advantageous state signal indicating that the advantageous state is in progress is sent to the main RAM 110c. external information data output area.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S720-11 whether or not the advantageous state has ended. If the advantageous state has not ended, the process proceeds to step S720-13, and if the advantageous state has ended, in step S720-12, the advantageous state set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c. Clear the external information data of the signal.

In step S720-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not frame opening for opening the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 has started. If the frame opening has not started, the process proceeds to step S720-15, and if the frame opening has started, in step S720-14, the external information of the frame opening signal indicating that the frame is being opened. Data is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the frame opening has ended (the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 are closed). If the frame opening has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S720-17. Clear the external information data of the signal.

In step S720-17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear or security error (various abnormalities) has occurred. If the RWM clear or security error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S720-19, and if the RWM clear or security error has occurred, in step S720-18 it is determined that the RWM clear or security error has occurred. is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a payout condition for a predetermined unit (here, 10) of prize balls is satisfied. If the payout condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S720-21, and if the payout condition is not satisfied, it is determined in step S720-20 that the payout condition for prize balls of a predetermined unit has been satisfied. The external information data of the shown prize ball schedule signal is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a predetermined unit (here, 10) of prize balls has been paid out. If the payout of prize balls has not been completed, the current external information data creation processing is terminated. If the payout of prize balls has been completed, the payout of prize balls in a predetermined unit is completed in step S720-22. The external information data of the prize ball payout signal indicating that the game has been played is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c, and the current external information data creation processing is terminated.

Various types of external information data set in the external information data output area are output to the outside of the gaming machine 1 as game information from various terminals of the game information output terminal board by the output control process of step S750 described above. Become.

(Description of various signals output as game information)
FIG. 107 shows the types of various signals output as game information from various output terminals of the game information output terminal board 90, output timings of the various signals, and output periods of the various signals.

From the first terminal, when a game ball enters the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, a starting hole winning signal is output over 100 ms.
From the second terminal, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the symbol determination signal is output for 500 ms.
A special game signal is output from the third terminal from the start of the jackpot game to the continuation of the jackpot game.
An advantageous state signal is output from the fourth terminal from the start of the advantageous state to the continuation of the advantageous state.

From the fifth terminal, a frame opening signal is output from when the opening of the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 is detected until the opening continues.
From the sixth terminal, a security signal is output for 200 ms from the occurrence of various abnormalities (RWM clear, fraudulent winning, abnormal winning, magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality, payout abnormality).
From the seventh terminal, a scheduled payout signal is output for 100 ms from the time when the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is determined.
A payout completion signal is output from the eighth terminal for 100 ms after the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is completed.

Since the game information is output to the outside of the game machine 1 through the game information output terminal board 90 in this way, the operating state of the game machine 1 can be monitored and the performance can be monitored by an information collecting device such as a hall computer. It becomes possible to perform analysis and the like.

(Performance display data setting processing of the main control board)
The performance display data setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing performance display data setting processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S850-1, the main CPU 110a displays the display switching time counter saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in order to determine whether or not to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113. It is determined whether or not the switching value is "0". If the display switching value is "0", the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is switched, and the process proceeds to step S850-2. , the process proceeds to step S850-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is not changed. It should be noted that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the value of the display switching time counter is "0", which is the display switching value.

In step S850-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a lighting confirmation completion flag for determining whether or not lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmed flag has been saved, the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113, and the process proceeds to step S850-4.If the lighting confirmed flag has not been saved, the information is displayed. The process moves to step S850-3 to check whether the device 113 is lit. When this process is executed for the first time after the game machine 1 is powered on, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step S850-3, the main CPU 110a displays lighting confirmation display for lighting all the segments (including the decimal points) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) constituting the information display 113. Determine data.

In step S850-4, the main CPU 110a acquires a normal base value (to be displayed on the information display 113) corresponding to the data selection counter value from the base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the base storage Acquire the normal base value saved in the second area of the area, and if the data selection counter value is "2", obtain the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area, and select the data If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is acquired.

In step S850-5, the main CPU 110a refers to a display data determination table (not shown), and displays information based on the section counter value, the number of normal outs indicated by the normal out number counter, and the acquired normal base value. The display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the device 113 is determined.

The main CPU 110a sets the determined display data as the display information of the information display 113 in the output data area of the information RWM area in step S850-6. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area in the output control process of step S880 is referred to, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. will be The information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above display switching time counter in step S850-7, and determines whether or not the display switching time counter is greater than the upper limit value (eg, 5 seconds) in step S850-8. If it is not greater than the upper limit, it is assumed that the time for switching the display of the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process proceeds to step S850-15. Assuming that the time for switching the displayed performance information has passed, the display switching time counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-9.

In step S850-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is the lighting confirmed flag in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process proceeds to step S850-12, and if there is no lighting confirmed flag, in step S850-11, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. .

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above data selection counter in step S850-12, and determines whether or not the data selection counter is greater than the upper limit value (eg, 3) in step S85-13. If it is not larger than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S850-15, and if it is larger than the upper limit, the data selection counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-14.

In step S850-15, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in the above-described game ball counting process. The game stack pointer saved in the RWM area is restored, and the current performance display data setting process is terminated.

In this way, all the segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 light up after the gaming machine 1 is powered on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (lighting confirmation is performed). Therefore, it is possible to check whether the information display 113 is out of order and which segment is out of order.

In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order. It is possible to compare the performance information (usual base value) in two game sections, and it is possible to confirm the actual performance of the game machine and grasp the possibility of fraud.

(Information displayed on the information display in each game section)
Next, the information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. In the display information table of FIG. 109, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display contents of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113 includes "bL." indicating the normal base value of the current game interval, and " "b1.", "b2." indicating the normal base value of the game interval two times before, and "b3." indicating the normal base value of the game interval three times before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 113 includes "--" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of normal outs is "0". "00" indicating that the normal out count is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99" respectively, "01" to "99", and the normal base value is There is "99." indicating that it is "100" or more. When the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The numerical value information displayed in the numerical segment does not change in display mode (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal operation, but the identification information displayed in the identification segment does not change. The display mode changes (blinking display or lighting display) depending on the number of outs during normal operation (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value and whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game intervals, when the identification information of the game interval for which there is no calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is blinked. In addition, in the game section after the second game section, when displaying the identification information ("bL.") of the current game section, the period when the credibility of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of outs during normal 0 to 5999), the identification information will blink. Otherwise, the identification information is illuminated.

Here, to give an example of the display of the information display 113, the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is within the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", the identification segment of the information display 113 flashes "bL." ” will be lit up.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information not using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display of "00" to "99" is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value If the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." .

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens place of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01" etc.), so 2 as a numerical segment An easy-to-understand display can be achieved by effectively using two 7-segment displays.

In addition, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of outs during normal of the current game section is 0 to 5999, which is not sufficient to calculate the normal base value. , the identification information “bL.” displayed in the identification segment blinks, making it easy to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is information with low credibility.

Also, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "--" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that there is no

Instead of executing the game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process as information programs, one or two of them are executed as game programs (for example, game ball counting process). The processing may be executed within the input control processing which monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the remainder may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display device 113 may be executed by a performance program instead of being executed by the output control process, which is a game program.

Also, by the out ball detection switch 39a, the game ball that has won the general winning hole 43, the first starting hole 45, the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56, and the out hole 39 Instead of detecting out-balls made up of game balls that have flowed into the outlet, only game balls that have flowed into the out-port may be detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a. In that case, out ball detection switch 39a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a, first big winning opening detection switch 50a, second big winning opening detection switch The number of outs (the number of total outs, the number of normal outs) should be incremented by one each time a game ball is detected at 56a.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting change)
With reference to FIG. 110, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting change will be described. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated after setting change.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the specific area 53, the second big winning hole 56) is changed (entering difficulty level). Various drives for operating movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the result of the game The sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 69 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, state confirmation display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At the timing of T1, when a setting change operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned on and the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on) is performed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control board 110 starts the setting change mode. It is in a pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-described setting change notification is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the setting value confirmation operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned off) is performed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are terminated, and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. The set values displayed on the 7-segment display 113d are erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid please”) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the initial operation notification are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 69 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is given. be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7 segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are displayed. are all lit up, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has passed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses after the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, the lighting of all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after confirming settings)
With reference to FIG. 111, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting confirmation will be described. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated after setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the specific area 53, the second big winning hole 56) is changed (entering difficulty level). Various drives for operating movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the result of the game The sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 69 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, state confirmation display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At the timing of T1, when the setting confirmation operation is performed (the setting key switch 112a is turned ON) when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 110 starts the setting confirmation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before starting. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-described setting confirmation notification is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the confirmation end operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned off) is performed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated, and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. The set value displayed on the segment display 113d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid please”) is started.

The specific example from the timing T3 to the timing T10 is the same as the specific example from the timing T3 to the timing T10 in the case of initializing the various driving sources after the setting change shown in FIG. Therefore, the description here is omitted.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, the movable bodies (the second start opening opening/closing member 48, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, the specific area opening/closing member 52, various driving sources for operating the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57) (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is initially operated, therefore, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game shop (only the game board 5 and the board unit 500 Including the replacement of the only), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main information display 69 (first Special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66 , right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, so that the main control board 110 is not burdened with an extra processing load, and it is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources. becomes possible.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initialized, the initial operation notification for prompting confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources is performed. It is possible to inform the worker (worker, game store clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and to allow the operator to appropriately check the operation.

In addition, even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) ends, various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are activated. Since the initial operation is performed, it is possible to appropriately check the operation without complicated work such as checking the operation of various drive sources while changing the setting (setting confirmation).

In addition, after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) ends, after the operation standby time has passed, the operation of various drive sources for moving the movable body that affects the game result is started. It is possible to provide a time margin from the end of the setting change (setting confirmation) to the confirmation of the operation of various drive sources, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, regardless of whether the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is after the setting change mode or after the setting confirmation mode, the same initial operation is notified. , the control of the notification of the initial operation can be simplified, and the development cost of the gaming machine 1 can be reduced (shortening the development period, etc.).

Further, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big prize opening LED is turned off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to confirm the operation of the first big prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 by the light from the LED, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation. .

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is performed, and in the game ready state in which the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motion of the movable effect device 73 which does not affect the result of (1) is performed, two kinds of initial motions can be confirmed in order, and the motion confirmation can be properly performed.

Further, when various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big prize winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are opened. Since the opening signal is not output even though the game machine 1 is open, it is possible not to impose an extra processing load on the main control board 110, and to collect information output from the gaming machine 1. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on until the progress control of the game is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control is started (display of the performance information is permitted), the game progress control is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, by not displaying the performance information on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed, the current setting value can be appropriately notified, and it is possible to ensure the convenience of the game parlor.

In addition, during the initial operation of various drive sources, the information display 113 does not display the set values and the performance information of the game machine. , and it is possible to accurately determine failures of various driving sources.

Incidentally, after the progress control of the game is started, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are turned on to confirm the lighting. , the lighting confirmation may not be performed.

(operation comparison table)
Using FIG. 112, various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 Operation timing (initial operation, big winning game operation, small winning game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, auxiliary game operation in time saving game state) is compared.

The number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven is the same during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state and during the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

One driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is longer during the initial operation than during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation can be performed during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, the total driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is shorter during the initial operation than during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

One drive time of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is longer during the initial operation than during the small winning game operation. Therefore, it can be confirmed at the initial operation whether or not the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the small winning game operation, and the accuracy of operation confirmation can be improved.

Further, the total driving time of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is shorter during the initial operation than during the small winning game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of the initial operation of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b.

The number of times the passage switching solenoid 52b is driven is greater during the initial operation than during the small winning game operation. Therefore, it can be confirmed at the time of the initial operation whether or not the passage switching solenoid 52b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, the total driving time of the passage switching solenoid 52b is shorter during the initial operation than during the small winning game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the flow path switching solenoid 52b.

The total drive time of the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b is shorter during the initial operation than during the jackpot game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of the initial operation of the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b.

It should be noted that at least one of the number of times of driving the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is replaced by the number of times of driving and one driving time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. , may be set to the same or nearly the same (similar) value as the total driving time. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is changed to the number of times of driving and one driving time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. , may be set to a value smaller than the total driving time. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of the initial operation of the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second starting port opening and closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is set to the number of times of driving during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and one driving time , may be set to the same or nearly the same (similar) value as the total driving time. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second starting port opening and closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is set to the number of times of driving during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and one driving time , may be set to a value greater than the total driving time. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second starting port opening and closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is set to the number of times of driving during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and one driving time , may be a value smaller than the total driving time. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the initial operation, the driving time of one time, and the total driving time is set to the number of driving times of the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the small winning game operation. , one driving time, and the total driving time may be the same or almost the same (similar) value. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the initial operation and the total driving time is set higher than the number of times of driving the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the total driving time during the small winning game operation. It can be a large value. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is driven during the initial operation and the total driving time is set to be smaller than the one driving time of the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the small winning game operation. can be a value. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of the initial operation of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the flow path switching solenoid 52b at the time of the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time, the number of times of driving the flow path switching solenoid 52b at the time of the small winning game operation, one driving time , may be set to the same or nearly the same (similar) value as the total driving time. If it does in this way, it can be confirmed at the time of initial operation whether the flow-path switching solenoid 52b can perform small winning game operation, and it becomes possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, at least one of the one drive time and the total drive time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during the initial operation is set to one drive time and the total drive time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during the small winning game operation. It can be a large value. If it does in this way, it can be confirmed at the time of initial operation whether the flow-path switching solenoid 52b can perform small winning game operation, and it becomes possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven during the initial operation may be set to a smaller value than the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven during the small winning game operation. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the passage switching solenoid 52b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b at the time of the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is set to one driving time at the time of the jackpot game operation (4R or 10R), the total It may be the same value as the driving time or almost the same (similar) value. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the big winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b during the initial operation, the driving time of one time, and the total driving time is set to be greater than the driving time of one time and the total driving time during the jackpot game operation. value. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the big winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

(First modification)
A first modification of the fifth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 113 to 116. FIG. In the first modification, the RWM clearing process continues until the RWM clearing switch 111a is operated again, the driving source initial operation process is performed while the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, and the RWM clearing process are being executed. Since it differs from the fifth embodiment in that the RWM is cleared during execution of the change processing, only the differences from the fifth embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
Here, portions that are the same as those of the initial setting process of the main control board of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 8 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted, and only different portions and their surroundings will be described.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, processing for changing (updating) the set value (probability of judging a big hit), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, and the above-mentioned Then, the drive source initial operation process (game program) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S26.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing (game program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, processing for initializing the control state of the game (initializing other than the set value region of the RWM region for game), and the drive source initial operation processing described above (game program) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26. Details of the RWM clear processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S28. Specifically, the processing for displaying the set values saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113 and the drive source initial operation process described above are performed, and step S30 is executed. to process.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing RWM clear processing of the main control board 110 .

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear preparation designation command to the effect control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control board performs processing for performing RWM clear preparation notification.

"RWM clear preparation notification" means that the image display device displays a clear preparation screen for recognizing that the RWM clear preparation is in progress, or the voice output device 9 notifies "Please press the RWM clear switch again". It is to output sound over a predetermined period.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S24-2. Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, current A process for initially operating the path switching solenoid 52b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is performed until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear approval operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is ended and the RWM clear is performed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. If there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process proceeds to step S24-2. transfer processing.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S24-5, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

The main CPU 110a transmits to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 an RWM clear designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized in step S24-6. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for ending the above-described RWM clear preparation notification.

In step S24-7, the main CPU 110a performs processing for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources in response to termination of the RWM clear preparation mode by the RWM clear approval operation, and terminates the current RWM clear processing.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear)
With reference to FIG. 115, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear will be described. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the specific area 53, the second big winning hole 56) is changed (entering difficulty level). Various drives for operating movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the result of the game The sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 69 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, state confirmation display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and the RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 starts the RWM clearing preparation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the RWM clearing is being prepared is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, RWM clear preparation notification to prompt confirmation of RWM clear preparation and operation of various drive sources (display of clear preparation screen, notification sound of "Press the RWM clear switch again" and "Confirm the operation of the solenoid Please alternately output the initial operation confirmation voice).

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed in a state in which the operation time of various driving sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is completed, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start of the game. Move to enabled state.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 69 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is given. be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7 segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are displayed. are all lit up, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, the movable bodies (the second start opening opening/closing member 48, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, the specific area opening/closing member 52, various driving sources for operating the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57) (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is initially operated, therefore, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game shop (only the game board 5 and the board unit 500 Including the replacement of the only), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main information display 69 (first Special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66 , right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, so that the main control board 110 is not burdened with an extra processing load, and it is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources. becomes possible.

In addition, when the various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initialized, setting change notification (setting Since it is designed to perform a setting confirmation notification for prompting confirmation and operation confirmation of various driving sources, the operation confirmation of the game machine 1 is performed to indicate that it is time to confirm the operation of various driving sources. Workers (factory workers, game store clerks) can be informed of this, and can be made to appropriately check the operation.

In addition, in the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode), various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated, so the game can be started before the game progress control is started. It is possible to reduce the development cost of the gaming machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.) without creating multiple states in the previous state.

In addition, when the pre-start state ends due to the setting value confirmation operation (confirmation end operation), the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of the various drive sources has elapsed. Therefore, the initial operation of various driving sources is not performed in a game-enabled state, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of being confused with the operation of various driving sources according to the progress of the game.

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is performed, and in the game ready state in which the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motion of the movable effect device 73 which does not affect the result of (1) is performed, two kinds of initial motions can be confirmed in order, and the motion confirmation can be properly performed.

Further, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big prize opening LED is turned off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to confirm the operation of the first big prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 by the light from the LED, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation. .

Further, when various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big prize winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are opened. Since the opening signal is not output even though the game machine 1 is open, it is possible not to impose an extra processing load on the main control board 110, and to collect information output from the gaming machine 1. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on until the progress control of the game is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control is started (display of the performance information is permitted), the game progress control is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, by not displaying the performance information on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed, the current setting value can be appropriately notified, and it is possible to ensure the convenience of the game parlor.

In addition, in the setting change notification in the setting change mode, it was designed to display a setting change screen that displays the characters "setting change in progress", but in addition to the characters "setting change in progress", various drive sources It is also possible to display a setting changing screen on which characters such as "driving source initializing" or "please check solenoid operation" prompting visual confirmation of the initial operation of the motor are displayed.

(operation comparison table)
Using FIG. 116, various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in board unit 500 Operation timing (initial operation, big winning game operation, small winning game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, auxiliary game operation in time saving game state) is compared.

One driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is longer during the initial operation than during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation can be performed during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

One drive time of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is longer during the initial operation than during the small winning game operation. Therefore, it can be confirmed at the initial operation whether or not the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the small winning game operation, and the accuracy of operation confirmation can be improved.

In addition, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b at the time of the initial operation may be set to the same value or substantially the same (similar) value as the driving time of one time at the time of the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. . In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Also, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the driving time of one time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

In addition, one drive time of the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to the same value or substantially the same (similar) value as the one drive time during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state. . In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the driving time of one time during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, the driving time of the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b at the time of the initial operation is the same value as the driving time of the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b at the time of the small winning game operation, the total driving time, or They may be substantially the same (similar) values. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the driving time of the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the initial operation may be set to a smaller value than the driving time of the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the small winning game operation. . By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of the initial operation of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b.

In addition, one drive time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b at the time of the initial operation, the same value as the one drive time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b at the time of the small winning game operation, or may be set to substantially the same (similar) value. . If it does in this way, it can be confirmed at the time of initial operation whether the flow-path switching solenoid 52b can perform small winning game operation, and it becomes possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b at the time of the initial operation may be set to a larger value than the driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b at the time of the small winning game operation. If it does in this way, it can be confirmed at the time of initial operation whether the flow-path switching solenoid 52b can perform small winning game operation, and it becomes possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, even if the driving time of the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b during the initial operation is set to the same value or substantially the same (similar) value as the driving time of one time during the jackpot game operation (4R or 10R). good. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the big winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the driving time of the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b during the initial operation may be set to a value longer than the driving time of the big winning game operation. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the big winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

(Second modification)
A second modification of the fifth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. In addition, in the second modification, the setting change function and the setting confirmation function are not installed, the state confirmation display 68 is not provided, and the RWM clear processing continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again. Since it is different from the fifth embodiment in that it is different from the fifth embodiment, only the difference from the fifth embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing (game program) of the main control board 110 in the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

The main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S12, and waits for activation of other control boards in step S13. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an RWM clear operation in step S16. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S23 assuming that the mode is to be shifted to the RWM clear preparation mode, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. When the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step S18 assuming that the power is restored, and when the backup flag is not saved, the process is moved to step S23 assuming that the power is turned on for the first time.

The main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S18, and determines whether the checksum is normal in step S19. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S18. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step S20, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the RWM clear preparation mode , and the process proceeds to step S23.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and sets the RWM area when power is restored. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, in the effect control board 130, a process for executing power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption is performed.

The main CPU 110a transmits other commands (a special symbol storage designation command, a normal symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130 in step S22. As a result, the production control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols, and the processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the image display device is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to step S30.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear preparation designation command to the effect control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for performing RWM clear preparation notification.

"RWM clear preparation notification" means that the image display device displays a clear preparation screen for recognizing that the RWM clear preparation is in progress, or the voice output device 9 notifies "Please press the RWM clear switch again". It is to output sound over a predetermined period.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear approval operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated and the RWM clear is performed, and the process proceeds to step S25. If there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process of step S24 is repeated. .

In step S25, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S27. Specifically, various driving sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 are initialized. process to make it work. Details of initial operations of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S30. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S31, permits all interrupts to start control of the progress of the game. , the current initial setting process ends.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear)
With reference to FIG. 118, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear will be described. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated after RWM is cleared.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the specific area 53, the second big winning hole 56) is changed (entering difficulty level). Various drives for operating movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the result of the game The sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 69 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and the RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 starts the RWM clearing preparation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done. At this time, the above-described RWM clear preparation notification is started.

At the timing of T2, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the RWM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operations of various drive sources are started. At this time, an initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, output of initial operation confirmation voice "Please check operation of solenoid") for prompting operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the initial operation notification are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 69 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is given. be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7 segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are displayed. are all lit up, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses after the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, the lighting of all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, the movable bodies (the second start opening opening/closing member 48, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, the specific area opening/closing member 52, various driving sources for operating the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57) (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is initially operated, therefore, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game shop (only the game board 5 and the board unit 500 Including the replacement of the only), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Also, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main information display 69 (the first special symbol display 60, the second 2 special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, second special symbol reservation display device 64, normal symbol reservation display device 65, round number display device 66, right-handed display device 67) is in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to avoid imposing an extra processing load on the main control board 110 and to concentrate on confirming the operation of various drive sources.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initialized, the initial operation notification for prompting confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources is performed. It is possible to inform the worker (worker, game store clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and to allow the operator to appropriately check the operation.

Further, even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, after the RWM clear preparation mode is finished, the initial operation of various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform the operation confirmation appropriately without complicated work such as confirming the operation of various driving sources while performing the RWM clear approval operation.

In addition, after the RWM clear preparation mode ends, after the operation standby time has passed, the operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is started, so the RWM clear approval operation After the end of the operation, it is possible to provide a sufficient time to check the operation of various driving sources, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big prize opening LED is turned off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to confirm the operation of the first big prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 by the light from the LED, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation. .

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is performed, and in the game ready state in which the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motion of the movable effect device 73 which does not affect the result of (1) is performed, two kinds of initial motions can be confirmed in order, and the motion confirmation can be properly performed.

Further, when various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big prize winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are opened. Since the opening signal is not output even though the game machine 1 is open, it is possible not to impose an extra processing load on the main control board 110, and to collect information output from the gaming machine 1. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on until the progress control of the game is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control is started (display of the performance information is permitted), the game progress control is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

It should be noted that various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 in the second modification Various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, small winning game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, auxiliary game operation in time saving game state) are the same as the operation comparison table shown in FIG. Therefore, the description here is omitted.

(Third modification)
A third modification of the fifth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 119 to 120. FIG. The third modification differs from the fifth embodiment in that the setting change function and the setting confirmation function are not provided, and the RWM clearing process continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again. This is the second modification in that the drive source initial operation process is performed during the clear preparation mode.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing (game program) of the main control board 110 in the third modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. FIG.
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to portions that match the initial setting process of the main control board in the second modified example shown in FIG.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S24. Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, current A process for initially operating the path switching solenoid 52b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is performed until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S25.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear approval operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is ended and the RWM clear is performed, and the process moves to step S26, and if there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process moves to step S24.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a performs processing for stopping the initial operations of various driving sources, and in step S27, initializes (0 clears) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S30. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear)
With reference to FIG. 120, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during RWM clear preparation will be described. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the specific area 53, the second big winning hole 56) is changed (entering difficulty level). Various drives for operating movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the result of the game The sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 69 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and the RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 starts the RWM clearing preparation mode to start the progress control of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before being done.

At this time, operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, RWM clear preparation notification to prompt confirmation of RWM clear preparation and operation of various drive sources (display of clear preparation screen, notification sound of "Press the RWM clear switch again" and "Confirm the operation of the solenoid Please alternately output the initial operation confirmation voice).

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed in a state in which the operation time of various driving sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is completed, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start of the game. Move to enabled state.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 69 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is given. be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7 segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are displayed. are all lit up, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, the movable bodies (the second start opening opening/closing member 48, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, the specific area opening/closing member 52, various driving sources for operating the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57) (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is initially operated, therefore, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game shop (only the game board 5 and the board unit 500 Including the replacement of the only), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Also, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main information display 69 (the first special symbol display 60, the second 2 special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, second special symbol reservation display device 64, normal symbol reservation display device 65, round number display device 66, right-handed display device 67) is in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to avoid imposing an extra processing load on the main control board 110 and to concentrate on confirming the operation of various drive sources.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initialized, an RWM clear preparation notification is made to indicate that the RWM clear is being prepared and to prompt the confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources. Therefore, it is possible to notify the operator (worker, game clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various driving sources, and to appropriately check the operation. It is possible to do it.

In addition, in the RWM clear preparation mode, various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are initially operated, so in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, a plurality of Therefore, it is possible to reduce the development cost of the game machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.).

In addition, when the RWM clear approval operation is performed and the pre-start state ends, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of the various drive sources has elapsed. Since the initial operation of the power source is not performed in a game-enabled state, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of being confused with the operation of various drive sources according to the progress of the game.

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is performed, and in the game ready state in which the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motion of the movable effect device 73 which does not affect the result of (1) is performed, two kinds of initial motions can be confirmed in order, and the motion confirmation can be properly performed.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are being initially operated, the big winning opening LED is extinguished. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big prize opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the big prize opening LED, and it is possible to properly confirm the operation. It becomes possible to go to

Further, when various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big prize winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are opened. Since the opening signal is not output even though the game machine 1 is open, it is possible not to impose an extra processing load on the main control board 110, and to collect information output from the gaming machine 1. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on until the progress control of the game is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control is started (display of the performance information is permitted), the game progress control is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, in the RWM clear preparation notification in the RWM clear preparation mode, the clear preparation screen that displays the characters "Preparing for RWM clear" was displayed, but in addition to the characters "Preparing for RWM clear" It is also possible to display a clear preparation screen on which characters such as "driving source initial operation in progress" or "please check solenoid operation" prompting visual confirmation of the initial operation of various driving sources are displayed.

Various operation timings (initial Operation, jackpot game operation, small winning game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, auxiliary game operation in time saving game state) is the same as the operation comparison table shown in FIG. 116, so here Description is omitted.

(Fourth modification)
A fourth modification of the fifth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. The fourth modification differs from the fifth embodiment in that it does not have a setting change function or a setting confirmation function, and differs from the second modification in that the RWM clear is performed without going through the RWM clear preparation mode. Since there are differences, only the differences from the fifth embodiment and the second modification will be described here.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing (game program) of the main control board 110 in the fourth modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. FIG.
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to portions that match the initial setting process of the main control board in the second modified example shown in FIG.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S25. Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, current A process for initially operating the path switching solenoid 52b and the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for a predetermined period is performed. Details of initial operations of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S30. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated after RWM is cleared.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50, the specific area 53, the second big winning hole 56) is changed (entering difficulty level). Various drives for operating movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the result of the game The sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 69 (the second big winning hole) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64, normal symbol reservation display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and an RWM clearing operation (RWM clearing switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 performs RWM clearing and the game progress control is started. The previous pre-start state is entered. At this time, an initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, output of initial operation confirmation voice "Please check operation of solenoid") for prompting operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation waiting time (here, 7 seconds) has passed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T3, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T4, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T5, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T6, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the third time, and at the timing of T7, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T8, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation are completed. The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the main information display 69 (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is given. be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7 segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are displayed. are all lit up, and lighting confirmation is started. Note that the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T9, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, the movable bodies (the second start opening opening/closing member 48, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, the specific area opening/closing member 52, various driving sources for operating the second large winning opening opening/closing member 57) (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is initially operated, therefore, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game shop (only the game board 5 and the board unit 500 Including the replacement of the only), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Also, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main information display 69 (the first special symbol display 60, the second 2 special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, second special symbol reservation display device 64, normal symbol reservation display device 65, round number display device 66, right-handed display device 67) is in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to avoid imposing an extra processing load on the main control board 110 and to concentrate on confirming the operation of various drive sources.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initialized, the initial operation notification for prompting confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources is performed. It is possible to inform the worker (worker, game store clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and to allow the operator to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, after the RWM clear operation is performed and the operation standby time has passed, the operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is started. Therefore, it is possible to provide a time margin from the end of the RWM clear operation to the confirmation of the operation of various drive sources, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big prize opening LED is turned off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to confirm the operation of the first big prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 by the light from the LED, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation. .

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is performed, and in the game ready state in which the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motion of the movable effect device 73 which does not affect the result of (1) is performed, two kinds of initial motions can be confirmed in order, and the motion confirmation can be properly performed.

Further, when various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big prize winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are opened. Since the above-described opening signal is not output even though the game machine 1 is open, it is possible not to impose an unnecessary processing load on the main control board 110, and the information output from the game machine 1 It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information collects information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on until the progress control of the game is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control is started (display of the performance information is permitted), the game progress control is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Various operation timings (initial Operation, jackpot game operation, small winning game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, auxiliary game operation in time saving game state) is the same as the operation comparison table shown in FIG. 112, so here Description is omitted.

(Timing chart when normal time-saving gaming state occurs)
FIG. 123 is a timing chart when the normal time-saving gaming state occurs.

First, at the timing of T1, the variable display of the special symbols to be a big hit is started. At this time, since it is in the normal game state, all information such as the normal medium payout number and normal medium out number for calculating the normal base value, and the total number of outs for setting the game section are aggregated (counted). It is running.

Next, at timing T2, variable display of winning normal symbols is started. In this variable display, a variable display is performed by a relatively long normal pattern variation pattern (variable time of 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time saving state.

After that, at the timing of T3, the stop display of the special symbols is started, and at the timing of T4, when the special symbol stop time N (0.5 seconds for the big win) has passed, the big win game (opening) is started, and the right When the beating indicator 67 lights up, the output of a special game signal indicating that the jackpot game is in progress and an advantageous state signal indicating that the player is in an advantageous state more advantageous than the normal game state is started to be output. In addition, the aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of outs during normal period for calculating the normal base value will be stopped, and the aggregation (counting) of the total number of outs for setting the game section will continue (normal base value calculation and display of normal base values).

Then, at the timing of T5, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is started during the normal game state. Therefore, the second starting port 47 is opened in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

In addition, at the timing of T7, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this variable display is started during the jackpot game (low-probability non-time-saving game state), the variable display is performed by a relatively long normal pattern variation pattern (variation time 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time-saving state.

Next, at the timing of T8, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is started during the jackpot game. Therefore, the second starting port 47 is opened in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

After that, at the timing of T10, the auxiliary game is finished and the variable display of normal symbols is started. Since this variation display was started during the jackpot game, it is performed with a relatively long normal figure variation pattern for non-time saving state. Then, at the timing of T11, when the jackpot game (ending) ends, the normal time-saving game state is started, and the output of the special game signal is stopped.

In addition, at the timing of T12, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T13, when the stop time of the normal symbols has passed, the auxiliary game is started, but the fluctuation display of the normal symbols is during the jackpot game (low probability Since it was started during the non-time-saving game state), the second start port 47 will be opened with a short opening time for the non-time-saving state.

Next, at the timing of T14, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuation display is normally started during the time saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short normal figure fluctuation pattern for the time saving state.

After that, at the timing of T15, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T16, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is in the normal time-saving game state. Since it was started, the 2nd starting port 47 will be open|released by the long opening time for time saving states. Then, at the timing of T16, when the auxiliary game ends, the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started.

Here, an example is shown in which the normal time-saving game state occurs during the variable display of the normal symbols, but even if the normal time-saving game state occurs during the normal symbol stop display or during the auxiliary game, the following normal From the fluctuation display of the pattern, the fluctuation display by the relatively short normal pattern fluctuation pattern for the time saving state is performed.

Thus, when the normal time-saving gaming state occurs, the normal time-saving gaming state occurs after a predetermined period of time has passed since the stop display of the special symbol that becomes a big hit ends (after the big winning game ends). ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous during the jackpot game, and to secure the profit balance between the game parlor side and the player side.

Also, when a normal time-saving gaming state (low-probability short-time gaming state) occurs, a predetermined period before the normal time-saving gaming state occurs is started), the right-handed indicator 67 is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged in connection with the occurrence of the normal time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, when a normal time-saving gaming state (low-probability short-time gaming state) occurs, a predetermined period before the normal time-saving gaming state occurs is started), the aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of outs during normal for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted). Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, even during the period when the aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of outs during normal period for calculating the normal base value is stopped (suspended), the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value will not be possible. Since it is continued, it is possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

Also, when the normal time-saving gaming state (low-probability short-time gaming state) occurs, the advantageous state signal is sent from a predetermined period before the normal time-saving gaming state occurs (at the start of the jackpot game, which is a low-probability short-time gaming state). It is designed to output. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be output accurately over the period of the advantageous state, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the outside.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state occurs during the variable display of the normal symbols, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed, from the next normal symbol variation display to a relatively short normal pattern for the time-saving state. Fluctuation display is performed according to the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the variable display of the normal symbols midway due to the occurrence of the normal time-saving game state, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Also, when the normal time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, the variation display by the relatively short normal pattern fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state is performed from the next normal symbol fluctuation display, and from the next auxiliary game The second starting port 47 is opened with a long opening time for the time saving state. Therefore, complicated processing such as changing control of variable display of normal symbols and control of auxiliary game due to occurrence of normal time-saving game state is not performed, and processing load can be reduced.

(Timing chart when the normal time-saving gaming state ends)
FIG. 124 is a timing chart when the normal time-saving game state ends.

First, at the timing of T1, the variable display of the special symbols, which is the final time in the normal time-saving game state, that is, the variable display of the special symbols that result in a loss is started. At this time, since the game is in the normal time-saving game state, the right-handed indicator 67 is lit, and the advantageous state signal is output. In addition, since it is in the normal time-saving gaming state, while the information totaling (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of outs during normal for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted), the game section is set Information aggregation (counting) of the total number of outs for

Next, at timing T2, variable display of winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuation display is normally started during the time saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short normal figure fluctuation pattern for the time saving state.

Then, at the timing of T3, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is in the normal time-saving game state. Since it was started, the 2nd starting port 47 will be open|released by the long opening time for time saving states.

After that, at the timing of T5, when the auxiliary game ends, the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuation display was started during the time saving state, it is performed with a relatively short normal figure fluctuation pattern for the time saving state.

In addition, at the timing of T6, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T7, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is in the normal time-saving game state. Since it was started, the 2nd starting port 47 will be open|released by the long opening time for time saving states.

Next, at the timing of T8, when the auxiliary game ends, the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuation display is normally started during the time saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short normal figure fluctuation pattern for the time saving state. Then, at the timing of T9, when the stop display of the special symbols is started, the normal time-saving game state is terminated and the normal game state is started, the right-handed display 67 is extinguished, and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. be done. In addition, since the normal game state is entered, totaling (counting) of the normal medium payout number and the normal medium out number for calculating the normal base value is resumed. In addition, stop display of normal symbols is started.

After that, at the timing of T10, the stop time of the normal symbols has passed and the auxiliary game is started, but since the variable display of the normal symbols is started during the normal time-saving game state, the second time is the long open time for the time-saving state. The starting port 47 is opened.

Then, at the timing of T11, when the auxiliary game ends, the variation display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this variable display is started during the normal game state, the variable display is performed by a relatively long normal pattern variation pattern (variation time 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time saving state.

After that, at the timing of T12, when the special symbol stop time M (8.0 seconds at the end of the time saving) elapses, the variable display of the next losing special symbol is started. Then, at the timing of T13, the stop display of the normal symbols is disclosed, and at the timing of T14, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is started during the normal game state. Therefore, the second starting port 47 is opened with a long opening time for the non-time saving state. Then, at the timing of T15, when the auxiliary game ends, the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started.

Here, an example in which the normal time-saving game state ends during the stop display of the normal symbol is shown, but even if the normal time-saving game state ends during the variable display of the normal symbol or during the auxiliary game, the following normal From the fluctuation display of the pattern, the fluctuation display by the relatively long normal pattern fluctuation pattern (variation time 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time saving state is performed.

In addition, in the variable display of the special symbols for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving game state, the losing special symbols are stopped and displayed, and the normal time-saving game state is ended, so the right-handed display 67 is extinguished and an advantageous state. The output of the signal is stopped, and the tallying (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of outs during normal for calculating the normal base value is restarted.

In this way, when the losing special symbols are stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbols for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving gaming state, the normal time-saving gaming state advantageous to the player ends. there is Therefore, it is possible to secure the profit balance between the game parlor side and the player side, and to provide the player with an unprecedented game property such as a normal time-saving game state, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbols for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving gaming state, when the losing special symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal time-saving gaming state is terminated and the right-handed display 67 is extinguished. It's becoming Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged in connection with the end of the normal time-saving gaming state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbols for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving gaming state, when the losing special symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal time-saving gaming state ends and the normal base value is calculated. Aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts and the number of normal outs is restarted. Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbols for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving gaming state, when the losing special symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal time-saving gaming state ends and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. It's becoming Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be output accurately over the period of the advantageous state, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the outside.

Also, if the normal time-saving game state ends during the variable display of normal symbols, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed, the relatively long normal for the non-time-saving state from the next normal symbol variation display. Variation display is performed according to the figure variation pattern. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the variable display of the normal symbols in the middle due to the end of the normal time-saving game state, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, the variation display by the relatively long normal pattern fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state is performed from the next normal symbol fluctuation display, and from the next auxiliary game The 2nd starting port 47 will be open|released by the short opening time for non-work-time-saving states. Therefore, complicated processing such as changing control of variable display of normal symbols and control of auxiliary game due to occurrence of normal time-saving game state is not performed, and processing load can be reduced.

(Timing chart from before the start of the special time-saving gaming state to after the end)
FIG. 125 is a timing chart from before the start of the special time-saving gaming state to after the end due to the fact that the variable display of the special symbols has reached the specified number of times (500 times).

First, at the timing of T1, the variable display of the special symbol that becomes the stipulated number of times (500 times) from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of variations based on the end of the jackpot game) is started. be. In addition, at the timing of T2, the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. In this variable display, a variable display is performed by a relatively long normal pattern variation pattern (variable time of 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time saving state.

After that, at the timing of T3, when the stop display of the special symbols is started, the special time-saving game state is started regardless of whether it is in the customer waiting state, the right-handed indicator 67 lights up, and the normal game state. The output of an advantageous state signal that is more advantageous to the player than is started. In addition, due to the special time-saving gaming state, the aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and normal outs for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted), and the total number of outs for setting the game section Aggregation (counting) is continued (calculation of normal base values and display of normal base values are also continued).

Then, at the timing of T4, when the special symbol stop time N (usually 0.5 seconds) elapses, the variable display of the special symbol that is lost is started.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is started during the normal game state. Therefore, the second starting port 47 is opened in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

Next, at the timing of T7, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuation display was started during the special time-saving game state, it is performed in a relatively short normal figure fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing of T8, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is during the special time-saving game state. Since it was started, the 2nd starting port 47 will be open|released by the long opening time for time saving states. In addition, stop display of the lost special symbol is started.

Further, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time N (0.5 seconds for losing) has elapsed, the next losing special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing of T11, the variable display of the normal symbol that becomes a hit after the auxiliary game ends is disclosed. Since this fluctuation display was started during the special time-saving game state, it is performed in a relatively short normal figure fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state.

After that, at the timing of T12, the variable display of the special symbols, which is the final time in the special time-saving game state, that is, the variable display of the special symbols to be lost is started. In addition, when the stop time of the normal pattern elapses, the auxiliary game is disclosed, but since the variable display of the normal pattern is started during the special time-saving game state, the second start port 47 is opened with a long opening time for the time-saving state. will do.

Next, at the timing of T13, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuation display was started during the special time-saving game state, it is performed in a relatively short normal figure fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing of T14, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T15, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbols is during the special time-saving game state. Since it was started, the 2nd starting port 47 will be open|released by the long opening time for time saving states.

Also, at the timing of T16, when the stop display of the losing special symbol (M for time saving final variation) is started, the special time saving game state is ended and the normal game state is started, and the right hitting display 67 is extinguished. At the same time, the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. In addition, since the normal game state is entered, counting of the normal medium payout number and the normal medium out number for calculating the normal base value is resumed.

Furthermore, at the timing of T17, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuation display is normally started during the game state (non-time saving state), it is performed with a relatively long normal figure fluctuation pattern for the non-time saving state.

In addition, at the timing of T18, when the stop time M (8.0 seconds for the time saving final variation) of the special losing pattern has passed, the variable display of the special design that becomes a losing is started, and at the timing of T19, the special losing pattern is displayed. Stop display is started.

Then, at the timing of T20, the variable display of the special symbols that are lost is started. In addition, when the auxiliary game ends, the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuation display is normally started during the game state (non-time saving state), it is performed with a relatively long normal figure fluctuation pattern for the non-time saving state.

Then, at the timing of T21, when the stop time of the normal symbols elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but since the variable display of the normal symbols is started during the normal game state, the short opening time for the non-time saving state is used. The starting port 47 is opened.

Here, an example is shown in which the special time-saving game state is started during the variable display of the normal symbols, but even if the special time-saving game state occurs during the normal symbol stop display or during the auxiliary game, the following From the fluctuation display of the normal pattern, the fluctuation display by the relatively short normal pattern fluctuation pattern for the time saving state is performed.

In addition, an example in which the special time-saving game state ends during the execution of the auxiliary game is shown, but even if the special time-saving game state ends during the normal symbol fluctuation display or during the normal symbol stop display, the following From the variation display of the normal pattern to be executed, the variation display by the relatively long normal pattern variation pattern for the non-time saving state is performed.

In addition, although the variable display of the special symbol, which is the final time in the special time-saving game state, is shown as a loss, even if it becomes a small hit, the variable display of the normal symbol to be executed next is non-time-saving. Fluctuation display by the relatively long normal figure fluctuation pattern for the state will be performed.

In this way, as a result of the fluctuation display of the special pattern that is the specified number of times (500 times) from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game), the losing special pattern is stopped. When displayed, a special time-saving game state that is advantageous to the player is generated (started) regardless of whether or not the player is waiting for a customer. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a game feature that does not exist in the past, in which a time-saving state occurs even though the game is lost, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of variations based on the end of the jackpot game), the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed. (Stop time is started), a special time-saving game state occurs (starts) and the right-handed indicator 67 lights up. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage that the player suffers in relation to the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of variations based on the end of the jackpot game), the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed. (Stop time is started), a special time-saving gaming state occurs (starting) and stops counting the number of payouts during normal and the number of outs during normal for calculating the normal base value, that is, the special time-saving gaming state The calculation of the number of payouts during normal and the number of out during normal are continued until immediately before the occurrence of . Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

Also, even while the tallying of the number of normal payouts and the number of outs during normal period for calculating the normal base value is stopped, the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value will continue. It is possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the normal base value that is used.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of variations based on the end of the jackpot game), the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed. (The stop time is started), a special time-saving gaming state occurs (starts) and an advantageous state signal is output. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be output accurately over the period of the advantageous state, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the outside.

In addition, when a special time-saving game state occurs during the variable display of normal symbols, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed, from the next normal symbol variable display to a relatively short time-saving state. Fluctuation display is performed according to the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the variable display of the normal symbols on the way due to the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, when a special time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, the fluctuation display by the relatively short normal pattern fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state is performed from the next normal symbol fluctuation display, and from the next auxiliary game The second starting port 47 is opened with a long opening time for the time saving state. Therefore, complicated processing such as changing control of variable display of normal symbols and control of auxiliary game due to the occurrence of the special time-saving game state is not performed, and the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol that is the final round (750th time) in the special time-saving gaming state, when the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player ends. ing. Therefore, it is possible to secure a profit balance between the game parlor side and the player side, and provide the player with a special time-saving game state, which has never existed before, and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol that is the final round (750th time) in the special time-saving game state, when the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special time-saving game state ends and the right-handed display 67 is extinguished. It is designed to Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged in connection with the end of the special time-saving gaming state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol that is the final round (750th time) in the special time-saving gaming state, when the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special time-saving gaming state ends and the normal base value is calculated. In other words, the calculation of the normal medium payout number and the normal medium out number is restarted from the end of the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when the losing special pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern that is the final round (750th time) in the special time-saving game state, the special time-saving game state ends and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. It is designed to Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be output accurately over the period of the advantageous state, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the outside.

Also, if the special time-saving game state ends during the variable display of the normal symbol, regardless of whether the auxiliary game is executed, the relatively long normal for the non-time-saving state from the next normal symbol variable display Variation display is performed according to the figure variation pattern. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the variable display of normal symbols in the middle due to the end of the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, when a special time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, the fluctuation display by the relatively long normal pattern fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state is performed from the next normal symbol fluctuation display, and from the next auxiliary game The 2nd starting port 47 will be open|released by the short opening time for non-work-time-saving states. Therefore, complicated processing such as changing control of variable display of normal symbols and control of auxiliary game due to the occurrence of the special time-saving game state is not performed, and the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, as a result of the specified number of times (500 times) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game), the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuation display, You may make it stop-display for a time longer than normal stop time (0.5 second). In this way, it is possible to make the player notice that the special time-saving gaming state occurs from the length of the stop time, and to secure the time for producing that the special time-saving gaming state occurs. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the stop display of the losing special symbol, which is stopped and displayed as a result of the specified number of times (500th) special symbol fluctuation display, is performed for a longer period of time than the normal stop time, a special time-saving game is played during the stop time. You may make it perform the production|presentation which suggests that a state will generate|occur|produce. If it does in this way, generation|occurrence|production of a special time-saving game state can be immediately notified to a player, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

(Main processing of production control section)
Main processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flow chart of main processing in the effect control section 130m.

First, the sub CPU 130a inhibits all interrupts in step E1, performs CPU initialization such as setting of built-in registers in step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E3.

The sub CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub RAM 130c in step E4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5. CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and all interrupts are permitted at step E6.

The sub CPU 130a performs a sub random number update process in step E7. Specifically, a process of updating various random numbers stored in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. Thereafter, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flow chart of timer interrupt processing in the effect control section 130m. This timer interrupt processing is executed by inputting a clock pulse every predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control section 130m.

First, in step E100, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E200, performs timer update processing. Specifically, it performs a process of updating various timer counters necessary for execution of the effect.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E300. Specifically, the process of analyzing the command (transmitted from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the reception buffer of the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. Details of the command analysis processing will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting control process in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed in the customer waiting state where the special symbol fluctuation display and the special game (jackpot game, small winning game) are not executed, and the customer Processing for executing a customer waiting demonstration performance for stimulating a player's willingness to play is performed based on the lapse of the waiting time.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs operation-related effect execution processing. Specifically, the promotion performance to prompt the operation of the performance button 17 is executed during the effective period generated during the variable performance, and the degree of expectation that the big win game is executed is calculated according to the operation of the performance button 17 during the effective period. A process for executing a big-hit announcement effect of the operation system that suggests (makes an expectation that a big-hit game will be executed) is performed.

As for the "operation-based jackpot announcement effect", the dialogue announcement effect that suggests the degree of expectation for the jackpot game to be executed depending on the type and display mode of the dialogue displayed on the image display device, and the result of the roulette executed on the image display device A roulette notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed by a cut-in notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed depending on the type and display mode of the cut-in image displayed on the image display device, a jackpot game There are four types of success performance with 100% expectation for execution of , or failure performance with 0% expectation for execution of big winning game, suggesting whether or not a special game will be executed.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp lighting effect execution process. Specifically, by changing the light emission mode of the starter lamp 75 according to the change in the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the image display device and the icon, the lamp light is emitted to suggest the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed. Perform processing for executing the production.

In step E700, the sub CPU 130a performs effect mode update processing. Specifically, the production mode (production stage) in which the production elements (background image, production image, production sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined is updated. It is determined whether or not the conditions (change in game state, win of mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP ready-to-win performance where the result is lost, etc.) are satisfied, and if the update condition is satisfied, the performance mode is changed to multiple performances. Perform processing to update to one of the modes.

"Production mode" is the production mode A to C, countdown mode set in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), rush battle mode set in the normal time-saving game state, boisterous mode, super boisterous dance mode, infinite mode etc. are provided. It should be noted that when the power is turned on and the normal game state is controlled (for example, after changing the settings, after clearing the RWM, after confirming the settings, etc.), the effect mode that is set first is always the effect mode A, and the power is turned on. The performance mode that is set first in the case of being controlled to the time-saving game state at the time of ON is one of rush battle mode, boisterous dance mode, super boisterous dance mode, and infinite mode.

"Production modes A to C" are when the normal special figure variation pattern determination table 1 shown in FIG. When the number of times is 51 times or more), the effect mode is set.
"Countdown mode" is when the normal special figure variation pattern determination table 2 shown in FIG. When the following) is set to production mode.

"Rush battle mode" is when the special figure variation pattern determination table 1 or 2 for normal time saving shown in FIG. 87 is selected (7 times is selected as the second time saving number of times) It is a production mode set to .
"Ranbu mode" is when the special figure variation pattern determination table 3 or 4 for normal time reduction shown in FIG. When it is in the state and the remaining number of small hits is 1 (including the case where it is subtracted and becomes 1)), or the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 3 for special time saving shown in FIG. When selected (when a special time-saving game state in which 750 times is selected as the second time-saving number of times and the remaining number of small hits is subtracted to 1 time), the production mode is set.

"Super Ranbu Mode" is when the special figure variation pattern determination table 5 or 6 for normal time reduction shown in FIG. When the remaining number of hits is 2 times), it is a production mode set.
"Infinite mode" is when the special figure variation pattern determination table 7 or 8 for normal time saving shown in FIG. When the remaining number of times is 2), or when the special figure variation pattern determination table 1 or 2 for special time saving shown in FIG. 91 is selected (750 times is selected as the second time saving number of times It is a production mode set in the time saving game state and the remaining number of small hits is 2 times).

The sub CPU 130a performs a special reduction in working hours production process in step E750. Specifically, a special time-saving system production for suggesting information related to the occurrence of a special time-saving game state (RWM clear denial production that suggests that the RWM clear described later is not performed (is stationary), a special time-saving game It performs processing such as determination of whether or not to execute activation counter display, etc., suggesting the number of fluctuations until transition to the state. In addition, the detail of special time reduction system production|presentation processing is mentioned later.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E800. Specifically, processing for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the general control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150 is performed.

At step E900, the sub CPU 130a restores the register saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c at step E100, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(Command analysis processing of production control unit)
Command analysis processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing command analysis processing in the effect control section 130m.

First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not a command has been received. If the command has been received, the process proceeds to step E302, and if the command has not been received, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E303, and if it is not a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E304.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting change notification processing in step E303. Specifically, a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the processing for executing the setting change notification is performed.

In step E304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If it is a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E305, and if it is not a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E306.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting confirmation notification processing in step E305. Specifically, a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the above-described setting confirmation notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the setting confirmation notification is performed.

In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. If it is a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command, the process moves to step E307, and if it is not a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command, the process moves to step E308.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on notification processing in step E307. Specifically, when the received command is a power-on designation command, the notification instruction command for executing the power-on notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the received command is a power restoration designation command. In the case of , a process of setting a notification instruction command for executing the above-described power restoration notification to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, processing for executing power-on notification or power recovery notification, and the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable An initial operation for operating the member 73b) in a predetermined mode, an initial light emission for causing the board lighting device 74 to emit light in a predetermined mode, and the like are performed.

In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is an error system designation command. If it is an error system designation command, the process moves to step E309, and if it is not an error system designation command, the process moves to step E310.

"Error type designation command" includes unrecoverable error designation command, illegal winning error designation command, abnormal winning error designation command, magnetic error designation command, radio wave error designation command, door open error start designation command, door open error end designation Commands, operation error specification commands, etc. are included.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E309. Specifically, error notification according to the type of error designation command received (non-recoverable error notification, illegal winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door opening error notification, operation error notification etc.), the notification instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed.

In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a gaming state designation command. If it is the game state designation command, the process moves to step E311, and if it is not the game state designation command, the process moves to step E312.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state setting process in step E311. Specifically, the game state stored in the sub-RAM 130c is updated to the game state corresponding to the game state designation command.

In step E312, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step E313, and if it is not a special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step E314.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending number update process in step E313. Specifically, the process of setting the effect instruction command to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to update the number of reserved special figures stored in the sub-RAM 130c and increase or decrease the number of reserved icons displayed on the image display device conduct. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for increasing or decreasing the pending icons displayed on the image display device is performed.

In step E314, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a prefetch designation command. If it is a prefetching designation command, the received prefetching designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) is set in the later-described prefetching storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and then the process is moved to step E315, and if it is not a prefetching designation command, Processing is transferred to step E318.

The "prefetching storage area" is a first prefetching storage unit for sequentially storing prefetching information (such as a special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) based on the first prefetching designation command, and a second prefetching designation command. and a second prefetch storage unit for storing prefetch information corresponding to the variable display (variation effect) being executed (0th storage unit). The two prefetch storage units are divided into first to fourth storage units, respectively.

The first to fourth storage units of the first prefetch storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the above-described first special figure determination information reservation storage area, and when the first prefetch designation command is received, the Prefetch information is stored in a storage unit corresponding to one pending number. The look-ahead information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number by one each time the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth storage units of the second prefetch storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area described above, respectively, and when the second prefetch designation command is received, the 2 Prefetch information is stored in a storage unit corresponding to the number of reservations. The look-ahead information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number by one each time the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed.

The storage unit (0th storage unit) corresponds to the special figure determination information execution storage area described above, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first storage unit of the first look-ahead storage unit The prefetch information that moves (shifts) from is stored, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the prefetch information that moves (shifts) from the first storage unit of the second prefetch unit is stored. be.

In step E315, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing. Specifically, it is expected that a special game will be executed by displaying the reserved icon or the icon displayed on the image display device in a special display mode (special icon, specific icon) different from the normal display mode (normal icon). A process for determining whether or not to execute an icon change effect suggesting a degree (possibility) and the effect mode of the icon change effect to be executed is performed. The details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E316, the sub CPU 130a performs a win-time lighting effect determination process. Specifically, a special game is played by causing the top lamp 10b in the upper center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 to emit light in a special light emission mode different from the normal light emission mode when the game ball enters the starting hole. A process for determining whether or not to execute a prize-winning light-emitting effect suggesting the degree of expectation that is executed, and the effect mode of the prize-winning light-emitting effect to be executed.

In step E317, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead continuous effect determination process. Specifically, by executing a predetermined effect over the variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols, it is expected that the big win game will be executed (suggesting the possibility that the big win game will be executed). Whether or not to execute the read-ahead continuous effect, the type of the read-ahead continuous effect to be executed is determined, and the processing of setting the effect instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c for executing the read-ahead continuous effect is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is performed. The details of the look-ahead continuous effect determination process will be described later.

In step E318, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special design designation command, the process moves to step E319, and if it is not a special design designation command, the process moves to step E320.

The sub CPU 130a performs symbol data determination processing in step E319. Specifically, a process for determining the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed on the image display device as a result of the variable effect, that is, the arrangement (combination) of the effect symbols to be stopped on a predetermined effective line, etc. is performed.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command in step E320. If it is a special figure variation pattern specification command, the process is moved to step E321, and if it is not a special figure variation pattern specification command, the process is moved to step E325.

In step E321, the sub CPU 130a performs variation effect pattern determination processing. Specifically, based on the contents of the special figure variation pattern designation command received, the variation performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the variation performance executed by the performance device including the image display device, is determined, and the performance showing the variation performance pattern The instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed. Details of the variation effect pattern determination process will be described later.

In step E322, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot announcement effect determination process. Specifically, based on the variable performance pattern determined in step E321, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot announcement performance that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed). Alternatively, the process of determining the effect mode (pattern) of the big win notice effect to be executed and setting the execution information of the big win notice effect in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs icon display mode update processing in step E323. Specifically, processing for starting the icon change effect determined in the icon change effect determination process of step E315, or changing the display mode of the pending icon already displayed or the icon is performed.

In step E324, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead continuous effect execution process. Specifically, a process of setting an effect instruction command for starting the look-ahead continuous effect determined in the look-ahead continuous effect determination process of step E317 or changing the effect mode to the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is performed.

In step E325, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a pattern confirmation command. If it is a design determination command, the process moves to step E326, and if it is not a design determination command, the process moves to step E327.

In step E326, the sub CPU 130a performs effect symbol stop processing. Specifically, a process of setting an effect instruction command for stopping and displaying the effect symbols in the temporarily stopped state to end the variable effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for ending the variable effect is performed.

In step E327, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special game system designation command. If it is a special game system designation command, the process proceeds to step E328, and if it is not a special game system designation command, this command analysis process is terminated.

The "special game system designation command" includes a jackpot opening designation command, a jackpot round designation command, a jackpot ending designation command, a small winning opening designation command, a small winning ending designation command, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a performs special game effect determination processing in step E328. Specifically, in the case of the opening designation command, a process of setting an effect instruction command for determining the opening effect of the big win game or the small win game and executing the opening effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and the round is performed. In the case of the specified command, the round effect of the round game is determined and the effect instruction command for executing the round effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. A process of setting an effect instruction command for determining the ending effect of the small winning game and executing the ending effect in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is performed, and the current command analysis process is finished. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect is performed.

(Icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E315-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the prefetch designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E315-2, determines whether or not the current icon change rendering is executable. If it is during the period during which the icon change effect can be executed, the process proceeds to step E315-3, and if it is not during the period during which the icon change effect can be executed, it is assumed that the icon change effect based on the prefetch designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E315-7.

The “executable period of the icon change effect” means that the jackpot game is not being executed, that the normal game state is entered when the prefetch designation command based on the winning to the first start port 45 is received, and the second start port. When a prefetch designation command based on the winning to 47 is received, it is a time-saving game state (specific game state).

In step E315-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a change scenario in the pre-reservation (reservation storage corresponding to the previously received pre-reading designation command), that is, whether or not the change scenario is set in the pre-read information storage area. determine whether If there is a change scenario, the process proceeds to step E315-7 assuming that the icon change effect based on the prefetch designation command received this time is not executed, and if there is no change scenario, the process moves to step E315-4.

In step E315-4, the sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determination random value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E315-5. , selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 130) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final display mode of the icon in step E315-6. Specifically, referring to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 106, a plurality of final display modes of icons are determined based on the type of start-point winning designation command and the selection rate (%) of the final display mode of each icon. Determines the final display mode of one of the icons.

In step E315-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E315-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is a special icon (one of blue icon, red icon, and rainbow icon) that executes an icon change effect. If the icon is a special icon that executes an icon change effect, the process moves to step E315-9, and if it is not a display mode that executes an icon change effect, the process moves to step E315-12.

In step E315-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the change scenario determination table (see FIG. 131) for determining the change scenario of the icon change effect. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the pending icon to the disappearance thereof.

In step E315-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 107, based on the final display mode of the icon, the number of pending memories of the special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario. to determine one change scenario from a plurality of change scenarios.

In step E315-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the display mode of the icon first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and selects the winning icon. The icon display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated.

As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, second winning sound when displayed as a special icon or a specific icon) is output.

In step E315-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E315-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the suspended icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), A predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (suspended icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when there is no change scenario in the preceding hold. The icon change effect may be executed when the action is not to be performed, and the icon change effect may not be executed when the ready-to-win effect is to be performed. In this way, the change in the display mode of the pending icon does not occur during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the hold icon during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. change of the display mode occurs, the ready-to-win effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, even if the advance hold includes the reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but if the advance hold does not include the reach effect, the reach effect The icon change effect may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) than in the case of including the

In addition, when receiving a prefetch designation command relating to the second special symbol in the time saving game state, the icon change effect is executed, but even if the prefetch designation command relating to the second special symbol is received in the time saving game state The icon change effect may not be executed. In this case, the icon may be displayed but the icon change effect may not be executed, or the icon itself may not be displayed and the icon change effect may not be executed.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 130 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the final icon display mode.

In the icon final display mode determination table, the type of prefetching designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the icon final display mode to be selected are associated with each other. The production contents of the scheduled variation pattern to be performed are described.

In the final display mode of the icon, there are a normal icon (white icon) that does not suggest the degree of expectation for a big or small win, and a special icon (blue icon, red icon, rainbow icon) that suggests the degree of expectation for a big or small win. is set. In addition, the degree of expectation for a big win or a small win for a special icon is higher in the order of (white icon<) blue icon<red icon<rainbow icon (big win confirmed).

A first feature of the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. If the prefetch designation command indicates a small hit, the rainbow icon is not determined as the final icon display mode. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by preventing the player from being overjoyed at the time when the small winning game is not decided to be executed.

As a second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 130, a red icon The percentage of red icons that indicate a big win is higher than the percentage of red icons that are determined. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate between the big win and the small win for which the execution of the big win game is not confirmed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that when the look-ahead designation command indicates a small hit, the rainbow icon is not determined as the final display mode of the icon. As long as there is, the game ball will pass through the specific area 53 with a probability of almost 100% and the jackpot game will be executed, so the rainbow icon may be determined as the final icon display mode. In this way, the player's awareness of the small winning game can be heightened, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, if the rainbow icon is determined when the look-ahead designation command related to the second special symbol transmitted only during the time-saving game state indicates a small hit, the rainbow icon indicates a small hit. It is preferable that the percentage of determining the rainbow icon, which indicates a big win, be higher than the percentage of determining.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 131 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario.

In the change scenario determination table, the final display mode of the icon, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected are associated. The advance change in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in the change are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the change (the icon change effect is executed). Scenarios (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation (suspended icon change effect is executed) but do not change during execution of the change (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, scenario 04, etc.) that are not executed), and icon display modes change during the execution of the prior variation and during the execution of the variation (suspended icon change effect and the icon change effect are executed ) scenarios (for example, scenario 15, etc.) are set.

The change scenario is determined regardless of whether it is in the normal game state (first special symbol icon) or in the specific game state (second special symbol icon). In the case of the state (icon of the second special symbol), the rate at which the icon changes due to the change is higher than the rate at which the icon changes due to the prior change (for example, 20:80, 0:100, etc.). may In addition, the rate at which the icon changes due to the change is set to be higher in the specific game state (second special symbol icon) than in the normal game state (first special symbol icon). may

(Light emission effect determination processing at the time of winning of the effect control unit)
Using FIG. 132, the prize-winning lighting effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing winning light emission effect determination processing in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E316-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the prefetch designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E316-2, determines whether or not the current time is within the executable period of the light emission effect at the time of winning. If it is during the period during which the lighting effect at the time of winning can be executed, the process is shifted to step E316-3, and if it is not during the period during which the lighting effect at the time of winning can be executed, the lighting effect at the time of winning is executed based on the prefetch designation command received this time. Assuming that it will not be performed, the current lighting effect determination processing at the time of winning is terminated.

The ``executable period of the light emitting effect at the time of winning'' is that the jackpot game is not being executed, that the normal game state is entered when the prefetch designation command based on the winning to the first start port 45 is received, and the second start When a prefetch designation command based on the winning to the mouth 47 is received, it is in a time-saving game state.

In step E316-3, the sub CPU 130a acquires a random value for determining a winning light emission effect pattern for determining the effect pattern of the winning light emission effect to be executed in the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10, and step E316-3. In 4, a winning light emitting effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 133) for determining a winning light emitting effect pattern is selected. The details of the win-time light emission effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E316-5, the sub CPU 130a determines a prize-winning lighting effect pattern. Specifically, referring to the winning light emission effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 133, a plurality of One light emission performance pattern at the time of winning is determined from among the light emission performance patterns at the time of winning.

In step E316-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined winning light emitting effect pattern is a pattern for executing the winning light emitting effect. In the case of the pattern of executing the light emission effect at the time of winning, the processing is shifted to step E316-7, and in the case of the pattern of not executing the light emission effect at the time of winning, the current light emission effect determination processing at the time of winning ends.

In step E316-7, the sub CPU 130a sets the winning light emission effect execution command corresponding to the determined winning light emission effect pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current winning light emission effect determination process. As a result, the win light emission effect execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the win light emission effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the win light emission effect execution command.

(Light emission effect pattern determination table at the time of winning)
FIG. 133 shows a win-time light-emitting effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a win-time light-emitting effect pattern.

In the winning lighting effect pattern determination table, the type of special symbol, the type of prefetching specified command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each winning lighting effect pattern, and the winning lighting effect pattern to be selected. As a reference, the effect mode for each lighting effect pattern at the time of winning is described.

As the winning-time light-emitting performance patterns, a winning-time light-emitting performance pattern 00 for which the winning-time light-emitting performance is not executed and winning-time light-emitting performance patterns 01 and 02 for which the winning-time light-emitting performance is executed are set. In the prize-winning lighting effect patterns 01 and 02, the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10 emits white or yellow light, and the audio output device 9 outputs a predetermined sound effect.

As the first feature of the light emission effect pattern determination table at the time of winning shown in FIG. However, there is a point that it is easy to execute the light emission effect at the time of winning. By doing so, it becomes easy to increase the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the variable performance with a high degree of expectation for a big win, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the winning-time light-emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 133 is that the winning-time light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation for a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the winning light emission pattern determination table shown in FIG. 133 is that there is no winning light emission effect pattern (performance mode) that determines the big win, unlike the final icon display mode shown in FIG. mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the player from the time when the game ball enters the starting hole until the result of the variable performance is derived, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to provide a light-emitting effect pattern at the time of winning that confirms the jackpot (for example, the top lamp 10b emits light in rainbow colors and outputs a confirmation sound from the audio output device 9). It is preferable to determine the light-emitting performance pattern at the time of winning, which will result in the determination of the jackpot at the lowest rate when is executed.

(Look-ahead continuous effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
With reference to FIG. 134, the look-ahead continuous effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m will be described. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the look-ahead continuous effect determination process in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E317-1. When the prefetching designation command is received, the processing is moved to step E530-2, and when the prefetching designation command is not received, the current prefetching continuous effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E317-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

At step E317-3, it is determined whether or not the present time is the period during which the look-ahead zone effect can be executed. If it is during the look-ahead zone effect executable period, the process proceeds to step E317-4, and if it is not the look-ahead zone effect executable period, it is assumed that the look-ahead zone effect based on the look-ahead designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E317-6.

"Prefetching Zone Effect" refers to effecting during zone over one or more variable effects (display of prefetching zone background image, display of blue zone image or red heat zone image, output of zone BGM or heat zone BGM). This is an effect that continuously suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by a background image, character information, and color information (expected value information), and is a kind of look-ahead continuous effect.

The ``executable period of the look-ahead zone effect'' includes, for example, when there is no pre-reading zone effect to be executed in the preceding hold, when the jackpot game is not in progress, and when the normal game state is in progress. Therefore, the look-ahead zone effect can be executed in the normal game state, but the look-ahead zone effect is not executed in the time-saving game state.

In step E317-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 135) for determining the scenario of the look-ahead zone effect. Details of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a look-ahead zone effect scenario in step E317-5. Specifically, referring to the look-ahead zone production scenario determination table shown in FIG. Based on (%), one look-ahead zone effect scenario is determined from a plurality of look-ahead zone effect scenarios.

In step E317-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the look-ahead zone effect as the effect scenario in which the look-ahead zone effect is not executed.

In step E317-7, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead zone effect scenario in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the look-ahead zone effect scenario is referred to in the look-ahead continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the look-ahead zone effect is performed.

In step E317-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present time is the executable period of the look-ahead countdown effect. If it is during the prefetching countdown effect executable period, the process proceeds to step E317-9, and if it is not during the prefetching countdown effect executable period, it is assumed that the prefetching countdown effect based on the prefetching designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E317-11.

"Look-ahead countdown effect" is a countdown effect (display of count image, output of count sound) over one or more variable effects. It is a suggestive production, and it is a kind of look-ahead continuous production.

The ``executable period of the look-ahead countdown effect'' includes that there is no precedent hold to execute the look-ahead countdown effect, that the jackpot game is not being executed, and that the game is in a time-saving game state. Therefore, the look-ahead countdown effect is not executed in the normal game state, but the look-ahead countdown effect can be executed in the time-saving game state.

In step E317-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 136) for determining the scenario of the look-ahead countdown effect. Details of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a look-ahead countdown effect scenario in step E317-10. Specifically, referring to the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. Based on (%), one look-ahead countdown effect scenario is determined from a plurality of look-ahead countdown effect scenarios.

In step E317-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the look-ahead countdown effect as the effect scenario in which the look-ahead countdown effect is not executed.

In step E317-12, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined prefetch countdown effect scenario in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the look-ahead countdown effect scenario is referred to in the look-ahead continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the look-ahead countdown effect is performed. When this process ends, the current look-ahead continuous effect determination process ends.

In this way, the type of the look-ahead continuous effect executed in the normal game state and the time-saving game state is made different. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in a time-saving game state in which a short variable time is likely to be determined because the number of reservations increases more easily than in the normal game state, the look-ahead zone effect that is continuously executed over one or more variable effects is not executed. there is As a result, the inconvenience of lowering the performance effect of the look-ahead zone performance, which is desired to secure a long performance time in one variable performance, does not occur, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in a time-saving game state in which a short variable time is likely to be determined because the number of reservations is more likely to increase than in the normal game state, a look-ahead countdown effect that is intermittently executed over one or more variable effects is executed. there is Therefore, the anticipation of the player can be easily increased by the look-ahead countdown effect that requires a short effect time in one variable effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the look-ahead zone effect may be executed also in the time-saving game state, and the look-ahead countdown effect may be executed also in the normal game state.

(Look-ahead Zone Production Scenario Decision Table)
FIG. 135 shows a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table referred to when determining a look-ahead zone effect scenario.

In the look-ahead zone production scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the production scenario for each look-ahead zone production, and the look-ahead to be selected Effect scenarios of zone effects are associated with each other, and for reference, advance variations in each effect scenario and effect modes of look-ahead zone effects in the changes are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

"Zone" is the execution of normal effects during the zone (display of the look-ahead zone background image, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM). This means that a heat zone middle effect (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a red heat zone image, output of a heat zone BGM) with a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the effect is executed.

The look-ahead zone effect scenario includes a non-execution scenario (for example, scenario 00) in which the look-ahead zone effect is not executed, and a scenario in which the zone effect is executed during the change without executing the zone effect during the preliminary change ( For example, a scenario 01) and a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which an in-zone effect is executed during the preliminary variation and during the variation are set.

The first feature of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. The point is that an effect scenario is set in which the mode progresses (changes) to an effect mode with a high degree of expectation for execution of the special game. By doing so, it is possible to make the player anticipate whether or not the effect mode of the effect in the zone progresses (changes), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 135 is that the effect state of the look-ahead zone effect progresses (changes) more easily with the change than with the advance change. By doing so, it is possible to easily maintain the player's sense of expectation for a long period of time, and the player's sense of expectation can be brought to the climax in the fluctuation, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Look-ahead countdown effect scenario decision table)
FIG. 136 shows a look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table referred to when determining a look-ahead countdown effect scenario.

In the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead specified command, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead specified command, the selection rate (%) of the play scenario for each look-ahead countdown effect, and the selected look-ahead Production scenarios for the countdown production are associated with each other, and for reference, the pre-variation in each production scenario and the production mode of the anticipatory countdown production in the variation are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

"Count 3" means that a count image indicating "3" is displayed and a count sound is output, and "Count 2" means that a count image indicating "2" is displayed and a count sound is output. "Count 1" means displaying a count image indicating "1" and outputting a count sound. "Count 0" means displaying a count image indicating "0". and a count sound is output.

The first feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 136 is that the look-ahead countdown effect is executed not only in the case of a big win, but also in the case of a small win (a scheduled variation pattern that makes a small win expected). There are some points that are possible. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the small winning game in which the big winning game is executed by the entry of the game ball into the specific area 53 will be executed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. can be improved.

The second feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 136 is that the maximum value of the count is "3" regardless of whether it is a big win or a small win. By doing so, the player can have a sense of anticipation without being conscious of whether it is a big win or a small win, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 136 is that the look-ahead countdown effect has the same effect mode regardless of whether it is a big win or a small win. By doing so, the player can have a sense of anticipation without being conscious of whether it is a big win or a small win, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the scheduled variation pattern is a small win, the number of rounds of the big win game and the number of time reductions that shift when the game ball enters the specific area 53 during the small win game are specified or countdown production in an unpredictable manner. is executed, the number of rounds of the big winning game and the number of times of time reduction to be shifted when the game ball enters the specific area 53 during the small winning game are specified or countdown performance is executed in a predictable manner. You may do so. For example, when the number of rounds or time saving is relatively small, and when the number of rounds or time saving is relatively large, the font and size of the count image can be changed, or the type and volume of the count sound can be changed. may

(Variation production pattern determination processing of production control unit)
Fluctuation effect pattern determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect pattern determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

First, in step E321-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command, and in step E321-2, determines whether or not the game is currently in the normal game state. If it is in the normal game state, the process moves to step E321-3, and if it is not in the normal game state (time-saving game state), the process moves to step E321-7.

In step E321-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect is the remaining reserve portion of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. If it is the remaining reserved portion of the second special symbol, the process is moved to step E321-4, and if it is not the remaining reserved portion of the second special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol), step E321- Move to 6.

In step E321-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the remaining reserved portion of the second special symbol is in the normal time-saving gaming state. If it is not in the normal time-saving game state (it is in the special time-saving game state), the process is moved to step E321-6, and if it is in the normal time-saving game state, in step E321-5 , selects the fluctuation effect pattern determination table for remaining reservation (see FIG. 138(c)), and moves the process to step E321-14. The details of the fluctuation effect pattern determination table for remaining hold will be described later.

At step E321-6, the sub CPU 130a selects a normal variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) and shifts the process to step E321-14.

In step E321-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current state is the normal time-saving gaming state. If it is not a normal time-saving game state (it is a special time-saving game state), the process is moved to step E321-13, and if it is a normal time-saving game state, in step E321-8, the current fluctuation production is a normal time-saving game. It is determined whether or not it is a variable performance before the final in the state (the number of remaining time reduction is 1 or more). If it is not the final variable production (it is the final variable production), the process is moved to step E321-10, and if it is the variable production before the final, in step E321-9, the normal time-saving final pre-variation Select the variation effect pattern determination table for (not shown) and move the process to step E321-14.

In step E321-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current battle mode is the rush battle mode. In the case of the rush battle mode, in step E321-11, the variation effect pattern determination table 1 for the normal time saving final variation (see FIG. 138 (a)) is selected, and the process is moved to step E321-14, and the rush battle If it is not in the mode, at step E321-12, the variation performance pattern determination table 2 for normal time saving final variation (see FIG. 138(b)) is selected, and the process proceeds to step E321-14. In addition, the details of the variation effect pattern determination table for normal time saving final variation will be described later.

In step E321-13, the sub CPU 130a selects a variable performance pattern determination table for special time saving (not shown) and shifts the process to step E321-14.

In step E321-14, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected variable effect pattern determination table, determines one variable effect pattern from a plurality of variable effect patterns, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E321-15, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and terminates the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, the variable effect pattern instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

(Variation effect pattern judgment table for time saving final variation)
FIG. 138 (a) is a diagram showing a variation performance pattern determination table 1 for time saving final variation referred to when determining a variation performance pattern in the final variation performance in the normal time saving game state (rush battle mode), FIG. 138(b) is a diagram showing a variation performance pattern determination table 2 for time saving final variation referred to when determining a variation performance pattern in the final variation performance in the normal time saving game state (other than rush battle mode). .

As shown in Figure 138 (a) and Figure 138 (b), the variation production pattern determination table for time saving final variation, the type of special figure variation pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern specification command, the current second special The look-ahead result of the remaining reserved patterns, the selection rate (%) of each variable performance pattern, and the selected variable performance pattern are associated with each other, and the performance configuration in each variable performance pattern is described as a reference.

The “final battle introduction effect” is an introduction effect to the final battle effect in which the player faces off against the enemy character with a big hit or a small hit in the variable effect at which the time-saving game state ends.
"Final battle SP ready-to-win" is a special SP ready-to-win effect that performs the final battle effect described above, and the two effect patterns 70a that form the ready-to-win state are reduced to the upper corners of the image display device. , and performs a battle production in which the character confronts an enemy character.
"Final battle SP ready-to-win with guaranteed victory" is a special SP ready-to-win effect that performs the above-mentioned final battle effect, and the two effect patterns 70a forming the ready-to-win state are reduced and displayed on the upper side of the image display device. It moves to both corners, and performs a battle effect in which it is certain that the character will win against the enemy character.

The “defeat effect” is a effect suggesting that the enemy character has been defeated in the final battle effect.
The “victory effect” is a effect suggesting victory over the enemy character in the final battle effect.

The “result display” is an effect that displays the result of the game in a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving game state continues triggered by the jackpot game from the normal game state called so-called first hit.
The "special result display" is basically the same as the result display described above, but suggests that a big win or a small win will be made in the variable performance related to the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. It is a result display as a kind of look-ahead effect.

"End suggestion effect" is a effect that suggests that the normal time-saving game state ends. It is a production that is shown to the player like this.
"Resurrection effect" is a effect that notifies (suggests) that a big win or a small win has occurred from a place that was lost, and specifically, a combination of big win effect patterns appears by breaking the shutter image. It is a performance.

A first feature of the variable performance pattern determination table 1 for time saving final variation shown in FIG. 138(a) is that a variable performance pattern in which the final battle performance is always executed is selected. By doing so, it is possible to efficiently improve the expectation of the player in the final variable performance in the time-saving game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the second feature of the variable production pattern determination table 1 for the time saving final fluctuation shown in FIG. There are some things that can be done. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of security from the start of the battle production (final battle SP reach), and to improve the interest of the game.

As the third feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table 1 for time saving final fluctuation shown in FIG. In some cases, even if the final variable effect in the time-saving gaming state is a loss, a battle effect for confirming victory as a kind of look-ahead effect may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unexpected variable effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the fourth feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table 1 for time saving final fluctuation shown in FIG. A special result display may be executed as a kind of look-ahead effect suggesting that. By doing so, it is possible to arouse the joy of the player by pretending that the time-saving game state is over, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table 2 for time saving final variation shown in FIG. 138(b) is that a variable effect pattern in which the result display from the end suggesting effect is always executed is selected. By doing so, it is possible to let the player know the result of the game during the series of advantageous periods, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature of the variable production pattern determination table 2 for time saving final fluctuation shown in FIG. points. By doing so, it is possible to surprise the player by making the player think that the normal time-saving game state has ended, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the third feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table 2 for time saving final fluctuation shown in FIG. A special result display may be executed as a kind of look-ahead effect suggesting that. By doing so, it is possible to arouse the joy of the player by pretending that the time-saving game state is over, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Variation effect pattern judgment table for remaining hold)
FIG. 138(c) is a diagram showing a variation performance pattern determination table for remaining hold referred to when determining a variation performance pattern in the variation performance relating to the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. .

As shown in FIG. 138 (c), the variation effect pattern determination table for remaining reservation includes the type of special figure variation pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern specification command, the selection rate (%) of each variation effect pattern, and the selection The variation production patterns to be set are associated with each other, and the production configuration in each variation production pattern is described as a reference.

"Result continuation" is an effect that continues the result display in the final variable effect of the time saving game state.
The “resurrection effect” is a effect suggesting that the result display in the final variable effect in the time-saving game state is revived to become a big win or a small win.
"Resurrection long effect" is a effect that is performed for a longer period than the above-mentioned revival effect, suggesting that the result display in the final variable effect in the time-saving game state will be revived and a big win or a small win will occur. .

As the first feature of the variable performance pattern determination table for remaining hold shown in FIG. 138(b), the result display in the final variable performance of the time-saving gaming state may be taken over and the result display may be continued. . By doing so, a series of performances can be performed from the final variable performance of the time saving game state, and the performance effect before and after the time saving game state ends can be improved.

As the second feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table for remaining hold shown in FIG. There are points to do. By doing so, a series of performances can be performed from the final variable performance of the time saving game state, and the performance effect before and after the time saving game state ends can be improved.

(Special time-saving production processing of the production control unit)
Using Figure 139, special reduction in working hours production processing of the production control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of a special time-saving production process in the production control unit 130m.

First, in step E750-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the game is currently in the time saving game state. If it is not in the time-saving game state, the process is moved to step E750-2, and if it is in the time-saving game state, a special time-saving production (RWM clear described later is not performed (deferred) Suggestion RWM clear denial effect, activation counter display suggested by counting down the number of fluctuations until transition to a special time-saving game state) are not executed, and this special time-saving system effect processing is terminated.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the variable effect has been started in step E750-2. If the variable effect is not started, the process is moved to step E750-16, and if the variable effect is started, in step E750-3, whether the RWM is cleared when the power is turned on (power-on designation command was received). If the RWM clear has been performed, the process proceeds to step E750-13 assuming that the RWM clear negative effect is not executed, and if the RWM clear has been performed, the process proceeds to step E750-4.

In step E750-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a history of executing a jackpot game from when the power is turned on until now. If there is a history of big wins, the process is moved to step E750-13 assuming that the RWM clear negative effect is not executed, and if there is no history of big wins, the process is moved to step E750-5.

Sub CPU130a, in step E750-5, determines whether or not the number of fluctuations until transition to the special time-saving gaming state is within a predetermined number (here, 100 times). If it is not within the predetermined number, the process moves to step E750-16 assuming that the special time-saving effect (RWM clear negative effect, activation counter display) is not executed, and if it is within the predetermined number, to step E750-6. transfer processing.

In step E750-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations since power restoration (reception of the power restoration designation command) is the first number (here, 50 times). If the number of fluctuations is not the first number, the process proceeds to step E750-10, and if the number of fluctuations is the first number, in step E750-7, whether or not the RWM clear negative effect is executed and activated. Whether or not to display the counter is determined by lottery (for example, a ratio of 1/2).

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E750-8 whether or not it is decided to execute the RWM clear negative effect or the activation counter display. If it is determined not to execute the RWM clear denial effect or activation counter display, the process is shifted to step E750-16, and if it is determined to execute the RWM clear denial effect or activation counter display, step E750-9. , the effect execution command corresponding to the determination result is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, an effect execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing a special time-saving effect (RWM clear negative effect and/or activation counter display) is performed.

In step E750-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations since the power restoration (reception of the power restoration designation command) is the second number (here, 100 times). If the number of fluctuations is not the second number, the process proceeds to step E750-16, and if the number of fluctuations is the second number, the presence or absence of execution of the RWM clear denial effect and the presence or absence of display of the activation counter are determined. decide. Specifically, when the RWM clear denial effect has not been executed, it is decided to execute the RWM clear denial effect, and when the display of the activation counter has not been executed, it is determined to execute the display of the activation counter.

The sub CPU 130a sets an effect execution command corresponding to the determination result in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, an effect execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing a special time-saving effect (RWM clear negative effect and/or activation counter display) is performed.

In step E750-13, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations since power-on is the second number (here, 100 times). If the number of fluctuations is the second number, the process is moved to step E750-15, and if the number of fluctuations is not the second number, in step E750-14, whether the normal time-saving game state has shifted to the production mode A It is determined whether or not (whether or not all the fluctuation effects corresponding to the remaining reservation of the second special symbol have been completed). If the normal time-saving game state is shifted to the production mode A, the process is moved to step E750-15, and if the normal time-saving game state is not changed to the production mode A, the process is moved to step E750-16.

The sub CPU 130a sets the activation counter display command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c in step E750-15. Thereby, the production execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the processing for executing the special time-saving production (here, display of the activation counter) is performed.

In step E750-16, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the effect symbol has been stop-displayed (whether or not the symbol determination command has been received). When the production design is stop-displayed, the process is moved to step E750-17, and when the production design is not stop-displayed, the special time-saving system production process of this time is ended.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E750-17 whether or not the activation counter is currently being displayed. If the activation counter is not being displayed, this special time-saving effect processing is terminated, and if the activation counter is being displayed, in step E750-18, the activation counter subtraction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. do. As a result, an activation counter subtraction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for subtracting the value of the activation counter is performed. After completing this process, the special time-saving production process of this time is terminated.

In this way, during the execution of the variable performance for the predetermined number of times (before the special time-saving gaming state is activated) the RWM clear (clear the number of fluctuations) is not executed when the power is turned on. It is possible to execute an RWM clear denial effect suggesting that it is (deferred). Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the special time-saving game state occurs with reference to the number of fluctuations of the previous day, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a plurality of execution timings of the RWM clear denial effect are set, and if executed at any timing, it will not be executed again at other timings. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation with respect to the timing at which the RWM clear denial effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to display the activation counter suggested by counting down the number of fluctuations until the transition to the special time-saving gaming state (activation countdown effect can be executed). Therefore, the player can grasp the time when the special time-saving game state occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, during the time-saving game state, the activation counter is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player's consciousness is directed toward the special time-saving game state in spite of the normal time-saving game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the activation counter is subtracted at the time of stop of the production pattern where the big hit notice effect and the look-ahead effect are less likely to be executed (started) than at the start of the fluctuation, not at the start of the fluctuation effect where the big hit notice effect and the look-ahead effect are likely to be executed (started). Since (countdown) is performed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the subtraction of the activation counter, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Instead of subtracting (counting down) the activation counter at the time of stopping the performance pattern, the subtraction (counting down) of the activation counter may be performed at the start of the variable performance. In this case, the effect pattern 70a may start to fluctuate and the activation counter may be decremented until it completely shifts to high-speed fluctuation (becomes constant speed), or fluctuation such as floating in the effect pattern in the variable effect. The scrolling (fluctuation) may be performed after the pre-movement is performed, and the activation counter may be decremented before the pre-variation movement is completed.

(Example of effect when prefetch effect is executed during normal game state)
With reference to FIG. 140, an effect example when the look-ahead effect is executed during the normal game state will be described. Here, it is assumed that the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are executed.

As shown in FIG. 140(a), during the variable display (execution of variable effect) of the first special symbol that is lost, the game ball enters the first start port 45 and the first reserved number changes from "1" to " 2”, the number in the first pending number display area 70E increases from “1” to “2”, and the second display portion 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B shows a prefetch effect (here, icon change effect, A white icon (suspended icon HI) to be announced for the look-ahead zone effect) is additionally displayed. At the lower left corner of the screen of the first image display device 70, the number of games GK, which is the number of variable displays (variable effects) performed after the power is turned on or after the jackpot game ends, is displayed.

Next, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 140(b), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed with a losing roll ("814"), and are displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon TI is erased.

After that, when the stop time elapses and the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol that becomes a loss is started, as shown in FIG. 140(c), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts. , the number in the first pending number display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C. , and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, 1 is added to the number of games GK.

At this time, the icon change effect is started, and the pending icon shift-displayed on the first display portion 70B1 changes to a blue icon (special icon). Further, the look-ahead zone effect is started, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, and a blue zone image ZG is displayed. Next, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 140(d), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol are stopped and displayed with a losing dot ("531"), and the symbol displayed in the icon display area 70C is displayed. The icon TI is erased.

After that, when the stop time elapses and the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit is started, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts as shown in FIG. , the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C. is displayed as the icon TI, and changes to a red icon (special icon). In addition, 1 is added to the number of games GK.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 140(f), the left and right production patterns 70a temporarily stop in a state where the ready-to-win state is formed, and the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. Furthermore, after a predetermined time has passed, the development effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. The icon display area 70C is hidden (erased), and the look-ahead zone effect is interrupted.

Then, when it comes to the final phase of the SP ready-to-win effect (execution timing of the effect to decide whether or not the game is lost), the decision success effect is started, and an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 launches a final attack on the enemy character C3. After that, as shown in FIG. 140(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the presentation position, and the voice output device 9 outputs a notification sound of "kyuin kyuin" (in this case, a jackpot is given). is notified).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the production position to the standby position and the determined success production ends, as shown in FIG. At "555"), the game is temporarily stopped, the look-ahead zone effect is restarted, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed. After that, when the temporary stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed with a special appearance ("555") common to the small hit and the big hit, and the special pattern TZ indicates the small hit. A stop display is made at a big winning number ("555") that does not include "V". Further, when the look-ahead zone effect ends, the icon TI is erased and the icon change effect ends.

On the other hand, in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss, it is determined that the final phase of the SP ready-to-win performance (execution timing of the performance for determining whether or not it is a failure) is reached, and the failure performance is started and the friend character C2 becomes the enemy character. A production that loses to C3 is performed. After that, when a character screen of "defeat" is displayed to inform that the player has failed and the failure performance is completed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stop-displayed with a reach-losing result (for example, "565"). become.

In this way, when a big win is achieved in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectations of the player when the jackpot game is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Production example when a variable production is executed after transitioning to rush battle mode)
With reference to FIG. 141, an effect example when the variable effect is executed after shifting to the rush battle mode will be described.

When the ending of the third jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 130(a), a time-saving rush production that suggests entering a time-saving game state is executed, and a caution for calling the player's attention is performed. Arousal notification is executed. Specifically, a forget-to-take caution image TG is displayed to warn about forgetting to take a card (storage medium) capable of specifying the balance of the valuable value from the lending device that performs game ball lending communication with the gaming machine 1. .

After that, when the display period of the forget-to-take caution image has passed, as shown in FIG. 141(b), an addiction caution image NG is displayed to warn against excessive addiction to the game. Then, when the ending time of the third jackpot game has passed, 7 times is set as the second time saving number of times (J2), the first reservation number (U1) is "2" and the second reservation number (U2) is " 0” state, the normal time-saving game state is started, and the rush battle mode background image, the first right-handed image MG1 prompting to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a, and the second time-saving number of times (J2) The time saving remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of times is displayed as "remaining 7 times". Also, the number of games GK is displayed as "0". In other words, the first time saving number of times (J1), the third time saving number of times (J3) and the remaining number of small hits (Z) are not displayed.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol (variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. The number in the display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the icon is instantly displayed in the icon display area 70C. However, because of the variable display of the first special symbol, the remaining number of time reduction image KG indicating the remaining number of the second number of time reductions (J2) maintains the state of "remaining 7 times". However, since the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is used, the rush battle ready-to-reach effect is not executed.

At this time, when three game balls win the second starting port 47 and the second reservation number increases from "0" to "3", as shown in FIG. 141(d), the second reservation number display area The number 70F increases from "0" to "3", and three white icons (suspended icon HI) are additionally displayed in the second suspended icon display area 70D.

Then, when the fluctuation time has passed and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. do. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Thereafter, when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. 141 (f), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are started, and the second reservation The number in the display area 70F is decreased from "3" to "2", the three pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed. It is displayed as an icon TI. In addition, the time saving remaining number image KG changes from "remaining 7 times" to "6 times". Also, the number of games GK is incremented by 1 to become "1".

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 141(g), the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in a state where the ready-to-win effect is formed, and the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 141(h), a rush battle ready-to-reach effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 battle is started, and the second reserved icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are started. is hidden (erased). At this time, a character image of "first battle" indicating the number of executions of rush battle ready-to-win effect is displayed.

At this time, two game balls enter the second starting port 47 and the second reservation number increases from "2" to "4", but the second reservation icon display area 70D is hidden (erased). Therefore, additional display of the pending icon is not performed.

After that, when it comes to the final phase of the rush battle ready-to-win effect (execution timing of the effect of deciding whether to lose or not), the decision failure effect is started, and the effect that the friend character C2 loses to the enemy character C3 is performed. As shown in i), a character screen of "defeated" is displayed to notify that the player has lost.

After that, when the fluctuation time has passed and the second special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. do. Also, the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, every time the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is started, effects such as those shown in FIGS. Along with the subtraction, the number of the character image indicating the number of executions of the rush battle reach effect is also updated.

In this way, when the normal time-saving game state is generated, the normal time-saving rush effect is executed during the ending of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the normal time-saving game state will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state is generated, right-handed notification is performed from before the normal time-saving game state occurs (during the jackpot game). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by hitting left when the normal time-saving game state occurs, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state is generated, regardless of whether or not there is a pending memory, the production mode (here, rush battle mode) according to the time-saving state is set according to the ending of the jackpot game, and the production is performed. The background image corresponding to the mode is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the normal time-saving game state has occurred, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state is generated, the normal time-saving rush effect is executed in a state in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are hidden. Therefore, it is possible to digest the time-saving state with a new feeling without worrying about the result of the previous variable presentation, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving gaming state is generated, an attention-raising effect (display of the forgetting to take caution image TG, display of the immersion caution image NG) is performed to alert the player, and then an effect according to the time-saving state ( Background image change, display of time saving remaining number image KG, right hitting notification, variation effect according to time saving state, output of BGM corresponding to rush battle mode, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to effectively call the player's attention.

Also, at the start of the normal time-saving game state, even if the customer is waiting for a customer without a reservation memory, the BGM corresponding to the production mode for the time-saving state is audibly output, but is muted after a predetermined period of time. audible output is turned off). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the performance effect is drastically reduced immediately even in the customer waiting state with no reservation memory, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state) controlled after the big hit is when any of a plurality of end conditions (special 1 hour-shortening remaining number, special 2 hour-shortening remaining number, total remaining number, small winning remaining number) is established. It is possible to end (shift to the normal game state) at 12:00, and the predetermined end condition (number of small wins) in the advantageous game state is not notified, but mode production (change of background image, display of time saving remaining number image KG) to suggest a given termination condition. Therefore, it is possible to give a thrilling feeling of whether or not the advantageous game state will end, and to give the enjoyment of guessing the end condition by the mode performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, the advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state) controlled after the big hit is when the first end condition (time-saving remaining number, special 2 time-saving remaining number) is satisfied, or the second end condition (small hit remaining number, special It is possible to end (shift to normal game state) when 1 hour reduction remaining number, total remaining number) is established, and during the advantageous game state, information related to the first end condition (time reduction remaining number, special 2 While it is possible to notify the number of remaining time reduction), information related to the second end condition (remaining number of small hits, remaining number of special 1 time reduction, total remaining number) is not notified. Therefore, it is possible to give a thrilling feeling as to whether or not the advantageous game state will end, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, although the remaining number of working hours in Special 1 is not reported, the remaining number of working hours in Special 2 is reported. In addition, although the number of remaining small hits is not reported, the number of remaining time reductions of special 2 is reported. In addition, there are more types of termination conditions that are not notified (remaining number of time saving of special 1, remaining number of small hits) than the type of end condition to be notified (remaining number of time saving of special 2). Also, there is an end condition that is not suggested by the mode production.

In addition, when it is in a customer waiting state at the start of the normal time-saving game state after shifting from the jackpot game, the BGM corresponding to the production mode of the normal time-saving game state is not audibly output and is muted. good too. In this case, when a game ball enters the starting port from the customer waiting state, a suspended memory is generated and when the variable performance is started, BGM corresponding to the performance mode of the normal time-saving game state is audibly output. good.

In addition, although the attention calling performance is performed during the ending of the jackpot game, the attention calling performance may be performed during the ending of the jackpot game and during the normal time-saving game state, or immediately after the start of the normal time-saving state. (During the first variable effect), the attention calling effect may be performed, or in the attention calling effect, the display of the attention image TG that has been forgotten to be taken and the display of the attention image NG may be displayed in order (either may appear first).

In addition, in the variation performance of the first special symbol executed when there is no second suspension memory and there is the first suspension memory at the start of the normal time-saving game state, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner. However, only the variable display of the special symbol TZ may be performed without performing the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity caused by the fact that the second number of time reductions (J2) is not subtracted, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the variation performance of the first special symbol executed when there is no second suspension memory but there is the first suspension memory at the start of the normal time-saving game state, the special symbol TZ is performed without executing the variable display of the performance symbol 70a. If only the variable display is performed, if it is a loss, a relatively short variation time (such as shortened variation or ultra-shortened variation) will be used to perform the variation effect, and if it is a hit, a longer variation time will be used. A special performance may be performed.

In addition, although the right hitting notification is not performed during the time saving rush performance, by displaying the first right hitting image MG1, the right hitting information is always performed from the jackpot game to the normal time saving game state. may

(Example of production in the case of a big hit in the final fluctuation production of rush battle mode)
With reference to FIG. 142, a description will be given of an effect example in the case of a big win in the final variable effect of the rush battle mode.

As shown in FIG. 142(a), the fluctuation time in the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol one before the final round in the rush battle mode has passed, and the second special symbol stops at the losing special symbol. When displayed, as shown in FIG. 142(a), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed with a losing dot ("676"). Also, the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol which is the final round of the rush battle mode is started, as shown in FIG. 142(b), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started. , the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C. Then, one is displayed as the icon TI.

In addition, as the time saving final fluctuation, the time saving remaining number image KG changes from "one remaining time" to "last", and the second reservation memory is accumulated by hitting right (Increase the second reservation number). A promotion image SG is displayed. This storage promoting image SG is an image displayed so as not to interfere with the visual recognition of the variable display of the production pattern 70a as much as possible, and is a count image (here, "09 : 99”) is displayed, and a countdown display is performed according to the passage of time. In addition, 1 is added to the number of games GK.

After that, when one game ball wins the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. A white icon (holding icon HI) is additionally displayed in the second display portion 70D2 of the icon display area 70D. Since the look-ahead result of the second pending memory (special figure determination information) stored at this time is a big hit, the lighting effect at the time of winning is started and the top lamp 10b lights yellow, and the sound effect "picon" from the voice output device 9 ♪” is output.

Also, when two game balls win the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. A white icon (holding icon HI) is additionally displayed in each of the third display portion 70D3 and the fourth display portion 70D4 of the icon display area 70D. In addition, the characters of the second retention prompting image SG2, "Play right and save," change to "MAX!!" indicating that the second retention number (U2) has reached the upper limit ("4"). After that, when a predetermined period of time elapses, the count image of the retention promoting image SG becomes "00:00" as shown in FIG.

Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, as shown in FIG. 142(f), the left and right performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in a state where the ready-to-win effect is formed, and the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. Further, after a predetermined time has passed, the development effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. 142(g), the final battle reach effect in which the friend character C2 and the enemy character C3 have a final battle is started, and the second reserved icon display area 70D. And the icon display area 70C is hidden (erased). At this time, a character image of "final battle" indicating the number of executions of the battle reach effect is displayed. In addition, the number of games GK is hidden as the development effect is executed.

Thereafter, at the final phase of the special SP ready-to-win production (execution timing of the production for deciding whether or not the game is lost), the decision success production is started, and the production for the ally character C2 to launch a final attack on the enemy character C3 is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 142(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the effect position, and the voice output device 9 outputs a notification sound of "kyuin kyuin", and the final attack is directed at the enemy character. A hit is reported.

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the effect position to the standby position and the successful effect is completed, as shown in FIG. in some cases). Then, when the fluctuation time has passed and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as the big hit special symbol, as shown in FIG. do. Also, the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, in the last variable effect in the normal time-saving game state, the retention promotion effect (display of retention promotion image SG, countdown display) that encourages accumulating the second retention memory (increasing the second retention number) by hitting to the right is set to run. Therefore, it is possible to reliably store the second reserved memory before the time-saving gaming state ends, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a loss.

In addition, in the accumulation promotion effect, the countdown display is performed, so that the player can be strongly conscious of accumulating the second reservation memory (increasing the second reservation number) by hitting to the right, and the player can lose. It is possible to suppress suffering from

In addition, when the second reservation number (U2) reaches the upper limit in the storage promotion effect, the characters "Save with right stroke" are displayed in a display mode indicating that the second reservation number (U2) has reached the upper limit (" MAX!!”). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from shooting game balls in vain, thereby making it possible to enhance the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the rush battle mode, which is the normal time-saving game state, when the last second special symbol variation display that ends the normal time-saving game state is executed, the final battle ready-to-win effect is always executed. there is Therefore, even if the normal time-saving game state ends due to a loss, the player can be sufficiently entertained, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, during the time-saving game state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47, the second reservation memory (special figure determination information) based on the winning to the second starting port 47 is a small hit. In this case, it is possible to execute a win-time lighting effect (prefetching effect) for the reserved memory that is the small hit. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the expectation of the player as to whether or not the small winning game that may lead to the big winning game is executed in the specific game state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the countdown display is executed in the retention promotion effect, but the gauge image is displayed for a period shorter than the time until the reach effect starts, and the length of the gauge is shortened according to the passage of time. You may make it perform the display production|presentation which carries out. In addition, a specific light emitting means is lit for a period shorter than the time until the reach effect starts, and the light emission color changes over time (for example, blue lighting → yellow lighting → red lighting). You may make it perform the light emission production|presentation.

(Example of production when the normal time-saving game state ends)
With reference to FIG. 143, an example of an effect when the number of times of time saving (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the normal time saving game state ends will be described.

Here, along with the start of the second special symbol loss variation display, which is the time-saving final variation, a series of performances are started that make it appear as if one variation performance is being executed over a plurality of variation displays. As shown in a), it is assumed that the final battle ready-to-win effect that results in a loss is being executed.

After that, when the final phase of the final battle ready-to-win effect (execution timing of the effect of deciding whether to lose or not) is reached, the decision failure effect is started, and an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 loses to the enemy character C3. As shown in b), a character screen of "lost" is displayed to notify that the player has lost.

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the decision-failure effect ends, and as shown in FIG. will be Specifically, the number of executions of the jackpot game (here, "1 win") and the total number of payout balls (here, 450pt) are displayed as the match result. In addition, the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a reach-losing result ("565"), and when the stop time elapses, the time-saving game state ends with four second holding memories remaining, and the normal game state shifts to the first. The right shot image MG1 is erased.

After that, when the first fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second reservation storage) (fluctuation effect of losing) is started, FIG. 143 (d) , the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started while the result display continues, and the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3". Then, when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 135(e), the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed with a losing dot ("749"). In addition, the number of games GK is kept hidden during the period when the result display is performed, and even if the variable effect is executed, the number of games is added only internally, and it cannot be grasped visually. state.

Then, when the stop time elapses and the second variation display of the second special symbol (fluctuation effect of loss) based on the remaining retention of the second special symbol (second retention storage) at the time of transition to the normal game state is started. , As shown in FIG. 143(f), the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started while the result display continues, and the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "3" to "2". Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 143(g), the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed with a losing dot ("349").

Furthermore, when the stop time has passed and the third variation display of the second special symbol based on the remaining retention of the second special symbol (second retention memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state (variation effect of losing) is started. , the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started while the result display continues, and the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "2" to "1". Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed as a result of losing.

After that, when the fourth (last) second special symbol variation display (losing variation effect) based on the remaining retention (second retention memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state is started, the result is displayed. continues, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, and the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "1" to "0". Then, when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 143(h), the special symbol TZ stops displaying with a losing roll ("749"), and when the stop time elapses, the result display ends and the above-described series of effects is performed. ends.

After that, when the variable display of the first special symbol (variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. 143 (i), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. be. At this time, an effect mode A background image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, and a left-hand shot image HG prompting the player to shoot the game ball is displayed on the left side of the game area 5a. Also, the number of games GK is displayed again in a state after addition.

In addition, here is an example in which the normal time-saving game state ends when it is in rush battle mode, but the production mode is a wild dance mode, a super-random mode, and an infinite mode When the normal time-saving game state ends Even if there is, the progress is basically as shown in FIGS. 143(a) to 143(i).

In this way, from the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the time-saving final variation, to the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining retention (second retention memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state, one variation production is performed. A series of productions are executed to make it look as if the Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to experience a novel performance that does not make the player strongly aware of the number of remaining reserved second special symbols, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol in the series of effects, only the special symbol TZ is displayed without the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. . Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to recognize a plurality of variable performances as a series of performances, and it is possible to improve the performance effect of the series of performances.

In addition, by performing the result display over the variation display of the second special symbol based on the second special symbol remaining reservation (second retention memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state from the variation display of the second special symbol that is the time saving final variation. , it becomes easy to recognize a plurality of variable performances as a series of performances, and the performance effect of the series of performances can be improved.

In addition, instead of displaying the left-handed image HG prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 5a when shifting to the normal game state, the left-handed image HG is displayed at the end of the series of effects. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from shooting game balls uselessly, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, the display mode of the termination suggestion screen changes depending on the number of special 2 reservations (second reservation storage). On the other hand, even if there is a special 1 suspension (first storage storage), the display period of the end suggesting screen does not change.

In addition, a series of effects are executed from the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the time-saving final variation, to the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining retention (second retention memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. However, in the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the final variation of the time saving, the second special based on the remaining reservation (second retention memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state without starting a series of effects A series of effects may be executed over the variable display of the symbols. In this case, it is preferable to perform a special SP ready-to-win effect and a result display in the first variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation (second reservation storage) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state.

(Production example 1 in the case of a small hit with the second special symbol remaining reserved at the time of transition to the normal game state)
With reference to FIG. 144, an effect example 1 in the case of winning a small hit with the second special symbol remaining reserved (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state will be described.

Here, along with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the time-saving final variation, a series of effects are started that make it appear as if one variable effect is being executed over a plurality of variable displays. ), it is assumed that the final battle ready-to-win production that results in a loss is being executed. At this time, the prize-winning light-emitting effect with the second reserve memory (minor win) as the announcement target continues, and the top lamp 10b emits yellow light.

After that, when the final phase of the final battle ready-to-win effect (execution timing of the effect of deciding whether to lose or not) is reached, the decision failure effect is started, and an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 loses to the enemy character C3. As shown in b), a character screen of "lost" is displayed to notify that the player has lost.

Then, when a predetermined time elapses, the determination failure effect ends, and as shown in FIG. A result is displayed. Specifically, the number of executions of the jackpot game (here, "1 win") and the total number of payout balls (here, 450pt) are displayed as the match result. Also, the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed at the reach-losing result ("565").

However, since the remaining reserve (second reserve memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state includes a small hit, the result display executed here is the time of normal game state transition. It is a special result display (a kind of look-ahead effect) that suggests that a small hit is included in the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol. Specifically, a plurality of star images YG are displayed at positions avoiding the character images of the result display. Then, when the stop time elapses, the normal time-saving game state ends while the four second reservation memories remain, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and the first right shot image MG1 is erased.

After that, when the first variation display of the second special symbol (fluctuation effect of losing) based on the remaining retention of the second special symbol (second retention memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state is started, FIG. 144 (d) , the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started while the result display continues, and the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3". Then, when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 144(e), the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a losing dot ("749"). In addition, the number of games GK is kept hidden during the period when the result display is performed, and even if the variable effect is executed, the number of games is added only internally, and it cannot be grasped visually. state.

Then, when the second variation display of the second special symbol (small hit variation effect) based on the remaining retention of the second special symbol (second retention memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state is started, Fig. 144 (f ), the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, and the number in the second reserved number display area 70F is decreased from "3" to "2". At this time, a resurrection effect is started, a character image saying "Not yet~!"

Then, when the ally character C2 unleashes the final attack, the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the presentation position, and the voice output device 9 emits a notification sound of "kyuin kyuin" as shown in FIG. 144(g). is output (here, it is informed that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol of this time will be a small hit). At this time, the top lamp 10b is extinguished, and the light-emitting performance at the time of winning ends.

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the performance position to the standby position and the resurrection performance is completed, the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped at a special dot ("555") common to the small win and the big win, and is temporarily stopped. When the time elapses, as shown in FIG. 144(h), the production symbol 70a stops displaying a special symbol ("555") common to the small winning and the big winning, and the special symbol TZ shows "V" indicating the small winning. ” is stopped and displayed with a small hit (“5V5”). Also, the number of games GK is displayed again in a state after addition.

Then, when the stop time elapses, the series of effects described above ends, the opening of the small winning game is started, and as shown in FIG. At the same time, a first right-handed shot image MG1 is displayed on the right side of the game area 5a to prompt the shooting of the game ball.

After that, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 144(j), instead of the "BONUS" image, a second right-handed shot image MG2 prompting the player to shoot the game ball is displayed on the right side of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game is executed, at the opening of the jackpot game, a "jackpot" image indicating that the jackpot game is to be executed is displayed, and a game ball is to be shot to the right side of the game area 5a. A first right shot image MG1 prompting is displayed. After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a second right-handed shot image MG2 is displayed instead of the "jackpot" image to prompt the shooting of the game ball on the right side of the game area 5a.

In this way, when the second special symbol remaining reserve (second reserve memory stored during the specific game state) at the time of transition to the normal game state includes a small win as a result of the look-ahead, It is possible to execute a special result display (prefetching effect) that confirms that it will be a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security while giving the player a sense of loss through the result display, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when a small win is achieved in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserve of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (the second reserve memory stored during the specific game state), it becomes a big win. The first movable member 73a operates in the same manner as the case. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce that the small winning game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a small win is achieved in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserve of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (the second reserve memory stored during the specific game state), it becomes a big win. The same notification sound (“queuing queuing”) is output from the voice output device 9 as in the case. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce that the small winning game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the case of a small hit in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the remaining retention of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second retention memory stored during the specific game state), the effect symbol 70a The same number (a special number with three same numbers) as in the case of a big hit is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the players aware that the small winning game leads to the big winning game, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation performance based on the remaining hold of the second special design may be shorter than the stop time of the special design TZ stopped in the fluctuation performance of the time saving final fluctuation. That is, it is possible to display the end suggestion screen (result display, shutter image SY display) during the execution of the variable effect that is the final time in the advantageous state, and after the advantageous state ends, a predetermined number of times (the number of remaining reserved second special symbols It is possible to continue the display of the end suggestion screen until the variable effect of 10 minutes) is executed, and the change that is performed while the end suggestion screen is being displayed is longer than the pattern stop time of the final variable effect in the advantageous state. It is possible to shorten the change time of production. In this case, when the resurrection performance is executed in the variable performance executed from the end of the advantageous state to the end of the display of the end suggesting screen, it is possible to suppress the delay until the resurrection performance, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be improved.
In addition, the variation effect performed during the display of the end suggestion is performed with a special variation pattern (variation of only the special symbol TZ) that is not performed in the normal game state.

In addition, when a big win is achieved by the variable performance executed while the end suggestion screen (result display) is displayed, the execution ratio of the ready-to-win performance is lower than when the big win is achieved while the end suggestion screen is not displayed. It should be noted that ``when the variable effect executed while the end suggestion screen is displayed results in a big win, the execution ratio of the ready-to-win effect is lower than when the win is achieved while the end suggestion screen is not displayed.'' It also includes that the ready-to-win effect is not executed (0%) when the variable effect executed during the display of the end suggesting screen results in a big win. In addition, in the event that a jackpot is achieved in the variable performance executed while the end suggestion screen is displayed, if the jackpot is achieved while the end suggestion screen is not displayed, the notification of the jackpot is executed while the end suggestion screen is being displayed. .

In addition, when the second special symbol remaining hold (second hold memory stored during the specific game state) at the time of transition to the normal game state contains a small hit, the special result display is executed. However, even if the second special symbol remaining reserved at the time of transition to the normal game state includes a big win, a special result display in the same display mode as in the case of a small win. may be executed. Also, the special result display may be performed in different display modes depending on whether the game is a small win or a big win.

In addition, in the case of a small hit in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the remaining retention of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second retention memory stored during the specific game state), the effect symbol 70a As a jackpot, the same number (special number with three same numbers) is displayed. You may make it differ whether a character or a decoration image) is added.

In addition, if the remaining reserve of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second reserve memory stored during the specific game state) includes a small hit, a small hit game (= Although the same special result display is performed irrespective of the type of stop special figure data), different modes of special result display may be performed according to the type of small winning game.

(Production example 2 in the case of a small hit with the second special symbol remaining reserved at the time of transition to the normal game state)
With reference to FIG. 145, an example 2 of effect in the case of winning a small hit with the second special symbol remaining reserved (second reserved memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state will be described.

Here, along with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the time-saving final variation, a series of effects are started that make it appear as if one variable effect is being executed over a plurality of variable displays. ), it is assumed that the final battle ready-to-win production that results in a loss is being executed. At this time, the prize-winning light-emitting effect with the second reserve memory (minor win) as the announcement target continues, and the top lamp 10b emits yellow light.

After that, when the final phase of the final battle reach performance (execution timing of the performance of deciding whether to lose or not) is reached, the look-ahead determination success performance is started, and the performance of the ally character C2 delivering the final attack to the enemy character C3 is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 145(b), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the effect position, and the voice output device 9 outputs a notification sound of "kyun kyuin" (here, after this, It is notified that the variation display of the second special symbol executed second is a small win).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the performance position to the standby position and the determined success performance ends, as shown in FIG. will be reported. Then, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 145(d), the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a reach-losing roll ("565") while the character image "Victory" continues to be displayed. When the stop time elapses, the time-saving game state ends while the four second reservation memories remain, the state shifts to the normal game state, and the first right hitting image MG1 is erased.

After that, when the first variation display of the second special symbol (variation display of loss) based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol (second retention storage) at the time of transition to the normal game state is started, FIG. 145 (e) As shown in , while the character image "Victory" continues to be displayed, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started and the number in the second pending number display area 70F is reduced from "4" to "3". .

Next, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 145(f), the character image "Victory" continues to be displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped with a losing roll ("938"). . After that, when the stop time elapses, the second variation display of the second special symbol (variation display of the small win) based on the remaining retention of the second special symbol (second retention storage) at the time of transition to the normal game state is started, As shown in FIG. 145 (g), the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started while the display of the character image "Victory" continues, and the number of the second pending number display area 70F changes from "3" to "2 ”.

After that, when the fluctuation time elapses, the production pattern 70a temporarily stops at a special outcome ("555") common to the small win and the big win, and when the temporary stop time elapses, as shown in FIG. 145(h), the production The symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a special symbol ("555") common to the small winning and the big winning, and the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a small winning symbol ("5V5") including "V" indicating the small winning. . Also, the number of games GK is displayed again.

Then, when the stop time elapses, the series of effects described above ends, the opening of the small winning game is started, and as shown in FIG. At the same time, a first right-handed shot image MG1 is displayed on the right side of the game area 5a to prompt the shooting of the game ball. After that, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a second right-handed shot image MG2 prompting the player to shoot a game ball is displayed on the right side of the game area 5a instead of the "BONUS" image, as shown in FIG. 145(j).

On the other hand, when the jackpot game is executed, at the opening of the jackpot game, a "jackpot" image indicating that the jackpot game is to be executed is displayed, and a game ball is to be shot to the right side of the game area 5a. A first right shot image MG1 prompting is displayed. After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a second right-handed shot image MG2 is displayed instead of the "jackpot" image to prompt the shooting of the game ball on the right side of the game area 5a.

In this way, when the variation performance related to the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state becomes a small hit or a big hit, even if the final variation performance of the time saving game state is lost, look ahead As a kind of production, a battle production (forecast determination success production) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an unexpected variable performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, the performance mode of the opening performance when the small win game is executed is made different from the performance mode of the opening performance when the big win game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is a small winning game or a big winning game from the opening effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in Figure 144 and Figure 145, when the small winning game is executed and when the big winning game is executed, the contents of the fluctuation production are the same, but when the small winning game is executed and the big winning game You may vary the production contents of the variable production when is executed. In this case, the time during which the first movable member 73a is in the production position may differ between when the small winning game is executed and when the big winning game is executed, or the light emission mode of the first movable member 73a may be changed. can be different.

(Example of production when small winning game is executed in super wild dance mode)
With reference to FIG. 146, an example of effect when a small winning game is executed in the super wild dance mode will be described.

Here, as a result of the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol executed in the super wild dance mode, the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first small winning game is started, and the first small winning game is performed. Assume that the opening has started.

When the opening of the first small winning game ends and the opening and closing game for changing the state of the first big winning opening opening and closing member 51 and the specific area opening and closing member 52 is started, as shown in FIG. 146 (a), the specific area A third right-handed image MG3 prompting the player to shoot a game ball aiming at 53 is displayed, and a limit notification effect corresponding to the remaining period of the open/close game (remaining time during which the game ball can pass through the specific area 53) is displayed. be started. Specifically, a count image CG (here, "09:99") is displayed in the upper left corner of the first image display device 70, and the display size increases as the time passes. is done. At this time, the number of games GK is hidden in response to the start of the small winning game.

When the game ball passes (enters) the specific area 53 at the timing immediately after that, as shown in FIG. be done. Specifically, a passage notification image TH made up of the letter "V" is displayed, and a passage notification sound "vacuum♪" is output from the voice output device 9. FIG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 146(c), the end timing of the opening/closing game (state conversion of the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the specific area opening/closing member 52), that is, until the small winning game (conversion game) ends The passing notification effect (here, the display of the winning notification image NH) continues. After that, when the first small winning game ends and the opening of the big winning game (1V big winning game) is started, as shown in FIG. 146(d), the big winning game (1V big winning game) is executed. is displayed. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 146(e), a round game is started and an effect during the jackpot is executed. In addition, the total number of payout balls "660pt" corresponding to the total number of game media paid out during the small winning game is displayed, and the total number of game balls entering the second big winning port 56 during the 1V big winning game is displayed. The number of balls to be paid out is updated.

On the other hand, when a predetermined time (eight seconds in this case) elapses without the game ball passing (winning) the specific area 53 after the start of the small winning game, the count image CG changes to "01" as shown in FIG. 146(f). :99" and displayed in a size larger than that in FIG. 146(a). When the game ball passes (enters) the specific area 53 at the timing immediately after that, as shown in FIG. The device 9 outputs a passage notification sound "vacuum♪".

After that, as shown in FIG. 146(c), the end timing of the opening/closing game (state conversion of the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 and the specific area opening/closing member 52), that is, until the small winning game (conversion game) ends The passing notification effect (here, the display of the winning notification image NH) continues. After that, when the first small winning game ends and the opening of the big winning game (1V big winning game) is started, as shown in FIG. 146(d), the big winning game (1V big winning game) is executed. is displayed. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 146(e), a round game is started and an effect during the jackpot is executed. In addition, the total number of payout balls "660pt" corresponding to the total number of game media paid out during the small winning game is displayed, and the total number of game balls entering the second big winning port 56 during the 1V big winning game is displayed. The number of balls to be paid out is updated.

Further, when the game ball does not pass through (win) the specific area 53 and the remaining time of the open/close game becomes "0", as shown in FIG. The displayed count image CG becomes "00:00". In addition, at the ending of the first small winning game, a disappointing notification effect is executed to notify that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the small winning game (more specifically, during the opening and closing game). A character image and a fainted character are displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs a disappointing sound effect "chu-n".

After that, when the ending of the first small hit game ends, as shown in FIG. Rank down from mode to boisterous mode. Then, the wild dance mode background corresponding to the wild dance mode is displayed, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed again. In addition, the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the time saving remaining number image KG is also redisplayed. Also, the number of games GK is displayed again.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. 146 (i), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are started, and the second reserved number The number in the display area 70F is decreased from "4" to "3", the four pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed. It is displayed as an icon TI. In addition, the time saving remaining number image KG changes from "remaining 80 times" to "79 times". In addition, 1 is added to the number of games GK.

In this way, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 in the small winning game (more specifically, the opening and closing game), a passing notification effect indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 is executed. there is Therefore, even if it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the first big winning hole 50 (around the specific area 53), the player can be assured that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 (that the jackpot game is executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 in the small hit game (more specifically the opening and closing game), regardless of the timing of passing through this specific area 53, the small hit game (more specifically the opening and closing game) The passage notification effect continues until it ends. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player cannot perceive the passing notification effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the small hit game (conversion game), the limit notification effect corresponding to the remaining time of the opening and closing game (remaining time that the game ball can pass through the specific area 53) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to accurately prompt the player to shoot the game ball so as to pass through the specific area 53, thereby avoiding the inconvenience of missing the chance of winning the big winning game.

In addition, depending on the remaining time of the opening and closing game (the remaining time that the game ball can pass through the specific area 53), the notification mode of the limit notification effect (the number of the count, the size of the count image) is highly appealing to the player. change). Therefore, it is possible to increase the appeal to the player as time passes, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of losing the chance to win a big winning game.

In addition, in the limit notification effect, a countdown display is performed that allows the remaining time of the open/close game to be specified, so that the player can accurately grasp the time when there is a chance to win a jackpot game, and the interest of the game. can be improved.

Also, in the small winning game (conversion game), when the execution period of the opening and closing game passes without the game ball passing through the specific area 53, the game ball is specified during the small winning game (more specifically, during the opening and closing game) A disappointing notification effect for notifying that the area 53 has not been passed is executed. Therefore, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the big winning game has not been obtained, and to avoid the inconvenience of the player feeling dissatisfied with the result of the small winning game becoming unknown.

In addition, in the small winning game (opening and closing game) executed as a result of the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) executed in the super wild dance mode (the same applies to the infinite mode), the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53. When the opening/closing game execution period elapses and the small winning game ends, the remaining number of small winnings is reduced to 1 when the small winning special symbol is stopped, and the remaining number of small winnings is 1. It is designed to be ranked down to the corresponding Ranbu mode. Therefore, by setting the production mode according to the remaining number of small hits, the game conditions are set so that there is no discrepancy with the recognition of the player when the jackpot game or the small hit game is executed after that. It is possible to improve interest.

Also, even if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 in the small hit game executed during the time saving game state, the remaining number of small hits (Z) is not "0" (the number of time saving is also "0" If not), the time-saving gaming state continues. Therefore, even if a game ball cannot be shot during a small winning game due to a malfunction of the shooting device or a ball clogging, etc., the player will not suffer an extreme disadvantage, and the interest in the game will be reduced. can be suppressed.

Although the limit notification effect is the effect corresponding to the remaining period of the opening and closing game, it may be the effect corresponding to the remaining time until the first big winning opening opening and closing member 51 is finally closed, or the small winning game. It is also possible to produce an effect according to the remaining time of the .

In addition, the countdown display is executed as a limit notification effect, but the gauge image is displayed for the remaining period of the opening and closing game, and the display effect is such that the length of the gauge is shortened according to the passage of time. may be executed. In addition, a specific light emitting means is lit for the remaining period of the opening and closing game, and a light emitting effect such as changing the light emitting color according to the passage of time (for example, blue lighting → yellow lighting → red lighting) is executed. may

In addition, when the game ball does not pass through the specific region 53 in the small winning game executed during the time saving game state, but the time saving game state is continued, the remaining number of time saving image KG can grasp the remaining number of times ( 80 remaining times, etc.), it may be displayed so that the remaining number of times cannot be grasped (unknown), such as "??? times".

In addition, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 in the small winning game executed during the time-saving game state but the time-saving game state is continued, a character image such as ``May be a boisterous dance mode'' is displayed. , a suggestive effect suggesting that the super wild dance mode or the infinite mode will not continue may be executed.

(Example of production when the time-saving game state is interrupted as a result of a small hit game in Ranbu mode)
With reference to FIG. 147, a description will be given of an effect example when the time-saving game state is interrupted as a result of the small winning game in the boisterous dance mode.

Here, as a result of the variation display (variation performance) of the second special symbol executed in the wild dance mode, the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first small winning game is started, and the opening of the first small winning game. is assumed to have started. At this time, the number of games GK is hidden in response to the start of the small winning game.

When the opening of the first small winning game ends and the opening and closing game for changing the state of the first big winning opening opening and closing member 51 and the specific area opening and closing member 52 is started, as shown in FIG. 147 (a), the specific area A third right-handed image MG3 prompting the player to shoot a game ball aiming at 53 is displayed, and a limit notification effect corresponding to the remaining period of the open/close game (remaining time during which the game ball can pass through the specific area 53) is displayed. be started. Specifically, a count image CG (here, "09:99") is displayed in the upper left corner of the first image display device 70, and the display size increases as the time passes. is done.

After that, when the game ball does not pass (win) the specific area 53 and the remaining time of the open/close game becomes "0", as shown in FIG. The displayed count image CG becomes "00:00". In addition, at the ending of the first small winning game, a disappointing notification effect is executed to notify that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the small winning game (more specifically, during the opening and closing game). A character image and a fainted character are displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs a disappointing sound effect "chu-n".

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 147(c), an end suggesting effect is executed to suggest that the time-saving gaming state will end. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the shutter image SY is closed so as to shield the background image, the "sorry" character image, and the fainted character, and when the ending period ends, as shown in FIG. The mode special symbol TZ "5V5" is redisplayed, and the first reservation number display area 70E and the second reservation number display area 70F are redisplayed.

After that, when the first variation display of the second special symbol (variation display of loss) based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol (second retention storage) at the time of transition to the normal game state is started, FIG. 147 (e) As shown in , while the shutter image SY (shielding image) continues to be displayed, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started and the number of the second pending number display area 70F is reduced from "4" to "3". do. It should be noted that the number of games GK remains hidden during the period in which the shutter image SY is displayed, and even if the variable effect is executed, the number of games is added only internally, and the number of games can be grasped visually. It is in a state where it cannot be done.

It should be noted that during the period in which the variable display based on the second special symbol remaining hold (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state is executed, that is, the period in which the shutter image SY is displayed, the jackpot announcement effect and the look-ahead The performance is not executed.

Further, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 147(f), the special symbol TZ stops displaying with a losing number ("346") while the shutter image SY (shielding image) continues to be displayed. . Thereafter, the variable display and stop of the special symbol TZ in the state where the shutter image SY (shielding image) is displayed until the remaining retention (second retention memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state becomes 0. Display is repeated.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol TZ when the remaining retention of the second special symbol (second retention memory) at the time of normal game state transition becomes 0 has passed, as shown in FIG. 147 (g), the shutter image While the SY (shielding image) continues to be displayed, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed with a losing roll ("559").

After that, when the stop time of the special symbol TZ elapses, as shown in FIG. 147(h), the shutter image SY (shielding image) disappears, the effect mode A background image is displayed, and the first pending icon display area. 70B and the icon display area 70C are displayed, and a left-hand shot image HG is displayed on the left side of the game area 5a to prompt the shooting of the game ball. Also, the number of games GK is displayed again in a state after addition.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the remaining reserved (first reserved storage) of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the first reserved number display area The number of 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. be done.

In this way, in the small hit game (opening and closing game) executed as a result of the fluctuation performance (variation display of special symbols) executed in the boisterous dance mode (including the case of the rush battle mode), the game ball moves through the specific area 53 When the execution period of the opening and closing game passes without passing and the small winning game ends, the number of remaining small winnings is subtracted to 0 when the small winning special symbol stops and the time saving game state ends. The rank is lowered to the production mode A corresponding to the game state (the normal game state is notified). Therefore, a game state is set that does not contradict the player's recognition, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 in the small winning game and the execution period of the opening and closing game passes and the small winning game ends (the time saving game state does not continue), in the normal game state The result display is not executed before something is notified (various effects images corresponding to the effect mode A are displayed). Therefore, the game can be progressed without giving a sense of loss that the player has missed the jackpot game and the time-saving game state, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, one variation performance is executed from the variation display of the second special symbol, which is the time-saving final variation, to the variation display of the second special symbol based on the remaining retention (second retention memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. A series of productions that make it look as if it is being performed are executed. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to experience a novel performance that does not make the player strongly aware of the number of remaining reserved second special symbols, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol in the series of effects, only the special symbol TZ is displayed without the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. . Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to recognize a plurality of variable performances as a series of performances, and it is possible to improve the performance effect of the series of performances.

In addition, instead of displaying the left-handed image HG prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 5a when shifting to the normal game state, the left-handed image HG is displayed at the end of the series of effects. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from shooting game balls uselessly, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, the advantageous game state (time-saving game state) controlled after the big hit can be terminated when the number of small hits reaches the specified number of times, and the small win that is executed as the specified number of times is possible. When the game medium does not pass through the specific area during the win game, a screen suggesting the end of the advantageous game state (result display, shutter image SY) is displayed, and when the small win game ends, special second hold (second hold) is displayed. The display period of the end suggesting screen changes depending on whether there is a memory) or when there is no special 2 hold. Therefore, when the game medium does not pass through the specific area during the small win game, the player can be notified that the advantageous game state is over, and the inconvenience of the progress of the game being unclear can be avoided. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by In addition, by changing the display period of the end suggestion screen depending on the presence or absence of the special 2 hold, it is possible to execute the end suggestion effect in a manner reflecting the progress of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

It is possible to end the advantageous state when the first end condition (time saving number of times) or the second end condition (small hit number) is satisfied during the advantageous state, and the advantageous state (time saving game state) meets the first end condition. When the game is terminated by (time saving count), the result display is executed, and when the advantageous state is terminated by the establishment of the second termination condition (division of the small winning count), the result display is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction when the advantageous state ends, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that during the period in which the variable display based on the second special symbol remaining hold (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state is executed, that is, the period in which the shutter image SY is displayed, the jackpot announcement effect and the look-ahead Instead of setting a state in which the performance is not executed, the execution of the big hit announcement performance may be permitted and the execution of the look-ahead performance may be restricted, or vice versa. In addition, it is permitted to execute a specific notice effect (for example, a win-loss decision effect, a jackpot confirmation effect, etc.) among the jackpot notice effects, and other notice effects (for example, a dialogue notice effect, a roulette notice effect, a cut-in notice effect, etc.) ) may be regulated, or execution of a specific effect (for example, lighting effect at the time of winning a prize, etc.) among the prefetch effects is permitted, and other effects (for example, prefetch zone effects, prefetch countdown effects, etc.) etc.) may be restricted.

(Production example when special time-saving production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 148, a description will be given of an effect example in the case where a special time-saving effect is executed due to RWM clearing not being performed at the start of power supply. In addition, special time-saving effects include RWM clear denial effects that suggest that RWM clearing is not performed (stationary), activation counter display that suggests the number of fluctuations until transition to a special time-saving game state, etc. be done.

Here, the power supply is stopped (power OFF) during the normal game state, and the power supply is restarted ( After the control state of the game is restored at the time of power ON), the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbols is executed 48 times.

Then, as shown in FIG. 148(a), as the 49th special symbol fluctuation display after restarting the power supply (restoration of the game control state), the first special symbol is displayed in the normal game state (production mode A). Variable display (variable effect) has been started, "2" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F, and the first pending icon display area Two pending icons HI are displayed in 70B, and the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Also, 49 times is displayed as the number of games GK.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is started as the variable display of the special symbol that is the 50th time after the power supply is resumed and the remaining 100 times to the special time-saving game state is started, Fig. 148 ( As shown in c), the variable display of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is started, the number of the first reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1", and the first reservation icon display area 70B The two displayed pending icons HI are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 49 times to 50 times.

At this time, when it is determined to perform the RWM clear denial effect and the activation counter display, as shown in FIG. A notification logo LG including characters of "help time" meaning a game state and a character image of "remaining 66" indicating the number of remaining fluctuations are displayed. Also, the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the first reserved number display area 70E increases from "1" to "2", and the reserved icon HI is additionally displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. 148(e), the stationary notification character SC and the activation counter display are displayed in reduced size at the lower right of the screen so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the effect pattern 70a. be.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol passes and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the character image of the activation counter display is updated to "remaining 65".

Also, when the first special symbol variable display (fluctuation effect) is started as the 51st special symbol variable display after the restart of the power supply, as shown in FIG. The variable display of the symbol TZ is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E is reduced from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are the icons One of them is displayed as the icon TI in shift display toward the display area 70C. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 50 times to 51 times.

Then, the variable display (variable effect) and the stop display of the first special symbol are repeated, and the variable display of the special symbol which is the 60th time after the restart of the power supply and the 10th time since the start of the RWM clear negative effect is performed. As a result, if the stop display is made with the losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. 148(h), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped at the losing dot ("294"). Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, the character image of the activation counter display is updated to "55 remaining", and the stationary notification character SC that is executed over 10 times of variable display is displayed. It is erased and the execution of the RWM clear negative effect ends.

In addition, when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed for the 50th time after the power supply is restarted (restoration of the control state of the game) and the remaining 100 times to the special time-saving game state, the RWM clear denial effect is executed. If it is not determined, when the 100th special pattern variation display is performed after the power supply is resumed, the RWM clear denial effect is executed on the condition that it is not in a special time-saving game state (normal game state). will be determined.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed for the 50th time after the power supply is restarted (restoration of the game control state) and the remaining 100 times until the special time-saving game state is performed, the execution of the activation counter display is determined. If not, when the 100th special pattern variation display is performed after the power supply is resumed, execution of the activation counter display is determined on the condition that it is not in the special time-saving game state (normal game state). will be

In this way, when the RWM clear is not performed at the start of the power supply, the RWM clear is denied during the variable display (variation effect) of the special symbol that is the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time) from the restart of the power supply. An effect (display of stationary notification characters SC) is executed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to visually recognize that the game is in a stationary state in which the RWM clear is not performed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the RWM clear denial effect is executed until the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol is executed a plurality of times (here, 10 times) from the start of the RWM clear denial effect. Therefore, even if the player misses the start of the RWM clear denial effect, the player can be surely informed that the RWM clear denial effect is being executed, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

Also, if the RWM clear is not performed at the start of power supply, the activation counter display (special Display of the notification logo LG including characters of "help time" which means a time-saving game state and character images of "remaining 66" indicating the number of remaining fluctuations) is executed. Therefore, the player can grasp the number of times of variable display (variable performance) of the special symbols until the transition to the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the character image indicating the number of remaining fluctuations as the activation counter display is made up of numbers only and does not include unit display such as number of times or number of times. As a result, players are more likely to find out what these numbers mean, and by increasing opportunities to see machine model information, they are able to deepen their understanding of the game machine and increase their interest in gaming. can be improved.

In addition, the character image that shows the number of remaining fluctuations as the activation counter display is not at the start of the fluctuation effect, which is likely to execute (start) the big hit notice effect and the prefetch effect. (Start) It is designed to be updated at the time of stop display of the production pattern that is difficult to be started. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the subtraction of the activation counter, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, the execution timing of the RWM clear denial effect and the execution timing of the activation counter display are set at the same timing (the 50th or 100th time after the power supply is restarted). Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player of the transition time to the special time-saving game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the power is cut off during the normal game state after the end of the normal time-saving game state and then returns, it is possible to execute a specific notification (RWM clear denial effect, etc.) related to the presence or absence of RAM clearing, and after the special time-saving game state ends When the power is cut off during the normal game state and then restored, the specific notification regarding the presence or absence of RAM clear is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of useful information and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, specific notification (RWM clear negative effect, etc.) can be executed over multiple fluctuations. In addition, when the number of fluctuations to the special time-saving game state is a predetermined value (jackpot probability denominator) or more, specific notification is not executed.
Further, the specific notification is executed at the same time as the display of the number of fluctuations up to the special time-saving game state.
In addition, there are cases where specific notification is executed at the same time as the display of the number of fluctuations up to the special time-saving gaming state, and where only specific notification is executed.

It should be noted that the execution timing of the RWM clear denial effect and the activation counter display is during the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the special symbol for the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time) after the power supply is restarted (restoration of the game control state). However, during the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol a predetermined number of times before the transition to the special time-saving game state (for example, 50 times or 100 times before), the RWM clear denial effect and the activation counter display are executed. Alternatively, one of the RWM clear denial effect and the activation counter display can be changed to a predetermined number of times (the 50th or 100th time) after the power supply is restarted (the control state of the game is restored). ), and the other may be during the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol before a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times or 100 times before) before shifting to the special time saving game state. In such a case, it may be executed at a predetermined rate 50 times before shifting to the special time-saving gaming state, and if not executed 50 times before, it may be executed without fail 100 times before.

(Example of production when waiting for customers when transitioning to special time-saving gaming state)
With reference to FIG. 149, a description will be given of an example of an effect in the case of a customer waiting state when shifting to a special time-saving gaming state.

Here, it is assumed that the 496th special symbol variation display (variation effect) has been completed since the end of the jackpot game, and the activation counter display has already been executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149(a), as the 497th special symbol variation display from the end of the jackpot game, the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is started, and the first reservation number display area 70E , "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F, three pending icons HI are displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon display area 70C The icon TI is displayed. Also, 112 times is displayed as the number of games GK, and the activation counter display is "4 remaining".

At this time, as shown in FIG. 149 (a), when the number of remaining fluctuations until the special time-saving game state is reached in response to the start of the variable production, the countdown production is started, and the remaining three times are shown. A number image of "3" is displayed.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol passes and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the character image of the activation counter display is updated to "3 remaining".

Further, when the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 498th variable display of the special symbol from the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are displayed in the icon display area Shift display is performed toward 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 112 to 113, and a number image of "2" indicating two remaining games is displayed as a countdown effect.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the character image of the activation counter display is updated to "remaining 2".

After that, when the variable display of the first special symbol (variable effect) is started as the 499th variable display of the special symbol from the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are displayed in the icon display area Shift display is performed toward 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 113 to 114, and a number image of "1" indicating one remaining game is displayed as a countdown effect.

Further, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the character image of the activation counter display is updated to "remaining 1".

Then, when the variable display (fluctuation performance) of the first special symbol is started as the 500th special symbol variable display which is the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. And the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B The icon TI is displayed in a shift manner toward the icon display area 70C. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 114 to 115, and a number image of "0" indicating remaining 0 is displayed as a countdown effect.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol passes and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the character image of the activation counter display is updated to "remaining 0". In addition, since the special time-saving game state is started by the stop display of the losing special symbol, the first right-handed image MG1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a.

In addition, when the stop time of the first special symbol has passed, as shown in FIG. 149 (i), the customer waiting state is started because the pending memory is "0", which corresponds to the normal game state. The display of the mode A background image and the activation counter display is maintained, and the transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state is awaited.

After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 90 seconds) elapses from the start of the customer waiting state, as shown in FIG. A guide image AN is displayed that says "help time is installed" indicating that it is being used. After that, when the execution period of the customer waiting demonstration effect elapses, the state shown in FIG. 149(j).

In this way, a countdown effect suggesting that a transition to the special time-saving gaming state is performed from the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the special symbol before the predetermined number of times (here, three times) before the special time-saving gaming state is executed. It's becoming Therefore, it is possible to clearly grasp the timing of occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, improve the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, and improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the lapse of the 500th variation display of the special symbol, which is the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol is stopped and the special symbol is stopped. From inside, the first right-handed shot image MG1 is used to inform the right-handed shot. Therefore, it is possible to quickly prompt the player to hit the ball to the right, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, at the time when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time of the 500th special symbol variation display, which is the specified number of times since the end of the jackpot game, enters the special time-saving game state, the production mode is a special time-saving game. Transitioning to the infinite mode corresponding to the state is awaited. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to visually recognize the stop display of the production pattern, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, even if the special time-saving game state is entered, if the customer is waiting, the display of the activation counter display is maintained. It is possible to let the player know what state the is in, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, during execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, a guidance image AN of "help time installed" indicating that the help time, which is the name of the special time-saving game state, is installed is displayed. Therefore, the player can understand that excessive investment is suppressed by the special time-saving game state and relief can be received, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, instead of displaying the guidance image AN saying "Help time installed" during the whole period of the customer waiting demo presentation, for example, a demonstration display of model guidance (various presentations, character introduction, etc.) is performed. The guidance image AN may be displayed while the model name is being displayed without displaying the guidance image AN during this period, or vice versa. Even in this case, it is preferable not to display the guidance image AN while the manufacturer name is being displayed.

In addition, instead of displaying the guide image AN saying "Help time installed" on the image display device, the surface of the game board (whether inside or outside the game area) or the glass frame 4 is displayed. A part of it may be written as "Help Time Installed", and a guide image AN saying "Help Time Installed" may be displayed on the image display device, along with the surface of the game board, a part of the glass frame 4, etc. may be written as "Equipped with help time".

(Production example when the variable production is executed after the transition to the special time-saving gaming state)
With reference to FIG. 150, an effect example in the case where the variable effect is executed after the transition from the effect mode A to the special time-saving game state will be described.

Here, as a result of the 500th variation display of the special symbols from the end of the jackpot game, the stop display of the losing special symbols is performed and the special time-saving game state is generated, and the right-handed shot is notified by the first right-handed shot image MG1. shall be done.

In that state, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 and the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display in the special time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. The effect is started, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Also, the number of games GK is increased from 115 to 116.

After that, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is lost, as shown in FIG. rush effect) is executed. Specifically, the notification logo LG of the activation counter display that was displayed at the bottom right of the screen moves to the center of the screen and is enlarged, and a character image of "START" indicating the start of the special time-saving gaming state is displayed. , and a fourth shot-to-right image MG4 having a size larger than that of the first shot-to-right image MG1 is displayed.

After a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds) has elapsed, a blackout effect is executed in which the screen is shielded by a dark image, as shown in FIG. 150(c). , As shown in FIG. 150(d), an infinite mode entry display is performed that suggests entry into the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state.

After that, when the display time of the infinite mode rush display has passed and the rush effect of the special time-saving game state ends, the rush effect diagram of the special time-saving game state ends, and the infinite mode background image and the second time-saving number of times (J2) The time saving remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of times is displayed as "remaining 749 times". Also, the number of games GK is displayed again.

In addition, when the variation time of the second special symbol has passed and the second special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. The effect of the effect mode A corresponding to the state (display of the mode A background image, etc.) continues, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses and the left production pattern 70a "3" temporarily stops, as shown in FIG. When the fanning effect is performed and the ready-to-win fanning effect period elapses, as shown in FIG. Immediately after that, the medium pattern is temporarily stopped at "3".

Then, when the variation time of the second special symbol has passed and the second special symbol is stop-displayed as the big hit special symbol, as shown in FIG. ("333"), the special symbol TZ is stopped at the big win ("333") indicating a big win, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

It should be noted that, as the first time variation display in the special time-saving gaming state, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit, basically, the production is as shown in Figure 150 (f) ~ Figure 150 (i) However, the number stopped and displayed as the special symbol TZ becomes a small winning number ("3V3").

In addition, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed as the first variable display in the special time-saving gaming state, basically, the production transitions as shown in FIGS. 150 (a) to 150 (i) will do.

In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) after the end of the jackpot game, when the transition to the special time-saving game state is performed, the variable performance dedicated to the rush performance is performed. A pattern is determined and it is possible to execute a rush effect (long rush effect) of a special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special time-saving game state has been entered, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after executing the blackout effect in which the screen is shielded by a dark image (shielding image) as the rush effect of the special time-saving game state, the infinite mode rush effect is executed. Therefore, the transition from the normal game state to the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state can be performed without discomfort, and the player can recognize that the transition to the special time-saving game state has occurred, improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

In addition, along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the special time-saving gaming state, the fourth right-handed image MG4 notifies the right-handed player (during the blackout effect, during the infinite mode entry effect). ing. Therefore, even a player who does not have knowledge about the special time-saving game state can understand that he will hit to the right, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the rush effect of the special time-saving game state is executed in a different effect mode from the case of shifting to the normal time-saving game state. Therefore, the player can be notified of the occurrence of the time-saving game state different from the normal time-saving game state, and the player can be notified of the occurrence of the special time-saving game state in a novel manner, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be improved.

In addition, when the fluctuation display of the special symbols for the first time after shifting to the special time-saving game state becomes a big hit, the rush performance of the special time-saving game state is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost due to the fact that the player has won the game in haste even after shifting to the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the first special symbol fluctuation display after shifting to the special time-saving game state becomes a big hit or a small hit, the rush effect of the special time-saving game state is not executed, but it is the same as when it is lost. In addition, it is also possible to execute the rush effect of the special time-saving game state.

In addition, when the first special pattern variable display after shifting to the special time-saving game state is the first special pattern variable display, the rush performance of the special time-saving game state is executed, and the second special pattern variable display is performed. In the case of , it is possible not to execute the rush effect of the special time-saving game state, or vice versa.

In addition, instead of performing the rush effect of the special time-saving game state during the execution of the first special symbol fluctuation display after shifting to the special time-saving game state, it is performed in the normal game state, which is the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game. The stop display period of the special symbols in the variable display of the special symbols may be set to be longer than the normal stop display period, and the rush performance of the special time-saving game state may be executed during the stop display period. In this case, instead of changing the effect mode to the infinite mode by the end of the rush effect, the effect mode may be changed to the infinite mode by starting the variable display (variable effect) of the next special symbol.

(Example of production when countdown mode is executed)
151 and 152, description will be given of an effect example when the countdown mode is executed due to the RWM clear being performed at the start of power supply. It should be noted that the countdown mode is set by the fact that the number of fluctuations until the transition to the special time-saving game state in the normal game state has become a predetermined number (here, 50 times), and to move to the special time-saving game state This is a production mode in which a countdown display is performed to make the player anticipate.

Here, as shown in FIG. 151(a), the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state (production mode A) as the 450th special symbol variable display after the RWM is cleared at the start of the power supply. (Variation production) is started, "4" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E, "0" is displayed in the second reservation number display area, and 4 is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B Two pending icons HI are displayed, and the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Also, 450 times is displayed as the number of games GK.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 450th special symbol variable display after the RWM is cleared at the start of the power supply, as shown in FIG. 151(c), The variable display of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is started, the number of the first reservation number display area 70E decreases from "4" to "3", and the four reservations displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B Icons HI are shifted toward the icon display area 70C and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 450 times to 451 times.

At this time, since the conditions for activating the countdown mode of 50 times to the special time-saving gaming state are satisfied, as shown in FIG. 151(d), the introduction effect of the countdown mode is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the door image TO (shielding image) closes so as to shield the background image, various icons, etc., and as shown in FIG. A character image of "entering mode" is displayed.

Then, when the countdown mode is entered, the door image TO disappears and the countdown mode background image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 151(f). A countdown mode icon IC is displayed, and a character image of "49 remaining" indicating the remaining 49 times as a countdown display CD is displayed on the upper left of the screen. Also, the display mode of the effect pattern 70a changes from the display mode including characters and numbers to the display mode of only numbers.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. is reduced from "3" to "2", the three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 451 to 452, and the countdown display CD is decremented to "48 remaining" indicating the remaining 48 games.

Then, the variable display (variable effect) and the stop display of the first special symbol are repeated, and after the 496th time of the first special symbol's variable time has elapsed after the RWM is cleared, the first special symbol is a lost special symbol. When the stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. 151(i), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed with the losing number ("175"). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. At this time, the number of games GK is displayed as "496", and the countdown display CD is displayed as "4 remaining" indicating four remaining games.

Thereafter, when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 497th variable display of the special symbol after the RWM is cleared, as shown in FIG. The variable display is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E is decreased from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are displayed in the icon display area 70C. , and one icon TI is displayed. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 496 times to 497 times, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "remaining 3", and the remaining variation until the special time-saving game state is entered in accordance with the start of the variation performance. When the number of times reaches 3, a countdown effect is started, and a character image of "3" indicating the remaining 3 times is displayed.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol passes and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Also, when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 498th variable display of the special symbol after the RWM is cleared, as shown in FIG. The variable display is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are displayed in the icon display area 70C. , and one icon TI is displayed. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 497 to 498, the countdown display CD is decremented to "2 remaining", and a character image of "2" indicating 2 remaining is displayed as a countdown effect.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Thereafter, when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is started as the 499th variable display of the special symbol after the RWM is cleared, as shown in FIG. The variable display is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are displayed in the icon display area 70C. , and one icon TI is displayed. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 498 to 499, the countdown display CD is decremented to "1 remaining", and a character image of "1" indicating one remaining is displayed as a countdown effect.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Further, when the first special symbol variable display (variable effect) is started as the 500th special symbol variable display which is the specified number of times after the RWM is cleared, as shown in FIG. The variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B It is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 499 to 500, the countdown display CD is decremented to "0 remaining", and a number image of "0" indicating 0 remaining is displayed as a countdown effect.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol passes and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. Since the special time-saving game state is started by the stop display of the losing special symbol, the first right-handed image MG1 is displayed in the right-handed corner of the screen to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a.

In addition, when the stop time of the first special symbol has passed, as shown in FIG. 152(r), the customer waiting state is started because the pending memory is "0", which corresponds to the normal game state. The mode A background image and the countdown display are maintained, and the transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state is awaited.

After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 90 seconds) elapses from the start of the customer waiting state, as shown in FIG. A guide image AN is displayed that says "help time is installed" indicating that it is being used. After that, when the execution period of the customer waiting demonstration effect elapses, the state shown in FIG. 152(s) state and vice versa.

Thus, when the variable display of the special symbol before the predetermined number of times (here, 50 times) to shift to the special time-saving game state is executed, from any of the production modes AC corresponding to the normal game state to the countdown mode It is designed to be transferred. Therefore, it becomes easy for a player to recognize that it is a chance to shift to a special time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

In addition, even in the countdown mode, a countdown effect that suggests moving to the special time-saving gaming state from the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (here, three times) before shifting to the special time-saving gaming state is executed. It has become so. Therefore, it is possible to clearly grasp the timing of occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, improve the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, and improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time of the 500th special symbol variation display, which is the specified number of times after the RWM is cleared, the special time-saving game state is entered, that is, during the stop time of the special symbol. , the notification of hitting to the right is performed by the first hitting to the right image MG1. Therefore, it is possible to quickly prompt the player to hit the ball to the right, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, at the time when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time of the 500th special symbol variation display, which is the specified number of times after the RWM is cleared, the special time-saving game state is entered. The transition to the infinite mode corresponding to is awaited. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to visually recognize the stop display of the production pattern, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, even if it becomes a special time-saving game state, if it is in a customer waiting state, the countdown display is maintained, so for example, if you leave and come back, how will the game progress? It is possible to inform the player of the current state, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Also, the countdown display is subtracted at the start of the variable display (variation effect) of the special symbols, but it may be subtracted at the time of the stop display of the special symbols.

(Production example when the variable production is executed after the transition to the special time-saving gaming state)
With reference to FIG. 153, a description will be given of an effect example when a variable effect is executed after transition from the countdown mode to the special time-saving game state.

Here, as a result of the 500th fluctuation display of the special symbols after the RWM is cleared, the stop display of the losing special symbols is performed, and the special time-saving gaming state is generated, and the right-handed hitting notification is performed by the first right-handed hitting image MG1. It is assumed that

In that state, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 and the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display in the special time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. The effect is started, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Also, the number of games GK is increased from 500 to 501 times.

After that, when the variable display of the second special symbol is lost, as shown in FIG. rush effect) is executed. Specifically, an effect image (shielding image) of a size that shields a background image or the like is displayed together with a text image of "achieved", and a fourth right-handed image MG4 having a size larger than the first right-handed image MG1 is displayed. Is displayed.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 153(c), infinite mode entry display is performed to suggest entry into the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, when the display time of the infinite mode rush display has passed and the rush effect of the special time-saving game state ends, the rush effect diagram of the special time-saving game state ends, and the infinite mode background image and the second time-saving number of times (J2) The time saving remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of times is displayed as "remaining 749 times". Also, the number of games GK is displayed again.

In addition, when the variation time of the second special symbol has passed and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. The effect (display of the countdown mode background image, etc.) continues, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses and the left production pattern 70a temporarily stops at "3", the right production pattern 70a also temporarily stops at "3" as shown in FIG. 153(f) to form a reach state. Then, as shown in FIG. 153(g), a ready-to-win effect (ready-to-win change without rush effect) is executed.

Then, when the variation time of the second special symbol has passed and the second special symbol is stop-displayed as a big hit special symbol, as shown in FIG. ("333"), the special symbol TZ is stopped at the big win ("333") indicating a big win, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

It should be noted that, as the first time variation display in the special time-saving gaming state, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit, basically, the production is shown in FIGS. However, the number stopped and displayed as the special symbol TZ becomes a small winning number ("3V3").

In addition, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed as the first variable display in the special time-saving gaming state, basically, the production transitions as shown in FIGS. 153 (a) to 153 (i) will do.

In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) after the RWM is cleared, the special time-saving game state is entered. It is determined and it is possible to execute a rush effect (short rush effect) of a special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special time-saving game state has been entered, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the short rush effect is the fluctuation time of the shortest special figure variation pattern among a plurality of special figure variation patterns that may be determined in the variation display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) after the RWM is cleared. set to a shorter time than Therefore, even if what kind of special figure fluctuation pattern is determined, rush production can be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the fluctuation display of the special symbols for the first time after shifting to the special time-saving game state becomes a big hit, the rush performance of the special time-saving game state is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost due to the fact that the player has won the game in haste even after shifting to the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the first special symbol fluctuation display after shifting to the special time-saving game state becomes a big hit or a small hit, the rush effect of the special time-saving game state is not executed, but it is the same as when it is lost. In addition, it is also possible to execute the rush effect of the special time-saving game state.

In addition, when the first special pattern variable display after shifting to the special time-saving game state is the first special pattern variable display, the rush performance of the special time-saving game state is executed, and the second special pattern variable display is performed. In the case of , it is possible not to execute the rush effect of the special time-saving game state, or vice versa.

In addition, instead of performing the rush effect of the special time-saving game state during the execution of the first special symbol fluctuation display after shifting to the special time-saving game state, it is performed in the normal game state, which is the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game. The stop display period of the special symbols in the variable display of the special symbols may be set to be longer than the normal stop display period, and the rush performance of the special time-saving game state may be executed during the stop display period. In this case, instead of changing the effect mode to the infinite mode by the end of the rush effect, the effect mode may be changed to the infinite mode by starting the variable display (variable effect) of the next special symbol.

Also, in the countdown mode, an effect may be executed in which the friendly characters and the enemy characters battle. In this case, a character image such as "enter countdown mode, enter infinite mode if friendly character can withstand attack by enemy character until count reaches 0" may be displayed in the countdown mode introduction effect. Then, when shifting to the special time-saving game state, the ally character performs an effect that withstands the attack of the enemy character until the last round of special symbol fluctuation display (variation effect) in the normal game state, and shifts to the special time-saving game state. If not (the jackpot special symbol is stopped and the jackpot game is executed), the friend character cannot withstand the attack of the enemy character and loses (reach when the jackpot game is executed when not in the countdown mode). An effect opposite to the effect in which the friend character wins over the enemy character may be performed.

(Production example when the special time-saving game state ends)
With reference to FIG. 154, an effect example when the number of times of time saving (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the special time saving game state ends will be described.

Here, it is assumed that the countdown performance suggesting the end of the special time-saving game state is executed from the variable display (variation performance) of the special symbols three times before the special time-saving game state ends. Specifically, it is assumed that a number image of "3"→"2"→"1" is displayed every time the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol is executed.

As shown in FIG. 154 (a), when the fluctuation time has elapsed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol one time before the special time-saving gaming state ends and the second special symbol is stop-displayed in the losing special symbol, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed with a losing roll ("234"). Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. In addition, the time saving remaining number image KG displayed in the same position and in the same display manner as the normal time saving game state is "one remaining", and the game number GK is the number of times of fluctuation display from before the occurrence of the special time saving game state. It is "1249 times" that took over.

Then, when the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol that ends the special time-saving gaming state is started, as shown in FIG. 154(b), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, the number of the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are directed toward the icon display area 70C One of them is displayed as the icon TI in shift display. At this time, the time saving remaining number image KG changes from "1 remaining" to "0 remaining", the number of games GK is increased from 1249 to 1250, and the number "0" indicating 0 remaining as a countdown effect. An image is displayed.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has passed and the second special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”). Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the normal game state is started by the stop display of the losing special symbol, so the first right-handed image MG1 is erased.

After that, when a predetermined period of time elapses, an end-suggesting effect is executed to suggest that the time-saving gaming state is to end. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the shutter image SY is closed so as to shield the background image, various icons, and the like.

Then, when the first variation display of the second special symbol (variation display of loss) based on the remaining retention of the second special symbol (second retention storage) at the time of transition to the normal game state is started, FIG. 154 (d) As shown in , while the shutter image SY (shielding image) continues to be displayed, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started and the number of the second pending number display area 70F is reduced from "3" to "2". do. It should be noted that the number of games GK remains hidden during the period in which the shutter image SY is displayed, and even if the variable effect is executed, the number of games is added only internally, and the number of games can be grasped visually. It is in a state where it cannot be done.

It should be noted that during the period in which the variable display based on the second special symbol remaining hold (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state is executed, that is, the period in which the shutter image SY is displayed, the jackpot announcement effect and the look-ahead The performance is not executed.

Further, when the variation time of the second special symbol has passed, as shown in FIG. ) to stop the display.

Furthermore, when the first variation display of the second special symbol (variation display of loss) based on the remaining retention of the second special symbol (second retention memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state is started, FIG. 154 (f) As shown in , while the shutter image SY (shielding image) continues to be displayed, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started and the number of the second pending number display area 70F is reduced from "2" to "1". do.

Thereafter, the variable display and stop of the special symbol TZ in the state where the shutter image SY (shielding image) is displayed until the remaining retention (second retention memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state becomes 0. Display is repeated.

Then, when the variation time of the second special symbol when the remaining retention (second retention memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state becomes 0 has passed, as shown in FIG. 154 (g), the shutter While the image SY (shielding image) continues to be displayed, the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a losing roll ("559").

After that, when the stop time of the special symbol TZ has passed, as shown in FIG. 70B and the icon display area 70C are displayed, and a left-hand shot image HG is displayed on the left side of the game area 5a to prompt the shooting of the game ball. Also, the number of games GK is displayed again.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the remaining reserved (first reserved storage) of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the first reserved number display area The number of 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. be done.

In this way, when the number of times of time saving (any of J1 to J3) is "0" and the special time saving game state ends, it is notified that it is in the normal game state (various effects images corresponding to production mode A are displayed ), the result display will not be executed before it is done. Therefore, the game can be progressed without giving a sense of loss that the player has missed the jackpot game and the time-saving game state, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the shutter image SY is displayed over the variation display of the second special symbol based on the second special symbol remaining retention (second retention memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state from the variation display of the second special symbol that is the time saving final variation. Only the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable state. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to experience a novel performance that does not make the player strongly aware of the number of remaining reserved second special symbols, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, instead of displaying the left-handed image HG prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 5a when shifting to the normal game state, the left-handed image HG is displayed at the end of the series of effects. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from shooting game balls uselessly, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, in the special time-saving game state, the remaining time-saving number image KG is displayed at the same position and in the same display mode as the normal time-saving game state. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the time saving game state and the remaining number of time saving games, and the interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that during the period in which the variable display based on the second special symbol remaining hold (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state is executed, that is, the period in which the shutter image SY is displayed, the jackpot announcement effect and the look-ahead Instead of setting a state in which the performance is not executed, the execution of the big hit announcement performance may be permitted and the execution of the look-ahead performance may be restricted, or vice versa. In addition, it is permitted to execute a specific notice effect (for example, a win-loss decision effect, a jackpot confirmation effect, etc.) among the jackpot notice effects, and other notice effects (for example, a dialogue notice effect, a roulette notice effect, a cut-in notice effect, etc.) ) may be regulated, or execution of a specific effect (for example, lighting effect at the time of winning a prize, etc.) among the prefetch effects is permitted, and other effects (for example, prefetch zone effects, prefetch countdown effects, etc.) etc.) may be restricted.

In addition, in the special time-saving game state, instead of displaying the time-saving remaining number image KG in the same position and in the same display mode as in the normal time-saving game state, the time-saving remaining number image KG is displayed in a different position and/or in a different display mode from the normal time-saving game state. KG may be displayed. If it does in this way, it will become easy to recognize whether it is a normal time-saving game state or a special time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

In addition, since the number of times of time saving (any of J1 to J3) is "0" and the special time saving game state is ended, it does not shift to the special time saving game state again, so the special time saving game state has ended. When the stopped power supply is resumed later and the game control state is restored, the number of times of games GK may be changed to a special time-saving game state such as ??? If it does in this way, a player can recognize that it is after the end of a special time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

In addition, when the time saving number of times (any of J1 to J3) is "0" and the stopped power supply is resumed after the special time saving game state ends and the control state of the game is restored, a specific light emitting unit (For example, the top lamp 10b) may be made to emit light in a specific light emission mode (eg, red flashing at 750 ms period) different from the light emission mode at the time of error (eg, red flashing at 250 ms cycle). If it does in this way, a player can recognize that it is after the end of a special time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

Further, when a specific light-emitting portion (for example, the top lamp 10b) is made to emit light in a specific light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode in the event of an error, the blinking in the specific light-emitting mode rather than the flashing cycle in the light-emitting mode in the error The cycle may be shortened or may be the same.

(Sixth embodiment)
Hereinafter, a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
In addition, in the sixth embodiment, even if the number of remaining small hits remains due to the stop display of a specific small winning special symbol, the normal time-saving game state ends, and the remaining number of small winnings set for each big winning game. is different from the fifth embodiment, only the differences from the fifth embodiment will be described here.

(Game state setting table)
Figure 155 (a) is a diagram showing the first game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot game not via the small winning game, Figure 155 (b) is via the small winning game It is a diagram showing a second game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 155(a), the first game state setting table contains stop special symbol data of the jackpot special symbol, game state information at the time of jackpot winning indicating the game state at the time of jackpot winning, and game state to be set. A flag (a time-saving flag indicating that it is a time-saving game state), a first time-saving number (J1) that is the number of times of fluctuation display of the first special symbol that ends the time-saving game state, and a second special that ends the time-saving game state The second time-saving number of times (J2), which is the number of times of variable display of the symbol, and the third time-saving number of times (J3), which is the number of times of variable display of the sum of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that terminate the time-saving gaming state, The remaining number of small hits (Z1), which is the number of times of small hit fluctuation display to end the time saving game state, and the third small win remaining number of times, which is the number of times of specific small hit fluctuation display to end the time saving game state, are associated. It is

As shown in FIG. 155(b), the second game state setting table includes stop special symbol data of small winning special symbols, and a game state at the time of passage of a specific region 53 of a game ball. Information, the set game state flag (time saving flag indicating that it is a time saving game state), the first time saving number (J1) which is the number of times of fluctuation display of the first special symbol that ends the time saving game state, and time saving The second time-saving number of times (J2), which is the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol that ends the gaming state, and the number of times of variable display of the sum of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that ends the time-saving gaming state. The number of times of 3 o'clock (J3), the number of small hits remaining (Z1) that is the number of times of small hit fluctuation display that ends the time saving game state, and the third small that is the number of times of specific small hit fluctuation display that ends the time saving game state and the remaining number of hits are associated with each other.

As the first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 155, in addition to the remaining number of small hits (Z1), which is the number of times of all kinds of small hit fluctuation displays, a specific small hit fluctuation (third small hit game The point is that the third small winning remaining number of times (Z2), which is the number of times of fluctuation display that will be executed, is set. By doing so, it is possible to make the player interested in the types of small winning fluctuations, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. ) and the number of remaining third small hits (Z2) may be set to different numbers. By doing so, it is possible to create a case where the time-saving game state ends even if it is any kind of small hit fluctuation, and a case where the time-saving game state ends only with a specific small hit fluctuation, and the game It is possible to improve the interest of

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
The special symbol variation processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110. FIG. Here, only differences from the special symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 93 will be described, and descriptions of the corresponding parts will be omitted.

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the small winning special symbol is stopped. If it is not a small hit special symbol, the process is moved to step S320-13, and if it is a small hit special symbol, in step S320-10, until the time saving game state saved in the game RWM area is terminated. Subtract 1 from the remaining number of small hits (Z1).

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the small winning special symbol is the third small winning special symbol (special symbol 15) in step S320-10A. If it is not the 3rd small winning special symbol, the process is moved to step S320-11, and if it is the 3rd small winning special symbol, in step S320-10B, the second small winning remaining number (Z2) is subtracted by 1. do.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the remaining number of small wins (Z1) or the third remaining number of small wins (Z2) has become "0" in step S320-11. When the remaining number of small hits (Z1) or the remaining number of third small hits (Z2) becomes "0", the process is moved to step S320-12 assuming that the time saving game state is terminated, and the remaining number of small hits If not "0", the process moves to step S320-13.

In this way, when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed (a small winning game is executed) during the time saving game state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start port 47, the number of times of time saving (J1, J2, J3) remains, the time-saving game state is terminated when the remaining number of small hits (Z1) or the remaining number of third small hits (Z2) becomes "0". Therefore, it is possible for the player to proceed with the game advantageously by referring to the look-ahead effect or the combination of the stop-displayed effect symbols 70a (whether or not to aim for an advantageous big hit by passing the game ball through the specific area 53 in the small winning game). ), it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage due to the game method during the time-saving game state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed (small winning game is executed) during the time-saving game state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start port 47, the remaining number of small winnings (Z1) remains. Even if it is, the time-saving game state is terminated when the third small winning remaining number (Z2) becomes "0". Therefore, it is possible for the player to proceed with the game advantageously by referring to the look-ahead effect or the combination of the stop-displayed effect symbols 70a (whether or not to aim for an advantageous big hit by passing the game ball through the specific area 53 in the small winning game). ), it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage due to the game method during the time-saving game state, and to improve the amusement of the game.
In addition, in the case of a specific small hit, the advantageous game state (time-saving game state) ends even before the number of small wins reaches the specified number of times.

(Content 1 of the invention described in this embodiment)
◆Here, conventional gaming machines determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on determination information obtained based on the winning of the game medium in the start area, and depending on the result of the determination, A gaming machine that executes a game effect is common. In such a game machine, it has a movable body (start opening opening/closing member, big winning opening opening/closing member, specific area opening/closing member, etc.) operated by a driving source (solenoid, etc.) controlled by the main control board, In some cases, a movable body is operated by activating a drive source according to the progress of a game (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-118109). However, in such a game machine, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game shop (only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500 is replaced). ), etc., it is difficult to check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing games, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a controller controlled by the main control means. A movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, A first big prize opening opening/closing member 51, a specific area opening/closing member 52, and a second big prize opening opening/closing member 57) are provided, and the main control means starts controlling the progress of the game after power supply is started. In the pre-start state (during the initial setting process) up to, the drive source can be initialized (ON⇔OFF) in a predetermined manner. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a controller controlled by the main control means A movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, First big prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big prize opening opening/closing member 57) and establishment of granting conditions (winning of game ball to winning opening, start opening, big winning opening) and value giving means (main control board 110, payout control board 120) capable of giving value (prize balls, prize ball data), and the main control means operates after power supply is started. In the pre-start state (during initial setting processing) until the progress control of is started, the drive source can be initialized in a predetermined manner (ON ⇔ OFF), and in the pre-start state, the value giving invalidate the awarding of the prize value by means; Therefore, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a controller controlled by the main control means A movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, 1st large winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large winning opening opening/closing member 57), the main control means, the establishment of the starting condition (starting opening or game ball to the normal gate Based on the input ball), the display means (special symbol display device, normal symbol display device) executes the variable display of the symbol, and the advantageous game (special game, auxiliary game) that operates the driving source according to the result of the variable display ), and in a pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from the start of power supply to the start of the progress control of the game, the drive source is initialized in a predetermined manner (ON ⇔OFF), and in the pre-start state, the execution of the variable display and the execution of the advantageous game are restricted. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the drive source (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b) controlled by the main control means , first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, channel switching solenoid 52b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) operated by the movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first large winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area An opening/closing member 52 and a second prize winning opening opening/closing member 57), wherein the main control means includes an initial operation means capable of initializing the driving source in a predetermined manner (ON⇔OFF), and a game Information display means capable of calculating specific information (normal base value) based on actual results (normal payout count, normal out count) and displaying the specific information on information display means (performance display monitor); , and in a pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from the start of power supply to the start of the progress control of the game, the initial operation is executed by the initial operation means, and the initial operation is performed. During execution, display of the specific information by the information display means is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a controller controlled by the main control means A movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, First big prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big prize opening opening/closing member 57) and establishment of granting conditions (winning of game ball to winning opening, start opening, big winning opening) A value giving means (main control board 110, payout control board 120) capable of giving value (prize balls, prize ball data) is provided, and progress control of the game is started after power supply is started. In the pre-start state (during the initial setting process), the awarding of the prize value by the value providing means is invalidated, and the main control means initializes the drive source in a predetermined manner (ON⇔OFF). Specific information (normal base value) is calculated based on the initial operation means that can be used and the game performance (normal payout number, normal out number), and the specific information is displayed on the information display means (performance display monitor) and information display means capable of displaying, wherein in the pre-start state, the initial action is executed by the initial action means, and during execution of the initial action, the specific information is displayed by the information display means. display is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a controller controlled by the main control means A movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, 1st large winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second large winning opening opening/closing member 57), the main control means, the establishment of the starting condition (starting opening or the game ball to the normal gate A variable display means capable of executing a variable display of symbols on a display means (special symbol display device, normal symbol display device) based on the ball entry), and operating the driving source according to the result of the variable display. Advantageous game means capable of executing advantageous games (small winning game, big winning game), initial operation means capable of initializing the drive source in a predetermined manner (ON ⇔ OFF), and game results ( an information display means capable of calculating specific information (normal base value) based on the number of payouts during normal period, number of outs during normal period, and displaying the specific information on information display means (performance display monitor); and in a pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from the start of power supply to the start of the progress control of the game, the initial operation is executed by the initial operation means, and during the execution of the initial operation , execution of the variable display by the variable display means, execution of the advantageous game by the advantageous game means, and display of the specific information by the information display means are restricted. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game.

(Content 2 of the invention described in the present embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game or a specific game advantageous to the player based on establishment of a starting condition. Some of these gaming machines execute a special game based on the passage of a game medium through a specific area provided inside a winning device during execution of a specific game (for example, 2018-057968). However, such a game machine has a problem that the interest in the game is low.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, a special game (jackpot game) or a specific game (small winning game) that is advantageous to the player is based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning of the game ball to the starting port). ), a normal game state, and a game state control means that can be controlled to a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal game state, and the A prize winning device (large prize winning port) for changing from a state in which game media are difficult to win to a state in which game media are easy to win during execution of a specific game, and a prize winning device provided inside the prize winning device during execution of the specific game special game executing means for executing the special game based on the game medium passing through the specified area (specific area 53), wherein the game medium passes through the specific area during execution of the specific game. Based on the game state at that time, it is possible to perform a predetermined process (such as a process of setting game conditions after a big win game). By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning of the game ball to the starting port). A determination means for determining, and a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time saving game state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal game state, and the determination means is the second A first determination means for making a determination based on the satisfaction of the first starting condition (winning a prize at the first starting gate), and a second determining means for making a determination based on the satisfaction of the second starting condition (winning a prize at the second starting gate). The special game includes a first special game (eg, first jackpot game, third jackpot game) and a second special game that is more advantageous than the first special game (eg, second When it is determined that the special game is to be executed by the first determination means, either the first special game or the second special game can be executed, and the specific game The state includes a specific game state (normal time-saving game state) controlled via the special game, and a specific game state (special time-saving game state) controlled without the special game. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a special game (jackpot game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the start condition (game ball winning a prize in the start port). Determination means for determining whether or not; game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal game state; and execution of the special game Inside, there is a winning device (large winning opening) that changes from a state in which game media are difficult to win to a state in which game media are easy to win, and a specific area provided inside the winning device during execution of the special game. A game state determination means capable of determining a game state to be controlled after that based on the passage of the game medium through the (specified area 53). By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a special game (jackpot game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the start condition (game ball winning in the start port). and a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal game state, and the determination The means includes a first determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning the first starting opening) and a second determining means for making a judgment based on the establishment of the second starting condition (winning the second starting opening). The special game includes a first special game (e.g., third jackpot game) and a second special game (e.g., first jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the first special game. , a second jackpot game), the determination result of the determination means includes a first result (big win) and a second result (small win) different from the first result, and the first determination means When it is determined that the first result (jackpot) is determined by, either the first special game or the second special game can be executed, and the specific game state is the first special game The first specific game state controlled after the end (the normal time-saving game state in which the second time-saving number is set to 7 times: rush battle mode), and the second specific game state controlled after the end of the second special game (Normal time saving game state in which the second time saving number is set to 55 times: wild dance mode, normal time saving game state in which the second time saving number is set to 95 times: wild dance mode). By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a special game (jackpot game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the start condition (game ball winning a prize in the start port). and a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal game state, and the determination The means includes first determination means for making a determination based on the satisfaction of the first starting condition (winning at the first start opening) and second determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning at the second starting opening). means, and the special game includes a first special game (for example, a third jackpot game) and a second special game (for example, a second V jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the first special game. and a third special game (for example, a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the second special game, and the determination result of the determination means includes a first result (jackpot) and , There is a second result (small hit) different from the first result, and when the first result (big hit) is determined by the first determination means, the first special game and the second Any of the special games can be executed, and when the second result (small hit) is determined by the second determination means, the second special game can be executed, and the second determination means When the first result (jackpot) is determined, the third special game can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a special game (jackpot game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the start condition (game ball winning in the start port). and a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal game state, and the determination The means includes a first determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning the first starting opening) and a second determining means for making a judgment based on the establishment of the second starting condition (winning the second starting opening). 2 determination means, and the special game includes a first special game (for example, a third jackpot game) and a second special game (for example, a second V jackpot) that is more advantageous than the first special game game) and a third special game (for example, a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game) more advantageous than the second special game, and the determination result of the determination means includes a first result (jackpot ) and a second result (small hit) different from the first result, and in the specific game state (random dance mode, super wild dance mode) controlled after the second special game is executed, the When the first result (big win) is determined by the second determination means, the third special game can be executed, and when the second result (small win) is determined by the second determination means , the second special game can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a special game (big win game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the start condition (game ball winning in the start hole). and a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal game state, and the determination The means includes a first determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning the first starting opening) and a second determining means for making a judgment based on the establishment of the second starting condition (winning the second starting opening). 2 determination means, and the special game includes a first special game (for example, a third jackpot game) and a second special game (for example, a second V jackpot) that is more advantageous than the first special game game) and a third special game (for example, a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game) more advantageous than the second special game, and the determination result of the determination means includes a first result (jackpot ) and a second result (minor win) different from the first result, and in the specific game state (infinite mode) controlled after the third special game is executed, the second determination means When it is determined that the first result (big hit) by, the third special game can be executed, and when it is determined that the second result (small hit) is determined by the second determination means, the second 2 special games can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As the eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a special game (jackpot game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the start condition (game ball winning in the start port). determination means for determining whether or not, variation display execution means for executing variation display of symbols based on the determination by the determination means, a normal game state, and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state), a first production mode (production modes A to C), and a second production mode (countdown mode) different from the first production mode. A controllable effect control means is provided, and the determination means includes a first determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning of the first start opening), and the establishment of the second start condition (first It has a second determination means for making a determination based on winning a prize to the 2 starting port), and the special game includes a first special game (for example, a third jackpot game) and a higher than the first special game There is an advantageous second special game (for example, a first jackpot game, a third jackpot game, a fourth jackpot game, and a fifth jackpot game), and the game state control means performs a predetermined number of times after the special game ends. It is possible to control to the specific game state until the variable display is executed, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) controlled via the special game, There is a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled without going through the special game, and the effect control means controls the second specific game state a predetermined number of times (50 times) before When the variable display is executed, control is performed from the first presentation mode (any of presentation modes A to C) to the second presentation mode (countdown mode). By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, it may be a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed at the same time (in parallel), or the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be performed. The variable display of the special symbols may be executed in the winning order of the game balls to the first starting port 45 and the second starting port 47 .

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment does not generate a probability variable gaming state in which the jackpot probability is higher than the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game, but depending on the type of the jackpot special symbol, the probability variable gaming state is not generated. In this case, in a specific round game (for example, the second round game or the final round game) during the jackpot game, the specific area 53 provided inside the first big winning hole 50 It is possible to perform processing for generating a probability variation gaming state on the condition that the game ball has passed, or based on the gaming state when the game ball passes through the specific area 53, the variable display that becomes the probability variation gaming state. A process for determining the number of times may be performed.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and when winning symbols are stopped and displayed on an active line by a game using medals (game media) (giving conditions are satisfied), a predetermined amount is reached. It can also be used for a reel-type game machine (so-called slot machine) capable of awarding a player with a prize medal (prize medal data). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

(Seventh embodiment)
Hereinafter, a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In the following, differences from each of the above-described embodiments will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as those of each of the above-described embodiments may be omitted.

Also, the configurations described above in the first to sixth embodiments may correspond to configurations described later. More specifically, the pending image GB and the pending icon HI described above correspond to the pending image 702 described later. Further, the pending image GB and the icon TI described above correspond to a variable image 701 described later. Further, the above-described pending number image GD, first pending number display area 70E, and second pending number display area 70F correspond to the pending number display 703 described later. Further, the above-described region R11, region R12, region R13, region R14, region R21, region R22, region R23, region R24, first display portion 70B1, second display portion 70B2, third display portion 70B3, fourth display portion 70B4, first display portion 70D1, second display portion 70D2, third display portion 70D3, and fourth display portion 70D4 correspond to holding base 702P, which will be described later. Further, the above-described area R0 and the icon display area 70C correspond to a variable pedestal 701P, which will be described later. Also, the small symbols Ga and the special symbols TZ described above correspond to the small symbols 704 described later. Moreover, the start notification image Gn mentioned above, the rush image GT, the notification logo LG, and the character image of "START" respond|correspond to the special time reduction start image 733 and the mode start image 736 which are mentioned later. Further, the customer waiting screen Mx, the customer waiting screen Mx1, the customer waiting screen Mx2, and the customer waiting demo background described above correspond to the customer waiting image 710 described later. Also, the background image GH and the background image described above correspond to a stage image 706 described later. In addition, the above-described right hitting image GS1, right hitting image GS2, right hitting image GS3, right hitting image GS4, right hitting image Gsy, right hitting start image GR, first right hitting image MG1, second right hitting image MG2, third The third shot-to-right image MG3 and the fourth shot-to-right image MG4 correspond to a first shot-to-right image 720, a second shot-to-right image 725, and a third shot-to-right image 737, which will be described later. Also, the background image GHf and the power-on notification described above correspond to a returning image 742, which will be described later. In addition, the prevention image GQ1 and the forget-to-take caution image TG described above correspond to a card caution image 739 to be described later. Also, the warning image GQ2 and the immersion caution image NG described above correspond to a game caution image 740 described later. Further, the end image GP2 and the shutter image SY described above correspond to a first transition image 728, which will be described later. Also, the shielding image GF and the dark image described above correspond to a first transition image 728 described later. Also, the end image GP1, the result image GP, and the result display described above correspond to a result image 729, which will be described later. Also, the above-described emphasized image GZ and number image correspond to a countdown image 732, which will be described later. Also, the number-of-games image GE and the number-of-games GK described above correspond to an execution-number image 705, which will be described later. Further, the stationary notification image GI, the stationary notification character SC, and the notification logo LG described above correspond to the clear negative image 744, which will be described later. Further, the remaining number of times image GN described above and the character image of the activation counter display correspond to the remaining number of times of reaching image 708 described later. Moreover, the remaining time saving image GJ mentioned above and the remaining time saving image KG correspond to the special time saving remaining number image 738 which will be described later. Also, the above-described left-handed image GL, left-handed start image GL, and left-handed image HG correspond to a left-handed image 730, which will be described later.
Then, the corresponding configurations are exchanged between one embodiment and another embodiment, or the configuration included in one embodiment is added to the configuration of another embodiment corresponding to this configuration. Also good.

[Production image]
FIG. 157 is a diagram showing one aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 130m using the first image display device 70 and the like.
Next, the effect image displayed on the first image display device 70 by the effect control unit 130m will be described.
As shown in FIG. 157, the effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70 under the control of the effect control section 130m. In this embodiment, the effect images displayed on the first image display device 70 include a decorative pattern 700, a variable image 701, a variable base 701P, a reserved image 702, a reserved base 702P, a reserved number display 703, a small pattern 704, and an execution image. A number image 705 and a stage image 706 are included. Further, the first image display device 70 displays a first front image 707, a remaining number of arrivals image 708, a second front image 709, a clear negative image 744, a customer waiting image 710, a first emphasized image 711, an SP reach image 712, SPSP reach image 713, button operation image 714, first eye-catching image 715, adjustment image 716, menu image 717, second emphasized image 718, opening image 719, first right-handed image 720, promotion image 721, in-round image 722 , Round number image 723, normal working hour selection image 745, normal working hour saving start image 724, card attention image 739, game attention image 740, second hitting right image 725, normal working hour remaining number image 726, switching image 727, first transition image 728, result image 729, left-handed image 730, second eye catch image 731, countdown image 732, special time-saving start image 733, second transition image 734, special time-saving selection image 735, mode start image 736, third right-handed image 737, special time saving remaining number of times image 738, magnetic error notification image 741, during recovery image 742, zone notification image 743 may be displayed.

(Decorative pattern 700)
As shown in FIG. 157(1), three decorative patterns 700 are displayed on the first image display device 70 . In addition, when the three patterns constituting the decorative pattern 700 are individually described, the pattern arranged on the left side is the "left decorative pattern 700", the pattern arranged in the center is the "middle decorative pattern 700", and the pattern on the right side. The pattern arranged in the 1 may be called the "right decorative pattern 700". When the left decorative design 700 and the right decorative design 700 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "left and right decorative designs 700". Also, when the left decorative design 700, the middle decorative design 700, and the right decorative design 700 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "three decorative designs 700". Further, the three decorative patterns 700 with the same numbers may be referred to as "coordinated decorative patterns 700".

In this embodiment, as the display mode of the decorative pattern 700, a highly decorative display mode (see FIG. 157 (1)) in which characters such as characters are displayed in addition to characters such as numbers, and characters such as numbers are displayed. There is also a low-decorative display mode (see FIG. 167(10), FIG. 172(23), etc.) that is mainly displayed. Images such as characters provided in the highly decorative decorative pattern 700 are different for each character of the decorative pattern 700, and it is possible to identify which pattern it is by the image of the character or the like.
Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern 700 is switched according to the change of the game state or the progress of the production. Although the details will be described later, for example, the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness is displayed in SP reach production, SPSP reach production, normal time saving game state, and special time saving game state, etc. Decorative pattern 700 with high decorativeness is other than these is displayed in the case of In addition, the normal time-saving gaming state and the special time-saving gaming state may differ in display mode, display size, and the like of the decorative pattern 700 .
The decorative design 700 with low decorativeness may also display images such as pictures and characters in addition to characters such as numbers. 167(10), 172(23), etc., the "decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness" has a larger area of the character portion in the decorative pattern 700 than the "decorative pattern 700 with high decorativeness". should occupy a high proportion. Also, the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness may be a pattern consisting only of letters. The decorative pattern 700 is an example of a production pattern.

In the variable effect of the decorative symbols 700, the effect control unit 130m variably displays the three decorative symbols 700 by, for example, vertical scrolling (scrolling downward), and then firstly scrolls the left decorative symbol 700 (for example, the number "0"). ”) is temporarily stopped, then the right decorative pattern 700 (for example, the number “9”) is temporarily stopped, and then the middle decorative pattern (for example, the number “2”) is temporarily stopped. After all the decorative patterns 700 are temporarily stopped in this way, finally all the decorative patterns 700 are fixed and stopped according to the stop display of the special pattern. It should be noted that the combination "029" of the decorative symbols 700 that are stopped and displayed, shown in FIG.

(Variation image 701)
As shown in FIG. 157(4), on the first image display device 70, the main CPU 110a of the main control unit 110m displays a variation indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed (decorative symbol 700 is being variably displayed). An image 701 is displayed. That is, the variable image 701 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbols during the variable display of the special symbols. Then, the variable image 701 is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is started, and disappears when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, although the details will be described later, the variable image 701 is displayed in a display mode according to the stage, the game state, and the like, which will be described later. In the illustrated example, the variation image 701 is formed in a circular shape and has a cross-shaped mark.

In addition, the variable image 701 changes its display mode such as display color, for example, and informs or suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the color of the type with a higher degree of expectation is set to be displayed than when it is a loss. For example, when white, blue, green, red, and rainbow are set as the colors of the variation image 701, the degree of expectation may be set higher in the later order. Also, the degree of expectation of the rainbow-colored variation image 701 may be 100%.

(Variable pedestal 701P)
As shown in FIG. 157(1), the variable pedestal 701P is an area where the variable image 701 is displayed. The variable pedestal 701P in the illustrated example is displayed in the lower central portion of the display area of the first image display device 70. As shown in FIG. However, the movable pedestal 701P may be displayed at any position in the display area of the first image display device .
In the illustrated example, the variable pedestal 701P is displayed regardless of whether the variable image 701 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variable pedestal 701P may be displayed when the variable image 701 is displayed, and the variable pedestal 701P may not be displayed when the variable image 701 is not displayed. Further, even when the variable image 701 is displayed, the variable pedestal 701P does not have to be displayed. That is, the movable pedestal 701P may not be used.

(Holding image 702)
As shown in FIG. 157(3), the first image display device 70 displays a pending image 702 based on the current pending information in the main RAM 110c (sub-RAM 130c). In other words, the pending image 702 is an image indicating that the right to judge the jackpot is suspended. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the pending image 702 on the screen is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination processing.
The reserved image 702 has a smaller display size than the variable image 701 . Further, although the details will be described later, the pending image 702 is displayed in a display mode according to a stage, a game state, and the like, which will be described later. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is formed in a circular shape and has a cross-shaped mark. In addition, the pending image 702 changes its display mode such as display color, for example, and notifies or suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the color of the type with a higher degree of expectation is set to be displayed than when it is a loss. For example, when white, blue, green, red, and rainbow are set as the colors of the reserved image 702, the degree of expectation may be higher in the later order. Alternatively, the expectation level of the rainbow-colored pending image 702 may be 100%. Hereinafter, the display mode of the white variable image 701 and the display mode of the white reserved image 702 may be referred to as the normal display mode. Also, hereinafter, the display mode of the variable image 701, which is a color different from white, that is, the color with a higher degree of expectation than white, and the display mode of the pending image 702, which is a color with a higher degree of expectation than white. is sometimes referred to as an expected color display mode.

Here, as described above, the winning of the first starting port 45 causes up to four holds. Therefore, a maximum of four pending images 702 are displayed on the first image display device 70 by winning the first starting port 45 . In addition, in the present embodiment, the plurality of pending images 702 generated by winning the first start opening 45 are arranged in the area on the left side of the moving image 701, in order from a position close to the moving image 701 to a position away from the moving image 701. That is, they are displayed side by side from the right side to the left side.

In addition, although detailed description is omitted, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 also causes up to four reservations. Therefore, a maximum of four pending images 702 are displayed on the first image display device 70 by winning the second starting port 47 . In the present embodiment, the plurality of pending images 702 generated by winning the second starting port 47 are arranged in the region on the right side of the moving image 701 in order from a position close to the moving image 701 to a position away from the moving image 701, that is, on the left side. are displayed side by side from the top to the right.
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable image 701 and the pending image 702 are basically configured with the same or similar display modes (display size, form, transparency, etc.). However, the variable image 701 and the reserved image 702 may be configured in different display modes. Also, the variable image 701 and the pending image 702 displayed by winning the first starting port 45 and the variable image 701 and the pending image 702 displayed by winning the second starting port 47 have the same display mode. , or may be displayed in a different manner.

Further, in the following description, of the four pending images 702 displayed at maximum, the “first pending image 702”, the “second pending image 702”, and the “third Reserved image 702" and "fourth reserved image 702".

(Holding pedestal 702P)
As shown in FIG. 157(1), the pending pedestal 702P indicates the area where the pending image 702 is displayed. The holding pedestal 702P is displayed in a manner different from that of the variable pedestal 701P. However, the holding pedestal 702P may be displayed in the same manner as the variable pedestal 701P. In addition, the holding pedestal 702P corresponding to the holding image 702 based on the winning to the first starting port 45 is displayed on the lower side in the display area of the first image display device 70 and on the left side of the variable pedestal 701P. (See FIG. 157(1)). In addition, the holding pedestal 702P corresponding to the holding image 702 based on the winning to the second starting port 47 is displayed on the lower side of the display area of the first image display device 70 and on the right side of the variable pedestal 701P. (See FIG. 172 (23)).
Note that in the illustrated example, the holding base 702P is displayed regardless of whether the holding image 702 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The holding base 702P may be displayed when the holding image 702 is displayed, and the holding base 702P may not be displayed when the holding image 702 is not displayed. Further, even when the pending image 702 is displayed, the pending pedestal 702P may not be displayed. That is, the holding pedestal 702P may not be used.
Further, in the following description, regarding the holding pedestal 702P, "first holding pedestal 702P", "second holding pedestal 702P", "third holding pedestal 702P", "4 second holding pedestal 702P".

(Retained number display 703)
As shown in FIG. 157(1), the first image display device 70 displays a pending number display 703 based on the pending information in the main RAM 110c (sub-RAM 130c). This pending number display 703 is an image showing the pending number. Here, the number of pending images 702 displayed on the first image display device 70 changes according to the number of pending prizes for the first starting port 45 and the second starting port 47 . In the pending number display 703, the pending number of winnings to the first starting port 45 is displayed on the left side, and the pending number of winnings to the second starting port 47 is displayed on the right side.

(small pattern 704)
As shown in FIG. 157(1), on the first image display device 70, the special symbol is being variably displayed (decorative symbol 700 is being variably displayed) based on the winning to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. ) is displayed. The small pattern 704 is controlled by the effect control section 130m to be variably displayed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols, and to be stopped in accordance with the stop display of the special symbols.

In the illustrated example, the small designs 704 are three images respectively corresponding to the decorative designs 700 and are displayed on the right side of the image display area of the first image display device 70 . This small pattern 704 is displayed as an image smaller in size than the decorative pattern 700 . Further, as described above, the decorative pattern 700 may be displayed in a display mode with high decorativeness or in a display mode with low decorativeness. It is displayed only in a less sensitive display mode. However, the small pattern 704 may be displayed in a display mode in which images such as pictures and characters are displayed in addition to characters. Further, the small pattern 704 may be a pattern consisting only of letters. This small pattern 704 is also regarded as a production pattern.

The small symbol 704 is variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolled) in a manner indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed as the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 is won. In the small pattern 704, during scrolling, the numerical image is repeatedly displayed from "1" to "9" while incrementing by one, and then again from "1" to be incremented by one. Then, when the special symbol is stop-displayed, the small symbol 704 is stop-displayed. In the illustrated example, the numbers indicated by the stopped small symbols 704 match the numbers indicated by the decorative symbols 700 . To explain further, in the example of FIG. 157(1), as the small pattern 704, a number corresponding to "029" of the decorative pattern 700 is displayed.

(Execution count image 705)
As shown in FIG. 157(1), an execution count image 705 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . The number of times of execution image 705 is an image showing the number of times of variable display (the number of times of variable presentation of decorative symbols 700) newly performed after the number of times of variable display of special symbols is reset. The display content of the execution count image 705 is updated each time the variable effect is performed. In the illustrated example, the number-of-executions image 705 shows the text "99GAME" including the number of times the variable effect has been performed. It should be noted that the number of variable effects shown in the execution count image 705 may be the number of times that the variable effects have been executed, or the number of variable effects including not only the number of times that has been executed but also the variable effects that are being executed. There may be. Further, the timing at which the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated may be during the execution of the variable effect or after the variable effect is finished. The number-of-executions image 705 is displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 700 . However, the number-of-executions image 705 may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700 .

(Stage image 706)
As shown in FIG. 157(1), a stage image 706 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . The stage image 706 is an image that suggests or notifies the stage in which the player is staying in the performance being executed. Also, the stage is a stage in the presentation of the gaming machine 1 . In this embodiment, a plurality of types of stages are provided, and a stage image 706 having a display mode corresponding to the stage in which the player is staying is displayed. The stage image 706, among the plurality of layers provided in the first image display device 70, is a decorative pattern 700, a moving image 701, a pending image 702, a pending number display 703, a small pattern 704, an execution count image 705, etc. Displayed on the back (lower) layer. That is, the stage image 706 is displayed as a background image on the first image display device 70 . Also, the stage image 706 may be a moving image. In the illustrated example, a space-themed moving image is displayed as the stage image 706 .
The stage image 706 is switched, for example, when a variable effect in one stage is performed a predetermined number of times. Further, when a specific variable effect is performed, the stage image 706 may be switched in the next variable effect after the specific variable effect. Specific variable effects include, for example, a variable effect in which an SP ready-to-win effect is executed, a variable effect in which an SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed, and the like. Furthermore, the stage image 706 is switched for each game state of the gaming machine 1 . More specifically, the stage image 706 is displayed in different display modes in the normal game state, the normal time-saving game state, and the special time-saving game state. The background of the stage image 706 can also be regarded as an effect mode of the gaming machine 1 .

(First front image 707)
As shown in FIG. 157(6), the first image display device 70 displays the first front image 707 . The first foreground image 707 is displayed in a layer in front (higher) than the layer in which the decorative pattern 700 is displayed, among the plurality of layers provided in the first image display device 70 . The first front image 707 may be displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70 . In this case, the first front image 707 is a front layer than the decoration pattern 700, the number of times of execution image 705, the stage image 7006, the remaining number of arrivals image 708 described later, etc., the fluctuation image 701, the pending image 702, the number of pending It is displayed on a layer behind (lower) than the display 703, the small pattern 704, and the like. However, the first foreground image 707 may be displayed on a layer above the moving image 701 and the reserved image 702 . The first front image 707 is displayed during execution of the variable effect.

(Remaining number of arrivals image 708)
As shown in FIG. 157(5), the first image display device 70 displays a remaining number of arrivals image 708 . This reach remaining number of times image 708 is an image showing the number of times of variation production required until the special time-saving gaming state. The display content of the remaining number of times of arrival image 708 is updated each time the variable effect is performed. In the illustrated example, as the reaching remaining number image 708, the text of "more 400" including the number of fluctuation effects required until the special time-saving gaming state is entered is shown. Note that the number of variable effects shown in the remaining number-of-reaches image 708 may be the number of times including the variable effects being executed, or the number of times excluding the variable effects being executed. Further, the timing at which the display content of the remaining number of times of arrival image 708 is updated may be during execution of the variable effect or after the end of the variable effect. The remaining number of arrivals image 708 is displayed on the layer behind the decorative pattern 700 . However, the remaining reach image 708 may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700 .

(Second front image 709)
As shown in FIG. 162(4), the first image display device 70 displays the second front image 709 . The second foreground image 709 is displayed in a layer in front (higher) than the layer in which the decorative pattern 700 is displayed, among the plurality of layers provided in the first image display device 70 . Also, the second front image 709 is displayed in a display manner different from that of the first front image 707 . Also, the second front image 709 may be displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70 . In this case, the second front image 709 is a front layer than the decoration pattern 700, the execution number image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of arrivals image 708, etc. , is displayed in a layer behind (lower) than the small pattern 704 and the like. However, the second foreground image 709 may be displayed on a layer above the moving image 701 and the reserved image 702 . Also, the second front image 709 is executed in the variable effect of the variable effect pattern in which the first front image 707 is not executed.

(Clear negative image 744)
As shown in FIG. 162(4), a clear negative image 744 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . The clear negative image 744 is displayed when the RWM clear negative effect is executed. The display of the clear negative image 744 suggests to the player that the RWM clear has not been executed. In the illustrated example, as the clear negative image 744, a character appearing in the content that is the theme of the gaming machine 1 is displayed.

(Customer waiting image 710)
As shown in FIG. 166(1), a customer waiting image 710 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . The customer waiting image 710 is an image for advertising the gaming machine 1 in the customer waiting state. The customer waiting image 710 is displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70 . However, the customer waiting image 710 may be displayed in part of the display area of the first image display device 70 and not displayed in the other part. In the illustrated example, as the customer waiting image 710, a moving image related to the content that is the theme of the gaming machine 1 is displayed. The customer waiting image 710 is a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the moving image 701, the pending image 702, the small pattern 704, the number of times of execution image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of arrivals image 708, etc., and the pending number display 703. It is displayed in a layer behind (lower) than etc. However, the customer waiting image 710 may be displayed in a layer behind the moving image 701, the reserved image 702, the small pattern 704, and the like.

(First emphasized image 711)
As shown in FIG. 167(9), a first emphasized image 711 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . The first emphasized image 711 is an image that emphasizes the effect of the first movable member 73a. Also, the first emphasized image 711 is displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70 . In the illustrated example, the first enhanced image 711 is a radial image. More specifically, the first emphasized image 711 is a radial image of a specific color centered on the position of the first movable member 73a. Moreover, the specific color may be any color, and for example, it is red. In addition, the first emphasized image 711 is a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable pedestal 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved pedestal 702P, the number of execution times image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, etc. It is displayed on a layer behind the number display 703, the small pattern 704, and the like.

(SP reach image 712)
As shown in FIG. 167(10), the SP reach image 712 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . This SP reach image 712 is an image showing that the SP reach effect is being executed. The SP reach image 712 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in content that is the theme of the gaming machine 1 plays a mini game. Also, in the SP reach image 712, a background different from the stage image 706 is displayed. In addition, the SP reach image 712 is a front layer than the variation image 701, the variation pedestal 701P, the pending image 702, the pending pedestal 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining reach count image 708, etc., and is a decorative pattern. 700, the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc., are displayed in the rear layer.

(SPSP reach image 713)
As shown in FIG. 167(11), an SPSP reach image 713 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . This SPSP ready-to-win image 713 is an image showing that the SPSP ready-to-win effect is being executed. The SPSP ready-to-reach image 713 is, for example, a moving image in which characters appearing in the content that is the theme of the gaming machine 1 fight. Also, in the SPSP reach image 713, a background different from that of the stage image 706 and the SP reach image 712 is displayed. In addition, the SPSP reach image 713 is a front layer than the variable image 701, the variable pedestal 701P, the pending image 702, the pending pedestal 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining reach count image 708, etc., and is a decorative pattern. 700, the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc., are displayed in the rear layer.

(Button operation image 714)
As shown in FIG. 167(12), a button operation image 714 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . The button operation image 714 is an image displayed when the promotion effect is being executed. By displaying this button operation image 714 , the player can recognize that it is time to operate the effect button 17 . In the illustrated example, an image simulating the effect button 17 is displayed as the button operation image 714 . In this embodiment, the button operation image 714 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and when the effect button 17 is operated within the predetermined period after the button operation image 714 is displayed, a predetermined effect is executed. That is, in the promotion effect, the effective period of operation of the effect button 17 is set as the display period of the button operation image 714 .

(First eye-catching image 715)
As shown in FIG. 168(14), a first eye-catching image 715 is displayed on the first image display device . The first eye-catching image 715 is an image showing a character appearing in the content that is the theme of the gaming machine 1 . The first eye-catching image 715 is displayed when the SPSP ready-to-win performance ends in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the normal game state or in the variable performance in which the resurrection variation is performed. Further, when the SP ready-to-win effect is executed and the SP ready-to-win effect is not executed, the first eye-catching image 715 may be displayed when the SP ready-to-win effect ends. The first eye-catching image 715 is displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70 . In addition, the first eye-catching image 715 is a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the variable pedestal 701P, the pending image 702, the pending pedestal 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining reach count image 708, and the like. It is displayed in a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, and the like.

(Adjusted image 716)
As shown in FIG. 169(1), an adjusted image 716 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . The adjustment image 716 is an image for adjusting the volume of sound output from the audio output device 9 and the light intensity of various lamps. When the player operates the cross key 19 while the adjustment image 716 is displayed, the volume and the light intensity of various lamps are adjusted. In the illustrated example, the adjustment image 716 includes an image simulating a speaker, an image simulating a lamp, and an image simulating the cross key 19 . Also, the adjusted image 716 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700 .

(Menu image 717)
As shown in FIG. 169(1), a menu image 717 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . The menu image 717 is an image for displaying on the first image display device 70 a menu screen (not shown) for setting the gaming machine 1 . In other words, the menu image 717 is an image that notifies the player that the menu screen can be displayed. When the player operates the effect button 17 while the menu image 717 is being displayed, the menu screen is displayed on the first image display device 70 . In the illustrated example, as the menu image 717, an image simulating the effect button 17 and the text "Show menu with button" are shown. Also, the menu image 717 is displayed on the front layer of the decorative pattern 700 .

(Second emphasized image 718)
As shown in FIG. 171(15), the second emphasized image 718 is displayed on the first image display device . The second emphasized image 718 is an image that emphasizes the effect of the first movable member 73a. Also, the second emphasized image 718 is displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70 . In the illustrated example, the second enhanced image 718 is a radial image centered on the position of the first movable member 73a. Also, the second emphasized image 718 is displayed in a color different from that of the first emphasized image 711 . The color of the second emphasized image 718 may be any color, for example, rainbow color. In addition, the second emphasized image 718 is a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable pedestal 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved pedestal 702P, the number of times of execution image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, etc. It is displayed on a layer behind the number display 703, the small pattern 704, and the like.

(Opening image 719)
As shown in FIG. 171(18), an opening image 719 is displayed on the first image display device . This opening image 719 is an image for informing the player of the start of the big winning game or the start of the small winning game. In the illustrated example, as the opening image 719, text "BIG Bonus! Congratulations" indicating the start of the jackpot game is displayed. The opening image 719 has contents suggesting the type of jackpot (for example, the total number of rounds) and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends.

(First right shot image 720)
As shown in FIG. 172(19), the first right-handed shot image 720 on the first image display device 70 is an image for prompting the player to shoot the game ball rightward in the game area 5a. be. The first hitting right image 720 is displayed when a jackpot game is being executed. In the illustrated example, an arrow mark pointing to the right is displayed as the first shot-to-right image 720 .

(promoting image 721)
As shown in FIG. 172(19), the promotion image 721 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . The promotion image 721 is an image for prompting the player to shoot the game ball rightward in the game area 5a. In the illustrated example, as the promotion image 721, the text "Aim right!" ing.

(During round image 722)
As shown in FIG. 172(20), the first image display device 70 displays an in-round image 722 . This in-round image 722 is a moving image of a character appearing in the content that is the theme of the gaming machine 1 . The in-round image 722 is displayed during the round in the jackpot game.

(Round number image 723)
As shown in FIG. 172(20), a round number image 723 is displayed on the first image display device . This round number image 723 is an image for notifying the player of the round number of the round currently being executed in the jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the text "Round 1" is displayed as the round number image 723. FIG.

(Normal time saving selection image 745)
As shown in FIG. 172 ( 21 ), the first image display device 70 displays a normal working hours selection image 745 . The normal time saving selection image 745 is an image for allowing the player to select the mode of production in the normal time saving game state. In the example of illustration, in normal time saving selection image 745, two modes of "A" and "B" are selectable. The player can select any mode by operating the effect button 17 when the normal time saving selection image 745 is displayed. Also, in the illustrated example, the "A" mode is selected.

(Normal time saving start image 724)
As shown in FIG. 172 ( 22 ), the first image display device 70 displays a normal working hours start image 724 . This normal time saving start image 724 is an image for notifying the start of the normal time saving game state. In the illustrated example, as the normal working hours start image 724, the text of "Enter A mode!" The "A mode" displayed in the normal working hours start image 724 is the mode selected in the normal working hours selection image 745 (see FIG. 172 (21)).

(Card caution image 739)
As shown in FIG. 172 ( 22 ), a card caution image 739 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . The card caution image 739 is an image for warning that a card capable of specifying the balance of the valuable value is left untaken from a lending device (not shown) that performs lending communication of game balls with the gaming machine 1 . In the illustrated example, the card caution image 739 shows the text "Be careful not to forget to take out your card."

(Game attention image 740)
As shown in FIG. 172 ( 22 ), a game caution image 740 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . The game warning image 740 is an image for warning the player's addiction to the game. In the illustrated example, the game caution image 740 shows the text "Pachinko is a game to be enjoyed moderately, be careful not to get addicted to it".

(Second right shot image 725)
As shown in FIG. 172(23), the first image display device 70 displays a second hitting image 725 to the right. This second hitting image 725 is an image for prompting the player to shoot the game ball rightward in the game area 5a. The second right shot image 725 is continuously displayed when it is in the normal time-saving gaming state and when it is in the special time-saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, as the second right-handed image 725, an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "Right-handed" are displayed.

(Normal time saving remaining number of times image 726)
As shown in FIG. 172 ( 23 ), the first image display device 70 displays a normal time saving remaining number image 726 . This normal time saving remaining number image 726 is an image showing the remaining number of times of the special symbol lottery in the normal time saving game state. In the illustrated example, as the normal time saving remaining number image 726, the text of "100 times" indicating that the special symbol lottery remaining number of times in the normal time saving game state is 100 times is displayed.

(Switch image 727)
As shown in FIG. 177(9), a switching image 727 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . The switching image 727 is an image for switching the background displayed on the first image display device 70 . The switching image 727 is displayed when the SPSP ready-to-win performance ends in the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost in the normal time-saving game state or in the variable performance in which the resurrection variation is performed. Further, when the SP ready-to-win effect is executed and the SPSP ready-to-win effect is not executed, the switching image 727 may be displayed when the SP ready-to-win effect ends. In the illustrated example, an image simulating darkness is shown as the switching image 727 . In addition, the switching image 727 is a front layer than the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the variable pedestal 701P, the reserved image 702, the reserved pedestal 702P, the number of times of execution image 705, the stage image 706, the normal time saving remaining number of times image 726, etc. are displayed in a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, and the like.

(first transition image 728)
As shown in FIG. 177(12), a first transitional image 728 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . A first transition image 728 is an image that is displayed when the stage image 706 is switched. In this embodiment, the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state is switched to the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state via the first transition image 728 . Also, the stage image 706 corresponding to the special time-saving game state is switched to the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state via the first transition image 728 . In the illustrated example, an image imitating a door is displayed as the first transitional image 728 . The first transitional image 728 is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70 . However, the first transitional image 728 may be displayed on a part of the first image display device 70 and not displayed on the other part. In addition, the first transition image 728 displayed when switching from the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal time-saving gaming state to the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state, and the stage image 706 corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state to the normal game The display mode may be the same as or different from that of the first transition image 728 displayed when switching to the stage image 706 according to the state. The first transition image 728 is from the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the variable pedestal 701P, the pending image 702, the pending pedestal 702P, the number of times of execution image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times of arrival image 708, the remaining number of normal working hours image 726, etc. is a front layer, and is displayed on a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, and the like.

(result image 729)
As shown in FIG. 178(13), a result image 729 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . The result image 729 is an image showing the result of the jackpot game. The result image 729 is displayed while the first transition image 728 is being displayed when a jackpot game is played. Further, when a plurality of jackpot games are executed before the first transition image 728 is displayed, the result image 729 shows the cumulative result of the jackpot games. In the illustrated example, the result image 729 includes the text "A mode" indicating that the game was in the normal time-saving game state, the text "TOTAL 3 times" indicating that the jackpot game was executed three times, and the jackpot game. , the text of "3024 Pt Acquisition" corresponding to the prize ball is displayed.

(Left shot image 730)
As shown in FIG. 179(20), a left-handed image 730 is displayed on the first image display device . The left-handed image 730 is an image for prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side in the game area 5a. In the illustrated example, the left-handed shot image 730 displays an arrow mark pointing to the left and the text "left-handed". The left shot image 730 is displayed when switching from the normal time-saving game state to the normal game state or when switching from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state.

(Second eye-catching image 731)
As shown in FIG. 180(29), the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed on the first image display device . The second eye-catching image 731 is an image showing a character appearing in the content that is the theme of the gaming machine 1, and is an image different from the first eye-catching image 715. FIG. However, the second eye-catching image 731 may be the same image as the first eye-catching image 715 . The second eye-catching image 731 is displayed when switching stages, that is, when changing the display mode of the stage image 706 . More specifically, the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed when the variable effect is started when the display mode of the stage image 706 is changed. In addition, the second eye-catching image 731 is a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the variable pedestal 701P, the pending image 702, the pending pedestal 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining reach count image 708, and the like. It is displayed in a layer behind the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, and the like.

(Countdown image 732)
As shown in FIG. 187(2), a countdown image 732 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . Countdown image 732 is the remaining number of times until the number of times of fluctuation display of special symbols executed from the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RAM clear, reset of the number of fluctuations) (number of times of fluctuation production) becomes a special time-saving game state , is an image to notify as a countdown. The countdown image 732 is started when the number of variable displays until the special time-saving gaming state is reached reaches a specific number. The specific number of times may be any number of times, for example, three times. In addition, the display content of the countdown image 732 is updated for each variation effect. In the illustrated example, as the countdown image 732, an image of "1" is displayed, which indicates that the number of fluctuation effects required to enter the special time-saving gaming state is one.

(Special time saving start image 733)
As shown in FIG. 188(7), a special time saving start image 733 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . The special time saving start image 733 is an image for notifying the start of the special time saving game state. In the illustrated example, as the special time-saving start image 733, a text of "time-saving game START!"

(Second transitional image 734)
As shown in FIG. 188(9), a second transitional image 734 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . A second transition image 734 is an image displayed when the stage image 706 is switched. In this embodiment, the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state is switched to the stage image 706 corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state via the second transition image 734 . In the illustrated example, an image simulating a shutter is displayed as the second transitional image 734 . The second transitional image 734 is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70 . However, the second transitional image 734 may be displayed on a part of the first image display device 70 and not displayed on the other part. The second transition image 734 is a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the variable pedestal 701P, the pending image 702, the pending pedestal 702P, the number of times of execution image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, and the like. , reserved number display 703, small pattern 704, and the like are displayed in a layer behind.

(Special time saving selection image 735)
As shown in FIG. 188 (10), a special time reduction selection image 735 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . The special time saving selection image 735 is an image for allowing the player to select the mode of production in the special time saving game state. In the example of illustration, either of two modes of "a" and "b" can be selected in the special time saving selection image 735. FIG. The player can select any mode by operating the production button 17 when the special time saving selection image 735 is displayed. Also, in the illustrated example, mode "a" is selected.

(Mode start image 736)
As shown in FIG. 188(11), a mode start image 736 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . The mode start image 736 is an image for notifying that the production of the mode in the special time-saving gaming state is started. In the illustrated example, as the mode start image 736, the text "Enter chance mode!"

(Third right shot image 737)
As shown in FIG. 188(12), the first image display device 70 displays a third hitting image 737 to the right. This third hitting image 737 is an image for prompting the player to shoot the game ball rightward in the game area 5a. The third hitting image 737 is displayed in the first fluctuation effect in the special time-saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, as the third right-handed shot image 737, an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "Right-handed" are displayed.

(Special time saving remaining number of times image 738)
As shown in FIG. 188 (12), a special time saving remaining number image 738 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . The special time saving remaining number image 738 is an image suggesting the remaining number of times of the special symbol lottery in the special time saving game state. In the illustrated example, as the special time saving remaining number image 738, the text of "749" indicating that the special symbol lottery remaining number of times in the special time saving gaming state is 749 times is displayed.

(Magnetic error notification image 741)
As shown in FIG. 206 ( 2 ), a magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . A magnetic error notification image 741 is an image for notifying a magnetic error. When abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetism detection sensor 57a, a magnetism error notification image 741 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "magnet detected" is shown as the magnetic error notification image 741 .

(Returning image 742)
As shown in FIG. 216(4), a returning image 742 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . The recovering image 742 is an image indicating that the game machine 1 is recovering from a state in which the power supply is cut off. In this embodiment, after the game machine 1 is powered on, the returning image 742 is displayed before the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the reserved number display 703, the small pattern 704, the stage image 706, etc. are displayed. be done. In addition, the returning image 742 is displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70 . In addition, the returning image 742 is more than the decorative pattern 700, the variable pedestal 701P, the pending image 702, the pending pedestal 702P, the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, the number of times of execution image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times of arrival image 708, and the like. displayed in the foreground layer. In the illustrated example, the text "returning" is shown as the during-returning image 742 .

(Zone notification image 743)
As shown in FIG. 226(2), a zone notification image 743 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . This zone notification image 743 is an image for notifying that the zone effect is being executed. Further, the zone notification image 743 displays information for identifying which one of the plurality of zone effects is being executed. In the illustrated example, the zone notification image 743 shows the text of "chance zone" for identifying the zone effect being executed.

(Variation production example 1)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 157 to 159, the variable effect of the decorative pattern 700 performed by the effect control unit 130m using the first image display device 70 (variable effect example 1) will be specifically described. Variation production example 1 is an example of variation production of the decorative design 700 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting port 45 in the normal game state. In addition, variation production example 1 is a variation production example in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win production is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 157(1), the effect control unit 130m stop-displays the previous special symbol, and the highly decorative decorative symbol 700 is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70. It is assumed that there is Also, at this time, the first image display device 70 displays a decorative pattern 700, a variable pedestal 701P, a reserved pedestal 702P, a reserved number display 703, a small pattern 704, an execution count image 705, and a stage image 706. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 shows "0", which is the pending number for winning the first starting port 45, and the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 indicates "0", which is the number of pending prizes for the second starting port. Also, the execution count image 705 shows the text “99GAME”. Also, as a stage image 706, a background corresponding to the first stage is displayed. The first stage is a stage corresponding to the normal game state.
Further, the top lamp 10b in the frame lighting device 10, the board lamp 74b in the board lighting device 74, the movable member lamp 74c in the board lighting device 74, and the button lamp 17c are all of the first mode. The first mode is, for example, a mode of emitting white light. Also, although illustration is omitted, from the audio output device 9, BGM corresponding to the previous variation effect is continuously output.

Then, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 157(2), the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special design. In the present embodiment, the left decorative pattern 700, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, and the small pattern 704 are respectively displayed in order by displaying the numbers "1" to "9" for variable display. That is, in this embodiment, the numbers of the left decorative pattern 700, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, and the small pattern 704 are individually changeable. The left decorative design 700, the middle decorative design 700, the right decorative design 700, and the small design 704 may display characters other than numbers, such as English characters. Further, with the start of the fluctuation, the decorative pattern 700 is variably displayed toward the lower side at a low speed, while the small pattern 704 is variably displayed at a high speed.
When the decorative pattern 700 or the small pattern 704 is displayed (scrolled) at a particularly high speed in the drawing, the target pattern is indicated by an arrow (↓) for easy understanding. The decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 that are variably displayed at high speed have higher transparency than when they are not variably displayed. In addition, the target symbols that are variably displayed at high speed may be invisible or difficult to be seen by the player, or may be visible to the player. Further, like the variable display of the decorative pattern 700 at low speed, the operation of the decorative pattern 700 when the fluctuation is started may be hereinafter referred to as the fluctuation start operation.

In addition, as the game ball wins the first starting hole 45, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 as shown in FIG. 157(2). Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. The staged display effect is an effect of displaying the pending image 702 while changing the display mode of the pending image 702 in stages. The staged display effect is executed when the display of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the first pending image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above the first pending pedestal 702P. Note that the staged display effect will be described in detail later.

In addition, as the game ball wins the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 157 (2), the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 notifying of the winning to the first starting port 45 starts. be done. Also, at this time, the light emission mode of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c is switched to the light emission mode corresponding to the variable effect. More specifically, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all change from the first mode to the second mode. The second mode is a mode of emitting blue light, which is different from the first mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(3), the decorative pattern 700 moves further downward by the movement at the start of fluctuation. Also, at this time, the staged display effect is completed, and the suspended image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed on the first suspended pedestal 702P. This pending image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 157(2). Also, the display mode of this pending image 702 is a display mode according to the first stage. Also, the winning sound for notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output.

Further, although not shown in the example shown in FIG. 157(3), when the staged display effect is completed, the action effect of the pending image 702 is started. The motion effect is a motion effect for displaying the moving image 701 or the pending image 702 . The action production is executed according to the progress of the production. More specifically, the action effect is performed during execution of the variable effect. In addition, the motion performance may not be executed when the variable performance is not executed, or the motion performance may be executed even when the variable performance is not executed. By executing the action effect, the player can be made to pay attention to the changing image 701 or the pending image 702 . Note that the action effect will be described in detail later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(4), the movement at the time of start of fluctuation ends, and the fluctuation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. Further, the variable image 701 is displayed by enlarging the pending image 702 while moving to the variable base 701P. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "0". Also, although illustration is omitted, while the variable effect is being executed, the BGM corresponding to the variable effect being executed is continuously output from the audio output device 9 .

In the example shown in FIGS. 157(1) to 157(4), the decorative design 700 is arranged such that the left decorative design 700, the middle decorative design 700, and the right decorative design 700 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Although it moves (scrolls) in the vertical direction, it is not limited to this mode. For example, in the decorative design 700, the left decorative design 700, the middle decorative design 700, and the right decorative design 700 may be arranged vertically and each of them may move (scroll) in the horizontal direction.
Also, the state in which the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are displayed by the arrow (↓) in the drawing is not limited to the state in which the target pattern is displayed. For example, the state in which the target symbol is displayed by an arrow (↓) in the drawing may be a state in which the target symbol is hidden and thus invisible to the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 157(1) to 157(4), in a state where the winning of the first starting port 45 is not suspended and the special symbol does not change, the first starting port 45 When the game ball wins, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45, and the reserved image 702 is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 moves to the display position of the moving image 701 , and “0” is displayed in the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 .
However, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 in a state where the winning of the first starting port 45 is not suspended and the special symbol does not change, the first starting port 45 is suspended. Numeral display 703 may remain "0". In this case, the variable image 701 may be displayed by moving the pending image 702 after the pending image 702 is displayed, or the variable image 701 may be displayed without the pending image 702 being displayed. .

In addition, although illustration is omitted, when the game ball wins the second start port 47 in a state where the winning of the second start port 47 is not suspended and the special symbol does not change, the second start A pending image 702 may be displayed along with "1" displayed in the pending number display 703 of the mouth 47 . After that, the pending image 702 may move to the display position of the moving image 701 , and “0” may be displayed in the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 .
However, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47 in a state where the winning of the second starting port 47 has not been suspended and the special symbol has not changed, the second starting port 47 is suspended. Numeral display 703 may remain "0". In this case, the variable image 701 may be displayed by moving the pending image 702 after the pending image 702 is displayed, or the variable image 701 may be displayed without the pending image 702 being displayed. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(5), display of the first front image 707 is started. When the display of the first front image 707 is started, the transparency of the first front image 707 is high, and the decoration pattern 700 displayed on the layer behind the first front image 707 is visible to the player. It is possible. Also, at this time, a remaining number of arrivals image 708 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the remaining number of arrivals image 708 shows the text "400 more".

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(6), the transparency of the first front image 707 is lowered, and the decoration pattern 700 displayed on the layer behind the first front image 707 is invisible to the player. Or it will be in a state of being difficult to see.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 158(7). Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position away from the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(8), the staged display effect is completed, and the holding image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed on the first holding base 702P larger than the example shown in FIG. 158(7). Displayed by size. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Also, the prize winning sound is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 158(9), the first front image 707 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 that is displayed in a high-speed variation becomes visible to the player again.
Note that the display period of the first front image 707 is, for example, 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(10), the left decorative pattern 700 is scrolled at a low speed, and then temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of fluctuation. More specifically, the number "4", which is the left decorative pattern 700, is temporarily stopped.
In addition, when representing that the decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped in the drawing, it is expressed by using a display similar to a double quotation mark around the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 700 for easy understanding.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (11), "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45 as the game ball wins the first start port 45. Next, as shown in FIG. Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position away from the second pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 for notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is started. This prize-winning sound is different from the prize-winning sound output when the hold image 702 in the normal display mode (see FIG. 158(8)) is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(12), the staged display effects are completed, and the pending image 702 is displayed in a large display size in the expected color display mode on the second pending pedestal 702P. In the illustrated example, the second pending image 702 is displayed in blue. More specifically, the second reserved image 702 is displayed in a mode having a circular portion made of blue and formed in a circular shape, and an aura portion positioned above the circular portion and simulating an aura. there is Further, when the staged display effect is completed, the action effect of the second pending image 702 is started. The winning sound for informing the winning to the first start port 45 is continuously output until the step display effect is completed, and is not output after a predetermined time has elapsed after the step display effect is completed. This predetermined time is, for example, one second. That is, the output time of the winning sound when the blue pending image 702 is displayed is longer than the output time of the winning sound when the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (13), the right decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of fluctuation after being scrolled at a low speed. More specifically, the number "1" which is the right decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (14), the middle decorative pattern 700 scrolls at a low speed, and then temporarily stops at the fixed stop position until the start of fluctuation. More specifically, the number "2", which is the middle decorative pattern 700, is temporarily stopped. After the three decorative symbols 700 are temporarily stopped, the three decorative symbols 700 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 159 (15) as the special symbols stop changing. The combination “421” of the decorative symbols 700 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, three small symbols 704 are also fixed and stopped. In other words, all the small symbols 704 are definitely stopped without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the combination “421” of the small patterns 704 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 700 . Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "100 GAME". In addition, the execution time of this variable production is, for example, 8 seconds.

(Step-by-step display effect by circular pending image 702 in normal display mode)
Next, the staged display effect by the circular pending image 702 in the normal display mode will be described. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example of a staged display effect using a circular pending image 702 in the normal display mode.
The circular pending image 702 in the normal display mode performs four stages of presentation as the staged display presentation. When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 45, first, as shown in FIG. 160(1), as the first stage of the staged display effect, a pending image 702 with high transparency is displayed in white. This reserved image 702 has a semicircular shape. In addition, this pending image 702 is displayed at a position above the pending pedestal 702P. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the first stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIGS. 157(2) and 158(7).

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(2), as the second stage of the staged display rendering, a pending image 702 having a lower transparency than that of the first stage is displayed. This reserved image 702 is circular and has a cross mark. Also, this pending image 702 has a display size larger than that of the first stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P than that of the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 160(3), as the third stage of the staged display effect, a pending image 702 having a lower transparency than that of the second stage is displayed. This pending image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than in the second stage and at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P than in the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(4), as the fourth stage of the staged display rendering, that is, the final stage, a pending image 702 having a lower transparency than that of the third stage is displayed. This pending image 702 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the third stage. Also, this pending image 702 is displayed at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P compared to the third stage. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the final stage of the staged display rendering is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIGS. 157(3) and 158(8). That is, although illustration is omitted, after the hold image 702 in the first stage shown in FIGS. 157(2) and 158(7) is displayed, the hold image 702 in the second stage of the staged display effect is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the third stage of the staged display effect is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIGS. 157(3) and 158(9) is displayed.

Note that the display mode of the pending image 702 at the final stage is hereinafter sometimes referred to as a completed display mode. In particular, the display size of the pending image 702 in the completed display mode may be referred to as the completed display size. Also, the form of the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be referred to as the completed form. Also, the degree of transparency of the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be referred to as the completed degree of transparency. Also, the display position of the pending image 702 in the completed display mode may be referred to as the completed display position.
Further, the display mode of the pending image 702 that is not in the first to third stages, ie, the final stage, may be hereinafter referred to as an incomplete display mode. In particular, the display size of the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode may be referred to as the unfinished display size. Also, the form of the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be referred to as an incomplete form. Also, the transparency of the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be referred to as the incomplete transparency. Also, the operation mode of the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be referred to as an incomplete operation mode. Also, the display position of the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be referred to as an incomplete display position.
In the present embodiment, the time from the start of the staged display effect to the display of the pending image 702 in the completed display mode, that is, the execution time of the staged display effect by the pending image 702 in the circular normal display mode is 0. .2 seconds.

Further, when the staged display effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 160(5), the action effect of the pending image 702 is started. The circular pending image 702 in the normal display mode periodically rotates clockwise as an action effect. The period of rotation in this motion presentation is, for example, 2.0 seconds.

As described above, the pending image 702 is displayed while the display size is changed step by step in the staged display effect. More specifically, the pending image 702 is displayed so that the display size increases step by step. In addition, the pending image 702 is displayed while the display position is changed step by step in the staged display effect. More specifically, the pending image 702 is displayed to move step by step toward the pending pedestal 702P (completed display position). In addition, the pending image 702 is displayed while the degree of transparency changes stepwise in the staged display effect. More specifically, the reserved image 702 is displayed so that the transparency decreases stepwise. In addition, the pending image 702 is displayed while changing its form step by step. More specifically, the pending image 702 is displayed so that the form gradually approaches the completed form.
When the pending image 702 is displayed, if the pending image 702 is switched from the non-display state to the complete display mode without performing the staged display effect, the player may feel uncomfortable with the display of the pending image 702. There is Therefore, in the present embodiment, the pending image 702 is displayed step by step in a staged display effect, thereby suppressing the player's sense of incongruity. In addition, the staged display effects allow the player to enjoy the change in the display mode of the pending image 702 .

(Step-by-step display effect by blue pending image 702)
Next, the staged display effect by the blue pending image 702 will be described. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an example of a staged display effect using a blue pending image 702. FIG.
The blue pending image 702 performs four stages of presentation as the staged display presentation. When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 45, first, as shown in FIG. 161(1), as the first stage of the staged display effect, a pending image 702 with high transparency is displayed in white. This reserved image 702 has a semicircular shape. In addition, this pending image 702 is displayed at a position above the pending pedestal 702P. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the first stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIG. 158(11). In addition, the display mode (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) in the first stage of the blue reserved image 702 is the first stage display mode in the staged display effect by the circular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. It is the same display mode as

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(2), as the second stage of the staged display rendering, a pending image 702 having a lower transparency than the first stage is displayed in blue. This reserved image 702 is displayed in a mode having a circular portion 702a made of blue and formed in a circular shape, and an aura portion 702b positioned above the circular portion 702a and imitating an aura. Also, this pending image 702 has a display size larger than that of the first stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P than that of the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 161(3), as the third stage of the staged display rendering, a pending image 702 having a lower transparency than that of the second stage is displayed. This pending image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than in the second stage and at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P than in the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(4), as the fourth stage of the staged display rendering, that is, the final stage, a pending image 702 having a lower transparency than that of the third stage is displayed. This pending image 702 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the third stage. Also, this pending image 702 is displayed at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P compared to the third stage. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIG. 158(12). That is, although illustration is omitted, after the suspended image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. A pending image 702 in the third stage of rendering is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 158(12) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from the start of the staged display effect to the display of the pending image 702 in the completed display mode, that is, the execution time of the staged display effect by the blue pending image 702 is 0.3 seconds. . That is, the execution time of the staged display effect by the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is longer than the execution time of the staged display effect by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.

Further, when the staged display effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 161(5), the action effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the blue circular pending image 702, the circular part 702a periodically rotates in the clockwise direction and the aura part 702b periodically swings left and right as an action effect. The period of rotation in this motion presentation is, for example, 2.0 seconds. Further, the period of swinging in this action rendering is, for example, 1.5 seconds.

As described above, the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode have the same display mode in the first stage of the staged display effect. In this case, when the reserved image 702 of the first stage in the staged display effect is displayed, the player cannot distinguish whether the displayed reserved image 702 is in the normal display mode or the expected color display mode. do not have. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation in which display mode the pending image 702 will be displayed.
It has been described that the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode have the same display mode in the first stage of the staged display effects, but the present invention is not limited to this. The reserved image 702 in the normal display mode and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode have one or more display modes of the first stage display color, form, display size, transparency, and display position. While the same, other display aspects may be different. Even in this case, when the reserved image 702 of the first stage is displayed, the player cannot distinguish whether the displayed reserved image 702 is in the normal display mode or the expected color display mode. Hateful. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation in which display mode the pending image 702 will be displayed.

In the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) in the expected color display mode, the display mode (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) other than the display color may be the same regardless of the display color. However, it may be different for each display color. In addition, in the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) of the expected color display mode, the display mode (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) other than the display color is different for a plurality of specific colors (for example, blue and red). It is the same, and the special color (for example, rainbow color) may differ from the specific plural colors in terms of display mode (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) other than the display color.
In addition, in the pending image 702 (variable image 701) of the expected color display mode, when the display mode (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) other than the display color differs depending on the display color, each stage in the staged display effect display modes (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) may also be different. In addition, in the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) of the expected color display mode, if the display mode (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) other than the display color is the same regardless of the display color, the step display The display mode (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) of each stage in the production may also be the same.

Further, the action mode in the action rendering by the pending image 702 (variable image 701) in the expected color display mode may be the same regardless of the display color, or may be different for each display color. Further, in the reserved image 702 (fluctuation image 701) in the expected color display mode, the operation mode in the action effect is the same for a plurality of specific colors (for example, blue and red), and the special color (for example, rainbow color) is The action mode in the action rendering may differ from the specific plural colors.

(Variation production example 2)
FIG. 162 is a diagram showing one aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 2) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 162 . Variation production example 2 is an example of variation production of the decorative symbol 700 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting port 45 in the normal game state. In addition, the variable effect example 2 is a variable effect example in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win effect is not executed. In addition, in the following description, the points different from the example 1 of variable effect will be mainly described, and the description of the points that are the same as the example 1 of variable effect may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 162(1), when the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 are confirmed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the effect control unit 130m. It is Also, at this time, four pending images 702, an execution count image 705, and a stage image 706 are displayed. Also, at this time, “4” is displayed in the number-of-holds display 703 of the first starting port 45 . Also, the execution count image 705 shows the text "49GAME". Also, as a stage image 706, a background corresponding to the first stage is displayed. Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all of the second mode. Also, although not shown, the sound output device 9 continues to output BGM corresponding to the previous variation effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(2), the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In addition, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "3". Also, at this time, the second reserved image 702, the third reserved image 702, and the fourth reserved image 702 are respectively placed on the first reserved base 702P, the second reserved base 702P, and the third reserved base 702P. move towards. Further, the variable image 701 is displayed by expanding the first pending image 702 while moving toward the variable base 701P.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(3), display of the second front image 709 is started. When the display of the second front image 709 is started, the transparency of the second front image 709 is high, and the decorative pattern 700 displayed on the layer behind the second front image 709 is visible to the player. It is possible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(4), the transparency of the second front image 709 is lowered, and the decorative pattern 700 displayed on the layer behind the second front image 709 is difficult for the player to see. or become invisible. Also, at this time, the clear negative image 744 and the remaining number of arrivals image 708 are displayed. Remaining number of arrivals image 708 shows the text "200 more".
Next, as shown in FIG. 162(5), the second front image 709 is hidden, and the ornamental pattern 700 that is displayed in a high-speed variation becomes visible to the player again.
Note that the display period of the second front image 709 is, for example, two seconds.

Next, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 162(6), three decorative symbols 700 and "853", which is the small symbol 704, are displayed together and fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "50 GAME".
In addition, the execution time of this variable production is, for example, 4 seconds.

(Variation production example 3)
FIG. 163 and FIG. 164 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 163, another specific example (variation effect example 3) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 700 will be described. Variation production example 3 is an example of variation production of the decorative design 700 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start hole 45 in the normal game state. In addition, the variation production example 3 is a variation production example in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the ready-to-win production is executed. In addition, in the following explanation, points different from the examples of variable production described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as those of the examples of variable production may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 163(1), when the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 are confirmed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the effect control unit 130m. It is Also, at this time, “0” is displayed in the number-of-holds display 703 of the first starting port 45 . Also, the execution count image 705 shows the text “200 GAME”. In addition, the remaining number of arrivals image 708 shows the text “300 more”. Also, as a stage image 706, a background corresponding to the second stage is displayed. The second stage is a stage corresponding to the normal game state, and is a stage different from the first stage.
Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all of the first mode. Also, although not shown, the sound output device 9 continues to output BGM corresponding to the previous variation effect.

Next, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 163(2), the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special design. At this time, the operation at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is variably displayed at high speed. Also, at this time, “1” is displayed in the number-of-holds display 703 of the first starting port 45 . Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the first mode to the second mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(3), the fluctuation start operation proceeds. Also, at this time, the staged display effect is completed, and the star-shaped pending image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. This pending image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 163(2). Also, the display mode of this pending image 702 is a display mode according to the second stage. Also, the prize winning sound is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(4), the movement at the time of start of fluctuation ends, and the fluctuation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. Further, the variable image 701 is displayed by enlarging the suspended image 702 while moving to the variable pedestal 701P. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "0". Also, although illustration is omitted, BGM corresponding to the variable effect being executed is continuously output from the audio output device 9 while the variable effect is being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(5), "4" which is the left decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 163(6), "4" which is the right decorative symbol 700 is temporarily stopped, and ready-to-win effect is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 164(7), "3" which is the middle decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped.
Then, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 164(8), the three decorative symbols 700 are fixed and stopped. The combination "434" of the decorative symbols 700 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the small symbol 704 "434" is also fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "201 GAME". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of times of arrival image 708 is updated to "299 remaining".

(Stepped display effect by star-shaped pending image 702 in normal display mode)
Next, a description will be given of the staged display effect by the star-shaped pending image 702 in the normal display mode. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of a staged display effect using a star-shaped pending image 702 in the normal display mode.
The star-shaped pending image 702 in the normal display mode performs four stages of presentation as the staged display presentation. When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 45, first, as shown in FIG. 165(1), as the first stage of the staged display effect, a pending image 702 with high transparency is displayed in white. This reserved image 702 is in the shape of a star with the upper part missing. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the first stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIG. 163(2).

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(2), as the second stage of the staged display rendering, a pending image 702 having a lower transparency than that of the first stage is displayed. This reserved image 702 is in the shape of a star. Also, this pending image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than in the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 165(3), as the third stage of the staged display rendering, a pending image 702 having a lower transparency than that of the second stage is displayed. This pending image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than in the second stage. Also, in the third stage, an action display using the pending image 702 is performed. More specifically, in the third stage, an operation display is performed such that the pending image 702 emits light. In the illustrated example, an image imitating light is displayed moving from the center of the reserved image 702 toward the periphery of the reserved image 702 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(4), as the fourth stage of the staged display rendering, that is, the final stage, a pending image 702 having a lower transparency than that of the third stage is displayed. This pending image 702 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the third stage. It should be noted that the action display by the pending image 702 performed in the third stage of the staged display effect is not performed in the final stage. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIG. 163(3). That is, although illustration is omitted, after the suspended image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. A pending image 702 in the third stage of rendering is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 163(3) is displayed.
In the present embodiment, the time from the start of this staged display effect until the pending image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode, that is, the execution time of the staged display effect by the pending image 702 in the star-shaped normal display mode is 0.2 seconds. That is, the execution time of the staged display effect by the suspended image 702 in the star-shaped normal display mode is the same as the execution time of the staged display effect by the suspended image 702 in the circular normal display mode.

Further, when the staged display effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 165(5), the action effect of the pending image 702 is started. The star-shaped pending image 702 in the normal display mode periodically rotates in the counterclockwise direction as an action effect. The period of rotation in this motion presentation is, for example, 2.0 seconds.

(Variation production example 4)
FIGS. 166 to 168 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 4) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168. FIG. Variation production example 4 is an example of variation production of the decorative design 700 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting port 45 in the normal game state. Variation production example 4 is a variation production example in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loser, and reach production, SP reach production and SPSP reach production are executed. In addition, in the following explanation, points different from the examples of variable production described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as those of the examples of variable production may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 166(1), a customer waiting image 710 is displayed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. FIG. Also, at this time, the variation of the special symbol is stopped, and the variation effect is not executed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the third mode. A third mode is a mode in which the lights are off. Also, at this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 166(2), the customer waiting image 710 disappears with the start of the variable display of the special symbols. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number-of-executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining-number-of-reaches image 708 are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started. At this time, the operation at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is variably displayed at high speed. Also, at this time, “1” is displayed in the number-of-holds display 703 of the first starting port 45 . Further, the execution count image 705 shows the text "250 games", and the remaining reach count image 708 shows the text "250 more". Also, as a stage image 706, a background corresponding to the second stage is displayed. Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the pending image 702 is displayed in the incomplete display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the third mode to the second mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(3), the operation at the start of fluctuation proceeds. Also, at this time, the staged display effects are completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Also, the prize winning sound is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(4), the movement at the start of variation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 changes at high speed. Further, the variable image 701 is displayed by enlarging the suspended image 702 while moving to the variable pedestal 701P. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "0". Also, although illustration is omitted, BGM corresponding to the variable effect being executed is continuously output from the audio output device 9 while the variable effect is being executed.

Next, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 45, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 as shown in FIG. 166(5). Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the pending image 702 is displayed in the incomplete display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(6), the staged display effect is completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the complete display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, the prize winning sound is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(7), "6", which is the left decorative pattern 700, is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 167(8), "6" which is the right decorative symbol 700 is temporarily stopped, and ready-to-win effect is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(9), the development effect is executed. The development effect is a effect for informing that the ready-to-win effect will develop into the SP ready-to-win effect. In the development effect, a movable effect is executed and the first emphasized image 711 is displayed. The movable effect is a effect of operating the first movable member 73a. In the illustrated example, the first movable member 73a moves to a position overlapping the first image display device 70 as the movable effect. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the pending image 702, the number-of-executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining-number-of-reaches image 708 are difficult or invisible to the player. On the other hand, the pending number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be easily visible to the player. Also, when the development effect is executed, the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched. More specifically, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second mode to the fourth mode. The fourth mode is a green lighting mode, which is different from any of the first to third modes.
Further, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 while the development effect is being executed, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "2". On the other hand, the pending image 702 remains invisible to the player. Also, at this time, the winning sound accompanying the winning to the first starting port 45 is not output.

Next, after the development effect and the movable effect are completed and the first movable member 73a is retracted to a position where it does not overlap the first image display device 70, the SP reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 167(10). be. During execution of the SP reach effect, an SP reach image 712 is displayed. At this time, the variable image 701, the pending image 702, the execution count image 705, and the remaining reach count image 708 are difficult or invisible to the player. On the other hand, the pending number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, a background image corresponding to the SP ready-to-win effect is displayed on the first image display device 70 . Further, when the SP ready-to-win effect is being executed, the left and right decorative patterns 700 are displayed in a display mode with a reduced display size and low decorativeness. Also, the left and right decorative patterns 700 are displayed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 . In the illustrated example, the left decorative design 700 is displayed in the upper left corner of the first image display device 70 and the right decorative design 700 is displayed in the upper right corner of the first image display device 70 . In addition, the display positions of the left and right decorative patterns 700 when the SP ready-to-win effect is being performed are not limited to the illustrated example. When the SP reach effect is being performed, if the left and right decorative symbols 700 are at positions different from the display positions before execution of the SP reach effect (see FIG. 167 (8)), any one of the first image display devices 70 may be displayed at the position of
Further, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 while the SP ready-to-win effect is being executed, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "3". In addition, the sound output device 9 outputs a prize-winning sound accompanying the prize-winning to the first starting port 45 . On the other hand, the pending image 702 remains invisible to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (11), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. An SPSP ready-to-win image 713 is displayed during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect. At this time, a background image corresponding to the SPSP ready-to-win effect is displayed on the first image display device 70 .
Further, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 while the SPSP ready-to-win effect is being executed, the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "4". On the other hand, the pending image 702 remains invisible to the player. Also, the winning sound accompanying the winning to the first starting port 45 is not output.
In addition, the low-decorative decorative pattern 700 displayed when the SP ready-to-win effect or the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed is displayed in a layer different from the highly decorative decorative pattern 700 (see FIG. 167 (8)). may be For example, the decorative pattern 700 with high decorativeness is displayed in a layer behind the moving image 701 and the reserved image 702, while the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness is displayed in front of the changing image 701 and the reserved image 702. layer may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(12), the promotion effect is executed and the button operation image 714 is displayed.
When the player operates the effect button 17 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, the number "5", which is the middle decorative pattern 700, is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 168(13). At this time, the middle decorative pattern 700 is displayed in a less decorative display mode and in a larger display size than the left and right decorative patterns 700 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 168(14), the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the pending image 702, the number-of-executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining-number-of-reaches image 708 are difficult or invisible to the player. On the other hand, the pending number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be easily visible to the player.
Note that the time from when the variable effect is started until the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed is, for example, 60 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168(15), the display area of the first eye-catching image 715 on the first image display device 70 is reduced. More specifically, the display area of first eye-catching image 715 is reduced by moving first eye-catching image 715 so as to slide to the right. At this time, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the first eye-catching image 715 is not displayed, the third reserved image 702, the fourth reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, and the remaining number of arrivals The image 708 becomes a state in which it is easily visible to the player. At this time, the temporary stop display of the highly decorative left decorative symbol 700 is easily visible to the player. Also, the portion of the second pending image 702 that does not overlap with the first eye-catching image 715 becomes visible or easily visible to the player. Also, the portion of the stage image 706 that does not overlap with the first eye-catching image 715 is easily visible to the player. On the other hand, the middle decorative symbol 700, the right decorative symbol 700, the variable image 701, and the first reserved image 702 continue to be invisible or invisible to the player. In addition, the portion of the stage image 706 that overlaps the first eye-catching image 715 continues to be difficult or invisible to the player. Further, the portion of the second pending image 702 that overlaps the first eye-catching image 715 continues to be difficult or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, the fourth pending image 702, the third pending image 702, and the second pending image 702 are being executed, and the fourth pending image 702, the third pending image 702, and The action display of the second pending image 702 becomes visible or easily visible to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168(16), the first eye-catching image 715 is hidden. At this time, the temporary stop display of the three decorative symbols 700 with high decorativeness is easily visible to the player. Also, the variable image 701 and the first pending image 702 are easily visible to the player. Further, the entire stage image 706 and the entire second pending image 702 are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, four reserved images 702 in the completed display mode and in the normal display mode are displayed. That is, for the second reserved image 702, the third reserved image 702, and the fourth reserved image 702, the staged display effect does not become visible to the player, and the completed display mode is reserved. Image 702 is displayed.
Note that the display time of the first eye-catching image 715 is, for example, 2.5 seconds.

Then, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 168 (17), the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 are fixed and stopped. The combination "656" of the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is lost. Further, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "251 games", and the display content of the remaining reach count image 708 is updated to "249 more". Also, at this time, the variable image 701 is hidden. In addition, the execution time of this variable production is, for example, 70 seconds.
Further, in this variable effect, the time from when the left decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped until when the right decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped is, for example, 5 seconds. Also, the time from when the right decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped until when the middle decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped is, for example, 20 seconds.
The update timing of the display content when the execution count image 705 is redisplayed may be the same as the update timing of the display content when the remaining reach count image 708 is redisplayed. In this case, both the execution count image 705 and the remaining reach count image 708 may be redisplayed according to the display contents after the update, or may be redisplayed according to the display contents before the update.

As described above, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 during execution of development effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, etc., the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode is visible to the player. Instead, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode becomes visible.
In this way, the change in the display mode from the incomplete display mode of the pending image 702 is not visually recognized by the player, thereby preventing the player from paying too much attention to the pending image 702. image can be brought to the player's attention.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 during execution of the notification effect, the winning sound for notifying the winning of the first starting port 45 is not output. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by winning the first start hole 45 and not paying attention to the notification effect.
Note that, while the notification effect is being executed, the effect sound of the notification effect may be output.

In addition, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 during the execution of the SP reach performance, while the winning sound for notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is output, the SPSP reach performance is being executed. When the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the winning sound is not output.
As a result, the order of priority between making the player aware of the winning of the first starting port 45 and making the player pay attention to the effect being executed when winning is switched according to the progress of the effect. It is possible to realize a well-balanced production.

In addition, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 during execution of the notification effect and during execution of the SP ready-to-win effect, a winning sound for notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is output. When the game ball enters the first starting port 45 during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win performance, the winning sound may not be output.
In addition, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 during execution of the notification effect, a prize winning sound for notifying the winning of the first starting port 45 is output, and during the execution of the SP reach performance and the SP SP reach performance When a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 during execution of , the winning sound may not be output.

In addition, as the display area of the first eye-catching image 715 gradually becomes smaller as time elapses, some of the plurality of reserved images 702 become visible or easily visible to the player. , and other parts become invisible or invisible to the player. Therefore, the stage image 706 and the like are displayed again, compared to the configuration in which the state in which the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70 is switched to the state in which the first eye-catching image 715 is not displayed. It is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the hidden pending image 702 has not disappeared while suppressing the sense of incongruity of being held.

Further, when the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed in part of the display area of the first image display device 70, part of the one pending image 702 is visible to the player, and this one Another part of the pending image 702 is in a state of being invisible or invisible to the player (see FIG. 168 (15)). In this state, an action rendering by this one reserved image 702 is executed.
In this case, even if only part of the pending image 702 is visible to the player, the presence of the pending image 702 can be easily recognized by the player. Therefore, the player can quickly recognize that the hidden pending image 702 has not disappeared.

In addition, in the case of reach fluctuation, after the middle decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped and the reach is lost, the first predetermined image (first eye-catching image 715) appears and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden again. Perform the first production that appears. In addition, in the case of a missing change, the second predetermined image (the first front image 707, the second front image 709) appears while the decorative pattern 700 scrolls, hiding the decorative pattern 700, and then the decorative pattern 700 appears again. Then, a second production is performed to notify a failure. The variation time is longer when the first effect is performed than when the second effect is performed.
In this case, in the first effect, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden by the display of the first predetermined image after the decorative pattern 700 stops in a losing mode, so that the player is expected to develop some kind of effect from the temporary loss. I can hold you. In addition, in the second effect, by suddenly hiding the decorative pattern 700 during the variable display, it is possible to add unexpectedness and make the player's heart beat faster. Although the common phenomenon of hiding the decorative pattern 700 occurs, the predetermined image appears from different states. As a result, it is possible to diversify the variations of the presentation and improve the interest.

Further, the small pattern 704 is continuously displayed both during the display of the first predetermined image and during the display of the second predetermined image.
In this case, by displaying the small pattern 704 even when the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, the variation state of the special pattern can be confirmed.

Also, the display time of the first predetermined image and the display time of the second predetermined image are different. In particular, the display time of the second predetermined image is longer than the display time of the first predetermined image (second front image 709).
In this case, by shortening the display time of the first predetermined image, it is possible to smoothly transition from the reach-losing to the next effect. Also, by lengthening the display time of the second predetermined image, it is possible to make the player have expectations.

Further, the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) can be displayed, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is hidden while the first predetermined image is being displayed. 701) is also displayed again, and the suspended image 702 (fluctuation image 701) is displayed (not hidden) while the second predetermined image is being displayed.
In this case, since neither the decorative pattern 700 nor the reserved image 702 (fluctuation image 701) is displayed while the first predetermined image is being displayed, the first predetermined image can attract more attention. While the second predetermined image is being displayed, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden while the pending image 702 (fluctuation image 701) is displayed. people can recognize it.

Further, a highly anticipated specific effect (SP ready-to-win effect, etc.) is executed before the first predetermined image is displayed, and the specific effect is not executed before the second predetermined image is displayed.
In this case, the expectation of the player can be raised by the specific effect, and the expectation can be maintained by the appearance of the first predetermined image even if the design indicating the failure from the specific effect is displayed. On the other hand, since the second predetermined image is displayed without going through the specific effect, expectations can be raised immediately.

Also, when the first effect is performed, the background image is switched before and after the first predetermined image is displayed (in the order of the background in the SP reach effect, the first predetermined image, the first stage or the second stage). . When the second effect is performed, there is no change in the background image before and after the second predetermined image is displayed (first stage or second stage, second predetermined image, first stage or second stage). in order of stages).
In this case, when the first effect is performed, the first predetermined image is displayed when the specific background is switched to the normal background, so that the transition of the background can be performed smoothly. On the other hand, in the case of the second effect, the normal background is suddenly switched to the second predetermined image, and the player's expectation can be heightened.

Further, according to the determination result, it is possible to stop the plurality of decorative patterns 700 in a predetermined order, and when the second effect (display of the second front image 709) is executed, the plurality of decorative patterns 700 is not stopped in the predetermined order and the first effect is executed, the plurality of decorative patterns 700 are stopped in a predetermined order, and the first pattern (left decorative pattern 700) is stopped. The time until the second pattern (right decorative pattern 700) stops differs from the time from when the second pattern (right decorative pattern 700) stops until when the third pattern (middle decorative pattern 700) stops.
In this case, when the first effect is executed, the decorative symbols 700 are stopped in order, and there is time until the third decorative pattern 700 is stopped, so the player can be expected. In addition, since the first predetermined image is displayed even when the third decorative symbol 700 stops, the disappointment of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of developing further effects can be left. Also, when the second effect is executed, the decorative patterns 700 do not stop in order, so that the effect can be unexpected and the interest can be improved.

Also, the decorative pattern 700 is different before and after the first predetermined image appears, and the decorative pattern 700 is the same before and after the second predetermined image appears.
In this case, when the first effect is performed, the mode of the decorative design 700 changes via the first predetermined image, so the mode of the decorative design 700 can be changed smoothly. Further, when the second effect is performed, although there is no change in the mode of the decorative pattern 700 before and after the display of the second predetermined image, the second predetermined image suddenly appears, so the effect can be unexpected. , can improve interest.

In addition, in the variable effect example 4, it is explained that the variable image 701 is displayed after the SP ready-to-win effect and the SPSP ready-to-win effect are finished (see (16) in FIG. 168), but the present invention is not limited to this. After the SP ready-to-win effect or the SPSP ready-to-win effect ends, the fluctuation image 701 may not be displayed.

(Variation production example 5)
FIGS. 169 to 172 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 5) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 172. FIG. Variation production example 5 is an example of variation production of the decorative design 700 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start hole 45 in the normal game state. In addition, variation production example 5 is a variation production example in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In addition, in the following explanation, the points different from the examples of variable production described above will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as the examples of variable production may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 169(1), an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. FIG. Also, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the variable effect is not executed. Also, as a stage image 706, a background corresponding to the first stage is displayed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the fifth mode. The fifth mode is a mode of yellow light emission, which is different from any of the first to fifth modes. Also, at this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 169(2), the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special design. At this time, the operation at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is variably displayed at high speed. Also, at this time, the prize-winning lighting effect is executed. In the winning lighting effect, a notification sound for the winning lighting effect is different from the winning sound output when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode or the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed. , is output from the audio output device 9 . It should be noted that the notification sound of the lighting effect at the time of winning can also be regarded as the winning sound for notifying that the first starting port 45 has won a prize. Further, in the prize-winning lighting effect, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the sixth mode. A sixth mode is a mode in which the red light blinks periodically. Also, the blinking period is, for example, 0.5 seconds. Also, at this time, “1” is displayed in the number-of-holds display 703 of the first starting port 45 . Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the pending image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above the first pending pedestal 702P.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(3), the fluctuation start operation proceeds. Also, at this time, the staged display effect is completed, and the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed in the complete display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. In the illustrated example, the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed in blue. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the action effect of the first pending image 702 is started. In addition, the notification sound of the light emitting effect at the time of winning is not output after a predetermined time has passed since the staged display effect is completed. This predetermined time is, for example, two seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(4), the movement at the time of start of fluctuation ends, and the fluctuation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. Further, the variable image 701 is displayed by enlarging the suspended image 702 while moving to the variable pedestal 701P. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "0". Also, although illustration is omitted, BGM corresponding to the variable effect being executed is continuously output from the audio output device 9 while the variable effect is being executed.

Next, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 45, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 as shown in FIG. 169(5). Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the pending image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above the first pending pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.

Next, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 when the step display effect by the first pending image 702 is completed, as shown in FIG. "2" is displayed in Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the second pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the pending image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above the second pending pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started. More specifically, the output of the winning sound corresponding to the second pending image 702 starts before the output of the winning sound corresponding to the first pending image 702 ends. In addition, the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the action effect of the first pending image 702 is started.

In addition, if the output of the current winning sound starts before the output of the previous winning sound ends, even if the output of the previous winning sound is stopped when the output of the current winning sound starts, good. Also, even if the output of the current winning sound starts before the output of the previous winning sound ends, the previous winning sound may be output until the end. That is, the previous winning sound and the current winning sound may be output at the same time. In addition, if the output of the winning sound for informing the current winning starts before the output of the previous winning sound ends, the current winning sound will not be output until the output of the previous winning sound ends. good too.

Next, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 when the stage display effect by the second pending image 702 is completed, as shown in FIG. "3" is displayed in Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the third pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the pending image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above the third pending pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started. Also, on the second holding pedestal 702P, the holding image 702 in the normal game state is displayed in the completed display mode. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the action effect of the second pending image 702 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 170(8), the staged display effect by the third pending image 702 is completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the complete display mode on the third pending pedestal 702P. . Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the action effect of the third pending image 702 is started. Also, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 170(9), the left decorative symbol 700 "4" is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 170(10), "4" which is the right decorative symbol 700 is temporarily stopped, and ready-to-win effect is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 170(11), the development effect is executed. In the development effect, the movable effect is executed and the first emphasized image 711 is displayed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the sixth mode to the fourth mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 170 (12), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. During execution of the SP reach effect, an SP reach image 712 is displayed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (13), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. An SPSP reach image 713 is displayed during execution of the SPSP reach effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (14), the promotion effect is executed and the button operation image 714 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 17 while the button operation image 714 is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 171 (15), a big hit notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification production is a production for notifying that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In the jackpot effect, the movable effect is executed and the second emphasized image 718 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the first movable member 73a moves to a position overlapping the first image display device 70 as the movable effect. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the pending image 702, the number-of-executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining-number-of-reaches image 708 are difficult or invisible to the player. On the other hand, the pending number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be easily visible to the player. Also, when the jackpot notification effect is executed, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched from the second mode to the seventh mode. A seventh mode is a mode of light emission in which red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet lights up in this order as time elapses. In other words, the seventh mode is a mode of lighting in rainbow colors by switching the lighting color to seven colors as time elapses. Further, the seventh mode can also be regarded as a mode of suggesting or notifying that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights red, the board lamp 74b lights orange, the movable member lamp 74c lights yellow, and the button lamp 17c lights green. Also, when the big win notification performance is being executed, the sound output device 9 outputs the effect sound of the big win notification performance.

Next, when the jackpot notification effect is completed and the second emphasized image 718 is hidden, the double decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 171 (16). In the illustrated example, the decorative pattern 700 is displayed as a combination of "444". Also, at this time, the display size of the decorative pattern 700 is larger than the display mode during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect (see FIG. 171 (13)). On the other hand, the small pattern 704 continues the variable display state. At this time, the execution count image 705 and the remaining reach count image 708 are displayed again. On the other hand, the variable image 701 and the pending image 702 continue to be invisible or invisible to the player. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c continue to be in the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights orange, the board lamp 74b lights yellow, the movable member lamp 74c lights green, and the button lamp 17c lights blue. At this time, the background corresponding to the SPSP ready-to-win effect is displayed again on the first image display device 70 .
It should be noted that the background of the first image display device 70 when the parallel decorative pattern 700 is displayed may be the background corresponding to the stage during stay, that is, the background corresponding to the first stage.

Further, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 while the double decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, "4" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the pending image 702 continues to be invisible or invisible to the player. Also, the winning sound is not output.

Then, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 700 is fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 171 (17). Also, "444" as the small symbol 704 is determined and stopped. In other words, the display of the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are matched with the combination of "444". Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "351 GAME". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of arrivals image 708 is updated to "149 more". At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c continue to be in the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights yellow, the board lamp 74b lights green, the movable member lamp 74c lights blue, and the button lamp 17c lights blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 171(18), an opening image 719 is displayed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all change from the seventh mode to the second mode. Also, although not shown, BGM corresponding to the progress of the jackpot game is output from the audio output device 9 during execution of the jackpot game.
Next, as shown in FIG. 172(19), the first right shot image 720 and the promotion image 721 are displayed. Also, the display time of the promotion image 721 is, for example, 5 seconds.

Then, when a predetermined time has passed since the promotion image 721 was displayed, an in-round image 722 and a number-of-rounds image 723 are displayed as shown in FIG. 172(20). In the illustrated example, the text “Round 1” is displayed in the round number image 723 .
Next, when the final round ends, a normal working hours selection image 745 is displayed as shown in FIG. 172(21). In the illustrated example, in the normal time saving selection image 745, the cursor is placed on the "A" mode.
Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the normal working hour selection image 745 is displayed, a normal working hour saving start image 724 is displayed as shown in FIG. 172 (22). Also, at this time, a card caution image 739 and a game caution image 740 are displayed.

Next, when the game machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. be stopped. Incidentally, the decorative pattern 700 displayed at this time corresponds to the row of numbers finally fixed and stopped before the jackpot game is executed, that is, when the jackpot is won. And the small pattern 704 is fixed and stopped by the row of numbers "444" like the decorative pattern 700. - 特許庁Also, at this time, a background corresponding to the third stage is shown as a stage image 706 . The third stage is a stage corresponding to the normal time-saving gaming state. Also, at this time, the second right shot image 725 and the normal time saving remaining number image 726 are displayed. In the illustrated example, as the normal time saving remaining number image 726, the text "100 times" indicating the remaining number of times of the special symbol lottery in the normal time saving game state is displayed. In addition, "4" is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the first start port 45, and "0" is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the second start port 47. FIG. Neither the moving image 701 nor the pending image 702 is displayed. It should be noted that the time from when the double decorative pattern 700 is displayed (see FIG. 171 (16)) to when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state is, for example, 150 seconds.

As described above, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while the double decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode cannot be visually recognized by the player. In this case, by making the change in the display mode from the incomplete display mode of the pending image 702 to a state that is difficult or invisible to the player, the pending image is 702 is prevented from attracting excessive attention to the player, and the player can be made aware that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
In addition, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 while the double decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, the winning sound is not output. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45 and not paying attention to the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
However, even if the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 while the double decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, the staged display effect is executed, and the reserved image 702 of each stage is displayed to the player. It may be visible or easily visible. Moreover, even when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 while the double decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, the winning sound may be output.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a suggestive effect (display of the number of times of execution image 705, display of remaining number of times reached image 708, display of countdown image 732 described later) that suggests when a special time-saving gaming state may occur is executed. It is possible, and during the predetermined loss fluctuation production (loss without reach), there is an execution period in which the suggestion production is executed, but there is no non-execution period in which the suggestion production is not executed, and during the jackpot fluctuation production, the suggestion production is executed. There is an execution period (before the SP ready-to-win effect) and a non-executing period (during the SP ready-to-win effect, during the SPSP ready-to-win effect) during which the suggestive effect is not executed. Therefore, while expecting that a special time-saving game state will occur due to the suggestive performance, there is a non-execution period in which the suggestive performance is not executed during the jackpot variable performance, so that the player can concentrate on the variable performance. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect (display of the number of times of execution image 705, display of remaining number of times reached image 708, display of countdown image 732 described later) that suggests when a special time-saving gaming state may occur. During one reach variation performance (reach performance), there is an execution period in which the suggestive performance is executed, but there is no non-execution period in which the suggestive performance is not executed, and the second reach variation performance with higher expectations than the first reach variation performance. During (SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect), there are an execution period (before SP ready-to-win effect) in which suggestive effect is executed and a non-executing period (during SP effect, during SPSP ready-to-win effect) in which suggestive effect is not executed. Therefore, while expecting that a special time-saving gaming state will occur due to the suggestion performance, there is a non-execution period in which the suggestion performance is not executed during the second reach variation performance, which has a higher expectation than the first reach variation performance. The player's consciousness can be concentrated on the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, during the jackpot variable effect in which the suggestive effect is executed, a period in which the suggestive effect is not executed can occur multiple times (during the development effect, during the SPSP ready-to-win effect, etc.). In addition, during the jackpot variation effect in which the suggestive effect is executed, the period in which the suggestive effect is executed can occur a plurality of times (before the SP ready-to-win effect, after the temporary stop of the second decorative pattern 700, etc.).

In addition, during the loss fluctuation effect with specific reach in which the suggestive effect is executed, a period in which the suggestive effect is not executed can occur multiple times (during the development effect, during the SPSP reach, etc.). In addition, during the specific ready-to-win fluctuation effect in which the suggestive effect is executed, the period in which the suggestive effect is executed can occur multiple times (before the ready-to-win effect, after the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 700, etc.).

It should be noted that the display of the execution count image 705 and the reach remaining count image 708 may be continued even during execution of the development effect, the SP ready-to-win effect, and the SPSP ready-to-win effect. Even in this case, the pending image 702 is hidden during execution of the development effect, the SP ready-to-win effect, and the SPSP ready-to-win effect. That is, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect (display of the number of times of execution image 705, display of remaining number of times reached image 708, display of countdown image 732 described later, etc.) that suggests when a special time-saving gaming state may occur, During the specific performance (advancement performance, SP/SPSP ready-to-win, etc.) that expects the execution of the jackpot game, the pending icon is not displayed, but the b hour-saving suggestive performance can be continuously executed. In this case, while expecting that the special time-saving game state occurs due to the suggestive effect, it is possible to make the user aware of the occurrence of the special time-saving game state even during the specific effect, even if the specific effect is executed and it is out. Even if there is, the dissatisfaction of the player can be reduced, and the interest in the game can be improved.
Also, the suggestive effect is executed before a predetermined period of time (before predetermined fluctuation) when the special time-saving gaming state occurs. In addition, there are a plurality of types of suggestive effects.

In addition, in the case of the normal time-saving gaming state, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect (display of the normal time-saving start image 724) that confirms that the normal time-saving gaming state will be established in advance.

(Variation production example 6)
FIG. 173 and FIG. 174 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 6) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174. FIG. Variation production example 6 is an example of variation production of the decorative design 700 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 47 in the normal time-saving game state. In addition, the variation production example 6 is a variation production example in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the ready-to-win production is not executed. In addition, in the following explanation, points different from the examples of variable production described above will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as those of the examples of variable production may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 173(1), with the end of the variation of the previous special symbol, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 with low decorativeness are displayed on the first image display device 70 by the effect symbol 130m. has been permanently stopped. Moreover, at this time, the execution frequency image 705, the stage image 706, the 2nd hitting right image 725, and the normal time saving remaining frequency image 726 are displayed. In addition, "0" is shown in the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45, and "0" is shown in the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47. FIG. Also, as a stage image 706, a background corresponding to the third stage is displayed. In addition, the execution count image 705 shows the text “10 GAME”, and the normal time saving remaining count image 726 shows the text “90 times”.
Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all of the first mode. Also, although illustration is omitted, from the audio output device 9, BGM corresponding to the previous variation effect is continuously output.

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 47, as shown in FIG. 173(2), the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special design. At this time, the operation at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is variably displayed at high speed. Also, at this time, the display content of the normal time saving remaining number of times image 726 is updated to "89 times". Also, at this time, “1” is displayed in the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 . Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the second starting port 47, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 for notifying the winning of the second starting port 47 is started. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the first mode to the second mode.

In addition, in the normal time-saving game state, the operation at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 may not be performed. That is, in the normal time-saving gaming state, the decorative pattern 700 may be variably displayed at high speed as soon as the variability starts.
Also, the winning sound for notifying the winning to the second starting port 47 may be the same as the winning sound for notifying the winning to the first starting port 45, or may be a different sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173(3), the fluctuation start operation proceeds. Also, at this time, the staged display effect is completed, and the triangular pending image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 173(2). Also, the display mode of this pending image 702 is a display mode according to the third stage. Also, the winning sound for notifying the winning to the second starting port 47 is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and is not output when the staged display effect is completed. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173(4), the movement at the time of start of fluctuation ends, and the fluctuation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. Further, the variable image 701 is displayed by enlarging the suspended image 702 while moving to the variable pedestal 701P. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 is switched to "0".

Next, when the game ball wins the second starting hole 47, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the second starting hole 47 as shown in FIG. 173(5). Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the second starting port 47, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173(6), the staged display effects are completed, and the triangular pending image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 173(5). Also, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 174(7), three decorative patterns 700 and "412", which is a small pattern 704, are displayed together and the game is fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "11GAME".

As described above, in the present embodiment, a suggestive effect (display of the number of times of execution image 705, display of remaining number of times reached 708, display of countdown image 732 described later, etc.) ) can be executed, and during the variable effect executed in the normal game state, an execution period (before the SP reach effect) in which the suggested effect is executed and a non-execution period in which the suggested effect is not executed (during the SP effect, SP SP reach during production, etc.), and during the variable production executed in the specific game state (time-saving game state), there is no execution period in which the suggested production is executed, but there is a non-execution period in which the suggested production is not executed. Therefore, while expecting that the special time-saving game state will occur by the suggestive performance, the suggestive performance is not executed in the specific game state, so that the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the performance in the specific game state, and the interest of the game. can be improved.

(Step-by-step display effect by triangular pending image 702 in normal display mode)
Next, a description will be given of the staged display effect by the triangular pending image 702 in the normal display mode. FIG. 175 is a diagram showing an example of a staged display effect using a triangular pending image 702 in the normal display mode.
The triangular pending image 702 in the normal display mode performs four stages of presentation as the staged display presentation. When a game ball wins in the second starting hole 47, first, as shown in FIG. 175(1), as the first stage of the staged display effect, a pending image 702 with high transparency is displayed in white. This reserved image 702 is in the shape of a triangle with the upper part missing. Further, the holding image 702 is displayed on the holding pedestal 702P at its upper portion and below the holding pedestal 702P at its lower portion. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the first stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIGS. 173(2) and 173(5).

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(2), as the second stage of the staged display rendering, a pending image 702 having a lower transparency than that of the first stage is displayed. This reserved image 702 has a triangular shape. Also, this pending image 702 has a larger display size than the first stage and is displayed higher than the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 175(3), as the third stage of the staged display rendering, a pending image 702 having a lower transparency than that of the second stage is displayed. This pending image 702 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the second stage, and is displayed higher than that of the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(4), as the fourth stage of the staged display rendering, that is, the final stage, a pending image 702 having a lower transparency than that of the third stage is displayed. This pending image 702 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the third stage. Also, this pending image 702 is displayed entirely on the pending pedestal 702P. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIGS. 173(3) and 173(6). That is, although illustration is omitted, after the hold image 702 in the first stage shown in FIGS. 173(2) and 173(5) is displayed, the hold image 702 in the second stage of the staged display effect is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the third stage of the staged display effect is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIGS. 173(3) and 173(6) is displayed.
In the present embodiment, the time from the start of the staged display effect to the display of the pending image 702 in the completed display mode, that is, the execution time of the staged display effect by the suspended image 702 in the triangular normal display mode is 0. .2 seconds.

Further, when the staged display effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 175(5), the action effect of the pending image 702 is started. The triangular pending image 702 in the normal display mode periodically performs an action of moving up and down as an action effect. The period of vertical movement in this action rendering is, for example, 2.0 seconds. That is, the cycle of the action effect by the normal display mode of the pending image 702 in the normal time saving game state is the same cycle as the cycle of the action effect by the normal display mode of the pending image 702 in the normal game state.

(Variation production example 7)
FIGS. 176 to 181 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 7) of the variation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 181. FIG. In the variation production example 7, the variation production based on the winning to the second start port 47 in the normal game state, the variation production based on the winning to the second start port 47 in the normal game state, and the first in the normal game state A variable effect based on the winning to the starting port 45 is included. In addition, in variation production example 7, the variation production is performed six times. The first variable performance of the six times of variable performance is a variable performance based on winning to the second start port 47 in the normal time-saving game state. In addition, the second to fourth variable performances of the six variable performances are variable performances based on the winning of the second starting port 47 in the normal game state. Furthermore, the fifth and sixth variable effects of the six variable effects are variable effects based on the winning of the first start port 45 in the normal game state.
In addition, in the following description, points different from the above-described variable effect examples will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the variable effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 176(1), when the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 are confirmed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the effect control section 130m. It is Also, at this time, four pending images 702, an execution count image 705, a stage image 706, a second right shot image 725, and a normal time saving remaining count image 726 are displayed. In addition, "4" is shown in the number-of-holds display 703 of the second starting port 47. As shown in FIG. Also, a background corresponding to the fourth stage is shown as a stage image 706 . The fourth stage is a stage corresponding to the normal time-saving gaming state, and is a stage different from the third stage. A 4th stage is a stage set when the mode of "B" is selected in normal time saving selection image 745 (refer FIG. 172 (21)). The display mode of the four pending images 702 is a display mode according to the fourth stage, and is the same display mode as the pending image 702 in the normal display mode displayed in the third stage. In addition, the execution count image 705 shows the text “99 GAME”, and the normal time saving remaining number image 726 shows the text “1 time”. Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all of the second mode. Also, although illustration is omitted, from the audio output device 9, BGM corresponding to the previous variation effect is continuously output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(2), the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In addition, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 is switched to "3".
Next, as shown in FIG. 176(3), "4" which is the left decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 176(4), "4" which is the right decorative symbol 700 is temporarily stopped, and ready-to-win effect is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(5), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. That is, in the normal time-saving game state, the SP ready-to-win effect is executed without executing the development effect. During execution of the SP reach effect, an SP reach image 712 is displayed. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays a background corresponding to the SP ready-to-win effect, which is different from the background during execution of the SP ready-to-win effect in the normal game state.
In addition, even in the normal time-saving game state, the SP ready-to-win effect may be executed after the development effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(6), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. An SPSP ready-to-win image 713 is displayed during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays a background corresponding to the SPSP ready-to-win effect, which is different from the background during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect in the normal game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(7), the promotion effect is executed and the button operation image 714 is displayed.
When the player operates the effect button 17 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, the number "5", which is the middle decorative pattern 700, is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 177(8).

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(9), a switching image 727 is displayed. In addition, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the pending image 702, the number of times of execution image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of normal time reduction image 726 are difficult or invisible to the player. . On the other hand, the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, and the second right shot image 725 continue to be easily visible to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(10), when the switching image 727 is hidden, the temporary stop display of "454", which is the three decorative symbols 700, is easily visible to the player. . In addition, the fluctuation image 701, the pending image 702, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the normal time saving remaining count image 726 are easily visible to the player.
Then, along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 177 (11), the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "454" are fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the variable image 701 is hidden. Also, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "100 GAME". In addition, the game state of the game machine 1 is controlled to the normal game state along with the stoppage of the fluctuation of the special symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(12), a first transitional image 728 is displayed. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the pending image 702, the number-of-executions image 705, and the stage image 706 are difficult or invisible to the player. On the other hand, the pending number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be easily visible to the player. In addition, the second right shot image 725 and the normal time saving remaining number image 726 are not displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 178(13), a result image 729 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (14), the variation of the small symbol 704 is started along with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. This variation is variation based on the winning to the second starting port 47 in the normal game state. Also, in this variation, the decorative pattern 700 is not displayed. That is, in this variation, a variation effect using the small symbols 704 is performed without using the decorative symbols 700 . Also, in this variation, the variation image 701 and the pending image 702 are not displayed. In addition, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 is switched to "2".
Next, as the fluctuation of the special symbols stops, as shown in FIG. 178(15), "721" which is three small symbols 704 are displayed together and fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (16), the variation of the small symbol 704 is started along with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Also, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 is switched to "1".
Next, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 178 (17), three small symbols 704 are displayed together and fixed and stopped. The combination "658" of the small symbols 704 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (18), the variation of the small symbol 704 is started along with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Also, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 is switched to "0".
Next, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 179 (19), the three small symbols 704 of "421" are displayed together and fixed and stopped.

Then, when the variable effect based on the winning to the second starting port 47 is completed in a state where there is no suspension based on the winning to the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. 179 (20), the first image display device 70 , "421", which is a highly decorative decorative pattern 700, is determined and stopped. That is, the combination of decorative patterns 700 and the combination of small patterns 704 match. Also, at this time, the background corresponding to the fifth stage is shown as the stage image 706 . The fifth stage is a stage corresponding to the normal game state, and is a stage different from any of the first to fourth stages. Also, at this time, an execution count image 705 and a left-handed image 730 are displayed. The number-of-executions image 705 shows the text "100 GAME" including the number of times of the variable performance newly performed after the number of times of variable display of the special symbol was reset. At this time, the number shown in the number-of-executions image 705 is the number of variable performances performed after the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the second mode to the first mode. Also, at this time, the voice output device 9 outputs a voice saying "Please return to left-handed hitting".

Then, when a predetermined period of time elapses without winning the first starting port 45, an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed as shown in FIG. 179(21). Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the first mode to the fifth mode.

Next, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 179 (22), the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special design. At this time, the operation at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is variably displayed at high speed. Also, at this time, “1” is displayed in the number-of-holds display 703 of the first starting port 45 . Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above the first reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the fifth mode to the second mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (23), the operation at the start of fluctuation proceeds. Also, at this time, the staged display effects are completed, and the square pending image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 179(22). Also, this reserved image 702 is in a display mode according to the fifth stage. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Also, the prize winning sound is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (24), the movement at the time of start of fluctuation ends, and the fluctuation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. Further, the variable image 701 is displayed by enlarging the suspended image 702 while moving to the variable pedestal 701P. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "0". Also, although illustration is omitted, BGM corresponding to the variable effect being executed is continuously output from the audio output device 9 while the variable effect is being executed.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 180 (25). Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position away from the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (26), the staged display effect is completed, and the suspended image 702 is normally displayed on the first suspended pedestal 702P in a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 180 (25). displayed according to the mode. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Also, the prize winning sound is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output.

Next, after the three decorative symbols 700 are temporarily stopped, the three decorative symbols 700 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 180 (27) as the special symbols stop changing. The combination "712" of the decorative symbols 700 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols, three of the small symbols 704 "712" are also fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "101 GAME". Also, at this time, a remaining number of arrivals image 708 is displayed. Remaining number of arrivals image 708 shows the text "399 left".

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (28), the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "0".
Next, as shown in FIG. 180(29), a second eye-catching image 731 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variation image 701, the number-of-executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining-number-of-reaches image 708 are difficult or invisible to the player. On the other hand, the pending number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45. - 特許庁On the other hand, the pending image 702 continues to be invisible or invisible to the player. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the sound output device 9 outputs a winning sound for notifying the first starting hole 45 of winning. Also, at this time, the sound output device 9 outputs a sound effect indicating that the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed. That is, the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound and the effect sound at the same time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (30), the second eye-catching image 731 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700, the variation image 701, the number-of-executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining-number-of-reaches image 708 are displayed. It will be in a state where it can be easily visually recognized by a person. A background corresponding to the first stage is shown as the stage image 706 . Also, at this time, the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode. That is, the pending image 702 at each stage in the staged display effect is not visible to the player, and the pending image 702 in the completed display mode is easily visible to the player.

Next, after the three decorative patterns 700 are temporarily stopped, the three decorative patterns 700 and "412", which is the small pattern 704, are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. . Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "102 games", and the display content of the remaining reach count image 708 is updated to "398 more".

As described above, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 while the second eye-catching image 731 is being displayed, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode does not become visible to the player. , the pending image 702 in the completed display mode is easily visible to the player. In this way, by preventing the player from visually recognizing the change in the display mode of the pending image 702 from the unfinished display mode, the pending image 702 may cause excessive attention to the player when the second eyecatch image 731 is displayed. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the fact that the stage is switched.
Also, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 while the second eye-catching image 731 is being displayed, a winning sound for notifying the winning in the first starting port 45 is output. Therefore, even if the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode is not visible to the player, the player can be made to recognize that the game ball has entered the first start hole 45 .

In the normal time-saving gaming state, when the pending image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode, the display mode of the pending image 702 is the same regardless of the stage, but it is not limited to this. Even in the normal time-saving gaming state, when the pending image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode, the display mode of the pending image 702 may differ for each stage.

(Step-by-step display effect by square-shaped pending image 702 in normal display mode)
Next, the staged display effect by the square-shaped pending image 702 in the normal display mode will be described. FIG. 182 is a diagram showing an example of a staged display effect using a square pending image 702 in the normal display mode.
The square pending image 702 in the normal display mode performs three stages of presentation as the staged display presentation. When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 45, first, as shown in FIG. 182(1), as the first stage of the staged display effect, a pending image 702 with high transparency is displayed in white. This reserved image 702 has a rectangular shape extending left and right. In addition, this pending image 702 is displayed at a position above the pending pedestal 702P. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the first stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIGS. 179(22) and 180(25).

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(2), as the second stage of the staged display rendering, a square pending image 702 having a lower transparency than that of the first stage is displayed in a square shape. This pending image 702 has a display size larger than that of the first stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P than that of the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 182(3), as the third stage of the staged display rendering, that is, as the final stage, a pending image 702 having a lower transparency than that of the second stage is displayed. This pending image 702 has a display size larger than that of the second stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P than that of the second stage. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIGS. 179(23) and 180(26). That is, although illustration is omitted, after the hold image 702 in the first stage shown in FIGS. 179(22) and 180(25) is displayed, the hold image 702 in the second stage of the staged display effect is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the third stage of the staged display effect is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIGS. 179(23) and 180(26) is displayed.
In the present embodiment, the time from the start of the staged display effect to the display of the pending image 702 in the completed display mode, that is, the execution time of the staged display effect by the suspended image 702 in the normal square display mode is 0. .2 seconds.

Further, when the step display effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 182(4), the action effect of the pending image 702 is started. The square-shaped pending image 702 in the normal display mode periodically rotates half clockwise and then half counterclockwise as an action rendering. The period of rotation in this motion presentation is, for example, 2.0 seconds.

(Variation production example 8)
FIGS. 183 to 185 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 8) of the variation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 185. FIG. Variation production example 8 is a variation production example of the decorative design 700 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 47 in the normal time-saving game state. In addition, variation production example 8 includes four fluctuation productions. Of the four variable performances, the first to third variable performances are variable performances in which the lottery results of the special symbol lottery are lost. In addition, the fourth variable performance among the four variable performances is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
In addition, in the following description, points different from the above-described variable effect examples will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the variable effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 183(1), when the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 are confirmed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the effect control unit 130m. It is Also, at this time, three pending images 702 are displayed in the normal display mode. Also, at this time, "3" is shown in the number of pending display 703 of the second starting port 47. As shown in FIG. Moreover, the text of "50 GAME" is shown in the execution frequency image 705, and the text of "50 times" is shown in the normal time saving remaining frequency image 726. FIG. Also, a background corresponding to the fourth stage is shown as a stage image 706 . Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all of the second mode. Also, although illustration is omitted, from the audio output device 9, BGM corresponding to the previous variation effect is continuously output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(2), the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In addition, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 is switched to "2". Also, at this time, the display content of the normal time saving remaining number image 726 is updated to "49 times".

Next, as the game ball enters the second starting port 47, "3" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. 183(3). Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed on the third pending pedestal 702P. This third reserved image 702 shows a triangular portion and a lightning bolt mark. Also, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 for notifying the winning to the second starting port 47 is started. This prize-winning sound is different from any of the above-described prize-winning sounds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(4), the staged display effects are completed, and the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed on the third pending pedestal 702P. The third reserved image 702 is composed of a triangular portion displayed in rainbow colors and a circular portion surrounding the triangular shape. It should be noted that this third pending image 702 is the pending image 702 displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the action effect of the third pending image 702 is started. Also, the winning sound for notifying the winning to the second starting port 47 is not output after a predetermined time has passed since the staged display effects are completed. This predetermined time is, for example, 2.5 seconds.

Next, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 183(5), three decorative symbols 700 and "412", which is the small symbol 704, are displayed together and fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "51 GAME". Although illustration is omitted, BGM corresponding to the variable effect being executed is output from the audio output device 9 during execution of the variable effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(6), the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started along with the start of the next special design. In addition, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 is switched to "2". In addition, the display content of the normal time saving remaining number of times image 726 is updated to "48 times".
Next, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 184(7), the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 "721" are displayed together, and the game is fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "52 GAME".

Next, as shown in FIG. 184(8), the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 is switched to "1". In addition, the display content of the normal time saving remaining number of times image 726 is updated to "47 times".
Next, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 184(9), three decorative symbols 700 and "563", which is the small symbol 704, are displayed together and fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "53 GAME".

Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (10), the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 is switched to "0". In addition, the display content of the normal time saving remaining number of times image 726 is updated to "46 times". In addition, the rainbow-colored variable image 701 is displayed by the first reserved image 702 moving toward the variable base 701P and being enlarged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184(11), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win production is a production to incite whether or not the ready-to-win production is to be executed. In the illustrated example, after the left decorative symbol 700 "7" is temporarily stopped, the right decorative symbol 700 "7" is swung up and down to incite whether or not the ready-to-win effect is to be executed. is being done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (12), "7" which is the right decorative symbol 700 is temporarily stopped, and ready-to-win effect is started. At this time, the voice output device 9 outputs a sound effect indicating that the left and right decorative patterns 700 "7" are aligned.

Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (13), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. During execution of the SP reach effect, an SP reach image 712 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (14), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. An SPSP ready-to-win image 713 is displayed during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (15), the promotion effect is executed and the button operation image 714 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 17 while the button operation image 714 is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 185 (16), a big hit notification effect is executed. During execution of this jackpot notification, a movable effect is executed and a second emphasized image 718 is displayed. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the pending image 702, the execution number image 705, the stage image 706, and the normal time reduction remaining number image 726 continue to be invisible or invisible to the player. do. In addition, the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, and the second right shot image 725 continue to be easily visible to the player. Also, when the jackpot notification effect is executed, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second mode to the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights red, the board lamp 74b lights orange, the movable member lamp 74c lights yellow, and the button lamp 17c lights green. Also, when the big win notification performance is being executed, the sound output device 9 outputs the effect sound of the big win notification performance.

Next, when the jackpot notification effect is completed and the second emphasized image 718 is hidden, as shown in (17) of FIG. Moreover, at this time, the execution frequency image 705 and the normal time saving remaining frequency image 726 are displayed again. At this time, the top lamp 10b lights orange, the board lamp 74b lights yellow, the movable member lamp 74c lights green, and the button lamp 17c lights blue.

Then, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 700 is fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 185 (18). Also, "777" as the small symbol 704 is determined and stopped. That is, the display of the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are matched with the combination of "777". Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "54 GAME". At this time, the top lamp 10b lights yellow, the board lamp 74b lights green, the movable member lamp 74c lights blue, and the button lamp 17c lights blue.

Further, although illustration is omitted, after this, a jackpot game is executed in the same manner as in the variable effect example 6. FIG. That is, after the opening image 719 (see FIG. 171 (18)) is displayed, the first right-handed image 720 and the promotion image 721 (see FIG. 172 (19)) are displayed. In addition, after the lapse of a predetermined time, during the round image 722 and round number image 723 (see FIG. 172 (20)) are displayed, and when the final round is completed, normal time saving selection image 745 (see FIG. 172 (21)) is displayed, the normal time saving start image 724 (see FIG. 172 (22)) is displayed. In addition, the number of remaining times of the special symbol lottery in the normal time-saving game state is 100 (see FIG. 172 (23)).

(Step-by-step display effect by rainbow-colored reserved image 702)
Next, the staged display effect by the rainbow-colored reserved image 702 will be described. FIG. 186 is a diagram showing a staged display effect by a rainbow-colored pending image 702. FIG.
The rainbow-colored pending image 702 performs four stages of presentation as the staged display presentation. When the game ball wins in the second starting port 47, first, as shown in FIG. 186 (1), as the first stage of the staged display effect, the pending image 702 with low transparency is displayed in white on the pending base 702P. . This reserved image 702 is triangular. Also, in the first stage of the staged display effect, an action display using the pending image 702 is performed. More specifically, an operation display is performed so that a lightning bolt mark falls on a triangular portion of the pending image 702 . The display mode of the pending image 702 in the first stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the third pending image 702 shown in FIG. 183(3).

Next, as shown in FIG. 186(2), as the second stage of the staged display rendering, a highly transparent circular image is newly displayed as the reserved image 702 . This circular image is shown surrounding a triangular portion of the retained image 702 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 186(3), as the third stage of the staged display effect, the circular image in the pending image 702 is displayed with a lower transparency than in the second stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 186(4), as the fourth stage of the staged display effects, that is, the final stage, the circular image in the pending image 702 is displayed with a lower transparency than in the third stage. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effects is the display mode of the third pending image 702 shown in FIG. 183(4). That is, although illustration is omitted, after the suspended image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. A pending image 702 in the third stage of rendering is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 183(4) is displayed.
In this way, the transparency of only a portion of the pending image 702 may change as the stage in the staged display effect progresses. Such a change in the transparency of only part of the reserved image 702 is also perceived as a change in the form of the reserved image 702 . In the present embodiment, the time from the start of this staged display effect to the completion display mode, that is, the execution time of the staged display effect by the rainbow-colored pending image 702 is 0.5 seconds.

Further, when the staged display effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 186(5), the action effect of the pending image 702 is started. The rainbow-colored pending image 702 periodically rotates clockwise as an action effect. The period of rotation in this motion presentation is, for example, 3.0 seconds. That is, the cycle of the action rendering by the rainbow-colored pending image 702 is longer than the cycle of the action rendering by the pending image 702 in the normal display mode.
Note that, in the action rendering by the rainbow-colored pending image 702, the triangular portion may periodically rotate clockwise and the circular portion may periodically rotate counterclockwise. In this case, the period of each operation may be the same period or may be different periods.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the staged display effect by the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is longer than the execution time of the staged display effect by the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. In this case, by making the player experience the expectation of the display of the pending image 702 with a higher expectation than in the normal display mode for a longer period of time, the player can experience an uplifting feeling when the pending image 702 with a high expectation is displayed. can be given to the player.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that the display mode of the pending image 702 in the normal display mode differs depending on the stage. Here, the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode may also have different display modes depending on the stage, like the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. On the other hand, the rainbow-colored pending image 702 may be displayed in the same manner regardless of the stage. In this case, the staged display effect by the rainbow-colored pending image 702 can be performed either in the staged display effect by the normal display mode pending image 702 in each stage or in the stepped display effect by the blue pending image 702 in each stage. There may be an action indication that is not displayed (see FIG. 186(1)). In this case, the staged display effects allow the rainbow-colored reserved image 702 to make the player feel the rarity more strongly.
In addition, the rainbow-colored pending image 702 has a higher display mode in the staged display effect than the held image 702 in the normal display mode and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode consisting of specific colors (blue, green, red, etc.). There may be many varying stages.

(Variation production example 9)
FIGS. 187 to 192 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation production example 9) of the variation production will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 192. FIG. Variation production example 9 includes seven variation productions. The first variable performance among the seven variable performances is a variable performance based on the winning of the first start port 45 in the normal game state. Also, the second variable performance is a variable performance based on the winning to the first start port 45 in the special time-saving gaming state. Also, the third and fourth variable performances are variable performances based on the winning of the second starting port 47 in the special time-saving gaming state. Also, the fifth to seventh variable performances are variable performances based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 47 in the normal game state.
In addition, in the following description, points different from the above-described variable effect examples will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the variable effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 187(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are confirmed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the production control section 130m following the completion of the variation of the previous special pattern. ing. Also, at this time, four pending images 702 are displayed. Also, at this time, "4" is shown in the number-of-holds display 703 of the first starting port 45. As shown in FIG. Further, the execution count image 705 shows the text "499 GAME", and the remaining reach count image 708 shows the text "1 more". Also, a background corresponding to the first stage is shown as a stage image 706 . Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all of the second mode. Also, although illustration is omitted, from the audio output device 9, BGM corresponding to the previous variation effect is continuously output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(2), the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started with the start of the next special design. In addition, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "3". Also, at this time, "1", which is the countdown image 732, is displayed.

Next, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 187(3), three decorative symbols 700 and "421", which is the small symbol 704, are displayed together and fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the display content of the number of times of execution image 705 is updated to "500 games", and the display content of the remaining number of times to reach image 708 is updated to "0". That is, the number of times of the executed variable performance reaches the number of times of the variable performance required until the special time-saving gaming state is reached. As a result, the game state of the gaming machine 1, which was the normal game state, is controlled to the special time-saving game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(4), the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In addition, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "2". Also, at this time, the second hitting image 725 is displayed. Also, at this time, "0", which is the countdown image 732, is displayed.

Next, as the game ball wins the first starting hole 45, "3" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 187(5). Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position away from the third pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 187(6), the staged display effects are completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the complete display mode on the third pending pedestal 702P. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Also, the prize winning sound is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(7), a special time saving start image 733 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 188(8), display of the second transitional image 734 is started. More specifically, the second transitional image 734 is displayed so as to slide from the right side to the left side of the first image display device 70 , so that a part of the display area of the first image display device 70 displays the second transition image 734 . 2 transition image 734 will be displayed. Also, at this time, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the second transition image 734 is not displayed, the left decorative pattern 700, the third pending image 702, the number of times of execution image 705, and the remaining number-of-reaches image 708 continues to be visible or easily visible to the player. In addition, the second pending image 702 and the stage image 706 are visible or easily visible to the player in a portion that does not overlap with the second transition image 734, and a portion that overlaps with the second transition image 734 is a game image. becomes invisible or invisible to a person. Also, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, the first reserved image 702, and the variable image 701 are in a state of being difficult or invisible to the player. In addition, in the area where the second transition image 734 is displayed in the first image display device 70, the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, and the second right-handed image 725 are easily visible to the player. continue to be Also, at this time, the action effect by the second reserved image 702 and the third reserved image 702 is being executed, and the action display of the second reserved image 702 and the third reserved image 702 is given to the player. Visible or easily visible. It should be noted that the time from the start of the variable effect to the display of the second transitional image 734 is, for example, 5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(9), the second transitional image 734 is displayed on the entire first image display device 70 . At this time, the left decorative pattern 700, the third reserved image 702, the second reserved image 702, the execution count image 705, and the remaining reach count image 708 are also difficult or invisible to the player. . Further, at this time, "4" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45 as the game ball wins the first starting port 45. - 特許庁On the other hand, the fourth pending image 702 is in a state of being invisible or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, the winning sound for informing the winning to the first starting port 45 is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (10), a special time saving selection image 735 is displayed. In the example of illustration, in the special time saving selection image 735, the cursor is united with the mode of "a".
Next, as shown in FIG. 188(11), a mode start image 736 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(12), the second transition image 734 and the mode start image 736 are hidden, and the first image display device 70 displays "125" which is the decorative design 700 with low decorativeness. is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, the background corresponding to the sixth stage is shown as the stage image 706 . The sixth stage is a stage corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state. In addition, at this time, the third right shot image 737 and the special time saving remaining number image 738 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the special time saving remaining number image 738 shows the text of "749" indicating the remaining number of special symbol lottery in the special time saving game state. In addition, "4" is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the first start port 45, and "0" is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the second start port 47. FIG. Neither the moving image 701 nor the pending image 702 is displayed. Also, at this time, the sound output device 9 may output a sound that prompts the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a, such as "Please hit to the right."
Also, the display period of the second transitional image 734 is, for example, 10 seconds.

Next, as the special symbols stop changing, as shown in FIG. 189 (13), the three decorative symbols 700 are fixed and stopped. The combination “125” of the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is lost.

Next, when the game ball wins the second starting hole 47, as shown in FIG. 189 (14), the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special design. At this time, the operation at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is variably displayed at high speed. Moreover, the display content of the special time saving remaining frequency|count image 738 is updated by "748" at this time. Also, at this time, “1” is displayed in the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 . Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above the first reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the second starting port 47, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 for notifying the winning of the second starting port 47 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189(15), the operation at the start of fluctuation proceeds. Also, at this time, the staged display effect is completed, and the trapezoidal pending image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. This pending image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 189(14). Also, this reserved image 702 is in a display mode according to the sixth stage. Also, the winning sound for notifying the winning to the second starting port 47 is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and is not output when the staged display effect is completed. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (16), the operation at the time of start of fluctuation ends, and the fluctuation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. Further, the variable image 701 is displayed by enlarging the suspended image 702 while moving to the variable pedestal 701P. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 is switched to "0".

Next, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 as shown in FIG. 189 (17). Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position above the first reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the second starting port 47, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189(18), the staged display effects are completed, and the trapezoidal pending image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. This reserved image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 189(17). Also, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started.

Next, along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 190 (19), the three decorative symbols 700 and "463" which are the small symbols 704 are displayed together and fixed stop.
In this way, each time the variable effect is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, the remaining number of special symbol lottery in the special time-saving gaming state is reduced, and the value shown in the special time-saving remaining number image 738 is subtracted by one. be.

Then, when the 750th variable effect is started in the special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. Moreover, the text of "0" is shown on the special time saving remaining frequency|count image 738 at this time. In addition, "4" is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the first start port 45, and "3" is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the second start port 47. FIG. Also, at this time, a variable image 701 and three reserved images 702 are displayed. Also, the stage image 706 shows a background corresponding to the sixth stage.

Next, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 190 (21), three decorative symbols 700 and "254", which is the small symbol 704, are displayed together and fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the variable image 701 is hidden. Further, when the special symbols stop fluctuating, the game state of the gaming machine 1, which was the special time-saving game state, is controlled to the normal game state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 190(22), a first transitional image 728 is displayed. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, and the stage image 706 are difficult or invisible to the player. Moreover, the 2nd hitting-right image 725 and the special time saving remaining frequency|count image 738 become non-display. On the other hand, the pending number display 703 and the small pattern 704 continue to be easily visible to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (23), the variation of the small symbol 704 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. This variation is variation based on the winning to the second starting port 47 in the normal game state. Also, in this variation, the decorative design 700 is not displayed. That is, in this variation, a variation effect using the small symbols 704 is performed without using the decorative symbols 700 . Also, in this variation, the variation image 701 and the pending image 702 are not displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 is switched to "2". At this time, the result image 729 (see (13) in FIG. 178) is not displayed.
Next, as the fluctuation of the special symbols stops, as shown in FIG. 191 (24), three small symbols 704 are displayed together and fixed and stopped. The combination “755” of the small symbols 704 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (25), the variation of the small symbol 704 is started along with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Also, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 is switched to "1".
Next, as the fluctuation of the special symbols stops, as shown in FIG. 191 (26), three small symbols 704 are displayed together and fixed and stopped. The combination "127" of the small symbols 704 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (27), the variation of the small symbol 704 is started along with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Also, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 is switched to "0".
Next, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 191 (28), "421", which are three small symbols 704, are displayed together and fixed and stopped.

Then, when the variable effect based on the winning to the second starting port 47 ends in a state where there is no suspension based on the winning to the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. 191 (29), the first image display device 70 , "421", which is a highly decorative decorative pattern 700, is determined and stopped. That is, the combination of decorative patterns 700 and the combination of small patterns 704 match. Also, at this time, the background corresponding to the fifth stage is shown as the stage image 706 . Also, at this time, an execution count image 705 and a left-handed image 730 are displayed. The number of times of execution image 705 shows the number of times of variable performance newly performed after the number of times of variable display of the special symbol is reset, that is, the number of times of variable performance based on winning to the first start port 45 in the normal game state. A certain 500 times, 1 time which is the number of variable effects based on the winning of the first start port 45 in the special time saving game state, and the number of variable effects based on the winning of the second start port 47 in the special time saving game state The text "1253 GAME" is shown, including the total value of 749 times and 3 times, which is the number of variable effects based on the winning to the second starting port 47 in the normal game state. Also, at this time, four pending images 702 are displayed. The four pending images 702 include the three pending images 702 (see FIG. 187 (3)) displayed immediately before the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state. Also, although illustration is omitted, each of the four pending images 702 is executing an action effect. On the other hand, the variation image 701 is not displayed. Also, at this time, the voice output device 9 outputs a voice saying "Please return to left-handed hitting".

Next, with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 192 (30), the variation of the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 is started. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "3". Also, at this time, the second reserved image 702, the third reserved image 702, and the fourth reserved image 702 are respectively placed on the first reserved base 702P, the second reserved base 702P, and the third reserved base 702P. move towards. Further, the variable image 701 is displayed by expanding the first pending image 702 while moving toward the variable base 701P. Although illustration is omitted, thereafter, the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 are fixed and stopped along with the stop of the special design, and the variation image 701 is hidden.
In this way, when the gaming machine 1 in the normal game state is controlled to the special time-saving game state and then again controlled to the normal game state, the reserved image that was displayed when it was controlled to the special time-saving game state 702 (see FIG. 187(4)) is redisplayed when the normal game state is resumed.

In addition, in the variation production example 9, it was explained that the second transition image 734 is displayed during high-speed fluctuation (scrolling) of the decorative pattern 700 in the first variation production in the special time-saving game state, but it is not limited to this. For example, the second transition image 734 may be displayed when the first variation effect in the special time-saving gaming state is started. Also, the second transition image 734 may be displayed immediately before the special time-saving gaming state, that is, when the final variable effect in the normal gaming state stops. In this case, the time from when the second transition image 734 is displayed to when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is, for example, 10 seconds.

Also, in variation effect example 9, it has been described that the result image 729 (see FIG. 178 (13)) is not displayed when the first transition image 728 is being displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
A result image 729 may be displayed when the first transition image 728 is displayed even when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery does not become a big hit in the special time-saving game state and the normal game state is shifted to. .

(Stepped display effect by trapezoidal suspended image 702 in normal display mode)
Next, a description will be given of a staged display effect using the trapezoidal pending image 702 in the normal display mode. FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an example of a staged display effect using a trapezoidal pending image 702 in the normal display mode.
The trapezoidal pending image 702 in the normal display mode performs four stages of presentation as the staged display presentation. When the game ball wins in the second starting port 47, first, as shown in FIG. 702 is displayed in white. This reserved image 702 has a square shape. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the first stage of the staged display rendering is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIGS. 189(14) and 189(17).

Next, as shown in FIG. 193(2), as the second stage of the staged display rendering, a pending image 702 having a lower transparency than the second stage is displayed. This reserved image 702 is trapezoidal. Also, this pending image 702 has a display size larger than that of the first stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P than that of the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 193(3), as the third stage of the staged display rendering, a pending image 702 having a lower transparency than that of the second stage is displayed. This pending image 702 has a display size larger than that of the second stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P than that of the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 193(4), as the fourth stage of the staged display rendering, that is, the final stage, a pending image 702 having a lower transparency than that of the third stage is displayed. This pending image 702 has a display size larger than that of the third stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P compared to the third stage. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIGS. 189(15) and 189(18). That is, although illustration is omitted, after the hold image 702 in the first stage shown in FIGS. 189(14) and 189(17) is displayed, the hold image 702 in the second stage of the staged display effect is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the third stage of the staged display effect is displayed. 189(15) and 189(18) are displayed.
In the present embodiment, the time from the start of the stepped display effect to the display of the pending image 702 in the completed display mode, that is, the execution time of the stepped display effect by the suspended image 702 in the trapezoidal normal display mode is 0. .2 seconds.

Further, when the staged display effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 193(5), the action effect of the holding base 702 is started. The trapezoidal pending image 702 in the normal display mode periodically moves left and right as an action effect. The cycle of left and right movement in this action rendering is, for example, 2.0 seconds. That is, the cycle of the operation effect by the normal display mode holding image 702 in the special time saving game state, the cycle of the operation effect by the normal display mode holding image 702 in the normal time saving game state, and the normal display mode holding image in the normal game state It is the same period as the period of the action presentation by 702 .

FIG. 194 is an explanatory diagram of each effect in example 9 of variable effect.
As shown in FIG. 194, at time T1 of example 9 of variable production, the first variable production in the special time-saving gaming state is started. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 have started to change, and the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the moving image 701 and the two pending images 702 are executing an action effect, and the variable image 701 and the two pending images 702 are in a state that the player can easily recognize them. Also, at this time, the background corresponding to the first stage is shown as the stage image 706 . Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Also, at this time, BGM corresponding to the variable effect being executed is output from the audio output device 9 . The state at time T1 is the state shown in FIG. 187(4).

After that, at the time T2, a game ball enters the first starting port 45.例文帳に追加
Thereafter, at time T3, the third pending image 702 is displayed in the display mode of the first stage of the staged display effect, and the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode is visible or easily visible to the player. become. Also, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 for notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is started. The state at time T3 is the state shown in FIG. 187(5).
After that, the staged display effect by the third pending image 702 progresses, and at time T4, the staged display effect ends and the third pending image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode. Also, at this time, an action effect by the third pending image 702 is started. The state at time T4 is the state shown in FIG. 187(6).
After that, at time T5, the sound output device 9 stops outputting the winning sound for notifying the winning of the first starting port 45 .

After that, the game machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving game state, and the display of the second transition image 734 is started at time T6.
After that, when the display area of the second transition image 734 on the first display device 70 becomes larger, at time T7, the left decorative symbol 700 is visible or easily visible to the player, while the middle decorative symbol 700 and the right decorative symbol 700 are visible or easily visible to the player. The decorative pattern 700 becomes invisible or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, the variable image 701 becomes difficult or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, the third pending image 702 is visible or easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, a portion of the second pending image 702 is visible or easily visible to the player, while another portion of the second pending image 702 is visible to the player. Become difficult or invisible. Also, the first pending image 702 is in a state of being invisible or invisible to the player. At this time, a part of the stage image 706 is visible or easily visible to the player, while another part of the stage image 706 is difficult or invisible to the player. Become. The state at time T7 is the state shown in FIG. 188(8).

After that, when the second transitional image 734 is displayed on the whole of the first display device 70, at the time T8, the three decorative symbols 700 become difficult or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, the variable image 701 is hidden. Also, at this time, all of the three reserved images 702 are in a state of being difficult or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, the entire stage image 706 becomes difficult or invisible to the player. The state at time T8 is the state shown in FIG. 188(9).

After that, at time T9, when the second transition image 734 disappears, the three decorative patterns 700 are temporarily stopped, and the three decorative patterns 700 are easily visible to the player. Become. Also, a background corresponding to the sixth stage is shown as a stage image 706 . The state at time T9 is the state shown in FIG. 188(12).
After that, at the time point T10, the first variation production in the special time-saving game state is finished. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped. The state at time T10 is the state shown in FIG. 189(13).

After that, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal gaming state, at time T11, the first transition image 728 is not displayed, and the four reserved images 702 are easily visible. These four reserved images 702 include reserved images 702 that were all visually difficult or invisible at time T8. Also, at this time, the pending image 702 executes an action effect. The state at time T11 is the state shown in FIG. 191 (29).
After that, at time T12, the next variable effect is started. The state at time T12 is the state shown in FIG. 192 (30).

As described above, in this embodiment, the main control board 110 can be controlled in the first mode and the second mode different from the first mode. As the first mode, for example, there is a normal game state. Moreover, as a 2nd mode, a special time-saving game state is mentioned, for example. Then, in the present embodiment, when the first variable effect in the second mode is started while the pending image 702 is displayed, the effect control board 130 displays the operation of the pending image 702 in the first variable effect. The operation display of the decorative pattern 700 is made difficult or invisible and then easy to see. The action display of the pending image 702 includes, for example, action display in an action presentation. Further, examples of the movement display of the decorative pattern 700 include fluctuation movement and temporary stop movement display.
In this case, after the start of the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state, the performance of the pending image 702 executed before the start of the first time of the variable performance is still prevented from attracting attention of the player, and the special time-saving game state is prevented. It is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the action display of the decorative pattern 700 unique to the game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first variable effect in the second mode is started while the pending image 702 is displayed, the effect control board 130 makes it difficult to visually recognize the pending image 702 after the initial variable effect is started. Alternatively, it is possible to make it invisible and start the next variable effect after the first variable effect before making the pending image 702 easy to see.
In this case, when the variable performance next to the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state is started, the performance of the pending image 702 that has been executed until the start of the first variable performance is still focused on the player. is prevented, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the variable performance unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first variation effect in the second mode is started while the pending image 702 is displayed, the effect control board 130 makes it difficult to see the pending image 702 or The decorative pattern 700 is not made visible and then easily visible, and the decorative pattern 700 is made invisible or easily visible after being made invisible.
In this case, after the start of the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state, the performance of the pending image 702 executed before the start of the first time of the variable performance is still prevented from attracting attention of the player, and the special time-saving game state is prevented. It is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the effect using the decorative pattern 700 unique to the game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130, when the first variation effect in the second mode is started while the pending image 702 is displayed, in the first variation effect, the small pattern 704 is difficult to see or Instead of making it invisible, the pending image 702 is made invisible or invisible.
In this case, even if the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state is started, the performance of the reserved image 702 executed before the start of the first variable performance is still prevented from attracting attention of the player. On the other hand, since the small pattern 704 continues to be visually recognizable or easily recognizable, the player is informed that the variable effect continues even when the reserved image 702 becomes difficult or invisible. It is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the variable performance unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first variation effect in the second mode is started while the pending image 702 is displayed, the effect control board 130 makes it difficult to see the pending image 702 or When a special performance is executed while the reserved image 702 is displayed without making it invisible and then making it easy to see, the reserved image 702 is made invisible or invisible and then easy to see. The special effects include, for example, an SP reach effect, an SP SP reach effect, and the like.
In this case, even if the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state is started, the performance of the reserved image 702 executed before the start of the first variable performance is still prevented from attracting attention of the player. On the other hand, when the special effect is executed, a wide display area including the display area of the reserved image 702 can be used in the first image display device 70 to execute the special effect unique to the reserved image. By making 702 visible again, the player can be made to recognize that the right to judge a big win is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first variable effect in the second mode is started while the pending image 702 and the variable image 701 are being displayed, the effect control board 130 controls the suspended image 702 in the first variable effect. And when the variable image 701 is made invisible or invisible and neither is made visible and the special effect is executed while the pending image 702 and the variable image 701 are displayed, the pending image 702 and the variable image 701 are displayed. Both the suspended image 702 and the variable image 701 are made visible after being made invisible or invisible.
In this case, even if the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state is started, the performance of the reserved image 702 executed before the start of the first variable performance is still prevented from attracting attention of the player. On the other hand, when the special effect is executed, a wide display area including the display area of the variable image 701 and the pending image 702 can be used in the first image display device 70 to execute the effect unique to the special effect. At the same time, by making the pending image 702 easy to see again, the player can recognize that the right to judge the big hit is not lost, and the variable image 701 is made easy to see again. By doing so, it is possible for the player to recognize that the next variable effect is not started when the variable image 701 and the pending image 702 are in a state of being difficult or invisible. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining presentation.

In addition, when the display of the second transitional image 734 is started, the display area of the second transitional image 734 gradually increases with the passage of time. It is easily visible to the player, and another part is invisible to the player. Therefore, the stage image 706 is less likely to be hidden than in a configuration in which the second transitional image 734 is not displayed and the second transitional image 734 is displayed on the entire first image display device 70 . It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the reserved image 702 existed while suppressing the sense of discomfort.

Further, when the second transition image 734 is displayed in part of the display area of the first image display device 70, part of the one pending image 702 is visible to the player, and the one Another part of the pending image 702 is in a state in which it is invisible to the player (see FIG. 188 (8)). there is
In this case, even if only part of the pending image 702 is visible to the player, the presence of the pending image 702 can be easily recognized by the player.

Further, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 while the second transition image 734 is displayed, the pending image 702 is in a state that is difficult or invisible to the player, and the first starting port is displayed. A winning sound for notifying the winning of 45 is not output. Therefore, in the special time-saving game state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second start port 47, the player is prevented from being excessively aware that the game ball has entered the first start port 45, and the special time-saving game state It is possible to draw the player's attention to the unique presentation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect (display of the number of times of execution image 705, display of remaining number of times reached image 708, display of countdown image 732, etc.) that suggests when a special time-saving gaming state may occur. In the case of a big hit, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect (predictive effect such as display of a rainbow-colored reserved image 702 or a big hit notice effect) that determines that it will be a big hit in advance, while a special time-saving gaming state In this case, the suggestion performance (prefetching performance) that determines that the special time-saving gaming state will be established in advance (before two fluctuations or more) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the inconvenience that the special time-saving game state does not occur despite the execution of the suggestive performance for confirming that the special time-saving game state will be established, and at the same time, the game is aroused by the confirmation performance of the big win. can be improved.

In addition, it is possible to execute a specific suggestion effect (display of countdown image 732) that suggests when the special time-saving game state may occur, and the first period of the normal game state (before the start of countdown image 732 display) In , the execution probability of a suggestive effect (display of a rainbow-colored pending image 702, etc.) that confirms a big win is higher than the execution probability of a specific suggestive effect, and the second period of the normal game state (countdown image 732 display after the start of), the execution probability of a specific suggestive effect is higher than the execution probability of a suggestive effect that is determined to be a big hit. Here, ``the execution probability of a suggestive effect that confirms a big win is higher than the execution probability of a specific suggestive effect'' includes that the specific suggestive effect is not executed (0%). In addition, "the execution probability of a specific suggestive effect is higher than the execution probability of a suggestive effect that is sure to result in a big win" includes that the specific suggestive effect is always executed (100%).

In addition, in the variation production example 9, when the game machine 1 is controlled from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state, the game machine 1 is controlled from the normal time-saving game state to the normal game state. Although it has been described that it is set, it is not limited to this. When the game machine 1 is controlled from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state, it may be controlled to the first stage. That is, a plurality of performance modes can be set, and the performance mode set based on the end of the normal time-saving game state and the performance mode set based on the end of the special time-saving game state can be differentiated. In this case, by increasing the variation of presentation at the end of the time saving depending on the type of time saving, the presentation effect can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, as described above, when either one of the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state ends, the normal mode (first stage) is shifted after shifting to the dedicated mode (fifth stage) after the end.
When the game machine 1 is controlled from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state, even if it is controlled to the first stage, the left-handed image 730 is displayed at the same display position as when it is controlled to the fifth stage. may be displayed. That is, the left-handed notification when moving from either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state to the exclusive mode (fifth stage) after the end, and the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state from the other The left-handed notification when shifting to the mode (first stage) is performed in the same notification manner.
When the normal time-saving game state ends, after execution of the result display (display of the result image 729), it shifts to the special mode (fifth stage) after the end, and when the special time-saving game state ends, the result display is executed. The normal mode (first stage) is entered without
In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the normal time-saving game state ends when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times, or when the number of small hits reaches the specified number of times (including once) (shifts to the normal game state ) is possible. Here, even in the special time-saving game state, it may be terminated (shifted to the normal game state) when the number of small hits reaches a specified number of times (including once). Furthermore, when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times in the special time-saving game state, when the control is performed to the normal game state, the process moves to the fifth stage, and the number of small hits reaches the specified number of times in the special time-saving game state. When it is controlled to the normal game state based on, it may shift to the first stage. That is, the special time-saving game state end with the time-saving number of times and the special time-saving game state end with the number of small hits may shift to different production modes.

Also, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the normal time-saving game state to the normal game state, and when it is controlled from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state, the winning to the second start port 47 is reserved Although it has been described that the left shot image 730 is displayed after the end of the variation effect based on (remaining hold), the present invention is not limited to this. When the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the normal time-saving game state to the normal game state, even before the end of the variable effect based on the hold (remaining hold) for the winning of the second start port 47, the left-hand shot image 730 may be displayed. That is, when the first time saving (for example, special time saving game state) ends, a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the time saving ended (remaining hold is digested) After a predetermined left-handed notification (left-handed image 730 display, left-handed voice Notification) can be executed, and when the second time saving (normal time saving gaming state) ends, a predetermined left-handed notification (left-handed image 730 of display, left-handed voice notification) can be executed. In this case, by changing the timing of performing the left-handed notification depending on the type of time-saving, it is possible to give a change to the playability and to improve the interest of the game.
Further, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, even before the end of the variable production based on the holding (remaining holding) for the winning of the second start port 47, the left A hit image 730 may be displayed.

Further, when the game machine 1 is controlled from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, the variable performance based on the suspension (residual suspension) of the winning to the second start port 47 after being controlled to the normal game state is terminated. When the left-handed image 730 is displayed up to, the display period of the left-handed image 730 varies depending on the number of executions of the variable effect based on the suspension (remaining suspension) of the winning to the second start port 47 . That is, when either one of the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state ends, the length of the predetermined period for performing left-handed notification changes (changes according to the number of remaining reservations).
In addition, when either one of the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends, even if the state after the end is the customer waiting state, the left hitting information may be performed. In addition, when either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends, the execution of the left-handed notification is waited when the end is in the customer waiting state, and the left-handed notification is performed when the variable display is started. may
Further, the left-handed notification after the end of the normal time-saving gaming state and the left-handed notification after the end of the special time-saving gaming state may be executed in the same notification mode (notification image, notification period).

Further, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the left-handed image 730 is displayed after the variable effect based on the suspension (remaining suspension) of the winning to the second start port 47 is completed. , and when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the normal time-saving game state to the normal game state, the left-handed image 730 at the time when it is controlled to the normal game state (when the fluctuation of the final round in the normal time-saving game state stops) Consider the case of adopting a configuration in which is displayed. In this case, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the display timing of the left shot image 730 differs depending on the number of remaining reservations, whereas the gaming machine 1 is from the special time-saving gaming state In the normal game state, the display timing of the left-handed image 730 does not change. That is, when the first time saving (for example, special time saving gaming state) ends, a predetermined left hitting notification (left hitting image 730 display, left Hitting voice notification) can be executed, and when the second time saving (for example, normal time saving gaming state) ends, a predetermined left hitting notice (left hitting image 730 display, left-handed voice notification) can be executed. Therefore, by changing the timing of performing the left-handed notification depending on the type of time saving, it is possible to change the playability and improve the interest of the game.

Also, when either one of the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state ends, the execution timing of the left-handed notification does not change depending on the remaining number of winnings to the first start port 45 at the time of the time-saving end, It changes depending on the number of remaining reservations for winning a prize to the second start port 47 at the end of the time saving.
In addition, left hitting information when either one of the normal time saving game state and the special time saving game state ends is executed in the same notification mode regardless of the timing of execution.
Further, the left-handed notification after the end of the normal time-saving game state and the left-handed notification after the end of the special time-saving game state are executed in the same notification mode.

Also, when the time saving (for example, special time saving game state) ends, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the end of the time saving (digesting the remaining hold), a predetermined left-handed notification (left-handed image 730 display, left-handed voice notification) can be executed, and execution of a predetermined notice performance (read-ahead notice performance, jackpot notice performance) corresponding to the normal game state is restricted during the period from the end of the time saving to the execution of the prescribed left-handed notice. Therefore, it is possible to immerse the player in the afterglow of the expiry of the advantageous period, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it can be set to multiple production modes (stages, modes that can be read ahead), and when the time saving (for example, a special time saving game state) ends, a predetermined period has passed since the end of the time saving (the remaining hold is digested) Later, a predetermined left-handed notification (display of left-handed image 730, left-handed audio notification) can be executed, and a predetermined production mode (first It is restricted to set a specific stage such as a stage, a mode in which a look-ahead effect is possible). Therefore, it is possible to immerse the player in the afterglow of the expiry of the advantageous period, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the game machine 1 is controlled from the time-saving gaming state (normal time-saving gaming state, special time-saving gaming state) to the normal gaming state, the variation based on the hold (remaining hold) for winning the second start port 47 Consider the case of adopting a configuration in which the left-handed shot image 730 is displayed after the effect is finished. In this case, depending on the number of remaining holds, the number of times of the variable effect executed until the left shot image 730 is displayed is different. That is, when either one of the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state ends, the number of times of fluctuation display until performing left-handed notification changes.

In addition, when reaching the specified number of times (when entering the special time-saving gaming state), the first predetermined image (second transition image 734, etc.) appears and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 appears again. perform a performance. In addition, in the normal state other than the specified number of times, in the case of a change in failure, the second predetermined image (the first front image 707, the second front image 709, etc.) appears during the fluctuation of the pattern, and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden (visually recognized). difficult or invisible), and a second effect is performed in which the decorative pattern 700 appears again. And when the 1st production is performed, it shifts to a special time saving game state.
In this case, when the specified number of times is reached, the first predetermined image is displayed to hide the pattern, so that the player can expect a transition to a special mode (special time-saving game state), and the interest can be improved. . In addition, by displaying another second predetermined image to hide the pattern even when the number of games is not specified, the player can expect a special performance (big win). By suddenly hiding the pattern, it is possible to make the player feel unpredictable and thrill the player. Although the common phenomenon of hiding the pattern occurs, it develops into a different production and state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the variations of the production and improve the interest.

Further, the small pattern 704 (including the change notification LED 59) is continuously displayed during the display of the first predetermined image and the display of the second predetermined image.
In this case, by displaying the small pattern 704 even when the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, the variation state of the special pattern can be confirmed.

Also, the display time of the first predetermined image and the display time of the second predetermined image are different. More specifically, the display time of the first predetermined image is longer than the display time of the second predetermined image.
In this case, by lengthening the display time of the first predetermined image, it is possible to impress a special effect when entering the special time-saving game state, and to increase the expectation of the player. Also, by shortening the display time of the second predetermined image, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations.

Also, the first predetermined image appears at the start or stop timing of the variation of the decorative pattern 700, and the second predetermined image appears during the scroll display of the design.
In this case, by causing the first predetermined image to appear when the decorative pattern 700 starts or stops changing, it is possible to secure sufficient time for displaying the first predetermined image even if the change time is short. Also, by causing the second predetermined image to appear during the scrolling display of the decorative pattern 700, it is possible to improve the interest during the scrolling.

Also, when the first production is performed, the production mode is switched from the first production mode (for example, the first stage, normal game state) to the second production mode (sixth stage, special time-saving game state), but the second production is Even if it is performed, it does not switch to the second presentation mode.
In this case, since the performance mode is switched by the execution of the first performance, a special value can be given to the first performance, and the interest can be improved. The performance mode can be switched smoothly by executing the first performance.

Further, when the first effect is performed, the notification of hitting to the right is performed, but even if the second effect is performed, the notification of hitting to the right is not performed.
In this case, since the hitting to the right is notified by the execution of the first effect, it is possible to prepare for hitting to the right by the first effect.

Also, the first predetermined image and the decorative pattern 700 are displayed at the same time, and the second predetermined image and the decorative pattern 700 are displayed at the same time.
In this case, the decorative pattern 700 gradually disappears and gradually reappears, so that the screen can be switched smoothly without a sense of discomfort.

Also, the second effect is not executed in the time-saving game state. That is, the execution ratio of the second effect is higher in the first game state (normal game state) than in the second game state (time-saving game state). In this case, since the second effect is executed with a relatively high probability in the normal game state, it is possible to keep the player from getting bored. In addition, since the execution probability of the second performance is low in the time-saving game state, the variation can be repeated one after another until the highly expected variation without performing unnecessary performance.
If the execution ratio of the second effect is higher in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state, the second effect may be executed in the time-saving game state.

In addition, a suggestive effect suggesting the first effect (display of the execution count image 705, display of the remaining number of times of arrival image 708, and display of the countdown image 732) can be executed, and the execution probability of the suggestive effect suggests the second effect. Higher than the execution probability of the production to do. Note that "the execution probability of the suggestive effect is higher than the execution probability of the effect suggesting the second effect" includes the fact that the effect suggesting the second effect is not executed (0%).
In this case, since the suggestive effect is executed when the first effect is executed, the expectation for the first effect can be increased. Also, when the second effect is executed, the effect suggesting the second effect is difficult to be performed, so excessive effect can be prevented and excessive expectations can be avoided.

Moreover, before and after the first predetermined image appears (before and after entering the special time-saving gaming state), the mode of the decorative design 700 is different.
Further, in the variable effect example 9, the first predetermined image was displayed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery was a loss and the ready-to-win effect was not executed. Here, the first predetermined image does not have to be displayed in the variation effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit or the ready-to-win effect is executed. Moreover, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a variable effect in which a jackpot or a ready-to-win effect is executed, the first predetermined image may be displayed.

Further, in the variable effect example 4, it has been described that the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed. Here, the first eye-catching image 715 may not be displayed in the time-saving gaming state. That is, when reaching the specified number of times (when entering the special time-saving gaming state), the first predetermined image (second transition image 734, etc.) appears and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 appears again. perform a performance. In addition, in the normal game state other than the specified number of times, after the execution of the SP ready-to-win effect, the second predetermined image (first eye-catching image 715) appears to hide the decorative pattern 700, and the first eye-catching image 715 appears again. Perform the second production. Then, the execution ratio of the second effect is higher in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state.
In this case, when the specified number of times is reached, the first predetermined image is displayed to hide the decoration pattern 700 so that the player expects the transition to a special mode (special time-saving game state), thereby improving the amusement. can be done. In addition, by displaying the second predetermined image and hiding the decorative pattern 700 when the reach is lost even if the number of times is not specified, it is possible to reduce disappointment when the reach is lost.
If the execution ratio of the second effect is higher in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state, the second effect may be executed in the time-saving game state.

Further, even when the predetermined condition (reaching the specified number of times) is satisfied, the first eye-catching image 715 may be displayed when the reach variation pattern is selected. That is, when the ready-to-win fluctuation pattern is selected in the specified number of fluctuations, the ready-to-win effect is performed according to the ready-to-win fluctuation pattern, and the second predetermined image is displayed as a ready-to-win failure.
In this case, even if the predetermined condition is satisfied (variation of the specified number of times), if the reach variation pattern is selected, the second predetermined image is displayed, thereby reducing disappointment when the reach is lost. .

Further, a specific effect (ready-to-win effect) can be executed, and when it is determined to be a loss, a second predetermined image is displayed after the specific effect is executed to stop the losing pattern, and when it is determined to be a big hit. , the jackpot pattern is stopped without displaying the second predetermined image after executing the specific performance.
In this case, in the case of a big hit, the double decorative pattern 700 can be immediately displayed to satisfy the player, and in the case of a loss, the second predetermined image is displayed to reduce the disappointment of the player. It is possible to raise expectations that it may develop into another production.

Also, when the second transition image 734 is displayed, when the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed, and in the special time-saving game state, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button Although all the lamps 17c have been described as being of the second mode, the present invention is not limited to this. When the second transition image 734 is displayed, when the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed, and in the special time-saving gaming state, respectively, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and The button lamp 17c may have a different light emission mode. That is, the lamp emits light in the first specific mode during the display period of the first predetermined image, the lamp emits light in the second specific mode during the display period of the second predetermined image, and the second game state (special time-saving game state). Inside, the lamp emits light in a third specific manner.
In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not to rush into the time saving mode by the lighting mode of the lamp.

Also, the first predetermined image appears in the first time from the start of the fluctuation, and the second predetermined image appears in the second time longer than the first time from the start of the fluctuation.
In this case, since the first predetermined image appears in a short time after the start of the pattern variation, the first predetermined image can be displayed even if the variation time of the predetermined number of variations is short. In addition, since the second predetermined image appears after a relatively long period of time has elapsed after the start of the fluctuation, the expectation of the player can be heightened.

(Variation production example 10)
FIGS. 195 to 198 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation performance example 10) of the variation performance will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 198. FIG. Variation production example 10 includes three variation productions. The first variable performance of the three times of variable performance is a variable performance based on winning to the first start port 45 in the normal game state. In addition, the second variable performance of the three times of variable performance is a variable performance based on the winning to the first start port 45 in the special time-saving gaming state. Also, the third variable performance of the three times of variable performance is a variable performance based on the winning to the second start port 47 in the special time-saving gaming state.
In addition, in the following description, mainly the points different from the above-described variable effect examples will be mainly described, and the descriptions of the points that are the same as the variable effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 195(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are confirmed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the effect control section 130m following the completion of the variation of the previous special pattern. ing. Also, at this time, one reserved image 702 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 indicates "1". Further, the execution count image 705 shows the text "499 GAME", and the remaining reach count image 708 shows the text "1 more". Also, a background corresponding to the first stage is shown as a stage image 706 . Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all of the second mode. Also, although illustration is omitted, from the audio output device 9, BGM corresponding to the previous variation effect is continuously output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 195(2), the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "0". Also, at this time, "1", which is the countdown image 732, is displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, as shown in FIG. 195(3), the three decorative symbols 700 and "421", which is the small symbol 704, are fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the display content of the number of times of execution image 705 is updated to "500 games", and the display content of the remaining number of times to reach image 708 is updated to "0". Moreover, at this time, the game machine 1 is controlled to a special time-saving game state. Moreover, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state, the second right-handed image 725 is displayed. On the other hand, the stage image 706 still shows the background corresponding to the first stage. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the second mode to the first mode.

When a predetermined period of time elapses without the game ball entering the first starting port 45 after the special symbol stops fluctuating, an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed as shown in FIG. 195(4). . This predetermined time is, for example, 20 seconds. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the first mode to the fifth mode. Also, although illustration is omitted, at this time, from the audio output device 9, the BGM corresponding to the previous variable effect is output with a volume smaller than that during execution of the variable effect.

Furthermore, when a predetermined time elapses after the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed without the game ball entering the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 195(5), the customer waiting image 710 is displayed. be. This predetermined time is, for example, 60 seconds. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number-of-executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining-number-of-reaches image 708 are difficult or invisible to the player. On the other hand, the number-of-holds display 703 and the second shot-to-right image 725 continue to be easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the fifth mode to the eighth mode. The eighth mode is a mode of light emission in purple, which is different from any of the first to seventh modes. Also, at this time, a notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify that the game is in the special time-saving gaming state. For example, from the audio output device 9, as the notification sound, the audio "became in a special time-saving gaming state" is repeatedly output.

Next, when a game ball wins the first starting hole 45, the mode of sound output by the sound output device 9 changes as shown in FIG. 195(6). For example, the sound output device 9 outputs a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state. This sound effect is a sound different from the notification sound that notifies the special time-saving gaming state described above. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number-of-executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining-number-of-reaches image 708 continue to be difficult or invisible to the player. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all continue to be in the eighth mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 196(7), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the eighth mode to the second mode. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number-of-executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the number-of-reaches image 708 continue to be difficult or invisible to the player. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output the effect sound indicating that the game machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 196(8), a non-display rendering of the customer waiting image 710 is executed. The non-display effect is a effect in which the transparency of the image is increased as time elapses, and the image is finally hidden. In the illustrated example, the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 is increased due to the start of the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 . By increasing the transparency of the customer waiting image 710, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining reach count image 708 are not easily visible to the player. , becomes visible to the player. On the other hand, at this time, neither the moving image 701 nor the reserved image 702 are displayed. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output the effect sound indicating that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 196(9), the non-display rendering of the customer waiting image 710 progresses, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 further increases. At this time, along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variation of the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 is started. At this time, the operation at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is variably displayed at high speed. Also, at this time, “1” is displayed in the number-of-holds display 703 of the first starting port 45 . Also, at this time, the display of the pending image 702 is started. Here, the staged display effects are not executed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first image display device 70 . Also, the decorative pattern 700, the pending image 702, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining reach count image 708 are not easily visible to the player, but are visible to the player. state. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output the effect sound indicating that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 196(10), the non-display rendering of the customer waiting image 710 ends, and the customer waiting image 710 disappears. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the pending image 702, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining reach count image 708 are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the operation at the start of fluctuation is in progress. At this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output the effect sound indicating that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 196 (11), the movement at the time of start of fluctuation ends, and the fluctuation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. Further, the variable image 701 is displayed by enlarging the suspended image 702 while moving to the variable pedestal 701P. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "0". Also, at this time, "0", which is the countdown image 732, is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the sound effect of the gaming machine 1 being controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as the game ball wins the first starting hole 45, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45 as shown in FIG. 196 (12). Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position away from the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 197(13), the staged display effect is completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Also, the prize winning sound is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (14), a special time saving start image 733 is displayed. The display time of this special time saving start image 733 is, for example, 3 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 197(15), display of the second transitional image 734 is started. More specifically, a second transitional image 734 is displayed in part of the display area of the first image display device 70 . At this time, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the second transition image 734 is not displayed, the left decorative symbol 700, the execution count image 705, and the remaining reach count image 708, which are changing at high speed, are displayed in the game. continue to be visible to people. Further, the stage image 706 is visible to the player in a portion that does not overlap with the second transition image 734, and is difficult or invisible to the player in a portion that overlaps with the second transition image 734. be in a certain state. Also, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, and the reserved image 702 are in a state of being difficult or invisible to the player. In addition, in the area where the second transition image 734 is displayed in the first image display device 70, the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, and the second right-handed image 725 are visible to the player. Or continue to be easily visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 197(16), the second transitional image 734 is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70 . At this time, the left decorative symbol 700, the execution count image 705, and the remaining reach count image 708 are also difficult or invisible to the player.
Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (17), "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45 as the game ball wins the first start port 45. Next, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, the pending image 702 is invisible or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, the winning sound is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (18), a special time saving selection image 735 is displayed. In the example of illustration, in the special time saving selection image 735, the cursor is united with the mode of "a".
Next, as shown in FIG. 198(19), a mode start image 736 is displayed. Also, at this time, as the game ball wins the second starting port 47, the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 47 displays "1". On the other hand, the pending image 702 is invisible or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, a prize-winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify of the prize-winning to the second starting port 47 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 198(20), the second transition image 734 and the mode start image 736 are hidden, and the first image display device 70 displays "125" which is the decorative design 700 with low decorativeness. is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, the background corresponding to the sixth stage is shown as the stage image 706 . In addition, at this time, the third right shot image 737 and the special time saving remaining number image 738 are displayed. In addition, “2” is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the first start port 45 and “1” is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the second start port 47 . Also, one pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode. On the other hand, the variation image 701 is not displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 198 (21), the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "125" are fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (22), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to fluctuate with the start of the variable display of the special pattern. Also, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 is switched to "0". Further, the variable image 701 is displayed by enlarging the first pending image 702 while moving to the variable pedestal 701P. Although illustration is omitted, after that, along with the stop display of the special symbols, the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 are fixed and stopped, and the variable image 701 is hidden.

FIG. 199 is an explanatory diagram of each effect in Example 10 of variable effect.
As shown in FIG. 199, at time T1 in example 10 of variable effect, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are in a state of being difficult or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, the pending image 702 is not displayed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the eighth mode. Also, at this time, a notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify that the special time-saving gaming state is in effect. The state at time T1 is the state shown in FIG. 195(5).

After that, at the time T2, a game ball enters the first starting port 45.例文帳に追加
After that, at the time T3, the output from the sound output device 9 of the effect sound indicating that the game machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving game state is started. That is, the sound output from the audio output device 9 is switched from the notification sound to the effect sound. The state at time T3 is the state shown in FIG. 195(6).
After that, at time T4, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched from the eighth mode to the second mode. The state at time T4 is the state shown in FIG. 196(7).

Thereafter, at time T5, the non-display rendering of the customer waiting image 710 is started. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 become visible to the player. On the other hand, pending image 702 is not displayed. The state at time T5 is the state shown in FIG. 196(8).
After that, at time T6, the variable effect is started. At this time, the variation of the decorative pattern 700 is low speed, and the variation of the small pattern 704 is high speed. Also, at this time, the display of the pending image 702 is started, and the pending image 702 becomes visible to the player. Also, at this time, the pending image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode. Also, at this time, the action rendering of the pending image 702 is started. The state at time T6 is the state shown in FIG. 196(9).

Thereafter, at time T7, the non-display rendering of the customer waiting image 710 ends. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, and the small pattern 704 are all easily visible to the player. The state at time T7 is the state shown in FIG. 196(10).
After that, at time T8, the sound effect of the game machine 1 being controlled to the special time-saving game state is no longer output from the sound output device 9.
After that, at time T9, the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at a high speed. Also, at this time, the reserved image 702 moves to the movable pedestal 701P. The state at time T9 is the state shown in FIG. 196(11).

In this way, the pending image 702 (variable image 701) can be displayed, and during the display of the first predetermined image (second transition image 734), the pending image 702 (variable image 701 ) is hidden, and with the appearance of the decorative pattern 700, a pending image 702 (fluctuation image 701) based on the winning to the second starting port 47 is also displayed, and the second predetermined image (first front image 707, second front image 709), the suspended image 702 (fluctuation image 701) is displayed.
In this case, since neither the decorative pattern 700 nor the reserved image 702 (fluctuation image 701) are displayed while the first predetermined image is being displayed, the first predetermined image can attract more attention. In addition, since the transition of the game state is involved, by hiding the pending image 702 (fluctuation image 701), it is possible to smoothly switch to another pending image 702 (fluctuation image 701) with the transition to a different game state. can be done. Also, while the second predetermined image is being displayed, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden while the pending image 702 (fluctuation image 701) is displayed, so the current state (varying, how many pending, etc.) can be made to be recognized by the player.

Further, the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) can be displayed, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is hidden while the first predetermined image (second transition image 734) is being displayed, and the decorative pattern 700 appears. In addition, another reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is also displayed, and the reserved image 702 (variable image 701) is not displayed while the second predetermined image (first eye-catching image 715) is displayed, and with the appearance of the decorative pattern 700 The reserved image 702 (fluctuation image 701) is also redisplayed.
In this case, since both the decorative pattern 700 and the reserved image 702 (fluctuation image 701) are displayed while the first predetermined image is being displayed, the first predetermined image can attract more attention. Further, since the game state is changed, by hiding the reserved image 702 (fluctuation image 701), it is possible to smoothly switch to another reserved image 702 (fluctuation image 701) in a different game state. Further, by hiding the pending image 702 (variable image 701) even during the display of the second predetermined image, it is possible to smoothly switch to the next screen from the reach failure.

(Variation production example 11)
FIGS. 200 to 202 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation production example 11) of the variation production will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 202 . Variation production example 11 is a variation production example of the decorative design 700 based on the winning to the first starting port 45 in the special time-saving gaming state.
In addition, in the following description, points different from the above-described variable effect examples will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the variable effect examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 200(1), the decoration design 700 and the small design 704 are confirmed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the production control section 130m following the completion of the variation of the previous special design. ing. Further, the execution count image 705 shows the text "500 games", and the remaining reach count image 708 shows the text "0 left". Also, a background corresponding to the first stage is shown as a stage image 706 . In addition, the game state of the gaming machine 1 is the special time-saving game state, and the second hitting image 725 is displayed. Also, at this time, an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed. Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all of the fifth aspect. Also, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the previous variable effect is output from the audio output device 9 with a volume smaller than that during execution of the variable effect. The state shown in FIG. 200(1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 195(4).

Next, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. be started. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all continue to be in the fifth mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 200(3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the fifth mode to the second mode. Moreover, at this time, the sound effect that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 200(4), the non-display rendering of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 is started. In the illustrated example, the transparency of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 is increased due to the start of the non-display effect. By increasing the transparency of the adjustment image 716, the portion of the middle decorative pattern 700 and the right decorative pattern 700 that overlaps the adjustment image 716 is not easily visible to the player, but is visible to the player. It becomes a state where it can be visually recognized. Moreover, at this time, the sound effect that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 200(5), the effect of not displaying the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 ends, and the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are hidden. As a result, the middle decorative pattern 700 and the right decorative pattern 700 are entirely visible to the player. At this time, along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variation of the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 is started. At this time, the operation at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is variably displayed at high speed. Also, at this time, “1” is displayed in the number-of-holds display 703 of the first starting port 45 . Also, at this time, the display of the pending image 702 is started. On the other hand, the staged display effects are not executed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first image display device 70 . This pending image 702 is in a state that is easily visible to the player. Moreover, at this time, the sound effect that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 200(6), the operation at the time of start of fluctuation ends, and the fluctuation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. Further, the variable image 701 is displayed by enlarging the pending image 702 while moving to the variable base 701P. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "0". Also, at this time, "0", which is the countdown image 732, is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the sound effect that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as the game ball enters the first start port 45, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45, as shown in FIG. 201(7). Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position away from the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 201(8), the staged display effects are completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Also, the prize winning sound is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 201(9), a special time saving start image 733 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 201(10), the display of the second transitional image 734 is started. More specifically, a second transitional image 734 is displayed in part of the display area of the first image display device 70 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 201(11), the second transitional image 734 is displayed on the entire first image display device 70 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 201 (12), "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45 as the game ball wins the first start port 45. Next, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, the pending image 702 is invisible or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, the winning sound for informing the winning to the first starting port 45 is not output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 202(13), a special time saving selection image 735 is displayed. In the example of illustration, in the special time saving selection image 735, the cursor is united with the mode of "a".

Next, as shown in FIG. 202(14), a mode start image 736 is displayed. Also, at this time, as the game ball wins the second starting port 47, the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 47 displays "1". On the other hand, the pending image 702 is invisible or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, a prize-winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify of the prize-winning to the second starting port 47 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 202(15), the second transition image 734 and the mode start image 736 are hidden, and the first image display device 70 displays "125", which is the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness. is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, a background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706 . In addition, at this time, the third right shot image 737 and the special time saving remaining number image 738 are displayed. In the example of illustration, the text of "749" is shown in the special time saving remaining frequency|count image 738. FIG. In addition, “2” is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the first start port 45 and “1” is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the second start port 47 . Also, one pending image 702 is displayed. On the other hand, the variation image 701 is not displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 202 (16), the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "125" are fixed and stopped.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display the specific image before the start of the special effect in the second mode, and wins when the specific image is displayed in the second mode. If it does, it makes the reserved image of the particular aspect invisible or invisible. As a special production|presentation, the display of the special time reduction start image 733, the display of the 2nd transition image 734, the display of the mode start image 736, etc. are mentioned, for example. Further, specific images include, for example, a customer waiting image 710, an adjustment image 716, a menu image 717, and the like. Moreover, as a specific aspect, an incomplete display aspect etc. are mentioned, for example.
In this case, the player's interest can be attracted by the specific image even before the start of the special effect. In addition, when winning when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, the holding image 702 in the special time-saving gaming state is excessive to the player by not allowing the player to visually recognize the holding image 702 of the specific mode. attention is prevented, and the player can be made to pay attention to the performance unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display the specific image before the start of the special effect in the second mode, and when a prize is won while the specific image is being displayed in the second mode. , to make the reserved image of a particular mode of operation invisible or invisible. Specific operation modes include, for example, unfinished operation modes.
In this case, the player's interest can be attracted by the specific image even before the start of the special effect. In addition, when winning when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, by not allowing the player to visually recognize the holding image 702 of the specific operation mode, the holding image 702 is displayed to the player in the special time-saving gaming state. Excessive attention is prevented, and the player can be made to pay attention to the performance unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display the pending image 702 on the first image display device 70 in the first mode and then display it in the second mode. A specific image can be displayed before the start, and if a prize is won while the specific image is being displayed in the second mode, the reserved image 702 of the first form is made invisible or invisible. Examples of the first form include an incomplete form. Moreover, as a 2nd form, a completion form is mentioned, for example.
In this case, the player can be entertained by changing the form of the pending image 702 . Also, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. Furthermore, when winning when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, by not allowing the player to visually recognize the change in the form of the holding image 702, the holding image 702 is displayed to the player in the special time-saving gaming state. Excessive attention is prevented, and the player can be made to pay attention to the performance unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display the specific image before the start of the special effect in the second mode, and when a prize is won while the specific image is being displayed in the second mode. , makes the reserved image 702 of a particular transparency invisible or invisible. Specific transparency includes, for example, incomplete transparency.
In this case, the player's interest can be attracted by the specific image even before the start of the special effect. In addition, when winning when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, by not allowing the player to visually recognize the holding image 702 with specific transparency, the holding image 702 is displayed to the player in the special time-saving gaming state. Excessive attention is prevented, and the player can be made to pay attention to the performance unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining presentation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display the pending image 702 at the first position in the first image display device 70 and then display it at the second position. Before the start, a specific image can be displayed, and if a prize is won while the specific image is displayed in the second mode, the pending image 702 at the first position is made invisible or invisible. The first position may be, for example, an unfinished display position. The second position includes, for example, the complete display position.
In this case, the player can be entertained by changing the display position of the pending image 702 . Also, even before the start of the special effect, the specific image can attract the player's interest. Furthermore, when winning when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, by not allowing the player to visually recognize the change in the display position of the holding image 702, the holding image 702 in the special time-saving gaming state It is possible to prevent the excessive attention to be paid to the game, and to make the player pay attention to the performance unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display the specific image before the start of the special effect in the second mode, and output the sound while executing the variable effect. It is possible to set the first mode, and it is possible to set the sound output to the second mode when the specific image is displayed in the second mode.
In this case, the player's interest can be attracted by the specific image even before the start of the special effect. In addition, the player can be made to recognize that the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state by setting the sound output mode according to the display of the specific image in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display the specific image before the start of the special effect in the second mode, and the top lamp 10b is set to the second mode when the variable effect is being executed. When the specific image is displayed in the second mode, the top lamp 10b can be set to the eighth mode or the like.
In this case, the player's interest can be attracted by the specific image even before the start of the special effect. Further, by setting the top lamp 10b to correspond to the specific image being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made to recognize that the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display the specific image before the start of the special effect in the second mode, and the board lamp 74b is set to the second mode when the variable effect is being executed. When the specific image is displayed in the second mode, it is possible to set the board lamp 74b to the eighth mode or the like.
In this case, the player's interest can be attracted by the specific image even before the start of the special effect. Further, by setting the mode of the board lamp 74b according to the display of the specific image in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made to recognize that the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display the specific image before the start of the special effect in the second mode, and when the variable effect is being executed, the movable member lamp 74c and the button It is possible to set the lamp 17c to the second mode or the like, and it is possible to set the movable member lamp 74c or the button lamp 17c to the eighth mode or the like when the specific image is displayed in the second mode.
In this case, the player's interest can be attracted by the specific image even before the start of the special effect. In addition, by setting the mode of the movable member lamp 74c and the mode of the button lamp 17c according to the display of the specific image in the special time-saving game state, the player recognizes that the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state. can be made Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining presentation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display the specific image before the start of the special effect in the second mode, and when a prize is won while the specific image is being displayed in the second mode. , display of the decorative pattern 700 can be started before the display of the reserved image 702 is started.
In this case, the player's interest can be attracted by the specific image even before the start of the special effect. In addition, when winning while the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state, by displaying the effect pattern 700 earlier than the display of the reserved image 702, a variable effect unique to the special time-saving game state is realized. It is possible to draw the player's attention. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 is before the start of the special effect in the second mode, during the stop of the special symbol, and when the reservation information is not stored in the main RAM 110c. , make a particular aspect of the hold image 702 invisible or invisible.
As a result, when a prize is won before the start of the special performance and when the special symbol is stopped and there is no suspension, the special mode of the suspension image 702 is not made to be visually recognized by the player, so that in the special time-saving game state The reserved image 702 is prevented from attracting excessive attention to the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the performance unique to the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 is before the start of the special effect in the second mode, during the stop of the special symbol, and when the main RAM 110c does not store the pending information, if the prize is won, the specified The pending image 702 of the motion mode is made invisible or invisible.
As a result, when the prize is won before the start of the special performance and when the special symbol is stopped and there is no suspension, the special time-saving game state is obtained by not allowing the player to visually recognize the suspension image 702 of the specific operation mode. , the reserved image 702 is prevented from drawing excessive attention to the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect unique to the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 is before the start of the special effect in the second mode, during the stop of the special symbol, and when the main RAM 110c does not store the pending information, if the prize is won, the specified Make the retained image 702 of the form invisible or invisible. An unfinished form etc. are mentioned as a specific form.
As a result, when a prize is won before the start of the special effect and when the special symbol is stopped and there is no suspension, the special form of the suspension image 702 is not made visible to the player, so that the special time saving game state The reserved image 702 is prevented from attracting excessive attention to the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the performance unique to the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display the reserved image 702 by the first image display device 70 with the first transparency and then display it with the second transparency, and the special effect in the second mode. is before the start of the special design and the suspension information is not stored in the main RAM 110c, the suspension image 702 with the first transparency is made invisible or invisible. The first transparency includes, for example, an incomplete transparency. Further, as the second transmittance, for example, the complete transmittance and the like can be given.
In this case, the player can be entertained by changing the transparency of the pending image 702 . In addition, when the prize is won before the start of the special performance and when the special symbol is stopped and there is no suspension, the change in the transparency of the suspension image 702 is not visually recognized by the player, so that the special time-saving game state , the reserved image 702 is prevented from drawing excessive attention to the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect unique to the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 is before the start of the special effect in the second mode, during the stop of the special symbol, and when the main RAM 110c does not store the reservation information, if the prize is won, the specified Make the pending image 702 at the location invisible or invisible. Specific positions include, for example, incomplete display positions.
As a result, when a prize is won before the start of the special performance and when the special symbol is stopped and there is no suspension, the reservation image 702 at the specific position is not made to be visually recognized by the player, so that in the special time-saving game state The reserved image 702 is prevented from attracting excessive attention to the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the performance unique to the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display the pending image 702 on the first image display device 70 in the first mode and then display it in the second mode, and the special image can be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. It can be displayed in a display mode according to the mode being controlled out of the two modes, and when the special image is displayed according to the first mode while the special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification. When winning, the reserved image 702 of the first mode is made invisible or invisible, and a special image corresponding to the second mode is displayed. Examples of the first mode include an incomplete display mode. Further, examples of the second mode include a complete display mode and the like. Also, the special image includes, for example, the decorative pattern 700, the stage image 706, and the like. Further, the specific notification includes, for example, the display of the second right-handed shot image 725, the sound prompting the shooting of the game ball to the right side in the game area 5a, and the like.
In this case, the player can be entertained by changing the mode of the pending image 702 . Further, even when the special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the specific notification is started, so that the player recognizes that the player can win by shooting the game ball to the second game area. can be made Further, when winning is won while the special symbol is stopped and the special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the change in the mode of the reserved image 702 is not visually recognized by the player. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the reserved image 702 from being excessively focused on by the player in the special time-saving gaming state, and allow the player to focus on the special image unique to the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display the pending image 702 on the first image display device 70 in the first operation mode and then display it in the second operation mode, and after the start of the specific notification, the special When winning while the pattern is stopped and the special image corresponding to the first mode is displayed, the reserved image 702 of the first operation mode is made invisible or invisible, and the special image corresponding to the second mode. display. Examples of the first operation mode include an incomplete operation mode and the like. In addition, as the second motion mode, for example, a motion mode in a motion presentation and the like can be given.
In this case, it is possible to amuse the player by changing the action mode of the pending image 702 . Further, even when the special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the specific notification is started, so that the player recognizes that the player can win by shooting the game ball to the second game area. can be made Further, when the prize is won while the special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification and the special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the change in the operation mode of the pending image 702 is visually recognized by the player. By not doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from paying too much attention to the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special image unique to the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130, when the special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification and the special image corresponding to the first mode is displayed, when the prize is won, the specific mode is suspended. The image 702 is made invisible or invisible, and a special image corresponding to the second mode is displayed.
In this case, even when the special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the specific notification is started, so that the player is notified that the game ball can be shot to the second game area to win a prize. can be recognized. Furthermore, when winning is won while the special symbol is stopped and the special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the player is not allowed to visually recognize the reserved image 702 of the specific form. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130, after the start of the specific notification, when the special symbol is stopped and the special image corresponding to the first mode is displayed, when the prize is won, the first transparency hold image 702 is made invisible or invisible, and a special image corresponding to the second mode is displayed.
In this case, the player can be entertained by changing the transparency of the pending image 702 . Further, even when the special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the specific notification is started, so that the player recognizes that the player can win by shooting the game ball to the second game area. can be made Furthermore, when winning is won while the special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification and the special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the change in the transparency of the reserved image 702 is visually recognized by the player. By not doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from paying too much attention to the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special image unique to the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130, after the start of the specific notification, when the special symbol is stopped and the special image corresponding to the first mode is displayed, when the prize is won, at the first position The reserved image 702 is made invisible or invisible, and a special image corresponding to the second mode is displayed.
In this case, the player can be entertained by changing the display position of the pending image 702 . Further, even when the special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the specific notification is started, so that the player recognizes that the player can win by shooting the game ball to the second game area. can be made Furthermore, when winning is won while the special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification and the special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the change in the display position of the reserved image 702 is visually recognized by the player. By not doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from paying too much attention to the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special image unique to the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

Further, in the present embodiment, when winning in the second mode before the start of the special effect, the effect control board 130 changes the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before the display of the pending image 702 is completed. It is possible.
In this case, when a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the player takes his or her eyes off the gaming machine 1 by switching the output mode of the sound earlier than the display of the pending image 702. Even in this case, it becomes easier for the player to quickly recognize that it is in the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

Further, in the present embodiment, if a prize is won while the specific image is being displayed in the second mode before the start of the special effect, the effect control board 130 outputs the sound before the completion of hiding the specific image. It is possible to go from the first mode to the second mode.
In this case, when a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the display content of the first image display device 70 is changed by switching the output mode of the sound earlier than hiding the specific image. Regardless, it becomes easier for the player to quickly recognize that it is in a special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

Further, in this embodiment, when winning in the second mode before the start of the special effect, the effect control board 130 changes the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before the decorative pattern 700 becomes easily visible. It is possible.
In this case, when a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, by switching the output mode of the sound earlier than making the decorative pattern 700 visible to the player, Even when the player takes his/her eyes off the game machine 1, it becomes easy for the player to quickly recognize the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining presentation.

Further, in this embodiment, when winning in the second mode before the start of the special effect, the effect control board 130 changes the output of the sound from the first mode to the second mode before the small pattern 704 becomes easily visible. It is possible.
In this case, when winning in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, compared to making the small pattern 704 easily visible to the player, by switching the output mode of the sound earlier, Even when the player takes his/her eyes off the game machine 1, it becomes easy for the player to quickly recognize the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special effect, the effect control board 130 outputs the sound to the first level before changing the top lamp 10b from the first light emission mode to the second light emission mode. It is possible to change from the aspect to the second aspect.
In this case, when winning in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, by switching the sound output mode earlier than switching the light emission mode of the top lamp 10b, the player can see from the gaming machine 1. Even if is released, it becomes easy for the player to quickly recognize that it is in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing highly entertaining presentations.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special effect, the effect control board 130 outputs the sound to the first level before changing the board lamp 74b from the first light emitting mode to the second light emitting mode. It is possible to change from the aspect to the second aspect.
In this case, when winning in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, by switching the sound output mode earlier than switching the light emission mode of the board lamp 74b, the player can see from the gaming machine 1. Even when is released, it becomes easy for the player to quickly recognize that it is in a special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining presentation.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special effect, the effect control board 130 makes a sound before switching the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c from the first light emission mode to the second light emission mode. can be changed from the first mode to the second mode.
In this case, when winning in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, by switching the output mode of the sound earlier than switching the light emission mode of the movable member lamp 74c and the light emission mode of the button lamp 17c, Even when the player takes his/her eyes off the game machine 1, it becomes easy for the player to quickly recognize the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining presentation.

Further, in the present embodiment, when winning when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, before the pending image 702 becomes visible to the player, the mode of sound output are switching. Therefore, regardless of the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that the prize has been won.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when winning while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, the sound output mode is switched before the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started. there is Therefore, even if the player cannot recognize the game situation from the display contents of the first image display device 70 by the customer waiting image 710, the player can quickly recognize the winning.

Also, when winning while the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, before the pending image 702 becomes visible to the player, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c and button lamp 17c. Therefore, regardless of the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that the prize has been won.

In particular, in this embodiment, when winning while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, before the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, The modes of the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c are switched. Therefore, even if the player cannot recognize the state of the game from the display contents of the first image display device 70 due to the customer waiting image 710, the player can quickly recognize the winning.

In addition, when winning while the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 700 can be visually recognized by the player before the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player. be in a state where Therefore, even if the pending image 702 is not visible, it is possible to immediately suggest to the player that the variable effect will be performed.

In particular, in this embodiment, when winning while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving game state, before the customer waiting image 710 is hidden, the decorative pattern 700 can be visually recognized by the player. be in a state. Therefore, even when the information displayed on the first image display device 70 regarding the game is blocked by the customer waiting image 710, it is possible to quickly suggest to the player that the variable effect will be performed.

In addition, when a prize is won while the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the step display effect is not executed, but the second transition image 734 is displayed after the variable effect based on the prize is started. When the game ball has entered the first starting port 45 by then, the staged display effect is executed. Therefore, not only the effect unique to the special time-saving game state but also the change in the display mode of the pending image 702 can be enjoyed by the player, and the display is based on the winning when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state. The player can be given a special feeling of the pending image 702 being displayed.

Also, if a prize is won while the second transition image 734 is being displayed, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode will not be visible to the player. Therefore, the reserved image 702 is prevented from drawing excessive attention to the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the switching from the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state to the stage image 706 unique to the special time-saving game state. .

In particular, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 while the second transition image 734 is displayed, the winning sound for notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is not output. Therefore, in a special time-saving game state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second start port 47, the player is prevented from being excessively conscious of the fact that the game ball has entered the first start port 45, and the normal game state is reached. The player can be made to pay attention to the switching from the corresponding stage image 706 to the stage image 706 unique to the special time-saving gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when the second transition image 734 is displayed, when the game ball has won the second starting port 47, the winning to the second starting port 47 is notified A sound is output. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the second starting port 47 is in a special time-saving gaming state in which the game ball is likely to win.

In addition, even when the second transition image 734 is displayed, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, a winning sound for notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is output. good too. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the winning to the first starting port 45 is invalid.
Also, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 while the second transition image 734 is displayed, the winning sound for notifying the winning in the second starting port 47 may not be output. In this case, the player is prevented from being excessively conscious of the winning of the game ball, and the player pays attention to the switching from the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state to the stage image 706 unique to the special time-saving game state. can be made

(Modification of Example 10 of Variation Effect)
203 to 205 are diagrams showing modifications of example 10 of variation effect.
In the variation production example 10, as the first variation production in the special time-saving gaming state, the variation production based on the winning to the first start port 45 was described, but the first variation production in the special time-saving gaming state is limited to the above example. not.
Below, a modification of example 10 of variation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This modification is an example in which a variable effect based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 47 is performed as the first variable effect in the special time-saving gaming state. In addition, in the following description, mainly the points different from the above-described variable effect examples will be mainly described, and the descriptions of the points that are the same as the variable effect examples may be omitted.

First, in the same way as the variable production example 10, in the normal game state, the final variable production of the predetermined number of times required until the special time-saving game state is completed, and the gaming machine 1 enters the special time-saving game state. controlled. Further, when a predetermined period of time elapses without the game ball winning in either the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 after the end of the final variable performance, as shown in FIG. 203(1), A customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the eighth mode. Also, at this time, a notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify that the game is in the special time-saving gaming state. The state shown in FIG. 203(1) is the same state as the state shown in FIG.

Next, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. 203 (2), the output from the sound output device 9 of the effect sound that the game machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state be started. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number-of-executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining-number-of-reaches image 708 continue to be difficult or invisible to the player. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all continue to be in the eighth state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 203(3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the eighth mode to the second mode. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number-of-executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining-number-of-reaches image 708 continue to be difficult or invisible to the player. Moreover, at this time, the sound effect that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 203(4), the non-display rendering of the customer waiting image 710 is started, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 is increased. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number-of-executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining-number-of-reaches image 708 are not easily visible to the player, but are visible to the player. Become. On the other hand, neither the moving image 701 nor the reserved image 702 are displayed. Moreover, at this time, the sound effect that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 203(5), the non-display rendering of the customer waiting image 710 progresses, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 further increases. At this time, along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variation of the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 is started. At this time, the operation at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is variably displayed at high speed. At this time, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 remains "0". At this time, neither the variable image 701 nor the pending image 702 is displayed. In addition, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining reach count image 708 are not easily visible to the player, but continue to be visible to the player. do. Moreover, at this time, the sound effect that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 203(6), the non-display rendering of the customer waiting image 710 ends, and the customer waiting image 710 disappears. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number-of-executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining-number-of-reaches image 708 are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the operation at the time of start of variation is completed, and the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes high speed. Also, at this time, "0", which is the countdown image 732, is displayed. On the other hand, neither the variable image 701 nor the reserved image 702 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . Moreover, at this time, the sound effect of the gaming machine 1 being controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9 .
Also, at this time, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 47, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 47. - 特許庁Also, a prize winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify of the prize winning to the second starting port 47 . On the other hand, pending image 702 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 204(7), a special time saving start image 733 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 204(8), display of the second transitional image 734 is started, and the second transitional image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device .
Next, as shown in FIG. 204(9), the second transitional image 734 is displayed on the entire first image display device 70 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 204 (10), a special time saving selection image 735 is displayed. In the example of illustration, in the special time saving selection image 735, the cursor is united with the mode of "a".
Next, as shown in FIG. 204(11), a mode start image 736 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 204(12), the second transition image 734 and the mode start image 736 are hidden, and the first image display device 70 displays "125", which is the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness. is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, a background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706 . In addition, at this time, the third right shot image 737 and the special time saving remaining number image 738 are displayed. In addition, "0" is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the first start port 45, and "1" is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the second start port 47. FIG. Also, one pending image 702 is displayed. On the other hand, the variation image 701 is not displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 205 (13), the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "125" are fixed and stopped.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the first start port 45 when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, after the pending image 702 is displayed (Fig. 196 (10) ), and a variation image 701 is displayed (see FIG. 196 (11)). On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47 while the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, neither the pending image 702 nor the variable image 701 is displayed (see FIG. 203 (6)). .
In this case, even though the stage image 706 having a background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, a sense of incongruity is caused by the fact that the pending image 702 and the variable image 701 based on the winning to the first start port 45 are not displayed. can prevent people from giving it to others. In addition, although the stage image 706 having the background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the pending image 702 and the variation image 701 based on the winning at the second starting port 47, which is difficult to win in the normal game state. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the display of .

In particular, in the present embodiment, when there is a hold about winning the first start port 45 in the first variable effect in the special time-saving game state, the stage image 706 consisting of the background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed. Sometimes the pending image 702 is displayed (see FIG. 187 (6)), and the pending image 702 is not displayed when the stage image 706 consisting of the background corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state is displayed (see FIG. 188 (12)).
In this case, although the stage image 706 composed of the background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity due to the fact that the pending image 702 based on the winning at the first start port 45 is not displayed. can be prevented. In addition, although the stage image 706 consisting of the background corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state is displayed, in the special time-saving gaming state, the holding image 702 based on the winning to the first start port 45 is unlikely to be targeted. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the display.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning to the second start port 47 is suspended in the first variable effect in the special time-saving game state, the stage image 706 consisting of the background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed. When the pending image 702 is not displayed (see FIG. 203 (6)), and the stage image 706 consisting of the background corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state is displayed, the pending image 702 is displayed (see FIG. 204 (12) ).
In this case, although the stage image 706 having the background corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, the pending image 702 based on the winning to the second starting port 47, which is difficult to win in the normal game state, is displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity due to this. In addition, although the stage image 706 consisting of the background corresponding to the special time-saving game state is displayed, the pending image 702 based on the winning to the second start port 47 that is likely to win in the special time-saving game state is not displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to

(Another production example in the variation production example 10)
FIG. 206 is a diagram showing another example of effect in Example 10 of variable effect.
In the variation production example 10, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the first variation production in the special time-saving gaming state is started. The production is not limited to the above examples.
Below, another example of effect in Example 10 of variable effect will be described with reference to FIG. 206 . It should be noted that in the following description, differences from the above-described variable effect examples and modifications will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the variable effect examples and modifications may be omitted.

First, in the same way as in example 10 of variable performance, the final variable performance of the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the game machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving game state. Further, when a predetermined time elapses without the game ball winning in either the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 after the end of the final variable performance, as shown in FIG. 206(1), A customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the eighth mode. Also, at this time, a notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify that the special time-saving gaming state is in effect. The state shown in FIG. 206(1) is the same state as the state shown in FIG.

When abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetism detection sensor 57a while the customer waiting image 710 is being displayed, a magnetism error occurs, and as shown in FIG. Is displayed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the eighth mode to the ninth mode. The ninth mode is a mode of light emission that periodically blinks in orange, and is a mode different from any of the first to eighth modes. Also, the ninth mode can be regarded as a mode of suggesting or reporting the occurrence of an error. Also, the blinking cycle in the ninth aspect is, for example, 1.5 seconds. That is, the flashing cycle in the ninth mode is longer than the flashing cycle in the winning-time lighting effect. Also, at this time, the voice output device 9 outputs a warning sound together with the voice of "a magnet has been detected."

As described above, in the present embodiment, when an error occurs while the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, the mode of sound output is switched to a mode corresponding to the occurrence of the error. Therefore, even when the player takes his eyes off the gaming machine 1 while the specific image is being displayed, the player can be made to recognize that an error has occurred.

In the example shown in FIG. 206(2), when a magnetic error occurs while the customer waiting image 710 and the second right shot image 725 are displayed, the customer waiting image 710 and the second right shot image 725 are displayed. Although it has been described that the magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed without displaying any of them, the present invention is not limited to this. When a magnetic error occurs while the customer waiting image 710 and the second right-handed image 725 are being displayed, the customer-waiting image 710 and the right-handed image 725 continue to be displayed, and the front layer than the customer waiting image 710 is displayed. , the magnetic error notification image 741 may be displayed.

Also, regardless of the game state, if an error occurs while the specific image is being displayed, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched to the ninth mode, The mode of sound output may be switched to a mode according to the occurrence of an error, and the magnetic error notification image 741 may be displayed.
In addition, not only when an error occurs while the specific image is being displayed, but also in any case, when an error occurs, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the The button lamp 17c may be switched to the ninth mode, the sound output mode may be switched to a mode corresponding to the occurrence of the error, and the magnetic error notification image 741 may be displayed.

(Modified example of variation production example 11)
FIGS. 207 to 209 are diagrams showing modifications of example 11 of variation effect.
In the variation performance example 11, as the first variation performance in the special time-saving game state, the variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the first start port 45 is a loss was explained, but it is not limited to this.
Below, a modification of example 11 of variation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This modification is an example in which a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning to the second start port 47 is a big hit as the first variable effect in the special time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that in the following description, differences from the above-described variable effect examples and modifications will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the variable effect examples and modifications may be omitted.

First, in the same way as the variable production example 11, in the normal game state, the final variable production of the predetermined number of times required until the special time-saving game state is completed, and the gaming machine 1 enters the special time-saving game state. controlled. Further, when a predetermined period of time elapses without the game ball entering either the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 after the end of the final variable performance, as shown in FIG. 207(1), An adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed. Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the fifth mode. Also, although illustration is omitted, at this time, from the audio output device 9, the BGM corresponding to the previous variable effect is output with a volume smaller than that during execution of the variable effect. The state shown in FIG. 207(1) is the same state as the state shown in FIG.

Next, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. 207 (2), the sound effect that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is output from the voice output device 9. be. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all continue to be in the fifth mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 207(3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the fifth mode to the second mode. Moreover, at this time, the sound effect that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 207(4), the non-display rendering of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 is started, and the transparency of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 is increased. Moreover, at this time, the sound effect that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 207(5), the effect of not displaying the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 ends, and the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are hidden. At this time, along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variation of the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 is started. At this time, the operation at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is variably displayed at high speed. At this time, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 remains "0", and neither the variable image 701 nor the pending image 702 is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the sound effect that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 207(6), the movement at the time of start of fluctuation is completed, and the fluctuation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. Also, at this time, "0", which is the countdown image 732, is displayed. At this time, neither the variable image 701 nor the pending image 702 is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the sound effect of the gaming machine 1 being controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9 .
Next, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 as shown in FIG. 208(7). Also, a prize winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify of the prize winning to the second starting port 47 . On the other hand, pending image 702 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 208(8), display of the second transitional image 734 is started, and the second transitional image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device .
Next, as shown in FIG. 208(9), a second transitional image 734 is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70 . That is, the 2nd transition image 734 is displayed, without displaying special time saving start image 733 (refer to Drawing 201 (9)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 208(10), the second transitional image 734 is hidden, and "444", which is the decorative pattern 700 of double eyes, is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, the stage image 706 is displayed again. In the illustrated example, the background corresponding to the first stage is shown as the stage image 706 . Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched from the second mode to the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights orange, the board lamp 74b lights yellow, the movable member lamp 74c lights green, and the button lamp 17c lights blue. At this time, the execution count image 705 and the remaining reach count image 708 are not displayed.

Then, along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 208(11), "444", which is the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, is fixed and stopped. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c continue to be in the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights yellow, the board lamp 74b lights green, the movable member lamp 74c lights blue, and the button lamp 17c lights blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 208(12), an opening image 719 is displayed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the seventh mode to the second mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 209(13), the first right shot image 720 and the promotion image 721 are displayed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the promotion image 721 was displayed, an in-round image 722 and a number-of-rounds image 723 are displayed as shown in FIG. 209(14). In the illustrated example, the text “Round 1” is displayed in the round number image 723 .
Next, when the final round ends, a normal working hours selection image 745 is displayed as shown in FIG. 209(15). In the illustrated example, in the normal time saving selection image 745, the cursor is placed on the "A" mode.
Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal working hour selection image 745 was displayed, the normal working hour saving start image 724 is displayed as shown in FIG. 209(16). Also, at this time, a card caution image 739 and a game caution image 740 are displayed.

Next, when the game machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. be stopped. And the small pattern 704 is fixed and stopped by the row of numbers "444" like the decorative pattern 700. - 特許庁Also, at this time, a background corresponding to the third stage is displayed as the stage image 706 . Also, at this time, the second right shot image 725 and the normal time saving remaining number image 726 are displayed. In addition, "0" is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the first start port 45, and "1" is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the second start port 47. FIG. Also, one reserved image 702 is displayed.

In addition, in this modified example, the variation effect based on winning when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed before the start of the first variation effect in the special time-saving game state has been described. Here, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed before the start of the first fluctuation effect in the special time-saving game state (see FIG. 195 (5)) to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 Based on this, the variable effect described in this modified example may be executed.

Thus, when reaching the specified number of times (when entering the special time-saving game state), the first predetermined image (second transition image 734, etc.) appears to hide the decorative pattern 700, and the decorative pattern 700 appears again. Perform the first production. In addition, in the case of a big win, a second effect of displaying a decorative pattern 700 indicating a big win is performed. Also, when the first effect is performed and when the second effect is performed, the game state is shifted to the time-saving game state. Then, the performance mode of the second performance at the time of the big win differs between when the specified number of times is reached and when the specified number of times is not reached.
In this case, when the specified number of times is reached, the first predetermined image is displayed to hide the decoration pattern 700 so that the player expects the transition to a special mode (special time-saving game state), thereby improving the amusement. can be done. In addition, in the case of a big hit even if the number of times is not specified, the game shifts to a time-saving game state. In addition, by making the performance mode at the time of the big win different between when the specified number of times is reached and when the number of times is not specified, the performance can be diversified and the interest can be improved.

In addition, when reaching the specified number of times (when entering the special time-saving gaming state), the first predetermined image (second transition image 734, etc.) appears and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 appears again. perform a performance. In addition, in the case of a big win, a second effect of displaying a decorative pattern 700 indicating a big win is performed. Also, when the first effect is performed and when the second effect is performed, the game state is shifted to the time-saving game state. Then, when reaching the specified number of times, the effect mode of the first effect differs between the case of a big win and the case of a loss.
In this case, when the prescribed number of times is reached, the performance mode of the first performance is made different between the case of a big win and the case of a loss, so that the performance can be diversified and the amusement can be improved.

In addition, the right-handed notification effect when the first effect is performed (display of the special time saving start image 733) and the right-handed notification effect when the second effect is performed (display of the first right-handed image 720 and promotion image 721 ) has a different production mode.
In this case, the effects can be diversified by changing the effect mode of the right-handed informing effect between when the first effect is performed and when the second effect is performed.

Further, when the first effect is performed, the card attention image 739 (game attention image 740) is not displayed, and the specific mode indicating the second game state (time-saving game state) is entered, and the second effect is performed. displays a card attention image 739 (game attention image 740), and then shifts to a specific mode indicating a second game state (time-saving game state).
In this case, in the case of a big hit, by displaying a card caution image 739 (game caution image 740), it is possible to call attention to the player, and by not displaying these images when entering a special time-saving gaming state, It is possible to immediately shift to a performance mode showing a special time-saving game state.

In addition, the first time from the display of the first predetermined image to the transition to the second game state (time-saving game state) is the transition to the second game state (time-saving game state) after the second predetermined image is displayed. less than the second time until
In this case, when the first predetermined image is displayed, it is possible to shift to the second game state in a short period of time, and the interest can be improved.

(Variation production example 12)
FIG. 210 and FIG. 211 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 210 and 211, another specific example (variation effect example 12) of the variation effect will be described. Variation production example 12 includes two variation productions. The first variable performance of the two times of variable performance is a variable performance based on the winning of the game ball in the first start port 45 in the special time-saving gaming state. Also, the second variable performance is a variable performance based on the game ball winning the second start port 47 in the special time-saving gaming state.
Also, in the following description, differences from the above-described variable performance examples and modifications will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the variable performance examples and modifications may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 210(1), the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 are confirmed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the production control section 130m following the completion of the variation of the previous special design. ing. Moreover, the text of "700" is shown on the special time saving remaining frequency|count image 738 at this time. Also, a background corresponding to the sixth stage is shown as a stage image 706 . In addition, both of the reservation number display 703 of the first starting port 45 and the reservation number display 703 of the second starting port 47 indicate "0". Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all of the first mode. Also, although not shown, the BGM corresponding to the previous variable effect is continuously output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 210(2), the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special design. On the other hand, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 remains "0". Neither the moving image 701 nor the pending image 702 are displayed. Moreover, the display content of the special time saving remaining frequency|count image 738 is updated by "699." Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the first mode to the second mode.
Next, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 47 as shown in FIG. 210(3). Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position away from the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the voice output device 9 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 210(4), the staged display effects are completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the complete display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. On the other hand, even if the staged display effect is completed, the pending image 702 does not move to the variable pedestal 701P and continues to be displayed on the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, the prize winning sound is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output.
Also, at this time, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 47. - 特許庁Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position away from the second pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 210(5), the staged display effect is completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the complete display mode on the second pending pedestal 702P. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the action effect of the second pending image 702 is started. Also, the winning sound for notifying the winning to the second starting port 47 is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and is not output when the staged display effect is completed.
Next, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 210(6), the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "364" are fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 211(7), the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 is switched to "1". Also, at this time, the second reserved image 702 moves toward the first reserved pedestal 702P. Further, the variable image 701 is displayed by expanding the first pending image 702 while moving toward the variable base 701P. Moreover, the display content of the special time saving remaining frequency|count image 738 is updated by "698."
Next, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 211(8), the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "712" are fixed and stopped. Also, the variable image 701 is hidden.

(Variation production example 13)
FIGS. 212 to 214 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 13) of the variation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214. FIG. Variation performance example 13 is a variation performance based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second starting port 47 in the special time-saving game state, and is a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
Also, in the following description, differences from the above-described variable performance examples and modifications will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the variable performance examples and modifications may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 212(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are confirmed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the effect control section 130m following the completion of the variation of the previous special pattern. ing. Moreover, the text of "600" is shown on the special time saving remaining frequency|count image 738 at this time. Also, a background corresponding to the seventh stage is shown as a stage image 706 . A 7th stage is a stage set when the mode of "b" is selected in the special time saving selection image 735 (refer FIG. 188 (10)). In addition, both of the reservation number display 703 of the first starting port 45 and the reservation number display 703 of the second starting port 47 indicate "0". Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all of the first mode. Also, although not shown, the BGM corresponding to the previous variable effect is continuously output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. 212(2), the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special design. At this time, the operation at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is variably displayed at high speed. Moreover, the display content of the special time saving remaining frequency|count image 738 is updated by "599." Also, at this time, “1” is displayed in the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 . Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the first mode to the second mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 212(3), the fluctuation start operation proceeds. Also, at this time, the staged display effect is completed, and the rectangular pending image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. This pending image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 212(2). Also, the display mode of this rectangular pending image 702 is a display mode according to the seventh stage. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Also, the prize winning sound is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 212(4), the movement at the time of start of fluctuation ends, and the fluctuation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. Further, the variable image 701 is displayed by enlarging the suspended image 702 while moving to the variable pedestal 701P. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "0".
Next, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 47 as shown in FIG. 212(5). Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 212(6), the staged display effects are completed, and the rectangular pending image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Also, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 213(7), after "4" which is the left decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, "4" which is the right decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped and ready-to-win effect is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 213(8), "4" which is the middle decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, so that "444" which is the double decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped. That is, the decoration pattern 700 of double eyes is temporarily stopped without performing neither the SP ready-to-win effect nor the SPSP ready-to-win effect. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are switched from the second mode to the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights orange, the board lamp 74b lights yellow, the movable member lamp 74c lights green, and the button lamp 17c lights blue.

Then, along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 213(9), "444", which is the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, is fixed and stopped. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c continue to be in the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights yellow, the board lamp 74b lights green, the movable member lamp 74c lights blue, and the button lamp 17c lights blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 213(10), an opening image 719 is displayed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the seventh mode to the second mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 213(11), the first right shot image 720 and the promotion image 721 are displayed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the promotion image 721 was displayed, an in-round image 722 and a number-of-rounds image 723 are displayed as shown in FIG. 213(12). In the illustrated example, the text “Round 1” is displayed in the round number image 723 .
Next, when the final round ends, a normal working hours selection image 745 is displayed as shown in FIG. 214(13). In the illustrated example, in the normal time saving selection image 745, the cursor is placed on the "A" mode.
Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the normal working hour selection image 745 is displayed, the normal working hour saving start image 724 is displayed as shown in FIG. 214(14). Also, at this time, a card caution image 739 and a game caution image 740 are displayed.

Next, when the game machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. be stopped. And the small pattern 704 is fixed and stopped by the row of numbers "444" like the decorative pattern 700. - 特許庁Also, at this time, a background corresponding to the third stage is shown as a stage image 706 . Also, at this time, the second right shot image 725 and the normal time saving remaining number image 726 are displayed. In addition, "0" is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the first start port 45, and "1" is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the second start port 47. FIG. Also, one pending image 702 is displayed.

(Step-by-step display effect by rectangular pending image 702 in normal display mode)
Next, a description will be given of the staged display effect using the rectangular pending image 702 in the normal display mode. FIG. 215 is a diagram showing an example of a staged display effect using a rectangular pending image 702 in the normal display mode.
The rectangular pending image 702 in the normal display mode performs four stages of presentation as the staged display presentation. When a game ball wins in the second starting hole 47, first, as shown in FIG. 215(1), as the first stage of the staged display effect, a pending image 702 with high transparency is displayed in white. This reserved image 702 has a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the first stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIGS. 212(2) and 212(5).

Next, as shown in FIG. 215(2), as the second stage of the staged display rendering, a pending image 702 having a lower transparency than that of the first stage is displayed in white. The reserved image 702 is formed by arranging a plurality of rectangular images extending in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. In the illustrated example, in the reserved image 702, four rectangular images are arranged in the horizontal direction at predetermined intervals. This pending image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than in the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 213(3), as the third stage of the staged display effect, a pending image 702 having a lower transparency than that of the second stage is displayed in white. In the illustrated example, in the reserved image 702, six rectangular images extending in the vertical direction are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction at predetermined intervals. This pending image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than in the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 213(4), as the fourth stage of the staged display effect, that is, the final stage, a pending image 702 having a lower transparency than that of the third stage is displayed. This reserved image 702 has a rectangular shape extending in the horizontal direction. Also, this pending image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than in the third stage. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIGS. 212(3) and 212(6). That is, although illustration is omitted, after the hold image 702 in the first stage shown in FIGS. 212(2) and 212(5) is displayed, the hold image 702 in the second stage of the staged display effect is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the third stage of the staged display effect is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIGS. 212(3) and 212(6) is displayed.

In this way, the change from the stage where streaks are formed in reserved image 702 (see FIG. 215(3)) to the stage where streaks are not formed in reserved image 702 (see FIG. 215(4)) also It is captured as a change in the shape of the reserved image 702 . Further, in the present embodiment, the time from the start of the stepped display effect to the display of the pending image 702 in the completed display mode, that is, the execution time of the stepped display effect by the pending image 702 in the rectangular normal display mode is , 0.2 seconds.

Further, when the step display effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 215(5), the action effect of the pending image 702 is started. The rectangular hold image 702 in the normal display mode periodically swings up and down as an action effect. The swing period in this motion presentation is, for example, 2.0 seconds.

(Variation production example 14)
FIG. 216 and FIG. 217 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, another specific example (variation effect example 14) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 700 will be described. Variation production example 14 is an example of variation production based on winning to the first start port 45 in the normal game state, and is an example of variation production in the case of recovery after the power supply of the game machine 1 is cut off during execution of the variation production. is. In addition, in the following explanation, mainly the points different from the above-described fluctuation production examples and modifications will be mainly explained, and the explanations of the points that are the same as the fluctuation production examples and modifications may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 216(1), in the first special symbol display device 60, the variable display of the previous special symbol is stopped. Also, in the first special symbol reservation display 63, the number of reservations for the winning to the first starting port 45 is displayed in a mode of "3". At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70 . In addition, "3" is displayed in the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45, and three pending images 702 are displayed. Further, the execution count image 705 shows the text "150 games", and the remaining reach count image 708 shows the text "350 more". Also, a background corresponding to the first stage is shown as a stage image 706 . Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all of the second mode. Also, although not shown, the BGM corresponding to the previous variable effect is continuously output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 216(2), in the first special symbol display device 60, the variable display of the next special symbol is started. Also, in the first special symbol reservation display 63, the number of reservations for winning the first starting port 45 is displayed in a mode of "2". In addition, the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 start to change with the start of the variable display of the special design. In addition, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "2".

Next, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off, the LEDs in the first special symbol indicator 60 and the first special symbol reservation indicator 63 are extinguished as shown in FIG. 216(3). Also, at this time, the first image display device 70, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all extinguished. Also, the audio output device 9 stops outputting sound.

Next, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is restored, as shown in FIG. 216(4), the variation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 is resumed. Also, in the first special symbol reservation display 63, the number of reservations for winning the first starting port 45 is displayed in a mode of "2".
After that, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the tenth mode. The tenth mode is a mode of emitting yellow-green light, which is different from any of the first to ninth modes.
After that, a returning image 742 is displayed on the first image display device 70 .
On the other hand, no sound has been output from the audio output device 9 since the power supply of the game machine 1 was restored.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 216(5), the special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 continue to fluctuate. Further, in the first image display device 70, the display of the image 742 during recovery is continued. Also, at this time, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the first special symbol reservation display 63 is displayed in a mode in which the number of reservations for winning the first starting port 45 is "3". . On the other hand, neither the pending image 702 nor the pending number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 216(6), in the first special symbol display device 60, the variable display of the special symbols is stopped.
After that, the non-display rendering of the returning image 742 is started, and the transparency of the returning image 742 increases. Then, by increasing the transparency of the returning image 742, the decorative pattern 700, the pending image 702, the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, the execution number image 705, the stage image 706, and the reaching remaining number image 708 are displayed in the game Although it is not easily visible to the player, it becomes visible to the player. Also, at this time, all of the three pending images 702 are displayed in the completed display mode. That is, the third pending image 702 is displayed without the unfinished display mode becoming visible to the player. Also, no sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 217(7), the non-display rendering of the returning image 742 ends, and the returning image 742 disappears. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the pending image 702, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining reach count image 708 are all easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, "135", which is the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, is fixed and stopped. In addition, "3" is shown in the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. As shown in FIG. Further, the execution count image 705 shows the text "151 GAME", and the remaining reach count image 708 shows the text "349 more". On the other hand, no sound is output from the audio output device 9 .
Also, at this time, the action rendering of the three pending images 702 is being executed, and all of the three pending images 702 are rotating clockwise from the initial position before the action rendering is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 217(8), the sound output device 9 outputs a forewarning sound for foretelling the start of the next variable effect. For example, the voice output device 9 outputs a voice saying "Variation effect will start soon".
Also, at this time, the action rendering of the three pending images 702 continues, and the three pending images 702 are further rotated clockwise.

Next, as shown in FIG. 217(9), in the first special symbol display device 60, the variable display of the next special symbol is started. Also, in the first special symbol reservation display 63, the number of reservations for winning the first starting port 45 is displayed in a mode of "2".
After that, with the start of variable display of the special symbols, the variation of the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 is started. In addition, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "2". Further, the moving image 701 is displayed by moving the first reserved image 702 to the moving base 701P. Also, the BGM corresponding to the variable effect being executed is output from the audio output device 9 . Although illustration is omitted, thereafter, the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 are fixed and stopped along with the stop of the special design, and the variation image 701 is hidden.

FIG. 218 is an explanatory diagram of each effect in example 14 of variable effect.
As shown in FIG. 218, at the time point T1 of example 14 of the variable performance, the variable performance in the normal game state is started. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change, and the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the action effects of the variable image 701 and the two pending images 702 are being executed, and the variable image 701 and the two pending images 702 are easily visible to the player. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Also, at this time, BGM corresponding to the variable effect being executed is output from the audio output device 9 . The state at time T1 is the state shown in FIG. 216(2).

After that, at time T2, the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off. At this time, none of the decorative pattern 700, the moving image 701, the reserved image 702, and the small pattern 704 are displayed. At this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all turned off. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 stops outputting sound. The state at time T2 is the state shown in FIG. 216(3).

After that, at time T3, the power of the gaming machine 1 is restored.
After that, at time T4, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the tenth mode.
After that, at time T5, a returning image 742 is displayed. The state at time T5 is the state shown in FIG. 216(4).
After that, at time T6, a game ball enters the first starting port 45. As shown in FIG.

After that, at time T7, the variable effect started before the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is cut off ends. Also, at this time, a non-display rendering of the returning image 742 is started. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped, and the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 become visible to the player. Also, at this time, the display of the third pending image 702 is started. This third pending image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode. Also, at this time, the motion effects of the three pending images 702 are being executed. Also, at this time, all of the three pending images 702 are visible to the player. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the tenth mode to the second mode. The state at time T7 is the state shown in FIG. 216(6).

Thereafter, at time T8, the non-display rendering of the returning image 742 ends, and the returning image 742 is no longer displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the three reserved images 702, and the small pattern 704 are all easily visible to the player. The state at time T8 is the state shown in FIG. 217(7).
After that, at time T9, the sound output device 9 outputs a forewarning sound for foretelling the start of the next variable effect. The state at time T9 is the state shown in FIG. 217(8).

After that, at time T10, the next variable effect is started. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change. Also, at this time, BGM corresponding to the variable effect being executed is output from the audio output device 9 .
Thereafter, at time T11, display of the variable image 701 is started by moving the first reserved image 702 to the variable pedestal 701P. The state at time T11 is shown in FIG.
is in the state shown in

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off and during the fluctuation of the special symbol executed at the time of power cut-off, that is, when the returning image 742 is displayed, the prize is won. In this case, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed without the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode becoming visible to the player.
In this case, since the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode does not become visible to the player, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode is quickly displayed to the player after the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored. visible. Therefore, it is possible for the player to quickly recognize that the suspension will occur due to the winning of the first starting port 45 while the returning image 742 is being displayed, that is, when the decorative pattern 700 and the stage image 706 are not being displayed. , can give the player a sense of security.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off in a state where a hold exists and then the game machine 1 is restored, a hold An operation is displayed on the image 702 (see FIG. 217(7)).
In this case, the pending image 702 is more noticeable than when the pending image 702 is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to quickly recognize that the hold when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is cut off is not lost due to the cutoff of the power supply.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is shut off in a state of suspension and then restored, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are stopped and displayed when they are redisplayed, but the suspended image 702 is shown in action.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the confusion of the player that he/she cannot recognize which movement display is the movement display, which can occur when the decorative pattern 700 or the small pattern 704 is displayed again when the action display is performed. . Also, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the hold when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is cut off is not lost due to the cutoff of the power supply.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the SP ready-to-win effect or SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed, the hidden pending image 702 is gradually redisplayed (see FIGS. 168(15) and 168(16)). On the other hand, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off in the state of suspension and then restored, the suspension image 702 that has been hidden is displayed at once (see FIG. 217 (7)).
In this case, when the SP ready-to-win effect or the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed, the player can prevent the discomfort caused by the stage image 706 and the like being displayed again, and at the same time confirm that the hidden image 702 has not disappeared. can be recognized. In addition, when the game machine 1 is turned off and then restored, the player can quickly recognize that the hold at the time of shutting down is not lost due to the shutting off of the power, so that the player feels at ease. can give you a feeling. That is, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered by changing the manner in which the pending image 702 is redisplayed depending on whether or not the pending image 702 has been hidden by the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the SP ready-to-win effect or the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed, both the hidden variable image 701 and the suspended image 702 are redisplayed (see FIG. 168 (16)). On the other hand, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off in a state where suspension exists, and then the gaming machine 1 is restored, the suspended image 702 is redisplayed without redisplaying the hidden variable image 701 (FIG. 217 (9 )reference).
In this case, when the SP ready-to-win effect or the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed, the player can be made to recognize that the SP ready-to-win effect or SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed in the variable effect based on the variable image 701. can. In addition, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is shut down in the state of suspension and then the power is restored, the variation image 701 is redisplayed. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that it is done.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is shut off in a state where a hold exists, and then the game machine 1 is restored, the hold image 702 is displayed before the effect sound is output (Fig. 217 (7), Fig. 217). (8)).
In this case, the player can be made to recognize the pending number before the variable effect is started after the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is restored.

In particular, in this embodiment, when winning in the special time-saving gaming state before the start of the special effect, the mode of sound output is switched before the display of the pending image 702 is completed. On the other hand, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored in a state where suspension exists, the display of the suspension image 702 is completed before the effect sound is output. That is, the sound output timing and the , and the display timing of the pending image 702 is reversed.
In this case, depending on the state of the gaming machine 1, by making the player quickly recognize that the production related to the special time-saving game state is started, or making the player quickly recognize the number of reservations, In any state of the gaming machine 1, it is possible to make it difficult for the interest of the player to decrease.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game machine 1 is restored after being shut off, the effect sound is output after the image 742 during restoration is hidden.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the outputted effect sound is the sound related to the restoration of the power supply, and to allow the player to recognize that the effect will be restarted.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when a prize is won while a specific image is displayed in a special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output mode is switched before the specific image is hidden. On the other hand, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the image 742 during restoration is hidden. That is, the time-series relationship between the sound output timing and the image non-display timing is reversed according to whether or not the image is displayed based on the change in the state of the gaming machine 1 .
In this case, depending on whether or not the image is displayed based on the change in the state of the gaming machine 1, the player is made to recognize the performance while suppressing misrecognition of the player, or the player is made to recognize the performance as quickly as possible. By making the above different, regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1, it is possible to make it difficult for the interest of the player to decrease.

Further, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the decorative pattern 700 is displayed.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the output sound is the sound related to the restoration of the power supply, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is the sound related to the variable effect. .

In particular, in the present embodiment, when a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output mode is switched before the decorative pattern 700 becomes easily visible. On the other hand, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the decorative pattern 700 becomes easily visible. That is, depending on whether or not the decorative pattern 700 has become invisible based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1, the player is made to recognize the effect while suppressing the misrecognition of the player, or the effect is one. It is possible to make it difficult for the player's interest to decrease regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1 by making the player recognize it earlier.

Further, in this embodiment, when the game machine 1 is turned off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the small symbol 704 is displayed.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the output sound is the sound related to the restoration of the power supply, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is the sound related to the variable effect. .

In particular, in the present embodiment, when a prize is won in a special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the mode of sound output is switched before the small pattern 704 becomes easily visible. On the other hand, when the game machine 1 is turned off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the small symbol 704 becomes easily visible. That is, depending on whether or not the small pattern 704 has become invisible based on the change in the state of the gaming machine 1, the player is made to recognize the effect while suppressing the misrecognition of the player, or the effect is changed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player's interest to decrease regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1 by making the player recognize it earlier.

Further, in this embodiment, when the game machine 1 is turned off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the top lamp 10b emits light.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the output sound is the sound related to the restoration of the power supply, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is the sound related to the performance.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when a prize is won in a special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the mode of sound output is switched before switching the mode of the top lamp 10b. On the other hand, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the top lamp 10b switches from the off state to the light emission state. That is, depending on whether or not the top lamp 10b has changed to a specific state based on the change in the state of the gaming machine 1, the player is made to recognize the effect while suppressing misrecognition of the player, or the effect is played as soon as possible. It is possible to make it difficult for the interest of the player to be lowered regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1 by making the player recognize it differently.

Further, in this embodiment, when the game machine 1 is turned off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the board lamp 74b emits light.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the output sound is the sound related to the restoration of the power supply, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is the sound related to the performance.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when winning in a special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the mode of sound output is switched before switching the mode of the board lamp 74b. On the other hand, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the board lamp 74b is switched from the off mode to the light emission mode. That is, depending on whether or not the board lamp 74b has changed to a specific mode based on the change in the state of the gaming machine 1, the player is made to recognize the effect while suppressing misrecognition of the player, or the effect is played as soon as possible. It is possible to make it difficult for the interest of the player to be lowered regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1 by making the player recognize it differently.

Further, in this embodiment, when the game machine 1 is turned off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c emit light.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the output sound is the sound related to the restoration of the power supply, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is the sound related to the performance.

In particular, in this embodiment, when winning in a special time-saving game state before the start of the special effect, the sound output mode is switched before switching the mode of the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c. On the other hand, when the game machine 1 is turned off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c are switched from the off state to the light emitting state. That is, depending on whether or not the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c have changed to a specific mode based on the change in the state of the gaming machine 1, the player is allowed to recognize the effect while suppressing misrecognition of the player. By differentiating whether or not the player recognizes the performance as soon as possible, regardless of the state of the game machine 1, it is possible to make it difficult for the player's interest to decrease.

(Variation production example 15)
FIG. 219 and FIG. 220 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 15) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 and 220. FIG. Variation production example 15 is an example of variation production based on winning to the second start port 47 in a special time-saving game state, and is a variation production in the case of returning after the power of the game machine 1 is cut off during execution of the variation production For example. In addition, in the following explanation, mainly the points different from the above-described fluctuation production examples and modifications will be mainly explained, and the explanations of the points that are the same as the fluctuation production examples and modifications may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 219(1), in the second special symbol display device 61, the variable display of the previous special symbol is stopped. In addition, in the first special symbol reservation display 63, the number of reservations for winning to the first starting port 45 is displayed in a mode of "0", that is, it is turned off. Also, in the second special symbol reservation display 64, the number of reservations for the winning prize to the second starting port 47 is displayed in a mode of "3". At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70 . In addition, "0" is displayed in the reservation number display 703 of the first start port 45, and "3" is displayed in the reservation number display 703 of the second start port 47. Also, three pending images 702 are displayed. Moreover, the text of "700" is shown by the special time saving remaining frequency|count image 738. FIG. Also, a background corresponding to the sixth stage is shown as a stage image 706 . Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all of the second mode. Also, although not shown, the BGM corresponding to the previous variable effect is continuously output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 219(2), the second special symbol display device 61 starts the variable display of the next special symbol. In addition, in the second special symbol reservation display 64, the number of reservations for winning to the second starting port 47 is displayed in a mode of "2". In addition, the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 start to change with the start of the variable display of the special design. In addition, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 is switched to "2". Moreover, the display content of the special time saving remaining frequency|count image 738 is updated by "699."

Next, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is cut off, as shown in FIG. The LED in is extinguished. Also, at this time, the first image display device 70, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all extinguished. Also, the audio output device 9 stops outputting sound.

Next, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is restored, as shown in FIG. 219(4), the variation of the special symbols on the second special symbol display 61 is resumed. Also, in the second special symbol reservation display 64, the number of reservations for winning the prize to the second starting port 47 is displayed in a mode of "2".
After that, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the tenth mode.
After that, the returning image 742 and the second hitting image 725 are displayed on the first image display device 70 .
On the other hand, no sound has been output from the audio output device 9 since the power supply of the game machine 1 was restored.

After that, as shown in FIG. 219(5), the special symbols on the second special symbol display 61 continue to fluctuate. Further, in the first image display device 70, the display of the image 742 during recovery is continued. Also, at this time, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the number of reservations for winning the first starting port 45 is displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 63 in a mode of "1". . On the other hand, neither the pending image 702 nor the pending number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . Also, no sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. ” is displayed. On the other hand, neither the pending image 702 nor the pending number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . Also, no sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. ” is displayed. On the other hand, neither the pending image 702 nor the pending number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 220(8), the second special symbol display device 61 stops the variable display of the special symbols.
After that, the non-display effect of the returning image 742 is started, and when the transparency of the returning image 742 increases, the decorative pattern 700, the pending image 702, the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, the stage image 706, and the special time saving residual The count image 738 is not easily visible to the player, but is visible to the player. Also, at this time, the third pending image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode without performing the staged display effects. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 220(9), the non-display rendering of the returning image 742 ends, and the returning image 742 disappears. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the small pattern 704, the execution number image 705, the stage image 706, and the special time saving remaining number image 738 are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, "135", which is the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, is fixed and stopped. Further, "2" is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the first start port 45, and "3" is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the second start port 47. FIG. Moreover, the text of "699" is shown by the special time saving remaining frequency|count image 738. FIG. Also, at this time, the action rendering of the pending image 702 is being executed, and all of the three pending images 702 have moved to the right from their initial positions before the action rendering is started. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (10), the sound output device 9 outputs a forewarning sound for foretelling the start of the next variable effect. Also, at this time, the action rendering of the pending image 702 is continued, and all of the three pending images 702 are moved to the left from the initial positions before the action rendering is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (11), the second special symbol display device 61 starts to variably display the next special symbol. In addition, in the second special symbol reservation display 64, the number of reservations for winning to the second starting port 47 is displayed in a mode of "2".
After that, with the start of variable display of the special symbols, the variation of the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 is started. In addition, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 is switched to "2". Further, the moving image 701 is displayed by moving the first reserved image 702 to the moving base 701P. Also, BGM corresponding to the variable effect being executed is output from the audio output device 9 . Although illustration is omitted, thereafter, the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 are fixed and stopped along with the stop of the special design, and the variation image 701 is hidden.

(Variation production example 16)
FIGS. 221 to 223 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 16) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223. FIG. Variation production example 16 is an example of the first variation production based on the winning to the first start port 45 in the special time-saving game state, when the game machine 1 is turned off during the execution of the variation production and then returns. This is an example of a variation effect. In addition, in the following explanation, mainly the points different from the above-described fluctuation production examples and modifications will be mainly explained, and the explanations of the points that are the same as the fluctuation production examples and modifications may be omitted.

First, in the normal game state, the final variable performance of the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving game state. Further, when a predetermined time elapses without the game ball winning in either the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 after the end of the final variable effect, as shown in FIG. 221 (1), A customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the eighth mode. Also, at this time, a notification sound for notifying that the game is in the special time-saving gaming state is output from the audio output device 9 . The state shown in FIG. 221(1) is the same state as the state shown in FIG.
In addition, in the second special symbol reservation display 64, the number of reservations for winning to the second starting port 47 is displayed in a mode of "0". In other words, the LED in the second special symbol reservation display 64 is turned off.

Next, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 221 (2), the output from the sound output device 9 of the sound effect that the game machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state be started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 221(3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the eighth mode to the second mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 221(4), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 is increased, so that the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, and the execution count image 705 are displayed. , the stage image 706, and the remaining number-of-reaches image 708 are not easily visible to the player, but are visible to the player. Also, a background corresponding to the first stage is shown as a stage image 706 . Moreover, at this time, the sound effect that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 221(5), the non-display rendering of the customer waiting image 710 progresses, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 further increases. At this time, along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variation of the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 is started. At this time, the operation at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is variably displayed at high speed. Also, at this time, “1” is displayed in the number-of-holds display 703 of the first starting port 45 . Also, at this time, the display of the pending image 702 is started. On the other hand, the staged display effects are not executed, and the pending image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode. Moreover, at this time, the sound effect that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 221(6), the non-display rendering of the customer waiting image 710 ends, and the customer waiting image 710 disappears. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the pending image 702, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining reach count image 708 are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the operation at the start of fluctuation is in progress. Moreover, at this time, the sound effect that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 222(7), the movement at the start of fluctuation ends, and the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at high speed. Further, the variable image 701 is displayed by enlarging the suspended image 702 while moving to the variable pedestal 701P. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "0". Also, at this time, "0", which is the countdown image 732, is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the sound effect of the gaming machine 1 being controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9 . Also, although not shown, the BGM corresponding to the variable effect being executed is output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off, as shown in FIG. 222(8), the first image display device 70, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c Everything goes off. Also, the audio output device 9 stops outputting sound.

Next, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is restored, the variable display of the special symbols is resumed. After that, as shown in FIG. 222(9), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the tenth mode.
After that, a returning image 742 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . On the other hand, no sound is output from the audio output device 9 .
Also, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 while the returning image 742 is displayed, the number of pending prizes in the second starting port 47 is displayed in the second special symbol reservation display 64 as " 1”. On the other hand, neither the pending image 702 nor the pending number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70 .

Next, when the special symbol stops fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 222(10), the non-display effect of the returning image 742 is started, and the transparency of the returning image 742 increases. Then, by increasing the transparency of the returning image 742, the decorative pattern 700, the pending image 702, the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, the stage image 706, and the special time saving remaining number image 738 are for the player Although it is not easily visible, it becomes visible to the player. Also, at this time, the pending image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode without performing the staged display effect. Also, as a stage image 706, a background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the tenth mode to the second mode. Also, no sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 222(11), the non-display rendering of the returning image 742 ends, and the returning image 742 disappears. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the small pattern 704, the execution number image 705, the stage image 706, and the special time saving remaining number image 738 are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, "135", which is the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, is fixed and stopped. In addition, “0” is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the first starting port 45 and “1” is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the second starting port 47 . Moreover, the text of "749" is shown by the special time saving remaining frequency|count image 738. FIG. Also, at this time, the action effect of the pending image 702 is being executed, and the pending image 702 has moved to the left from the initial position before the action effect is started. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 222 (12), the sound output device 9 outputs a forewarning sound for foretelling the start of the next variable effect. Also, at this time, the action rendering of the pending image 702 is continued, and the pending image 702 has moved to the right from the initial position before the action rendering is started.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbols is started, as shown in FIG. 223 (13), the variation of the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 is started. Also, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 is switched to "0". Further, the moving image 701 is displayed by moving the first reserved image 702 to the moving base 701P. Moreover, the display content of the special time saving remaining frequency|count image 738 is updated by "748." Also, the BGM corresponding to the variable effect being executed is output from the audio output device 9 . Although illustration is omitted, thereafter, the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 are fixed and stopped along with the stop of the special design, and the variation image 701 is hidden.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed during fluctuations in the special time-saving gaming state, the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is shut off and then returns, when the special time-saving A special image corresponding to the game state is displayed.
In this case, even if the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is shut off, the player can quickly recognize that the gaming machine 1 is in the special time-saving gaming state.

It should be noted that when the fluctuation in the special time-saving game state is stopped and the decorative pattern 700 and the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state are displayed, the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored. The decorative pattern 700 and the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state are displayed again. In this case, unless winning to the first start port 45 or winning to the second start port 47 occurs, the special image corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state is not displayed.

(Variation effect example 17)
FIG. 224 and FIG. 225 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 17) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 and 225. FIG. Variation production example 17 is an example of variation production based on winning to the first start port 45 in the normal game state, and is an example of variation production in the case of recovery after the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is cut off during execution of the variation production. is. In addition, in the following explanation, mainly the points different from the above-described fluctuation production examples and modifications will be mainly explained, and the explanations of the points that are the same as the fluctuation production examples and modifications may be omitted.

First, after the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state, the final variation production in the special time-saving gaming state is completed, so that the gaming machine 1 is not controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state and is normal again. It is controlled to a game state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 224(1), "421", which is a highly decorative decorative pattern 700, is fixed and stopped on the first image display device . Also, at this time, the background corresponding to the fifth stage is shown as the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state. Also, at this time, four pending images 702, an execution count image 705, and a left-handed image 730 are displayed. Also, the execution count image 705 shows the text “1253 GAME”. Also, in the first special symbol display device 60, the variable display of the previous special symbol is stopped. Further, in the first special symbol reservation display 63, the number of reservations for winning the first starting port 45 is displayed in a mode of "4". The state shown in FIG. 224(1) is the same state as the state shown in FIG.

Next, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 224(2), the first special symbol display 60 starts to variably display the next special symbol. Also, in the first special symbol reservation display 63, the number of reservations for winning the first starting port 45 is displayed in a mode of "3". In addition, along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variation of the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 is started. Also, BGM corresponding to the variable effect being executed is output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off, as shown in FIG. 224(3), the LEDs in the first special symbol display device 60 and the first special symbol reservation display device 63 are extinguished. Also, at this time, the first image display device 70, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all extinguished. Also, the audio output device 9 stops outputting sound.

Next, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is restored, as shown in FIG. 224(4), the variation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 60 is resumed. Also, in the first special symbol reservation display 63, the number of reservations for winning the first starting port 45 is displayed in a mode of "3".
After that, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in ten modes.
After that, a returning image 742 is displayed on the first image display device 70 .
On the other hand, no sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

After that, as shown in FIG. 224(5), the special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 continue to fluctuate. Further, in the first image display device 70, the display of the image 742 during recovery is continued. Also, at this time, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the number of reservations for winning the first starting port 45 is displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 63 in a mode of "4". . On the other hand, neither the pending image 702 nor the pending number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 224(6), in the first special symbol display device 60, the variable display of the special symbols stops.
After that, the non-display effect of the returning image 742 is started, and the transparency of the returning image 742 increases, so that the decorative pattern 700, the pending image 702, the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, the execution number image 705, and Although the stage image 706 is not easily visible to the player, it becomes visible to the player. Also, at this time, the fourth pending image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode without performing the staged display effects. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the tenth mode to the second mode. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 225(7), the non-display effect of the returning image 742 ends, and the returning image 742 disappears. As a result, the decorative symbol 700, the reserved image 702, the small symbol 704, the number-of-executions image 705, and the stage image 706 are easily visible to the player. Also, "135", which is the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, is fixed and stopped. In addition, "4" is shown in the number display 703 of the first starting port 45. As shown in FIG. Also, a background corresponding to the first stage is shown as a stage image 706 . Also, at this time, the action rendering of the pending image 702 is being executed, and all of the four pending images 702 are rotating clockwise from the initial position before the action rendering is started. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9 .
Here, in the number-of-executions image 705, contents different from the contents displayed immediately before the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off (see FIG. 224(2)) are displayed. In the illustrated example, the execution count image 705 shows the text "???".

Next, as shown in FIG. 225(8), the sound output device 9 outputs a forewarning sound for foretelling the start of the next variable effect. Also, at this time, the action rendering of the pending image 702 is continued, and the four pending images 702 are further rotated clockwise.

Next, as shown in FIG. 225(9), the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the next special symbol. Also, in the first special symbol reservation display 63, the number of reservations for winning the first starting port 45 is displayed in a mode of "3".
After that, the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started. In addition, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "3". Also, BGM corresponding to the variable effect being executed is output from the audio output device 9 . Also, at this time, a through effect is executed. The through performance is a performance for notifying that the game machine 1 is again controlled to the normal game state without executing the variation performance that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a big win in the special time-saving game state. In the through effect, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the eleventh mode. The eleventh mode is a mode of periodically blinking purple light, which is different from any of the first to tenth modes. Also, the blinking cycle in the eleventh aspect is, for example, 2.0 seconds. That is, the flashing cycle in the eleventh mode is longer than the flashing cycle in the winning light effect and the flashing cycle for suggesting or reporting the occurrence of an error.

In this way, the special time-saving game state can be executed only once between the jackpots, and when the power is cut off during the normal game state after the special time-saving game state and then returns, the special time-saving game state has been executed. It is possible to execute a specific notification (display of the execution count image 705 “???”, light emission of the lamp in a specific manner) suggesting that. As a result, it is possible to give a friendly notification to the player, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the special time-saving game state can be executed only once between the jackpots, and when the power is cut off during the normal game state after the special time-saving game state and then returns, the first notification that the power is restored. (Display of image 742 during return) and second notification that suggests that the special time-saving gaming state has been executed (execution number image 705 “???” display, light emission in a specific mode of lamp) can be executed is. As a result, it is possible to give a friendly notification to the player, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

Also, when power is cut off and then restored during the normal game state after the end of the special time-saving game state, the error lamp is flashed with a specific notification, but is flashed in a manner different from that at the time of an error (magnetic error, etc.).
Further, the specific notification is performed by setting the information (execution count image 705) displayed during the normal game state to the specific display mode (“???”).
In addition, when it is controlled during the normal game state without going through the jackpot game from the special time-saving game state, regardless of whether the power supply of the game machine 1 is shut off, the number of times of execution image 705 has "???" may be displayed. That is, during the normal game state after the end of the special time-saving game state and before returning after the power is cut off, the first specific notification (execution number image 705 "???") is performed, and after the power is cut off After that, the first specific notification and the second specific notification (emission of the lamp in a specific mode) may be performed.

In addition, when the game machine 1 is controlled from the normal time-saving game state to the normal game state, the first stage is set when the game machine 1 returns after the power is shut off. is displayed. On the other hand, when the game machine 1 is controlled from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state without going through the jackpot game, the clear negative image 744 is not displayed when the power is turned off and then restored. That is, if the power is cut off in the second production mode (fifth stage) after the end of the normal time-saving game state and then returns, even if it is controlled to the first production mode (first stage) after returning, the presence or absence of RAM clear Such specific notification (display of clear negative image 744, etc.) can be executed, and when the power is cut off in the second production mode (fifth stage) after the end of the special time-saving game state and then returns, the first production mode after recovery Even if it is controlled to the (first stage), the specific notification (display of the clear negative image 744, etc.) related to the presence or absence of RAM clear is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of useful information and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving game state, and then, without being controlled to the normal time-saving game state, is again controlled to the normal game state. Although it has been described that the execution count image 705 shows the text “???” when the device returns after being shut down, the present invention is not limited to this.
After being controlled to the special time-saving game state, when it is controlled to the normal game state again without being controlled to the normal time-saving game state, the normal game state regardless of whether the power of the game machine 1 is cut off. When the stage image 706 corresponding to is displayed (see FIG. 224(1)), the execution count image 705 may display the text “???”.

(Variation production example 18)
FIG. 226 is a diagram showing one aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 18) of the variation effect of the decorative design 700 will be described with reference to FIG. Variation production example 18 is an example of variation production when a game ball enters the second start port 47 while the look-ahead effect based on the winning of the first start port 45 is being executed. In addition, in the following explanation, mainly the points different from the above-described fluctuation production examples and modifications will be mainly explained, and the explanations of the points that are the same as the fluctuation production examples and modifications may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 226(1), the decoration design 700 and the small design 704 are fixed and stopped by the effect control section 130m in accordance with the end of the variation of the previous special design. Also, at this time, two pending images 702 are displayed. Also, the second pending image 702 is displayed in green. The display of this green pending image 702 is an example of a look-ahead effect. Also, as a stage image 706, a background corresponding to the first stage is displayed. Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all of the second mode. Also, although not shown, the BGM corresponding to the previous variable effect is continuously output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 226(2), the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, at this time, the zone effect is started and the zone notification image 743 is displayed. Also, the display content of the stage image 706 changes during execution of the zone effect. In the illustrated example, a background corresponding to the eighth stage is shown as the stage image 706 .

Next, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 47 as shown in FIG. 226(3).
Next, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 226(4), the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "412" are temporarily stopped and then fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the display mode of the first pending image 702 is switched from the green display mode to the normal display mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 226(5), the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 start to change with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 is switched to "0". That is, the variable effect being executed at this time is the variable effect based on the winning to the second starting port 47 . Also, at this time, the zone notification image 743 is hidden. Also, a background corresponding to the first stage is shown as a stage image 706 .

Next, as the special symbols stop fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 226(6), the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "721" are fixed and stopped. After that, the first reserved image 702 moves to the variable pedestal 701P, and the variable effect based on the winning to the first starting port 45 is executed. In this variable effect, the variable image 701 is displayed in the normal display mode, and when the variable effect ends, the variable image 701 is hidden.

In this way, when the variation based on the winning to the second starting port 47 is given priority over the variation based on the winning to the first starting port 45, the first starting port 45 during the normal game state During the execution of the look-ahead performance based on the prize winning, when the winning to the second start port 47 occurs, the look-ahead performance based on the prize to the first start port 45 is terminated. Therefore, there is no inconvenience that the look-ahead performance based on the winning to the first starting port 45 is disturbed by the winning to the second starting port 47, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the special 1 look-ahead effect (display of the green pending image 702) is ended at the determination timing (end timing) of the variation based on the winning to the first start port 45. - 特許庁
Further, when the look-ahead effect in which the background changes is in progress, the look-ahead effect is ended at the variable start timing based on the winning to the second start port 47.例文帳に追加
Further, for example, when the look-ahead effect is executed based on the winning to the first starting port 45, during the stop of the variable effect based on the winning to the first starting port 45, the game ball to the second starting port 47 may win a prize. In this case, the look-ahead effect is terminated at the timing of the winning of the second starting port 47.例文帳に追加

(Variation production example 19)
FIG. 227 is a diagram showing one aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation production example 19) of the variation production will be described with reference to FIG. Variation production example 19 is an example of variation production based on winning to the second starting port 47 in the normal game state. In addition, in the following description, points different from the above-described variable effect examples will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the variable effect examples may be omitted.

First, after the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state, the final variation production in the special time-saving gaming state is completed, so that the gaming machine 1 is not controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state and is normal again. It is controlled to a game state. After that, as shown in FIG. 227(1), the first transition image 728 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . In addition, “0” is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the first starting port 45 and “1” is shown in the reservation number display 703 of the second starting port 47 . Also, at this time, "254", which is the small pattern 704, is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 227(2), the variation of the small symbol 704 is started along with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Also, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 is switched to "0". Also, at this time, when the game ball wins the first starting hole, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45. - 特許庁On the other hand, the pending image 702 is not displayed, and the winning sound for notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is not output.
However, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 while the first transition image 728 is displayed, a winning sound may be output.

Next, as the fluctuation of the special symbols stops, as shown in FIG. 227(3), "421", which is three small symbols 704, are displayed together and fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, when the game ball wins the first starting hole, "2" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting hole 45. - 特許庁On the other hand, the pending image 702 is not displayed, and the winning sound for notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is not output.

Then, when the variable effect based on the winning to the second starting port 47 is completed in a state where there is no suspension based on the winning to the second starting port 47, the first image display device 70 is displayed as shown in FIG. , "421", which is a highly decorative decorative pattern 700, is determined and stopped. Also, at this time, the background corresponding to the fifth stage is shown as the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state. Also, at this time, two pending images 702 are displayed. These two reserved images 702 are displayed in the completed display mode without staged display effects. Also, although illustration is omitted, both of the two pending images 702 are executing an action effect. Also, the variation image 701 is not displayed.

Next, with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 227(5), the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 is started. Also, at this time, “1” is displayed in the number-of-holds display 703 of the first starting port 45 . Also, at this time, the second reserved image 702 moves toward the first reserved pedestal 702P. Further, the moving image 701 is displayed by moving the first pending image 702 toward the moving base 701P. Although illustration is omitted, thereafter, the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 are fixed and stopped as the special design stops changing.

(Variation production example 20)
228 to 234 are diagrams showing example 20 of variation rendering.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect example (variable effect example 20) will be described with reference to FIGS. 228 to 234. FIG. Variation production example 20 is an example of variation production when a game ball enters the first start hole 45 in the normal game state. In the following description, differences from the variable performance examples and modifications described above will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the variable performance examples and modifications may be omitted.

First, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped as the previous special pattern stops changing. Next, when a predetermined period of time elapses without the game ball winning either the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 in a state where there is no reservation for winning the first starting port 45, FIG. 228 (1 ), a customer waiting image 710 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number-of-executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining-number-of-reaches image 708 are difficult or invisible to the player. On the other hand, the pending number display 703 continues to be easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the eighth mode. Moreover, at this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, when the game ball wins in the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 228(2), the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number-of-executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining-number-of-reaches image 708 continue to be difficult or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all continue to be in the eighth mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 228(3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the eighth mode to the second mode. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number-of-executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining-number-of-reaches image 708 continue to be difficult or invisible to the player. At this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 228(4), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is executed, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 is increased, so that the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, and the execution count image 705 are displayed. , the stage image 706, and the remaining number-of-reaches image 708 are not easily visible to the player, but are visible to the player. On the other hand, neither the moving image 701 nor the reserved image 702 are displayed. At this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 228(5), the non-display rendering of the customer waiting image 710 progresses, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 further increases. At this time, along with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variation of the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 is started. At this time, the operation at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is variably displayed at high speed. Also, at this time, “1” is displayed in the number-of-holds display 703 of the first starting port 45 . Also, at this time, the display of the pending image 702 is started. More specifically, the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode without performing the staged display effects. This reserved image 702 is not easily visible to the player, but is visible to the player. At this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 228(6), the non-display rendering of the customer waiting image 710 ends, and the customer waiting image 710 disappears. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the pending image 702, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining reach count image 708 are easily visible to the player. In addition, the operation at the start of fluctuation is in progress. At this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 229(7), the movement at the time of start of fluctuation ends, and the fluctuation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. Further, the variable image 701 is displayed by enlarging the pending image 702 while moving to the variable base 701P. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "0". Also, at this time, the winning sound is not output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as the game ball enters the first start port 45, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first start port 45, as shown in FIG. 229(8). Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position away from the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 229(9), the staged display effect is completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Also, the prize winning sound is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 229(10), "4" which is the left decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 229 (11), "4" which is the right decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, and ready-to-win effect is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 229 (12), the development effect is executed. In the development effect, a movable effect is executed and the first emphasized image 711 is displayed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the second mode to the fourth mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 230 (13), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. During execution of the SP reach effect, an SP reach image 712 is displayed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 230 (14), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. An SPSP ready-to-win image 713 is displayed during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 230(15), the promotion effect is executed and the button operation image 714 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 17 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, as shown in FIG.
Next, as shown in FIG. 230(17), the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed.
Next, when the first eye-catching image 715 is hidden, as shown in FIG. 230 (18), the three decorative patterns 700 "434" are temporarily stopped in a state where they can be easily visually recognized by the player. It is

Then, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 231 (19), the three decorative symbols 700 and "434", which is the small symbol 704, are fixed and stopped. In addition, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "201 GAME", and the display content of the remaining reach count image 708 is updated to "299 more". Also, at this time, the variable image 701 is hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 231 (20), the variation of the small symbol 704 is started along with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. On the other hand, the variation of the decorative pattern 700 has not started. Further, the pending image 702 is not moved toward the movable pedestal 701P and is displayed on the pending pedestal 702P.

Next, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. In the illustrated example, the pending image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position above the first pending pedestal 702P. This reserved image 702 is displayed in the first-stage display mode (see FIG. 160(1)) in the staged display effect. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.

Next, as the staged display effect of the pending image 702 progresses, as shown in FIG. A pending image 702 having a display mode is displayed. Also, at this time, the two pending images 702 are displayed on the first pending pedestal 702P so as to overlap each other. More specifically, the pending image 702 having the third stage display mode in the staged display effect and the pending image 702 having the completed display mode are displayed so as to overlap each other. Also, at this time, the variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the operation at the start of variation is started. At this time, the output of the winning sound continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 231(23), when the staged display rendering of the pending image 702 is completed, the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the complete display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, the pending image 702 displayed in the complete display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P in the example shown in FIG. . Also, at this time, the operation at the start of fluctuation is in progress. Also, the prize winning sound is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 231 (24), the movement at the time of start of fluctuation ends, and the fluctuation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster.

Next, when the game ball wins in the first starting hole 45, the sound output device 9 outputs a winning sound for notifying the winning in the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 232 (25). Also, at this time, “2” is displayed in the number-of-holds display 703 of the first starting port 45 . In addition, the second pending image 702 is displayed on the second pending pedestal 702P in the completed display mode without the staged display effect being performed, that is, without the incomplete display mode becoming visible to the player. Is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 232 (26), "7" which is the left decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 232 (27), "1" which is the right decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped.

Next, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 232 (28), the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 for notifying the winning in the first starting port 45 is started. . Also, at this time, “3” is displayed in the number-of-holds display 703 of the first starting port 45 . Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the third pending image 702 is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in an incomplete display mode at a position away from the third pending pedestal 702P.
Next, as shown in FIG. 232(29), the staged display rendering is completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the complete display mode on the third pending pedestal 702P. Also, the prize winning sound is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output.

Then, along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 232 (30), "721", which is the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, is fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "202 games", and the display content of the remaining reach count image 708 is updated to "298 more".

Next, as shown in FIG. 233 (31), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, the variation of the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 is started. In addition, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "2".
Then, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 233 (32), "483", which is the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, is fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "203 games", and the display content of the remaining reach count image 708 is updated to "297 more".

Next, as shown in FIG. 233 (33), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, the variation of the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 is started. In addition, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "1".
Then, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 233 (34), "532", which is the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, is fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "204 games", and the display content of the remaining reach count image 708 is updated to "296 more".

Next, as shown in FIG. 233 (35), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, the variation of the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 is started. Also, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "0".
Then, along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 233 (36), "327", which is the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, is fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "205 games", and the display content of the remaining reach count image 708 is updated to "295 more".

Then, when a predetermined period of time elapses without the game ball entering either the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 after the special symbol stops fluctuating, the adjustment image appears as shown in FIG. 234 (37). 716 and menu image 717 are displayed. At this time, the audio output device 9 no longer outputs sound.
Further, after the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, when a predetermined time elapses without the game ball entering either the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. 234 (38), , a customer waiting image 710 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number-of-executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining-number-of-reaches image 708 are difficult or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the second mode to the eighth mode. Further, the state in which no sound is output from the audio output device 9 continues. The state shown in FIG. 234(38) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 228(1).

As described above, in the variable effect example 20, when a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal game state, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode is made invisible or invisible, and then the completion display is performed. It has been described that the pending image 702 of the aspect is visible or easily visible. Here, in the normal game state, even if a prize is won while the stage image 706, the adjustment image 716, and the menu image 717 corresponding to the first stage are being displayed, the example shown in the variable effect example 20 , the same production may be executed. That is, in the normal game state, if a prize is won while the stage image 706, the adjustment image 716, and the menu image 717 corresponding to the first stage are displayed, the staged display effect is not executed, and the pending image in the incomplete display mode is displayed. The pending image 702 in the completed presentation may be easily visible while 702 remains invisible.

As described above, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 of the unfinished display size is rendered invisible or invisible.
Even if a prize is won while the specific image is displayed, if the player visually recognizes the reserved image 702 of the incomplete display size and then the reserved image 702 of the completed display size, the specific image After starting the non-display effect of , it is necessary to start displaying the pending image 702 of the unfinished display size. In this case, the reserved image 702 of the completed display size is more likely to be won when the specific image is displayed than when the specific image is not displayed. display timing is delayed. Therefore, if a prize is won while the specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 of the unfinished display size is made invisible or invisible, and the reserved image 702 of the completed display size is displayed without delay, thereby winning a prize. It is possible to prevent the display timing of the reserved image 702 from being deviated from the completed display size depending on whether or not the specific image is displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while the specific image is being displayed, the unfinished pending image 702 is rendered invisible or invisible.
Even if a prize is won while the specific image is displayed, if the player visually recognizes the reserved image 702 in the unfinished form and then the reserved image 702 in the completed form, the specific image will not be displayed. After starting the display effect, it is necessary to start displaying the pending image 702 in unfinished form. In this case, winning while the specific image is displayed is more likely than winning while the specific image is not displayed. Display timing is delayed. Therefore, if a prize is won while the specific image is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the unfinished form is made invisible or invisible, and the reserved image 702 in the completed form is displayed without delay. It is possible to prevent the display timing of the reserved image 702 from being deviated depending on whether the image is displayed or not.

Further, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while the specific image is being displayed, the pending image 702 with incomplete transparency is made invisible or invisible.
Even if a prize is won while the specific image is displayed, if the player visually recognizes the reserved image 702 with incomplete transparency and then the reserved image 702 with completed transparency, the specific image After starting the non-display effect of , it is necessary to start displaying the pending image 702 with incomplete transparency. In this case, winning while the specific image is being displayed is more likely than winning while the specific image is not being displayed. display timing is delayed. Therefore, if a prize is won while the specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 with the incomplete transparency is rendered invisible or invisible, and the reserved image 702 with the completed transparency is displayed without delay. It is possible to prevent the display timing of the pending image 702 from shifting depending on whether or not the specific image is displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, if a prize is won while the specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 of the incomplete motion mode is rendered invisible or invisible.
Even if a prize is won while the specific image is displayed, if the player visually recognizes the pending image 702 of the unfinished motion mode and then makes the player visually recognize the action effect of the pending image 702, the specific image is displayed. After starting the non-display effect, it is necessary to start displaying the pending image 702 of the unfinished motion mode. In this case, the action effect of the reserved image 702 is more effective when the specific image is displayed than when the specific image is not displayed. Execution timing will be delayed. Therefore, if a prize is won while the specific image is displayed, the reserved image 702 in the unfinished motion mode is made invisible or invisible, and the action effect of the reserved image 702 is performed without delay, so that the specified image is displayed at the time of winning. It is possible to prevent the execution timing of the action effect by the pending image 702 from being shifted depending on whether or not the image is displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while the specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 at the incomplete display position is rendered invisible or invisible.
Even if a prize is won while the specific image is displayed, if the player visually recognizes the reserved image 702 at the incomplete display position and then visually recognizes the reserved image 702 at the completed display position, the specific image After starting the non-display effect of , it is necessary to start displaying the pending image 702 at the incomplete display position. In this case, the pending image 702 at the complete display position is more likely to be won when the specific image is displayed than when the specific image is not displayed. display timing is delayed. Therefore, if a prize is won while the specific image is being displayed, the reserved image 702 at the incomplete display position is made invisible or invisible, and the reserved image 702 at the completed display position is displayed without delay, thereby winning a prize. It is possible to prevent the display timing of the reserved image 702 at the completed display position from being shifted depending on whether or not the specific image is displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, if a prize is won while the specific image is displayed, the sound output mode is switched before the pending image 702 becomes visible to the player. Therefore, regardless of the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that the prize has been won.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off in a state where a hold exists and then returns, the state where the hold image 702 is visible to the player is displayed before the effect sound is output. Become. That is, the sound output timing and the , and the display timing of the pending image 702 is reversed.
In this case, depending on the state of the gaming machine 1, by making the player quickly recognize the start of the effect or quickly recognize the number of reservations, the gaming machine 1 can Even in the case of the state of , it is possible to make it difficult for the player's interest to decrease.

Further, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while the specific image is being displayed, the sound output mode is switched before the specific image is completely hidden. Therefore, even when the player takes his or her eyes off the gaming machine 1, it is easy for the player to quickly recognize that the player has won a prize.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is being displayed, the sound output mode is switched before the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started. Therefore, even if the player cannot recognize the game situation from the display contents of the first image display device 70 by the customer waiting image 710, the player can quickly recognize the winning.

Further, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while the specific image is displayed, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, and the movable member lamp are displayed before the reserved image 702 becomes visible to the player. 74c and button lamp 17c. Therefore, regardless of the display content of the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that the prize has been won.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the next variable effect after the SP ready-to-win effect or the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed, if a prize is won during a predetermined period, the unfinished display mode of the pending image 702 is visually recognized. The reserved image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed without the display (see FIG. 232 (25)). In this way, in the variable performance next to the variable performance in which the SP ready-to-win performance or SPSP ready-to-win performance has been executed, the execution of the SP ready-to-win performance or SPSP ready-to-reach performance is not recognized by not allowing the player to visually recognize the specific performance. A player can enjoy a sense of accomplishment for a long time.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the specific image is displayed in the normal game state and the prize is won in the first stage, the unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode) , unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) are rendered invisible or invisible (see FIG. 228(6)). On the other hand, when the specific image is displayed in the normal game state and the prize is won in the second stage, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode is made visible or easily visible (FIG. 166 (2 )reference).

Note that in the present embodiment, when the background as the stage image 706 is the first stage and when the background is the second stage, the sound output when the prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Although the timing for switching modes, the timing for switching modes of various lamps, and the timing for displaying or hiding an image are different in chronological relationship, the present invention is not limited to this.
Even when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed and the prize is won in the second stage, the timing of switching the mode of sound output, the timing of switching the mode of various lamps, and the image are displayed. The time-series relationship with the timing of turning on or off may be the same as in the case of winning when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed and in the first stage. That is, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed and the prize is won in the second stage, first, the state in which the sound is not output is switched to the state in which the winning sound is output (Fig. 228 (2 )), and then, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may all be switched from the eighth mode to the second mode (see FIG. 228(3)). After that, after starting the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the stage image 706, etc. may be made visible to the player (see FIG. 228 (4)). ). Furthermore, after that, after making the pending image 702 visible to the player, the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 may be completed (see FIGS. 228(5) and 228(6)).

(Variation production example 21)
235 and 236 are diagrams showing example 21 of variation presentation.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 235 and 236, another specific example (variation effect example 21) of the variation effect example will be described. In the variation production example 21, the variation production is executed twice. The first variable performance of the two times of variable performance is a variable performance when a game ball enters the first start port 45 in the normal time-saving game state. In addition, the second variable performance of the two times of variable performance is a variable performance when the game ball wins the second starting port 47 in the normal time-saving game state. In the following description, differences from the variable performance examples and modifications described above will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the variable performance examples and modifications may be omitted.

First, the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 235(1), the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 "444" are fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, a background corresponding to the third stage is shown as a stage image 706 . In addition, a text of “100 times” is displayed in the normal time saving remaining number image 726 . In addition, “1” is shown in the pending number display 703 of the first start port 45 and “0” is shown in the pending number display 703 of the second start port 47 . Neither the moving image 701 nor the pending image 702 are displayed. Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all of the second mode. Also, although not shown, BGM corresponding to the normal time-saving gaming state is continuously output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 235(2), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, the variation of the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 is started. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "0".
Next, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the second starting port 47 as shown in FIG. 235(3). Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the pending image 702 is displayed in the incomplete display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 for notifying the winning to the second starting port 47 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 235(4), the staged display rendering is completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the complete display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Also, the prize winning sound is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output.
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, as shown in FIG. 235(5), "853", which is the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, is fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 235(6), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, the variation of the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 is started. Also, at this time, the display content of the normal time saving remaining number image 726 is updated to "99 times". Further, the moving image 701 is displayed by moving the pending image 702 to the moving pedestal 701P. Also, at this time, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45. - 特許庁On the other hand, the pending image 702 is not displayed, and the staged display effects are not executed. Also, the winning sound for notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is not output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 236(7), along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, "421", which is the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, is fixed and stopped. Also, the variable image 701 is hidden.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47 while the variable effect based on the winning to the first starting port 45 is executed, the pending image of the incomplete display mode 702 becomes visible or easily visible to the player. On the other hand, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 while the variable effect based on the winning in the second starting port 47 is being executed, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode is displayed to the player. not become visible.

(Variation production example 22)
FIG. 237 is a diagram showing example 22 of variation effect.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 22) of the variation effect example will be described with reference to FIG. Variation production example 22 is an example in which a variation production based on winning to the first start port 45 is performed as the first fluctuation production in the special time-saving gaming state. In the following description, differences from the variable performance examples and modifications described above will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the variable performance examples and modifications may be omitted.

First, in the normal game state, the final variable performance of the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving game state. Further, when a predetermined period of time elapses without the game ball winning in either the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 after the end of the final variable performance, as shown in FIG. 237(1), A customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the eighth mode. Also, at this time, a notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify that the special time-saving gaming state is in effect. The state shown in FIG. 237(1) is the same state as the state shown in FIG.
Although illustration is omitted, the background corresponding to the second stage is displayed as the stage image 706 until the customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Since the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the stage image 706 is in a state of being difficult or invisible to the player.

Next, when the game ball wins the first start port 45, as shown in FIG. 237 (2), the output from the sound output device 9 of the effect sound that the game machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state be started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 237(3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all switched from the eighth mode to the second mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 237(4), the customer waiting image 710 is hidden. Also, at this time, the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started. At this time, the operation at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is variably displayed at high speed. Also, at this time, “1” is displayed in the number-of-holds display 703 of the first starting port 45 . Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in the incomplete display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Moreover, at this time, the sound effect that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 237(5), the fluctuation start operation proceeds. Also, at this time, the staged display effects are completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Moreover, at this time, the sound effect that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 237(6), the movement at the time of start of fluctuation ends, and the fluctuation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. Further, the variable image 701 is displayed by enlarging the suspended image 702 while moving to the variable pedestal 701P. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "0". Also, at this time, "0", which is the countdown image 732, is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the sound effect of the gaming machine 1 being controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9 . Although illustration is omitted, after this, the second transition image 734 (see FIG. 197 (16)) is displayed, and after the stage image 706 switches to the background corresponding to the sixth stage (see FIG. 198 (20)), , the variable performance ends.

As described above, in the variable production example 22, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state and when the prize is won in the second stage, the pending image 702 of the incomplete display mode Making visible or readily visible and then rendering the pending image 702 in the completed presentation visible or easily visible has been described. Here, in the special time-saving gaming state, before the start of the first variation effect, stage image 706 corresponding to the second stage, adjustment image 716, and when the menu image 717 is displayed when winning However, the same effect as the example shown in the variable effect example 22 may be executed. That is, in the special time-saving gaming state, before the start of the first variable production, stage image 706 corresponding to the second stage, adjustment image 716, and when winning when the menu image 717 is displayed incomplete display The pending image 702 of the aspect may be made visible or readily visible, and then the pending image 702 of the completed presentation aspect may be made visible or readily visible.

As described above, even if the first start port 45 is won when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, Incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) pending image 702 may be made visible or easily visible to the player.
In particular, in the present embodiment, when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state and the game ball wins in the first start port 45 when it is the first stage, a specific incomplete display mode ( Unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) are made invisible or invisible to the player (see FIG. 196 (10)). On the other hand, when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state and when the game ball wins the first start port 45 when it is the second stage, the reserved image 702 of the predetermined incomplete display mode is displayed. Make it visible or easily visible to the player. When the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state and when the game ball wins in the second start port 47 when it is the first stage or the second stage, the reserved image 702 is displayed in any display mode However, you may choose not to display it. However, even when the game ball wins the second start port 47 when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state and is the first stage or the second stage, the reserved image 702 is may be displayed.

In addition, when the game ball wins the first start port 45 before the start of the special performance in the special time-saving game state and when the special symbols are stopped in the first stage and there is no suspension. , the reserved image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made invisible or invisible, and then the completed display mode The reserved image 702 of (completed size, completed form, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be visible or easily visible. On the other hand, in the special time-saving game state, the game ball wins the first start port 45 when the special design is stopped before the start of the special performance in the second stage and there is no suspension. In this case, after making the reserved image 702 in a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) visible or easily visible, the completed display is performed. Aspects (completed size, completed form, completed motion form, completed transparency, completed display position) of the pending image 702 may be visible or easily visible. Also, in the special time-saving game state, before the start of the special performance and during the stop of the special symbol in the first stage or the second stage, and when there is no suspension, the game ball is inserted into the second start port 47. is won, the reserved image 702 may not be displayed in any display mode. However, in the special time-saving game state, before the start of the special performance and during the stop of the special symbol in the first stage or the second stage and there is no suspension, the game ball is inserted into the second start port 47 is won, the pending image 702 may be displayed.

Further, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 while the special symbol is stopped and the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the specific incomplete After making the reserved image 702 in the display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) invisible or invisible, the completed display mode (complete size, completed form, The reserved image 702 of the completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be visible or easily visible. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 while the special symbol is stopped and the special image corresponding to the second stage is displayed after the start of the specific notification, a predetermined non-playing game is performed. After making the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) visible or easily visible, the completed display mode (completed size, completed form) is displayed. , completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. Further, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47 while the special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification and the special image corresponding to the first stage or the second stage is displayed, The reserved image 702 may not be displayed in any display mode. However, even if the game ball wins the second starting port 47 while the special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification and the special image corresponding to the first stage or the second stage is being displayed. Also, the pending image 702 may be displayed.

In addition, regardless of the game state, when the game ball wins the first start hole 45 while the specific image is displayed on the first stage, a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form , unfinished motion mode, uncompleted transparency, unfinished display position) is made invisible or invisible, and then the completed display mode (completed size, completed mode, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display Position) pending image 702 may be visible or easily visible. On the other hand, regardless of the game state, when the game ball wins the first start opening 45 while the specific image is being displayed in the second stage, a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished Form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made visible or easily visible, and then the completed display mode (completed size, completed mode, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) is made visible or easily visible. The display position) of the pending image 702 may be visible or easily visible. Further, regardless of the game state, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47 while the specific image is displayed in the first stage or the second stage, the reserved image 702 is displayed in any display mode. You may choose not to do so. However, regardless of the game state, even if the game ball wins the second start opening 47 while the specific image is displayed in the first stage or the second stage, even if the reserved image 702 is displayed good.

In addition, regardless of the game state, if the game ball wins the first start port 45 while the special symbol is stopped in the first stage and there is no suspension, a specific incomplete display mode ( After making the reserved image 702 of the unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position invisible or invisible, the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed motion mode) is displayed. , completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, regardless of the game state, when the game ball wins the first start port 45 while the special symbol is stopped and there is no suspension in the second stage, a predetermined incomplete display mode. After making the reserved image 702 of (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) visible or easily visible, the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed motion) is displayed. Aspect, completed transparency, completed display position) pending image 702 may be visible or easily visible. In addition, regardless of the game state, if the game ball wins the second starting port 47 while the special symbols are stopped in the first stage or the second stage and there is no suspension, the suspension image 702 is displayed. may not be displayed in any display mode. However, regardless of the game state, even if the game ball wins the second start port 47 when the special symbol is stopped in the first stage or the second stage and there is no suspension, it will be suspended. An image 702 may be displayed.

In addition, regardless of the stage, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) while the specific image is displayed, a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished size, Completed form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) are made invisible or invisible, and then the completed display mode (completed size, completed mode, completed motion mode, completed transparency, The pending image 702 in the completed display position) may be visible or easily visible.
In addition, regardless of whether it is the normal game state, the normal time-saving game state, or the special time-saving game state, the first start port 45 (the second start When a game ball wins in the mouth 47), the reserved image 702 of a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is difficult to see. Alternatively, after making it invisible, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.
Further, regardless of which image is displayed on the first display device 70, the game is played at the first start port 45 (second start port 47) when the special symbols are stopped and no suspension exists. When the ball wins, the reserved image 702 of a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made invisible or invisible. Therefore, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.

Further, for example, the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode may be in a state in which the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode is visible. That is, when the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on the winning to the first start port 45 when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made invisible or invisible, and then the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed motion mode, completed The pending image 702 (transparency, complete display position) may be visible or easily visible. On the other hand, when the reserved image 702 of the expected color display mode is displayed based on the winning to the first start port 45 when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, a predetermined incomplete display mode ( After making the pending image 702 of the unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position visible or easily visible, the completed display mode (completed size, completed shape, completed motion mode) is displayed. , completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.

In addition, in the special time-saving game state, before the start of the special performance and during the suspension of the special symbols, the suspension image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on the winning of the first start port 45 when there is no suspension. If so, make the reserved image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) invisible or invisible, and then The reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be visible or easily visible. On the other hand, a pending image 702 of an expected color display mode based on the winning to the first start port 45 when the special design is stopped and the suspension does not exist before the start of the special performance in the special time saving game state. is displayed, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made visible or easily visible. Therefore, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.

Further, after the start of the specific notification, when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on the winning while the special symbol is stopped and the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed, the specific After making the pending image 702 of the unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) invisible or invisible, the completed display mode (complete size, The reserved image 702 of the completed form, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be visible or easily visible. On the other hand, when the reserved image 702 of the expected color display mode is displayed based on the winning while the special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification and the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed. , the reserved image 702 in a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made visible or easily visible, and then the completed display mode (completed The reserved image 702 (size, finished form, finished motion mode, finished transparency, finished display position) may be visible or easily visible.

Further, regardless of the game state, when the hold image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on the winning of the first start port 45 (second start port 47) when the specific image is displayed, After making the reserved image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) invisible or invisible, the completed display mode (finished size , completed form, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, when the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on the winning in the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) when the specific image is displayed, a predetermined incomplete After making the reserved image 702 in the display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) visible or easily visible, the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, The reserved image 702 of the completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be visible or easily visible.

In addition, regardless of the game state, the suspension image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on the winning of the first start port 45 (second start port 47) when the special symbols are stopped and there is no suspension. If displayed, make the reserved image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) invisible or invisible, and then , the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, when the reserved image 702 of the expected color display mode is displayed based on the winning to the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) when the special symbol is stopped and the reservation does not exist , the reserved image 702 in a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made visible or easily visible, and then the completed display mode The reserved image 702 of (completed size, completed form, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be visible or easily visible.

(Variation production example 23)
238 and 239 are diagrams showing example 23 of the variation effect.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect example (variable effect example 23) will be described with reference to FIGS. 238 and 239. FIG. Variation production example 23 is an example in which a variation production based on winning to the first start port 45 is performed as the first fluctuation production in the special time-saving gaming state. In the following description, differences from the variable performance examples and modifications described above will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the variable performance examples and modifications may be omitted.

First, in the normal game state, the final variable performance of the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving game state. Further, when a predetermined time elapses without the game ball winning in either the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 after the end of the final variable effect, as shown in FIG. 238 (1), An adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed. Also, a background corresponding to the second stage is shown as a stage image 706 . Also, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the fifth mode. Also, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the previous variable effect is output from the audio output device 9 with a volume smaller than that during execution of the variable effect.

Next, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 238(2), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the fifth mode. to the second mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 238 (3), the output from the sound output device 9 of the effect sound indicating that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 238(4), the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are hidden. Also, at this time, the variation of the decorative design 700 and the small design 704 is started. At this time, the operation at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is variably displayed at high speed. Also, at this time, “1” is displayed in the number-of-holds display 703 of the first starting port 45 . Also, at this time, the pending image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode without performing the staged display effect. Moreover, at this time, the sound effect that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 238(5), the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at high speed. Further, the variable image 701 is displayed by enlarging the suspended image 702 while moving to the variable pedestal 701P. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "0". Also, at this time, "0", which is the countdown image 732, is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the sound effect of the gaming machine 1 being controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9 .

Next, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, "1" is displayed in the reserved number display 703 of the first starting port 45 as shown in FIG. 238(6). Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in the incomplete display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 for notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 239(7), the staged display rendering is completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the complete display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Also, the winning sound for notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is continuously output until the staged display effect is completed, and when the staged display effect is completed, it is no longer output.

Next, after displaying the second transition image 734 (see FIG. 197(16)), the background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706 as shown in FIG. 239(8). Also, "125", which is the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704, is fixed and stopped.
After that, each time the variable performance is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, the remaining number of times of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving gaming state is reduced, and the value shown in the special time-saving remaining number image 738 is subtracted by one. .

Then, when the final variable effect in the special time-saving gaming state is completed, the gaming machine 1 is again controlled to the normal gaming state, through the display of the first transition image 728 (see FIG. 190 (22)), as the stage image 706 A background corresponding to the first stage is displayed. Also, at this time, a pending image 702 is displayed. This pending image 702 is the pending image 702 (see FIG. 239(7)) displayed when the background corresponding to the second stage was displayed as the stage image 706 .

In addition, the variable performance described in each variable performance example and modification is not limited to the variable performance based on the number of reservations shown.
The variable performance described in each variable performance example and modification may be a variable performance based on the number of reservations being 0, or may be a variable performance based on the number of reservations being 1. , It may be a variable production based on the number of reservations being 2, a variable production based on the number of reservations being 3, or a variable production based on the number of reservations being 4. may

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the variable performance based on the winning when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol is lost was described, but it is not limited to this. .
As a variation production based on winning to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time saving game state, a variation example of the variation production example 11 (see FIGS. 207 to 209 ), a variation performance may be executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot.

In addition, in the example 20 of variable performance, the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the SPSP ready-to-win performance is executed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.
As the variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 45 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal game state like the variable effect example 20, the "reach" shown in the variable effect example 1 and the variable effect example 2 is performed. A variable effect in which the effect is not executed" may be executed, or a "variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit" shown in Example 5 of the variable effect may be executed. Further, as the variable effect based on the winning to the first starting port 45 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal game state, any of the variable effects described in the first embodiment to the sixth embodiment are executed. may

In addition, in the variable effect example 20, when the game ball wins the first start opening 45 while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal game state, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode is displayed to the player. It has been explained that it becomes difficult or impossible to visually recognize the image 702 in the completed display mode, and the player can easily recognize the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode.
Here, if the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode becomes difficult or invisible to the player, the game ball is inserted into the first start port 45 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal game state. is not limited to winning a prize. For example, when the game ball wins the first start opening 45 while the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed in the normal gaming state (see FIGS. 169(1) and 169(2)). However, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be difficult or invisible to the player, and the pending image 702 in the completed display mode may be easily visible to the player. In this case, as a variable effect based on the winning to the first start port 45 when the adjustment image 716 menu image 717 is displayed in the normal game state, the "reach effect" shown in the variable effect example 1 and the variable effect example 2 may be executed, or the "variable production in which the ready-to-reach production is executed" shown in the variable production example 3 and the variable production example 4 may be executed, or the variable production example 5 shown Alternatively, a "fluctuation effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot" may be executed. In addition, any of the variable effects described in the first to sixth embodiments can be used as the variable effects based on the winning of the first starting port 45 when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed in the normal game state. may be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball has won the second starting port 47, it has been described that the winning sound for notifying the winning is output, but the present invention is not limited to this.
When the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the winning sound is output, while when the game ball wins the second starting port 47, the winning sound may not be output.

Further, in the present embodiment, a state in which a specific image is difficult to see or cannot be seen has been described. Specific images include a decorative pattern 700, a variable image 701, a pending image 702, a pending number display 703, a small pattern 704, an execution count image 705, a stage image 706, a remaining reach count image 708, and the like. Here, the state in which a specific image is difficult to see or cannot be seen means that although the specific image is displayed, another image displayed on a layer above the specific image makes the specific image visible. Certain images may be difficult or invisible to view due to obstruction. Other images include, for example, the customer waiting image 710, the first emphasized image 711, the SP reach image 712, the SPSP reach image 713, the first eye-catching image 715, the second emphasized image 718, the first transition image 728, the second Examples include an eye-catching image 731, a second transition image 734, an image during recovery 742, and the like. Moreover, the state in which the specific image is invisible may be a state in which the specific image is not visible because the specific image is not displayed in the first place.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the pending image 702 in an unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) may be difficult or invisible in some cases. explained. Here, as a case where the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode becomes difficult or invisible, the staged display effect is not executed, and the pending image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode from the start of display of the pending image 702. Therefore, the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode may become difficult or invisible. Further, when the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode becomes difficult or invisible to view, the staged display effect is executed and the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode is displayed, while the pending image 702 is displayed in front of the pending image 702. Another example is when the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode becomes difficult or invisible because other images displayed on the layer prevent viewing of the pending image 702 . Further, when the reserved image 702 in the unfinished display mode is difficult or invisible because another image is displayed on a layer in front of the reserved image 702, even if the staged display effect is executed Alternatively, the staged display effects need not be executed. Thus, making the pending image 702 in an unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) invisible or invisible does not require unfinished It includes both the pending image 702 in the display mode not being displayed and the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode being displayed but not visible or visible.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode becomes invisible or invisible, the unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished action) at any stage of the staged display effect It has been described that the pending image 702 of (aspect, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) also becomes invisible or invisible, but is not so limited.
For example, when the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode makes it difficult or invisible to view, the unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished movement mode, unfinished transparent After making the pending image 702 of the unfinished display position) invisible or invisible, the unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished movement mode, unfinished transparent The pending image 702 (incomplete display position) may be visible or easily visible. That is, when the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode is made invisible or invisible, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode in at least one stage of the staged display effect may be made invisible or invisible.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state and when the game ball wins in the first start port 45 when the first stage is displayed, a specific incomplete display mode ( It has been explained that the pending image 702 of unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) may be made invisible or invisible to the player. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the specific unfinished display mode that is difficult or invisible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any stage of the staged effect.
Further, in the present embodiment, when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state and when the game ball wins in the first start port 45 when the second stage is displayed, a predetermined incomplete display mode It has been described that the pending image 702 may be visible or easily visible to the player. In this case, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage of the staged rendering.

In addition, when the game ball wins the first start port 45 before the start of the special performance in the special time-saving game state and when the special symbols are stopped in the first stage and there is no suspension. , the reserved image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made invisible or invisible, and then the completed display mode It has been described that the pending image 702 of (completed size, completed form, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the specific unfinished display mode that is difficult or invisible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any stage of the staged effect.
In addition, when the game ball wins the first start port 45 when the special symbol is stopped in the second stage before the start of the special performance in the special time-saving game state and there is no suspension. , the reserved image 702 in a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made visible or easily visible, and then the completed display mode It has been described that the pending image 702 of (completed size, completed form, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage of the staged rendering.

Further, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 while the special symbol is stopped and the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the specific incomplete After making the reserved image 702 in the display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) invisible or invisible, the completed display mode (complete size, completed form, It has been described that the pending image 702 of the completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the specific unfinished display mode that is difficult or invisible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any stage of the staged effect.
Further, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 while the special symbol is stopped and the special image corresponding to the second stage is being displayed after the start of the specific notification, a predetermined incompletion occurs. After making the reserved image 702 in the display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) visible or easily visible, the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, It has been described that the pending image 702 of the completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage of the staged rendering.

In addition, regardless of the game state, when the game ball wins the first start hole 45 while the specific image is displayed on the first stage, a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form , unfinished motion mode, uncompleted transparency, unfinished display position) is made invisible or invisible, and then the completed display mode (completed size, completed mode, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the specific unfinished display mode that is difficult or invisible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any stage of the staged effect.
In addition, regardless of the game state, when the game ball wins the first start opening 45 while the specific image is displayed in the second stage, a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form , incomplete motion mode, incomplete transparency, incomplete display position) is made visible or easily visible, and then the completed display mode (completed size, completed mode, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage of the staged rendering.

In addition, regardless of the game state, if the game ball wins the first start port 45 while the special symbol is stopped in the first stage and there is no suspension, a specific incomplete display mode ( After making the reserved image 702 of the unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position invisible or invisible, the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed motion mode) is displayed. , completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the specific unfinished display mode that is difficult or invisible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any stage of the staged effect.
In addition, regardless of the game state, if the game ball wins the first start opening 45 while the special symbol is stopped in the second stage and there is no suspension, a predetermined incomplete display mode ( After making the pending image 702 of the unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position visible or easily visible, the completed display mode (completed size, completed shape, completed motion mode) is displayed. , completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage of the staged rendering.

Further, when the holding image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on the winning to the first start port 45 when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, a specific incomplete display mode (incomplete size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made invisible or invisible, and then the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed motion mode, completed It has been described that the pending image 702 (transparency, complete display position) may be visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the specific unfinished display mode that is difficult or invisible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any stage of the staged effect.
Further, when the reserved image 702 of the expected color display mode is displayed based on the winning to the first start port 45 when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, a predetermined incomplete display mode (unfinished Completed size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) are made visible or easily visible, and then the completed display mode (completed size, completed shape, completed motion mode, It has been described that the pending image 702 of (completed transparency, completed display position) may be visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage of the staged rendering.

In addition, in the special time-saving game state, before the start of the special performance and during the suspension of the special symbols, the suspension image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on the winning of the first start port 45 when there is no suspension. If so, make the reserved image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) invisible or invisible, and then It has been described that the pending image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the specific unfinished display mode that is difficult or invisible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any stage of the staged effect.
Also, in the special time-saving game state, the pending image 702 of the expected color display mode is displayed based on the winning of the first start port 45 when the special effect is not started and the special symbol is stopped and there is no suspension. When displayed, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made visible or easily visible, and then , that the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage of the staged rendering.

Further, after the start of the specific notification, when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on the winning while the special symbol is stopped and the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed, the specific After making the pending image 702 of the unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) invisible or invisible, the completed display mode (complete size, It has been described that the reserved image 702 in completed form, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the specific unfinished display mode that is difficult or invisible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any stage of the staged effect.
Further, when the reserved image 702 of the expected color display mode is displayed based on the winning while the special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification and the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed, After making the reserved image 702 in a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) visible or easily visible, the completed display mode (completed size , completed form, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage of the staged rendering.

Further, regardless of the game state, when the hold image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on the winning of the first start port 45 (second start port 47) when the specific image is displayed, After making the reserved image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) invisible or invisible, the completed display mode (finished size , completed form, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the specific unfinished display mode that is difficult or invisible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any stage of the staged effect.
Further, when the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on the winning in the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) when the specific image is displayed, a predetermined incomplete display After making the pending image 702 in the form (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion form, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) visible or easily visible, the completed display form (completed size, completed form, completed It has been described that the pending image 702 of the motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage of the staged rendering.

In addition, regardless of the game state, the suspension image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on the winning of the first start port 45 (second start port 47) when the special symbols are stopped and there is no suspension. If displayed, make the reserved image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) invisible or invisible, and then , that the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be visible or easily visible. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the specific unfinished display mode that is difficult or invisible to the player may be the reserved image 702 in any stage of the staged effect.
In addition, when the reserved image 702 of the expected color display mode is displayed based on the winning to the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) when the special symbol is stopped and the reservation does not exist makes the reserved image 702 in a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) visible or easily visible, and then displays the completed display mode ( It has been described that the pending image 702 (completed size, completed form, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage of the staged rendering.

Also, when making the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) invisible or invisible, multiple Pending images 702 in unfinished presentations in one of the stages may be made invisible or invisible, while pending images 702 in unfinished presentations in other stages may be made visible or easy to see. For example, when making the pending image 702 in an unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) invisible or invisible, the staged display While making the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode in the first stage of the production difficult or invisible, the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode in the second stage and the third stage are both made visible or easy to see. may

In addition, in the present embodiment, it has been described that a plurality of stages of the pending image 702, which is an incomplete display mode, are provided in the staged display effect, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The display mode of the pending image 702 in the staged display rendering is at least the stage of the pending image 702 that is an unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished movement mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position). , and the stage of the reserved image 702, which is the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed movement mode, completed transparency, completed display position).

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display effects are completed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The winning sound may not be output before the staged display effects are completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a variation effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving game state is a big hit, when the double decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped or when the double decorative pattern 700 is fixed and stopped 213(8) and 213(9)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
In the case where the variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery in the special time-saving game state is a big win, when the double decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped or when the double decorative pattern 700 is fixed and stopped, a fluctuation image 701 is displayed. The pending image 702 may be displayed without displaying . In addition, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery in the special time-saving game state is a big win, when the double decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped or when the double decorative pattern 700 is fixed and stopped, it is held. The variation image 701 may be displayed without the image 702 being displayed. In addition, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery in the special time-saving game state is a big hit, when the double decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped or when the double decorative pattern 700 is fixedly stopped, the fluctuation Neither image 701 nor pending image 702 may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the moving image 701 is displayed by moving the first reserved image 702 to the moving base 701P, but the moving image 701 may not be used. More specifically, when the variable effect ends while the first pending image 702 is being displayed, the first pending image 702 may be hidden when the next variable effect is started. In this case, the first reserved image 702 may be hidden while moving, or may be hidden at the position displayed on the first reserved pedestal 702P without moving. In addition, when a prize is won in a state where there is no reservation, the reservation image 702 may be hidden after the reservation image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed on the first reservation pedestal 702P.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the stage corresponding to the normal gaming state is switched to the stage corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state in a state where suspension exists, the suspension image 702 is displayed without the fluctuation image 701 being displayed (Fig. 198 (20)). In other words, although it has been described that the pending image 702 moves to the movable pedestal 701P after the stage is switched, the present invention is not limited to this.
The variation image 701 may be displayed when the stage corresponding to the normal gaming state is switched to the stage corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state in the state where the suspension exists. In other words, the movement of the pending image 702 to the movable pedestal 701P may be completed before the stage switching is completed. In addition, when the stage is switched from the stage corresponding to the normal game state to the stage corresponding to the special time-saving game state in the state in which there is a hold, after the start of movement of the holding image 702 to the variable pedestal 701P and before the completion of the movement may In addition, when the fluctuation image 701 is not used, when the stage is switched from the stage corresponding to the normal gaming state to the stage corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state in the state where the suspension exists, the first suspension image 702 is already non- It may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends. Although it has been described that the held image 702 moves from , the present invention is not limited to this.
When the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the reserved image 702 moves during execution of the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710. good too. In this case, the movement of the reserved image 702 may be started after the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started, and the movement of the reserved image 702 may be completed after the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is finished. Further, the movement of the reserved image 702 may be started before the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started. Furthermore, after that, the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 may be executed, and the movement of the reserved image 702 may be completed after the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is completed.

In addition, the time-series relationship between the timing at which the pending image 702 moves, the timing at which the pending image 702 changes to the display mode of the variable image 701, and the timing at which the decorative pattern 700 starts to change is not limited to the example described above. .
After the movement of all the displayed pending images 702 is started, the first pending image 702 is A change from the display aspect to the display aspect of the moving image 701 may be initiated and completed. Further, after all the displayed reserved images 702 start to move, and after the display mode of the first reserved image 702 starts to change to the display mode of the variable image 701, the decorative pattern 700 changes. may be started. Then, after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern 700, the movement of all the displayed reserved images 702 and the change from the display mode of the first reserved image 702 to the display mode of the variable image 701 may be completed. .

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loser, and when the variation performance of executing the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is performed, the next variation performance is the variation in which the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed. It may be an effect (see FIGS. 180(28) to 180(30) and FIG. 181(31)). Then, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) while this second eye-catching image 731 is being displayed, the reserved image 702 is visually recognized by the second eye-catching image 731. may make the pending image 702 in the unfinished presentation difficult or invisible. Furthermore, after the second eye-catching image 731 is hidden, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode may become easier to see.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if a prize is won while the SPSP ready-to-win effect is being executed, the prize winning sound is not output (see FIG. 167 (11)). Here, in the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed, when the stage image 706 is displayed again after this SPSP reach effect (see FIG. 168 (16)), the first start port 45 (second start port 47 ), a staged display effect may be executed and a winning sound may be output.

In addition, when the game ball wins in the first start port 45 (second start port 47) when the stored number of reservations is the upper limit number (four), it is a win at any time as described above. However, the winning sound is not output, the staged display effect is not executed, and the pending image 702 is not newly displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the customer waiting image 710 is displayed even in the special time-saving gaming state. Here, in the special time-saving game state, before the start of the first variable production, the customer waiting image 710 is displayed when the special symbol is stopped and no winning occurs for a predetermined time in a state where there is no hold. Then, after the start of the variable effect for the first time, the customer waiting image 710 may not be displayed even if no winning occurs for a predetermined time in a state where there is no suspension. That is, in the special time-saving gaming state, whether or not the customer waiting image 710 is displayed may be switched between before the start of the first fluctuation production and after the start of the first fluctuation production. . However, even after the start of the first variable production in the special time-saving game state, the game ball wins in the second start port 47 (first start port 45) when the special symbol is stopped and there is no hold. In this case, the reserved image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be made invisible or invisible, and the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be easily viewed. In addition, in the special time-saving gaming state, even after the start of the first variable effect, if the special symbol is stopped and no prize is won for a predetermined time in a state where there is no suspension, the adjustment image 716 and the menu An image 717 may be displayed.

In this embodiment, when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, the mode of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, the button lamp 17c, and the mode of sound output are switched. Illustrated, but not limited to.
When the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, the mode of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may be switched, but the mode of sound output may not be switched. Then, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the mode of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, the button lamp 17c, and the mode of sound output may be switched.
Further, when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, the mode of sound output is switched, but the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c do not have to be switched. . Then, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may be switched. Also, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the mode of sound output may or may not be switched.
Further, when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, none of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, the button lamp 17c and the sound output may be switched. Then, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the mode of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, the button lamp 17c, and the mode of sound output may be switched.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off in a state of suspension and then restored, the variation performance that has been executed when the power is cut off is started. Although it has been described that the next variable effect is started after the forewarning sound is output, the present invention is not limited to this.
When the power of the game machine 1 is cut off in the state of suspension and then restored, the sound is not output until the next variable performance executed when the power is cut off is started. You may do so. Then, when a variable performance subsequent to the variable performance being executed when the power is cut off is started, output of BGM corresponding to the variable performance may be started.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the operation at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is a low-speed variation of the decorative pattern 700 downward, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The operation at the start of fluctuation may be, for example, a low-speed fluctuation to the upper side of the decorative pattern 700 . In this case, when the movement at the start of variation ends, the decorative pattern 700 may be varied downward at high speed.
Also, the action at the start of fluctuation may be, for example, a specific action by the character shown in the decorative pattern 700 . Specific actions include, for example, actions in which the character raises its hand, actions in which the character's expression changes, actions in which the character's hair or clothes worn by the character move, and the like. Further, when a specific action is performed, the decorative pattern 700 may move upward or downward at a low speed, or may remain at the fixed stop position.

Further, in the present embodiment, the top lamp 10b, the Before switching the mode of the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c, the mode of sound output is switched, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, if a prize is won while the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are being displayed, sound output will be changed when switching modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c. You may switch the aspect. Also, if a prize is won while the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, after switching the mode of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c, the sound output You may switch the aspect. That is, if a prize is won while the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are being displayed, after switching the mode of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c, the sound is output. You may switch the aspect of. Then, after the mode of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, the button lamp 17c, and the mode of sound output are all switched, the fluctuation start operation and the display of the pending image 702 are started. may

In addition, in this embodiment, when there is no hold when the special symbol stops fluctuating, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all changed from the second mode to the first mode. (see FIG. 195(3)), but the present invention is not limited to this. The top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may continue to be in the second mode even if there is no hold when the special symbols stop fluctuating.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at high speed during execution of the variable effect, but when the second transition image 734 is displayed, the decorative pattern 700 fluctuating at high speed is difficult or invisible. become a state. That is, the decorative pattern 700, which is the display size during high-speed fluctuation, becomes difficult or invisible. In other words, the decorative pattern 700 is difficult or invisible in the degree of transparency during high-speed fluctuations. Furthermore, in other words, the decorative pattern 700 in the form at the time of high speed fluctuation is difficult or invisible. Furthermore, in other words, the decorative pattern 700 at the position at the time of high-speed fluctuation is difficult or invisible.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the display mode of the pending image 702 approaches the completed display mode as the staged display effect progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this.
In the staged display effect, stages may be provided in which the pending image 702 is displayed in a display mode (display size, transparency, display position, form, etc.) farther from the completed display mode. For example, a step of displaying the pending image 702, which has a smaller display size than the completed display mode, in a smaller display size may be provided. There may also be a step of displaying the pending image 702 with a higher degree of transparency than the completed display mode with a higher degree of transparency. Further, a step of displaying the pending image 702, which is displayed at a position distant from the display position in the completed display mode, at a position farther from the display position in the completed display mode may be provided.

Further, the number of stages provided in the staged display effect may differ according to the display mode of the pending image 702, such as the pending image 702 displayed for each stage and the pending image 702 for each display color. In this case, for the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode, the reserved image 702 in blue, the reserved image 702 in red, and the reserved image 702 in rainbow color, the later the order, the more steps may be provided in the staged display effect. That is, the higher the degree of expectation of the pending image 702, the more stages may be provided in the staged display effect.

Further, when the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed, the pending image 702 may be displayed in the same color as the completed display mode in the first stage of the staged display rendering, or the pending image 702 may be displayed in the completed display mode. It may be displayed in a color different from the aspect. Further, for example, when the blue pending image 702 is displayed, the pending image 702 is displayed in a color different from blue in the first stage of the staged display effect, whereas the specific color with a higher expectation than blue is displayed. When the pending image 702 of a color (red, rainbow, etc.) is displayed, the pending image 702 may be displayed in a specific color in the first stage of the staged display effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that one pending image 702 periodically displays two different actions in action rendering (see FIG. 161 (5)). Here, the cycles of the two different motion displays may be the same cycle, or may be different cycles. Also, the cycle of any of the two different action displays may be the same as the cycle of the action display in the action effect by the holding image 702 in the normal display mode. In addition, one cycle of the two different motion displays is the same as the cycle of the motion display in the action rendering by the hold image 702 in the normal display mode, and the other cycle is the motion by the hold image 702 in the normal display mode. It may be different from the cycle of action display in the production. Furthermore, the cycle of any of the two different motion displays may be different from the cycle of the motion display in the motion effect by the pending image 702 in the normal display mode.
Alternatively, the holding image 702 in the normal display mode may periodically display two different actions.

Also, the cycle of the action display in the action presentation may differ according to the degree of expectation. For example, the blue reserved image 702 is displayed in a first cycle in a first operation mode and in a second cycle in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. Then, the reserved image of the specific color (red, rainbow color, etc.), which is more expected than blue, is displayed in the third cycle by the third operation mode, and is displayed in the fourth operation mode by the fourth operation mode different from the third operation mode. Display the operation in cycles. In this case, the third period may be shorter or longer than the first period. Also, the fourth period may be shorter or longer than the second period. Also, the first period and the third period may be the same period, and the second period and the fourth period may be the same period. Furthermore, the third period and the fourth period may be the same period or may be different periods. The first to fourth operation modes are any of the above-described actions (clockwise rotation, counterclockwise rotation, vertical movement, horizontal movement, rocking, etc.). , or may be an operation different from the operation described above.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which sound may not be output from the audio output device 9 when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, or when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed. . Here, when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, or when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, even if the sound is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume that is not audible to the player. good. That is, when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, or when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the audio output device 9 should not audibly output sound.

Further, in the present embodiment, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all blink in the winning lighting effect. Here, in the prize-winning lighting effect, the flashing cycle of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may become longer with the passage of time. To give an example, in the prize-winning lighting effect, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c blink in a first cycle, and then blink in a second cycle longer than the first cycle. may In this case, the color of light emitted during blinking in the first period and the color of light emitted in blinking in the second period may be the same color or different colors. In addition, both the first cycle and the second cycle are shorter than the cycle of blinking (blinking in the ninth aspect) that suggests or reports the occurrence of an error and the cycle of blinking in the through effect (blinking in the eleventh aspect). good too.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c, the first mode, the second mode, the fourth mode to the sixth mode, and the eighth mode to the eleventh mode. Although the luminescence has been described as monochromatic luminescence, it is not so limited. In these forms of light emission, the light emission color may change as the presentation progresses.
Further, in the first mode, second mode, fourth mode to sixth mode, and eighth mode to eleventh mode, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all have the same color. Although it has been described that the light is emitted by , the present invention is not limited to this. In the first mode, the second mode, the fourth mode to the sixth mode, and the eighth mode to the eleventh mode, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all emit light in different colors. You may

Further, in the present embodiment, in the light emission of the seventh mode, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are explained to emit light in different colors. is not limited to In the light emission of the seventh aspect, at least two or more light emitters among the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c (for example, the top lamp 10b and the board lamp 74b) emit light of the same color. However, other emitters may emit light in different colors. Moreover, in the light emission of the seventh mode, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may all emit light of the same color.

Further, in the present embodiment, while the jackpot game is being executed, the pending number display 703 is hidden (see FIG. 172 (20)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
The pending number display 703 may be displayed even during execution of the jackpot game. In this case, when the game ball wins in the first start port 45 (second start port 47) during execution of the jackpot game, the number of pending display 703 of the first start port 45 (second start port 47) It may be displayed in increments. The pending image 702 corresponding to the winning is not displayed in the incomplete display mode, but is displayed in the completed display mode when the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state (time-saving game state) is displayed. may

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pending image 702 is displayed, the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode can be visually recognized depending on the stage, the displayed image, the presence or absence of pending, the state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. Although it has been described that the pending image 702 in the completed display mode can be easily viewed without becoming undesired, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, in the normal time-saving game state, regardless of the stage, the displayed image, the presence or absence of suspension, the state of the gaming machine 1, etc., when the game ball wins the second start port 47, the incomplete display mode After making the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode easy to see, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode may be made easy to see.

Further, in this embodiment, it has been described that a specific sound effect is output when the left and right decorative symbols 700 "7" are aligned (see FIG. 184 (12)).
Here, when numbers different from "7" are aligned as the left and right decorative patterns 700, a sound effect may be output. Furthermore, this sound effect may be different from the specific sound effect output when the left and right decorative symbols 700 "7" are aligned.
Moreover, when it is a normal game state, when it is a normal time saving game state, and when it is a special time saving game state, the effect sound when reach is materialized may each be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled in the normal time-saving gaming state and when it is controlled in the special time-saving gaming state, when the first transition image 728 is displayed, the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal game state, but the present invention is not limited to this.
When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving game state, the normal time-saving game state may continue when the first transition image 728 is displayed (see FIG. 177 (12)). Then, when the special symbol fluctuates and stops in a state where there is no hold for the second starting port 47, the game may be controlled to the normal game state. On the other hand, when the game machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving game state, when the first transition image 728 is displayed (before the second start port 47 is no longer held) control to the normal game state may be However, even if the gaming machine 1 is controlled in the special time-saving gaming state, in the same way as when it is controlled in the normal time-saving gaming state, when the first transition image 728 is displayed (the second When there is a hold for the starting port 47), the special time-saving gaming state may continue.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the customer waiting image 710 is hidden after the degree of transparency increases step by step, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The customer waiting image 710 may be switched from the displayed state to the non-displayed state without changing the degree of transparency in stages. In this case, the pending image 702 may not be displayed when the customer waiting image 710 is hidden, and the pending image 702 may be started to be displayed after the customer waiting image 710 is hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the action effect starts when the staged display effect is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The motion effect may be started even before the completion of the staged display effect. In this case, the action rendering may be started during the staged display rendering, that is, while the pending image 702 is being displayed in the incomplete display mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 in association with winning. Here, in the first stage, the second stage, and the fifth stage, the winning sounds for notifying that the game ball has entered the first starting port 45 may be different sounds or the same sounds. may be
Also, in the third stage and the fourth stage, the prize-winning sound for notifying that the game ball has entered the second starting port 47 may be different or the same.
Also, the winning sound for notifying that the game ball has entered the second starting port 47 may be different or the same between the sixth stage and the seventh stage.
In addition, in the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state, the winning sounds for notifying that the game ball has won the second start port 47 may be different sounds, or may be the same sounds. .
Also, in the first stage, the sixth stage, and the seventh stage, the winning sounds for notifying that the game ball has entered the second starting port 47 may be different sounds or the same sounds. good too.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, it has been described that the winning sound is output and the display of the pending image 702 is started. is not limited to
For example, when a game ball wins the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the display of the pending image 702 may start after the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound output based on the winning to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, the gaming machine 1 is a special time-saving Although it has been explained that it is the sound effect of being controlled to the game state, it is not limited to this. The sound output based on the winning to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state may be a winning sound for notifying the winning. In addition, regardless of the game state, the sound output based on the winning of the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 when the specific image is displayed is the BGM corresponding to the variable effect, The sound output without reducing the volume may be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, it has been described that the small symbols 704 are difficult or invisible to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this.
By displaying the small pattern 704 in a layer in front of the customer waiting image 710, even when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the small pattern 704 can be easily recognized by the player. good.

Further, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is being displayed, the display of the pending image 702 is started after the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started (see FIG. 196 ( 9), FIG. 221 (5), and FIG. 228 (5)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
In the case of winning while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the display of the pending image 702 may be started before the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started. In addition, if a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is being displayed, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed without the staged display effect being executed before the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started. is displayed, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode may be visible or easily visible without the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode becoming visible. Also, in the case of winning while the customer waiting image 710 is being displayed, the staged display effect is started and completed before the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started. The pending image 702 in the completed presentation may be visible or easily visible without the pending image 702 becoming visible.

Further, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when the player operates the effect button 17 while the menu image 717 is being displayed, the menu screen (not shown) is displayed on the first image display device 70 . In addition, the menu screen is an image displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70 . Further, in the present embodiment, the example of the effect when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed has been described. Here, each of the above production examples in the case where the game ball has won the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 while the customer waiting image 710 is being displayed is the same as when the menu screen is being displayed. It may be an effect that is executed when a game ball wins the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 . That is, even if a prize is won while the menu screen is displayed in place of the customer waiting image 710, the same effect as in the case of winning while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed may be executed. In this case, the menu screen is also captured as the specific image.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first variation effect in the special time-saving gaming state is executed, after the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at high speed, special time-saving start image 733, second transition image 734, mode start image 736 etc. are displayed, but are not limited to these.
When the first variation effect in the special time-saving gaming state is executed, before the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at high speed, that is, during the execution of the operation at the start of the variation, the special time-saving start image 733, the second transition image 734, the mode start An image 736 or the like may be displayed. Moreover, the special time saving start image 733, the 2nd transition image 734, the mode start image 736 grade|etc., may be displayed before the start of operation|movement at the time of a fluctuation start. Moreover, before the pending|holding image 702 is displayed, the special time saving start image 733, the 2nd transition image 734, the mode start image 736 grade|etc., may be displayed. That is, in the first fluctuation effect in the special time-saving gaming state, the display start timing of the pending image 702 and the display start timing of the special time-saving start image 733, the second transition image 734, the mode start image 736, etc., which is first may be

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first variation effect in the special time-saving gaming state is executed, after the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at high speed, the decorative pattern 700 and stage consisting of the display mode according to the special time-saving gaming state Although the image 706 and the like are displayed, the present invention is not limited to this.
A decorative pattern 700 having a display mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state before the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at high speed, that is, during the execution of the operation at the time of starting the fluctuation when the first variation performance in the special time-saving game state is executed. , a stage image 706, or the like may be displayed. In addition, before the start of the operation at the start of fluctuation, the decorative pattern 700, the stage image 706, and the like having a display mode according to the special time-saving gaming state may be displayed. Moreover, before the pending image 702 is displayed, the decorative pattern 700, the stage image 706, and the like having a display mode corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state may be displayed. That is, the display start timing of the pending image 702 and the display start timing of the decorative pattern 700 and the stage image 706 having a display mode according to the special time-saving game state in the first fluctuation effect in the special time-saving game state may be first.

Further, the combination of the stage and the display mode of the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is not limited to the above example.
Any combination of the stage described above and the display mode of the pending image 702 in the normal display mode may be used. For example, the display mode of the hold image 702 in the normal display mode in the first stage may be a star-shaped display mode (see FIG. 165).

Moreover, in the seventh embodiment, various variable effects in the special time-saving gaming state have been described. Here, various variable effects described in the seventh embodiment may be variable effects in the third time-saving gaming state.

In the above, a plurality of embodiments have been described. You can add it.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Game machine, 9... Sound output device, 10b... Top lamp, 17c... Button lamp, 70... First image display device, 74b... Board lamp, 74c... Movable member lamp, 700... Decorative pattern, 701... Fluctuating image, 702... Reserved image, 706... Stage image, 710... Customer waiting image, 716... Adjustment image, 717... Menu image, 733... Special time saving start image

Claims (1)

a main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
and a production control means for controlling production,
The main control means is
Determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on determination information based on establishment of the starting condition;
mode control means capable of controlling a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode;
storage means for storing determination information based on the determination as pending storage;
and a variation means for varying and then stopping the special symbol according to the result of the determination,
The production control means is
Information display suggesting the contents of the determination information can be displayed on the display means,
Along with the fluctuation and stop of the special design, it is possible to execute a variation production that stops after changing the production design,
A special effect can be executed while the variable effect is being executed,
When the first variation effect in the second mode is started while the information display is displayed, in the first variation effect, the information display is made invisible or invisible and then made easy to see,
The game machine is characterized in that when the special performance is executed while the information display is being displayed, the information display is made visible or invisible, and then made visible.

Images